diff options
| -rw-r--r-- | .gitattributes | 3 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | 499-h.zip | bin | 0 -> 99594 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 499-h/499-h.htm | 9250 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | 499.txt | 6147 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | 499.zip | bin | 0 -> 97327 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | LICENSE.txt | 11 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | README.md | 2 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/20tom10.txt | 7520 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/20tom10.zip | bin | 0 -> 96318 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/20tom10h.htm | 6309 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/20tom10h.zip | bin | 0 -> 98592 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/20tom10l.lit | bin | 0 -> 96918 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/20tom10l.zip | bin | 0 -> 88184 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/20tom10p.prc | bin | 0 -> 147100 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/20tom10p.zip | bin | 0 -> 131240 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/20tom11.txt | 7626 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/20tom11.zip | bin | 0 -> 98136 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/20tom11h.htm | 7676 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/20tom11h.zip | bin | 0 -> 100306 bytes |
19 files changed, 44544 insertions, 0 deletions
diff --git a/.gitattributes b/.gitattributes new file mode 100644 index 0000000..6833f05 --- /dev/null +++ b/.gitattributes @@ -0,0 +1,3 @@ +* text=auto +*.txt text +*.md text diff --git a/499-h.zip b/499-h.zip Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..0ddb5e0 --- /dev/null +++ b/499-h.zip diff --git a/499-h/499-h.htm b/499-h/499-h.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..27226b5 --- /dev/null +++ b/499-h/499-h.htm @@ -0,0 +1,9250 @@ +<!DOCTYPE HTML PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 4.01 Transitional//EN"> +<HTML> +<HEAD> + +<META HTTP-EQUIV="Content-Type" CONTENT="text/html; charset=iso-8859-1"> + +<TITLE> +The Project Gutenberg E-text of Tom Swift in the Land of Wonders, +by Victor Appleton. +</TITLE> + +<STYLE TYPE="text/css"> +BODY { color: Black; + background: White; + margin-right: 10%; + margin-left: 10%; + font-family: "Times New Roman", serif; + text-align: justify } + +P {text-indent: 4% } + +P.noindent {text-indent: 0% } + +P.poem {text-indent: 0%; + margin-left: 10%; + font-size: small } + +P.finis { text-align: center ; + text-indent: 0% ; + margin-left: 0% ; + margin-right: 0% } + + +</STYLE> + +</HEAD> + +<BODY> + + +<pre> + +Project Gutenberg's Tom Swift in the Land of Wonders, by Victor Appleton + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + + +Title: Tom Swift in the Land of Wonders + or, The Underground Search for the Idol of Gold + +Author: Victor Appleton + +Posting Date: July 13, 2008 [EBook #499] +Release Date: March 11, 2002 +[Last updated: July 3, 2014] + +Language: English + +Character set encoding: ISO-8859-1 + +*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK TOM SWIFT IN THE LAND OF WONDERS *** + + + + +Produced by Charles Keller. + + + + + +</pre> + + +<BR><BR> + +<H1 ALIGN="center"> +TOM SWIFT IN THE LAND OF WONDERS +</H1> + +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +or +</H3> + +<H2 ALIGN="center"> +The Underground Search for the Idol of Gold +</H2> + +<BR> + +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +BY +</H3> + +<H2 ALIGN="center"> +VICTOR APPLETON +</H2> + +<BR><BR> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +AUTHOR OF<BR> +"TOM SWIFT AND HIS MOTORCYCLE,"<BR> +"TOM SWIFT AND HIS BIG TUNNEL,"<BR> +"THE MOVING PICTURE BOYS SERIES,"<BR> +"THE MOTION PICTURE CHUMS SERIES," ETC. +</P> + +<BR><BR><BR> + +<H3> +THE TOM SWIFT SERIES +</H3> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +1 TOM SWIFT AND HIS MOTOR CYCLE<BR> +2 TOM SWIFT AND HIS MOTOR BOAT<BR> +3 TOM SWIFT AND HIS AIRSHIP<BR> +4 TOM SWIFT AND HIS SUBMARINE BOAT<BR> +5 TOM SWIFT AND HIS ELECTRIC RUNABOUT<BR> +6 TOM SWIFT AND HIS WIRELESS MESSAGE<BR> +7 TOM SWIFT AMONG THE DIAMOND MAKERS<BR> +8 TOM SWIFT IN THE CAVES OF ICE<BR> +9 TOM SWIFT AND HIS SKY RACER<BR> +10 TOM SWIFT AND HIS ELECTRIC RIFLE<BR> +11 TOM SWIFT IN THE CITY OF GOLD<BR> +12 TOM SWIFT AND HIS AIR GLIDER<BR> +13 TOM SWIFT IN CAPTIVITY<BR> +14 TOM SWIFT AND HIS WIZARD CAMERA<BR> +15 TOM SWIFT AND HIS GREAT SEARCHLIGHT<BR> +16 TOM SWIFT AND HIS GIANT CANNON<BR> +17 TOM SWIFT AND HIS PHOTO TELEPHONE<BR> +18 TOM SWIFT AND HIS AERIAL WARSHIP<BR> +19 TOM SWIFT AND HIS BIG TUNNEL<BR> +20 TOM SWIFT IN THE LAND OF WONDERS<BR> +21 TOM SWIFT AND HIS WAR TANK<BR> +22 TOM SWIFT AND HIS AIR SCOUT<BR> +23 TOM SWIFT AND HIS UNDERSEA SEARCH<BR> +24 TOM SWIFT AMONG THE FIRE FIGHTERS<BR> +25 TOM SWIFT AND HIS ELECTRIC LOCOMOTIVE<BR> +26 TOM SWIFT AND HIS FLYING BOAT<BR> +27 TOM SWIFT AND HIS GREAT OIL GUSHER<BR> +28 TOM SWIFT AND HIS CHEST OF SECRETS<BR> +29 TOM SWIFT AND HIS AIRLINE EXPRESS<BR> +</P> + +<BR><BR><BR> + +<H1 ALIGN="center"> +Tom Swift in the Land of Wonders +</H1> + +<BR><BR> + +<H2 ALIGN="center"> +CONTENTS +</H2> + +<TABLE ALIGN="center" WIDTH="80%"> + +<TR> +<TD ALIGN="right" VALIGN="top">I </TD> +<TD ALIGN="left" VALIGN="top"> +<A HREF="#chap01">A WONDERFUL STORY</A></TD> +</TR> + +<TR> +<TD ALIGN="right" VALIGN="top">II </TD> +<TD ALIGN="left" VALIGN="top"> +<A HREF="#chap02">PROFESSOR BUMPER ARRIVES</A></TD> +</TR> + +<TR> +<TD ALIGN="right" VALIGN="top">III </TD> +<TD ALIGN="left" VALIGN="top"> +<A HREF="#chap03">BLESSINGS AND ENTHUSIASM</A></TD> +</TR> + +<TR> +<TD ALIGN="right" VALIGN="top">IV </TD> +<TD ALIGN="left" VALIGN="top"> +<A HREF="#chap04">FENIMORE BEECHER</A></TD> +</TR> + +<TR> +<TD ALIGN="right" VALIGN="top">V </TD> +<TD ALIGN="left" VALIGN="top"> +<A HREF="#chap05">THE LITTLE GREEN GOD</A></TD> +</TR> + +<TR> +<TD ALIGN="right" VALIGN="top">VI </TD> +<TD ALIGN="left" VALIGN="top"> +<A HREF="#chap06">UNPLEASANT NEWS</A></TD> +</TR> + +<TR> +<TD ALIGN="right" VALIGN="top">VII </TD> +<TD ALIGN="left" VALIGN="top"> +<A HREF="#chap07">TOM HEARS SOMETHING</A></TD> +</TR> + +<TR> +<TD ALIGN="right" VALIGN="top">VIII </TD> +<TD ALIGN="left" VALIGN="top"> +<A HREF="#chap08">OFF FOR HONDURAS</A></TD> +</TR> + +<TR> +<TD ALIGN="right" VALIGN="top">IX </TD> +<TD ALIGN="left" VALIGN="top"> +<A HREF="#chap09">VAL JACINTO</A></TD> +</TR> + +<TR> +<TD ALIGN="right" VALIGN="top">X </TD> +<TD ALIGN="left" VALIGN="top"> +<A HREF="#chap10">IN THE WILDS</A></TD> +</TR> + +<TR> +<TD ALIGN="right" VALIGN="top">XI </TD> +<TD ALIGN="left" VALIGN="top"> +<A HREF="#chap11">THE VAMPIRES</A></TD> +</TR> + +<TR> +<TD ALIGN="right" VALIGN="top">XII </TD> +<TD ALIGN="left" VALIGN="top"> +<A HREF="#chap12">A FALSE FRIEND</A></TD> +</TR> + +<TR> +<TD ALIGN="right" VALIGN="top">XIII </TD> +<TD ALIGN="left" VALIGN="top"> +<A HREF="#chap13">FORWARD AGAIN</A></TD> +</TR> + +<TR> +<TD ALIGN="right" VALIGN="top">XIV </TD> +<TD ALIGN="left" VALIGN="top"> +<A HREF="#chap14">A NEW GUIDE</A></TD> +</TR> + +<TR> +<TD ALIGN="right" VALIGN="top">XV </TD> +<TD ALIGN="left" VALIGN="top"> +<A HREF="#chap15">IN THE COILS</A></TD> +</TR> + +<TR> +<TD ALIGN="right" VALIGN="top">XVI </TD> +<TD ALIGN="left" VALIGN="top"> +<A HREF="#chap16">A MEETING IN THE JUNGLE</A></TD> +</TR> + +<TR> +<TD ALIGN="right" VALIGN="top">XVII </TD> +<TD ALIGN="left" VALIGN="top"> +<A HREF="#chap17">THE LOST MAP</A></TD> +</TR> + +<TR> +<TD ALIGN="right" VALIGN="top">XVIII </TD> +<TD ALIGN="left" VALIGN="top"> +<A HREF="#chap18">"EL TIGRE!"</A></TD> +</TR> + +<TR> +<TD ALIGN="right" VALIGN="top">XIX </TD> +<TD ALIGN="left" VALIGN="top"> +<A HREF="#chap19">POISONED ARROWS</A></TD> +</TR> + +<TR> +<TD ALIGN="right" VALIGN="top">XX </TD> +<TD ALIGN="left" VALIGN="top"> +<A HREF="#chap20">AN OLD LEGEND</A></TD> +</TR> + +<TR> +<TD ALIGN="right" VALIGN="top">XXI </TD> +<TD ALIGN="left" VALIGN="top"> +<A HREF="#chap21">THE CAVERN</A></TD> +</TR> + +<TR> +<TD ALIGN="right" VALIGN="top">XXII </TD> +<TD ALIGN="left" VALIGN="top"> +<A HREF="#chap22">THE STORM</A></TD> +</TR> + +<TR> +<TD ALIGN="right" VALIGN="top">XXIII </TD> +<TD ALIGN="left" VALIGN="top"> +<A HREF="#chap23">ENTOMBED ALIVE</A></TD> +</TR> + +<TR> +<TD ALIGN="right" VALIGN="top">XXIV </TD> +<TD ALIGN="left" VALIGN="top"> +<A HREF="#chap24">THE REVOLVING STONE</A></TD> +</TR> + +<TR> +<TD ALIGN="right" VALIGN="top">XXV </TD> +<TD ALIGN="left" VALIGN="top"> +<A HREF="#chap25">THE IDOL OF GOLD</A></TD> +</TR> + +</TABLE> + +<BR><BR><BR> + +<H1 ALIGN="center"> +TOM SWIFT IN THE LAND OF WONDERS +</H1> + +<BR><BR> + +<A NAME="chap01"></A> +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +CHAPTER I +</H3> + +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +A WONDERFUL STORY +</H3> + +<P> +Tom Swift, who had been slowly looking through the pages of a magazine, +in the contents of which he seemed to be deeply interested, turned the +final folio, ruffled the sheets back again to look at a certain map and +drawing, and then, slapping the book down on a table before him, with a +noise not unlike that of a shot, exclaimed: +</P> + +<P> +"Well, that is certainly one wonderful story!" +</P> + +<P> +"What's it about, Tom?" asked his chum, Ned Newton. "Something about +inside baseball, or a new submarine that can be converted into an +airship on short notice?" +</P> + +<P> +"Neither one, you—you unscientific heathen," answered Tom, with a +laugh at Ned. "Though that isn't saying such a machine couldn't be +invented." +</P> + +<P> +"I believe you—that is if you got on its trail," returned Ned, and +there was warm admiration in his voice. +</P> + +<P> +"As for inside baseball, or outside, for that matter, I hardly believe +I'd be able to tell third base from the second base, it's so long since +I went to a game," proceeded Tom. "I've been too busy on that new +airship stabilizer dad gave me an idea for. I've been working too +hard, that's a fact. I need a vacation, and maybe a good baseball +game——" +</P> + +<P> +He stopped and looked at the magazine he had so hastily slapped down. +Something he had read in it seemed to fascinate him. +</P> + +<P> +"I wonder if it can possibly be true," he went on. "It sounds like the +wildest dream of a professional sleep-walker; and yet, when I stop to +think, it isn't much worse than some of the things we've gone through +with, Ned." +</P> + +<P> +"Say, for the love of rice-pudding! will you get down to brass tacks +and strike a trial balance? What are you talking of, anyhow? Is it a +joke?" +</P> + +<P> +"A joke?" +</P> + +<P> +"Yes. What you just read in that magazine which seems to cause you so +much excitement." +</P> + +<P> +"Well, it may be a joke; and yet the professor seems very much in +earnest about it," replied Tom. "It certainly is one wonderful story!" +</P> + +<P> +"So you said before. Come on—the 'fillium' is busted. Splice it, or +else put in a new reel and on with the show. I'd like to know what's +doing. What professor are you talking of?" +</P> + +<P> +"Professor Swyington Bumper." +</P> + +<P> +"Swyington Bumper?" and Ned's voice showed that his memory was a bit +hazy. +</P> + +<P> +"Yes. You ought to remember him. He was on the steamer when I went +down to Peru to help the Titus Brothers dig the big tunnel. That +plotter Waddington, or some of his tools, dropped a bomb where it might +have done us some injury, but Professor Bumper, who was a fellow +passenger, on his way to South America to look for the lost city of +Pelone, calmly picked up the bomb, plucked out the fuse, and saved us +from bad injuries, if not death. And he was as cool about it as an +ice-cream cone. Surely you remember!" +</P> + +<P> +"Swyington Bumper! Oh, yes, now I remember him," said Ned Newton. "But +what has he got to do with a wonderful story? Has he written more +about the lost city of Pelone? If he has I don't see anything so very +wonderful in that." +</P> + +<P> +"There isn't," agreed Tom. "But this isn't that," and Tom picked up +the magazine and leafed it to find the article he had been reading. +</P> + +<P> +"Let's have a look at it," suggested Ned. "You act as though you might +be vitally interested in it. Maybe you're thinking of joining forces +with the professor again, as you did when you dug the big tunnel." +</P> + +<P> +"Oh, no. I haven't any such idea," Tom said. "I've got enough work +laid out now to keep me in Shopton for the next year. I have no notion +of going anywhere with Professor Bumper. Yet I can't help being +impressed by this," and, having found the article in the magazine to +which he referred, he handed it to his chum. +</P> + +<P> +"Why, it's by Bumper himself!" exclaimed Ned. +</P> + +<P> +"Yes. Though there's nothing remarkable in that, seeing that he is +constantly contributing articles to various publications or writing +books. It's the story itself that's so wonderful. To save you the +trouble of wading through a lot of scientific detail, which I know you +don't care about, I'll tell you that the story is about a queer idol of +solid gold, weighing many pounds, and, in consequence, of great value." +</P> + +<P> +"Of solid gold you say?" asked Ned eagerly. +</P> + +<P> +"That's it. Got on your banking air already," Tom laughed. "To sum it +up for you—notice I use the word 'sum,' which is very appropriate for +a bank—the professor has got on the track of another lost or hidden +city. This one, the name of which doesn't appear, is in the Copan +valley of Honduras, and——" +</P> + +<P> +"Copan," interrupted Ned. "It sounds like the name of some new floor +varnish." +</P> + +<P> +"Well, it isn't, though it might be," laughed Tom. "Copan is a city, +in the Department of Copan, near the boundary between Honduras and +Guatemala. A fact I learned from the article and not because I +remembered my geography." +</P> + +<P> +"I was going to say," remarked Ned with a smile, "that you were coming +it rather strong on the school-book stuff." +</P> + +<P> +"Oh, it's all plainly written down there," and Tom waved toward the +magazine at which Ned was looking. "As you'll see, if you take the +trouble to go through it, as I did, Copan is, or maybe was, for all I +know, one of the most important centers of the Mayan civilization." +</P> + +<P> +"What's Mayan?" asked Ned. "You see I'm going to imbibe my information +by the deductive rather than the excavative process," he added with a +laugh. +</P> + +<P> +"I see," laughed Tom. "Well, Mayan refers to the Mayas, an aboriginal +people of Yucatan. The Mayas had a peculiar civilization of their own, +thousands of years ago, and their calendar system was so involved——" +</P> + +<P> +"Never mind about dates," again interrupted Ned. "Get down to brass +tacks. I'm willing to take your word for it that there's a Copan +valley in Honduras. But what has your friend Professor Bumper to do +with it?" +</P> + +<P> +"This. He has come across some old manuscripts, or ancient document +records, referring to this valley, and they state, according to this +article he has written for the magazine, that somewhere in the valley +is a wonderful city, traces of which have been found twenty to forty +feet below the surface, on which great trees are growing, showing that +the city was covered hundreds, if not thousands, of years ago." +</P> + +<P> +"But where does the idol of gold come in?" +</P> + +<P> +"I'm coming to that," said Tom. "Though, if Professor Bumper has his +way, the idol will be coming out instead of coming in." +</P> + +<P> +"You mean he wants to get it and take it away from the Copan valley, +Tom?" +</P> + +<P> +"That's it, Ned. It has great value not only from the amount of pure +gold that is in it, but as an antique. I fancy the professor is more +interested in that aspect of it. But he's written a wonderful story, +telling how he happened to come across the ancient manuscripts in the +tomb of some old Indian whose mummy he unearthed on a trip to Central +America. +</P> + +<P> +"Then he tells of the trouble he had in discovering how to solve the +key to the translation code; but when he did, he found a great story +unfolded to him. +</P> + +<P> +"This story has to do with the hidden city, and tells of the ancient +civilization of those who lived in the Copan valley thousands of years +ago. The people held this idol of gold to be their greatest treasure, +and they put to death many of other tribes who sought to steal it." +</P> + +<P> +"Whew!" whistled Ned. "That IS some yarn. But what is Professor +Bumper going to do about it?" +</P> + +<P> +"I don't know. The article seems to be written with an idea of +interesting scientists and research societies, so that they will raise +money to conduct a searching expedition. +</P> + +<P> +"Perhaps by this time the party may be organized—this magazine is +several months old. I have been so busy on my stabilizer patent that I +haven't kept up with current literature. Take it home and read it! +Ned. That is if you're through telling me about my affairs," for Ned, +who had formerly worked in the Shopton bank, had recently been made +general financial manager of the interests of Tom and his father. The +two were inventors and proverbially poor business men, though they had +amassed a fortune. +</P> + +<P> +"Your financial affairs are all right, Tom," said Ned. "I have just +been going over the books, and I'll submit a detailed report later." +</P> + +<P> +The telephone bell rang and Tom picked up the instrument from the desk. +As he answered in the usual way and then listened a moment, a strange +look came over his face. +</P> + +<P> +"Well, this certainly is wonderful!" he exclaimed, in much the same +manner as when he had finished reading the article about the idol. "It +certainly is a strange coincidence," he added, speaking in an aside to +Ned while he himself still listened to what was being told to him over +the telephone wire. +</P> + +<BR><BR><BR> + +<A NAME="chap02"></A> +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +CHAPTER II +</H3> + +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +PROFESSOR BUMPER ARRIVES +</H3> + +<P> +"What's the matter, Tom? What is it?" asked Ned Newton, attracted by +the strange manner of his chum at the telephone. "Has anything +happened?" +</P> + +<P> +But the young inventor was too busy listening to the unseen speaker to +answer his chum, even if he heard what Ned remarked, which is doubtful. +</P> + +<P> +"Well, I might as well wait until he is through," mused Ned, as he +started to leave the room. Then as Tom motioned to him to remain, he +murmured: "He may have something to say to me later. But I wonder who +is talking to him." +</P> + +<P> +There was no way of finding out, however, until Tom had a chance to +talk to Ned, and at present the young scientist was eagerly listening +to what came over the wire. Occasionally Ned could hear him say: +</P> + +<P> +"You don't tell me! That is surprising! Yes—yes! Of course if it's +true it means a big thing, I can understand that. What's that? No, I +couldn't make a promise like that. I'm sorry, but——" +</P> + +<P> +Then the person at the other end of the wire must have plunged into +something very interesting and absorbing, for Tom did not again +interrupt by interjected remarks. +</P> + +<P> +Tom Swift, as has been said, was an inventor, as was his father. Mr. +Swift was now rather old and feeble, taking only a nominal part in the +activities of the firm made up of himself and his son. But his +inventions were still used, many of them being vital to the business +and trade of this country. +</P> + +<P> +Tom and his father lived in the village of Shopton, New York, and their +factories covered many acres of ground. Those who wish to read of the +earliest activities of Tom in the inventive line are referred to the +initial volume, "Tom Swift and His Motor Cycle." From then on he and +his father had many and exciting adventures. In a motor boat, an +airship, and a submarine respectively the young inventor had gone +through many perils. On some of the trips his chum, Ned Newton, +accompanied him, and very often in the party was a Mr. Wakefield Damon, +who had a curious habit of "blessing" everything that happened to +strike his fancy. +</P> + +<P> +Besides Tom and his father, the Swift household was made up of +Eradicate Sampson, a colored man-of-all-work, who, with his mule +Boomerang, did what he could to keep the grounds around the house in +order. There was also Mrs. Baggert, the housekeeper, Tom's mother +being dead. Mr. Damon, living in a neighboring town, was a frequent +visitor in the Swift home. +</P> + +<P> +Mary Nestor, a girl of Shopton, might also be mentioned. She and Tom +were more than just good friends. Tom had an idea that some day——. +But there, I promised not to tell that part, at least until the young +people themselves were ready to have a certain fact announced. +</P> + +<P> +From one activity to another had Tom Swift gone, now constructing some +important invention for himself, as among others, when he made the +photo-telephone, or developed a great searchlight which he presented to +the Government for use in detecting smugglers on the border. +</P> + +<P> +The book immediately preceding this is called "Tom Swift and His Big +Tunnel," and deals with the efforts of the young inventor to help a +firm of contractors penetrate a mountain in Peru. How this was done +and how, incidentally, the lost city of Pelone was discovered, bringing +joy to the heart of Professor Swyington Bumper, will be found fully set +forth in the book. +</P> + +<P> +Tom had been back from the Peru trip for some months, when we again +find him interested in some of the work of Professor Bumper, as set +forth in the magazine mentioned. +</P> + +<P> +"Well, he certainly is having some conversation," reflected Ned, as, +after more than five minutes, Tom's ear was still at the receiver of +the instrument, into the transmitter of which he had said only a few +words. +</P> + +<P> +"All right," Tom finally answered, as he hung the receiver up, "I'll be +here," and then he turned to Ned, whose curiosity had been growing with +the telephone talk, and remarked: +</P> + +<P> +"That certainly was wonderful!" +</P> + +<P> +"What was?" asked Ned. "Do you think I'm a mind reader to be able to +guess?" +</P> + +<P> +"No, indeed! I beg your pardon. I'll tell you at once. But I couldn't +break away. It was too important. To whom do you think I was talking +just then?" +</P> + +<P> +"I can imagine almost any one, seeing I know something of what you have +done. It might be almost anybody from some person you met up in the +caves of ice to a red pygmy from the wilds of Africa." +</P> + +<P> +"I'm afraid neither of them would be quite up to telephone talk yet," +laughed Tom. "No, this was the gentleman who wrote that interesting +article about the idol of gold," and he motioned to the magazine Ned +held in his hand. +</P> + +<P> +"You don't mean Professor Bumper!" +</P> + +<P> +"That's just whom I do mean." +</P> + +<P> +"What did he want? Where did he call from?" +</P> + +<P> +"He wants me to help organize an expedition to go to Central +America—to the Copan valley, to be exact—to look for this somewhat +mythical idol of gold. Incidentally the professor will gather in any +other antiques of more or less value, if he can find any, and he hopes, +even if he doesn't find the idol, to get enough historical material for +half a dozen books, to say nothing of magazine articles." +</P> + +<P> +"Where did he call from; did you say?" +</P> + +<P> +"I didn't say. But it was a long-distance call from New York. The +Professor stopped off there on his way from Boston, where he has been +lecturing before some society. And now he's coming here to see me," +finished Tom. +</P> + +<P> +"What! Is he going to lecture here?" cried Ned. "If he is, and spouts +a whole lot of that bone-dry stuff about the ancient Mayan civilization +and their antiquities, with side lights on how the old-time Indians +used to scalp their enemies, I'm going to the moving pictures! I'm +willing to be your financial manager, Tom Swift, but please don't ask +me to be a high-brow. I wasn't built for that." +</P> + +<P> +"Nor I, Ned. The professor isn't going to lecture. He's only going to +talk, he says." +</P> + +<P> +"What about?" +</P> + +<P> +"He's going to try to induce me to join his expedition to the Copan +valley." +</P> + +<P> +"Do you feel inclined to go?" +</P> + +<P> +"No, Ned, I do not. I've got too many other irons in the fire. I +shall have to give the professor a polite but firm refusal." +</P> + +<P> +"Well, maybe you're right, Tom; and yet that idol of +gold—GOLD—weighing how many pounds did you say?" +</P> + +<P> +"Oh, you're thinking of its money value, Ned, old man!" +</P> + +<P> +"Yes, I'd like to see what a big chunk of gold like that would bring. +It must be quite a nugget. But I'm not likely to get a glimpse of it +if you don't go with the professor." +</P> + +<P> +"I don't see how I can go, Ned. But come over and meet the delightful +gentleman when he arrives. I expect him day after to-morrow." +</P> + +<P> +"I'll be here," promised Ned; and then he went downtown to attend to +some matters connected with his new duties, which were much less +irksome than those he had had when he had been in the bank. +</P> + +<P> +"Well, Tom, have you heard any more about your friend?" asked Ned, two +days later, as he came to the Swift home with some papers needing the +signature of the young inventor and his father. +</P> + +<P> +"You mean——?" +</P> + +<P> +"Professor Bumper." +</P> + +<P> +"No, I haven't heard from him since he telephoned. But I guess he'll +be here all right. He's very punctual. Did you see anything of my +giant Koku as you came in?" +</P> + +<P> +"Yes, he and Eradicate were having an argument about who should move a +heavy casting from one of the shops. Rad wanted to do it all alone, +but Koku said he was like a baby now." +</P> + +<P> +"Poor Rad is getting old," said Tom with a sigh. "But he has been very +faithful. He and Koku never seem to get along well together." +</P> + +<P> +Koku was an immense man, a veritable giant, one of two whom Tom had +brought back with him after an exciting trip to a strange land. The +giant's strength was very useful to the young inventor. +</P> + +<P> +"Now Tom, about this business of leasing to the English Government the +right to manufacture that new explosive of yours," began Ned, plunging +into the business at hand. "I think if you stick out a little you can +get a better royalty price." +</P> + +<P> +"But I don't want to gouge 'em, Ned. I'm satisfied with a fair profit. +The trouble with you is you think too much of money. Now——" +</P> + +<P> +At that moment a voice was heard in the hall of the house saying: +</P> + +<P> +"Now, my dear lady, don't trouble yourself. I can find my way in to +Tom Swift perfectly well by myself, and while I appreciate your +courtesy I do not want to trouble you." +</P> + +<P> +"No, don't come, Mrs. Baggert," added another voice. "Bless my hat +band, I think I know my way about the house by this time!" +</P> + +<P> +"Mr. Damon!" ejaculated Ned. +</P> + +<P> +"And Professor Bumper is with him," added Tom. "Come in!" he cried, +opening the hall door, to confront a bald-headed man who stood peering +at our hero with bright snapping eyes, like those of some big bird +spying out the land from afar. "Come in, Professor Bumper; and you +too, Mr. Damon!" +</P> + +<BR><BR><BR> + +<A NAME="chap03"></A> +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +CHAPTER III +</H3> + +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +BLESSINGS AND ENTHUSIASM +</H3> + +<P> +Greetings and inquiries as to health having been passed, not without +numerous blessings on the part of Mr. Damon, the little party gathered +in the library of the home of Tom Swift sat down and looked at one +another. +</P> + +<P> +On Professor Bumper's face there was, plainly to be seen, a look of +expectation, and it seemed to be shared by Mr. Damon, who seemed eager +to burst into enthusiastic talk. On the other hand Tom Swift appeared +a bit indifferent. +</P> + +<P> +Ned himself admitted that he was frankly curious. The story of the big +idol of gold had occupied his thoughts for many hours. +</P> + +<P> +"Well, I'm glad to see you both," said Tom again. "You got here all +right, I see, Professor Bumper. But I didn't expect you to meet and +bring Mr. Damon with you." +</P> + +<P> +"I met him on the train," explained the author of the book on the lost +city of Pelone, as well as books on other antiquities. "I had no +expectation of seeing him, and we were both surprised when we met on +the express." +</P> + +<P> +"It stopped at Waterfield, Tom," explained Mr. Damon, "which it doesn't +usually do, being an aristocratic sort of train, not given even to +hesitating at our humble little town. There were some passengers to +get off, which caused the flier to stop, I suppose. And, as I wanted +to come over to see you, I got aboard." +</P> + +<P> +"Glad you did," voiced Tom. +</P> + +<P> +"Then I happened to see Professor Bumper a few seats ahead of me," went +on Mr. Damon, "and, bless my scarfpin! he was coming to see you also." +</P> + +<P> +"Well, I'm doubly glad," answered Tom. +</P> + +<P> +"So here we are," went on Mr. Damon, "and you've simply got to come, +Tom Swift. You must go with us!" and Mr. Damon, in his enthusiasm, +banged his fist down on the table with such force that he knocked some +books to the floor. +</P> + +<P> +Koku, the giant, who was in the hall, opened the door and in his +imperfect English asked: +</P> + +<P> +"Master Tom knock for him bigs man?" +</P> + +<P> +"No," answered Tom with a smile, "I didn't knock or call you, Koku. +Some books fell, that is all." +</P> + +<P> +"Massa Tom done called fo' me, dat's what he done!" broke in the +petulant voice of Eradicate. +</P> + +<P> +"No, Rad, I don't need anything," Tom said. "Though you might make a +pitcher of lemonade. It's rather warm." +</P> + +<P> +"Right away, Massa Tom! Right away!" cried the old colored man, eager +to be of service. +</P> + +<P> +"Me help, too!" rumbled Koku, in his deep voice. "Me punch de lemons!" +and away he hurried after Eradicate, fearful lest the old servant do +all the honors. +</P> + +<P> +"Same old Rad and Koku," observed Mr. Damon with a smile. "But now, +Tom, while they're making the lemonade, let's get down to business. +You're going with us, of course!" +</P> + +<P> +"Where?" asked Tom, more from habit than because he did not know. +</P> + +<P> +"Where? Why to Honduras, of course! After the idol of gold! Why, bless +my fountain pen, it's the most wonderful story I ever heard of! You've +read Professor Bumper's article, of course. He told me you had. I +read it on the train coming over. He also told me about it, and—— +Well, I'm going with him, Tom Swift. +</P> + +<P> +"And think of all the adventures that may befall us! We'll get lost in +buried cities, ride down raging torrents on a raft, fall over a cliff +maybe and be rescued. Why, it makes me feel quite young again!" and +Mr. Damon arose, to pace excitedly up and down the room. +</P> + +<P> +Up to this time Professor Bumper had said very little. He had sat +still in his chair listening to Mr. Damon. But now that the latter had +ceased, at least for a time, Tom and Ned looked toward the scientist. +</P> + +<P> +"I understand, Tom," he said, "that you read my article in the +magazine, about the possibility of locating some of the lost and buried +cities of Honduras?" +</P> + +<P> +"Yes, Ned and I each read it. It was quite wonderful." +</P> + +<P> +"And yet there are more wonders to tell," went on the professor. "I +did not give all the details in that article. I will tell you some of +them. I have brought copies of the documents with me," and he opened a +small valise and took out several bundles tied with pink tape. +</P> + +<P> +"As Mr. Damon said," he went on while arranging his papers, "he met me +on the train, and he was so taken by the story of the idol of gold that +he agreed to accompany me to Central America." +</P> + +<P> +"On one condition!" put in the eccentric man. +</P> + +<P> +"What's that? You didn't make any conditions while we were talking," +said the scientist. +</P> + +<P> +"Yes, I said I'd go if Tom Swift did." +</P> + +<P> +"Oh, yes. You did say that. But I don't call that a condition, for of +course Tom Swift will go. Now let me tell you something more than I +could impart over the telephone. +</P> + +<P> +"Soon after I called you up, Tom—and it was quite a coincidence that +it should have been at a time when you had just finished my magazine +article. Soon after that, as I was saying, I arranged to come on to +Shopton. And now I'm glad we're all here together. +</P> + +<P> +"But how comes it, Ned Newton, that you are not in the bank?" +</P> + +<P> +"I've left there," explained Ned. +</P> + +<P> +"He's now general financial man for the Swift Company," Tom explained. +"My father and I found that we could not look after the inventing and +experimental end, and money matters, too, and as Ned had had +considerable experience this way we made him take over those worries," +and Tom laughed genially. +</P> + +<P> +"No worries at all, as far as the Swift Company is concerned," returned +Ned. +</P> + +<P> +"Well, I guess you earn your salary," laughed Tom. "But now, Professor +Bumper, let's hear from you. Is there anything more about this idol of +gold that you can tell us?" +</P> + +<P> +"Plenty, Tom, plenty. I could talk all day, and not get to the end of +the story. But a lot of it would be scientific detail that might be +too dry for you in spite of this excellent lemonade." +</P> + +<P> +Between them Koku and Eradicate had managed to make a pitcher of the +beverage, though Mrs. Baggert, the housekeeper, told Tom afterward that +the two had a quarrel in the kitchen as to who should squeeze the +lemons, the giant insisting that he had the better right to "punch" +them. +</P> + +<P> +"So, not to go into too many details," went on the professor, "I'll +just give you a brief outline of this story of the idol of gold. +</P> + +<P> +"Honduras, as you of course know, is a republic of Central America, and +it gets its name from something that happened on the fourth voyage of +Columbus. He and his men had had days of weary sailing and had sought +in vain for shallow water in which they might come to an anchorage. +Finally they reached the point now known as Cape Gracias-a-Dios, and +when they let the anchor go, and found that in a short time it came to +rest on the floor of the ocean, some one of the sailors—perhaps +Columbus himself—is said to have remarked: +</P> + +<P> +"'Thank the Lord, we have left the deep waters (honduras)' that being +the Spanish word for unfathomable depths. So Honduras it was called, +and has been to this day. +</P> + +<P> +"It is a queer land with many traces of an ancient civilization, a +civilization which I believe dates back farther than some in the far +East. On the sculptured stones in the Copan valley there are +characters which seem to resemble very ancient writing, but this +pictographic writing is largely untranslatable. +</P> + +<P> +"Honduras, I might add, is about the size of our state of Ohio. It is +rather an elevated tableland, though there are stretches of tropical +forest, but it is not so tropical a country as many suppose it to be. +There is much gold scattered throughout Honduras, though of late it has +not been found in large quantities. +</P> + +<P> +"In the old days, however, before the Spaniards came, it was plentiful, +so much, so that the natives made idols of it. And it is one of the +largest of these idols—by name Quitzel—that I am going to seek." +</P> + +<P> +"Do you know where it is?" asked Ned. +</P> + +<P> +"Well, it isn't locked up in a safe deposit box, of that I'm sure," +laughed the professor. "No, I don't know exactly where it is, except +that it is somewhere in an ancient and buried city known as Kurzon. If +I knew exactly where it was there wouldn't be much fun in going after +it. And if it was known to others it would have been taken away long +ago. +</P> + +<P> +"No, we've got to hunt for the idol of gold in this land of wonders +where I hope soon to be. Later on I'll show you the documents that put +me on the track of this idol. Enough now to show you an old map I +found, or, rather, a copy of it, and some of the papers that tell of +the idol," and he spread out his packet of papers on the table in front +of him, his eyes shining with excitement and pleasure. Mr. Damon, too, +leaned eagerly forward. +</P> + +<P> +"So, Tom Swift," went on the professor, "I come to you for help in this +matter. I want you to aid me in organizing an expedition to go to +Honduras after the idol of gold. Will you?" +</P> + +<P> +"I'll help you, of course," said Tom. "You may use any of my +inventions you choose—my airships, my motor boats and submarines, even +my giant cannon if you think you can take it with you. And as for the +money part, Ned will arrange that for you. But as for going with you +myself, it is out of the question. I can't. No Honduras for me!" +</P> + +<BR><BR><BR> + +<A NAME="chap04"></A> +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +CHAPTER IV +</H3> + +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +FENIMORE BEECHER +</H3> + +<P> +Had Tom Swift's giant cannon been discharged somewhere in the vicinity +of his home it could have caused but little more astonishment to Mr. +Damon and Professor Bumper than did the simple announcement of the +young inventor. The professor seemed to shrink back in his chair, +collapsing like an automobile tire when the air is let out. As for Mr. +Damon he jumped up and cried: +</P> + +<P> +"Bless my——!" +</P> + +<P> +But that is as far as he got—at least just then. He did not seem to +know what to bless, but he looked as though he would have liked to +include most of the universe. +</P> + +<P> +"Surely you don't mean it, Tom Swift," gasped Professor Bumper at +length. "Won't you come with us?" +</P> + +<P> +"No," said Tom, slowly. "Really I can't go. I'm working on an +invention of a new aeroplane stabilizer, and if I go now it will be +just at a time when I am within striking distance of success. And the +stabilizer is very much needed." +</P> + +<P> +"If it's a question of making a profit on it, Tom," began Mr. Damon, "I +can let you have some money until——" +</P> + +<P> +"Oh, no! It isn't the money!" cried Tom. "Don't think that for a +moment. You see the European war has called for the use of a large +number of aeroplanes, and as the pilots of them frequently have to +fight, and so can not give their whole attention to the machines, some +form of automatic stabilizer is needed to prevent them turning turtle, +or going off at a wrong tangent. +</P> + +<P> +"So I have been working out a sort of modified gyroscope, and it seems +to answer the purpose. I have already received advance orders for a +number of my devices from abroad, and as they are destined to save +lives I feel that I ought to keep on with my work. +</P> + +<P> +"I'd like to go, don't misunderstand me, but I can't go at this time. +It is out of the question. If you wait a year, or maybe six months——" +</P> + +<P> +"No, it is impossible to wait, Tom," declared Professor Bumper. +</P> + +<P> +"Is it so important then to hurry?" asked Mr. Damon. "You did not +mention that to me, Professor Bumper." +</P> + +<P> +"No, I did not have time. There are so many ends to my concerns. But, +Tom Swift, you simply must go!" +</P> + +<P> +"I can't, my dear professor, much as I should like to." +</P> + +<P> +"But, Tom, think of it!" cried Mr. Damon, who was as much excited as +was the little bald-headed scientist. "You never saw such an idol of +gold as this. What's its name?" and he looked questioningly at the +professor. +</P> + +<P> +"Quitzel the idol is called," supplied Professor Bumper. "And it is +supposed to be in a buried city named Kurzon, somewhere in the Sierra +de Merendon range of mountains, in the vicinity of the Copan valley. +Copan is a city, or maybe we'll find it only a town when we get there, +and it is not far from the borders of Guatemala. +</P> + +<P> +"Tom, if I could show you the translations I have made of the ancient +documents, referring to this idol and the wonderful city over which it +kept guard, I'm sure you'd come with us." +</P> + +<P> +"Please don't tempt me," Tom said with a laugh. "I'm only too anxious +to go, and if it wasn't for the stabilizer I'd be with you in a minute. +But—— Well, you'll have to get along without me. Maybe I can join +you later." +</P> + +<P> +"What's this about the idol keeping guard over the ancient city?" asked +Ned, for he was interested in strange stories. +</P> + +<P> +"It seems," explained the professor, "that in the early days there was +a strange race of people, inhabiting Central America, with a somewhat +high civilization, only traces of which remained when the Spaniards +came. +</P> + +<P> +"But these traces, and such hieroglyphics, or, to be more exact +pictographs, as I have been able to decipher from the old documents, +tell of one country, or perhaps it was only a city, over which this +great golden idol of Quitzel presided. +</P> + +<P> +"There is in some of these papers a description of the idol, which is +not exactly a beauty, judged from modern standards. But the main fact +is that it is made of solid gold, and may weigh anywhere from one to +two tons." +</P> + +<P> +"Two tons of gold!" cried New Newton. "Why, if that's the case it +would be worth——" and he fell to doing a sum in mental arithmetic. +</P> + +<P> +"I am not so concerned about the monetary value of the statue as I am +about its antiquity," went on Professor Bumper. "There are other +statues in this buried city of Kurzon, and though they may not be so +valuable they will give me a wealth of material for my research work." +</P> + +<P> +"How do you know there are other statues?" asked Mr. Damon. +</P> + +<P> +"Because my documents tell me so. It was because the people made other +idols, in opposition, as it were, to Quitzel, that their city or +country was destroyed. At least that is the legend. Quitzel, so the +story goes, wanted to be the chief god, and when the image of a rival +was set up in the temple near him, he toppled over in anger, and part +of the temple went with him, the whole place being buried in ruins. +All the inhabitants were killed, and trace of the ancient city was lost +forever. No, I hope not forever, for I expect to find it." +</P> + +<P> +"If all the people were killed, and the city buried, how did the story +of Quitzel become known?" asked Mr. Damon. +</P> + +<P> +"One only of the priests in the temple of Quitzel escaped and set down +part of the tale," said the professor. "It is his narrative, or one +based on it, that I have given you." +</P> + +<P> +"And now, what I want to do, is to go and make a search for this buried +city. I have fairly good directions as to how it may be reached. We +will have little difficulty in getting to Honduras, as there are fruit +steamers frequently sailing. Of course going into the interior—to the +Copan valley—is going to be harder. But an expedition from a large +college was recently there and succeeded, after much labor, in +excavating part of a buried city. Whether or not it was Kurzon I am +unable to say. +</P> + +<P> +"But if there was one ancient city there must be more. So I want to +make an attempt. And I counted on you, Tom. You have had considerable +experience in strange quarters of the earth, and you're just the one to +help me. I don't need money, for I have interested a certain +millionaire, and my own college will put up part of the funds." +</P> + +<P> +"Oh, it isn't a question of money," said Tom. "It's time." +</P> + +<P> +"That's just what it is with me!" exclaimed Professor Bumper. "I +haven't any time to lose. My rivals may, even now, be on their way to +Honduras!" +</P> + +<P> +"Your rivals!" cried Tom. "You didn't say anything about them!" +</P> + +<P> +"No, I believe I didn't. There were so many other things to talk about. +But there is a rival archaeologist who would ask nothing better than to +get ahead of me in this matter. He is younger than I am, and youth is +a big asset nowadays." +</P> + +<P> +"Pooh! You're not old!" cried Mr. Damon. "You're no older than I am, +and I'm still young. I'm a lot younger than some of these boys who are +afraid to tackle a trip through a tropical wilderness," and he +playfully nudged Tom in the ribs. +</P> + +<P> +"I'm not a bit afraid!" retorted the young inventor. +</P> + +<P> +"No, I know you're not," laughed Mr. Damon. "But I've got to say +something, Tom, to stir you up. Ned, how about you? Would you go?" +</P> + +<P> +"I can't, unless Tom does. You see I'm his financial man now." +</P> + +<P> +"There you are, Tom Swift!" cried Mr. Damon. "You see you are holding +back a number of persons just because you don't want to go." +</P> + +<P> +"I certainly wouldn't like to go without Tom," said the professor +slowly. "I really need his help. You know, Tom, we would never have +found the city of Pelone if it had not been for you and your marvelous +powder. The conditions in the Copan valley are likely to be still more +difficult to overcome, and I feel that I risk failure without your +young energy and your inventive mind to aid in the work and to suggest +possible means of attaining our object. Come, Tom, reconsider, and +decide to make the trip." +</P> + +<P> +"And my promise to go was dependent on Tom's agreement to accompany +us," said Mr. Damon. +</P> + +<P> +"Come on!" urged the professor, much as one boy might urge another to +take part in a ball game. "Don't let my rival get ahead of me." +</P> + +<P> +"I wouldn't like to see that," Tom said slowly. "Who is he—any one I +know?" +</P> + +<P> +"I don't believe so, Tom. He's connected with a large, new college +that has plenty of money to spend on explorations and research work. +Beecher is his name—Fenimore Beecher." +</P> + +<P> +"Beecher!" exclaimed Tom, and there was such a change in his manner +that his friends could not help noticing it. He jumped to his feet, +his eyes snapping, and he looked eagerly and anxiously at Professor +Bumper. +</P> + +<P> +"Did you say his name was Fenimore Beecher?" Tom asked in a tense voice. +</P> + +<P> +"That's what it is—Professor Fenimore Beecher. He is really a learned +young man, and thoroughly in earnest, though I do not like his manner. +But he is trying to get ahead of me, which may account for my feeling." +</P> + +<P> +Tom Swift did not answer. Instead he hurried from the room with a +murmured apology. +</P> + +<P> +"I'll be back in about five minutes," he said, as he went out. +</P> + +<P> +"Well, what's up now?" asked Mr. Damon of Ned, as the young inventor +departed. "What set him off that way?" +</P> + +<P> +"The mention of Beecher's name, evidently. Though I never heard him +mention such a person before." +</P> + +<P> +"Nor did I ever hear Professor Beecher speak of Tom," said the +bald-headed scientist. "Well, we'll just have to wait until——" +</P> + +<P> +At that moment Tom came back into the room. +</P> + +<P> +"Gentlemen," he said, "I have reconsidered my refusal to go to the +Copan valley after the idol of gold. I'm going with you!" +</P> + +<P> +"Good!" cried Professor Bumper. +</P> + +<P> +"Fine!" ejaculated Mr. Damon. "Bless my time-table! I thought you'd +come around, Tom Swift." +</P> + +<P> +"But what about your stabilizer?" asked Ned. +</P> + +<P> +"I was just talking to my father about it," the young inventor replied. +"He will be able to put the finishing touches on it. So I'll leave it +with him. As soon as I can get ready I'll go, since you say haste is +necessary, Professor Bumper." +</P> + +<P> +"It is, if we are to get ahead of Beecher." +</P> + +<P> +"Then we'll get ahead of him!" cried Tom. "I'm with you now from the +start to the finish. I'll show him what I can do!" he added, while Ned +and the others wondered at the sudden change in their friend's manner. +</P> + +<BR><BR><BR> + +<A NAME="chap05"></A> +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +CHAPTER V +</H3> + +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +THE LITTLE GREEN GOD +</H3> + +<P> +"Tom how soon can we go?" asked Professor Bumper, as he began arranging +his papers, maps and documents ready to place them back in the valise. +</P> + +<P> +"Within a week, if you want to start that soon." +</P> + +<P> +"The sooner the better. A week will suit me. I don't know just what +Beecher's plans are, but, he may try to get on the ground first. +Though, without boasting, I may say that he has not had as much +experience as I have had, thanks to you, Tom, when you helped me find +the lost city of Pelone." +</P> + +<P> +"Well, I hope we'll be as successful this time," murmured Tom. "I +don't want to see Beecher beat you." +</P> + +<P> +"I didn't know you knew him, Tom," said the professor. +</P> + +<P> +"Oh, yes, I have met him, once," and there was something in Tom's +manner, though he tried to speak indifferently, that made Ned believe +there was more behind his chum's sudden change of determination than +had yet appeared. +</P> + +<P> +"He never mentioned you," went on Professor Bumper; "yet the last time +I saw him I said I was coming to see you, though I did not tell him +why." +</P> + +<P> +"No, he wouldn't be likely to speak of me," said Tom significantly. +</P> + +<P> +"Well, if that's all settled, I guess I'll go back home and pack up," +said Mr. Damon, making a move to depart. +</P> + +<P> +"There's no special rush," Tom said. "We won't leave for a week. I +can't get ready in much less time than that." +</P> + +<P> +"Bless my socks! I know that," ejaculated Mr. Damon. "But if I get my +things packed I can go to a hotel to stay while my wife is away. She +might take a notion to come home unexpectedly, and, though she is a +dear, good soul, she doesn't altogether approve of my going off on +these wild trips with you, Tom Swift. But if I get all packed, and +clear out, she can't find me and she can't hold me back. She is +visiting her mother now. I can send her a wire from Kurzon after I get +there." +</P> + +<P> +"I don't believe the telegraph there is working," laughed Professor +Bumper. "But suit yourself. I must go back to New York to arrange for +the goods we'll have to take with us. In a week, Tom, we'll start." +</P> + +<P> +"You must stay to dinner," Tom said. "You can't get a train now +anyhow, and father wants to meet you again. He's pretty well, +considering his age. And he's much better I verily believe since I +said I'd turn over to him the task of finishing the stabilizer. He +likes to work." +</P> + +<P> +"We'll stay and take the night train back," agreed Mr. Damon. "It will +be like old times, Tom," he went on, "traveling off together into the +wilds. Central America is pretty wild, isn't it?" he asked, as if in +fear of being disappointed on that score. +</P> + +<P> +"Oh, it's wild enough to suit any one," answered Professor Bumper. +</P> + +<P> +"Well, now to settle a few details," observed Tom. "Ned, what is the +situation as regards the financial affairs of my father and myself? +Nothing will come to grief if we go away, will there?" +</P> + +<P> +"I guess not, Tom. But are you going to take your father with you?" +</P> + +<P> +"No, of course not." +</P> + +<P> +"But you spoke of 'we.'" +</P> + +<P> +"I meant you and I are going." +</P> + +<P> +"Me, Tom?" +</P> + +<P> +"Sure, you! I wouldn't think of leaving you behind. You want Ned +along, don't you, Professor?" +</P> + +<P> +"Of course. It will be an ideal party—we four. We'll have to take +natives when we get to Honduras, and make up a mule pack-train for the +interior. I had some thoughts of asking you to take an airship along, +but it might frighten the Indians, and I shall have to depend on them +for guides, as well as for porters. So it will be an old-fashioned +expedition, in a way." +</P> + +<P> +Mr. Swift came in at this point to meet his old friends. +</P> + +<P> +"The boy needs a little excitement," he said. "He's been puttering +over that stabilizer invention too long. I can finish the model for +him in a very short time." +</P> + +<P> +Professor Bumper told Mr. Swift something about the proposed trip, +while Mr. Damon went out with Tom and Ned to one of the shops to look +at a new model aeroplane the young inventor had designed. +</P> + +<P> +There was a merry party around the table at dinner, though now and then +Ned noticed that Tom had an abstracted and preoccupied air. +</P> + +<P> +"Thinking about the idol of gold?" asked Ned in a whisper to his chum, +when they were about to leave the table. +</P> + +<P> +"The idol of gold? Oh, yes! Of course! It will be great if we can +bring that back with us." But the manner in which he said this made Ned +feel sure that Tom had had other thoughts, and that he had used a +little subterfuge in his answer. +</P> + +<P> +Ned was right, as he proved for himself a little later, when, Mr. Damon +and the professor having gone home, the young financial secretary took +his friend to a quiet corner and asked: +</P> + +<P> +"What's the matter, Tom?" +</P> + +<P> +"Matter? What do you mean?" +</P> + +<P> +"I mean what made you make up your mind so quickly to go on this +expedition when you heard Beecher was going?" +</P> + +<P> +"Oh—er—well, you wouldn't want to see our old friend Professor Bumper +left, would you, after he had worked out the secret of the idol of +gold? You wouldn't want some young whipper-snapper to beat him in the +race, would you, Ned?" +</P> + +<P> +"No, of course not." +</P> + +<P> +"Neither would I. That's why I changed my mind. This Beecher isn't +going to get that idol if I can stop him!" +</P> + +<P> +"You seem rather bitter against him." +</P> + +<P> +"Bitter? Oh, not at all. I simply don't want to see my friends +disappointed." +</P> + +<P> +"Then Beecher isn't a friend of yours?" +</P> + +<P> +"Oh, I've met him, that is all," and Tom tried to speak indifferently. +</P> + +<P> +"Humph!" mused Ned, "there's more here than I dreamed of. I'm going to +get at the bottom of it." +</P> + +<P> +But though Ned tried to pump Tom, he was not successful. The young +inventor admitted knowing the youthful scientist, but that was all, Tom +reiterating his determination not to let Professor Bumper be beaten in +the race for the idol of gold. +</P> + +<P> +"Let me see," mused Ned, as he went home that evening. "Tom did not +change his mind until he heard Beecher's name mentioned. Now this +shows that Beecher had something to do with it. The only reason Tom +doesn't want Beecher to get this idol or find the buried city is +because Professor Bumper is after it. And yet the professor is not an +old or close friend of Tom's. They met only when Tom went to dig his +big tunnel. There must be some other reason." +</P> + +<P> +Ned did some more thinking. Then he clapped his hands together, and a +smile spread over his face. +</P> + +<P> +"I believe I have it!" he cried. "The little green god as compared to +the idol of gold! That's it. I'm going to make a call on my way home." +</P> + +<P> +This he did, stopping at the home of Mary Nestor, a pretty girl, who, +rumor had it, was tacitly engaged to Tom. Mary was not at home, but +Mr. Nestor was, and for Ned's purpose this answered. +</P> + +<P> +"Well, well, glad to see you!" exclaimed Mary's father. "Isn't Tom +with you?" he asked a moment later, seeing that Ned was alone. +</P> + +<P> +"No, Tom isn't with me this evening," Ned answered. "The fact is, he's +getting ready to go off on another expedition, and I'm going with him." +</P> + +<P> +"You young men are always going somewhere," remarked Mrs. Nestor. +"Where is it to this time?" +</P> + +<P> +"Some place in Central America," Ned answered, not wishing to be too +particular. He was wondering how he could find out what he wanted to +know, when Mary's mother unexpectedly gave him just the information he +was after. +</P> + +<P> +"Central America!" she exclaimed. "Why, Father," and she looked at her +husband, "that's where Professor Beecher is going, isn't it?" +</P> + +<P> +"Yes, I believe he did mention something about that." +</P> + +<P> +"Professor Beecher, the man who is an authority on Aztec ruins?" asked +Ned, taking a shot in the dark. +</P> + +<P> +"Yes," said Mr. Nestor. "And a mighty fine young man he is, too. I +knew his father well. He was here on a visit not long ago, young +Beecher was, and he talked most entertainingly about his discoveries. +You remember how interested Mary was, Mother?" +</P> + +<P> +"Yes, she seemed to be," said Mrs. Nestor. "Tom Swift dropped in +during the course of the evening," she added to Ned, "and Mary +introduced him to Professor Beecher. But I can't say that Tom was much +interested in the professor's talk." +</P> + +<P> +"No?" questioned Ned. +</P> + +<P> +"No, not at all. But Tom did not stay long. He left just as Mary and +the professor were drawing a map so the professor could indicate where +he had once made a big discovery." +</P> + +<P> +"I see," murmured Ned. "Well, I suppose Tom must have been thinking of +something else at the time." +</P> + +<P> +"Very likely," agreed Mr. Nestor. "But Tom missed a very profitable +talk. I was very much interested myself in what the professor told us, +and so was Mary. She invited Mr. Beecher to come again. He takes +after his father in being very thorough in what he does. +</P> + +<P> +"Sometimes I think," went on Mr. Nestor, "that Tom isn't quite steady +enough. He's thinking of so many things, perhaps, that he can't get +his mind down to the commonplace. I remember he once sent something +here in a box labeled 'dynamite.' Though there was no explosive in it, +it gave us a great fright. But Tom is a boy, in spite of his years. +Professor Beecher seems much older. We all like him very much." +</P> + +<P> +"That's nice," said Ned, as he took his departure. He had found out +what he had come to learn. +</P> + +<P> +"I knew it!" Ned exclaimed as he walked home. "I knew something was in +the wind. The little green god of jealousy has Tom in his clutches. +That's why my inventive friend was so anxious to go on this expedition +when he learned Beecher was to go. He wants to beat him. I guess the +professor has plainly shown that he wouldn't like anything better than +to cut Tom out with Mary. Whew! that's something to think about!" +</P> + +<BR><BR><BR> + +<A NAME="chap06"></A> +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +CHAPTER VI +</H3> + +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +UNPLEASANT NEWS +</H3> + +<P> +Ned Newton decided to keep to himself what he had heard at the Nestor +home. Not for the world would he let Tom Swift know of the situation. +</P> + +<P> +"That is, I won't let him know that I know," said Ned to himself, +"though he is probably as well aware of the situation as I am. But it +sure is queer that this Professor Beecher should have taken such a +fancy to Mary, and that her father should regard him so well. That is +natural, I suppose. But I wonder how Mary herself feels about it. +That is the part Tom would be most interested in. +</P> + +<P> +"No wonder Tom wants to get ahead of this young college chap, who +probably thinks he's the whole show. If he can find the buried city, +and get the idol of gold, it would be a big feather in his cap. +</P> + +<P> +"He'd have no end of honors heaped on him, and I suppose his hat +wouldn't come within three sizes of fitting him. Then he'd stand in +better than ever with Mr. Nestor. And, maybe, with Mary, too, though I +think she is loyal to Tom. But one never can tell. +</P> + +<P> +"However, I'm glad I know about it. I'll do all I can to help Tom, +without letting him know that I know. And if I can do anything to help +in finding that idol of gold for Professor Bumper, and, incidentally, +Tom, I'll do it," and he spoke aloud in his enthusiasm. +</P> + +<P> +Ned, who was walking along in the darkness, clapped his open hand down +on Tom's magazine he was carrying home to read again, and the resultant +noise was a sharp crack. As it sounded a figure jumped from behind a +tree and called tensely: +</P> + +<P> +"Hold on there!" +</P> + +<P> +Ned stopped short, thinking he was to be the victim of a holdup, but +his fears were allayed when he beheld one of the police force of +Shopton confronting him. +</P> + +<P> +"I heard what you said about gettin' the gold," went on the officer. +"I was walkin' along and I heard you talkin'. Where's your pal?" +</P> + +<P> +"I haven't any, Mr. Newbold," answered Ned with a laugh, as he +recognized the man. +</P> + +<P> +"Oh, pshaw! It's Ned Newton!" exclaimed the disappointed officer. "I +thought you was talkin' to a confederate about gold, and figured maybe +you was goin' to rob the bank." +</P> + +<P> +"No, nothing like that," answered Ned, still much amused. "I was +talking to myself about a trip Tom Swift and I are going to take +and——" +</P> + +<P> +"Oh, that's all right," responded the policeman. "I can understand it, +if it had anything to do with Tom. He's a great boy." +</P> + +<P> +"Indeed he is," agreed Ned, making a mental resolve not to be so public +with his thoughts in the future. He chatted for a moment with the +officer, and then, bidding him good-night, walked on to his home, his +mind in a whirl with conglomerate visions of buried cities, great +grinning idols of gold, and rival professors seeking to be first at the +goal. +</P> + +<P> +The next few days were busy ones for Tom, Ned and, in fact, the whole +Swift household. Tom and his father had several consultations and +conducted several experiments in regard to the new stabilizer, the +completion of which was so earnestly desired. Mr. Swift was sure he +could carry the invention to a successful conclusion. +</P> + +<P> +Ned was engaged in putting the financial affairs of the Swift Company +in shape, so they would practically run themselves during his absence. +Then, too, there was the packing of their baggage which must be seen to. +</P> + +<P> +Of course, the main details of the trip were left to Professor Bumper, +who knew just what to do. He had told Tom and Ned that all they and +Mr. Damon would have to do would be to meet him at the pier in New +York, where they would find all arrangements made. +</P> + +<P> +One day, near the end of the week (the beginning of the next being set +for the start) Eradicate came shuffling into the room where Tom was +sorting out the possessions he desired to take with him, Ned assisting +him in the task. +</P> + +<P> +"Well, Rad, what is it?" asked Tom, with businesslike energy. +</P> + +<P> +"I done heah, Massa Tom, dat yo' all's gwine off on a long trip once +mo'. Am dat so?" +</P> + +<P> +"Yes, that's so, Rad." +</P> + +<P> +"Well, den, I'se come to ast yo' whut I'd bettah take wif me. Shall I +took warm clothes or cool clothes?" +</P> + +<P> +"Well, if you were going, Rad," answered Tom with a smile, "you'd need +cool clothes, for we're going to a sort of jungle-land. But I'm sorry +to say you're not going this trip." +</P> + +<P> +"I—— I ain't gwine? Does yo' mean dat yo' all ain't gwine to take +me, Massa Tom?" +</P> + +<P> +"That's it, Rad. It isn't any trip for you." +</P> + +<P> +"Is certain not!" broke in the voice of Koku, the giant, who entered +with a big trunk Tom had sent him for. "Master want strong man like a +bull. He take Koku!" +</P> + +<P> +"Look heah!" spluttered Eradicate, and his eyes flashed. "Yo'—yo' +giant yo'—yo' may be strong laik a bull, but ya' ain't got as much +sense as mah mule, Boomerang! Massa Tom don't want no sich pusson wif +him. He's gwine to take me." +</P> + +<P> +"He take me!" cried Koku, and his voice was a roar while he beat on his +mighty chest with his huge fists. +</P> + +<P> +Tom, seeing that the dispute was likely to be bothersome, winked at Ned +and began to speak. +</P> + +<P> +"I don't believe you'd like it there, Rad—not where we're going. It's +a bad country. Why the mosquitoes there bite holes in you—raise bumps +on you as big as eggs." +</P> + +<P> +"Oh, good land!" ejaculated the old colored man. "Am dat so Massa Tom?" +</P> + +<P> +"It sure is. Then there's another kind of bug that burrows under your +fingernails, and if you don't get 'em out, your fingers drop off." +</P> + +<P> +"Oh, good land, Massa Tom! Am dat a fact?" +</P> + +<P> +"It sure is. I don't want to see those things happen to you, Rad." +</P> + +<P> +Slowly the old colored man shook his head. +</P> + +<P> +"I don't mahse'f," he said. "I—— I guess I won't go." +</P> + +<P> +Eradicate did not stop to ask how Tom and Ned proposed to combat these +two species of insects. +</P> + +<P> +But there remained Koku to dispose of, and he stood smiling broadly as +Eradicate shuffled off. +</P> + +<P> +"Me no 'fraid bugs," said the giant. +</P> + +<P> +"No," said Tom, with a look at Ned, for he did not want to take the big +man on the trip for various reasons. "No, maybe not, Koku. Your skin +is pretty tough. But I understand there are deep pools of water in the +land where we are going, and in them lives a fish that has a hide like +an alligator and a jaw like a shark. If you fall in it's all up with +you." +</P> + +<P> +"Dat true, Master Tom?" and Koku's voice trembled. +</P> + +<P> +"Well, I've never seen such a fish, I'm sure, but the natives tell +about it." +</P> + +<P> +Koku seemed to be considering the matter. Strange as it may seem, the +giant, though afraid of nothing human and brave when it came to a +hand-to-claw argument with a wild animal, had a very great fear of the +water and the unseen life within it. Even a little fresh-water crab in +a brook was enough to send him shrieking to shore. So when Tom told of +this curious fish, which many natives of Central America firmly believe +in, the giant took thought with himself. Finally, he gave a sigh and +said: +</P> + +<P> +"Me stay home and keep bad mans out of master's shop." +</P> + +<P> +"Yes, I guess that's the best thing for you," assented Tom with an air +of relief. He and Ned had talked the matter over, and they had agreed +that the presence of such a big man as Koku, in an expedition going on +a more or less secret mission, would attract too much attention. +</P> + +<P> +"Well, I guess that clears matters up," said Tom, as he looked over a +collection of rifles and small arms, to decide which to take. "We +won't have them to worry about." +</P> + +<P> +"No, only Professor Beecher," remarked Ned, with a sharp look at his +chum. +</P> + +<P> +"Oh, we'll dispose of him all right!" asserted Tom boldly. "He hasn't +had any experience in business of this sort, and with what you and +Professor Bumper and Mr. Damon know we ought to have little trouble in +getting ahead of the young man." +</P> + +<P> +"Not to speak of your own aid," added Ned. +</P> + +<P> +"Oh, I'll do what I can, of course," said Tom, with an air of +indifference. But Ned knew his chum would work ceaselessly to help get +the idol of gold. +</P> + +<P> +Tom gave no sign that there was any complication in his affair with +Mary Nestor, and of course Ned did not tell anything of what he knew +about it. +</P> + +<P> +That night saw the preparations of Ned and Tom about completed. There +were one or two matters yet to finish on Tom's part in relation to his +business, but these offered no difficulties. +</P> + +<P> +The two chums were in the Swift home, talking over the prospective +trip, when Mrs. Baggert, answering a ring at the front door, announced +that Mr. Damon was outside. +</P> + +<P> +"Tell him to come in," ordered Tom. +</P> + +<P> +"Bless my baggage check!" exclaimed the excitable man, as he shook +hands with Tom and Ned and noted the packing evidences all about. +"You're ready to go to the land of wonders." +</P> + +<P> +"The land of wonders?" repeated Ned. +</P> + +<P> +"Yes, that's what Professor Bumper calls the part of Honduras we're +going to. And it must be wonderful, Tom. Think of whole cities, some +of them containing idols and temples of gold, buried thirty and forty +feet under the surface! Wonderful is hardly the name for it!" +</P> + +<P> +"It'll be great!" cried Ned. "I suppose you're ready, Mr. Damon—you +and the professor?" +</P> + +<P> +"Yes. But, Tom, I have a bit of unpleasant news for you." +</P> + +<P> +"Unpleasant news?" +</P> + +<P> +"Yes. You know Professor Bumper spoke of a rival—a man named Beecher +who is a member of the faculty of a new and wealthy college." +</P> + +<P> +"I heard him speak of him—yes," and the way Tom said it no one would +have suspected that he had any personal interest in the matter. +</P> + +<P> +"He isn't going to give his secret away," thought Ned. +</P> + +<P> +"Well, this Professor Beecher, you know," went on Mr. Damon, "also +knows about the idol of gold, and is trying to get ahead of Professor +Bumper in the search." +</P> + +<P> +"He did say something of it, but nothing was certain," remarked Tom. +</P> + +<P> +"But it is certain!" exclaimed Mr. Damon. "Bless my toothpick, it's +altogether too certain!" +</P> + +<P> +"How is that?" asked Tom. "Is Beecher certainly going to Honduras?" +</P> + +<P> +"Yes, of course. But what is worse, he and his party will leave New +York on the same steamer with us!" +</P> + +<BR><BR><BR> + +<A NAME="chap07"></A> +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +CHAPTER VII +</H3> + +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +TOM HEARS SOMETHING +</H3> + +<P> +On hearing Mr. Damon's rather startling announcement, Tom and Ned +looked at one another. There seemed to be something back of the simple +statement—an ominous and portending "something." +</P> + +<P> +"On the same steamer with us, is he?" mused Tom. +</P> + +<P> +"How did you learn this?" asked Ned. +</P> + +<P> +"Just got a wire from Professor Bumper telling me. He asked me to +telephone to you about it, as he was too busy to call up on the long +distance from New York. But instead of 'phoning I decided to come over +myself." +</P> + +<P> +"Glad you did," said Tom, heartily. "Did Professor Bumper want us to +do anything special, now that it is certain his rival will be so close +on his trail?" +</P> + +<P> +"Yes, he asked me to warn you to be careful what you did and said in +reference to the expedition." +</P> + +<P> +"Then does he fear something?" asked Ned. +</P> + +<P> +"Yes, in a way. I think he is very much afraid this young Beecher will +not only be first on the site of the underground city, but that he may +be the first to discover the idol of gold. It would be a great thing +for a young archaeologist like Beecher to accomplish a mission of this +sort, and beat Professor Bumper in the race." +</P> + +<P> +"Do you think that's why Beecher decided to go on the same steamer we +are to take?" asked Ned. +</P> + +<P> +"Yes, I do," said Mr. Damon. "Though from what Professor Bumper said I +know he regards Professor Beecher as a perfectly honorable man, as well +as a brilliant student. I do not believe Beecher or his party would +stoop to anything dishonorable or underhand, though they would not +hesitate, nor would we, to take advantage of every fair chance to win +in the race." +</P> + +<P> +"No, I suppose that's right," observed Tom; but there was a queer gleam +in his eye, and his chum wondered if Tom did not have in mind the +prospective race between himself and Fenimore Beecher for the regard of +Mary Nestor. "We'll do our best to win, and any one is at liberty to +travel on the same steamer we are to take," added the young inventor, +and his tone became more incisive. +</P> + +<P> +"It will be all the livelier with two expeditions after the same golden +idol," remarked Ned. +</P> + +<P> +"Yes, I think we're in for some excitement," observed Tom grimly. But +even he did not realize all that lay before them ere they would reach +Kurzon. +</P> + +<P> +Mr. Damon, having delivered his message, and remarking that his +preparations for leaving were nearly completed, went back to +Waterfield, from there to proceed to New York in a few days with Tom +and Ned, to meet Professor Bumper. +</P> + +<P> +"Well, I guess we have everything in pretty good shape," remarked Tom +to his chum a day or so after the visit of Mr. Damon. "Everything is +packed, and as I have a few personal matters to attend to I think I'll +take the afternoon off." +</P> + +<P> +"Go to it!" laughed Ned, guessing a thing of two. "I've got a raft of +stuff myself to look after, but don't let that keep you." +</P> + +<P> +"If there is anything I can do," began Tom, "don't hesitate to——" +</P> + +<P> +"Nonsense!" exclaimed Ned. "I can do it all alone. It's some of the +company's business, anyhow, and I'm paid for looking after that." +</P> + +<P> +"All right, then I'll cut along," Tom said, and he wore a relieved air. +</P> + +<P> +"He's going to see Mary," observed Ned with a grin, as he observed Tom +hop into his trim little roadster, which under his orders, Koku had +polished and cleaned until it looked as though it had just come from +the factory. +</P> + +<P> +A little later the trim and speedy car drew up in front of the Nestor +home, and Tom bounded up on the front porch, his heart not altogether +as light as his feet. +</P> + +<P> +"No, I'm sorry, but Mary isn't in," said Mrs. Nestor, answering his +inquiry after greeting him. +</P> + +<P> +"Not at home?" +</P> + +<P> +"No, she went on a little visit to her cousin's at Fayetteville. She +said something about letting you know she was going." +</P> + +<P> +"She did drop me a card," answered Tom, and, somehow he did not feel at +all cheerful. "But I thought it wasn't until next week she was going." +</P> + +<P> +"That was her plan, Tom. But she changed it. Her cousin wired, asking +her to advance the date, and this Mary did. There was something about +a former school chum who was also to be at Myra's house—Myra is Mary's +cousin you know." +</P> + +<P> +"Yes, I know," assented the young inventor. "And so Mary is gone. How +long is she going to stay?" +</P> + +<P> +"Oh, about two weeks. She wasn't quite certain. It depends on the +kind of a time she has, I suppose." +</P> + +<P> +"Yes, I suppose so," agreed Tom. "Well, if you write before I do you +might say I called, Mrs. Nestor." +</P> + +<P> +"I will, Tom. And I know Mary will be sorry she wasn't here to take a +ride with you; it's such a nice day," and the lady smiled as she looked +at the speedy roadster. +</P> + +<P> +"Maybe—maybe you'd like to come for a spin?" asked Tom, half +desperately. +</P> + +<P> +"No, thank you. I'm too old to be jounced around in one of those small +cars." +</P> + +<P> +"Nonsense! She rides as easily as a Pullman sleeper." +</P> + +<P> +"Well, I have to go to a Red Cross meeting, anyhow, so I can't come, +Tom. Thank you, just the same." +</P> + +<P> +Tom did not drive back immediately to his home. He wanted to do a bit +of thinking, and he believed he could do it best by himself. So it was +late afternoon when he again greeted Ned, who, meanwhile, had been kept +very busy. +</P> + +<P> +"Well?" called Tom's chum. +</P> + +<P> +"Um!" was the only answer, and Tom called Koku to put the car away in +the garage. +</P> + +<P> +"Something wrong," mused Ned. +</P> + +<P> +The next three days were crowded with events and with work. Mr. Damon +came over frequently to consult with Tom and Ned, and finally the last +of their baggage had been packed, certain of Tom's inventions and +implements sent on by express to New York to be taken to Honduras, and +then our friends themselves followed to the metropolis. +</P> + +<P> +"Good-bye, Tom," said his father. "Good-bye, and good luck! If you +don't get the idol of gold I'm sure you'll have experiences that will +be valuable to you." +</P> + +<P> +"We're going to get the idol of gold!" said Tom determinedly. +</P> + +<P> +"Look out for the bad bugs," suggested Eradicate. +</P> + +<P> +"We will," promised Ned. +</P> + +<P> +Tom's last act was to send a message to Mary Nestor, and then he, with +Ned and Mr. Damon, who blessed everything in sight from the gasoline in +the automobile to the blue sky overhead, started for the station. +</P> + +<P> +New York was reached without incident. The trio put up at the hotel +where Professor Bumper was to meet them. +</P> + +<P> +"He hasn't arrived yet," said Tom, after glancing over the names on the +hotel register and not seeing Professor Bumper's among them. +</P> + +<P> +"Oh, he'll be here all right," asserted Mr. Damon. "Bless my galvanic +battery! he sent me a telegram at one o'clock this morning saying he'd +be sure to meet us in New York. No fear of him not starting for the +land of wonders." +</P> + +<P> +"There are some other professors registered, though," observed Ned, as +he glanced at the book, noting the names of several scientists of whom +he and Tom had read. +</P> + +<P> +"Yes. I wonder what they're doing in New York," replied Tom. "They +are from New England. Maybe there's a convention going on. Well, +we'll have to wait, that's all, until Professor Bumper comes." +</P> + +<P> +And during that wait Tom heard something that surprised him and caused +him no little worry. It was when Ned came back to his room, which +adjoined Tom's, that the young treasurer gave his chum the news. +</P> + +<P> +"I say, Tom!" Ned exclaimed. "Who do you think those professors are, +whose names we saw on the register?" +</P> + +<P> +"I haven't the least idea." +</P> + +<P> +"Why, they're of Beecher's party!" +</P> + +<P> +"You don't mean it!" +</P> + +<P> +"I surely do." +</P> + +<P> +"How do you know?" +</P> + +<P> +"I happened to overhear two of them talking down in the lobby a while +ago. They didn't make any secret of it. They spoke freely of going +with Beecher to some ancient city in Honduras, to look for an idol of +gold." +</P> + +<P> +"They did? But where is Beecher?" +</P> + +<P> +"He hasn't joined them yet. Their plans have been changed. Instead of +leaving on the same steamer we are to take in the morning they are to +come on a later one. The professors here are waiting for Beecher to +come." +</P> + +<P> +"Why isn't he here now?" +</P> + +<P> +"Well, I heard one of the other scientists say that he had gone to a +place called Fayetteville, and will come on from there." +</P> + +<P> +"Fayetteville!" ejaculated Tom. +</P> + +<P> +"Yes. That isn't far from Shopton." +</P> + +<P> +"I know," assented Tom. "I wonder—I wonder why he is going there?" +</P> + +<P> +"I can tell you that, too." +</P> + +<P> +"You can? You're a regular detective." +</P> + +<P> +"No, I just happened to overhear it. Beecher is going to call on Mary +Nestor in Fayetteville, so his friends here said he told them, and his +call has to do with an important matter—to him!" and Ned gazed +curiously at his chum. +</P> + +<BR><BR><BR> + +<A NAME="chap08"></A> +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +CHAPTER VIII +</H3> + +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +OFF FOR HONDURAS +</H3> + +<P> +Just what Tom's thoughts were, Ned, of course, could not guess. But by +the flush that showed under the tan of his chum's cheeks the young +financial secretary felt pretty certain that Tom was a bit apprehensive +of the outcome of Professor Beecher's call on Mary Nestor. +</P> + +<P> +"So he is going to see her about 'something important,' Ned?" +</P> + +<P> +"That's what some members of his party called it." +</P> + +<P> +"And they're waiting here for him to join them?" +</P> + +<P> +"Yes. And it means waiting a week for another steamer. It must be +something pretty important, don't you think, to cause Beecher to risk +that delay in starting after the idol of gold?" +</P> + +<P> +"Important? Yes, I suppose so," assented Tom. "And yet even if he +waits for the next steamer he will get to Honduras nearly as soon as we +do." +</P> + +<P> +"How is that?" +</P> + +<P> +"The next boat is a faster one." +</P> + +<P> +"Then why don't we take that? I hate dawdling along on a slow +freighter." +</P> + +<P> +"Well, for one thing it would hardly do to change now, when all our +goods are on board. And besides, the captain of the _Relstab_, on +which we are going to sail, is a friend of Professor Bumper's." +</P> + +<P> +"Well, I'm just as glad Beecher and his party aren't going with us," +resumed Ned, after a pause. "It might make trouble." +</P> + +<P> +"Oh, I'm ready for any trouble HE might make!" quickly exclaimed Tom. +</P> + +<P> +He meant trouble that might be developed in going to Honduras, and +starting the search for the lost city and the idol of gold. This kind +of trouble Tom and his friends had experienced before, on other trips +where rivals had sought to frustrate their ends. +</P> + +<P> +But, in his heart, though he said nothing to Ned about it, Tom was +worried. Much as he disliked to admit it to himself, he feared the +visit of Professor Beecher to Mary Nestor in Fayetteville had but one +meaning. +</P> + +<P> +"I wonder if he's going to propose to her," thought Tom. "He has the +field all to himself now, and her father likes him. That's in his +favor. I guess Mr. Nestor has never quite forgiven me for that mistake +about the dynamite box, and that wasn't my fault. Then, too, the +Beecher and Nestor families have been friends for years. Yes, he +surely has the inside edge on me, and if he gets her to throw me +over—— Well, I won't give up without a fight!" and Tom mentally +girded himself for a battle of wits. +</P> + +<P> +"He's relying on the prestige he'll get out of this idol of gold if his +party finds it," thought on the young inventor. "But I'll help find it +first. I'm glad to have a little start of him, anyhow, even if it +isn't more than two days. Though if our vessel is held back much by +storms he may get on the ground first. However, that can't be helped. +I'll do the best I can." +</P> + +<P> +These thoughts shot through Tom's mind even as Ned was asking his +questions and making comments. Then the young inventor, shaking his +shoulders as though to rid them of some weight, remarked: +</P> + +<P> +"Well, come on out and see the sights. It will be long before we look +on Broadway again." +</P> + +<P> +When the chums returned from their sightseeing excursion, they found +that Professor Bumper had arrived. +</P> + +<P> +"Where's Professor Bumper?" asked Ned, the next day. +</P> + +<P> +"In his room, going over books, papers and maps to make sure he has +everything." +</P> + +<P> +"And Mr. Damon?" +</P> + +<P> +Tom did not have to answer that last question. Into the apartment came +bursting the excited individual himself. +</P> + +<P> +"Bless my overshoes!" he cried, "I've been looking everywhere for you! +Come on, there's no time to lose!" +</P> + +<P> +"What's the matter now?" asked Ned. "Is the hotel on fire?" +</P> + +<P> +"Has anything happened to Professor Bumper?" Tom demanded, a wild idea +forming in his head that perhaps some one of the Beecher party had +tried to kidnap the discoverer of the lost city of Pelone. +</P> + +<P> +"Oh, everything is all right," answered Mr. Damon. "But it's nearly +time for the show to start, and we don't want to be late. I have +tickets." +</P> + +<P> +"For what?" asked Tom and Ned together. +</P> + +<P> +"The movies," was the laughing reply. "Bless my loose ribs! but I +wouldn't miss him for anything. He's in a new play called 'Up in a +Balloon Boys.' It's great!" and Mr. Damon named a certain comic moving +picture star in whose horse-play Mr. Damon took a curious interest. +Tom and Ned were glad enough to go, Tom that he might have a chance to +do a certain amount of thinking, and Ned because he was still boy +enough to like moving pictures. +</P> + +<P> +"I wonder, Tom," said Mr. Damon, as they came out of the theater two +hours later, all three chuckling at the remembrance of what they had +seen, "I wonder you never turned your inventive mind to the movies." +</P> + +<P> +"Maybe I will, some day," said Tom. +</P> + +<P> +He spoke rather uncertainly. The truth of the matter was that he was +still thinking deeply of the visit of Professor Beecher to Mary Nestor, +and wondering what it portended. +</P> + +<P> +But if Tom's sleep was troubled that night he said nothing of it to his +friends. He was up early the next morning, for they were to leave that +day, and there was still considerable to be done in seeing that their +baggage and supplies were safely loaded, and in attending to the last +details of some business matters. +</P> + +<P> +While at the hotel they had several glimpses of the members of the +Beecher party who were awaiting the arrival of the young professor who +was to lead them into the wilds of Honduras. But our friends did not +seek the acquaintance of their rivals. The latter, likewise, remained +by themselves, though they knew doubtless that there was likely to be a +strenuous race for the possession of the idol of gold, then, it was +presumed, buried deep in some forest-covered city. +</P> + +<P> +Professor Bumper had made his arrangements carefully. As he explained +to his friends, they would take the steamer from New York to Puerto +Cortes, one of the principal seaports of Honduras. This is a town of +about three thousand inhabitants, with an excellent harbor and a big +pier along which vessels can tie up and discharge their cargoes +directly into waiting cars. +</P> + +<P> +The preparations were finally completed. The party went aboard the +steamer, which was a large freight vessel, carrying a limited number of +passengers, and late one afternoon swung down New York Bay. +</P> + +<P> +"Off for Honduras!" cried Ned gaily, as they passed the Statue of +Liberty. "I wonder what will happen before we see that little lady +again." +</P> + +<P> +"Who knows?" asked Tom, shrugging his shoulders, Spanish fashion. And +there came before him the vision of a certain "little lady," about whom +he had been thinking deeply of late. +</P> + +<BR><BR><BR> + +<A NAME="chap09"></A> +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +CHAPTER IX +</H3> + +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +VAL JACINTO +</H3> + +<P> +"Rather tame, isn't it, Tom?" +</P> + +<P> +"Well, Ned, it isn't exactly like going up in an airship," and Tom +Swift who was gazing over the rail down into the deep blue water of the +Caribbean Sea, over which their vessel was then steaming, looked at his +chum beside him. +</P> + +<P> +"No, and your submarine voyage had it all over this one for +excitement," went on Ned. "When I think of that——" +</P> + +<P> +"Bless my sea legs!" interrupted Mr. Damon, overhearing the +conversation. "Don't speak of THAT trip. My wife never forgave me for +going on it. But I had a fine time," he added with a twinkle of his +eyes. +</P> + +<P> +"Yes, that was quite a trip," observed Tom, as his mind went back to +it. "But this one isn't over yet remember. And I shouldn't be +surprised if we had a little excitement very soon." +</P> + +<P> +"What do you mean?" asked Ned. +</P> + +<P> +Up to this time the voyage from New York down into the tropical seas +had been anything but exciting. There were not many passengers besides +themselves, and the weather had been fine. +</P> + +<P> +At first, used as they were to the actions of unscrupulous rivals in +trying to thwart their efforts, Tom and Ned had been on the alert for +any signs of hidden enemies on board the steamer. But aside from a +little curiosity when it became known that they were going to explore +little-known portions of Honduras, the other passengers took hardly any +interest in our travelers. +</P> + +<P> +It was thought best to keep secret the fact that they were going to +search for a wonderful idol of gold. Not even the mule and ox-cart +drivers, whom they would hire to take them into the wilds of the +interior would be told of the real object of the search. It would be +given out that they were looking for interesting ruins of ancient +cities, with a view to getting such antiquities as might be there. +</P> + +<P> +"What do you mean?" asked Ned again, when Tom did not answer him +immediately. "What's the excitement?" +</P> + +<P> +"I think we're in for a storm," was the reply. "The barometer is +falling and I see the crew going about making everything snug. So we +may have a little trouble toward this end of our trip." +</P> + +<P> +"Let it come!" exclaimed Mr. Damon. "We're not afraid of trouble, Tom +Swift, are we?" +</P> + +<P> +"No, to be sure we're not. And yet it looks as though the storm would +be a bad one." +</P> + +<P> +"Then I am going to see if my books and papers are ready, so I can get +them together in a hurry in case we have to take to the life-boats," +said Professor Bumper, coming on deck at that moment. "It won't do to +lose them. If we didn't have the map we might not be able to find——" +</P> + +<P> +"Ahem!" exclaimed Tom, with unnecessary emphasis it seemed. "I'll help +you go over your papers, Professor," he added, and with a wink and a +motion of his hand, he enjoined silence on his friend. Ned looked +around for a reason for this, and observed a man, evidently of Spanish +extraction, passing them as he paced up and down the deck. +</P> + +<P> +"What's the matter?" asked the scientist in a whisper, as the man went +on. "Do you know him? Is he a——?" +</P> + +<P> +"I don't know anything about him," said Tom; "but it is best not to +speak of our trip before strangers." +</P> + +<P> +"You are right, Tom," said Professor Bumper. "I'll be more careful." +</P> + +<P> +A storm was brewing, that was certain. A dull, sickly yellow began to +obscure the sky, and the water, from a beautiful blue, turned a slate +color and ran along the sides of the vessel with a hissing sound as +though the sullen waves would ask nothing better than to suck the craft +down into their depths. The wind, which had been freshening, now sang +in louder tones as it hummed through the rigging and the funnel stays +and bowled over the receiving conductors of the wireless. +</P> + +<P> +Sharp commands from the ship's officers hastened the work of the crew +in making things snug, and life lines were strung along deck for the +safety of such of the passengers as might venture up when the blow +began. +</P> + +<P> +The storm was not long in coming. The howling of the wind grew louder, +flecks of foam began to separate themselves from the crests of the +waves, and the vessel pitched, rolled and tossed more violently. At +first Tom and his friends thought they were in for no more than an +ordinary blow, but as the storm progressed, and the passengers became +aware of the anxiety on the part of the officers and crew, the alarm +spread among them. +</P> + +<P> +It really was a violent storm, approaching a hurricane in force, and at +one time it seemed as though the craft, having been heeled far over +under a staggering wave that swept her decks, would not come back to an +even keel. +</P> + +<P> +There was a panic among some of the passengers, and a few excited men +behaved in a way that caused prompt action on the part of the first +officer, who drove them back to the main cabin under threat of a +revolver. For the men were determined to get to the lifeboats, and a +small craft would not have had a minute to live in such seas as were +running. +</P> + +<P> +But the vessel proved herself sturdier than the timid ones had dared to +hope, and she was soon running before the blast, going out of her +course, it is true, but avoiding the danger among the many cays, or +small islands, that dot the Caribbean Sea. +</P> + +<P> +There was nothing to do but to let the storm blow itself out, which it +did in two days. Then came a period of delightful weather. The cargo +had shifted somewhat, which gave the steamer a rather undignified list. +</P> + +<P> +This, as well as the loss of a deckhand overboard, was the effect of +the hurricane, and though the end of the trip came amid sunshine and +sweet-scented tropical breezes, many could not forget the dangers +through which they had passed. +</P> + +<P> +In due time Tom and his party found themselves safely housed in the +small hotel at Puerto Cortes, their belongings stored in a convenient +warehouse and themselves, rather weary by reason of the stress of +weather, ready for the start into the interior wilds of Honduras. +</P> + +<P> +"How are we going to make the trip?" asked Ned, as they sat at supper, +the first night after their arrival, eating of several dishes, the +red-pepper condiments of which caused frequent trips to the water +pitcher. +</P> + +<P> +"We can go in two ways, and perhaps we shall find it to our advantage +to use both means," said Professor Bumper. "To get to this city of +Kurzon," he proceeded in a low voice, so that none of the others in the +dining-room would hear them, "we will have to go either by mule back or +boat to a point near Copan. As near as I can tell by the ancient maps, +Kurzon is in the Copan valley. +</P> + +<P> +"Now the Chamelecon river seems to run to within a short distance of +there, but there is no telling how far up it may be navigable. If we +can go by boat it will be much more comfortable. Travel by mules and +ox-carts is slow and sure, but the roads are very bad, as I have heard +from friends who have made explorations in Honduras. +</P> + +<P> +"And, as I said, we may have to use both land and water travel to get +us where we want to go. We can proceed as far as possible up the +river, and then take to the mules." +</P> + +<P> +"What about arranging for boats and animals?" asked Tom. "I should +think——" +</P> + +<P> +He suddenly ceased talking and reached for the water, taking several +large swallows. +</P> + +<P> +"Whew!" he exclaimed, when he could catch his breath. "That was a hot +one." +</P> + +<P> +"What did you do?" asked Ned. +</P> + +<P> +"Bit into a nest of red pepper. Guess I'll have to tell that cook to +scatter his hits. He's bunching 'em too much in my direction," and Tom +wiped the tears from his eyes. +</P> + +<P> +"To answer your question," said Professor Bumper, "I will say that I +have made partial arrangements for men and animals, and boats if it is +found feasible to use them. I've been in correspondence with one of +the merchants here, and he promised to make arrangements for us." +</P> + +<P> +"When do we leave?" asked Mr. Damon. +</P> + +<P> +"As soon as possible. I am not going to risk anything by delay," and +it was evident the professor referred to his young rival whose arrival +might be expected almost any time. +</P> + +<P> +As the party was about to leave the table, they were approached by a +tall, dignified Spaniard who bowed low, rather exaggeratedly low, Ned +thought, and addressed them in fairly good English. +</P> + +<P> +"Your pardons, Senors," he began, "but if it will please you to avail +yourself of the humble services of myself, I shall have great pleasure +in guiding you into the interior. I have at my command both mules and +boats." +</P> + +<P> +"How do you know we are going into the interior?" asked Tom, a bit +sharply, for he did not like the assurance of the man. +</P> + +<P> +"Pardon, Senor. I saw that you are from the States. And those from +the States do not come to Honduras except for two reasons. To travel +and make explorations or to start trade, and professors do not usually +engage in trade," and he bowed to Professor Bumper. +</P> + +<P> +"I saw your name on the register," he proceeded, "and it was not +difficult to guess your mission," and he flashed a smile on the party, +his white teeth showing brilliantly beneath his small, black moustache. +</P> + +<P> +"I make it my business to outfit traveling parties, either for +business, pleasure or scientific matters. I am, at your service, Val +Jacinto," and he introduced himself with another low bow. +</P> + +<P> +For a moment Tom and his friends hardly knew how to accept this offer. +It might be, as the man had said, that he was a professional tour +conductor, like those who have charge of Egyptian donkey-boys and +guides. Or might he not be a spy? +</P> + +<P> +This occurred to Tom no less than to Professor Bumper. They looked at +one another while Val Jacinto bowed again and murmured: +</P> + +<P> +"At your service!" +</P> + +<P> +"Can you provide means for taking us to the Copan valley?" asked the +professor. "You are right in one respect. I am a scientist and I +purpose doing some exploring near Copan. Can you get us there?" +</P> + +<P> +"Most expensively—I mean, most expeditionlessly," said Val Jacinto +eagerly. "Pardon my unhappy English. I forget at times. The charges +will be most moderate. I can send you by boat as far as the river +travel is good, and then have mules and ox-carts in waiting." +</P> + +<P> +"How far is it?" asked Tom. +</P> + +<P> +"A hundred miles as the vulture flies, Senor, but much farther by river +and road. We shall be a week going." +</P> + +<P> +"A hundred miles in a week!" groaned Ned. "Say, Tom, if you had your +aeroplane we'd be there in an hour." +</P> + +<P> +"Yes, but we haven't it. However, we're in no great rush." +</P> + +<P> +"But we must not lose time," said Professor Bumper. "I shall consider +your offer," he added to Val Jacinto. +</P> + +<P> +"Very good, Senor. I am sure you will be pleased with the humble +service I may offer you, and my charges will be small. Adios," and he +bowed himself away. +</P> + +<P> +"What do you think of him?" asked Ned, as they went up to their rooms +in the hotel, or rather one large room, containing several beds. +</P> + +<P> +"He's a pretty slick article," said Mr. Damon. "Bless my check-book! +but he spotted us at once, in spite of our secrecy." +</P> + +<P> +"I guess these guide purveyors are trained for that sort of thing," +observed the scientist. "I know my friends have often spoken of having +had the same experience. However, I shall ask my friend, who is in +business here, about this Val Jacinto, and if I find him all right we +may engage him." +</P> + +<P> +Inquiries next morning brought the information, from the head of a +rubber exporting firm with whom the professor was acquainted, that the +Spaniard was regularly engaged in transporting parties into the +interior, and was considered efficient, careful and as honest as +possible, considering the men he engaged as workers. +</P> + +<P> +"So we have decided to engage you," Professor Bumper informed Val +Jacinto the afternoon following the meeting. +</P> + +<P> +"I am more than pleased, Senor. I shall take you into the wilds of +Honduras. At your service!" and he bowed low. +</P> + +<P> +"Humph! I don't just like the way our friend Val says that," observed +Tom to Ned a little later. "I'd have been better pleased if he had +said he'd guide us into the wilds and out again." +</P> + +<P> +If Tom could have seen the crafty smile on the face of the Spaniard as +the man left the hotel, the young inventor might have felt even less +confidence in the guide. +</P> + +<BR><BR><BR> + +<A NAME="chap10"></A> +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +CHAPTER X +</H3> + +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +IN THE WILDS +</H3> + +<P> +"All aboard! Step lively now! This boat makes no stops this side of +Boston!" cried Ned Newton gaily, as he got into one of the several tree +canoes provided for the transportation of the party up the Chamelecon +river, for the first stage of their journey into the wilds of Honduras. +"All aboard! This reminds me of my old camping days, Tom." +</P> + +<P> +It brought those days back, in a measure, to Tom also. For there were +a number of canoes filled with the goods of the party, while the +members themselves occupied a larger one with their personal baggage. +Strong, half-naked Indian paddlers were in charge of the canoes which +were of sturdy construction and light draft, since the river, like most +tropical streams, was of uncertain depths, choked here and there with +sand bars or tropical growths. +</P> + +<P> +Finding that Val Jacinto was regularly engaged in the business of +taking explorers and mine prospectors into the interior, Professor +Bumper had engaged the man. He seemed to be efficient. At the +promised time he had the canoes and paddlers on hand and the goods +safely stowed away while one big craft was fitted up as comfortably as +possible for the men of the party. +</P> + +<P> +As Ned remarked, it did look like a camping party, for in the canoes +were tents, cooking utensils and, most important, mosquito canopies of +heavy netting. +</P> + +<P> +The insect pests of Honduras, as in all tropical countries, are +annoying and dangerous. Therefore it was imperative to sleep under +mosquito netting. +</P> + +<P> +On the advice of Val Jacinto, who was to accompany them, the travelers +were to go up the river about fifty miles. This was as far as it would +be convenient to use the canoes, the guide told Tom and his friends, +and from there on the trip to the Copan valley would be made on the +backs of mules, which would carry most of the baggage and equipment. +The heavier portions would be transported in ox-carts. +</P> + +<P> +As Professor Bumper expected to do considerable excavating in order to +locate the buried city, or cities, as the case might be, he had to +contract for a number of Indian diggers and laborers. These could be +hired in Copan, it was said. +</P> + +<P> +The plan, therefore, was to travel by canoes during the less heated +parts of the day, and tie up at night, making camp on shore in the +net-protected tents. As for the Indians, they did not seem to mind the +bites of the insects. They sometimes made a smudge fire, Val Jacinto +had said, but that was all. +</P> + +<P> +"Well, we haven't seen anything of Beecher and his friends," remarked +the young inventor as they were about to start. +</P> + +<P> +"No, he doesn't seem to have arrived," agreed Professor Bumper. "We'll +get ahead of him, and so much the better. +</P> + +<P> +"Well, are we all ready to start?" he continued, as he looked over the +little flotilla which carried his party and his goods. +</P> + +<P> +"The sooner the better!" cried Tom, and Ned fancied his chum was +unusually eager. +</P> + +<P> +"I guess he wants to make good before Beecher gets the chance to show +Mary Nestor what he can do," thought Ned. "Tom sure is after that idol +of gold." +</P> + +<P> +"You may start, Senor Jacinto," said the professor, and the guide +called something in Indian dialect to the rowers. Lines were cast off +and the boats moved out into the stream under the influence of the +sturdy paddlers. +</P> + +<P> +"Well, this isn't so bad," observed Ned, as he made himself comfortable +in his canoe. "How about it, Tom?" +</P> + +<P> +"Oh, no. But this is only the beginning." +</P> + +<P> +A canopy had been arranged over their boat to keep off the scorching +rays of the sun. The boat containing the exploring party and Val +Jacinto took the lead, the baggage craft following. At the place where +it flowed into the bay on which Puerto Cortes was built, the stream was +wide and deep. +</P> + +<P> +The guide called something to the Indians, who increased their stroke. +</P> + +<P> +"I tell them to pull hard and that at the end of the day's journey they +will have much rest and refreshment," he translated to Professor Bumper +and the others. +</P> + +<P> +"Bless my ham sandwich, but they'll need plenty of some sort of +refreshment," said Mr. Damon, with a sigh. "I never knew it to be so +hot." +</P> + +<P> +"Don't complain yet," advised Tom, with a laugh. "The worst is yet to +come." +</P> + +<P> +It really was not unpleasant traveling, aside from the heat. And they +had expected that, coming as they had to a tropical land. But, as Tom +said, what lay before them might be worse. +</P> + +<P> +In a little while they had left behind them all signs of civilization. +The river narrowed and flowed sluggishly between the banks which were +luxuriant with tropical growth. Now and then some lonely Indian hut +could be seen, and occasionally a craft propelled by a man who was +trying to gain a meager living from the rubber forest which hemmed in +the stream on either side. +</P> + +<P> +As the canoe containing the men was paddled along, there floated down +beside it what seemed to be a big, rough log. +</P> + +<P> +"I wonder if that is mahogany," remarked Mr. Damon, reaching over to +touch it. "Mahogany is one of the most valuable woods of Honduras, and +if this is a log of that nature—— +</P> + +<P> +"Bless my watch chain!" he suddenly cried. "It's alive!" +</P> + +<P> +And the "log" was indeed so, for there was a sudden flash of white +teeth, a long red opening showed, and then came a click as an immense +alligator, having opened and closed his mouth, sank out of sight in a +swirl of water. +</P> + +<P> +Mr. Damon drew back so suddenly that he tilted the canoe, and the black +paddlers looked around wonderingly. +</P> + +<P> +"Alligator," explained Jacinto succinctly, in their tongue. +</P> + +<P> +"Ugh!" they grunted. +</P> + +<P> +"Bless my—bless my——" hesitated Mr. Damon, and for one of the very +few times in his life his language failed him. +</P> + +<P> +"Are there many of them hereabouts?" asked Ned, looking back at the +swirl left by the saurian. +</P> + +<P> +"Plenty," said the guide, with a shrug of his shoulders. He seemed to +do as much talking that way, and with his hands, as he did in speech. +"The river is full of them." +</P> + +<P> +"Dangerous?" queried Tom. +</P> + +<P> +"Don't go in swimming," was the significant advice. "Wait, I'll show +you," and he called up the canoe just behind. +</P> + +<P> +In this canoe was a quantity of provisions. There was a chunk of meat +among other things, a gristly piece, seeing which Mr. Damon had +objected to its being brought along, but the guide had said it would do +for fish bait. With a quick motion of his hand, as he sat in the +awning-covered stern with Tom, Ned and the others, Jacinto sent the +chunk of meat out into the muddy stream. +</P> + +<P> +Hardly a second later there was a rushing in the water as though a +submarine were about to come up. An ugly snout was raised, two rows of +keen teeth snapped shut as a scissors-like jaw opened, and the meat was +gone. +</P> + +<P> +"See!" was the guide's remark, and something like a cold shiver of fear +passed over the white members of the party. "This water is not made in +which to swim. Be careful!" +</P> + +<P> +"We certainly shall," agreed Tom. "They're fierce." +</P> + +<P> +"And always hungry," observed Jacinto grimly. +</P> + +<P> +"And to think that I—that I nearly had my hand on it," murmured Mr. +Damon. "Ugh! Bless my eyeglasses!" +</P> + +<P> +"The alligator nearly had your hand," said the guide. "They can turn +in the water like a flash, wherefore it is not wise to pat one on the +tail lest it present its mouth instead." +</P> + +<P> +They paddled on up the river, the dusky Indians now and then breaking +out into a chant that seemed to give their muscles new energy. The +song, if song it was, passed from one boat to the other, and as the +chant boomed forth the craft shot ahead more swiftly. +</P> + +<P> +They made a landing about noon, and lunch was served. Tom and his +friends were hungry in spite of the heat. Moreover, they were +experienced travelers and had learned not to fret over inconveniences +and discomforts. The Indians ate by themselves, two acting as servants +to Jacinto and the professor's party. +</P> + +<P> +As is usual in traveling in the tropics, a halt was made during the +heated middle of the day. Then, as the afternoon shadows were waning, +the party again took to the canoes and paddled on up the river. +</P> + +<P> +"Do you know of a good place to stop during the night?" asked Professor +Bumper of Jacinto. +</P> + +<P> +"Oh, yes; a most excellent place. It is where I always bring +scientific parties I am guiding. You may rely on me." +</P> + +<P> +It was within an hour of dusk—none too much time to allow in which to +pitch camp in the tropics, where night follows day suddenly—when a +halt was called, as a turn of the river showed a little clearing on the +edge of the forest-bound river. +</P> + +<P> +"We stay here for the night," said Jacinto. "It is a good place." +</P> + +<P> +"It looks picturesque enough," observed Mr. Damon. "But it is rather +wild." +</P> + +<P> +"We are a good distance from a settlement," agreed the guide. "But one +can not explore—and find treasure in cities," and he shrugged his +shoulders again. +</P> + +<P> +"Find treasure? What do you mean?" asked Tom quickly. "Do you think +that we——?" +</P> + +<P> +"Pardon, Senor," replied Jacinto softly. "I meant no offense. I think +that all you scientific parties will take treasure if you can find it." +</P> + +<P> +"We are looking for traces of the old Honduras civilization," put in +Professor Bumper. +</P> + +<P> +"And doubtless you will find it," was the somewhat too courteous answer +of the guide. "Make camp quickly!" he called to the Indians in their +tongue. "You must soon get under the nets or you will be eaten alive!" +he told Tom. "There are many mosquitoes here." +</P> + +<P> +The tents were set up, smudge fires built and supper quickly prepared. +Dusk fell rapidly, and as Tom and Ned walked a little way down toward +the river before turning in under the mosquito canopies, the young +financial man said: +</P> + +<P> +"Sort of lonesome and gloomy, isn't it, Tom?" +</P> + +<P> +"Yes. But you didn't expect to find a moving picture show in the wilds +of Honduras, did you?" +</P> + +<P> +"No, and yet— Look out! What's that?" suddenly cried Ned, as a great +soft, black shadow seemed to sweep out of a clump of trees toward him. +Involuntarily he clutched Tom's arm and pointed, his face showing fear +in the fast-gathering darkness. +</P> + +<BR><BR><BR> + +<A NAME="chap11"></A> +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +CHAPTER XI +</H3> + +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +THE VAMPIRES +</H3> + +<P> +Tom Swift looked deliberately around. It was characteristic of him +that, though by nature he was prompt in action, he never acted so +hurriedly as to obscure his judgment. So, though now Ned showed a +trace of strange excitement, Tom was cool. +</P> + +<P> +"What is it?" asked the young inventor. "What's the matter? What did +you think you saw, Ned; another alligator?" +</P> + +<P> +"Alligator? Nonsense! Up on shore? I saw a black shadow, and I didn't +THINK I saw it, either. I really did." +</P> + +<P> +Tom laughed quietly. +</P> + +<P> +"A shadow!" he exclaimed. "Since when were you afraid of shadows, Ned?" +</P> + +<P> +"I'm not afraid of ordinary shadows," answered Ned, and in his voice +there was an uncertain tone. "I'm not afraid of my shadow or yours, +Tom, or anybody's that I can see. But this wasn't any human shadow. +It was as if a great big blob of wet darkness had been waved over your +head." +</P> + +<P> +"That's a queer explanation," Tom said in a low voice. "A great big +blob of wet darkness!" +</P> + +<P> +"But that just describes it," went on Ned, looking up and around. "It +was just as if you were in some dark room, and some one waved a wet +velvet cloak over your head—spooky like! It didn't make a sound, but +there was a smell as if a den of some wild beast was near here. I +remember that odor from the time we went hunting with your electric +rifle in the jungle, and got near the den in the rocks where the tigers +lived." +</P> + +<P> +"Well, there is a wild beast smell all around here," admitted Tom, +sniffing the air. "It's the alligators in the river I guess. You know +they have an odor of musk." +</P> + +<P> +"Do you mean to say you didn't feel that shadow flying over us just +now?" asked Ned. +</P> + +<P> +"Well, I felt something sail through the air, but I took it to be a big +bird. I didn't pay much attention. To tell you the truth I was +thinking about Beecher—wondering when he would get here," added Tom +quickly as if to forestall any question as to whether or not his +thoughts had to do with Beecher in connection with Tom's affair of the +heart. +</P> + +<P> +"Well it wasn't a bird—at least not a regular bird," said Ned in a low +voice, as once more he looked at the dark and gloomy jungle that +stretched back from the river and behind the little clearing where the +camp had been made. +</P> + +<P> +"Come on!" cried Tom, in what he tried to make a cheerful voice. "This +is getting on your nerves, Ned, and I didn't know you had any. Let's +go back and turn in. I'm dog-tired and the mosquitoes are beginning to +find that we're here. Let's get under the nets. Then the black +shadows won't get you." +</P> + +<P> +Not at all unwilling to leave so gloomy a scene, Ned, after a brief +glance up and down the dark river, followed his chum. They found +Professor Bumper and Mr. Damon in their tent, a separate one having +been set up for the two men adjoining that of the youths. +</P> + +<P> +"Bless my fountain pen!" exclaimed Mr. Damon, as he caught sight of Tom +and Ned in the flickering light of the smudge fire between the two +canvas shelters. "We were just wondering what had become of you." +</P> + +<P> +"We were chasing shadows!" laughed Tom. "At least Ned was. But you +look cozy enough in there." +</P> + +<P> +It did, indeed, look cheerful in contrast to the damp and dark jungle +all about. Professor Bumper, being an experienced traveler, knew how +to provide for such comforts as were possible. Folding cots had been +opened for himself, Mr. Damon and the guide to sleep on, others, +similar, being set up in the tent where Tom and Ned were to sleep. In +the middle of the tent the professor had made a table of his own and +Mr. Damon's suit cases, and on this placed a small dry battery electric +light. He was making some notes, doubtless for a future book. Jacinto +was going about the camp, seeing that the Indians were at their duties, +though most of them had gone directly to sleep after supper. +</P> + +<P> +"Better get inside and under the nets," advised Professor Bumper to Tom +and Ned. "The mosquitoes here are the worst I ever saw." +</P> + +<P> +"We're beginning to believe that," returned Ned, who was unusually +quiet. "Come on, Tom. I can't stand it any longer. I'm itching in a +dozen places now from their bites." +</P> + +<P> +As Tom and Ned had no wish for a light, which would be sure to attract +insects, they entered their tent in the dark, and were soon stretched +out in comparative comfort. Tom was just on the edge of a deep sleep +when he heard Ned murmur: +</P> + +<P> +"I can't understand it!" +</P> + +<P> +"What's that?" asked the young inventor. +</P> + +<P> +"I say I can't understand it." +</P> + +<P> +"Understand what?" +</P> + +<P> +"That shadow. It was real and yet——" +</P> + +<P> +"Oh, go to sleep!" advised Tom, and, turning over, he was soon +breathing heavily and regularly, indicating that he, at least, had +taken his own advice. +</P> + +<P> +Ned, too, finally succumbed to the overpowering weariness of the first +day of travel, and he, too, slept, though it was an uneasy slumber, +disturbed by a feeling as though some one were holding a heavy black +quilt over his head, preventing him from breathing. +</P> + +<P> +The feeling, sensation or dream—whatever it was—perhaps a +nightmare—became at last so real to Ned that he struggled himself into +wakefulness. With an effort he sat up, uttering an inarticulate cry. +To his surprise he was answered. Some one asked: +</P> + +<P> +"What is the matter?" +</P> + +<P> +"Who—who are you?" asked Ned quickly, trying to peer through the +darkness. +</P> + +<P> +"This is Jacinto—your guide," was the soft answer. "I was walking +about camp and, hearing you murmuring, I came to your tent. Is +anything wrong?" +</P> + +<P> +For a moment Ned did not answer. He listened and could tell by the +continued heavy and regular breathing of his chum that Tom was still +asleep. +</P> + +<P> +"Are you in our tent?" asked Ned, at length: +</P> + +<P> +"Yes," answered Jacinto. "I came in to see what was the matter with +you. Are you ill?" +</P> + +<P> +"No, of course not," said Ned, a bit shortly. "I—I had a bad dream, +that was all. All right now." +</P> + +<P> +"For that I am glad. Try to get all the sleep you can, for we must +start early to avoid the heat of the day," and there was the sound of +the guide leaving and arranging the folds of the mosquito net behind +him to keep out the night-flying insects. +</P> + +<P> +Once more Ned composed himself to sleep, and this time successfully, +for he did not have any more unpleasant dreams. The quiet of the +jungle settled down over the camp, at least the comparative quiet of +the jungle, for there were always noises of some sort going on, from +the fall of some rotten tree limb to the scream or growl of a wild +beast, while, now and again, from the river came the pig-like grunts of +the alligators. +</P> + +<P> +It was about two o'clock in the morning, as they ascertained later, +when the whole camp—white travelers and all—was suddenly awakened by +a wild scream. It seemed to come from one of the natives, who called +out a certain word ever and over again. To Tom and Ned it sounded like: +</P> + +<P> +"Oshtoo! Oshtoo! Oshtoo!" +</P> + +<P> +"What's the matter?" cried Professor Bumper. +</P> + +<P> +"The vampires!" came the answering voice of Jacinto. "One of the +Indians has been attacked by a big vampire bat! Look out, every one! +It may be a raid by the dangerous creatures! Be careful!" +</P> + +<P> +Notwithstanding this warning Ned stuck his head out of the tent. The +same instant he was aware of a dark enfolding shadow passing over him, +and, with a shudder of fear, he jumped back. +</P> + +<BR><BR><BR> + +<A NAME="chap12"></A> +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +CHAPTER XII +</H3> + +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +A FALSE FRIEND +</H3> + +<P> +"What is it? What's the matter?" cried Tom springing from his cot and +hastening to the side of his chum in the tent. "What has happened, +Ned?" +</P> + +<P> +"I don't know, but Jacinto is yelling something about vampires!" +</P> + +<P> +"Vampires?" +</P> + +<P> +"Yes. Big bats. And he's warning us to be careful. I stuck my head +out just now and I felt that same sort of shadow I felt this evening +when we were down near the river." +</P> + +<P> +"Nonsense!" +</P> + +<P> +"I tell you I did!" +</P> + +<P> +At that instant Tom flashed a pocket electric lamp he had taken from +beneath his pillow and in the gleam of it he and Ned saw fluttering +about the tent some dark, shadow-like form, at the sight of which Tom's +chum cried: +</P> + +<P> +"There it is! That's the shadow! Look out!" and he held up his hands +instinctively to shield his face. +</P> + +<P> +"Shadow!" yelled Tom, unconsciously adding to the din that seemed to +pervade every part of the camp. "That isn't a shadow. It's substance. +It's a monster bat, and here goes for a strike at it!" +</P> + +<P> +He caught up his camera tripod which was near his cot, and made a swing +with it at the creature that had flown into the tent through an opening +it had made for itself. +</P> + +<P> +"Look out!" yelled Ned. "If it's a vampire it'll——" +</P> + +<P> +"It won't do anything to me!" shouted Tom, as he struck the creature, +knocking it into the corner of the tent with a thud that told it must +be completely stunned, if not killed. "But what's it all about, +anyhow?" Tom asked. "What's the row?" +</P> + +<P> +From without the tent came the Indian cries of: +</P> + +<P> +"Oshtoo! Oshtoo!" +</P> + +<P> +Mingled with them were calls of Jacinto, partly in Spanish, partly in +the Indian tongue and partly in English. +</P> + +<P> +"It is a raid by vampire bats!" was all Tom and Ned could distinguish. +"We shall have to light fires to keep them away, if we can succeed. +Every one grab up a club and strike hard!" +</P> + +<P> +"Come on!" cried Tom, getting on some clothes by the light of his +gleaming electric light which he had set on his cot. +</P> + +<P> +"You're not going out there, are you?" asked Ned. +</P> + +<P> +"I certainly am! If there's a fight I want to be in it, bats or +anything else. Here, you have a light like mine. Flash it on, and +hang it somewhere on yourself. Then get a club and come on. The +lights will blind the bats, and we can see to hit 'em!" +</P> + +<P> +Tom's plan seemed to be a good one. His lamp and Ned's had small hooks +on them, so they could be carried in the upper coat pocket, showing a +gleam of light and leaving the hands free for use. +</P> + +<P> +Out of the tents rushed the young men to find Professor Bumper and Mr. +Damon before them. The two men had clubs and were striking about in +the half darkness, for now the Indians had set several fires aglow. +And in the gleams, constantly growing brighter as more fuel was piled +on, the young inventor and his chum saw a weird sight. +</P> + +<P> +Circling and wheeling about in the camp clearing were many of the black +shadowy forms that had caused Ned such alarm. Great bats they were, +and a dangerous species, if Jacinto was to be believed. +</P> + +<P> +The uncanny creatures flew in and out among the trees and tents, now +swooping low near the Indians or the travelers. At such times clubs +would be used, often with the effect of killing or stunning the flying +pests. For a time it seemed as if the bats would fairly overwhelm the +camp, so many of them were there. But the increasing lights, and the +attacks made by the Indians and the white travelers turned the tide of +battle, and, with silent flappings of their soft, velvety wings, the +bats flew back to the jungle whence they had emerged. +</P> + +<P> +"We are safe—for the present!" exclaimed Jacinto with a sigh of relief. +</P> + +<P> +"Do you think they will come back?" asked Tom. +</P> + +<P> +"They may—there is no telling." +</P> + +<P> +"Bless my speedometer!" cried Mr. Damon, "If those beasts or +birds—whatever they are—come back I'll go and hide in the river and +take my chances with the alligators!" +</P> + +<P> +"The alligators aren't much worse," asserted Jacinto with a visible +shiver. "These vampire bats sometimes depopulate a whole village." +</P> + +<P> +"Bless my shoe laces!" cried Mr. Damon. "You don't mean to say that +the creatures can eat up a whole village?" +</P> + +<P> +"Not quite. Though they might if they got the chance," was the answer +of the Spanish guide. "These vampire bats fly from place to place in +great swarms, and they are so large and blood-thirsty that a few of +them can kill a horse or an ox in a short time by sucking its blood. +So when the villagers find they are visited by a colony of these +vampires they get out, taking their live stock with them, and stay in +caves or in densely wooded places until the bats fly on. Then the +villagers come back. +</P> + +<P> +"It was only a small colony that visited us tonight or we would have +had more trouble. I do not think this lot will come back. We have +killed too many of them," and he looked about on the ground where many +of the uncanny creatures were still twitching in the death struggle. +</P> + +<P> +"Come back again!" cried Mr. Damon. "Bless my skin! I hope not! I've +had enough of bats—and mosquitoes," he added, as he slapped at his +face and neck. +</P> + +<P> +Indeed the party of whites were set upon by the night insects to such +an extent that it was necessary to hurry back to the protection of the +nets. +</P> + +<P> +Tom and Ned kicked outside the bat the former had killed in their tent, +and then both went back to their cots. But it was some little time +before they fell asleep. And they did not have much time to rest, for +an early start must be made to avoid the terrible heat of the middle of +the day. +</P> + +<P> +"Whew!" whistled Ned, as he and Tom arose in the gray dawn of the +morning when Jacinto announced the breakfast which the Indian cook had +prepared. "That was some night! If this is a sample of the wilds of +Honduras, give me the tameness of Shopton." +</P> + +<P> +"Oh, we've gone through with worse than this," laughed Tom. "It's all +in the day's work. We've only got started. I guess we're a bit soft, +Ned, though we had hard enough work in that tunnel-digging." +</P> + +<P> +After breakfast, while the Indians were making ready the canoes, +Professor Bumper, who, in a previous visit to Central America, had +become interested in the subject, made a brief examination of some of +the dead bats. They were exceptionally large, some almost as big as +hawks, and were of the sub-family _Desmodidae_, the scientist said. +</P> + +<P> +"This is a true blood-sucking bat," went on the professor. "This," and +he pointed to the nose-leaves, "is the sucking apparatus. The bat +makes an opening in the skin with its sharp teeth and proceeds to +extract the blood. I can well believe two or three of them, attacking +a steer or mule at once, could soon weaken it so the animal would die." +</P> + +<P> +"And a man, too?" asked Ned. +</P> + +<P> +"Well a man has hands with which to use weapons, but a helpless +quadruped has not. Though if a sufficient number of these bats +attacked a man at the same time, he would have small chance to escape +alive. Their bites, too, may be poisonous for all I know." +</P> + +<P> +The Indians seemed glad to leave the "place of the bats," as they +called the camp site. Jacinto explained that the Indians believed a +vampire could kill them while they slept, and they were very much +afraid of the blood-sucking bats. There were many other species in the +tropics, Professor Bumper explained, most of which lived on fruit or on +insects they caught. The blood-sucking bats were comparatively few, +and the migratory sort fewer still. +</P> + +<P> +"Well, we're on our way once more," remarked Tom as again they were in +the canoes being paddled up the river. "How much longer does your +water trip take, Professor?" +</P> + +<P> +"I hardly know," and Professor Bumper looked to Jacinto to answer. +</P> + +<P> +"We go two more days in the canoes," the guide answered, "and then we +shall find the mules waiting for us at a place called Hidjio. From +then on we travel by land until—well until you get to the place where +you are going. +</P> + +<P> +"I suppose you know where it is?" he added, nodding toward the +professor. "I am leaving that part to you." +</P> + +<P> +"Oh, I have a map, showing where I want to begin some excavations," was +the answer. "We must first go to Copan and see what arrangements we +can make for laborers. After that—well, we shall trust to luck for +what we shall find." +</P> + +<P> +"There are said to be many curious things," went on Jacinto, speaking +as though he had no interest. "You have mentioned buried cities. Have +you thought what may be in them—great heathen temples, idols, perhaps?" +</P> + +<P> +For a moment none of the professor's companions spoke. It was as +though Jacinto had tried to get some information. Finally the +scientist said: +</P> + +<P> +"Oh, yes, we may find an idol. I understand the ancient people, who +were here long before the Spaniards came, worshiped idols. But we +shall take whatever antiquities we find." +</P> + +<P> +"Huh!" grunted Jacinto, and then he called to the paddlers to increase +their strokes. +</P> + +<P> +The journey up the river was not very eventful. Many alligators were +seen, and Tom and Ned shot several with the electric rifle. Toward the +close of the third day's travel there was a cry from one of the rear +boats, and an alarm of a man having fallen overboard was given. +</P> + +<P> +Tom turned in time to see the poor fellow's struggles, and at the same +time there was a swirl in the water and a black object shot forward. +</P> + +<P> +"An alligator is after him!" yelled Ned. +</P> + +<P> +"I see," observed Tom calmly. "Hand me the rifle, Ned." +</P> + +<P> +Tom took quick aim and pulled the trigger. The explosive electric +bullet went true to its mark, and the great animal turned over in a +death struggle. But the river was filled with them, and no sooner had +the one nearest the unfortunate Indian been disposed of than another +made a dash for the man. +</P> + +<P> +There was a wild scream of agony and then a dark arm shot up above the +red foam. The waters seethed and bubbled as the alligators fought +under it for possession of the paddler. Tom fired bullet after bullet +from his wonderful rifle into the spot, but though he killed some of +the alligators this did not save the man's life. His body was not seen +again, though search was made for it. +</P> + +<P> +The accident cast a little damper over the party, and there was a +feeling of gloom among the Indians. Professor Bumper announced that he +would see to it that the man's family did not want, and this seemed to +give general satisfaction, especially to a brother who was with the +party. +</P> + +<P> +Aside from being caught in a drenching storm and one or two minor +accidents, nothing else of moment marked the remainder of the river +journey, and at the end of the third day the canoes pulled to shore and +a night camp was made. +</P> + +<P> +"But where are the mules we are to use in traveling to-morrow?" asked +the professor of Jacinto. +</P> + +<P> +"In the next village. We shall march there in the morning. No use to +go there at night when all is dark." +</P> + +<P> +"I suppose that is so." +</P> + +<P> +The Indians made camp as usual, the goods being brought from the canoes +and piled up near the tents. Then night settled down. +</P> + +<P> +"Hello!" cried Tom, awakening the next morning to find the sun +streaming into his tent. "We must have overslept, Ned. We were to +start before old Sol got in his heavy work, but we haven't had +breakfast yet." +</P> + +<P> +"I didn't hear any one call us," remarked Ned. +</P> + +<P> +"Nor I. Wonder if we're the only lazy birds." He looked from the tent +in time to see Mr. Damon and the professor emerging. Then Tom noticed +something queer. The canoes were not on the river bank. There was not +an Indian in sight, and no evidence of Jacinto. +</P> + +<P> +"What's the matter?" asked the young inventor. "Have the others gone +on ahead?" +</P> + +<P> +"I rather think they've gone back," was the professor's dry comment. +</P> + +<P> +"Gone back?" +</P> + +<P> +"Yes. The Indians seem to have deserted us at the ending of this stage +of our journey." +</P> + +<P> +"Bless my time-table!" cried Mr. Damon. "You don't say so! What does +it mean? What has becomes of our friend Jacinto?" +</P> + +<P> +"I'm afraid he was rather a false friend," was the professor's answer. +"This is the note he left. He has gone and taken the canoes and all +the Indians with him," and he held out a paper on which was some +scribbled writing. +</P> + +<BR><BR><BR> + +<A NAME="chap13"></A> +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +CHAPTER XIII +</H3> + +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +FORWARD AGAIN +</H3> + +<P> +"What does it all mean?" asked Tom, seeing that the note was written in +Spanish, a tongue which he could speak slightly but read indifferently. +</P> + +<P> +"This is some of Beecher's work," was Professor Bumper's grim comment. +"It seems that Jacinto was in his pay." +</P> + +<P> +"In his pay!" cried Mr. Damon. "Do you mean that Beecher deliberately +hired Jacinto to betray us?" +</P> + +<P> +"Well, no. Not that exactly. Here, I'll translate this note for you," +and the professor proceeded to read: +</P> + +<BR> + +<P> +"Senors: I greatly regret the step I have to take, but I am a +gentleman, and, having given my word, I must keep it. No harm shall +come to you, I swear it on my honor!" +</P> + +<BR> + +<P> +"Queer idea of honor he has!" commented Tom, grimly. +</P> + +<P> +Professor Bumper read on: +</P> + +<BR> + +<P> +"Know then, that before I engaged myself to you I had been engaged by +Professor Beecher through a friend to guide him into the Copan valley, +where he wants to make some explorations, for what I know not, save +maybe that it is for gold. I agreed, in case any rival expeditions +came to lead them astray if I could. +</P> + +<P> +"So, knowing from what you said that you were going to this place, I +engaged myself to you, planning to do what I have done. I greatly +regret it, as I have come to like you, but I had given my promise to +Professor Beecher's friend, that I would first lead him to the Copan +valley, and would keep others away until he had had a chance to do his +exploration. +</P> + +<P> +"So I have led you to this wilderness. It is far from the Copan, but +you are near an Indian village, and you will be able to get help in a +week or so. In the meanwhile you will not starve, as you have plenty +of supplies. If you will travel northeast you will come again to +Puerto Cortes in due season. As for the money I had from you, I +deposit it to your credit, Professor Beecher having made me an +allowance for steering rival parties on the wrong trail. So I lose +nothing, and I save my honor. +</P> + +<P> +"I write this note as I am leaving in the night with the Indians. I +put some harmless sedative in your tea that you might sleep soundly, +and not awaken until we were well on our way. Do not try to follow us, +as the river will carry us swiftly away. And, let me add, there is no +personal animosity on the part of Professor Beecher against you. I +should have done to any rival expedition the same as I have done with +you. +<BR><BR> +JACINTO." +</P> + +<BR> + +<P> +For a moment there was silence, and then Tom Swift burst out with: +</P> + +<P> +"Well, of all the mean, contemptible tricks of a human skunk this is +the limit!" +</P> + +<P> +"Bless my hairbrush, but he is a scoundrel!" ejaculated Mr. Damon, with +great warmth. +</P> + +<P> +"I'd like to start after him the biggest alligator in the river," was +Ned's comment. +</P> + +<P> +Professor Bumper said nothing for several seconds. There was a strange +look on his face, and then he laughed shortly, as though the humor of +the situation appealed to him. +</P> + +<P> +"Professor Beecher has more gumption than I gave him credit for," he +said. "It was a clever trick!" +</P> + +<P> +"Trick!" cried Tom. +</P> + +<P> +"Yes. I can't exactly agree that it was the right thing to do, but he, +or some friend acting for him, seems to have taken precautions that we +are not to suffer or lose money. Beecher goes on the theory that all +is fair in love and war, I suppose, and he may call this a sort of +scientific war." +</P> + +<P> +Ned wondered, as he looked at his chum, how much love there was in it. +Clearly Beecher was determined to get that idol of gold. +</P> + +<P> +"Well, it can't be helped, and we must make the best of it," said Tom, +after a pause. +</P> + +<P> +"True. But now, boys, let's have breakfast, and then we'll make what +goods we can't take with us as snug as possible, until we can send the +mule drivers after them," went on Professor Bumper. +</P> + +<P> +"Send the mule drivers after them?" questioned Ned. "What do you mean +to do?" +</P> + +<P> +"Do? Why keep on, of course. You don't suppose I'm going to let a +little thing like this stand between me and the discovery of Kurzon and +the idol of gold, do you?" +</P> + +<P> +"But," began Mr. Damon, "I don't see how—" +</P> + +<P> +"Oh, we'll find a way," interrupted Tom. "It isn't the first time I've +been pretty well stranded on an expedition of this kind, and sometimes +from the same cause—the actions of a rival. Now we'll turn the tables +on the other fellows and see how they like it. The professor's +right—let's have breakfast. Jacinto seems to have told the truth. +Nothing of ours is missing." +</P> + +<P> +Tom and Ned got the meal, and then a consultation was held as to what +was best to be done. +</P> + +<P> +"We can't go on any further by water, that's sure," said Tom. "In the +first place the river is too shallow, and secondly we have no canoes. +So the only thing is to go on foot through the jungle." +</P> + +<P> +"But how can we, and carry all this stuff?" asked Ned. +</P> + +<P> +"We needn't carry it!" cried Professor Bumper. "We'll leave it here, +where it will be safe enough, and tramp on to the nearest Indian +village. There we'll hire bearers to take our stuff on until we can +get mules. I'm not going to turn back!" +</P> + +<P> +"Good!" cried Mr. Damon. "Bless my rubber boots! but that's what I +say—keep on!" +</P> + +<P> +"Oh, no! we'll never turn back," agreed Tom. +</P> + +<P> +"But how can we manage it?" asked Ned. +</P> + +<P> +"We've just got to! And when you have to do a thing, it's a whole lot +easier to do than if you just feel as though you ought to. So, lively +is the word!" cried Tom, in answer. +</P> + +<P> +"We'll pack up what we can carry and leave the rest," added the +scientist. +</P> + +<P> +Being an experienced traveler Professor Bumper had arranged his baggage +so that it could be carried by porters if necessary. Everything could +be put into small packages, including the tents and food supply. +</P> + +<P> +"There are four of us," remarked Tom, "and if we can not pack enough +along with us to enable us to get to the nearest village, we had better +go back to civilization. I'm not afraid to try." +</P> + +<P> +"Nor I!" cried Mr. Damon. +</P> + +<P> +The baggage, stores and supplies that were to be left behind were made +as snug as possible, and so piled up that wild beasts could do the +least harm. Then a pack was made up for each one to carry. +</P> + +<P> +They would take weapons, of course, Tom Swift's electric rifle being +the one he choose for himself. They expected to be able to shoot game +on their way, and this would provide them food in addition to the +concentrated supply they carried. Small tents, in sections, were +carried, there being two, one for Tom and Ned and one for Mr. Damon and +the professor. +</P> + +<P> +As far as could be learned from a casual inspection, Jacinto and his +deserting Indians had taken back with them only a small quantity of +food. They were traveling light and down stream, and could reach the +town much more quickly than they had come away from it. +</P> + +<P> +"That Beecher certainly was slick," commented Professor Bumper when +they were ready to start. "He must have known about what time I would +arrive, and he had Jacinto waiting for us. I thought it was too good +to be true, to get an experienced guide like him so easily. But it was +all planned, and I was so engrossed in thinking of the ancient +treasures I hope to find that I never thought of a possible trick. +Well, let's start!" and he led the way into the jungle, carrying his +heavy pack as lightly as did Tom. +</P> + +<P> +Professor Bumper had a general idea in which direction lay a number of +native villages, and it was determined to head for them, blazing a path +through the wilderness, so that the Indians could follow it back to the +goods left behind. +</P> + +<P> +It was with rather heavy hearts that the party set off, but Tom's +spirits could not long stay clouded, and the scientist was so +good-natured about the affair and seemed so eager to do the utmost to +render Beecher's trick void, that the others fell into a lighter mood, +and went on more cheerfully, though the way was rough and the packs +heavy. +</P> + +<P> +They stopped at noon under a bower they made of palms, and, spreading +the nets over them, got a little rest after a lunch. Then, when the +sun was less hot, they started off again. +</P> + +<P> +"Forward is the word!" cried Ned cheerfully. "Forward!"' +</P> + +<P> +They had not gone more than an hour on the second stage of their tramp +when Tom, who was in the lead, following the direction laid out by the +compass, suddenly stopped, and reached around for his electric rifle, +which he was carrying at his back. +</P> + +<P> +"What is it?" asked Ned in a whisper. +</P> + +<P> +"I don't know, but it's some big animal there in the bushes," was Tom's +low-voiced answer. "I'm ready for it." +</P> + +<P> +The rustling increased, and a form could be seen indistinctly. Tom +aimed the deadly gun and stood ready to pull the trigger. +</P> + +<P> +Ned, who had a side view into the underbrush, gave a sudden cry. +</P> + +<P> +"Don't shoot, Tom!" he yelled. "It's a man!" +</P> + +<BR><BR><BR> + +<A NAME="chap14"></A> +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +CHAPTER XIV +</H3> + +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +A NEW GUIDE +</H3> + +<P> +In spite of Ned Newton's cry, Tom's finger pressed the switch-trigger +of the electric rifle, for previous experience had taught him that it +was sometimes the best thing to awe the natives in out-of-the-way +corners of the earth. But the young inventor quickly elevated the +muzzle, and the deadly missile went hissing through the air over the +head of a native Indian who, at that moment, stepped from the bush. +</P> + +<P> +The man, startled and alarmed, shrank back and was about to run into +the jungle whence he had emerged. Small wonder if he had, considering +the reception he so unwittingly met with. But Tom, aware of the +necessity for making inquiries of one who knew that part of the jungle, +quickly called to him. +</P> + +<P> +"Hold on!" he shouted. "Wait a minute. I didn't mean that. I thought +at first you were a tapir or a tiger. No harm intended. I say, +Professor," Tom called back to the savant, "you'd better speak to him +in his lingo, I can't manage it. He may be useful in guiding us to +that Indian village Jacinto told us of." +</P> + +<P> +This Professor Bumper did, being able to make himself understood in the +queer part-Spanish dialect used by the native Hondurians, though he +could not, of course, speak it as fluently as had Jacinto. +</P> + +<P> +Professor Bumper had made only a few remarks to the man who had so +unexpectedly appeared out of the jungle when the scientist gave an +exclamation of surprise at some of the answers made. +</P> + +<P> +"Bless my moving picture!" cried Mr. Damon. +</P> + +<P> +"What's the matter now? Is anything wrong? Does he refuse to help us?" +</P> + +<P> +"No, it isn't that," was the answer. "In fact he came here to help us. +Tom, this is the brother of the Indian who fell overboard and who was +eaten by the alligators. He says you were very kind to try to save his +brother with your rifle, and for that reason he has come back to help +us." +</P> + +<P> +"Come back?" queried Tom. +</P> + +<P> +"Yes, he went off with the rest of the Indians when Jacinto deserted +us, but he could not stand being a traitor, after you had tried to save +his brother's life. These Indians are queer people. They don't show +much emotion, but they have deep feelings. This one says he will +devote himself to your service from now on. I believe we can count on +him. He is deeply grateful to you, Tom." +</P> + +<P> +"I'm glad of that for all our sakes. But what does he say about +Jacinto?" +</P> + +<P> +The professor asked some more questions, receiving answers, and then +translated them. +</P> + +<P> +"This Indian, whose name is Tolpec, says Jacinto is a fraud," exclaimed +Professor Bumper. "He made all the Indians leave us in the night, +though many of them were willing to stay and fill the contract they had +made. But Jacinto would not let them, making them desert. Tolpec went +away with the others, but because of what Tom had done he planned to +come back at the first chance and be our guide. Accordingly he jumped +ashore from one of the canoes, and made his way to our camp. He got +there, found it deserted and followed us, coming up just now." +</P> + +<P> +"Well I'm glad I didn't frighten him off with my gun," remarked Tom +grimly. "So he agrees with us that Jacinto is a scoundrel, does he? I +guess he might as well classify Professor Beecher in the same way." +</P> + +<P> +"I am not quite so sure of that," said Professor Bumper slowly. "I can +not believe Beecher would play such a trick as this, though some +over-zealous friend of his might." +</P> + +<P> +"Oh, of course Beecher did it!" cried Tom. "He heard we were coming +here, figured out that we'd start ahead of him, and he wanted to +side-track us. Well, he did it all right," and Tom's voice was bitter. +</P> + +<P> +"He has only side-tracked us for a while," announced Professor Bumper +in cheerful tones. +</P> + +<P> +"What do you mean?" asked Mr. Damon. +</P> + +<P> +"I mean that this Indian comes just in the nick of time. He is well +acquainted with this part of the jungle, having lived here all his +life, and he offers to guide us to a place where we can get mules to +transport ourselves and our baggage to Copan." +</P> + +<P> +"Fine!" cried Ned. "When can we start?" +</P> + +<P> +Once more the professor and the native conversed in the strange tongue, +and then Professor Bumper announced: +</P> + +<P> +"He says it will be better for us to go back where we left our things +and camp there. He will stay with us to-night and in the morning go on +to the nearest Indian town and come back with porters and helpers." +</P> + +<P> +"I think that is good advice to follow," put in Tom, "for we do need +our goods; and if we reached the settlement ourselves, we would have to +send back for our things, with the uncertainty of getting them all." +</P> + +<P> +So it was agreed that they would make a forced march back through the +jungle to where they had been deserted by Jacinto. There they would +make camp for the night, and until such time as Tolpec could return +with a force of porters. +</P> + +<P> +It was not easy, that backward tramp through the jungle, especially as +night had fallen. But the new Indian guide could see like a cat, and +led the party along paths they never could have found by themselves. +The use of their pocket electric lights was a great help, and possibly +served to ward off the attacks of jungle beasts, for as they tramped +along they could hear stealthy sounds in the underbush on either side +of the path, as though tigers were stalking them. For there was in the +woods an animal of the leopard family, called tiger or "tigre" by the +natives, that was exceedingly fierce and dangerous. But watchfulness +prevented any accident, and eventually the party reached the place +where they had left their goods. Nothing had been disturbed, and +finally a fire was made, the tents set up and a light meal, with hot +tea served. +</P> + +<P> +"We'll get ahead of Beecher yet," said Tom. +</P> + +<P> +"You seem as anxious as Professor Bumper," observed Mr. Damon. +</P> + +<P> +"I guess I am," admitted Tom. "I want to see that idol of gold in the +possession of our party." +</P> + +<P> +The night passed without incident, and then, telling his new friends +that he would return as soon as possible with help, Tolpec, taking a +small supply of food with him, set out through the jungle again. +</P> + +<P> +As the green vines and creepers closed after him, and the explorers +were left alone with their possessions piled around them, Ned remarked: +</P> + +<P> +"After all, I wonder if it was wise to let him go?" +</P> + +<P> +"Why not?" asked Tom. +</P> + +<P> +"Well, maybe he only wanted to get us back here, and then he'll desert, +too. Maybe that's what he's done now, making us lose two or three days +by inducing us to return, waiting for what will never happen—his +return with other natives." +</P> + +<P> +A silence followed Ned's intimation. +</P> + +<BR><BR><BR> + +<A NAME="chap15"></A> +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +CHAPTER XV +</H3> + +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +IN THE COILS +</H3> + +<P> +"Ned, do you really think Tolpec is going to desert us?" asked Tom. +</P> + +<P> +"Well, I don't know," was the slowly given reply. "It's a possibility, +isn't it?" +</P> + +<P> +"Yes, it is," broke in Professor Bumper. "But what if it is? We might +as well trust him, and if he proves true, as I believe he will, we'll +be so much better off. If he proves a traitor we'll only have lost a +few days, for if he doesn't come back we can go on again in the way we +started." +</P> + +<P> +"But that's just it!" complained Tom. "We don't want to lose any time +with that Beecher chap on our trail." +</P> + +<P> +"I am not so very much concerned about him," remarked Professor Bumper, +dryly. +</P> + +<P> +"Why not?" snapped out Mr. Damon. +</P> + +<P> +"Well, because I think he'll have just about as hard work locating the +hidden city, and finding the idol of gold, as we'll have. In other +words it will be an even thing, unless he gets too far ahead of us, or +keeps us back, and I don't believe he can do that now. +</P> + +<P> +"So I thought it best to take a chance with this Indian. He would +hardly have taken the trouble to come all the way back, and run the +risks he did, just to delay us a few days. However, we'll soon know. +Meanwhile, we'll take it easy and wait for the return of Tolpec and his +friends." +</P> + +<P> +Though none of them liked to admit it, Ned's words had caused his three +friends some anxiety, and though they busied themselves about the camp +there was an air of waiting impatiently for something to occur. And +waiting is about the hardest work there is. +</P> + +<P> +But there was nothing for it but to wait, and it might be at least a +week, Professor Bumper said, before the Indian could return with a +party of porters and mules to move their baggage. +</P> + +<P> +"Yes, Tolpec has not only to locate the settlement," Tom admitted, "but +he must persuade the natives to come back with him. He may have +trouble in that, especially if it is known that he has left Jacinto, +who, I imagine, is a power among the tribes here." +</P> + +<P> +But there were only two things left to do—wait and hope. The +travelers did both. Four days passed and there was no sign of Tolpec. +Eagerly, and not a little anxiously, they watched the jungle path along +which he had disappeared. +</P> + +<P> +"Oh, come on!" exclaimed Tom one morning, when the day seemed a bit +cooler than its predecessor. "Let's go for a hunt, or something! I'm +tired of sitting around camp." +</P> + +<P> +"Bless my watch hands! So am I!" cried Mr. Damon. "Let's all go for a +trip. It will do us good." +</P> + +<P> +"And perhaps I can get some specimens of interest," added Professor +Bumper, who, in addition to being an archaeologist, was something of a +naturalist. +</P> + +<P> +Accordingly, having made everything snug in camp, the party, Tom and +Ned equipped with electric rifles, and the professor with a butterfly +net and specimen boxes, set forth. Mr. Damon said he would carry a +stout club as his weapon. +</P> + +<P> +The jungle, as usual, was teeming with life, but as Ned and Tom did not +wish to kill wantonly they refrained from shooting until later in the +day. For once it was dead, game did not keep well in that hot climate, +and needed to be cooked almost immediately. +</P> + +<P> +"We'll try some shots on our back trip," said the young inventor. +</P> + +<P> +Professor Bumper found plenty of his own particular kind of "game" +which he caught in the net, transferring the specimens to the boxes he +carried. There were beautiful butterflies, moths and strange bugs in +the securing of which the scientist evinced great delight, though when +one beetle nipped him firmly and painfully on his thumb his involuntary +cry of pain was as real as that of any other person. +</P> + +<P> +"But I didn't let him get away," he said in triumph when he had dropped +the clawing insect into the cyanide bottle where death came painlessly. +"It is well worth a sore thumb." +</P> + +<P> +They wandered on through the jungle, taking care not to get too far +from their camp, for they did not want to lose their way, nor did they +want to be absent too long in case Tolpec and his native friends should +return. +</P> + +<P> +"Well, it's about time we shot something, I think," remarked Ned, when +they had been out about two hours. "Let's try for some of these wild +turkeys. They ought to go well roasted even if it isn't Thanksgiving." +</P> + +<P> +"I'm with you," agreed Tom. "Let's see who has the best luck. But +tone down the charge in your rifle and use a smaller projectile, or +you'll have nothing but a bunch of feathers to show for your shot. The +guns are loaded for deer." +</P> + +<P> +The change was made, and once more the two young men started off, a +little ahead of Professor Bumper and Mr. Damon. Tom and Ned had not +gone far, however, before they heard a strange cry from Mr. Damon. +</P> + +<P> +"Tom! Ned!" shouted the eccentric man, "Here's a monster after me! Come +quick!" +</P> + +<P> +"A tiger!" ejaculated Tom, as he began once more to change the charge +in his rifle to a larger one, running back, meanwhile, in the direction +of the sound of the voice. +</P> + +<P> +There were really no tigers in Honduras, the jaguar being called a +tiger by the natives, while the cougar is called a lion. The presence +of these animals, often dangerous to man, had been indicated around +camp, and it was possible that one had been bold enough to attack Mr. +Damon, not through hunger, but because of being cornered. +</P> + +<P> +"Come on, Ned!" cried Tom. "He's in some sort of trouble!" +</P> + +<P> +But when, a moment later, the young inventor burst through a fringe of +bushes and saw Mr. Damon standing in a little clearing, with upraised +club, Tom could not repress a laugh. +</P> + +<P> +"Kill it, Tom! Kill it!" begged the eccentric man. "Bless my insurance +policy, but it's a terrible beast!" +</P> + +<P> +And so it was, at first glance. For it was a giant iguana, one of the +most repulsive-looking of the lizards. Not unlike an alligator in +shape, with spikes on its head and tail, with a warty, squatty +ridge-encrusted body, a big pouch beneath its chin, and long-toed +claws, it was enough to strike terror into the heart of almost any one. +Even the smaller ones look dangerous, and this one, which was about +five feet long, looked capable of attacking a man and injuring him. As +a matter of fact the iguanas are harmless, their shape and coloring +being designed to protect them. +</P> + +<P> +"Don't be afraid, Mr. Damon," called Tom, still laughing. "It won't +hurt you!" +</P> + +<P> +"I'm not so positive of that. It won't let me pass." +</P> + +<P> +"Just take your club and poke it out of the way," the young inventor +advised. "It's only waiting to be shoved." +</P> + +<P> +"Then you do it, Tom. Bless my looking glass, but I don't want to go +near it! If my wife could see me now she'd say it served me just right." +</P> + +<P> +Mr. Damon was not a coward, but the giant iguana was not pleasant to +look at. Tom, with the butt of his rifle, gave it a gentle shove, +whereupon the creature scurried off through the brush as though glad to +make its escape unscathed. +</P> + +<P> +"I thought it was a new kind of alligator," said Mr. Damon with a sigh +of relief. +</P> + +<P> +"Where is it?" asked Professor Bumper, coming up at this juncture. "A +new species of alligator? Let me see it!" +</P> + +<P> +"It's too horrible," said Mr. Damon. "I never want to see one again. +It was worse than a vampire bat!" +</P> + +<P> +Notwithstanding this, when he heard that it was one of the largest +sized iguanas ever seen, the professor started through the jungle after +it. +</P> + +<P> +"We can't take it with us if we get it," Tom called after his friend. +</P> + +<P> +"We might take the skin," answered the professor. "I have a standing +order for such things from one of the museums I represent. I'd like to +get it. Then they are often eaten. We can have a change of diet, you +see." +</P> + +<P> +"We'd better follow him," said Tom to Ned. "We'll have to let the +turkeys go for a while. He may get into trouble. Come on." +</P> + +<P> +Off they started through the jungle, trailing after the impetuous +professor who was intent on capturing the iguana. The giant lizard's +progress could be traced by the disturbance of the leaves and +underbrush, and the professor was following as closely as possible. +</P> + +<P> +So fast did he go that Ned, Tom and Mr. Damon, following, lost sight of +him several times, and Tom finally called: +</P> + +<P> +"Wait a minute. We'll all be lost if you keep this up." +</P> + +<P> +"I'll have him in another minute," answered the professor. "I can +almost reach him now. Then—— Oh!" +</P> + +<P> +His voice ended in a scream that seemed to be one of terror. So sudden +was the change that Tom and Ned, who were together, ahead of Mr. Damon, +looked at one another in fear. +</P> + +<P> +"What has happened?" whispered Ned, pausing. +</P> + +<P> +"Don't stop to ask—come on!" shouted Tom. +</P> + +<P> +At that instant again came the voice of the savant. +</P> + +<P> +"Tom! Ned!" he gasped, rather than cried. +</P> + +<P> +"I'm caught in the coils! Quick—quick if you would save me!" +</P> + +<P> +"In the coils!" repeated Ned. "What does he mean? Can the giant +iguana——" +</P> + +<P> +Tom Swift did not stop to answer. With his electric rifle in +readiness, he leaped forward through the jungle. +</P> + +<BR><BR><BR> + +<A NAME="chap16"></A> +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +CHAPTER XVI +</H3> + +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +A MEETING IN THE JUNGLE +</H3> + +<P> +Before Tom and Ned reached the place whence Professor Bumper had +called, they heard strange noises, other than the imploring voice of +their friend. It seemed as though some great body was threshing about +in the jungle, lashing the trees, bushes and leaves about, and when the +two young men, followed by Mr. Damon, reached the scene they saw that, +in a measure, this really accounted for what they heard. +</P> + +<P> +Something like a great whip was beating about close to two trees that +grew near together. And then, when the storm of twigs, leaves and +dirt, caused by the leaping, threshing thing ceased for a moment, the +onlookers saw something that filled them with terror. +</P> + +<P> +Between the two trees, and seemingly bound to them by a great coiled +rope, spotted and banded, was the body of Professor Bumper. His arms +were pinioned to his sides and there was horror and terror on his face, +that looked imploringly at the youths from above the topmost coil of +those encircling him. +</P> + +<P> +"What is it?" cried Mr. Damon, as he ran pantingly up. "What has +caught him? Is it the giant iguana?" +</P> + +<P> +"It's a snake—a great boa!" gasped Tom. "It has him in its coils. +But it is wound around the trees, too. That alone prevents it from +crushing the professor to death. +</P> + +<P> +"Ned, be ready with your rifle. Put in the heaviest charge, and watch +your chance to fire!" +</P> + +<P> +The great, ugly head of the boa reared itself up from the coils which +it had, with the quickness of thought, thrown about the man between the +two trees. This species of snake is not poisonous, and kills its prey +by crushing it to death, making it into a pulpy mass, with scarcely a +bone left unbroken, after which it swallows its meal. The crushing +power of one of these boas, some of which reach a length of thirty +feet, with a body as large around as that of a full-grown man, is +enormous. +</P> + +<P> +"I'm going to fire!" suddenly cried Tom. He had seen his chance and he +took it. There was the faint report—the crack of the electric +rifle—and the folds of the serpent seemed to relax. +</P> + +<P> +"I see a good chance now," added Ned, who had taken the small charge +from his weapon, replacing it with a heavier one. +</P> + +<P> +His rifle was also discharged in the direction of the snake, and Tom +saw that the hit was a good one, right through the ugly head of the +reptile. +</P> + +<P> +"One other will be enough to make him loosen his coils!" cried Tom, as +he fired again, and such was the killing power of the electric bullets +that the snake, though an immense one, and one that short of +decapitation could have received many injuries without losing power, +seemed to shrivel up. +</P> + +<P> +Its folds relaxed, and the coils of the great body fell in a heap at +the roots of the two trees, between which the scientist had been +standing. +</P> + +<P> +Professor Bumper seemed to fall backward as the grip of the serpent +relaxed, but Tom, dropping his rifle, and calling to Ned to keep an eye +on the snake, leaped forward and caught his friend. +</P> + +<P> +"Are you hurt?" asked Tom, carrying the limp form over to a grassy +place. There was no answer, the savant's eyes were closed and he +breathed but faintly. +</P> + +<P> +Ned Newton fired two more electric bullets into the still writhing body +of the boa. +</P> + +<P> +"I guess he's all in," he called to Tom. +</P> + +<P> +"Bless my horseradish! And so our friend seems to be," commented Mr. +Damon. "Have you anything with which to revive him, Tom?" +</P> + +<P> +"Yes. Some ammonia. See if you can find a little water." +</P> + +<P> +"I have some in my flask." +</P> + +<P> +Tom mixed a dose of the spirits which he carried with him, and this, +forced between the pallid lips of the scientist, revived him. +</P> + +<P> +"What happened?" he asked faintly as he opened his eyes. "Oh, yes, I +remember," he added slowly. "The boa——" +</P> + +<P> +"Don't try to talk," urged Tom. "You're all right. The snake is dead, +or dying. Are you much hurt?" +</P> + +<P> +Professor Bumper appeared to be considering. He moved first one limb, +then another. He seemed to have the power over all his muscles. +</P> + +<P> +"I see how it happened," he said, as he sat up, after taking a little +more of the ammonia. "I was following the iguana, and when the big +lizard came to a stop, in a little hollow place in the ground, at the +foot of those two trees, I leaned over to slip a noose of rope about +its neck. Then I felt myself caught, as if in the hands of a giant, +and bound fast between the two trees." +</P> + +<P> +"It was the big boa that whipped itself around you, as you leaned +over," explained Tom, as Ned came up to announce that the snake was no +longer dangerous. "But when it coiled around you it also coiled around +the two trees, you, fortunately slipping between them. Had it not been +that their trunks took off some of the pressure of the coils you +wouldn't have lasted a minute." +</P> + +<P> +"Well, I was pretty badly squeezed as it was," remarked the professor. +"I hardly had breath enough left to call to you. I tried to fight off +the serpent, but it was of no use." +</P> + +<P> +"I should say not!" cried Mr. Damon. "Bless my circus ring! one might +as well try to combat an elephant! But, my dear professor, are you all +right now?" +</P> + +<P> +"I think so—yes. Though I shall be lame and stiff for a few days, I +fear. I can hardly walk." +</P> + +<P> +Professor Bumper was indeed unable to go about much for a few days +after his encounter with the great serpent. He stretched out in a +hammock under trees in the camp clearing, and with his friends waited +for the possible return of Tolpec and the porters. +</P> + +<P> +Ned and Tom made one or two short hunting trips, and on these occasions +they kept a lookout in the direction the Indian had taken when he went +away. +</P> + +<P> +"For he's sure to come back that way—if he comes at all," declared +Ned; "which I am beginning to doubt." +</P> + +<P> +"Well, he may not come," agreed Tom, who was beginning to lose some of +his first hope. "But he won't necessarily come from the same direction +he took. He may have had to go in an entirely different way to get +help. We'll hope for the best." +</P> + +<P> +A week passed. Professor Bumper was able to be about, and Tom and Ned +noticed that there was an anxious look on his face. Was he, too, +beginning to despair? +</P> + +<P> +"Well, this isn't hunting for golden idols very fast," said Mr. Damon, +the morning of the eighth day after their desertion by the faithless +Jacinto. "What do you say, Professor Bumper; ought we not to start off +on our own account?" +</P> + +<P> +"We had better if Tolpec does not return today," was the answer. +</P> + +<P> +They had eaten breakfast, had put their camp in order, and were about +to have a consultation on what was best to do, when Tom suddenly called +to Ned, who was whistling: +</P> + +<P> +"Hark!" +</P> + +<P> +Through the jungle came a faint sound of singing—not a harmonious air, +but the somewhat barbaric chant of the natives. +</P> + +<P> +"It is Tolpec coming back!" cried Mr. Damon. "Hurray! Now our troubles +are over! Bless my meal ticket! Now we can start!" +</P> + +<P> +"It may be Jacinto," suggested Ned. +</P> + +<P> +"Nonsense! you old cold-water pitcher!" cried Tom. "It's Tolpec! I can +see him! He's a good scout all right!" +</P> + +<P> +And then, walking at the head of a band of Indians who were weirdly +chanting while behind them came a train of mules, was Tolpec, a +cheerful grin covering his honest, if homely, dark face. +</P> + +<P> +"Me come back!" he exclaimed in gutteral English, using about half of +his foreign vocabulary. +</P> + +<P> +"I see you did," answered Professor Bumper in the man's own tongue. +"Glad to see you. Is everything all right?" +</P> + +<P> +"All right," was the answer. "These Indians will take you where you +want to go, and will not leave you as Jacinto did." +</P> + +<P> +"We'll start in the morning!" exclaimed the savant his own cheerful +self again, now that there was a prospect of going further into the +interior. "Tell the men to get something to eat, Tolpec. There is +plenty for all." +</P> + +<P> +"Good!" grunted the new guide and soon the hungry Indians, who had come +far, were satisfying their hunger. +</P> + +<P> +As they ate Tolpec explained to Professor Bumper, who repeated it to +the youths and Mr. Damon, that it had been necessary to go farther than +he had intended to get the porters and mules. But the Indians were a +friendly tribe, of which he was a member, and could be depended on. +</P> + +<P> +There was a feast and a sort of celebration in camp that night. Tom +and Ned shot two deer, and these formed the main part of the feast and +the Indians made merry about the fire until nearly midnight. They did +not seem to mind in the least the swarms of mosquitoes and other bugs +that flew about, attracted by the light. As for Tom Swift and his +friends, their nets protected them. +</P> + +<P> +An early start was made the following morning. Such packages of goods +and supplies as could not well be carried by the Indians in their head +straps, were loaded on the backs of the pack-mules. Tolpec explained +that on reaching the Indian village, where he had secured the porters, +they could get some ox-carts which would be a convenience in traveling +into the interior toward the Copan valley. +</P> + +<P> +The march onward for the next two days was tiresome; but the Indians +Tolpec had secured were as faithful and efficient as he had described +them, and good progress was made. +</P> + +<P> +There were a few accidents. One native fell into a swiftly running +stream as they were fording it and lost a box containing some +much-needed things. But as the man's life was saved Professor Bumper +said it made up for the other loss. Another accident did not end so +auspiciously. One of the bearers was bitten by a poisonous snake, and +though prompt measures were taken, the poison spread so rapidly that +the man died. +</P> + +<P> +In due season the Indian village was reached, where, after a day spent +in holding funeral services over the dead bearer, preparations were +made for proceeding farther. +</P> + +<P> +This time some of the bearers were left behind, and ox-carts were +substituted for them, as it was possible to carry more goods this way. +</P> + +<P> +"And now we're really off for Copan!" exclaimed Professor Bumper one +morning, when the cavalcade, led by Tolpec in the capacity of head +guide, started off. "I hope we have no more delays." +</P> + +<P> +"I hope not, either," agreed Tom. "That Beecher may be there ahead of +us." +</P> + +<P> +Weary marches fell to their portion. There were mountains to climb, +streams to ford or swim, sending the carts over on rudely made rafts. +There were storms to endure, and the eternal heat to fight. +</P> + +<P> +But finally the party emerged from the lowlands of the coast and went +up in among the hills, where though the going was harder, the climate +was better. It was not so hot and moist. +</P> + +<P> +Not wishing to attract attention in Copan itself, Professor Bumper and +his party made a detour, and finally, after much consultation with Tom +over the ancient maps, the scientist announced that he thought they +were in the vicinity of the buried city. +</P> + +<P> +"We will begin test excavations in the morning," he said. +</P> + +<P> +The party was in camp, and preparations were made for spending the +night in the forest, when from among the trees there floated to the +ears of our friends a queer Indian chant. +</P> + +<P> +"Some one is coming," said Tom to Ned. +</P> + +<P> +Almost as he spoke there filed into the clearing where the camp had +been set up, a cavalcade of white men, followed by Indians. And at the +sight of one of the white men Tom Swift uttered a cry. +</P> + +<P> +"Professor Beecher!" gasped the young inventor. +</P> + +<BR><BR><BR> + +<A NAME="chap17"></A> +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +CHAPTER XVII +</H3> + +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +THE LOST MAP +</H3> + +<P> +The on-marching company of white men, with their Indian attendants, +came to a halt on the edge of the clearing as they caught sight of the +tents already set up there. The barbaric chant of the native bearers +ceased abruptly, and there was a look of surprise shown on the face of +Professor Fenimore Beecher. For Professor Beecher it was, in the lead +of the rival expedition. +</P> + +<P> +"Bless my shoe laces!" exclaimed Mr. Damon. +</P> + +<P> +"Is it really Beecher?" asked Ned, though he knew as well as Tom that +it was the young archaeologist. +</P> + +<P> +"It certainly is!" declared Tom. "And he has nerve to follow us so +closely!" +</P> + +<P> +"Maybe he thinks we have nerve to get here ahead of him," suggested +Ned, smiling grimly. +</P> + +<P> +"Probably," agreed Tom, with a short laugh. "Well, it evidently +surprises him to find us here at all, after the mean trick he played on +us to get Jacinto to lead us into the jungle and desert us." +</P> + +<P> +"That's right," assented Ned. "Well, what's the next move?" +</P> + +<P> +There seemed to be some doubt about this on the part of both +expeditions. At the sight of Professor Beecher, Professor Bumper, who +had come out of his tent, hurriedly turned to Tom and asked him what he +thought it best to do. +</P> + +<P> +"Do!" exclaimed the eccentric Mr. Damon, not giving Tom time to reply. +"Why, stand your ground, of course! Bless my house and lot! but we're +here first! For the matter of that, I suppose the jungle is free and we +can no more object to his coming here than he can to our coming. +First come, first served, I suppose is the law of the forest." +</P> + +<P> +Meanwhile the surprise occasioned by the unexpected meeting of their +rivals seemed to have spread something like consternation among the +white members of the Beecher party. As for the natives they evidently +did not care one way or the other. +</P> + +<P> +There was a hasty consultation among the professors accompanying Mr. +Beecher, and then the latter himself advanced toward the tents of Tom +and his friends and asked: +</P> + +<P> +"How long have you been here?" +</P> + +<P> +"I don't see that we are called upon to answer that question," replied +Professor Bumper stiffly. +</P> + +<P> +"Perhaps not, and yet——" +</P> + +<P> +"There is no perhaps about it!" said Professor Bumper quickly. "I know +what your object is, as I presume you do mine. And, after what I may +term your disgraceful and unsportsmanlike conduct toward me and my +friends, I prefer not to have anything further to do with you. We must +meet as strangers hereafter." +</P> + +<P> +"Very well," and Professor Beecher's voice was as cold and +uncompromising as was his rival's. "Let it be as your wish. But I +must say I don't know what you mean by unsportsmanlike conduct." +</P> + +<P> +"An explanation would be wasted on you," said Professor Bumper stiffly. +"But in order that you may know I fully understand what you did I will +say that your efforts to thwart us through your tool Jacinto came to +nothing. We are here ahead of you." +</P> + +<P> +"Jacinto!" cried Professor Beecher in real or simulated surprise. +"Why, he was not my 'tool,' as you term it." +</P> + +<P> +"Your denial is useless in the light of his confession," asserted +Professor Bumper. +</P> + +<P> +"Confession?" +</P> + +<P> +"Now look here!" exclaimed the older professor, "I do not propose to +lower myself by quarreling with you. I know certainly what you and +your party tried to do to prevent us from getting here. But we got out +of the trap you set for us, and we are on the ground first. I +recognize your right to make explorations as well as ourselves, and I +presume you have not fallen so low that you will not recognize the +unwritten law in a case of this kind—the law which says the right of +discovery belongs to the one who first makes it." +</P> + +<P> +"I shall certainly abide by such conduct as is usual under the +circumstances," said Professor Beecher more stiffly than before. "At +the same time I must deny having set a trap. And as for Jacinto——" +</P> + +<P> +"It will be useless to discuss it further!" broke in Professor Bumper. +</P> + +<P> +"Then no more need be said," retorted the younger man. "I shall give +orders to my friends, as well as to the natives, to keep away from your +camp, and I shall expect you to do the same regarding mine." +</P> + +<P> +"I should have suggested the same thing myself," came from Tom's +friend, and the two rival scientists fairly glared at one another, the +others of both parties looking on with interest. +</P> + +<P> +Professor Bumper turned and walked defiantly back to his tent. +Professor Beecher did the same thing. Then, after a short consultation +among the white members of the latter's organization, their tents were +set up in another clearing, removed and separated by a screen of trees +and bushes from those of Tom Swift's friends. The natives of the +Beecher party also withdrew a little way from those of Professor +Bumper's organization, and then preparations for spending the night in +the jungle went on in the rival headquarters. +</P> + +<P> +"Well, he certainly had nerve, to deny, practically, that he had set +Jacinto up to do what he did," commented Tom. +</P> + +<P> +"I should say so!" agreed Ned. +</P> + +<P> +"How do you imagine he got here nearly as soon as we did, when he did +not start until later?" asked Mr. Damon. +</P> + +<P> +"He did not have the unfortunate experience of being deserted in the +jungle," replied Tom. "He probably had Jacinto, or some of that +unprincipled scoundrel's friends, show him a short route to Copan and +he came on from there." +</P> + +<P> +"Well, I did hope we might have the ground to ourselves, at least for +the preliminary explorations and excavations. But it is not to be. My +rival is here," sighed Professor Bumper. +</P> + +<P> +"Don't let that discourage you!" exclaimed Tom. "We can fight all the +better now the foe is in the open, and we know where he is." +</P> + +<P> +"Yes, Tom Swift, that is true," agreed the scientist. "I am not going +to give up, but I shall have to change my plans a little. Perhaps you +will come into the tent with me," and he nodded to Tom and Ned. "I +want to talk over certain matters with you and Mr. Damon." +</P> + +<P> +"Pleased to," assented the young inventor, and his financial secretary +nodded. +</P> + +<P> +A little later, supper having been eaten, the camp made shipshape and +the natives settled down, Tom, Ned, Mr. Damon and Professor Bumper +assembled in the tent of the scientist, where a dry battery lamp gave +sufficient illumination to show a number of maps and papers scattered +over an improvised table. +</P> + +<P> +"Now, gentlemen," said the professor, "I have called you here to go +over my plans more in detail than I have hitherto done, now we are on +the ground. You know in a general way what I hope to accomplish, but +the time has come when I must be specific. +</P> + +<P> +"Aside from being on the spot, below which, or below the vicinity +where, I believe, lies the lost city of Kurzon and, I hope, the idol of +gold, a situation has arisen—an unexpected situation, I may say—which +calls for different action from that I had counted on. +</P> + +<P> +"I refer to the presence of my rival, Professor Beecher. I will not +dwell now on what he has done. It is better to consider what he may +do." +</P> + +<P> +"That's right," agreed Ned. "He may get up in the night, dig up this +city and skip with that golden image before we know it." +</P> + +<P> +"Hardly," grinned Tom. +</P> + +<P> +"No," said Professor Bumper. "Excavating buried cities in the jungle +of Honduras is not as simple as that. There is much work to be done. +But accidents may happen, and in case one should occur to me, and I be +unable to prosecute the search, I want one of you to do it. For that +reason I am going to show you the maps and ancient documents and point +out to you where I believe the lost city lies. Now, if you will give +me your attention, I'll proceed." +</P> + +<P> +The professor went over in detail the story of how he had found the old +documents relating to the lost city of Kurzon, and of how, after much +labor and research, he had located the city in the Copan valley. The +great idol of gold was one of the chief possessions of Kurzon, and it +was often referred to in the old papers; copies and translations of +which the professor had with him. +</P> + +<P> +"But this is the most valuable of all," he said, as he opened an +oiled-silk packet. "And before I show it to you, suppose you two young +men take a look outside the tent." +</P> + +<P> +"What for?" asked Mr. Damon. +</P> + +<P> +"To make sure that no emissaries from the Beecher crowd are sneaking +around to overhear what we say," was the somewhat bitter answer of the +scientist. "I do not trust him, in spite of his attempted denial." +</P> + +<P> +Tom and Ned took a quick but thorough observation outside the tent. +The blackness of the jungle night was in strange contrast to the light +they had just left. +</P> + +<P> +"Doesn't seem to be any one around here," remarked Ned, after waiting a +minute or two. +</P> + +<P> +"No. All's quiet along the Potomac. Those Beecher natives are having +some sort of a song-fest, though." +</P> + +<P> +In the distance, and from the direction of their rivals' camp, came the +weird chant. +</P> + +<P> +"Well, as long as they stay there we'll be all right," said Tom. "Come +on in. I'm anxious to hear what the professor has to say." +</P> + +<P> +"Everything's quiet," reported Ned. +</P> + +<P> +"Then give me your attention," begged the scientist. +</P> + +<P> +Carefully, as though about to exhibit some, precious jewel, he loosened +the oiled-silk wrappings and showed a large map, on thin but tough +paper. +</P> + +<P> +"This is drawn from the old charts," the professor explained. "I +worked on it many months, and it is the only copy in the world. If it +were to be destroyed I should have to go all the way back to New York +to make another copy. I have the original there in a safe deposit +vault." +</P> + +<P> +"Wouldn't it have been wise to make two copies?" asked Tom. +</P> + +<P> +"It would have only increased the risk. With one copy, and that +constantly in my possession, I can be sure of my ground. Otherwise +not. That is why I am so careful of this. Now I will show you why I +believe we are about over the ancient city of Kurzon." +</P> + +<P> +"Over it!" cried Mr. Damon. "Bless my gunpowder! What do you mean?" +and he looked down at the earthen floor of the tent as though expecting +it to open and swallow him. +</P> + +<P> +"I mean that the city, like many others of Central and South America, +is buried below the refuse of centuries," went on the professor. "Very +soon, if we are fortunate, we shall be looking on the civilization of +hundreds of years ago—how long no one knows. +</P> + +<P> +"Considerable excavation has been done in Central America," went on +Professor Bumper, "and certain ruins have been brought to light. Near +us are those of Copan, while toward the frontier are those of Quirigua, +which are even better preserved than the former. We may visit them if +we have time. But I have reason to believe that in this section of +Copan is a large city, the existence of which has not been made certain +of by any one save myself—and, perhaps, Professor Beecher. +</P> + +<P> +"Certainly no part of it has seen the light of day for many centuries. +It shall be our pleasure to uncover it, if possible, and secure the +idol of gold." +</P> + +<P> +"How long ago do you think the city was buried?" asked Tom. +</P> + +<P> +"It would be hard to say. From the carvings and hieroglyphics I have +studied it would seem that the Mayan civilization lasted about five +hundred years, and that it began perhaps in the year A. D. five +hundred." +</P> + +<P> +"That would mean," said Mr. Damon, "that the ancient cities were in +ruins, buried, perhaps, long before Columbus discovered the new world." +</P> + +<P> +"Yes," assented the professor. "Probably Kurzon, which we now seek, +was buried deep for nearly five hundred years before Columbus landed at +San Salvadore. The specimens of writing and architecture heretofore +disclosed indicate that. But, as a matter of fact, it is very hard to +decipher the Mayan pictographs. So far, little but the ability to read +their calendars and numerical system is possessed by us, though we are +gradually making headway. +</P> + +<P> +"Now this is the map of the district, and by the markings you can see +where I hope to find what I seek. We shall begin digging here," and he +made a small mark with a pencil on the map. +</P> + +<P> +"Of course," the professor explained, "I may be wrong, and it will take +some time to discover the error if we make one. When a city is buried +thirty or forty feet deep beneath earth and great trees have grown over +it, it is not easy to dig down to it." +</P> + +<P> +"How do you ever expect to find it?" asked Ned. +</P> + +<P> +"Well, we will sink shafts here and there. If we find carved stones, +the remains of ancient pottery and weapons, parts of buildings or +building stones, we shall know we are on the right track," was the +answer. "And now that I have shown you the map, and explained how +valuable it is, I will put it away again. We shall begin our +excavations in the morning." +</P> + +<P> +"At what point?" asked Tom. +</P> + +<P> +"At a point I shall indicate after a further consultation of the map. +I must see the configuration of the country by daylight to decide. And +now let's get some rest. We have had a hard day." +</P> + +<P> +The two tents housing the four white members of the Bumper party were +close together, and it was decided that the night would be divided into +four watches, to guard against possible treachery on the part of the +Beecher crowd. +</P> + +<P> +"It seems an unkind precaution to take against a fellow scientist," +said Professor Bumper, "but I can not afford to take chances after what +has occurred." +</P> + +<P> +The others agreed with him, and though standing guard was not pleasant +it was done. However the night passed without incident, and then came +morning and the excitement of getting breakfast, over which the Indians +made merry. They did not like the cold and darkness, and always +welcomed the sun, no matter how hot. +</P> + +<P> +"And now," cried Tom, when the meal was over, "let us begin the work +that has brought us here." +</P> + +<P> +"Yes," agreed Professor Bumper, "I will consult the map, and start the +diggers where I think the city lies, far below the surface. Now, +gentlemen, if you will give me your attention——" +</P> + +<P> +He was seeking through his outer coat pockets, after an ineffectual +search in the inner one. A strange look came over his face. +</P> + +<P> +"What's the matter?" asked Tom. +</P> + +<P> +"The map—the map!" gasped the professor. "The map I was showing you +last night! The map that tells where we are to dig for the idol of +gold! It's gone!" +</P> + +<P> +"The map gone?" gasped Mr. Damon. +</P> + +<P> +"I—I'm afraid so," faltered the professor. "I put it away carefully, +but now——" +</P> + +<P> +He ceased speaking to make a further search in all his pockets. +</P> + +<P> +"Maybe you left it in another coat," suggested Ned. +</P> + +<P> +"Or maybe some of the Beecher crowd took it!" snapped Tom. +</P> + +<BR><BR><BR> + +<A NAME="chap18"></A> +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +CHAPTER XVIII +</H3> + +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +"EL TIGRE!" +</H3> + +<P> +The four men gazed at one another. Consternation showed on the face of +Professor Bumper, and was reflected, more or less, on the countenances +of his companions. +</P> + +<P> +"Are you sure the map is gone?" asked Tom. "I know how easy it is to +mislay anything in a camp of this sort. I couldn't at first find my +safety razor this morning, and when I did locate it the hoe was in one +of my shoes. I'm sure a rat or some jungle animal must have dragged it +there. Now maybe they took your map, Professor. That oiled silk in +which it was wrapped might have appealed to the taste of a rat or a +snake." +</P> + +<P> +"It is no joking matter," said Professor Bumper. "But I know you +appreciate the seriousness of it as much as I do, Tom. But I had the +map in the pocket of this coat, and now it is gone!" +</P> + +<P> +"When did you put it there?" asked Ned. +</P> + +<P> +"This morning, just before I came to breakfast." +</P> + +<P> +"Oh, then you have had it since last night!" Tom ejaculated. +</P> + +<P> +"Yes, I slept with it under my clothes that I rolled up for a pillow, +and when it was my turn to stand guard I took it with me. Then I put +it back again and went to sleep. When I awoke and dressed I put the +packet in my pocket and ate breakfast. Now when I look for it—why, +it's gone!" +</P> + +<P> +"The map or the oiled-silk package?" asked Mr. Damon, who, once having +been a businessman, was sometimes a stickler for small points. +</P> + +<P> +"Both," answered the professor. "I opened the silk to tie it more +smoothly, so it would not be such a lump in my pocket, and I made sure +the map was inside." +</P> + +<P> +"Then the whole thing has been taken—or you have lost it," suggested +Ned. +</P> + +<P> +"I am not in the habit of losing valuable maps," retorted the +scientist. "And the pocket of my coat I had made deep, for the purpose +of carrying the long map. It could not drop out." +</P> + +<P> +"Well, we mustn't overlook any possible chances," suggested Tom. "Come +on now, we'll search every inch of the ground over which you traveled +this morning, Professor." +</P> + +<P> +"It MUST be found," murmured the scientist. "Without it all our work +will go for naught." +</P> + +<P> +They all went into the tent where the professor and Mr. Damon had slept +when they were not on guard. The camp was a busy place, with the +Indians finishing their morning meal, and getting ready for the work of +the day. For word had been given out that there would be no more long +periods of travel. +</P> + +<P> +In consequence, efforts were being directed by the head men of the +bearers to making a more permanent camp in the wilderness. Shelters of +palm-thatched huts were being built, a site for cooking fires made, +and, at the direction of Mr. Damon, to whom this part was entrusted, +some sanitary regulations were insisted on. +</P> + +<P> +Leaving this busy scene, the four, with solemn faces, proceeded to the +tent where it was hoped the map would be found. But though they went +through everything, and traced and retraced every place the professor +could remember having traversed about the canvas shelter, no signs of +the important document could be found. +</P> + +<P> +"I don't believe I dropped it out of my pocket," said the scientist, +for perhaps the twentieth time. +</P> + +<P> +"Then it was taken," declared Tom. +</P> + +<P> +"That's what I say!" chimed in Ned. "And by some of Beecher's party!" +</P> + +<P> +"Easy, my boy," cautioned Mr. Damon. "We don't want to make +accusations we can't prove." +</P> + +<P> +"That is true," agreed Professor Bumper. "But, though I am sorry to +say it of a fellow archaelogist, I can not help thinking Beecher had +something to do with the taking of my map." +</P> + +<P> +"But how could any of them get it?" asked Mr. Damon. "You say you had +the map this morning, and certainly none of them has been in our camp +since dawn, though of course it is possible that some of them sneaked +in during the night." +</P> + +<P> +"It does seem a mystery how it could have been taken in open daylight, +while we were about camp together," said Tom. "But is the loss such a +grave one, Professor Bumper?" +</P> + +<P> +"Very grave. In fact I may say it is impossible to proceed with the +excavating without the map." +</P> + +<P> +"Then what are we to do?" asked Ned. +</P> + +<P> +"We must get it back!" declared Tom. +</P> + +<P> +"Yes," agreed the scientist, "we can not work without it. As soon as I +make a little further search, to make sure it could not have dropped in +some out-of-the-way place, I shall go over to Professor Beecher's camp +and demand that he give me back my property." +</P> + +<P> +"Suppose he says he hasn't taken it?" asked Tom. +</P> + +<P> +"Well, I'm sure he either took it personally, or one of his party did. +And yet I can't understand how they could have come here without our +seeing them," and the professor shook his head in puzzled despair. +</P> + +<P> +A more detailed search did not reveal the missing map, and Mr. Damon +and his friend the scientist were on the point of departing for the +camp of their rivals, less than a mile away, when Tom had what really +amounted to an inspiration. +</P> + +<P> +"Look here, Professor!" he cried. "Can you remember any of the details +of your map—say, for instance, where we ought to begin excavating to +get at the wonders of the underground city?" +</P> + +<P> +"Well, Tom, I did intend to compare my map with the configuration of +the country about here. There is a certain mountain which serves as a +landmark and a guide for a starting point. I think that is it over +there," and the scientist pointed to a distant snow-capped peak. +</P> + +<P> +The party had left the low and marshy land of the true jungle, and were +among the foothills, though all about them was dense forest and +underbush, which, in reality, was as much a jungle as the lower plains, +but was less wet. +</P> + +<P> +"The point where I believe we should start to dig," said the professor, +"is near the spot where the top of the mountain casts a shadow when the +sun is one hour high. At least that is the direction given in the old +manuscripts. So, though we can do little without the map, we might +make a start by digging there." +</P> + +<P> +"No, not there!" exclaimed Tom. +</P> + +<P> +"Why not?" +</P> + +<P> +"Because we don't want to let Beecher's crowd know that we are on the +track of the idol of gold." +</P> + +<P> +"But they know anyhow, for they have the map," commented Ned, puzzled +by his chum's words. +</P> + +<P> +"Maybe not," said Tom slowly. "I think this is a time for a big bluff. +It may work and it may not. Beecher's crowd either has the map or they +have not. If they have it they will lose no time in trying to find the +right place to start digging and then they'll begin excavating. +</P> + +<P> +"Very good! If they do that we have a right to dig near the same place. +But if they have not the map, which is possible, and if we start to dig +where the professor's memory tells him is the right spot, we'll only +give them the tip, and they'll dig there also." +</P> + +<P> +"I'm sure they have the map," the professor said. "But I believe your +plan is a good one, Tom." +</P> + +<P> +"Just what do you propose doing?" asked Ned. +</P> + +<P> +"Fooling 'em!" exclaimed Tom quickly. "We'll dig in some place remote +from the spot where the mountain casts its shadow. They will think, if +they haven't the map, that we are proceeding by it, and they'll dig, +too. When they find nothing, as will also happen to us, they may go +away. +</P> + +<P> +"If, on the other hand, they have the map, and see us digging at a spot +not indicated on it, they will be puzzled, knowing we must have some +idea of where the buried city lies. They will think the map is at +fault, perhaps, and not make use of it. Then we can get it back." +</P> + +<P> +"Bless my hatband!" cried Mr. Damon. "I believe you're right, Tom. +We'll dig in the wrong place to fool 'em." +</P> + +<P> +And this was done. Search for the precious map was given up for the +time being, and the professor and his friends set the natives to work +digging shafts in the ground, as though sinking them down to the level +of the buried city. +</P> + +<P> +But though this false work was prosecuted with vigor for several days, +there was a feeling of despair among the Bumper party over the loss of +the map. +</P> + +<P> +"If we could only get it back!" exclaimed the professor, again and +again. +</P> + +<P> +Meanwhile the Beecher party seemed inactive. True, some members of it +did come over to look on from a respectful distance at what the diggers +were doing. Some of the rival helpers, under the direction of the head +of the expedition, also began sinking shafts. But they were not in the +locality remembered by Professor Bumper as being correct. +</P> + +<P> +"I can't imagine what they're up to," he said. "If they have my map +they would act differently, I should think." +</P> + +<P> +"Whatever they're up to," answered Tom, "the time has come when we can +dig at the place where we can hope for results." And the following day +shafts were started in the shadow of the mountain. +</P> + +<P> +Until some evidence should have been obtained by digging, as to the +location beneath the surface of a buried city, there was nothing for +the travelers to do but wait. Turns were taken in directing the +efforts of the diggers, and an occasional inspection was made of the +shafts. +</P> + +<P> +"What do you expect to find first?" asked Tom of Professor Bumper one +day, when the latter was at the top of a shaft waiting for a bucket +load of dirt to be hoisted up. +</P> + +<P> +"Potsherds and artifacts," was the answer. +</P> + +<P> +"What sort of bugs are they?" asked Ned with a laugh. He and Tom were +about to go hunting with their electric rifles. +</P> + +<P> +"Artifacts are things made by the Indians—or whatever members of the +race who built the ancient cities were called—such as household +articles, vases, ornaments, tools and so on. Anything made by +artificial means is called an artifact." +</P> + +<P> +"And potsherds are things with those Chinese laundry ticket scratches +on them," added Tom. +</P> + +<P> +"Exactly," said the professor, laughing. "Though some of the +strange-appearing inscriptions give much valuable information. As soon +as we find some of them—say a broken bit of pottery with hieroglyphics +on—I will know I am on the right track." +</P> + +<P> +And while the scientist and Mr. Damon kept watch at the top of the +shaft, Tom and Ned went out into the jungle to hunt. They had killed +some game, and were stalking a fine big deer, which would provide a +feast for the natives, when suddenly the silence of the lonely forest +was broken by a piercing scream, followed by an agonized cry of +"El tigre! El tigre!" +</P> + +<BR><BR><BR> + +<A NAME="chap19"></A> +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +CHAPTER XIX +</H3> + +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +POISONED ARROWS +</H3> + +<P> +"Did you hear that, Tom?" asked Ned, in a hoarse whisper. +</P> + +<P> +"Surely," was the cautious answer. "Keep still, and I'll try for a +shot." +</P> + +<P> +"Better be quick," advised Ned in a tense voice. "The chap who did +that yelling seems to be in trouble!" +</P> + +<P> +And as Ned's voice trailed off into a whisper, again came the cry, this +time in frenzied pain. +</P> + +<P> +"El tigre! El tigre!" Then there was a jumble of words. +</P> + +<P> +"It's over this way!" and this time Ned shouted, seeing no need for low +voices since the other was so loud. +</P> + +<P> +Tom looked to where Ned had parted the bushes alongside a jungle path. +Through the opening the young inventor saw, in a little glade, that +which caused him to take a firmer grip on his electric rifle, and also +a firmer grip on his nerves. +</P> + +<P> +Directly in front of him and Ned, and not more than a hundred yards +away, was a great tawny and spotted jaguar—the "tigre" or tiger of +Central America. The beast, with lashing tail, stood over an Indian +upon whom it seemed to have sprung from some lair, beating the +unfortunate man to the ground. Nor had he fallen scatheless, for there +was blood on the green leaves about him, and it was not the blood of +the spotted beast. +</P> + +<P> +"Oh, Tom, can you—can you——" and Ned faltered. +</P> + +<P> +The young inventor understood the unspoken question. +</P> + +<P> +"I think I can make a shot of it without hitting the man," he answered, +never turning his head. "It's a question, though, if the beast won't +claw him in the death struggle. It won't last long, however, if the +electric bullet goes to the right place, and I've got to take the +chance." +</P> + +<P> +Cautiously Tom brought his weapon to bear. Quiet as Ned and he had +been after the discovery, the jaguar seemed to feel that something was +wrong. Intent on his prey, for a time he had stood over it, gloating. +Now the brute glanced uneasily from side to side, its tail nervously +twitching, and it seemed trying to gain, by a sniffing of the air, some +information as to the direction in which danger lay, for Tom and Ned +had stooped low, concealing themselves by a screen of leaves. +</P> + +<P> +The Indian, after his first frenzied outburst of fear, now lay quiet, +as though fearing to move, moaning in pain. +</P> + +<P> +Suddenly the jaguar, attracted either by some slight movement on the +part of Ned or Tom, or perhaps by having winded them, turned his head +quickly and gazed with cruel eyes straight at the spot where the two +young men stood behind the bushes. +</P> + +<P> +"He's seen us," whispered Ned. +</P> + +<P> +"Yes," assented Tom. "And it's a perfect shot. Hope I don't miss!" +</P> + +<P> +It was not like Tom Swift to miss, nor did he on this occasion. There +was a slight report from the electric rifle—a report not unlike the +crackle of the wireless—and the powerful projectile sped true to its +mark. +</P> + +<P> +Straight through the throat and chest under the uplifted jaw of the +jaguar it went—through heart and lungs. Then with a great coughing, +sighing snarl the beast reared up, gave a convulsive leap forward +toward its newly discovered enemies, and fell dead in a limp heap, just +beyond the native over which it had been crouching before it delivered +the death stroke, now never to fall. +</P> + +<P> +"You did it, Tom! You did it!" cried Ned, springing up from where he +had been kneeling to give his chum a better chance to shoot. "You did +it, and saved the man's life!" And Ned would have rushed out toward the +still twitching body. +</P> + +<P> +"Just a minute!" interposed Tom. "Those beasts sometimes have as many +lives as a cat. I'll give it one more for luck." Another electric +projectile through the head of the jaguar produced no further effect +than to move the body slightly, and this proved conclusively that there +was no life left. It was safe to approach, which Tom and Ned did. +</P> + +<P> +Their first thought, after a glance at the jaguar, was for the Indian. +It needed but a brief examination to show that he was not badly hurt. +The jaguar had leaped on him from a low tree as he passed under it, as +the boys learned afterward, and had crushed the man to earth by the +weight of the spotted body more than by a stroke of the paw. +</P> + +<P> +The American jaguar is not so formidable a beast as the native name of +tiger would cause one to suppose, though they are sufficiently +dangerous, and this one had rather badly clawed the Indian. +Fortunately the scratches were on the fleshy parts of the arms and +shoulders, where, though painful, they were not necessarily serious. +</P> + +<P> +"But if you hadn't shot just when you did, Tom, it would have been all +up with him," commented Ned. +</P> + +<P> +"Oh, well, I guess you'd have hit him if I hadn't," returned the young +inventor. "But let's see what we can do for this chap." +</P> + +<P> +The man sat up wonderingly—hardly able to believe that he had been +saved from the dreaded "tigre." His wounds were bleeding rather +freely, and as Tom and Ned carried with them a first-aid kit they now +brought it into use. The wounds were bound up, the man was given water +to drink and then, as he was able to walk, Tom and Ned offered to help +him wherever he wanted to go. +</P> + +<P> +"Blessed if I can tell whether he's one of our Indians or whether he +belongs to the Beecher crowd," remarked Tom. +</P> + +<P> +"Senor Beecher," said the Indian, adding, in Spanish, that he lived in +the vicinity and had only lately been engaged by the young professor +who hoped to discover the idol of gold before Tom's scientific friend +could do so. +</P> + +<P> +Tom and Ned knew a little Spanish, and with that, and simple but +expressive signs on the part of the Indian, they learned his story. He +had his palm-thatched hut not far from the Beecher camp, in a small +Indian village, and he, with others, had been hired on the arrival of +the Beecher party to help with the excavations. These, for some +reason, were delayed. +</P> + +<P> +"Delayed because they daren't use the map they stole from us," +commented Ned. +</P> + +<P> +"Maybe," agreed Tom. +</P> + +<P> +The Indian, whose name, it developed, was Tal, as nearly as Tom and Ned +could master it, had left camp to go to visit his wife and child in the +jungle hut, intending to return to the Beecher camp at night. But as +he passed through the forest the jaguar had dropped on him, bearing him +to earth. +</P> + +<P> +"But you saved my life, Senor," he said to Tom, dropping on one knee +and trying to kiss Tom's hand, which our hero avoided. "And now my +life is yours," added the Indian. +</P> + +<P> +"Well, you'd better get home with it and take care of it," said Tom. +"I'll have Professor Bumper come over and dress your scratches in a +better and more careful way. The bandages we put on are only +temporary." +</P> + +<P> +"My wife she make a poultice of leaves—they cure me," said the Indian. +</P> + +<P> +"I guess that will be the best way," observed Ned. "These natives can +doctor themselves for some things, better than we can." +</P> + +<P> +"Well, we'll take him home," suggested Tom. "He might keel over from +loss of blood. Come on," he added to Tal, indicating his object. +</P> + +<P> +It was not far to the native's hut from the place where the jaguar had +been killed, and there Tom and Ned underwent another demonstration of +affection as soon as those of Tal's immediate family and the other +natives understood what had happened. +</P> + +<P> +"I hate this business!" complained Tom, after having been knelt to by +the Indian's wife and child, who called him the "preserver" and other +endearing titles of the same kind. "Come on, let's hike back." +</P> + +<P> +But Indian hospitality, especially after a life has been saved, is not +so simple as all that. +</P> + +<P> +"My life—my house—all that I own is yours," said Tal in deep +gratitude. "Take everything," and he waved his hand to indicate all +the possessions in his humble hut. +</P> + +<P> +"Thanks," answered Tom, "but I guess you need all you have. That's a +fine specimen of blow gun though," he added, seeing one hanging on the +wall. "I wouldn't mind having one like that. If you get well enough +to make me one, Tal, and some arrows to go with it, I'd like it for a +curiosity to hang in my room at home." +</P> + +<P> +"The Senor shall have a dozen," promised the Indian. +</P> + +<P> +"Look, Ned," went on Tom, pointing to the native weapon. "I never saw +one just like this. They use small arrows or darts, tipped with wild +cotton, instead of feathers." +</P> + +<P> +"These the arrows," explained Tal's wife, bringing a bundle from a +corner of the one-room hut. As she held them out her husband gave a +cry of fear. +</P> + +<P> +"Poisoned arrows! Poisoned arrows!" he exclaimed. "One scratch and the +senors are dead men. Put them away!" +</P> + +<P> +In fear the Indian wife prepared to obey, but as she did so Tom Swift +caught sight of the package and uttered a strange cry. +</P> + +<P> +"Thundering hoptoads, Ned!" he exclaimed. "The poisoned arrows are +wrapped in the piece of oiled silk that was around the professor's +missing map!" +</P> + +<BR><BR><BR> + +<A NAME="chap20"></A> +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +CHAPTER XX +</H3> + +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +AN OLD LEGEND +</H3> + +<P> +Fascinated, Tom and Ned gazed at the package the Indian woman held out +to them. Undoubtedly it was oiled silk on the outside, and through the +almost transparent covering could be seen the small arrows, or darts, +used in the blow gun. +</P> + +<P> +"Where did you get that?" asked Tom, pointing to the bundle and gazing +sternly at Tal. +</P> + +<P> +"What is the matter, Senor?" asked the Indian in turn. "Is it that you +are afraid of the poisoned arrows? Be assured they will not harm you +unless you are scratched by them." +</P> + +<P> +Tom and Ned found it difficult to comprehend all the rapid Spanish +spoken by their host, but they managed to understand some, and his +eloquent gestures made up the rest. +</P> + +<P> +"We're not afraid," Tom said, noting that the oiled skin well covered +the dangerous darts. "But where did you get that?" +</P> + +<P> +"I picked it up, after another Indian had thrown it away. He got it in +your camp, Senor. I will not lie to you. I did not steal. Valdez +went to your camp to steal—he is a bad Indian—and he brought back +this wrapping. It contained something he thought was gold, but it was +not, so he——" +</P> + +<P> +"Quick! Yes! Tell us!" demanded Tom eagerly. "What did he do with the +professor's map that was in the oiled silk? Where is it?" +</P> + +<P> +"Oh, Senors!" exclaimed the Indian woman, thinking perhaps her husband +was about to be dealt harshly with when she heard Tom's excited voice. +"Tal do no harm!" +</P> + +<P> +"No, he did no harm," went on Tom, in a reassuring tone. "But he can +do a whole lot of good if he tells us what became of the map that was +in this oiled silk. Where is it?" he asked again. +</P> + +<P> +"Valdez burn it up," answered Tal. +</P> + +<P> +"What, burned the professor's map?" cried Ned. +</P> + +<P> +"If that was in this yellow cloth—yes," answered the injured man. +"Valdez he is bad. He say to me he is going to your camp to see what +he can take. How he got this I know not, but he come back one morning +with the yellow package. I see him, but he make me promise not to +tell. But you save my life I tell you everything. +</P> + +<P> +"Valdez open the package; but it is not gold, though he think so +because it is yellow, and the man with no hair on his head keep it in +his pocket close, so close," and Tal hugged himself to indicate what he +meant. +</P> + +<P> +"That's Professor Bumper," explained Ned. +</P> + +<P> +"How did Valdez get the map out of the professor's coat?" asked Tom. +</P> + +<P> +"Valdez he very much smart. When man with no hair on his head take +coat off for a minute to eat breakfast Valdez take yellow thing out of +pocket." +</P> + +<P> +"The Indian must have sneaked into camp when we were eating," said Tom. +"Those from Beecher's party and our workers look all alike to us. We +wouldn't know one from the other, and one of our rival's might slip in." +</P> + +<P> +"One evidently did, if this is really the piece of oiled silk that was +around the professor's map," said Ned. +</P> + +<P> +"It certainly is the same," declared the young inventor. "See, there +is his name," and he stretched out his hand to point. +</P> + +<P> +"Don't touch!" cried Tal. "Poisoned arrows snake poison—very +dead-like and quick." +</P> + +<P> +"Don't worry, I won't touch," said Tom grimly. "But go on. You say +Valdez sneaked into our camp, took the oiled-silk package from the coat +pocket of Professor Bumper and went back to his own camp with it, +thinking it was gold." +</P> + +<P> +"Yes," answered Tal, though it is doubtful if he understood all that +Tom said, as it was half Spanish and half English. But the Indian knew +a little English, too. "Valdez, when he find no gold is very mad. +Only papers in the yellow silk-papers with queer marks on. Valdez +think it maybe a charm to work evil, so he burn them up—all up!" +</P> + +<P> +"Burned that rare map!" gasped Tom. +</P> + +<P> +"All in fire," went on Tal, indicating by his hands the play of flames. +"Valdez throw away yellow silk, and I take for my arrows so rain not +wash off poison. I give to you, if you like, with blow gun." +</P> + +<P> +"No, thank you," answered Tom, in disappointed tones. "The oiled silk +is of no use without the map, and that's gone. Whew! but this is +tough!" he said to his chum. "As long as it was only stolen there was +a chance to get it back, but if it's burned, the jig is up." +</P> + +<P> +"It looks so," agreed Ned. "We'd better get back and tell the +professor. It he can't get along without the map it's time he started +a movement toward getting another. So it wasn't Beecher, after all, +who got it." +</P> + +<P> +"Evidently not," assented Tom. "But I believe him capable of it." +</P> + +<P> +"You haven't much use for him," remarked Ned. +</P> + +<P> +"Huh!" was all the answer given by his chum. +</P> + +<P> +"I am sorry, Senors," went on Tal, "but I could not stop Valdez, and +the burning of the papers——" +</P> + +<P> +"No, you could not help it," interrupted the young inventor. "But it +just happens that it brings bad luck to us. You see, Tal, the papers +in this yellow covering, told of an old buried city that the +bald-headed professor—the-man-with-no-hair-on-his-head—is very +anxious to discover. It is somewhere under the ground," and he waved +to the jungle all about them, pointing earthwards. +</P> + +<P> +"Paper Valdez burn tell of lost city?" asked Tal, his face lighting up. +</P> + +<P> +"Yes. But now, of course, we can't tell where to dig for it." +</P> + +<P> +The Indian turned to his wife and talked rapidly with her in their own +dialect. She, too, seemed greatly excited, making quick gestures. +Finally she ran out of the hut. +</P> + +<P> +"Where is she going?" asked Tom suspiciously. +</P> + +<P> +"To get her grandfather. He very old Indian. He know story of buried +cities under trees. Very old story—what you call legend, maybe. But +Goosal know. He tell same as his grandfather told him. You wait. +Goosal come, and you listen." +</P> + +<P> +"Good, Ned!" suddenly cried Tom. "Maybe, we'll get on the track of +lost Kurzon after all, through some ancient Indian legend. Maybe we +won't need the map!" +</P> + +<P> +"It hardly seems possible," said Ned slowly. "What can these Indians +know of buried cities that were out of existence before Columbus came +here? Why, they haven't any written history." +</P> + +<P> +"No, and that may be just the reason they are more likely to be right," +returned Tom. "Legends handed down from one grandfather to another go +back a good many hundred years. If they were written they might be +destroyed as the professor's map was. Somehow or other, though I can't +tell why, I begin to see daylight ahead of us." +</P> + +<P> +"I wish I did," remarked Ned. +</P> + +<P> +"Here comes Goosal I think," murmured Tom, and he pointed to an Indian, +bent with the weight of years, who, led by Tal's wife, was slowly +approaching the hut. +</P> + +<BR><BR><BR> + +<A NAME="chap21"></A> +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +CHAPTER XXI +</H3> + +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +THE CAVERN +</H3> + +<P> +"Now Goosal can tell you," said Tal, evidently pleased that he had, in +a measure, solved the problem caused by the burning of the professor's +map. "Goosal very old Indian. He know old stories—legends—very old." +</P> + +<P> +"Well, if he can tell us how to find the buried city of Kurzon and +the—the things in it," said Tom, "he's all right!" +</P> + +<P> +The aged Indian proceeded slowly toward the hut where the impatient +youths awaited him. +</P> + +<P> +"I know what you seek in the buried city," remarked Tal. +</P> + +<P> +"Do you?" cried Tom, wondering if some one had indiscreetly spoken of +the idol of gold. +</P> + +<P> +"Yes you want pieces of rock, with strange writings on them, old +weapons, broken pots. I know. I have helped white men before." +</P> + +<P> +"Yes, those are the things we want," agreed Tom, with a glance at his +chum. "That is—some of them. But does your wife's grandfather talk +our language?" +</P> + +<P> +"No, but I can tell you what he says." +</P> + +<P> +By this time the old man, led by "Mrs. Tal"—as the young men called +the wife of the Indian they had helped—entered the hut. He seemed +nervous and shy, and glanced from Tom and Ned to his grandson-in-law, +as the latter talked rapidly in the Indian dialect. Then Goosal made +answer, but what it was all about the boys could not tell. +</P> + +<P> +"Goosal say," translated Tal, "that he know a story of a very old city +away down under ground." +</P> + +<P> +"Tell us about it!" urged Tom eagerly. +</P> + +<P> +But a difficulty very soon developed. Tal's intentions were good, but +he was not equal to the task of translating. Nor was the understanding +of Tom and Ned of Spanish quite up to the mark. +</P> + +<P> +"Say, this is too much for me!" exclaimed Tom. "We are losing the most +valuable part of this by not understanding what Goosal says, and what +Tal translates." +</P> + +<P> +"What can we do?" asked Ned. +</P> + +<P> +"Get the professor here as soon as possible. He can manage this +dialect, and he'll get the information at first hand. If Goosal can +tell where to begin excavating for the city he ought to tell the +professor, not us." +</P> + +<P> +"That's right," agreed Ned. "We'll bring the professor here as soon as +we can." +</P> + +<P> +Accordingly they stopped the somewhat difficult task of listening to +the translated story and told Tal, as well as they could, that they +would bring the "man-with-no-hair-on-his-head" to listen to the tale. +</P> + +<P> +This seemed to suit the Indians, all of whom in the small colony +appeared to be very grateful to Tom and Ned for having saved the life +of Tal. +</P> + +<P> +"That was a good shot you made when you bowled over the jaguar," said +Ned, as the two young explorers started back to their camp. +</P> + +<P> +"Better than I realized, if it leads to the discovery of Kurzon and the +idol of gold," remarked Tom. +</P> + +<P> +"And to think we should come across the oiled-silk holding the poisoned +arrows!" went on Ned. "That's the strangest part of the whole affair. +If it hadn't been that you shot the jaguar this never would have come +about." +</P> + +<P> +That Professor Bumper was astonished, and Mr. Damon likewise, when they +heard the story of Tom and Ned, is stating it mildly. +</P> + +<P> +"Come on!" exclaimed the scientist, as Tom finished, "we must see this +Goosal at once. If my map is destroyed, and it seems to be, this old +Indian may be our only hope. Where did he say the buried city was, +Tom?" +</P> + +<P> +"Oh, somewhere in this vicinity, as nearly as I could make out. But +you'd better talk with him yourself. We didn't say anything about the +idol of gold." +</P> + +<P> +"That's right. It's just as well to let the natives think we are only +after ordinary relics." +</P> + +<P> +"Bless my insurance policy!" gasped Mr. Damon. "It does not seem +possible that we are on the right track." +</P> + +<P> +"Well, I think we are, from what little information Goosal gave us," +remarked Tom. "This buried city of his must be a wonderful place." +</P> + +<P> +"It is, if it is what I take it to be," agreed the professor. "I told +you I would bring you to a land of wonders, Tom Swift, and they have +hardly begun yet. Come, I am anxious to talk to Goosal." +</P> + +<P> +In order that the Indians in the Bumper camp might not hear rumors of +the new plan to locate the hidden city, and, at the same time, to keep +rumors from spreading to the camp of the rivals, the scientist and his +friends started a new shaft, and put a shift of men at work on it. +</P> + +<P> +"We'll pretend we are on the right track, and very busy," said Tom. +"That will fool Beecher." +</P> + +<P> +"Are you glad to know he did not take your map Professor Bumper?" asked +Mr. Damon. +</P> + +<P> +"Well, yes. It is hard to believe such things of a fellow scientist." +</P> + +<P> +"If he didn't take it he wanted to," said Tom. "And he has done, or +will do, things as unsportsmanlike." +</P> + +<P> +"Oh, you are hardly fair, perhaps, Tom," commented Ned. +</P> + +<P> +"Um!" was all the answer he received. +</P> + +<P> +With the Indians in camp busy on the excavation work, and having +ascertained that similar work was going on in the Beecher outfit, +Professor Bumper, with Mr. Damon and the young men, set off to visit +the Indian village and listen to Goosal's story. They passed the place +where Tom had slain the jaguar, but nothing was left but the bones; the +ants, vultures and jungle animals having picked them clean in the night. +</P> + +<P> +On the arrival of Tom and his friends at the Indian's hut, Goosal told, +in language which Professor Bumper could understand, the ancient legend +of the buried city as he had had it from his grandfather. +</P> + +<P> +"But is that all you know about it, Goosal?" asked the savant. +</P> + +<P> +"No, Learned One. It is true most of what I have told you was told to +me by my father and his father's father. But I—I myself—with these +eyes, have looked upon the lost city." +</P> + +<P> +"You have!" cried the professor, this time in English. "Where? When? +Take us to it! How do you get here?" +</P> + +<P> +"Through the cavern of the dead," was the answer when the questions +were modified. +</P> + +<P> +"Bless my diamond ring!" exclaimed Mr. Damon, when Professor Bumper +translated the reply. "What does he mean?" +</P> + +<P> +And then, after some talk, this information came out. Years before, +when Goosal was a young man, he had been taken by his grandfather on a +journey through the jungle. They stopped one day at the foot of a high +mountain, and, clearing away the brush and stones at a certain place, +an entrance to a great cavern was revealed. This, it appeared, was the +Indian burial ground, and had been used for generations. +</P> + +<P> +Goosal, though in fear and trembling, was lead through it, and came to +another cavern, vaster than the first. And there he saw strange and +wonderful sights, for it was the remains of a buried city, that had +once been the home of a great and powerful tribe unlike the +Indians—the ancient Mayas it would seem. +</P> + +<P> +"Can you take us to this cavern?" asked the professor. +</P> + +<P> +"Yes," answered Goosal. "I will lead to it those who saved the life of +Tal—them and their friends. I will take you to the lost city!" +</P> + +<P> +"Good!" cried Mr. Damon, when this had been translated. "Now let +Beecher try to play any more tricks on us! Ho! for the cavern and the +lost city of Kurzon." +</P> + +<P> +"And the idol of gold," said Tom Swift to himself. "I hope we can get +it ahead of Beecher. Perhaps if I can help in that—Oh, well, here's +hoping, that's all!" and a little smile curved his lips. +</P> + +<P> +Greatly excited by the strange news, but maintaining as calm an air +outwardly as possible, so as not to excite the Indians, Tom and his +friends returned to camp to prepare for their trip. Goosal had said +the cavern lay distant more than a two-days' journey into the jungle. +</P> + +<BR><BR><BR> + +<A NAME="chap22"></A> +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +CHAPTER XXII +</H3> + +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +THE STORM +</H3> + +<P> +"Now," remarked Tom, once they were back again in their camp, "we must +go about this trip to the cavern in a way that will cause no suspicion +over there as to what our object is," and he nodded in the direction of +the quarters of his rival. +</P> + +<P> +"Do you mean to go off quietly?" asked Ned. +</P> + +<P> +"Yes. And to keep the work going on here, at these shafts," put in the +scientist, "so that if any of their spies happen to come here they will +think we still believe the buried city to be just below us. To that +end we must keep the Indians digging, though I am convinced now that it +is useless." +</P> + +<P> +Accordingly preparations were made for an expedition into the jungle +under the leadership of Goosal. Tal had not sufficiently recovered +from the jaguar wounds to go with the party, but the old man, in spite +of his years, was hale and hearty and capable of withstanding hardships. +</P> + +<P> +One of the most intelligent of the Indians was put in charge of the +digging gangs as foreman, and told to keep them at work, and not to let +them stray. Tolpec, whose brother Tom had tried to save, proved a +treasure. He agreed to remain behind and look after the interests of +his friends, and see that none of their baggage or stores were taken. +</P> + +<P> +"Well, I guess we're as ready as we ever shall be," remarked Tom, as +the cavalcade made ready to start. Mules carried the supplies that +were to be taken into the jungle, and others of the sturdy animals were +to be ridden by the travelers. The trail was not an easy one, Goosal +warned them. +</P> + +<P> +Tom and his friends found it even worse than they had expected, for all +their experience in jungle and mountain traveling. In places it was +necessary to dismount and lead the mules along, sometimes pushing and +dragging them. More than once the trail fairly hung on the edge of +some almost bottomless gorge, and again it wound its way between great +walls of rock, so poised that they appeared about to topple over and +crush the travelers. But they kept on with dogged patience, through +many hardships. +</P> + +<P> +To add to their troubles they seemed to have entered the abode of the +fiercest mosquitoes encountered since coming to Honduras. At times it +was necessary to ride along with hats covered with mosquito netting, +and hands encased in gloves. +</P> + +<P> +They had taken plenty of condensed food with them, and they did not +suffer in this respect. Game, too, was plentiful and the electric +rifles of Tom and Ned added to the larder. +</P> + +<P> +One night, after a somewhat sound sleep induced by hard travel on the +trail that day, Tom awoke to hear some one or something moving about +among their goods, which included their provisions. +</P> + +<P> +"Who's there?" asked the young inventor sharply, as he reached for his +electric rifle. +</P> + +<P> +There was no answer, but a rattling of the pans. +</P> + +<P> +"Speak, or I'll fire!" Tom warned, adding this in such Spanish as he +could muster, for he thought it might be one of the Indians. No reply +came, and then, seeing by the light of the stars a dark form moving in +front of the tent occupied by himself and Ned, Tom fired. +</P> + +<P> +There was a combined grunt and squeal of pain, then a savage growl, and +Ned yelled: +</P> + +<P> +"What's the matter, Tom?" for he had been awakened, and heard the +crackle of the electrical discharge. +</P> + +<P> +"I don't know," Tom answered. "But I shot something—or somebody!" +</P> + +<P> +"Maybe some of Beecher's crowd," ventured his chum. But when they got +their electric torches, and focused them on the inert, black object, it +was found to be a bear which had come to nose about the camp for dainty +morsels. +</P> + +<P> +Bruin was quite dead, and as he was in prime condition there was a +feast of bear meat at the following dinner. The white travelers found +it rather too strong for their palates, but the Indians reveled in it. +</P> + +<P> +It was shortly after noon the next day, when Goosal, after remarking +that a storm seemed brewing, announced that they would be at the +entrance to the cavern in another hour. +</P> + +<P> +"Good!" cried Professor Bumper. "At last we are near the buried city." +</P> + +<P> +"Don't be too sure," advised Mr. Damon, "We may be disappointed. +Though I hope not for your sake, my dear Professor." +</P> + +<P> +Goosal now took the lead, and the old Indian, traveling on foot, for he +said he could better look for the old landmark that way than on the +back of a mule, walked slowly along a rough cliff. +</P> + +<P> +"Here, somewhere, is the entrance to the cavern," said the aged man. +"It was many years ago that I was here—many years. But it seems as +though yesterday. It is little changed." +</P> + +<P> +Indeed little did change in that land of wonders. Only nature caused +what alterations there were. The hand of man had long been absent. +</P> + +<P> +Slowly Goosal walked along the rocky trail, on one side a sheer rock, +towering a hundred feet or more toward the sky. On the other side a +deep gash leading to a great fertile valley below. +</P> + +<P> +Suddenly the old man paused, and looked about him as though uncertain. +Then, more slowly still, he put out his hand and pulled at some bushes +that grew on a ledge of the rock. They came away, having no depth of +earth, and a small opening was disclosed. +</P> + +<P> +"It is here," said Goosal quietly. "The entrance to the cavern that +leads to the burial place of the dead, and the city that is dead also. +It is here." +</P> + +<P> +He stood aside while the others hurried forward. It took but a few +minutes to prove that he was right—at least as to the existence of the +cavern—for the four men were soon peering into the opening. +</P> + +<P> +"Come on!" cried Tom, impetuously. +</P> + +<P> +"Wait a moment," suggested the professor, "Sometimes the air in these +places is foul. We must test it." But a torch one of the Indians +threw in burned with a steady glow. That test was conclusive at least. +They made ready to enter. +</P> + +<P> +Torches of a light bark, that glowed with a steady flame and little +smoke, had been provided, as well as a good supply of electric +dry-battery lamps, and the way into the cavern was thus well lighted. +At first the Indians were afraid to enter, but a word or two from +Goosal reassured them, and they followed Professor Bumper, Tom, and the +others into the cavern. +</P> + +<P> +For several hundred feet there was nothing remarkable about the cave. +It was like any other cavern of the mountains, though wonderful for the +number of crystal formations on the roof and walls—formations that +sparkled like a million diamonds in the flickering lights. +</P> + +<P> +"Talk about a wonderland!" cried Tom. "This is fairyland!" +</P> + +<P> +A moment later, as Goosal walked on beside the professor and Tom, the +aged Indian came to a pause, and, pointing ahead, murmured: +</P> + +<P> +"The city of the dead!" +</P> + +<P> +They saw the niches cut in the rock walls, niches that held the +countless bones of those who had died many, many years before. It was +a vast Indian grave. +</P> + +<P> +"Doubtless a wealth of material of historic interest here," said +Professor Bumper, flashing his torch on the skeletons. "But it will +keep. Where is the city you spoke of, Goosal?" +</P> + +<P> +"Farther on, Senor. Follow me." +</P> + +<P> +Past the stone graves they went, deeper and deeper into the great cave. +Their footsteps echoed and re-echoed. Suddenly Tom, who with Ned had +gone a little ahead, came to a sudden halt and said: +</P> + +<P> +"Well, this may be a burial place sure enough, but I think I see +something alive all right—if it isn't a ghost." +</P> + +<P> +He pointed ahead. Surely those were lights flickering and moving +about, and, yes, there were men carrying them. The Bumper party came +to a surprised halt. The other lights advanced, and then, to the great +astonishment of Professor Bumper and his friends, there confronted them +in the cave several scientists of Professor Beecher's party and a score +or more of Indians. Professor Hylop, who was known to Professor +Bumper, stepped forward and asked sharply: +</P> + +<P> +"What are you doing here?" +</P> + +<P> +"I might ask you the same thing," was the retort. +</P> + +<P> +"You might, but you would not be answered," came sharply. "We have a +right here, having discovered this cavern, and we claim it under a +concession of the Honduras Government. I shall have to ask you to +withdraw." +</P> + +<P> +"Do you mean leave here?" asked Mr Damon. +</P> + +<P> +"That is it, exactly. We first discovered this cave. We have been +conducting explorations in it for several days, and we wish no +outsiders." +</P> + +<P> +"Are you speaking for Professor Beecher?" asked Tom. +</P> + +<P> +"I am. But he is here in the cave, and will speak for himself if you +desire it. But I represent him, and I order you to leave. If you do +not go peaceably we will use force. We have plenty of it," and he +glanced back at the Indians grouped behind him—scowling savage Indians. +</P> + +<P> +"We have no wish to intrude," observed Professor Bumper, "and I fully +recognize the right of prior discovery. But one member of our party +(he did not say which one) was in this cave many years ago. He led us +to it." +</P> + +<P> +"Ours is a government concession!" exclaimed Professor Hylop harshly. +"We want no intruders! Go!" and he pointed toward the direction whence +Tom's party had come. +</P> + +<P> +"Drive them out!" he ordered the Indians in Spanish, and with muttered +threats the dark-skinned men advanced toward Tom and the others. +</P> + +<P> +"You need not use force," said Professor Bumper. +</P> + +<P> +He and Professor Hylop had quarreled bitterly years before on some +scientific matter, and the matter was afterward found to be wrong. +Perhaps this made him vindictive. +</P> + +<P> +Tom stepped forward and started to protest, but Professor Bumper +interposed. +</P> + +<P> +"I guess there is no help for it but to go. It seems to be theirs by +right of discovery and government concession," he said, in disappointed +tone. "Come friends"; and dejectedly they retraced their steps. +</P> + +<P> +Followed by the threatening Indians, the Bumper party made its way back +to the entrance. They had hoped for great things, but if the cavern +gave access to the buried city—the ancient city of Kurzon on the chief +altar of which stood the golden idol, Quitzel—it looked as though they +were never to enter it. +</P> + +<P> +"We'll have to get our Indians and drive those fellows out!" declared +Tom. "I'm not going to be beaten this way—and by Beecher!" +</P> + +<P> +"It is galling," declared Professor Bumper. "Still he has right on his +side, and I must give in to priority, as I would expect him to. It is +the unwritten law." +</P> + +<P> +"Then we've failed!" cried Tom bitterly. +</P> + +<P> +"Not yet," said Professor Bumper. "If I can not unearth that buried +city I may find another in this wonderland. I shall not give up." +</P> + +<P> +"Hark! What's that noise?" asked Tom, as they approached the entrance +to the cave. +</P> + +<P> +"Sounds like a great wind blowing," commented Ned. +</P> + +<P> +It was. As they stood in the entrance they looked out to find a fierce +storm raging. The wind was sweeping down the rocky trail, the rain was +falling in veritable bucketfuls from the overhanging cliff, and +deafening thunder and blinding lightning roared and flashed. +</P> + +<P> +"Surely you would not drive us out in this storm," said Professor +Bumper to his former rival. +</P> + +<P> +"You can not stay in the cave! You must get out!" was the answer, as a +louder crash of thunder than usual seemed to shake the very mountain. +</P> + +<BR><BR><BR> + +<A NAME="chap23"></A> +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +CHAPTER XXIII +</H3> + +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +ENTOMBED ALIVE +</H3> + +<P> +For an instant Tom and his friends paused at the entrance to the +wonderful cavern, and looked at the raging storm. It seemed madness to +venture out into it, yet they had been driven from the cave by those +who had every right of discovery to say who, and who should not, +partake of its hospitality. +</P> + +<P> +"We can't go out into that blow!" cried Ned. "It's enough to loosen +the very mountains!" +</P> + +<P> +"Let's stay here and defy them!" murmured Tom. "If the—if what we +seek—is here we have as good a right to it as they have." +</P> + +<P> +"We must go out," said Professor Bumper simply. "I recognize the right +of my rival to dispossess us." +</P> + +<P> +"He may have the right, but it isn't human," said Mr. Damon. "Bless my +overshoes! If Beecher himself were here he wouldn't have the heart to +send us out in this storm." +</P> + +<P> +"I would not give him the satisfaction of appealing to him," remarked +Professor Bumper. "Come, we will go out. We have our ponchos, and we +are not fair-weather explorers. If we can't get to the lost city one +way we will another. Come my friends." +</P> + +<P> +And despite the downpour, the deafening thunder and the lightning that +seemed ready to sear one's eyes, he walked out of the cave entrance, +followed by Tom and the others. +</P> + +<P> +"Come on!" cried Tom, in a voice he tried to render confident, as they +went out into the terrible storm. "We'll beat 'em yet!" +</P> + +<P> +The rain fell harder than ever. Small torrents were now rushing down +the trail, and it was only a question of a few minutes before the place +where they stood would be a raging river, so quickly does the rain +collect in the mountains and speed toward the valleys. +</P> + +<P> +"We must take to the forest!" cried Tom. "There'll be some shelter +there, and I don't like the way the geography of this place is +behaving. There may be a landslide at any moment." +</P> + +<P> +As he spoke he motioned upward through the mist of the rain to the +sloping side of the mountain towering above them. Loose stones were +beginning to roll down, accompanied by patches of earth loosened by the +water. Some of the patches carried with them bunches of grass and +small bushes. +</P> + +<P> +"Yes, it will be best to move into the jungle," said the professor. +"Goosal, you had better take the lead." +</P> + +<P> +It was wonderful to see how well the aged Indian bore up in spite of +his years, and walked on ahead. They had left their mules tethered +some distance back, in a sheltering clump of trees, and they hoped the +animals would be safe. +</P> + +<P> +The guide found a place where they could leave the trail, though going +down a dangerous slope, and take to the forest. As carefully as +possible they descended this, the rain continuing to fall, the wind to +blow, the lightning to sizzle all about them and the thunder to boom in +their ears. +</P> + +<P> +They went on until they were beneath the shelter of the thick jungle +growth of trees, which kept off some of the pelting drops. +</P> + +<P> +"This is better!" exclaimed Ned, shaking his poncho and getting rid of +some of the water that had settled on it. +</P> + +<P> +"Bless my overcoat!" cried Mr. Damon. "We seem to have gotten out of +the frying pan into the fire!" +</P> + +<P> +"How?" asked Tom. "We are partly sheltered here, though had we stayed +in the cave in spite of——" +</P> + +<P> +A deafening crash interrupted him, and following the flash one of the +giant trees of the forest was seen to blaze up and then topple over. +</P> + +<P> +"Struck by lightning!" yelled Ned. +</P> + +<P> +"Yes; and it may happen to us!" exclaimed Mr. Damon. "We were safer +from the lightning in the open. Maybe——" +</P> + +<P> +Again came an interruption, but this time a different one. The very +ground beneath their feet seemed to be shaking and trembling. +</P> + +<P> +"What is it?" gasped Ned, while Goosal fell on his knees and began +fervently to pray. +</P> + +<P> +"It's an earthquake!" yelled Tom Swift. +</P> + +<P> +As he spoke there came another sound—the sound of a mass of earth in +motion. It came from the direction of the mountain trail they had just +left. They looked toward it and their horror-stricken eyes saw the +whole side of the mountain sliding down. +</P> + +<P> +Slowly at first the earth slid down, but constantly gathering force and +speed. In the face of this new disaster the rain seemed to have ceased +and the thunder and lightning to be less severe. It was as though one +force of nature gave way to the other. +</P> + +<P> +"Look! Look!" gasped Ned. +</P> + +<P> +In silence, which was broken now only by a low and ominous rumble, more +menacing than had been the awful fury of the elements, the travelers +looked. +</P> + +<P> +Suddenly there was a quicker movement of seemingly one whole section of +the mountain. Great rocks and trees, carried down by the appalling +force of the landslide were slipping over the trail, obliterating it as +though it had never existed. +</P> + +<P> +"There goes the entrance to the cavern!" cried Ned, and as the others +looked to where he pointed they saw the hole in the side of the +mountain—the mouth of the cave that led to the lost city of +Kurzon—completely covered by thousands of tons of earth and stones. +</P> + +<P> +"That's the end of them!" exclaimed Tom, as the rumble of the +earthquake died away. +</P> + +<P> +"Of——" Ned stopped, his eyes staring. +</P> + +<P> +"Of Professor Beecher's party. They're entombed alive!" +</P> + +<BR><BR><BR> + +<A NAME="chap24"></A> +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +CHAPTER XXIV +</H3> + +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +THE REVOLVING STONE +</H3> + +<P> +Stunned, not alone by the realization of the awfulness of the fate of +their rivals, but also by the terrific storm and the effect of the +earthquake and the landslide, Tom and his friends remained for a moment +gazing toward the mouth of the cavern, now completely out of sight, +buried by a mass of broken trees, tangled bushes, rocks and earth. +Somewhere, far beyond that mass, was the Beecher party, held prisoners +in the cave that formed the entrance to the buried city. +</P> + +<P> +Tom was the first to come to a realization of what was needed to be +done. +</P> + +<P> +"We must help them!" he exclaimed, and it was characteristic of him +that he harbored no enmity. +</P> + +<P> +"How?" asked Ned. +</P> + +<P> +"We must get a force of Indians and dig them out," was the prompt +answer. +</P> + +<P> +At Tom's vigorous words Professor Bumper's forces were energized into +action, and he stated: "Fortunately we have plenty of excavating tools. +We may be in time to save them. Come on! the storm seems to have +passed as suddenly as it came up, and the earthquake, which, after all +did not cover a wide area, seems to be over. We must start the work of +rescue at once. We must go back to camp and get all the help we can +muster." +</P> + +<P> +The storm, indeed, seemed to be over, but it was no easy matter to get +back over the soggy, rain-soaked ground to the trail they had left to +take shelter in the forest. Fortunately the earthquake had not +involved that portion where they had left their mules, but most of the +frightened animals had broken loose, and it was some little time before +they could all be caught. +</P> + +<P> +"It is no use to try to get back to camp tonight," said Tom, when the +last of the pack and saddle animals had been corralled. "It is getting +late and there is no telling the condition of the trail. We must stay +here until morning." +</P> + +<P> +"But what about them?" and Mr. Damon nodded in the direction of the +entombed ones. +</P> + +<P> +"We can help them best by waiting until the beginning of a new day," +said the professor. "We shall need a large force, and we could not +bring it up to-night. Besides, Tom is right, and if we tried to go +along the trail after dark, torn and disturbed as it is bound to be by +the rain, we might get into difficulties ourselves. No, we must camp +here until morning and then go for help." +</P> + +<P> +They all decided finally this was best. The professor, too, pointed +out that their rivals were in a large and roomy cave, not likely to +suffer from lack of air nor food or water, since they must have +supplies with them. +</P> + +<P> +"The only danger is that the cave has been crushed in," added Tom; "but +in that event we would be of no service to them anyhow." +</P> + +<P> +The night seemed very long, and it was a most uncomfortable one, +because of the shock and exertions through which the party had passed. +Added to this was the physical discomfort caused by the storm. +</P> + +<P> +But in time there was the light in the east that meant morning was at +hand, and with it came action. A hasty breakfast, cups of steaming +coffee forming a most welcome part, put them all in better condition, +and once more they were on their way, heading back to the main camp +where they had left their force of Indians. +</P> + +<P> +"My!" exclaimed Tom, as they made their way slowly along, "it surely +was some storm! Look at those big trees uprooted over there. They're +almost as big as the giant redwoods of California, and yet they were +bowled over as if they were tenpins." +</P> + +<P> +"I wonder if the wind did it or the earthquake," ventured Mr. Damon. +</P> + +<P> +"No wind could do that," declared Ned. "It must have been the +landslide caused by the earthquake." +</P> + +<P> +"The wind could do it if the ground was made soft by the rain; and that +was probably what did it," suggested Tom. +</P> + +<P> +"There is no harm in settling the point," commented Professor Bumper. +"It is not far off our trail, and will take only a few minutes to go +over to the trees. I should like to get some photographs to accompany +an article that perhaps I shall write on the effects of sudden and +severe tropical storms. We will go to look at the overturned trees and +then we'll hurry on to camp to get the rescue party." +</P> + +<P> +The uprooted trees lay on one side of the mountain trail, perhaps a +mile from the mouth of the cave which had been covered over, entombing +the Beecher party. Leaving the mules in charge of one of the Indians, +Professor Bumper and his friends, accompanied by Goosal, approached the +fallen trees. As they neared them they saw that in falling the trees +had lifted with their roots a large mass of earth and imbedded rocks +that had clung to the twisted and gnarled fibers. This mass was as +large as a house. +</P> + +<P> +"Look at the hole left when the roots pulled out!" cried Ned. "Why, +it's like the crater of a small volcano!" he added. And, as they stood +on the edge of it looking curiously at the hole made, the others agreed +with Tom's chum. +</P> + +<P> +Professor Bumper was looking about, trying to ascertain if there were +any evidences of the earthquake in the vicinity, when Tom, who had +cautiously gone a little way down into the excavation caused by the +fallen trees, uttered a cry of surprise. +</P> + +<P> +"Look!" he shouted. "Isn't that some sort of tunnel or underground +passage?" and he pointed to a square opening, perhaps seven feet high +and nearly as broad, which extended, no one knew where, downward and +onward from the side of the hole made by the uprooting of the trees. +</P> + +<P> +"It's an underground passage all right," said Professor Bumper eagerly; +"and not a natural one, either. That was fashioned by the hand of man, +if I am any judge. It seems to go right under the mountain, too. +Friends, we must explore this! It may be of the utmost importance! +Come, we have our electric torches, and we shall need them, for it's +very dark in there," and he peered into the passage in front of which +they all stood now. It seemed to have been tunneled through the earth, +the sides being lined by either slabs of stone, or walls made by a sort +of concrete. +</P> + +<P> +"But what about the rescue work?" asked Mr. Damon. +</P> + +<P> +"I am not forgetting Professor Beecher and his friends," answered the +scientist. +</P> + +<P> +"Perhaps this may be a better means of rescuing them than by digging +them out, which will take a week at least," observed Tom. +</P> + +<P> +"This a better way?" asked Ned, pointing to the tunnel. +</P> + +<P> +"That's it," confirmed the savant. "If you will notice it extends back +in the direction of the cave from which we were driven. Now if there +is a buried city beneath all this jungle, this mountain of earth and +stones, the accumulation of centuries, it is probably on the bottom of +some vast cavern. It is my opinion that we were only in one end of +that cavern, and this may be the entrance to another end of it." +</P> + +<P> +"Then," asked Mr. Damon, "do you mean that we can enter here, get into +the cave that contains the buried city, or part of it, and find there +Beecher and his friends?" +</P> + +<P> +"That's it. It is possible, and if we could it would save an immense +lot of work, and probably be a surer way to save their lives than by +digging a tunnel through the landslide to find the mouth of the cave +where we first entered." +</P> + +<P> +"It's a chance worth taking," said Mr. Damon. "Of course it is a +chance. But then everything connected with this expedition is; so one +is no worse than another. As you say, we may find the entombed men +more easily this way than any other." +</P> + +<P> +"I wonder," said Tom slowly, "if, by any chance, we shall find, through +this passage, the lost city we are looking for." +</P> + +<P> +"And the idol of gold," added Ned. +</P> + +<P> +"Goosal, do you know anything about this?" asked Professor Bumper. +"Did you ever hear of another passage leading to the cave where you saw +the ancient city?" +</P> + +<P> +"No, Learned One, though I have heard stories about there being many +cities, or parts of a big one, beneath the mountain, and when it was +above ground there were many entrances to it." +</P> + +<P> +"That settles it!" cried the professor in English, having talked to +Goosal in Spanish. "We'll try this and see where it leads." +</P> + +<P> +They entered the stone-lined passage. In spite of the fact that it had +probably been buried and concealed from light and air for centuries, as +evidenced by the growth of the giant trees above it, the air was fresh. +</P> + +<P> +"And this is one reason," said Tom, in commenting on this fact, "why I +believe it leads to some vast cavern which is connected in some fashion +with the outer air. Well, perhaps we shall soon make a discovery." +</P> + +<P> +Eagerly and anxiously the little party pressed forward by the light of +the pocket electric lamps. They were obsessed by two thoughts—what +they might find and the necessity for aiding in the rescue of their +rivals. +</P> + +<P> +On and on they went, the darkness illuminated only by the torches they +carried. But they noticed that the air was still fresh, and that a +gentle wind blew toward them. The passage was undoubtedly artificial, +a tunnel made by the hands of men now long crumbled into dust. It had +a slightly upward slope, and this, Professor Bumper said, indicated +that it was bored upward and perhaps into the very heart of the +mountain somewhere in the interior of which was the Beecher party. +</P> + +<P> +Just how far they went they did not know, but it must have been more +than two miles. Yet they did not tire, for the way was smooth. +</P> + +<P> +Suddenly Tom, who, with Professor Bumper, was in the lead, uttered a +cry, as he held his torch above his head and flashed it about in a +circle. +</P> + +<P> +"We're blocked!" he exclaimed. "We're up against a stone wall!" +</P> + +<P> +It was but too true. Confronting them, and extending from side to side +across the passage and from roof to floor, was a great rough stone. +Immense and solid it seemed when they pushed on it in vain. +</P> + +<P> +"Nothing short of dynamite will move that," said Ned in despair. "This +is a blind lead. We'll have to go back." +</P> + +<P> +"But there must be something on the other side of that stone," cried +Tom. "See, it is pierced with holes, and through them comes a current +of air. If we could only move the stone!" +</P> + +<P> +"I believe it is an ancient door," remarked Professor Bumper. +</P> + +<P> +Eagerly and frantically they tried to move it by their combined weight. +The stone did not give the fraction of the breadth of a hair. +</P> + +<P> +"We'll have to go back and get some of your big tunnel blasting powder, +Tom," suggested Ned. +</P> + +<P> +As he spoke old Goosal glided forward. He had remained behind them in +the passage while they were trying to move the rock. Now he said +something in Spanish. +</P> + +<P> +"What does he mean?" asked Ned. +</P> + +<P> +"He asks that he be allowed to try," translated Professor Bumper. +"Sometimes, he says, there is a secret way of opening stone doors in +these underground caves. Let him try." +</P> + +<P> +Goosal seemed to be running his fingers lightly over the outer edge of +the door. He was muttering to himself in his Indian tongue. +</P> + +<P> +Suddenly he uttered an exclamation, and, as he did so, there was a +noise from the door itself. It was a grinding, scraping sound, a +rumble as though rocks were being rolled one against the other. +</P> + +<P> +Then the astonished eyes of the adventurers saw the great stone door +revolve on its axis and swing to one side, leaving a passage open +through which they could pass. Goosal had discovered the hidden +mechanism. +</P> + +<P> +What lay before them? +</P> + +<BR><BR><BR> + +<A NAME="chap25"></A> +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +CHAPTER XXV +</H3> + +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +THE IDOL OF GOLD +</H3> + +<P> +"Forward! cried Tom Swift. +</P> + +<P> +"Where?" asked Mr Damon, hanging back for an instant. "Bless my +compass, Tom! do you know where you're going?" +</P> + +<P> +"I haven't the least idea, but it must lead to something, or the +ancients who made this revolving stone door wouldn't have taken such +care to block the passage." +</P> + +<P> +"Ask Goosal if he knows anything about it," suggested Mr. Damon to the +professor. +</P> + +<P> +"He says he never was here before," translated the savant, "but years +ago, when he went into the hidden city by the cave we left yesterday, +he saw doors like this which opened this way." +</P> + +<P> +"Then we're on the right track!" cried Tom. "If this is the same kind +of door, it must lead to the same place. Ho for Kurzon and the idol of +gold!" +</P> + +<P> +As they passed through the stone door, Tom and Professor Bumper tried +to get some idea of the mechanism by which it worked. But they found +this impossible, it being hidden within the stone itself or in the +adjoining walls. But, in order that it might not close of itself and +entomb them, the portal was blocked open with stones found in the +passage. +</P> + +<P> +"It's always well to have a line of retreat open," said Tom. "There's +no telling what may lie beyond us." +</P> + +<P> +For a time there seemed to be nothing more than the same passage along +which they had come. Then the passage suddenly widened, like the large +end of a square funnel. Upward and outward the stone walls swept, and +they saw dimly before them, in the light of their torches, a vast +cavern, seemingly formed by the falling in of mountains, which, in +toppling over, had met overhead in a sort of rough arch, thus +protecting, in a great measure, that which lay beneath them. +</P> + +<P> +Goosal, who had brought with him some of the fiber bark torches, set a +bundle of them aflame. As they flared up, a wondrous sight was +revealed to Tom Swift and his friends. +</P> + +<P> +Stretching out before them, as though they stood at the end of an +elevated street and gazed down on it, was a city—a large city, with +streets, houses, open squares, temples, statues, fountains, dry for +centuries—a buried and forgotten city—a city in ruins—a city of the +dead, now dry as dust, but still a city, or, rather, the strangely +preserved remains of one. +</P> + +<P> +"Look!" whispered Tom. A louder voice just then, would have seemed a +sacrilege. "Look!" +</P> + +<P> +"Is it what we are looking for?" asked Ned in a low voice. +</P> + +<P> +"I believe it is," replied the professor. "It is the lost city of +Kurzon, or one just like it. And now if we can find the idol of gold +our search will be ended—at least the major part of it." +</P> + +<P> +"Where did you expect to find the idol?" asked Tom. +</P> + +<P> +"It should be in the main temple. Come, we will walk in the ancient +streets—streets where no feet but ours have trod in many centuries. +Come!" +</P> + +<P> +In eager silence they pressed on through this newly discovered +wonderland. For it was a wonderful city, or had been. Though much of +it was in ruins, probably caused by an earthquake or an eruption from a +volcano, the central portion, covered as it was by the overtoppling +mountains that formed the arching roof, was well preserved. +</P> + +<P> +There were rude but beautiful stone buildings. There were archways; +temples; public squares; and images, not at all beautiful, for they +seemed to be of man-monsters—doubtless ancient gods. There were +smoothly paved streets; wondrously carved fountains, some in ruins, all +now as dry as bone, but which must have been places of beauty where +youths and maidens gathered in the ancient days. +</P> + +<P> +Of the ancient population there was not a trace left. Tom and his +friends penetrated some of the houses, but not so much as a bone or a +heap of mouldering dust showed where the remains of the people were. +Either they had fled at the approaching doom of the city and were +buried elsewhere, or some strange fire or other force of nature had +consumed and obliterated them. +</P> + +<P> +"What a wealth of historic information I shall find here!" murmured +Professor Bumper, as he caught sight of many inscriptions in strange +characters on the walls and buildings. "I shall never get to the end +of them." +</P> + +<P> +"But what about the idol of gold?" asked Mr. Damon, "Do you think +you'll find that?" +</P> + +<P> +"We must hurry on to the temple over there," said the scientist, +indicating a building further along. +</P> + +<P> +"And then we must see about rescuing your rivals, Professor," put in +Tom. +</P> + +<P> +"Yes, Tom. But fortunately we are on the ground here before them," +agreed the professor. +</P> + +<P> +Undoubtedly it was the chief temple, or place of worship, of the +long-dead race which the explorers now entered. It was a building +beautiful in its barbaric style, and yet simple. There were massive +walls, and a great inner court, at the end of which seemed to be some +sort of altar. And then, as they lighted fresh torches, and pressed +forward with them and their electric lights, they saw that which caused +a cry of satisfaction to burst from all of them. +</P> + +<P> +"The idol of gold!" +</P> + +<P> +Yes, there it squatted, an ugly, misshapen, figure, a cross between a +toad and a gila monster, half man, half beast, with big red +eyes—rubies probably—that gleamed in the repulsive golden face. And +the whole figure, weighing many pounds, seemed to be of SOLID GOLD! +</P> + +<P> +Eagerly the others followed Professor Bumper up the altar steps to the +very throne of the golden idol. The scientist touched it, tried to +raise it and make sure of its solidity and material. +</P> + +<P> +"This is it!" he cried. "It is the idol of gold! I have found— We have +found it, for it belongs to all of us!" +</P> + +<P> +"Hurray!" cried Tom Swift, and Ned and Mr. Damon joined in the cry. +</P> + +<P> +There was no need for silence or caution now; and yet, as they stood +about the squat and ugly figure, which, in spite of its hideousness, +was worth a fortune intrinsically and as an antique, they heard from +the direction of the stone passage a noise. +</P> + +<P> +"What is it?" asked Tom Swift. +</P> + +<P> +There was a murmur of voices. +</P> + +<P> +"Indians!" cried Professor Bumper, recognizing the language—a mixture +of Spanish and Indian. +</P> + +<P> +The cave was illuminated by the glare of other torches which seemed to +rush forward. A moment later it was seen that they were being carried +by a number of Indians. +</P> + +<P> +"Friends," murmured Goosal, using the Spanish term, "Amigos." +</P> + +<P> +"They are our own Indians!" cried Tom Swift. "I see Tolpec!" and he +pointed to the native who had deserted from Jacinto's force to help +them. +</P> + +<P> +"How did they get here?" asked Professor Bumper. +</P> + +<P> +This was quickly told. In their camp, where, under the leadership of +Tolpec they had been left to do the excavating, the natives had heard, +seen and felt the effects of the storm and the earthquake, though it +did little damage in their vicinity. But they became alarmed for the +safety of the professor and his party and, at Tolpec's suggestion, set +off in search of them. +</P> + +<P> +The Indians had seen, passing along the trail, the uprooted trees, and +had noted the footsteps of the explorers going down to the stone +passage. It was easy for them to determine that Tom and his friends +had gone in, since the marks of their boots were plainly in evidence in +the soft soil. +</P> + +<P> +None of the Indians was as much wrought up over the discovery of Kurzon +and the idol as were the white adventurers. The gold, of course, meant +something to the natives, but they were indifferent to the wonders of +the underground city. Perhaps they had heard too many legends +concerning such things to be impressed. +</P> + +<P> +"That statue is yours—all yours," said old Goosal when he had talked +with his relatives and friends among the natives. "They all say what +you find you keep, and we will help you keep it." +</P> + +<P> +"That's good," murmured Professor Bumper. "There was some doubt in my +mind as to our right to this, but after all, the natives who live in +this land are the original owners, and if they pass title to us it is +clear. That settles the last difficulty." +</P> + +<P> +"Except that of getting the idol out," said Mr. Damon. +</P> + +<P> +"Oh, we'll accomplish that!" cried Tom. +</P> + +<P> +"I can hardly believe my good luck," declared Professor Bumper. "I +shall write a whole book on this idol alone and then——" +</P> + +<P> +Once more came an interruption. This time it was from another +direction, but it was of the same character—an approaching band of +torch-bearers. They were Indians, too, but leading them were a number +of whites. +</P> + +<P> +And at their head was no less personage than Professor Beecher himself. +</P> + +<P> +For a moment, as the three parties stood together in the ancient +temple, in the glare of many torches, no one spoke. Then Professor +Bumper found his voice. +</P> + +<P> +"We are glad to see you," he said to his rival. "That is glad to see +you alive, for we saw the landslide bury you. And we were coming to +dig you out. We thought this cave—the cave of the buried city—would +lead us to you easier than by digging through the slide. We have just +discovered this idol," and he put his hand on the grim golden image. +</P> + +<P> +"Oh, you have discovered it, have you?" asked Professor Beecher, and +his voice was bitter. +</P> + +<P> +"Yes, not ten minutes ago. The natives have kindly acknowledged my +right to it under the law of priority. I am sorry but——" +</P> + +<P> +With a look of disgust and chagrined disappointment on his face, +Professor Beecher turned to the other scientists and said: +</P> + +<P> +"Let us go. We are too late. He has what I came after." +</P> + +<P> +"Well, it is the fortune of war—and discovery," put in Mr. Hardy, one +of the party who seemed the least ill-natured. "Your luck might have +been ours, Professor Bumper. I congratulate you." +</P> + +<P> +"Thank you! Are you sure your party is all right—not in need of +assistance? How did you get out of the place you were buried?" +</P> + +<P> +"Thank you! We do not require any help. It was good of you to think of +us. But we got out the way we came in. We did not enter the tunnel as +you did, but came in through another entrance which was not closed by +the landslide. Then we made a turn through a gateway in a tunnel +connecting with ours—a gateway which seems to have been opened by the +earthquake—and we came here, just now. +</P> + +<P> +"Too late, I see, to claim the discovery of the idol of gold," went on +Mr. Hardy. "But I trust you will be generous, and allow us to make +observations of the buildings and other relics." +</P> + +<P> +"As much as you please, and with the greatest pleasure in the world," +was the prompt answer of Professor Bumper. "All I lay sole claim to is +the golden idol. You are at liberty to take whatever else you find in +Kurzon and to make what observations you like." +</P> + +<P> +"That is generous of you, and quite in contrast to—er—to the conduct +of our leader. I trust he may awaken to a sense of the injustice he +did you." +</P> + +<P> +But Professor Beecher was not there to hear this. He had stalked away +in anger. +</P> + +<P> +"Humph!" grunted Tom. Then he continued: "That story about a +government concession was all a fake, Professor, else he'd have put up +a fight now. Contemptible sneak!" +</P> + +<BR> + +<P> +In fact the story of Tom Swift's trip to the underground land of +wonders is ended, for with the discovery of the idol of gold the main +object of the expedition was accomplished. But their adventures were +not over by any means, though there is not room in this volume to +record them. +</P> + +<P> +Suffice it to say that means were at once taken to get the golden image +out of the cave of the ancient city. It was not accomplished without +hard work, for the gold was heavy, and Professor Bumper would not, +naturally, consent to the shaving off of so much as an ear or part of +the flat nose, to say nothing of one of the half dozen extra arms and +legs with which the ugly idol was furnished. +</P> + +<P> +Finally it was safely taken out of the cave, and along the stone +passage to the opening formed by the overthrown trees, and thence on to +camp. +</P> + +<P> +And at the camp a surprise awaited Tom. +</P> + +<P> +Some long-delayed mail had been forwarded from the nearest place of +civilization and there were letters for all, including several for our +hero. One in particular he picked out first and read eagerly. +</P> + +<P> +"Well, is every little thing all right, Tom?" asked Ned, as he saw a +cheerful grin spread itself over his chum's face. +</P> + +<P> +"I should say it is, and then some! Look here, Ned. This is a letter +from——" +</P> + +<P> +"I know. Mary Nestor. Go on." +</P> + +<P> +"How'd you guess?" +</P> + +<P> +"Oh, I'm a mind-reader." +</P> + +<P> +"Huh! Well, you know she was away when I went to call to say good-bye, +and I was a little afraid Beecher had got an inside edge on me." +</P> + +<P> +"Had he?" +</P> + +<P> +"No, but he tried hard enough. He went to see Mary in Fayetteville, +just as you heard, before he came on to join his party, but he didn't +pay much of a visit to her." +</P> + +<P> +"No?" +</P> + +<P> +"No. Mary told him he'd better hurry along to Central America, or +wherever it was he intended going, as she didn't care for him as much +as he flattered himself she did." +</P> + +<P> +"Good!" cried Ned. "Shake, old man. I'm glad!" +</P> + +<P> +They shook hands. +</P> + +<P> +"Well, what's the matter? Didn't you read all of her letter?" asked +Ned when he saw his chum once more perusing the epistle. +</P> + +<P> +"No. There's a postscript here." +</P> + +<BR> + +<P> +"'Sorry I couldn't see you before you left. It was a mistake, but when +you come back——'" +</P> + +<BR> + +<P> +"Oh, that part isn't any of your affair!" and, blushing under his tan, +Tom thrust the letter into his pocket and strode away, while Ned +laughed happily. +</P> + +<P> +With the idol of gold safe in their possession, Professor Bumper's +party could devote their time to making other explorations in the +buried city. This they did, as is testified to by a long list of books +and magazine articles since turned out by the scientist, dealing +strictly with archaeological subjects, touching on the ancient Mayan +race and its civilization, with particular reference to their system of +computing time. +</P> + +<P> +Professor Beecher, young and foolish, would not consent to delve into +the riches of the ancient city, being too much chagrined over the loss +of the idol. It seems he had really promised to give a part of it to +Mary Nestor. But he never got the chance. +</P> + +<P> +His colleagues, after their first disappointment at being beaten, +joined forces with Professor Bumper in exploring the old city, and made +many valuable discoveries. +</P> + +<P> +In one point Professor Bumper had done his rival an injustice. That +was in thinking Professor Beecher was responsible for the treachery of +Jacinto. That was due to the plotter's own work. It was true that +Professor Beecher had tentatively engaged Jacinto, and had sent word to +him to keep other explorers away from the vicinity of the ancient city +if possible; but Jacinto, who did not return Professor Bumper's money, +as he had promised, had acted treacherously in order to enrich himself. +Professor Beecher had nothing to do with that, nor had he with the +taking of the map, as has been seen, the loss of which, after all, was +a blessing in disguise, for Kurzon would never have been located by +following the directions given there, as it was very inaccurate. +</P> + +<P> +In another point it was demonstrated that the old documents were at +fault. This was in reference to the golden idol having been overthrown +and another set up in its place, an act which had caused the +destruction of Kurzon. +</P> + +<P> +It is true that the city was destroyed, or rather, buried, but this +catastrophe was probably brought about by an earthquake. And another +great idol, one of clay, was found, perhaps a rival of Quitzel, but it +was this clay image which was thrown down and broken, and not the +golden one. +</P> + +<P> +Perhaps an effort had been made, just before the burying of the city, +to change idols and the system of worship, but Quitzel seemed to have +held his own. The old manuscripts were not very reliable, it was +found, except in general. +</P> + +<P> +"Well, I guess this will hold Beecher for a while," said Tom, the night +of the arrival of Mary's letter, and after he had written one in +answer, which was dispatched by a runner to the nearest place whence +mail could be forwarded. +</P> + +<P> +"Yes, luck seems to favor you," replied Ned. "You've had a hand in the +discovery of the idol of gold, and——" +</P> + +<P> +"Yes. And I discovered something else I wasn't quite sure of," +interrupted Tom, as he felt to make sure he had a certain letter safe +in his pocket. +</P> + +<P> +It was several weeks later that the explorations of Kurzon came to an +end—a temporary end, for the rainy season set in, when the tropics are +unsuitable for white men. Tom, Professor Bumper, Ned and Mr. Damon set +sail for the United States, the valuable idol of gold safe on board. +</P> + +<P> +And there, with their vessel plowing the blue waters of the Caribbean +Sea, we will take leave of Tom Swift and his friends. +</P> + +<BR><BR><BR><BR> + + + + + + + + +<pre> + + + + + +End of the Project Gutenberg EBook of Tom Swift in the Land of Wonders, by +Victor Appleton + +*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK TOM SWIFT IN THE LAND OF WONDERS *** + +***** This file should be named 499-h.htm or 499-h.zip ***** +This and all associated files of various formats will be found in: + https://www.gutenberg.org/4/9/499/ + +Produced by Charles Keller. + +Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions +will be renamed. + +Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no +one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation +(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without +permission and without paying copyright royalties. Special rules, +set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to +copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to +protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark. Project +Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you +charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission. If you +do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the +rules is very easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose +such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and +research. They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do +practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks. Redistribution is +subject to the trademark license, especially commercial +redistribution. + + + +*** START: FULL LICENSE *** + +THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE +PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK + +To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free +distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work +(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project +Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project +Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at +https://gutenberg.org/license). + + +Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic works + +1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to +and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property +(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all +the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy +all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession. +If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the +terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or +entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8. + +1.B. "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark. It may only be +used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who +agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few +things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works +even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See +paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement +and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. See paragraph 1.E below. + +1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation" +or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works. Nearly all the individual works in the +collection are in the public domain in the United States. If an +individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are +located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from +copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative +works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg +are removed. Of course, we hope that you will support the Project +Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by +freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of +this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with +the work. You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by +keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project +Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others. + +1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern +what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are in +a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, check +the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement +before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or +creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project +Gutenberg-tm work. The Foundation makes no representations concerning +the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United +States. + +1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg: + +1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate +access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently +whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the +phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project +Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed, +copied or distributed: + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + +1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived +from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is +posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied +and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees +or charges. If you are redistributing or providing access to a work +with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the +work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 +through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the +Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or +1.E.9. + +1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted +with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution +must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional +terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms will be linked +to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the +permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work. + +1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this +work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm. + +1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this +electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without +prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with +active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project +Gutenberg-tm License. + +1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary, +compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any +word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access to or +distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than +"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version +posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org), +you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a +copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon +request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other +form. Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1. + +1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying, +performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works +unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. + +1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing +access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided +that + +- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from + the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method + you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is + owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he + has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the + Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments + must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you + prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax + returns. Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and + sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the + address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to + the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation." + +- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies + you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he + does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm + License. You must require such a user to return or + destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium + and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of + Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any + money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the + electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days + of receipt of the work. + +- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free + distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set +forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from +both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael +Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark. Contact the +Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below. + +1.F. + +1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable +effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread +public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm +collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain +"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or +corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual +property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a +computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by +your equipment. + +1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right +of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project +Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all +liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal +fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT +LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE +PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH F3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE +TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE +LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR +INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH +DAMAGE. + +1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a +defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can +receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a +written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you +received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with +your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you with +the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a +refund. If you received the work electronically, the person or entity +providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to +receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If the second copy +is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further +opportunities to fix the problem. + +1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth +in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS' WITH NO OTHER +WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO +WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE. + +1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied +warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages. +If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the +law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be +interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by +the applicable state law. The invalidity or unenforceability of any +provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions. + +1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the +trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone +providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance +with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production, +promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works, +harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees, +that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do +or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm +work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any +Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause. + + +Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm + +Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of +electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers +including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It exists +because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from +people in all walks of life. + +Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the +assistance they need, is critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's +goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will +remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure +and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations. +To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation +and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4 +and the Foundation web page at https://www.pglaf.org. + + +Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive +Foundation + +The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit +501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the +state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal +Revenue Service. The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification +number is 64-6221541. Its 501(c)(3) letter is posted at +https://pglaf.org/fundraising. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent +permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws. + +The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S. +Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered +throughout numerous locations. Its business office is located at +809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email +business@pglaf.org. Email contact links and up to date contact +information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official +page at https://pglaf.org + +For additional contact information: + Dr. Gregory B. Newby + Chief Executive and Director + gbnewby@pglaf.org + + +Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation + +Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide +spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of +increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be +freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest +array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations +($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt +status with the IRS. + +The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating +charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United +States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a +considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up +with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations +where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To +SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any +particular state visit https://pglaf.org + +While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we +have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition +against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who +approach us with offers to donate. + +International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make +any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from +outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff. + +Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation +methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other +ways including including checks, online payments and credit card +donations. To donate, please visit: https://pglaf.org/donate + + +Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. + +Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm +concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared +with anyone. For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project +Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support. + + +Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed +editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S. +unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not necessarily +keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition. + + +Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility: + + https://www.gutenberg.org + +This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm, +including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary +Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to +subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks. + + +</pre> + +</BODY> + +</HTML> + + @@ -0,0 +1,6147 @@ +Project Gutenberg's Tom Swift in the Land of Wonders, by Victor Appleton + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + + +Title: Tom Swift in the Land of Wonders + or, The Underground Search for the Idol of Gold + +Author: Victor Appleton + +Posting Date: July 13, 2008 [EBook #499] +Release Date: March 11, 2002 +[Last updated: July 3, 2014] + +Language: English + +Character set encoding: ASCII + +*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK TOM SWIFT IN THE LAND OF WONDERS *** + + + + +Produced by Charles Keller. + + + + + + + + + +TOM SWIFT IN THE LAND OF WONDERS + +or + +The Underground Search for the Idol of Gold + + +BY + +VICTOR APPLETON + + + + AUTHOR OF + "TOM SWIFT AND HIS MOTORCYCLE," + "TOM SWIFT AND HIS BIG TUNNEL," + "THE MOVING PICTURE BOYS SERIES," + "THE MOTION PICTURE CHUMS SERIES," ETC. + + + + + THE TOM SWIFT SERIES + + 1 TOM SWIFT AND HIS MOTOR CYCLE + 2 TOM SWIFT AND HIS MOTOR BOAT + 3 TOM SWIFT AND HIS AIRSHIP + 4 TOM SWIFT AND HIS SUBMARINE BOAT + 5 TOM SWIFT AND HIS ELECTRIC RUNABOUT + 6 TOM SWIFT AND HIS WIRELESS MESSAGE + 7 TOM SWIFT AMONG THE DIAMOND MAKERS + 8 TOM SWIFT IN THE CAVES OF ICE + 9 TOM SWIFT AND HIS SKY RACER + 10 TOM SWIFT AND HIS ELECTRIC RIFLE + 11 TOM SWIFT IN THE CITY OF GOLD + 12 TOM SWIFT AND HIS AIR GLIDER + 13 TOM SWIFT IN CAPTIVITY + 14 TOM SWIFT AND HIS WIZARD CAMERA + 15 TOM SWIFT AND HIS GREAT SEARCHLIGHT + 16 TOM SWIFT AND HIS GIANT CANNON + 17 TOM SWIFT AND HIS PHOTO TELEPHONE + 18 TOM SWIFT AND HIS AERIAL WARSHIP + 19 TOM SWIFT AND HIS BIG TUNNEL + 20 TOM SWIFT IN THE LAND OF WONDERS + 21 TOM SWIFT AND HIS WAR TANK + 22 TOM SWIFT AND HIS AIR SCOUT + 23 TOM SWIFT AND HIS UNDERSEA SEARCH + 24 TOM SWIFT AMONG THE FIRE FIGHTERS + 25 TOM SWIFT AND HIS ELECTRIC LOCOMOTIVE + 26 TOM SWIFT AND HIS FLYING BOAT + 27 TOM SWIFT AND HIS GREAT OIL GUSHER + 28 TOM SWIFT AND HIS CHEST OF SECRETS + 29 TOM SWIFT AND HIS AIRLINE EXPRESS + + + + + +Tom Swift in the Land of Wonders + + + + +CONTENTS + + I A WONDERFUL STORY + II PROFESSOR BUMPER ARRIVES + III BLESSINGS AND ENTHUSIASM + IV FENIMORE BEECHER + V THE LITTLE GREEN GOD + VI UNPLEASANT NEWS + VII TOM HEARS SOMETHING + VIII OFF FOR HONDURAS + IX VAL JACINTO + X IN THE WILDS + XI THE VAMPIRES + XII A FALSE FRIEND + XIII FORWARD AGAIN + XIV A NEW GUIDE + XV IN THE COILS + XVI A MEETING IN THE JUNGLE + XVII THE LOST MAP + XVIII "EL TIGRE!" + XIX POISONED ARROWS + XX AN OLD LEGEND + XXI THE CAVERN + XXII THE STORM + XXIII ENTOMBED ALIVE + XXIV THE REVOLVING STONE + XXV THE IDOL OF GOLD + + + + +TOM SWIFT IN THE LAND OF WONDERS + + + + +CHAPTER I + +A WONDERFUL STORY + + +Tom Swift, who had been slowly looking through the pages of a magazine, +in the contents of which he seemed to be deeply interested, turned the +final folio, ruffled the sheets back again to look at a certain map and +drawing, and then, slapping the book down on a table before him, with a +noise not unlike that of a shot, exclaimed: + +"Well, that is certainly one wonderful story!" + +"What's it about, Tom?" asked his chum, Ned Newton. "Something about +inside baseball, or a new submarine that can be converted into an +airship on short notice?" + +"Neither one, you--you unscientific heathen," answered Tom, with a +laugh at Ned. "Though that isn't saying such a machine couldn't be +invented." + +"I believe you--that is if you got on its trail," returned Ned, and +there was warm admiration in his voice. + +"As for inside baseball, or outside, for that matter, I hardly believe +I'd be able to tell third base from the second base, it's so long since +I went to a game," proceeded Tom. "I've been too busy on that new +airship stabilizer dad gave me an idea for. I've been working too +hard, that's a fact. I need a vacation, and maybe a good baseball +game----" + +He stopped and looked at the magazine he had so hastily slapped down. +Something he had read in it seemed to fascinate him. + +"I wonder if it can possibly be true," he went on. "It sounds like the +wildest dream of a professional sleep-walker; and yet, when I stop to +think, it isn't much worse than some of the things we've gone through +with, Ned." + +"Say, for the love of rice-pudding! will you get down to brass tacks +and strike a trial balance? What are you talking of, anyhow? Is it a +joke?" + +"A joke?" + +"Yes. What you just read in that magazine which seems to cause you so +much excitement." + +"Well, it may be a joke; and yet the professor seems very much in +earnest about it," replied Tom. "It certainly is one wonderful story!" + +"So you said before. Come on--the 'fillium' is busted. Splice it, or +else put in a new reel and on with the show. I'd like to know what's +doing. What professor are you talking of?" + +"Professor Swyington Bumper." + +"Swyington Bumper?" and Ned's voice showed that his memory was a bit +hazy. + +"Yes. You ought to remember him. He was on the steamer when I went +down to Peru to help the Titus Brothers dig the big tunnel. That +plotter Waddington, or some of his tools, dropped a bomb where it might +have done us some injury, but Professor Bumper, who was a fellow +passenger, on his way to South America to look for the lost city of +Pelone, calmly picked up the bomb, plucked out the fuse, and saved us +from bad injuries, if not death. And he was as cool about it as an +ice-cream cone. Surely you remember!" + +"Swyington Bumper! Oh, yes, now I remember him," said Ned Newton. "But +what has he got to do with a wonderful story? Has he written more +about the lost city of Pelone? If he has I don't see anything so very +wonderful in that." + +"There isn't," agreed Tom. "But this isn't that," and Tom picked up +the magazine and leafed it to find the article he had been reading. + +"Let's have a look at it," suggested Ned. "You act as though you might +be vitally interested in it. Maybe you're thinking of joining forces +with the professor again, as you did when you dug the big tunnel." + +"Oh, no. I haven't any such idea," Tom said. "I've got enough work +laid out now to keep me in Shopton for the next year. I have no notion +of going anywhere with Professor Bumper. Yet I can't help being +impressed by this," and, having found the article in the magazine to +which he referred, he handed it to his chum. + +"Why, it's by Bumper himself!" exclaimed Ned. + +"Yes. Though there's nothing remarkable in that, seeing that he is +constantly contributing articles to various publications or writing +books. It's the story itself that's so wonderful. To save you the +trouble of wading through a lot of scientific detail, which I know you +don't care about, I'll tell you that the story is about a queer idol of +solid gold, weighing many pounds, and, in consequence, of great value." + +"Of solid gold you say?" asked Ned eagerly. + +"That's it. Got on your banking air already," Tom laughed. "To sum it +up for you--notice I use the word 'sum,' which is very appropriate for +a bank--the professor has got on the track of another lost or hidden +city. This one, the name of which doesn't appear, is in the Copan +valley of Honduras, and----" + +"Copan," interrupted Ned. "It sounds like the name of some new floor +varnish." + +"Well, it isn't, though it might be," laughed Tom. "Copan is a city, +in the Department of Copan, near the boundary between Honduras and +Guatemala. A fact I learned from the article and not because I +remembered my geography." + +"I was going to say," remarked Ned with a smile, "that you were coming +it rather strong on the school-book stuff." + +"Oh, it's all plainly written down there," and Tom waved toward the +magazine at which Ned was looking. "As you'll see, if you take the +trouble to go through it, as I did, Copan is, or maybe was, for all I +know, one of the most important centers of the Mayan civilization." + +"What's Mayan?" asked Ned. "You see I'm going to imbibe my information +by the deductive rather than the excavative process," he added with a +laugh. + +"I see," laughed Tom. "Well, Mayan refers to the Mayas, an aboriginal +people of Yucatan. The Mayas had a peculiar civilization of their own, +thousands of years ago, and their calendar system was so involved----" + +"Never mind about dates," again interrupted Ned. "Get down to brass +tacks. I'm willing to take your word for it that there's a Copan +valley in Honduras. But what has your friend Professor Bumper to do +with it?" + +"This. He has come across some old manuscripts, or ancient document +records, referring to this valley, and they state, according to this +article he has written for the magazine, that somewhere in the valley +is a wonderful city, traces of which have been found twenty to forty +feet below the surface, on which great trees are growing, showing that +the city was covered hundreds, if not thousands, of years ago." + +"But where does the idol of gold come in?" + +"I'm coming to that," said Tom. "Though, if Professor Bumper has his +way, the idol will be coming out instead of coming in." + +"You mean he wants to get it and take it away from the Copan valley, +Tom?" + +"That's it, Ned. It has great value not only from the amount of pure +gold that is in it, but as an antique. I fancy the professor is more +interested in that aspect of it. But he's written a wonderful story, +telling how he happened to come across the ancient manuscripts in the +tomb of some old Indian whose mummy he unearthed on a trip to Central +America. + +"Then he tells of the trouble he had in discovering how to solve the +key to the translation code; but when he did, he found a great story +unfolded to him. + +"This story has to do with the hidden city, and tells of the ancient +civilization of those who lived in the Copan valley thousands of years +ago. The people held this idol of gold to be their greatest treasure, +and they put to death many of other tribes who sought to steal it." + +"Whew!" whistled Ned. "That IS some yarn. But what is Professor +Bumper going to do about it?" + +"I don't know. The article seems to be written with an idea of +interesting scientists and research societies, so that they will raise +money to conduct a searching expedition. + +"Perhaps by this time the party may be organized--this magazine is +several months old. I have been so busy on my stabilizer patent that I +haven't kept up with current literature. Take it home and read it! +Ned. That is if you're through telling me about my affairs," for Ned, +who had formerly worked in the Shopton bank, had recently been made +general financial manager of the interests of Tom and his father. The +two were inventors and proverbially poor business men, though they had +amassed a fortune. + +"Your financial affairs are all right, Tom," said Ned. "I have just +been going over the books, and I'll submit a detailed report later." + +The telephone bell rang and Tom picked up the instrument from the desk. +As he answered in the usual way and then listened a moment, a strange +look came over his face. + +"Well, this certainly is wonderful!" he exclaimed, in much the same +manner as when he had finished reading the article about the idol. "It +certainly is a strange coincidence," he added, speaking in an aside to +Ned while he himself still listened to what was being told to him over +the telephone wire. + + + + +CHAPTER II + +PROFESSOR BUMPER ARRIVES + + +"What's the matter, Tom? What is it?" asked Ned Newton, attracted by +the strange manner of his chum at the telephone. "Has anything +happened?" + +But the young inventor was too busy listening to the unseen speaker to +answer his chum, even if he heard what Ned remarked, which is doubtful. + +"Well, I might as well wait until he is through," mused Ned, as he +started to leave the room. Then as Tom motioned to him to remain, he +murmured: "He may have something to say to me later. But I wonder who +is talking to him." + +There was no way of finding out, however, until Tom had a chance to +talk to Ned, and at present the young scientist was eagerly listening +to what came over the wire. Occasionally Ned could hear him say: + +"You don't tell me! That is surprising! Yes--yes! Of course if it's +true it means a big thing, I can understand that. What's that? No, I +couldn't make a promise like that. I'm sorry, but----" + +Then the person at the other end of the wire must have plunged into +something very interesting and absorbing, for Tom did not again +interrupt by interjected remarks. + +Tom Swift, as has been said, was an inventor, as was his father. Mr. +Swift was now rather old and feeble, taking only a nominal part in the +activities of the firm made up of himself and his son. But his +inventions were still used, many of them being vital to the business +and trade of this country. + +Tom and his father lived in the village of Shopton, New York, and their +factories covered many acres of ground. Those who wish to read of the +earliest activities of Tom in the inventive line are referred to the +initial volume, "Tom Swift and His Motor Cycle." From then on he and +his father had many and exciting adventures. In a motor boat, an +airship, and a submarine respectively the young inventor had gone +through many perils. On some of the trips his chum, Ned Newton, +accompanied him, and very often in the party was a Mr. Wakefield Damon, +who had a curious habit of "blessing" everything that happened to +strike his fancy. + +Besides Tom and his father, the Swift household was made up of +Eradicate Sampson, a colored man-of-all-work, who, with his mule +Boomerang, did what he could to keep the grounds around the house in +order. There was also Mrs. Baggert, the housekeeper, Tom's mother +being dead. Mr. Damon, living in a neighboring town, was a frequent +visitor in the Swift home. + +Mary Nestor, a girl of Shopton, might also be mentioned. She and Tom +were more than just good friends. Tom had an idea that some day----. +But there, I promised not to tell that part, at least until the young +people themselves were ready to have a certain fact announced. + +From one activity to another had Tom Swift gone, now constructing some +important invention for himself, as among others, when he made the +photo-telephone, or developed a great searchlight which he presented to +the Government for use in detecting smugglers on the border. + +The book immediately preceding this is called "Tom Swift and His Big +Tunnel," and deals with the efforts of the young inventor to help a +firm of contractors penetrate a mountain in Peru. How this was done +and how, incidentally, the lost city of Pelone was discovered, bringing +joy to the heart of Professor Swyington Bumper, will be found fully set +forth in the book. + +Tom had been back from the Peru trip for some months, when we again +find him interested in some of the work of Professor Bumper, as set +forth in the magazine mentioned. + +"Well, he certainly is having some conversation," reflected Ned, as, +after more than five minutes, Tom's ear was still at the receiver of +the instrument, into the transmitter of which he had said only a few +words. + +"All right," Tom finally answered, as he hung the receiver up, "I'll be +here," and then he turned to Ned, whose curiosity had been growing with +the telephone talk, and remarked: + +"That certainly was wonderful!" + +"What was?" asked Ned. "Do you think I'm a mind reader to be able to +guess?" + +"No, indeed! I beg your pardon. I'll tell you at once. But I couldn't +break away. It was too important. To whom do you think I was talking +just then?" + +"I can imagine almost any one, seeing I know something of what you have +done. It might be almost anybody from some person you met up in the +caves of ice to a red pygmy from the wilds of Africa." + +"I'm afraid neither of them would be quite up to telephone talk yet," +laughed Tom. "No, this was the gentleman who wrote that interesting +article about the idol of gold," and he motioned to the magazine Ned +held in his hand. + +"You don't mean Professor Bumper!" + +"That's just whom I do mean." + +"What did he want? Where did he call from?" + +"He wants me to help organize an expedition to go to Central +America--to the Copan valley, to be exact--to look for this somewhat +mythical idol of gold. Incidentally the professor will gather in any +other antiques of more or less value, if he can find any, and he hopes, +even if he doesn't find the idol, to get enough historical material for +half a dozen books, to say nothing of magazine articles." + +"Where did he call from; did you say?" + +"I didn't say. But it was a long-distance call from New York. The +Professor stopped off there on his way from Boston, where he has been +lecturing before some society. And now he's coming here to see me," +finished Tom. + +"What! Is he going to lecture here?" cried Ned. "If he is, and spouts +a whole lot of that bone-dry stuff about the ancient Mayan civilization +and their antiquities, with side lights on how the old-time Indians +used to scalp their enemies, I'm going to the moving pictures! I'm +willing to be your financial manager, Tom Swift, but please don't ask +me to be a high-brow. I wasn't built for that." + +"Nor I, Ned. The professor isn't going to lecture. He's only going to +talk, he says." + +"What about?" + +"He's going to try to induce me to join his expedition to the Copan +valley." + +"Do you feel inclined to go?" + +"No, Ned, I do not. I've got too many other irons in the fire. I +shall have to give the professor a polite but firm refusal." + +"Well, maybe you're right, Tom; and yet that idol of +gold--GOLD--weighing how many pounds did you say?" + +"Oh, you're thinking of its money value, Ned, old man!" + +"Yes, I'd like to see what a big chunk of gold like that would bring. +It must be quite a nugget. But I'm not likely to get a glimpse of it +if you don't go with the professor." + +"I don't see how I can go, Ned. But come over and meet the delightful +gentleman when he arrives. I expect him day after to-morrow." + +"I'll be here," promised Ned; and then he went downtown to attend to +some matters connected with his new duties, which were much less +irksome than those he had had when he had been in the bank. + +"Well, Tom, have you heard any more about your friend?" asked Ned, two +days later, as he came to the Swift home with some papers needing the +signature of the young inventor and his father. + +"You mean----?" + +"Professor Bumper." + +"No, I haven't heard from him since he telephoned. But I guess he'll +be here all right. He's very punctual. Did you see anything of my +giant Koku as you came in?" + +"Yes, he and Eradicate were having an argument about who should move a +heavy casting from one of the shops. Rad wanted to do it all alone, +but Koku said he was like a baby now." + +"Poor Rad is getting old," said Tom with a sigh. "But he has been very +faithful. He and Koku never seem to get along well together." + +Koku was an immense man, a veritable giant, one of two whom Tom had +brought back with him after an exciting trip to a strange land. The +giant's strength was very useful to the young inventor. + +"Now Tom, about this business of leasing to the English Government the +right to manufacture that new explosive of yours," began Ned, plunging +into the business at hand. "I think if you stick out a little you can +get a better royalty price." + +"But I don't want to gouge 'em, Ned. I'm satisfied with a fair profit. +The trouble with you is you think too much of money. Now----" + +At that moment a voice was heard in the hall of the house saying: + +"Now, my dear lady, don't trouble yourself. I can find my way in to +Tom Swift perfectly well by myself, and while I appreciate your +courtesy I do not want to trouble you." + +"No, don't come, Mrs. Baggert," added another voice. "Bless my hat +band, I think I know my way about the house by this time!" + +"Mr. Damon!" ejaculated Ned. + +"And Professor Bumper is with him," added Tom. "Come in!" he cried, +opening the hall door, to confront a bald-headed man who stood peering +at our hero with bright snapping eyes, like those of some big bird +spying out the land from afar. "Come in, Professor Bumper; and you +too, Mr. Damon!" + + + + +CHAPTER III + +BLESSINGS AND ENTHUSIASM + + +Greetings and inquiries as to health having been passed, not without +numerous blessings on the part of Mr. Damon, the little party gathered +in the library of the home of Tom Swift sat down and looked at one +another. + +On Professor Bumper's face there was, plainly to be seen, a look of +expectation, and it seemed to be shared by Mr. Damon, who seemed eager +to burst into enthusiastic talk. On the other hand Tom Swift appeared +a bit indifferent. + +Ned himself admitted that he was frankly curious. The story of the big +idol of gold had occupied his thoughts for many hours. + +"Well, I'm glad to see you both," said Tom again. "You got here all +right, I see, Professor Bumper. But I didn't expect you to meet and +bring Mr. Damon with you." + +"I met him on the train," explained the author of the book on the lost +city of Pelone, as well as books on other antiquities. "I had no +expectation of seeing him, and we were both surprised when we met on +the express." + +"It stopped at Waterfield, Tom," explained Mr. Damon, "which it doesn't +usually do, being an aristocratic sort of train, not given even to +hesitating at our humble little town. There were some passengers to +get off, which caused the flier to stop, I suppose. And, as I wanted +to come over to see you, I got aboard." + +"Glad you did," voiced Tom. + +"Then I happened to see Professor Bumper a few seats ahead of me," went +on Mr. Damon, "and, bless my scarfpin! he was coming to see you also." + +"Well, I'm doubly glad," answered Tom. + +"So here we are," went on Mr. Damon, "and you've simply got to come, +Tom Swift. You must go with us!" and Mr. Damon, in his enthusiasm, +banged his fist down on the table with such force that he knocked some +books to the floor. + +Koku, the giant, who was in the hall, opened the door and in his +imperfect English asked: + +"Master Tom knock for him bigs man?" + +"No," answered Tom with a smile, "I didn't knock or call you, Koku. +Some books fell, that is all." + +"Massa Tom done called fo' me, dat's what he done!" broke in the +petulant voice of Eradicate. + +"No, Rad, I don't need anything," Tom said. "Though you might make a +pitcher of lemonade. It's rather warm." + +"Right away, Massa Tom! Right away!" cried the old colored man, eager +to be of service. + +"Me help, too!" rumbled Koku, in his deep voice. "Me punch de lemons!" +and away he hurried after Eradicate, fearful lest the old servant do +all the honors. + +"Same old Rad and Koku," observed Mr. Damon with a smile. "But now, +Tom, while they're making the lemonade, let's get down to business. +You're going with us, of course!" + +"Where?" asked Tom, more from habit than because he did not know. + +"Where? Why to Honduras, of course! After the idol of gold! Why, bless +my fountain pen, it's the most wonderful story I ever heard of! You've +read Professor Bumper's article, of course. He told me you had. I +read it on the train coming over. He also told me about it, and---- +Well, I'm going with him, Tom Swift. + +"And think of all the adventures that may befall us! We'll get lost in +buried cities, ride down raging torrents on a raft, fall over a cliff +maybe and be rescued. Why, it makes me feel quite young again!" and +Mr. Damon arose, to pace excitedly up and down the room. + +Up to this time Professor Bumper had said very little. He had sat +still in his chair listening to Mr. Damon. But now that the latter had +ceased, at least for a time, Tom and Ned looked toward the scientist. + +"I understand, Tom," he said, "that you read my article in the +magazine, about the possibility of locating some of the lost and buried +cities of Honduras?" + +"Yes, Ned and I each read it. It was quite wonderful." + +"And yet there are more wonders to tell," went on the professor. "I +did not give all the details in that article. I will tell you some of +them. I have brought copies of the documents with me," and he opened a +small valise and took out several bundles tied with pink tape. + +"As Mr. Damon said," he went on while arranging his papers, "he met me +on the train, and he was so taken by the story of the idol of gold that +he agreed to accompany me to Central America." + +"On one condition!" put in the eccentric man. + +"What's that? You didn't make any conditions while we were talking," +said the scientist. + +"Yes, I said I'd go if Tom Swift did." + +"Oh, yes. You did say that. But I don't call that a condition, for of +course Tom Swift will go. Now let me tell you something more than I +could impart over the telephone. + +"Soon after I called you up, Tom--and it was quite a coincidence that +it should have been at a time when you had just finished my magazine +article. Soon after that, as I was saying, I arranged to come on to +Shopton. And now I'm glad we're all here together. + +"But how comes it, Ned Newton, that you are not in the bank?" + +"I've left there," explained Ned. + +"He's now general financial man for the Swift Company," Tom explained. +"My father and I found that we could not look after the inventing and +experimental end, and money matters, too, and as Ned had had +considerable experience this way we made him take over those worries," +and Tom laughed genially. + +"No worries at all, as far as the Swift Company is concerned," returned +Ned. + +"Well, I guess you earn your salary," laughed Tom. "But now, Professor +Bumper, let's hear from you. Is there anything more about this idol of +gold that you can tell us?" + +"Plenty, Tom, plenty. I could talk all day, and not get to the end of +the story. But a lot of it would be scientific detail that might be +too dry for you in spite of this excellent lemonade." + +Between them Koku and Eradicate had managed to make a pitcher of the +beverage, though Mrs. Baggert, the housekeeper, told Tom afterward that +the two had a quarrel in the kitchen as to who should squeeze the +lemons, the giant insisting that he had the better right to "punch" +them. + +"So, not to go into too many details," went on the professor, "I'll +just give you a brief outline of this story of the idol of gold. + +"Honduras, as you of course know, is a republic of Central America, and +it gets its name from something that happened on the fourth voyage of +Columbus. He and his men had had days of weary sailing and had sought +in vain for shallow water in which they might come to an anchorage. +Finally they reached the point now known as Cape Gracias-a-Dios, and +when they let the anchor go, and found that in a short time it came to +rest on the floor of the ocean, some one of the sailors--perhaps +Columbus himself--is said to have remarked: + +"'Thank the Lord, we have left the deep waters (honduras)' that being +the Spanish word for unfathomable depths. So Honduras it was called, +and has been to this day. + +"It is a queer land with many traces of an ancient civilization, a +civilization which I believe dates back farther than some in the far +East. On the sculptured stones in the Copan valley there are +characters which seem to resemble very ancient writing, but this +pictographic writing is largely untranslatable. + +"Honduras, I might add, is about the size of our state of Ohio. It is +rather an elevated tableland, though there are stretches of tropical +forest, but it is not so tropical a country as many suppose it to be. +There is much gold scattered throughout Honduras, though of late it has +not been found in large quantities. + +"In the old days, however, before the Spaniards came, it was plentiful, +so much, so that the natives made idols of it. And it is one of the +largest of these idols--by name Quitzel--that I am going to seek." + +"Do you know where it is?" asked Ned. + +"Well, it isn't locked up in a safe deposit box, of that I'm sure," +laughed the professor. "No, I don't know exactly where it is, except +that it is somewhere in an ancient and buried city known as Kurzon. If +I knew exactly where it was there wouldn't be much fun in going after +it. And if it was known to others it would have been taken away long +ago. + +"No, we've got to hunt for the idol of gold in this land of wonders +where I hope soon to be. Later on I'll show you the documents that put +me on the track of this idol. Enough now to show you an old map I +found, or, rather, a copy of it, and some of the papers that tell of +the idol," and he spread out his packet of papers on the table in front +of him, his eyes shining with excitement and pleasure. Mr. Damon, too, +leaned eagerly forward. + +"So, Tom Swift," went on the professor, "I come to you for help in this +matter. I want you to aid me in organizing an expedition to go to +Honduras after the idol of gold. Will you?" + +"I'll help you, of course," said Tom. "You may use any of my +inventions you choose--my airships, my motor boats and submarines, even +my giant cannon if you think you can take it with you. And as for the +money part, Ned will arrange that for you. But as for going with you +myself, it is out of the question. I can't. No Honduras for me!" + + + + +CHAPTER IV + +FENIMORE BEECHER + + +Had Tom Swift's giant cannon been discharged somewhere in the vicinity +of his home it could have caused but little more astonishment to Mr. +Damon and Professor Bumper than did the simple announcement of the +young inventor. The professor seemed to shrink back in his chair, +collapsing like an automobile tire when the air is let out. As for Mr. +Damon he jumped up and cried: + +"Bless my----!" + +But that is as far as he got--at least just then. He did not seem to +know what to bless, but he looked as though he would have liked to +include most of the universe. + +"Surely you don't mean it, Tom Swift," gasped Professor Bumper at +length. "Won't you come with us?" + +"No," said Tom, slowly. "Really I can't go. I'm working on an +invention of a new aeroplane stabilizer, and if I go now it will be +just at a time when I am within striking distance of success. And the +stabilizer is very much needed." + +"If it's a question of making a profit on it, Tom," began Mr. Damon, "I +can let you have some money until----" + +"Oh, no! It isn't the money!" cried Tom. "Don't think that for a +moment. You see the European war has called for the use of a large +number of aeroplanes, and as the pilots of them frequently have to +fight, and so can not give their whole attention to the machines, some +form of automatic stabilizer is needed to prevent them turning turtle, +or going off at a wrong tangent. + +"So I have been working out a sort of modified gyroscope, and it seems +to answer the purpose. I have already received advance orders for a +number of my devices from abroad, and as they are destined to save +lives I feel that I ought to keep on with my work. + +"I'd like to go, don't misunderstand me, but I can't go at this time. +It is out of the question. If you wait a year, or maybe six months----" + +"No, it is impossible to wait, Tom," declared Professor Bumper. + +"Is it so important then to hurry?" asked Mr. Damon. "You did not +mention that to me, Professor Bumper." + +"No, I did not have time. There are so many ends to my concerns. But, +Tom Swift, you simply must go!" + +"I can't, my dear professor, much as I should like to." + +"But, Tom, think of it!" cried Mr. Damon, who was as much excited as +was the little bald-headed scientist. "You never saw such an idol of +gold as this. What's its name?" and he looked questioningly at the +professor. + +"Quitzel the idol is called," supplied Professor Bumper. "And it is +supposed to be in a buried city named Kurzon, somewhere in the Sierra +de Merendon range of mountains, in the vicinity of the Copan valley. +Copan is a city, or maybe we'll find it only a town when we get there, +and it is not far from the borders of Guatemala. + +"Tom, if I could show you the translations I have made of the ancient +documents, referring to this idol and the wonderful city over which it +kept guard, I'm sure you'd come with us." + +"Please don't tempt me," Tom said with a laugh. "I'm only too anxious +to go, and if it wasn't for the stabilizer I'd be with you in a minute. +But---- Well, you'll have to get along without me. Maybe I can join +you later." + +"What's this about the idol keeping guard over the ancient city?" asked +Ned, for he was interested in strange stories. + +"It seems," explained the professor, "that in the early days there was +a strange race of people, inhabiting Central America, with a somewhat +high civilization, only traces of which remained when the Spaniards +came. + +"But these traces, and such hieroglyphics, or, to be more exact +pictographs, as I have been able to decipher from the old documents, +tell of one country, or perhaps it was only a city, over which this +great golden idol of Quitzel presided. + +"There is in some of these papers a description of the idol, which is +not exactly a beauty, judged from modern standards. But the main fact +is that it is made of solid gold, and may weigh anywhere from one to +two tons." + +"Two tons of gold!" cried New Newton. "Why, if that's the case it +would be worth----" and he fell to doing a sum in mental arithmetic. + +"I am not so concerned about the monetary value of the statue as I am +about its antiquity," went on Professor Bumper. "There are other +statues in this buried city of Kurzon, and though they may not be so +valuable they will give me a wealth of material for my research work." + +"How do you know there are other statues?" asked Mr. Damon. + +"Because my documents tell me so. It was because the people made other +idols, in opposition, as it were, to Quitzel, that their city or +country was destroyed. At least that is the legend. Quitzel, so the +story goes, wanted to be the chief god, and when the image of a rival +was set up in the temple near him, he toppled over in anger, and part +of the temple went with him, the whole place being buried in ruins. +All the inhabitants were killed, and trace of the ancient city was lost +forever. No, I hope not forever, for I expect to find it." + +"If all the people were killed, and the city buried, how did the story +of Quitzel become known?" asked Mr. Damon. + +"One only of the priests in the temple of Quitzel escaped and set down +part of the tale," said the professor. "It is his narrative, or one +based on it, that I have given you." + +"And now, what I want to do, is to go and make a search for this buried +city. I have fairly good directions as to how it may be reached. We +will have little difficulty in getting to Honduras, as there are fruit +steamers frequently sailing. Of course going into the interior--to the +Copan valley--is going to be harder. But an expedition from a large +college was recently there and succeeded, after much labor, in +excavating part of a buried city. Whether or not it was Kurzon I am +unable to say. + +"But if there was one ancient city there must be more. So I want to +make an attempt. And I counted on you, Tom. You have had considerable +experience in strange quarters of the earth, and you're just the one to +help me. I don't need money, for I have interested a certain +millionaire, and my own college will put up part of the funds." + +"Oh, it isn't a question of money," said Tom. "It's time." + +"That's just what it is with me!" exclaimed Professor Bumper. "I +haven't any time to lose. My rivals may, even now, be on their way to +Honduras!" + +"Your rivals!" cried Tom. "You didn't say anything about them!" + +"No, I believe I didn't. There were so many other things to talk about. +But there is a rival archaeologist who would ask nothing better than to +get ahead of me in this matter. He is younger than I am, and youth is +a big asset nowadays." + +"Pooh! You're not old!" cried Mr. Damon. "You're no older than I am, +and I'm still young. I'm a lot younger than some of these boys who are +afraid to tackle a trip through a tropical wilderness," and he +playfully nudged Tom in the ribs. + +"I'm not a bit afraid!" retorted the young inventor. + +"No, I know you're not," laughed Mr. Damon. "But I've got to say +something, Tom, to stir you up. Ned, how about you? Would you go?" + +"I can't, unless Tom does. You see I'm his financial man now." + +"There you are, Tom Swift!" cried Mr. Damon. "You see you are holding +back a number of persons just because you don't want to go." + +"I certainly wouldn't like to go without Tom," said the professor +slowly. "I really need his help. You know, Tom, we would never have +found the city of Pelone if it had not been for you and your marvelous +powder. The conditions in the Copan valley are likely to be still more +difficult to overcome, and I feel that I risk failure without your +young energy and your inventive mind to aid in the work and to suggest +possible means of attaining our object. Come, Tom, reconsider, and +decide to make the trip." + +"And my promise to go was dependent on Tom's agreement to accompany +us," said Mr. Damon. + +"Come on!" urged the professor, much as one boy might urge another to +take part in a ball game. "Don't let my rival get ahead of me." + +"I wouldn't like to see that," Tom said slowly. "Who is he--any one I +know?" + +"I don't believe so, Tom. He's connected with a large, new college +that has plenty of money to spend on explorations and research work. +Beecher is his name--Fenimore Beecher." + +"Beecher!" exclaimed Tom, and there was such a change in his manner +that his friends could not help noticing it. He jumped to his feet, +his eyes snapping, and he looked eagerly and anxiously at Professor +Bumper. + +"Did you say his name was Fenimore Beecher?" Tom asked in a tense voice. + +"That's what it is--Professor Fenimore Beecher. He is really a learned +young man, and thoroughly in earnest, though I do not like his manner. +But he is trying to get ahead of me, which may account for my feeling." + +Tom Swift did not answer. Instead he hurried from the room with a +murmured apology. + +"I'll be back in about five minutes," he said, as he went out. + +"Well, what's up now?" asked Mr. Damon of Ned, as the young inventor +departed. "What set him off that way?" + +"The mention of Beecher's name, evidently. Though I never heard him +mention such a person before." + +"Nor did I ever hear Professor Beecher speak of Tom," said the +bald-headed scientist. "Well, we'll just have to wait until----" + +At that moment Tom came back into the room. + +"Gentlemen," he said, "I have reconsidered my refusal to go to the +Copan valley after the idol of gold. I'm going with you!" + +"Good!" cried Professor Bumper. + +"Fine!" ejaculated Mr. Damon. "Bless my time-table! I thought you'd +come around, Tom Swift." + +"But what about your stabilizer?" asked Ned. + +"I was just talking to my father about it," the young inventor replied. +"He will be able to put the finishing touches on it. So I'll leave it +with him. As soon as I can get ready I'll go, since you say haste is +necessary, Professor Bumper." + +"It is, if we are to get ahead of Beecher." + +"Then we'll get ahead of him!" cried Tom. "I'm with you now from the +start to the finish. I'll show him what I can do!" he added, while Ned +and the others wondered at the sudden change in their friend's manner. + + + + +CHAPTER V + +THE LITTLE GREEN GOD + + +"Tom how soon can we go?" asked Professor Bumper, as he began arranging +his papers, maps and documents ready to place them back in the valise. + +"Within a week, if you want to start that soon." + +"The sooner the better. A week will suit me. I don't know just what +Beecher's plans are, but, he may try to get on the ground first. +Though, without boasting, I may say that he has not had as much +experience as I have had, thanks to you, Tom, when you helped me find +the lost city of Pelone." + +"Well, I hope we'll be as successful this time," murmured Tom. "I +don't want to see Beecher beat you." + +"I didn't know you knew him, Tom," said the professor. + +"Oh, yes, I have met him, once," and there was something in Tom's +manner, though he tried to speak indifferently, that made Ned believe +there was more behind his chum's sudden change of determination than +had yet appeared. + +"He never mentioned you," went on Professor Bumper; "yet the last time +I saw him I said I was coming to see you, though I did not tell him +why." + +"No, he wouldn't be likely to speak of me," said Tom significantly. + +"Well, if that's all settled, I guess I'll go back home and pack up," +said Mr. Damon, making a move to depart. + +"There's no special rush," Tom said. "We won't leave for a week. I +can't get ready in much less time than that." + +"Bless my socks! I know that," ejaculated Mr. Damon. "But if I get my +things packed I can go to a hotel to stay while my wife is away. She +might take a notion to come home unexpectedly, and, though she is a +dear, good soul, she doesn't altogether approve of my going off on +these wild trips with you, Tom Swift. But if I get all packed, and +clear out, she can't find me and she can't hold me back. She is +visiting her mother now. I can send her a wire from Kurzon after I get +there." + +"I don't believe the telegraph there is working," laughed Professor +Bumper. "But suit yourself. I must go back to New York to arrange for +the goods we'll have to take with us. In a week, Tom, we'll start." + +"You must stay to dinner," Tom said. "You can't get a train now +anyhow, and father wants to meet you again. He's pretty well, +considering his age. And he's much better I verily believe since I +said I'd turn over to him the task of finishing the stabilizer. He +likes to work." + +"We'll stay and take the night train back," agreed Mr. Damon. "It will +be like old times, Tom," he went on, "traveling off together into the +wilds. Central America is pretty wild, isn't it?" he asked, as if in +fear of being disappointed on that score. + +"Oh, it's wild enough to suit any one," answered Professor Bumper. + +"Well, now to settle a few details," observed Tom. "Ned, what is the +situation as regards the financial affairs of my father and myself? +Nothing will come to grief if we go away, will there?" + +"I guess not, Tom. But are you going to take your father with you?" + +"No, of course not." + +"But you spoke of 'we.'" + +"I meant you and I are going." + +"Me, Tom?" + +"Sure, you! I wouldn't think of leaving you behind. You want Ned +along, don't you, Professor?" + +"Of course. It will be an ideal party--we four. We'll have to take +natives when we get to Honduras, and make up a mule pack-train for the +interior. I had some thoughts of asking you to take an airship along, +but it might frighten the Indians, and I shall have to depend on them +for guides, as well as for porters. So it will be an old-fashioned +expedition, in a way." + +Mr. Swift came in at this point to meet his old friends. + +"The boy needs a little excitement," he said. "He's been puttering +over that stabilizer invention too long. I can finish the model for +him in a very short time." + +Professor Bumper told Mr. Swift something about the proposed trip, +while Mr. Damon went out with Tom and Ned to one of the shops to look +at a new model aeroplane the young inventor had designed. + +There was a merry party around the table at dinner, though now and then +Ned noticed that Tom had an abstracted and preoccupied air. + +"Thinking about the idol of gold?" asked Ned in a whisper to his chum, +when they were about to leave the table. + +"The idol of gold? Oh, yes! Of course! It will be great if we can +bring that back with us." But the manner in which he said this made Ned +feel sure that Tom had had other thoughts, and that he had used a +little subterfuge in his answer. + +Ned was right, as he proved for himself a little later, when, Mr. Damon +and the professor having gone home, the young financial secretary took +his friend to a quiet corner and asked: + +"What's the matter, Tom?" + +"Matter? What do you mean?" + +"I mean what made you make up your mind so quickly to go on this +expedition when you heard Beecher was going?" + +"Oh--er--well, you wouldn't want to see our old friend Professor Bumper +left, would you, after he had worked out the secret of the idol of +gold? You wouldn't want some young whipper-snapper to beat him in the +race, would you, Ned?" + +"No, of course not." + +"Neither would I. That's why I changed my mind. This Beecher isn't +going to get that idol if I can stop him!" + +"You seem rather bitter against him." + +"Bitter? Oh, not at all. I simply don't want to see my friends +disappointed." + +"Then Beecher isn't a friend of yours?" + +"Oh, I've met him, that is all," and Tom tried to speak indifferently. + +"Humph!" mused Ned, "there's more here than I dreamed of. I'm going to +get at the bottom of it." + +But though Ned tried to pump Tom, he was not successful. The young +inventor admitted knowing the youthful scientist, but that was all, Tom +reiterating his determination not to let Professor Bumper be beaten in +the race for the idol of gold. + +"Let me see," mused Ned, as he went home that evening. "Tom did not +change his mind until he heard Beecher's name mentioned. Now this +shows that Beecher had something to do with it. The only reason Tom +doesn't want Beecher to get this idol or find the buried city is +because Professor Bumper is after it. And yet the professor is not an +old or close friend of Tom's. They met only when Tom went to dig his +big tunnel. There must be some other reason." + +Ned did some more thinking. Then he clapped his hands together, and a +smile spread over his face. + +"I believe I have it!" he cried. "The little green god as compared to +the idol of gold! That's it. I'm going to make a call on my way home." + +This he did, stopping at the home of Mary Nestor, a pretty girl, who, +rumor had it, was tacitly engaged to Tom. Mary was not at home, but +Mr. Nestor was, and for Ned's purpose this answered. + +"Well, well, glad to see you!" exclaimed Mary's father. "Isn't Tom +with you?" he asked a moment later, seeing that Ned was alone. + +"No, Tom isn't with me this evening," Ned answered. "The fact is, he's +getting ready to go off on another expedition, and I'm going with him." + +"You young men are always going somewhere," remarked Mrs. Nestor. +"Where is it to this time?" + +"Some place in Central America," Ned answered, not wishing to be too +particular. He was wondering how he could find out what he wanted to +know, when Mary's mother unexpectedly gave him just the information he +was after. + +"Central America!" she exclaimed. "Why, Father," and she looked at her +husband, "that's where Professor Beecher is going, isn't it?" + +"Yes, I believe he did mention something about that." + +"Professor Beecher, the man who is an authority on Aztec ruins?" asked +Ned, taking a shot in the dark. + +"Yes," said Mr. Nestor. "And a mighty fine young man he is, too. I +knew his father well. He was here on a visit not long ago, young +Beecher was, and he talked most entertainingly about his discoveries. +You remember how interested Mary was, Mother?" + +"Yes, she seemed to be," said Mrs. Nestor. "Tom Swift dropped in +during the course of the evening," she added to Ned, "and Mary +introduced him to Professor Beecher. But I can't say that Tom was much +interested in the professor's talk." + +"No?" questioned Ned. + +"No, not at all. But Tom did not stay long. He left just as Mary and +the professor were drawing a map so the professor could indicate where +he had once made a big discovery." + +"I see," murmured Ned. "Well, I suppose Tom must have been thinking of +something else at the time." + +"Very likely," agreed Mr. Nestor. "But Tom missed a very profitable +talk. I was very much interested myself in what the professor told us, +and so was Mary. She invited Mr. Beecher to come again. He takes +after his father in being very thorough in what he does. + +"Sometimes I think," went on Mr. Nestor, "that Tom isn't quite steady +enough. He's thinking of so many things, perhaps, that he can't get +his mind down to the commonplace. I remember he once sent something +here in a box labeled 'dynamite.' Though there was no explosive in it, +it gave us a great fright. But Tom is a boy, in spite of his years. +Professor Beecher seems much older. We all like him very much." + +"That's nice," said Ned, as he took his departure. He had found out +what he had come to learn. + +"I knew it!" Ned exclaimed as he walked home. "I knew something was in +the wind. The little green god of jealousy has Tom in his clutches. +That's why my inventive friend was so anxious to go on this expedition +when he learned Beecher was to go. He wants to beat him. I guess the +professor has plainly shown that he wouldn't like anything better than +to cut Tom out with Mary. Whew! that's something to think about!" + + + + +CHAPTER VI + +UNPLEASANT NEWS + + +Ned Newton decided to keep to himself what he had heard at the Nestor +home. Not for the world would he let Tom Swift know of the situation. + +"That is, I won't let him know that I know," said Ned to himself, +"though he is probably as well aware of the situation as I am. But it +sure is queer that this Professor Beecher should have taken such a +fancy to Mary, and that her father should regard him so well. That is +natural, I suppose. But I wonder how Mary herself feels about it. +That is the part Tom would be most interested in. + +"No wonder Tom wants to get ahead of this young college chap, who +probably thinks he's the whole show. If he can find the buried city, +and get the idol of gold, it would be a big feather in his cap. + +"He'd have no end of honors heaped on him, and I suppose his hat +wouldn't come within three sizes of fitting him. Then he'd stand in +better than ever with Mr. Nestor. And, maybe, with Mary, too, though I +think she is loyal to Tom. But one never can tell. + +"However, I'm glad I know about it. I'll do all I can to help Tom, +without letting him know that I know. And if I can do anything to help +in finding that idol of gold for Professor Bumper, and, incidentally, +Tom, I'll do it," and he spoke aloud in his enthusiasm. + +Ned, who was walking along in the darkness, clapped his open hand down +on Tom's magazine he was carrying home to read again, and the resultant +noise was a sharp crack. As it sounded a figure jumped from behind a +tree and called tensely: + +"Hold on there!" + +Ned stopped short, thinking he was to be the victim of a holdup, but +his fears were allayed when he beheld one of the police force of +Shopton confronting him. + +"I heard what you said about gettin' the gold," went on the officer. +"I was walkin' along and I heard you talkin'. Where's your pal?" + +"I haven't any, Mr. Newbold," answered Ned with a laugh, as he +recognized the man. + +"Oh, pshaw! It's Ned Newton!" exclaimed the disappointed officer. "I +thought you was talkin' to a confederate about gold, and figured maybe +you was goin' to rob the bank." + +"No, nothing like that," answered Ned, still much amused. "I was +talking to myself about a trip Tom Swift and I are going to take +and----" + +"Oh, that's all right," responded the policeman. "I can understand it, +if it had anything to do with Tom. He's a great boy." + +"Indeed he is," agreed Ned, making a mental resolve not to be so public +with his thoughts in the future. He chatted for a moment with the +officer, and then, bidding him good-night, walked on to his home, his +mind in a whirl with conglomerate visions of buried cities, great +grinning idols of gold, and rival professors seeking to be first at the +goal. + +The next few days were busy ones for Tom, Ned and, in fact, the whole +Swift household. Tom and his father had several consultations and +conducted several experiments in regard to the new stabilizer, the +completion of which was so earnestly desired. Mr. Swift was sure he +could carry the invention to a successful conclusion. + +Ned was engaged in putting the financial affairs of the Swift Company +in shape, so they would practically run themselves during his absence. +Then, too, there was the packing of their baggage which must be seen to. + +Of course, the main details of the trip were left to Professor Bumper, +who knew just what to do. He had told Tom and Ned that all they and +Mr. Damon would have to do would be to meet him at the pier in New +York, where they would find all arrangements made. + +One day, near the end of the week (the beginning of the next being set +for the start) Eradicate came shuffling into the room where Tom was +sorting out the possessions he desired to take with him, Ned assisting +him in the task. + +"Well, Rad, what is it?" asked Tom, with businesslike energy. + +"I done heah, Massa Tom, dat yo' all's gwine off on a long trip once +mo'. Am dat so?" + +"Yes, that's so, Rad." + +"Well, den, I'se come to ast yo' whut I'd bettah take wif me. Shall I +took warm clothes or cool clothes?" + +"Well, if you were going, Rad," answered Tom with a smile, "you'd need +cool clothes, for we're going to a sort of jungle-land. But I'm sorry +to say you're not going this trip." + +"I---- I ain't gwine? Does yo' mean dat yo' all ain't gwine to take +me, Massa Tom?" + +"That's it, Rad. It isn't any trip for you." + +"Is certain not!" broke in the voice of Koku, the giant, who entered +with a big trunk Tom had sent him for. "Master want strong man like a +bull. He take Koku!" + +"Look heah!" spluttered Eradicate, and his eyes flashed. "Yo'--yo' +giant yo'--yo' may be strong laik a bull, but ya' ain't got as much +sense as mah mule, Boomerang! Massa Tom don't want no sich pusson wif +him. He's gwine to take me." + +"He take me!" cried Koku, and his voice was a roar while he beat on his +mighty chest with his huge fists. + +Tom, seeing that the dispute was likely to be bothersome, winked at Ned +and began to speak. + +"I don't believe you'd like it there, Rad--not where we're going. It's +a bad country. Why the mosquitoes there bite holes in you--raise bumps +on you as big as eggs." + +"Oh, good land!" ejaculated the old colored man. "Am dat so Massa Tom?" + +"It sure is. Then there's another kind of bug that burrows under your +fingernails, and if you don't get 'em out, your fingers drop off." + +"Oh, good land, Massa Tom! Am dat a fact?" + +"It sure is. I don't want to see those things happen to you, Rad." + +Slowly the old colored man shook his head. + +"I don't mahse'f," he said. "I---- I guess I won't go." + +Eradicate did not stop to ask how Tom and Ned proposed to combat these +two species of insects. + +But there remained Koku to dispose of, and he stood smiling broadly as +Eradicate shuffled off. + +"Me no 'fraid bugs," said the giant. + +"No," said Tom, with a look at Ned, for he did not want to take the big +man on the trip for various reasons. "No, maybe not, Koku. Your skin +is pretty tough. But I understand there are deep pools of water in the +land where we are going, and in them lives a fish that has a hide like +an alligator and a jaw like a shark. If you fall in it's all up with +you." + +"Dat true, Master Tom?" and Koku's voice trembled. + +"Well, I've never seen such a fish, I'm sure, but the natives tell +about it." + +Koku seemed to be considering the matter. Strange as it may seem, the +giant, though afraid of nothing human and brave when it came to a +hand-to-claw argument with a wild animal, had a very great fear of the +water and the unseen life within it. Even a little fresh-water crab in +a brook was enough to send him shrieking to shore. So when Tom told of +this curious fish, which many natives of Central America firmly believe +in, the giant took thought with himself. Finally, he gave a sigh and +said: + +"Me stay home and keep bad mans out of master's shop." + +"Yes, I guess that's the best thing for you," assented Tom with an air +of relief. He and Ned had talked the matter over, and they had agreed +that the presence of such a big man as Koku, in an expedition going on +a more or less secret mission, would attract too much attention. + +"Well, I guess that clears matters up," said Tom, as he looked over a +collection of rifles and small arms, to decide which to take. "We +won't have them to worry about." + +"No, only Professor Beecher," remarked Ned, with a sharp look at his +chum. + +"Oh, we'll dispose of him all right!" asserted Tom boldly. "He hasn't +had any experience in business of this sort, and with what you and +Professor Bumper and Mr. Damon know we ought to have little trouble in +getting ahead of the young man." + +"Not to speak of your own aid," added Ned. + +"Oh, I'll do what I can, of course," said Tom, with an air of +indifference. But Ned knew his chum would work ceaselessly to help get +the idol of gold. + +Tom gave no sign that there was any complication in his affair with +Mary Nestor, and of course Ned did not tell anything of what he knew +about it. + +That night saw the preparations of Ned and Tom about completed. There +were one or two matters yet to finish on Tom's part in relation to his +business, but these offered no difficulties. + +The two chums were in the Swift home, talking over the prospective +trip, when Mrs. Baggert, answering a ring at the front door, announced +that Mr. Damon was outside. + +"Tell him to come in," ordered Tom. + +"Bless my baggage check!" exclaimed the excitable man, as he shook +hands with Tom and Ned and noted the packing evidences all about. +"You're ready to go to the land of wonders." + +"The land of wonders?" repeated Ned. + +"Yes, that's what Professor Bumper calls the part of Honduras we're +going to. And it must be wonderful, Tom. Think of whole cities, some +of them containing idols and temples of gold, buried thirty and forty +feet under the surface! Wonderful is hardly the name for it!" + +"It'll be great!" cried Ned. "I suppose you're ready, Mr. Damon--you +and the professor?" + +"Yes. But, Tom, I have a bit of unpleasant news for you." + +"Unpleasant news?" + +"Yes. You know Professor Bumper spoke of a rival--a man named Beecher +who is a member of the faculty of a new and wealthy college." + +"I heard him speak of him--yes," and the way Tom said it no one would +have suspected that he had any personal interest in the matter. + +"He isn't going to give his secret away," thought Ned. + +"Well, this Professor Beecher, you know," went on Mr. Damon, "also +knows about the idol of gold, and is trying to get ahead of Professor +Bumper in the search." + +"He did say something of it, but nothing was certain," remarked Tom. + +"But it is certain!" exclaimed Mr. Damon. "Bless my toothpick, it's +altogether too certain!" + +"How is that?" asked Tom. "Is Beecher certainly going to Honduras?" + +"Yes, of course. But what is worse, he and his party will leave New +York on the same steamer with us!" + + + + +CHAPTER VII + +TOM HEARS SOMETHING + + +On hearing Mr. Damon's rather startling announcement, Tom and Ned +looked at one another. There seemed to be something back of the simple +statement--an ominous and portending "something." + +"On the same steamer with us, is he?" mused Tom. + +"How did you learn this?" asked Ned. + +"Just got a wire from Professor Bumper telling me. He asked me to +telephone to you about it, as he was too busy to call up on the long +distance from New York. But instead of 'phoning I decided to come over +myself." + +"Glad you did," said Tom, heartily. "Did Professor Bumper want us to +do anything special, now that it is certain his rival will be so close +on his trail?" + +"Yes, he asked me to warn you to be careful what you did and said in +reference to the expedition." + +"Then does he fear something?" asked Ned. + +"Yes, in a way. I think he is very much afraid this young Beecher will +not only be first on the site of the underground city, but that he may +be the first to discover the idol of gold. It would be a great thing +for a young archaeologist like Beecher to accomplish a mission of this +sort, and beat Professor Bumper in the race." + +"Do you think that's why Beecher decided to go on the same steamer we +are to take?" asked Ned. + +"Yes, I do," said Mr. Damon. "Though from what Professor Bumper said I +know he regards Professor Beecher as a perfectly honorable man, as well +as a brilliant student. I do not believe Beecher or his party would +stoop to anything dishonorable or underhand, though they would not +hesitate, nor would we, to take advantage of every fair chance to win +in the race." + +"No, I suppose that's right," observed Tom; but there was a queer gleam +in his eye, and his chum wondered if Tom did not have in mind the +prospective race between himself and Fenimore Beecher for the regard of +Mary Nestor. "We'll do our best to win, and any one is at liberty to +travel on the same steamer we are to take," added the young inventor, +and his tone became more incisive. + +"It will be all the livelier with two expeditions after the same golden +idol," remarked Ned. + +"Yes, I think we're in for some excitement," observed Tom grimly. But +even he did not realize all that lay before them ere they would reach +Kurzon. + +Mr. Damon, having delivered his message, and remarking that his +preparations for leaving were nearly completed, went back to +Waterfield, from there to proceed to New York in a few days with Tom +and Ned, to meet Professor Bumper. + +"Well, I guess we have everything in pretty good shape," remarked Tom +to his chum a day or so after the visit of Mr. Damon. "Everything is +packed, and as I have a few personal matters to attend to I think I'll +take the afternoon off." + +"Go to it!" laughed Ned, guessing a thing of two. "I've got a raft of +stuff myself to look after, but don't let that keep you." + +"If there is anything I can do," began Tom, "don't hesitate to----" + +"Nonsense!" exclaimed Ned. "I can do it all alone. It's some of the +company's business, anyhow, and I'm paid for looking after that." + +"All right, then I'll cut along," Tom said, and he wore a relieved air. + +"He's going to see Mary," observed Ned with a grin, as he observed Tom +hop into his trim little roadster, which under his orders, Koku had +polished and cleaned until it looked as though it had just come from +the factory. + +A little later the trim and speedy car drew up in front of the Nestor +home, and Tom bounded up on the front porch, his heart not altogether +as light as his feet. + +"No, I'm sorry, but Mary isn't in," said Mrs. Nestor, answering his +inquiry after greeting him. + +"Not at home?" + +"No, she went on a little visit to her cousin's at Fayetteville. She +said something about letting you know she was going." + +"She did drop me a card," answered Tom, and, somehow he did not feel at +all cheerful. "But I thought it wasn't until next week she was going." + +"That was her plan, Tom. But she changed it. Her cousin wired, asking +her to advance the date, and this Mary did. There was something about +a former school chum who was also to be at Myra's house--Myra is Mary's +cousin you know." + +"Yes, I know," assented the young inventor. "And so Mary is gone. How +long is she going to stay?" + +"Oh, about two weeks. She wasn't quite certain. It depends on the +kind of a time she has, I suppose." + +"Yes, I suppose so," agreed Tom. "Well, if you write before I do you +might say I called, Mrs. Nestor." + +"I will, Tom. And I know Mary will be sorry she wasn't here to take a +ride with you; it's such a nice day," and the lady smiled as she looked +at the speedy roadster. + +"Maybe--maybe you'd like to come for a spin?" asked Tom, half +desperately. + +"No, thank you. I'm too old to be jounced around in one of those small +cars." + +"Nonsense! She rides as easily as a Pullman sleeper." + +"Well, I have to go to a Red Cross meeting, anyhow, so I can't come, +Tom. Thank you, just the same." + +Tom did not drive back immediately to his home. He wanted to do a bit +of thinking, and he believed he could do it best by himself. So it was +late afternoon when he again greeted Ned, who, meanwhile, had been kept +very busy. + +"Well?" called Tom's chum. + +"Um!" was the only answer, and Tom called Koku to put the car away in +the garage. + +"Something wrong," mused Ned. + +The next three days were crowded with events and with work. Mr. Damon +came over frequently to consult with Tom and Ned, and finally the last +of their baggage had been packed, certain of Tom's inventions and +implements sent on by express to New York to be taken to Honduras, and +then our friends themselves followed to the metropolis. + +"Good-bye, Tom," said his father. "Good-bye, and good luck! If you +don't get the idol of gold I'm sure you'll have experiences that will +be valuable to you." + +"We're going to get the idol of gold!" said Tom determinedly. + +"Look out for the bad bugs," suggested Eradicate. + +"We will," promised Ned. + +Tom's last act was to send a message to Mary Nestor, and then he, with +Ned and Mr. Damon, who blessed everything in sight from the gasoline in +the automobile to the blue sky overhead, started for the station. + +New York was reached without incident. The trio put up at the hotel +where Professor Bumper was to meet them. + +"He hasn't arrived yet," said Tom, after glancing over the names on the +hotel register and not seeing Professor Bumper's among them. + +"Oh, he'll be here all right," asserted Mr. Damon. "Bless my galvanic +battery! he sent me a telegram at one o'clock this morning saying he'd +be sure to meet us in New York. No fear of him not starting for the +land of wonders." + +"There are some other professors registered, though," observed Ned, as +he glanced at the book, noting the names of several scientists of whom +he and Tom had read. + +"Yes. I wonder what they're doing in New York," replied Tom. "They +are from New England. Maybe there's a convention going on. Well, +we'll have to wait, that's all, until Professor Bumper comes." + +And during that wait Tom heard something that surprised him and caused +him no little worry. It was when Ned came back to his room, which +adjoined Tom's, that the young treasurer gave his chum the news. + +"I say, Tom!" Ned exclaimed. "Who do you think those professors are, +whose names we saw on the register?" + +"I haven't the least idea." + +"Why, they're of Beecher's party!" + +"You don't mean it!" + +"I surely do." + +"How do you know?" + +"I happened to overhear two of them talking down in the lobby a while +ago. They didn't make any secret of it. They spoke freely of going +with Beecher to some ancient city in Honduras, to look for an idol of +gold." + +"They did? But where is Beecher?" + +"He hasn't joined them yet. Their plans have been changed. Instead of +leaving on the same steamer we are to take in the morning they are to +come on a later one. The professors here are waiting for Beecher to +come." + +"Why isn't he here now?" + +"Well, I heard one of the other scientists say that he had gone to a +place called Fayetteville, and will come on from there." + +"Fayetteville!" ejaculated Tom. + +"Yes. That isn't far from Shopton." + +"I know," assented Tom. "I wonder--I wonder why he is going there?" + +"I can tell you that, too." + +"You can? You're a regular detective." + +"No, I just happened to overhear it. Beecher is going to call on Mary +Nestor in Fayetteville, so his friends here said he told them, and his +call has to do with an important matter--to him!" and Ned gazed +curiously at his chum. + + + + +CHAPTER VIII + +OFF FOR HONDURAS + + +Just what Tom's thoughts were, Ned, of course, could not guess. But by +the flush that showed under the tan of his chum's cheeks the young +financial secretary felt pretty certain that Tom was a bit apprehensive +of the outcome of Professor Beecher's call on Mary Nestor. + +"So he is going to see her about 'something important,' Ned?" + +"That's what some members of his party called it." + +"And they're waiting here for him to join them?" + +"Yes. And it means waiting a week for another steamer. It must be +something pretty important, don't you think, to cause Beecher to risk +that delay in starting after the idol of gold?" + +"Important? Yes, I suppose so," assented Tom. "And yet even if he +waits for the next steamer he will get to Honduras nearly as soon as we +do." + +"How is that?" + +"The next boat is a faster one." + +"Then why don't we take that? I hate dawdling along on a slow +freighter." + +"Well, for one thing it would hardly do to change now, when all our +goods are on board. And besides, the captain of the _Relstab_, on +which we are going to sail, is a friend of Professor Bumper's." + +"Well, I'm just as glad Beecher and his party aren't going with us," +resumed Ned, after a pause. "It might make trouble." + +"Oh, I'm ready for any trouble HE might make!" quickly exclaimed Tom. + +He meant trouble that might be developed in going to Honduras, and +starting the search for the lost city and the idol of gold. This kind +of trouble Tom and his friends had experienced before, on other trips +where rivals had sought to frustrate their ends. + +But, in his heart, though he said nothing to Ned about it, Tom was +worried. Much as he disliked to admit it to himself, he feared the +visit of Professor Beecher to Mary Nestor in Fayetteville had but one +meaning. + +"I wonder if he's going to propose to her," thought Tom. "He has the +field all to himself now, and her father likes him. That's in his +favor. I guess Mr. Nestor has never quite forgiven me for that mistake +about the dynamite box, and that wasn't my fault. Then, too, the +Beecher and Nestor families have been friends for years. Yes, he +surely has the inside edge on me, and if he gets her to throw me +over---- Well, I won't give up without a fight!" and Tom mentally +girded himself for a battle of wits. + +"He's relying on the prestige he'll get out of this idol of gold if his +party finds it," thought on the young inventor. "But I'll help find it +first. I'm glad to have a little start of him, anyhow, even if it +isn't more than two days. Though if our vessel is held back much by +storms he may get on the ground first. However, that can't be helped. +I'll do the best I can." + +These thoughts shot through Tom's mind even as Ned was asking his +questions and making comments. Then the young inventor, shaking his +shoulders as though to rid them of some weight, remarked: + +"Well, come on out and see the sights. It will be long before we look +on Broadway again." + +When the chums returned from their sightseeing excursion, they found +that Professor Bumper had arrived. + +"Where's Professor Bumper?" asked Ned, the next day. + +"In his room, going over books, papers and maps to make sure he has +everything." + +"And Mr. Damon?" + +Tom did not have to answer that last question. Into the apartment came +bursting the excited individual himself. + +"Bless my overshoes!" he cried, "I've been looking everywhere for you! +Come on, there's no time to lose!" + +"What's the matter now?" asked Ned. "Is the hotel on fire?" + +"Has anything happened to Professor Bumper?" Tom demanded, a wild idea +forming in his head that perhaps some one of the Beecher party had +tried to kidnap the discoverer of the lost city of Pelone. + +"Oh, everything is all right," answered Mr. Damon. "But it's nearly +time for the show to start, and we don't want to be late. I have +tickets." + +"For what?" asked Tom and Ned together. + +"The movies," was the laughing reply. "Bless my loose ribs! but I +wouldn't miss him for anything. He's in a new play called 'Up in a +Balloon Boys.' It's great!" and Mr. Damon named a certain comic moving +picture star in whose horse-play Mr. Damon took a curious interest. +Tom and Ned were glad enough to go, Tom that he might have a chance to +do a certain amount of thinking, and Ned because he was still boy +enough to like moving pictures. + +"I wonder, Tom," said Mr. Damon, as they came out of the theater two +hours later, all three chuckling at the remembrance of what they had +seen, "I wonder you never turned your inventive mind to the movies." + +"Maybe I will, some day," said Tom. + +He spoke rather uncertainly. The truth of the matter was that he was +still thinking deeply of the visit of Professor Beecher to Mary Nestor, +and wondering what it portended. + +But if Tom's sleep was troubled that night he said nothing of it to his +friends. He was up early the next morning, for they were to leave that +day, and there was still considerable to be done in seeing that their +baggage and supplies were safely loaded, and in attending to the last +details of some business matters. + +While at the hotel they had several glimpses of the members of the +Beecher party who were awaiting the arrival of the young professor who +was to lead them into the wilds of Honduras. But our friends did not +seek the acquaintance of their rivals. The latter, likewise, remained +by themselves, though they knew doubtless that there was likely to be a +strenuous race for the possession of the idol of gold, then, it was +presumed, buried deep in some forest-covered city. + +Professor Bumper had made his arrangements carefully. As he explained +to his friends, they would take the steamer from New York to Puerto +Cortes, one of the principal seaports of Honduras. This is a town of +about three thousand inhabitants, with an excellent harbor and a big +pier along which vessels can tie up and discharge their cargoes +directly into waiting cars. + +The preparations were finally completed. The party went aboard the +steamer, which was a large freight vessel, carrying a limited number of +passengers, and late one afternoon swung down New York Bay. + +"Off for Honduras!" cried Ned gaily, as they passed the Statue of +Liberty. "I wonder what will happen before we see that little lady +again." + +"Who knows?" asked Tom, shrugging his shoulders, Spanish fashion. And +there came before him the vision of a certain "little lady," about whom +he had been thinking deeply of late. + + + + +CHAPTER IX + +VAL JACINTO + + +"Rather tame, isn't it, Tom?" + +"Well, Ned, it isn't exactly like going up in an airship," and Tom +Swift who was gazing over the rail down into the deep blue water of the +Caribbean Sea, over which their vessel was then steaming, looked at his +chum beside him. + +"No, and your submarine voyage had it all over this one for +excitement," went on Ned. "When I think of that----" + +"Bless my sea legs!" interrupted Mr. Damon, overhearing the +conversation. "Don't speak of THAT trip. My wife never forgave me for +going on it. But I had a fine time," he added with a twinkle of his +eyes. + +"Yes, that was quite a trip," observed Tom, as his mind went back to +it. "But this one isn't over yet remember. And I shouldn't be +surprised if we had a little excitement very soon." + +"What do you mean?" asked Ned. + +Up to this time the voyage from New York down into the tropical seas +had been anything but exciting. There were not many passengers besides +themselves, and the weather had been fine. + +At first, used as they were to the actions of unscrupulous rivals in +trying to thwart their efforts, Tom and Ned had been on the alert for +any signs of hidden enemies on board the steamer. But aside from a +little curiosity when it became known that they were going to explore +little-known portions of Honduras, the other passengers took hardly any +interest in our travelers. + +It was thought best to keep secret the fact that they were going to +search for a wonderful idol of gold. Not even the mule and ox-cart +drivers, whom they would hire to take them into the wilds of the +interior would be told of the real object of the search. It would be +given out that they were looking for interesting ruins of ancient +cities, with a view to getting such antiquities as might be there. + +"What do you mean?" asked Ned again, when Tom did not answer him +immediately. "What's the excitement?" + +"I think we're in for a storm," was the reply. "The barometer is +falling and I see the crew going about making everything snug. So we +may have a little trouble toward this end of our trip." + +"Let it come!" exclaimed Mr. Damon. "We're not afraid of trouble, Tom +Swift, are we?" + +"No, to be sure we're not. And yet it looks as though the storm would +be a bad one." + +"Then I am going to see if my books and papers are ready, so I can get +them together in a hurry in case we have to take to the life-boats," +said Professor Bumper, coming on deck at that moment. "It won't do to +lose them. If we didn't have the map we might not be able to find----" + +"Ahem!" exclaimed Tom, with unnecessary emphasis it seemed. "I'll help +you go over your papers, Professor," he added, and with a wink and a +motion of his hand, he enjoined silence on his friend. Ned looked +around for a reason for this, and observed a man, evidently of Spanish +extraction, passing them as he paced up and down the deck. + +"What's the matter?" asked the scientist in a whisper, as the man went +on. "Do you know him? Is he a----?" + +"I don't know anything about him," said Tom; "but it is best not to +speak of our trip before strangers." + +"You are right, Tom," said Professor Bumper. "I'll be more careful." + +A storm was brewing, that was certain. A dull, sickly yellow began to +obscure the sky, and the water, from a beautiful blue, turned a slate +color and ran along the sides of the vessel with a hissing sound as +though the sullen waves would ask nothing better than to suck the craft +down into their depths. The wind, which had been freshening, now sang +in louder tones as it hummed through the rigging and the funnel stays +and bowled over the receiving conductors of the wireless. + +Sharp commands from the ship's officers hastened the work of the crew +in making things snug, and life lines were strung along deck for the +safety of such of the passengers as might venture up when the blow +began. + +The storm was not long in coming. The howling of the wind grew louder, +flecks of foam began to separate themselves from the crests of the +waves, and the vessel pitched, rolled and tossed more violently. At +first Tom and his friends thought they were in for no more than an +ordinary blow, but as the storm progressed, and the passengers became +aware of the anxiety on the part of the officers and crew, the alarm +spread among them. + +It really was a violent storm, approaching a hurricane in force, and at +one time it seemed as though the craft, having been heeled far over +under a staggering wave that swept her decks, would not come back to an +even keel. + +There was a panic among some of the passengers, and a few excited men +behaved in a way that caused prompt action on the part of the first +officer, who drove them back to the main cabin under threat of a +revolver. For the men were determined to get to the lifeboats, and a +small craft would not have had a minute to live in such seas as were +running. + +But the vessel proved herself sturdier than the timid ones had dared to +hope, and she was soon running before the blast, going out of her +course, it is true, but avoiding the danger among the many cays, or +small islands, that dot the Caribbean Sea. + +There was nothing to do but to let the storm blow itself out, which it +did in two days. Then came a period of delightful weather. The cargo +had shifted somewhat, which gave the steamer a rather undignified list. + +This, as well as the loss of a deckhand overboard, was the effect of +the hurricane, and though the end of the trip came amid sunshine and +sweet-scented tropical breezes, many could not forget the dangers +through which they had passed. + +In due time Tom and his party found themselves safely housed in the +small hotel at Puerto Cortes, their belongings stored in a convenient +warehouse and themselves, rather weary by reason of the stress of +weather, ready for the start into the interior wilds of Honduras. + +"How are we going to make the trip?" asked Ned, as they sat at supper, +the first night after their arrival, eating of several dishes, the +red-pepper condiments of which caused frequent trips to the water +pitcher. + +"We can go in two ways, and perhaps we shall find it to our advantage +to use both means," said Professor Bumper. "To get to this city of +Kurzon," he proceeded in a low voice, so that none of the others in the +dining-room would hear them, "we will have to go either by mule back or +boat to a point near Copan. As near as I can tell by the ancient maps, +Kurzon is in the Copan valley. + +"Now the Chamelecon river seems to run to within a short distance of +there, but there is no telling how far up it may be navigable. If we +can go by boat it will be much more comfortable. Travel by mules and +ox-carts is slow and sure, but the roads are very bad, as I have heard +from friends who have made explorations in Honduras. + +"And, as I said, we may have to use both land and water travel to get +us where we want to go. We can proceed as far as possible up the +river, and then take to the mules." + +"What about arranging for boats and animals?" asked Tom. "I should +think----" + +He suddenly ceased talking and reached for the water, taking several +large swallows. + +"Whew!" he exclaimed, when he could catch his breath. "That was a hot +one." + +"What did you do?" asked Ned. + +"Bit into a nest of red pepper. Guess I'll have to tell that cook to +scatter his hits. He's bunching 'em too much in my direction," and Tom +wiped the tears from his eyes. + +"To answer your question," said Professor Bumper, "I will say that I +have made partial arrangements for men and animals, and boats if it is +found feasible to use them. I've been in correspondence with one of +the merchants here, and he promised to make arrangements for us." + +"When do we leave?" asked Mr. Damon. + +"As soon as possible. I am not going to risk anything by delay," and +it was evident the professor referred to his young rival whose arrival +might be expected almost any time. + +As the party was about to leave the table, they were approached by a +tall, dignified Spaniard who bowed low, rather exaggeratedly low, Ned +thought, and addressed them in fairly good English. + +"Your pardons, Senors," he began, "but if it will please you to avail +yourself of the humble services of myself, I shall have great pleasure +in guiding you into the interior. I have at my command both mules and +boats." + +"How do you know we are going into the interior?" asked Tom, a bit +sharply, for he did not like the assurance of the man. + +"Pardon, Senor. I saw that you are from the States. And those from +the States do not come to Honduras except for two reasons. To travel +and make explorations or to start trade, and professors do not usually +engage in trade," and he bowed to Professor Bumper. + +"I saw your name on the register," he proceeded, "and it was not +difficult to guess your mission," and he flashed a smile on the party, +his white teeth showing brilliantly beneath his small, black moustache. + +"I make it my business to outfit traveling parties, either for +business, pleasure or scientific matters. I am, at your service, Val +Jacinto," and he introduced himself with another low bow. + +For a moment Tom and his friends hardly knew how to accept this offer. +It might be, as the man had said, that he was a professional tour +conductor, like those who have charge of Egyptian donkey-boys and +guides. Or might he not be a spy? + +This occurred to Tom no less than to Professor Bumper. They looked at +one another while Val Jacinto bowed again and murmured: + +"At your service!" + +"Can you provide means for taking us to the Copan valley?" asked the +professor. "You are right in one respect. I am a scientist and I +purpose doing some exploring near Copan. Can you get us there?" + +"Most expensively--I mean, most expeditionlessly," said Val Jacinto +eagerly. "Pardon my unhappy English. I forget at times. The charges +will be most moderate. I can send you by boat as far as the river +travel is good, and then have mules and ox-carts in waiting." + +"How far is it?" asked Tom. + +"A hundred miles as the vulture flies, Senor, but much farther by river +and road. We shall be a week going." + +"A hundred miles in a week!" groaned Ned. "Say, Tom, if you had your +aeroplane we'd be there in an hour." + +"Yes, but we haven't it. However, we're in no great rush." + +"But we must not lose time," said Professor Bumper. "I shall consider +your offer," he added to Val Jacinto. + +"Very good, Senor. I am sure you will be pleased with the humble +service I may offer you, and my charges will be small. Adios," and he +bowed himself away. + +"What do you think of him?" asked Ned, as they went up to their rooms +in the hotel, or rather one large room, containing several beds. + +"He's a pretty slick article," said Mr. Damon. "Bless my check-book! +but he spotted us at once, in spite of our secrecy." + +"I guess these guide purveyors are trained for that sort of thing," +observed the scientist. "I know my friends have often spoken of having +had the same experience. However, I shall ask my friend, who is in +business here, about this Val Jacinto, and if I find him all right we +may engage him." + +Inquiries next morning brought the information, from the head of a +rubber exporting firm with whom the professor was acquainted, that the +Spaniard was regularly engaged in transporting parties into the +interior, and was considered efficient, careful and as honest as +possible, considering the men he engaged as workers. + +"So we have decided to engage you," Professor Bumper informed Val +Jacinto the afternoon following the meeting. + +"I am more than pleased, Senor. I shall take you into the wilds of +Honduras. At your service!" and he bowed low. + +"Humph! I don't just like the way our friend Val says that," observed +Tom to Ned a little later. "I'd have been better pleased if he had +said he'd guide us into the wilds and out again." + +If Tom could have seen the crafty smile on the face of the Spaniard as +the man left the hotel, the young inventor might have felt even less +confidence in the guide. + + + + +CHAPTER X + +IN THE WILDS + + +"All aboard! Step lively now! This boat makes no stops this side of +Boston!" cried Ned Newton gaily, as he got into one of the several tree +canoes provided for the transportation of the party up the Chamelecon +river, for the first stage of their journey into the wilds of Honduras. +"All aboard! This reminds me of my old camping days, Tom." + +It brought those days back, in a measure, to Tom also. For there were +a number of canoes filled with the goods of the party, while the +members themselves occupied a larger one with their personal baggage. +Strong, half-naked Indian paddlers were in charge of the canoes which +were of sturdy construction and light draft, since the river, like most +tropical streams, was of uncertain depths, choked here and there with +sand bars or tropical growths. + +Finding that Val Jacinto was regularly engaged in the business of +taking explorers and mine prospectors into the interior, Professor +Bumper had engaged the man. He seemed to be efficient. At the +promised time he had the canoes and paddlers on hand and the goods +safely stowed away while one big craft was fitted up as comfortably as +possible for the men of the party. + +As Ned remarked, it did look like a camping party, for in the canoes +were tents, cooking utensils and, most important, mosquito canopies of +heavy netting. + +The insect pests of Honduras, as in all tropical countries, are +annoying and dangerous. Therefore it was imperative to sleep under +mosquito netting. + +On the advice of Val Jacinto, who was to accompany them, the travelers +were to go up the river about fifty miles. This was as far as it would +be convenient to use the canoes, the guide told Tom and his friends, +and from there on the trip to the Copan valley would be made on the +backs of mules, which would carry most of the baggage and equipment. +The heavier portions would be transported in ox-carts. + +As Professor Bumper expected to do considerable excavating in order to +locate the buried city, or cities, as the case might be, he had to +contract for a number of Indian diggers and laborers. These could be +hired in Copan, it was said. + +The plan, therefore, was to travel by canoes during the less heated +parts of the day, and tie up at night, making camp on shore in the +net-protected tents. As for the Indians, they did not seem to mind the +bites of the insects. They sometimes made a smudge fire, Val Jacinto +had said, but that was all. + +"Well, we haven't seen anything of Beecher and his friends," remarked +the young inventor as they were about to start. + +"No, he doesn't seem to have arrived," agreed Professor Bumper. "We'll +get ahead of him, and so much the better. + +"Well, are we all ready to start?" he continued, as he looked over the +little flotilla which carried his party and his goods. + +"The sooner the better!" cried Tom, and Ned fancied his chum was +unusually eager. + +"I guess he wants to make good before Beecher gets the chance to show +Mary Nestor what he can do," thought Ned. "Tom sure is after that idol +of gold." + +"You may start, Senor Jacinto," said the professor, and the guide +called something in Indian dialect to the rowers. Lines were cast off +and the boats moved out into the stream under the influence of the +sturdy paddlers. + +"Well, this isn't so bad," observed Ned, as he made himself comfortable +in his canoe. "How about it, Tom?" + +"Oh, no. But this is only the beginning." + +A canopy had been arranged over their boat to keep off the scorching +rays of the sun. The boat containing the exploring party and Val +Jacinto took the lead, the baggage craft following. At the place where +it flowed into the bay on which Puerto Cortes was built, the stream was +wide and deep. + +The guide called something to the Indians, who increased their stroke. + +"I tell them to pull hard and that at the end of the day's journey they +will have much rest and refreshment," he translated to Professor Bumper +and the others. + +"Bless my ham sandwich, but they'll need plenty of some sort of +refreshment," said Mr. Damon, with a sigh. "I never knew it to be so +hot." + +"Don't complain yet," advised Tom, with a laugh. "The worst is yet to +come." + +It really was not unpleasant traveling, aside from the heat. And they +had expected that, coming as they had to a tropical land. But, as Tom +said, what lay before them might be worse. + +In a little while they had left behind them all signs of civilization. +The river narrowed and flowed sluggishly between the banks which were +luxuriant with tropical growth. Now and then some lonely Indian hut +could be seen, and occasionally a craft propelled by a man who was +trying to gain a meager living from the rubber forest which hemmed in +the stream on either side. + +As the canoe containing the men was paddled along, there floated down +beside it what seemed to be a big, rough log. + +"I wonder if that is mahogany," remarked Mr. Damon, reaching over to +touch it. "Mahogany is one of the most valuable woods of Honduras, and +if this is a log of that nature---- + +"Bless my watch chain!" he suddenly cried. "It's alive!" + +And the "log" was indeed so, for there was a sudden flash of white +teeth, a long red opening showed, and then came a click as an immense +alligator, having opened and closed his mouth, sank out of sight in a +swirl of water. + +Mr. Damon drew back so suddenly that he tilted the canoe, and the black +paddlers looked around wonderingly. + +"Alligator," explained Jacinto succinctly, in their tongue. + +"Ugh!" they grunted. + +"Bless my--bless my----" hesitated Mr. Damon, and for one of the very +few times in his life his language failed him. + +"Are there many of them hereabouts?" asked Ned, looking back at the +swirl left by the saurian. + +"Plenty," said the guide, with a shrug of his shoulders. He seemed to +do as much talking that way, and with his hands, as he did in speech. +"The river is full of them." + +"Dangerous?" queried Tom. + +"Don't go in swimming," was the significant advice. "Wait, I'll show +you," and he called up the canoe just behind. + +In this canoe was a quantity of provisions. There was a chunk of meat +among other things, a gristly piece, seeing which Mr. Damon had +objected to its being brought along, but the guide had said it would do +for fish bait. With a quick motion of his hand, as he sat in the +awning-covered stern with Tom, Ned and the others, Jacinto sent the +chunk of meat out into the muddy stream. + +Hardly a second later there was a rushing in the water as though a +submarine were about to come up. An ugly snout was raised, two rows of +keen teeth snapped shut as a scissors-like jaw opened, and the meat was +gone. + +"See!" was the guide's remark, and something like a cold shiver of fear +passed over the white members of the party. "This water is not made in +which to swim. Be careful!" + +"We certainly shall," agreed Tom. "They're fierce." + +"And always hungry," observed Jacinto grimly. + +"And to think that I--that I nearly had my hand on it," murmured Mr. +Damon. "Ugh! Bless my eyeglasses!" + +"The alligator nearly had your hand," said the guide. "They can turn +in the water like a flash, wherefore it is not wise to pat one on the +tail lest it present its mouth instead." + +They paddled on up the river, the dusky Indians now and then breaking +out into a chant that seemed to give their muscles new energy. The +song, if song it was, passed from one boat to the other, and as the +chant boomed forth the craft shot ahead more swiftly. + +They made a landing about noon, and lunch was served. Tom and his +friends were hungry in spite of the heat. Moreover, they were +experienced travelers and had learned not to fret over inconveniences +and discomforts. The Indians ate by themselves, two acting as servants +to Jacinto and the professor's party. + +As is usual in traveling in the tropics, a halt was made during the +heated middle of the day. Then, as the afternoon shadows were waning, +the party again took to the canoes and paddled on up the river. + +"Do you know of a good place to stop during the night?" asked Professor +Bumper of Jacinto. + +"Oh, yes; a most excellent place. It is where I always bring +scientific parties I am guiding. You may rely on me." + +It was within an hour of dusk--none too much time to allow in which to +pitch camp in the tropics, where night follows day suddenly--when a +halt was called, as a turn of the river showed a little clearing on the +edge of the forest-bound river. + +"We stay here for the night," said Jacinto. "It is a good place." + +"It looks picturesque enough," observed Mr. Damon. "But it is rather +wild." + +"We are a good distance from a settlement," agreed the guide. "But one +can not explore--and find treasure in cities," and he shrugged his +shoulders again. + +"Find treasure? What do you mean?" asked Tom quickly. "Do you think +that we----?" + +"Pardon, Senor," replied Jacinto softly. "I meant no offense. I think +that all you scientific parties will take treasure if you can find it." + +"We are looking for traces of the old Honduras civilization," put in +Professor Bumper. + +"And doubtless you will find it," was the somewhat too courteous answer +of the guide. "Make camp quickly!" he called to the Indians in their +tongue. "You must soon get under the nets or you will be eaten alive!" +he told Tom. "There are many mosquitoes here." + +The tents were set up, smudge fires built and supper quickly prepared. +Dusk fell rapidly, and as Tom and Ned walked a little way down toward +the river before turning in under the mosquito canopies, the young +financial man said: + +"Sort of lonesome and gloomy, isn't it, Tom?" + +"Yes. But you didn't expect to find a moving picture show in the wilds +of Honduras, did you?" + +"No, and yet-- Look out! What's that?" suddenly cried Ned, as a great +soft, black shadow seemed to sweep out of a clump of trees toward him. +Involuntarily he clutched Tom's arm and pointed, his face showing fear +in the fast-gathering darkness. + + + + +CHAPTER XI + +THE VAMPIRES + + +Tom Swift looked deliberately around. It was characteristic of him +that, though by nature he was prompt in action, he never acted so +hurriedly as to obscure his judgment. So, though now Ned showed a +trace of strange excitement, Tom was cool. + +"What is it?" asked the young inventor. "What's the matter? What did +you think you saw, Ned; another alligator?" + +"Alligator? Nonsense! Up on shore? I saw a black shadow, and I didn't +THINK I saw it, either. I really did." + +Tom laughed quietly. + +"A shadow!" he exclaimed. "Since when were you afraid of shadows, Ned?" + +"I'm not afraid of ordinary shadows," answered Ned, and in his voice +there was an uncertain tone. "I'm not afraid of my shadow or yours, +Tom, or anybody's that I can see. But this wasn't any human shadow. +It was as if a great big blob of wet darkness had been waved over your +head." + +"That's a queer explanation," Tom said in a low voice. "A great big +blob of wet darkness!" + +"But that just describes it," went on Ned, looking up and around. "It +was just as if you were in some dark room, and some one waved a wet +velvet cloak over your head--spooky like! It didn't make a sound, but +there was a smell as if a den of some wild beast was near here. I +remember that odor from the time we went hunting with your electric +rifle in the jungle, and got near the den in the rocks where the tigers +lived." + +"Well, there is a wild beast smell all around here," admitted Tom, +sniffing the air. "It's the alligators in the river I guess. You know +they have an odor of musk." + +"Do you mean to say you didn't feel that shadow flying over us just +now?" asked Ned. + +"Well, I felt something sail through the air, but I took it to be a big +bird. I didn't pay much attention. To tell you the truth I was +thinking about Beecher--wondering when he would get here," added Tom +quickly as if to forestall any question as to whether or not his +thoughts had to do with Beecher in connection with Tom's affair of the +heart. + +"Well it wasn't a bird--at least not a regular bird," said Ned in a low +voice, as once more he looked at the dark and gloomy jungle that +stretched back from the river and behind the little clearing where the +camp had been made. + +"Come on!" cried Tom, in what he tried to make a cheerful voice. "This +is getting on your nerves, Ned, and I didn't know you had any. Let's +go back and turn in. I'm dog-tired and the mosquitoes are beginning to +find that we're here. Let's get under the nets. Then the black +shadows won't get you." + +Not at all unwilling to leave so gloomy a scene, Ned, after a brief +glance up and down the dark river, followed his chum. They found +Professor Bumper and Mr. Damon in their tent, a separate one having +been set up for the two men adjoining that of the youths. + +"Bless my fountain pen!" exclaimed Mr. Damon, as he caught sight of Tom +and Ned in the flickering light of the smudge fire between the two +canvas shelters. "We were just wondering what had become of you." + +"We were chasing shadows!" laughed Tom. "At least Ned was. But you +look cozy enough in there." + +It did, indeed, look cheerful in contrast to the damp and dark jungle +all about. Professor Bumper, being an experienced traveler, knew how +to provide for such comforts as were possible. Folding cots had been +opened for himself, Mr. Damon and the guide to sleep on, others, +similar, being set up in the tent where Tom and Ned were to sleep. In +the middle of the tent the professor had made a table of his own and +Mr. Damon's suit cases, and on this placed a small dry battery electric +light. He was making some notes, doubtless for a future book. Jacinto +was going about the camp, seeing that the Indians were at their duties, +though most of them had gone directly to sleep after supper. + +"Better get inside and under the nets," advised Professor Bumper to Tom +and Ned. "The mosquitoes here are the worst I ever saw." + +"We're beginning to believe that," returned Ned, who was unusually +quiet. "Come on, Tom. I can't stand it any longer. I'm itching in a +dozen places now from their bites." + +As Tom and Ned had no wish for a light, which would be sure to attract +insects, they entered their tent in the dark, and were soon stretched +out in comparative comfort. Tom was just on the edge of a deep sleep +when he heard Ned murmur: + +"I can't understand it!" + +"What's that?" asked the young inventor. + +"I say I can't understand it." + +"Understand what?" + +"That shadow. It was real and yet----" + +"Oh, go to sleep!" advised Tom, and, turning over, he was soon +breathing heavily and regularly, indicating that he, at least, had +taken his own advice. + +Ned, too, finally succumbed to the overpowering weariness of the first +day of travel, and he, too, slept, though it was an uneasy slumber, +disturbed by a feeling as though some one were holding a heavy black +quilt over his head, preventing him from breathing. + +The feeling, sensation or dream--whatever it was--perhaps a +nightmare--became at last so real to Ned that he struggled himself into +wakefulness. With an effort he sat up, uttering an inarticulate cry. +To his surprise he was answered. Some one asked: + +"What is the matter?" + +"Who--who are you?" asked Ned quickly, trying to peer through the +darkness. + +"This is Jacinto--your guide," was the soft answer. "I was walking +about camp and, hearing you murmuring, I came to your tent. Is +anything wrong?" + +For a moment Ned did not answer. He listened and could tell by the +continued heavy and regular breathing of his chum that Tom was still +asleep. + +"Are you in our tent?" asked Ned, at length: + +"Yes," answered Jacinto. "I came in to see what was the matter with +you. Are you ill?" + +"No, of course not," said Ned, a bit shortly. "I--I had a bad dream, +that was all. All right now." + +"For that I am glad. Try to get all the sleep you can, for we must +start early to avoid the heat of the day," and there was the sound of +the guide leaving and arranging the folds of the mosquito net behind +him to keep out the night-flying insects. + +Once more Ned composed himself to sleep, and this time successfully, +for he did not have any more unpleasant dreams. The quiet of the +jungle settled down over the camp, at least the comparative quiet of +the jungle, for there were always noises of some sort going on, from +the fall of some rotten tree limb to the scream or growl of a wild +beast, while, now and again, from the river came the pig-like grunts of +the alligators. + +It was about two o'clock in the morning, as they ascertained later, +when the whole camp--white travelers and all--was suddenly awakened by +a wild scream. It seemed to come from one of the natives, who called +out a certain word ever and over again. To Tom and Ned it sounded like: + +"Oshtoo! Oshtoo! Oshtoo!" + +"What's the matter?" cried Professor Bumper. + +"The vampires!" came the answering voice of Jacinto. "One of the +Indians has been attacked by a big vampire bat! Look out, every one! +It may be a raid by the dangerous creatures! Be careful!" + +Notwithstanding this warning Ned stuck his head out of the tent. The +same instant he was aware of a dark enfolding shadow passing over him, +and, with a shudder of fear, he jumped back. + + + + +CHAPTER XII + +A FALSE FRIEND + + +"What is it? What's the matter?" cried Tom springing from his cot and +hastening to the side of his chum in the tent. "What has happened, +Ned?" + +"I don't know, but Jacinto is yelling something about vampires!" + +"Vampires?" + +"Yes. Big bats. And he's warning us to be careful. I stuck my head +out just now and I felt that same sort of shadow I felt this evening +when we were down near the river." + +"Nonsense!" + +"I tell you I did!" + +At that instant Tom flashed a pocket electric lamp he had taken from +beneath his pillow and in the gleam of it he and Ned saw fluttering +about the tent some dark, shadow-like form, at the sight of which Tom's +chum cried: + +"There it is! That's the shadow! Look out!" and he held up his hands +instinctively to shield his face. + +"Shadow!" yelled Tom, unconsciously adding to the din that seemed to +pervade every part of the camp. "That isn't a shadow. It's substance. +It's a monster bat, and here goes for a strike at it!" + +He caught up his camera tripod which was near his cot, and made a swing +with it at the creature that had flown into the tent through an opening +it had made for itself. + +"Look out!" yelled Ned. "If it's a vampire it'll----" + +"It won't do anything to me!" shouted Tom, as he struck the creature, +knocking it into the corner of the tent with a thud that told it must +be completely stunned, if not killed. "But what's it all about, +anyhow?" Tom asked. "What's the row?" + +From without the tent came the Indian cries of: + +"Oshtoo! Oshtoo!" + +Mingled with them were calls of Jacinto, partly in Spanish, partly in +the Indian tongue and partly in English. + +"It is a raid by vampire bats!" was all Tom and Ned could distinguish. +"We shall have to light fires to keep them away, if we can succeed. +Every one grab up a club and strike hard!" + +"Come on!" cried Tom, getting on some clothes by the light of his +gleaming electric light which he had set on his cot. + +"You're not going out there, are you?" asked Ned. + +"I certainly am! If there's a fight I want to be in it, bats or +anything else. Here, you have a light like mine. Flash it on, and +hang it somewhere on yourself. Then get a club and come on. The +lights will blind the bats, and we can see to hit 'em!" + +Tom's plan seemed to be a good one. His lamp and Ned's had small hooks +on them, so they could be carried in the upper coat pocket, showing a +gleam of light and leaving the hands free for use. + +Out of the tents rushed the young men to find Professor Bumper and Mr. +Damon before them. The two men had clubs and were striking about in +the half darkness, for now the Indians had set several fires aglow. +And in the gleams, constantly growing brighter as more fuel was piled +on, the young inventor and his chum saw a weird sight. + +Circling and wheeling about in the camp clearing were many of the black +shadowy forms that had caused Ned such alarm. Great bats they were, +and a dangerous species, if Jacinto was to be believed. + +The uncanny creatures flew in and out among the trees and tents, now +swooping low near the Indians or the travelers. At such times clubs +would be used, often with the effect of killing or stunning the flying +pests. For a time it seemed as if the bats would fairly overwhelm the +camp, so many of them were there. But the increasing lights, and the +attacks made by the Indians and the white travelers turned the tide of +battle, and, with silent flappings of their soft, velvety wings, the +bats flew back to the jungle whence they had emerged. + +"We are safe--for the present!" exclaimed Jacinto with a sigh of relief. + +"Do you think they will come back?" asked Tom. + +"They may--there is no telling." + +"Bless my speedometer!" cried Mr. Damon, "If those beasts or +birds--whatever they are--come back I'll go and hide in the river and +take my chances with the alligators!" + +"The alligators aren't much worse," asserted Jacinto with a visible +shiver. "These vampire bats sometimes depopulate a whole village." + +"Bless my shoe laces!" cried Mr. Damon. "You don't mean to say that +the creatures can eat up a whole village?" + +"Not quite. Though they might if they got the chance," was the answer +of the Spanish guide. "These vampire bats fly from place to place in +great swarms, and they are so large and blood-thirsty that a few of +them can kill a horse or an ox in a short time by sucking its blood. +So when the villagers find they are visited by a colony of these +vampires they get out, taking their live stock with them, and stay in +caves or in densely wooded places until the bats fly on. Then the +villagers come back. + +"It was only a small colony that visited us tonight or we would have +had more trouble. I do not think this lot will come back. We have +killed too many of them," and he looked about on the ground where many +of the uncanny creatures were still twitching in the death struggle. + +"Come back again!" cried Mr. Damon. "Bless my skin! I hope not! I've +had enough of bats--and mosquitoes," he added, as he slapped at his +face and neck. + +Indeed the party of whites were set upon by the night insects to such +an extent that it was necessary to hurry back to the protection of the +nets. + +Tom and Ned kicked outside the bat the former had killed in their tent, +and then both went back to their cots. But it was some little time +before they fell asleep. And they did not have much time to rest, for +an early start must be made to avoid the terrible heat of the middle of +the day. + +"Whew!" whistled Ned, as he and Tom arose in the gray dawn of the +morning when Jacinto announced the breakfast which the Indian cook had +prepared. "That was some night! If this is a sample of the wilds of +Honduras, give me the tameness of Shopton." + +"Oh, we've gone through with worse than this," laughed Tom. "It's all +in the day's work. We've only got started. I guess we're a bit soft, +Ned, though we had hard enough work in that tunnel-digging." + +After breakfast, while the Indians were making ready the canoes, +Professor Bumper, who, in a previous visit to Central America, had +become interested in the subject, made a brief examination of some of +the dead bats. They were exceptionally large, some almost as big as +hawks, and were of the sub-family _Desmodidae_, the scientist said. + +"This is a true blood-sucking bat," went on the professor. "This," and +he pointed to the nose-leaves, "is the sucking apparatus. The bat +makes an opening in the skin with its sharp teeth and proceeds to +extract the blood. I can well believe two or three of them, attacking +a steer or mule at once, could soon weaken it so the animal would die." + +"And a man, too?" asked Ned. + +"Well a man has hands with which to use weapons, but a helpless +quadruped has not. Though if a sufficient number of these bats +attacked a man at the same time, he would have small chance to escape +alive. Their bites, too, may be poisonous for all I know." + +The Indians seemed glad to leave the "place of the bats," as they +called the camp site. Jacinto explained that the Indians believed a +vampire could kill them while they slept, and they were very much +afraid of the blood-sucking bats. There were many other species in the +tropics, Professor Bumper explained, most of which lived on fruit or on +insects they caught. The blood-sucking bats were comparatively few, +and the migratory sort fewer still. + +"Well, we're on our way once more," remarked Tom as again they were in +the canoes being paddled up the river. "How much longer does your +water trip take, Professor?" + +"I hardly know," and Professor Bumper looked to Jacinto to answer. + +"We go two more days in the canoes," the guide answered, "and then we +shall find the mules waiting for us at a place called Hidjio. From +then on we travel by land until--well until you get to the place where +you are going. + +"I suppose you know where it is?" he added, nodding toward the +professor. "I am leaving that part to you." + +"Oh, I have a map, showing where I want to begin some excavations," was +the answer. "We must first go to Copan and see what arrangements we +can make for laborers. After that--well, we shall trust to luck for +what we shall find." + +"There are said to be many curious things," went on Jacinto, speaking +as though he had no interest. "You have mentioned buried cities. Have +you thought what may be in them--great heathen temples, idols, perhaps?" + +For a moment none of the professor's companions spoke. It was as +though Jacinto had tried to get some information. Finally the +scientist said: + +"Oh, yes, we may find an idol. I understand the ancient people, who +were here long before the Spaniards came, worshiped idols. But we +shall take whatever antiquities we find." + +"Huh!" grunted Jacinto, and then he called to the paddlers to increase +their strokes. + +The journey up the river was not very eventful. Many alligators were +seen, and Tom and Ned shot several with the electric rifle. Toward the +close of the third day's travel there was a cry from one of the rear +boats, and an alarm of a man having fallen overboard was given. + +Tom turned in time to see the poor fellow's struggles, and at the same +time there was a swirl in the water and a black object shot forward. + +"An alligator is after him!" yelled Ned. + +"I see," observed Tom calmly. "Hand me the rifle, Ned." + +Tom took quick aim and pulled the trigger. The explosive electric +bullet went true to its mark, and the great animal turned over in a +death struggle. But the river was filled with them, and no sooner had +the one nearest the unfortunate Indian been disposed of than another +made a dash for the man. + +There was a wild scream of agony and then a dark arm shot up above the +red foam. The waters seethed and bubbled as the alligators fought +under it for possession of the paddler. Tom fired bullet after bullet +from his wonderful rifle into the spot, but though he killed some of +the alligators this did not save the man's life. His body was not seen +again, though search was made for it. + +The accident cast a little damper over the party, and there was a +feeling of gloom among the Indians. Professor Bumper announced that he +would see to it that the man's family did not want, and this seemed to +give general satisfaction, especially to a brother who was with the +party. + +Aside from being caught in a drenching storm and one or two minor +accidents, nothing else of moment marked the remainder of the river +journey, and at the end of the third day the canoes pulled to shore and +a night camp was made. + +"But where are the mules we are to use in traveling to-morrow?" asked +the professor of Jacinto. + +"In the next village. We shall march there in the morning. No use to +go there at night when all is dark." + +"I suppose that is so." + +The Indians made camp as usual, the goods being brought from the canoes +and piled up near the tents. Then night settled down. + +"Hello!" cried Tom, awakening the next morning to find the sun +streaming into his tent. "We must have overslept, Ned. We were to +start before old Sol got in his heavy work, but we haven't had +breakfast yet." + +"I didn't hear any one call us," remarked Ned. + +"Nor I. Wonder if we're the only lazy birds." He looked from the tent +in time to see Mr. Damon and the professor emerging. Then Tom noticed +something queer. The canoes were not on the river bank. There was not +an Indian in sight, and no evidence of Jacinto. + +"What's the matter?" asked the young inventor. "Have the others gone +on ahead?" + +"I rather think they've gone back," was the professor's dry comment. + +"Gone back?" + +"Yes. The Indians seem to have deserted us at the ending of this stage +of our journey." + +"Bless my time-table!" cried Mr. Damon. "You don't say so! What does +it mean? What has becomes of our friend Jacinto?" + +"I'm afraid he was rather a false friend," was the professor's answer. +"This is the note he left. He has gone and taken the canoes and all +the Indians with him," and he held out a paper on which was some +scribbled writing. + + + + +CHAPTER XIII + +FORWARD AGAIN + + +"What does it all mean?" asked Tom, seeing that the note was written in +Spanish, a tongue which he could speak slightly but read indifferently. + +"This is some of Beecher's work," was Professor Bumper's grim comment. +"It seems that Jacinto was in his pay." + +"In his pay!" cried Mr. Damon. "Do you mean that Beecher deliberately +hired Jacinto to betray us?" + +"Well, no. Not that exactly. Here, I'll translate this note for you," +and the professor proceeded to read: + + +"Senors: I greatly regret the step I have to take, but I am a +gentleman, and, having given my word, I must keep it. No harm shall +come to you, I swear it on my honor!" + + +"Queer idea of honor he has!" commented Tom, grimly. + +Professor Bumper read on: + + +"Know then, that before I engaged myself to you I had been engaged by +Professor Beecher through a friend to guide him into the Copan valley, +where he wants to make some explorations, for what I know not, save +maybe that it is for gold. I agreed, in case any rival expeditions +came to lead them astray if I could. + +"So, knowing from what you said that you were going to this place, I +engaged myself to you, planning to do what I have done. I greatly +regret it, as I have come to like you, but I had given my promise to +Professor Beecher's friend, that I would first lead him to the Copan +valley, and would keep others away until he had had a chance to do his +exploration. + +"So I have led you to this wilderness. It is far from the Copan, but +you are near an Indian village, and you will be able to get help in a +week or so. In the meanwhile you will not starve, as you have plenty +of supplies. If you will travel northeast you will come again to +Puerto Cortes in due season. As for the money I had from you, I +deposit it to your credit, Professor Beecher having made me an +allowance for steering rival parties on the wrong trail. So I lose +nothing, and I save my honor. + +"I write this note as I am leaving in the night with the Indians. I +put some harmless sedative in your tea that you might sleep soundly, +and not awaken until we were well on our way. Do not try to follow us, +as the river will carry us swiftly away. And, let me add, there is no +personal animosity on the part of Professor Beecher against you. I +should have done to any rival expedition the same as I have done with +you. + +JACINTO." + + +For a moment there was silence, and then Tom Swift burst out with: + +"Well, of all the mean, contemptible tricks of a human skunk this is +the limit!" + +"Bless my hairbrush, but he is a scoundrel!" ejaculated Mr. Damon, with +great warmth. + +"I'd like to start after him the biggest alligator in the river," was +Ned's comment. + +Professor Bumper said nothing for several seconds. There was a strange +look on his face, and then he laughed shortly, as though the humor of +the situation appealed to him. + +"Professor Beecher has more gumption than I gave him credit for," he +said. "It was a clever trick!" + +"Trick!" cried Tom. + +"Yes. I can't exactly agree that it was the right thing to do, but he, +or some friend acting for him, seems to have taken precautions that we +are not to suffer or lose money. Beecher goes on the theory that all +is fair in love and war, I suppose, and he may call this a sort of +scientific war." + +Ned wondered, as he looked at his chum, how much love there was in it. +Clearly Beecher was determined to get that idol of gold. + +"Well, it can't be helped, and we must make the best of it," said Tom, +after a pause. + +"True. But now, boys, let's have breakfast, and then we'll make what +goods we can't take with us as snug as possible, until we can send the +mule drivers after them," went on Professor Bumper. + +"Send the mule drivers after them?" questioned Ned. "What do you mean +to do?" + +"Do? Why keep on, of course. You don't suppose I'm going to let a +little thing like this stand between me and the discovery of Kurzon and +the idol of gold, do you?" + +"But," began Mr. Damon, "I don't see how--" + +"Oh, we'll find a way," interrupted Tom. "It isn't the first time I've +been pretty well stranded on an expedition of this kind, and sometimes +from the same cause--the actions of a rival. Now we'll turn the tables +on the other fellows and see how they like it. The professor's +right--let's have breakfast. Jacinto seems to have told the truth. +Nothing of ours is missing." + +Tom and Ned got the meal, and then a consultation was held as to what +was best to be done. + +"We can't go on any further by water, that's sure," said Tom. "In the +first place the river is too shallow, and secondly we have no canoes. +So the only thing is to go on foot through the jungle." + +"But how can we, and carry all this stuff?" asked Ned. + +"We needn't carry it!" cried Professor Bumper. "We'll leave it here, +where it will be safe enough, and tramp on to the nearest Indian +village. There we'll hire bearers to take our stuff on until we can +get mules. I'm not going to turn back!" + +"Good!" cried Mr. Damon. "Bless my rubber boots! but that's what I +say--keep on!" + +"Oh, no! we'll never turn back," agreed Tom. + +"But how can we manage it?" asked Ned. + +"We've just got to! And when you have to do a thing, it's a whole lot +easier to do than if you just feel as though you ought to. So, lively +is the word!" cried Tom, in answer. + +"We'll pack up what we can carry and leave the rest," added the +scientist. + +Being an experienced traveler Professor Bumper had arranged his baggage +so that it could be carried by porters if necessary. Everything could +be put into small packages, including the tents and food supply. + +"There are four of us," remarked Tom, "and if we can not pack enough +along with us to enable us to get to the nearest village, we had better +go back to civilization. I'm not afraid to try." + +"Nor I!" cried Mr. Damon. + +The baggage, stores and supplies that were to be left behind were made +as snug as possible, and so piled up that wild beasts could do the +least harm. Then a pack was made up for each one to carry. + +They would take weapons, of course, Tom Swift's electric rifle being +the one he choose for himself. They expected to be able to shoot game +on their way, and this would provide them food in addition to the +concentrated supply they carried. Small tents, in sections, were +carried, there being two, one for Tom and Ned and one for Mr. Damon and +the professor. + +As far as could be learned from a casual inspection, Jacinto and his +deserting Indians had taken back with them only a small quantity of +food. They were traveling light and down stream, and could reach the +town much more quickly than they had come away from it. + +"That Beecher certainly was slick," commented Professor Bumper when +they were ready to start. "He must have known about what time I would +arrive, and he had Jacinto waiting for us. I thought it was too good +to be true, to get an experienced guide like him so easily. But it was +all planned, and I was so engrossed in thinking of the ancient +treasures I hope to find that I never thought of a possible trick. +Well, let's start!" and he led the way into the jungle, carrying his +heavy pack as lightly as did Tom. + +Professor Bumper had a general idea in which direction lay a number of +native villages, and it was determined to head for them, blazing a path +through the wilderness, so that the Indians could follow it back to the +goods left behind. + +It was with rather heavy hearts that the party set off, but Tom's +spirits could not long stay clouded, and the scientist was so +good-natured about the affair and seemed so eager to do the utmost to +render Beecher's trick void, that the others fell into a lighter mood, +and went on more cheerfully, though the way was rough and the packs +heavy. + +They stopped at noon under a bower they made of palms, and, spreading +the nets over them, got a little rest after a lunch. Then, when the +sun was less hot, they started off again. + +"Forward is the word!" cried Ned cheerfully. "Forward!"' + +They had not gone more than an hour on the second stage of their tramp +when Tom, who was in the lead, following the direction laid out by the +compass, suddenly stopped, and reached around for his electric rifle, +which he was carrying at his back. + +"What is it?" asked Ned in a whisper. + +"I don't know, but it's some big animal there in the bushes," was Tom's +low-voiced answer. "I'm ready for it." + +The rustling increased, and a form could be seen indistinctly. Tom +aimed the deadly gun and stood ready to pull the trigger. + +Ned, who had a side view into the underbrush, gave a sudden cry. + +"Don't shoot, Tom!" he yelled. "It's a man!" + + + + +CHAPTER XIV + +A NEW GUIDE + + +In spite of Ned Newton's cry, Tom's finger pressed the switch-trigger +of the electric rifle, for previous experience had taught him that it +was sometimes the best thing to awe the natives in out-of-the-way +corners of the earth. But the young inventor quickly elevated the +muzzle, and the deadly missile went hissing through the air over the +head of a native Indian who, at that moment, stepped from the bush. + +The man, startled and alarmed, shrank back and was about to run into +the jungle whence he had emerged. Small wonder if he had, considering +the reception he so unwittingly met with. But Tom, aware of the +necessity for making inquiries of one who knew that part of the jungle, +quickly called to him. + +"Hold on!" he shouted. "Wait a minute. I didn't mean that. I thought +at first you were a tapir or a tiger. No harm intended. I say, +Professor," Tom called back to the savant, "you'd better speak to him +in his lingo, I can't manage it. He may be useful in guiding us to +that Indian village Jacinto told us of." + +This Professor Bumper did, being able to make himself understood in the +queer part-Spanish dialect used by the native Hondurians, though he +could not, of course, speak it as fluently as had Jacinto. + +Professor Bumper had made only a few remarks to the man who had so +unexpectedly appeared out of the jungle when the scientist gave an +exclamation of surprise at some of the answers made. + +"Bless my moving picture!" cried Mr. Damon. + +"What's the matter now? Is anything wrong? Does he refuse to help us?" + +"No, it isn't that," was the answer. "In fact he came here to help us. +Tom, this is the brother of the Indian who fell overboard and who was +eaten by the alligators. He says you were very kind to try to save his +brother with your rifle, and for that reason he has come back to help +us." + +"Come back?" queried Tom. + +"Yes, he went off with the rest of the Indians when Jacinto deserted +us, but he could not stand being a traitor, after you had tried to save +his brother's life. These Indians are queer people. They don't show +much emotion, but they have deep feelings. This one says he will +devote himself to your service from now on. I believe we can count on +him. He is deeply grateful to you, Tom." + +"I'm glad of that for all our sakes. But what does he say about +Jacinto?" + +The professor asked some more questions, receiving answers, and then +translated them. + +"This Indian, whose name is Tolpec, says Jacinto is a fraud," exclaimed +Professor Bumper. "He made all the Indians leave us in the night, +though many of them were willing to stay and fill the contract they had +made. But Jacinto would not let them, making them desert. Tolpec went +away with the others, but because of what Tom had done he planned to +come back at the first chance and be our guide. Accordingly he jumped +ashore from one of the canoes, and made his way to our camp. He got +there, found it deserted and followed us, coming up just now." + +"Well I'm glad I didn't frighten him off with my gun," remarked Tom +grimly. "So he agrees with us that Jacinto is a scoundrel, does he? I +guess he might as well classify Professor Beecher in the same way." + +"I am not quite so sure of that," said Professor Bumper slowly. "I can +not believe Beecher would play such a trick as this, though some +over-zealous friend of his might." + +"Oh, of course Beecher did it!" cried Tom. "He heard we were coming +here, figured out that we'd start ahead of him, and he wanted to +side-track us. Well, he did it all right," and Tom's voice was bitter. + +"He has only side-tracked us for a while," announced Professor Bumper +in cheerful tones. + +"What do you mean?" asked Mr. Damon. + +"I mean that this Indian comes just in the nick of time. He is well +acquainted with this part of the jungle, having lived here all his +life, and he offers to guide us to a place where we can get mules to +transport ourselves and our baggage to Copan." + +"Fine!" cried Ned. "When can we start?" + +Once more the professor and the native conversed in the strange tongue, +and then Professor Bumper announced: + +"He says it will be better for us to go back where we left our things +and camp there. He will stay with us to-night and in the morning go on +to the nearest Indian town and come back with porters and helpers." + +"I think that is good advice to follow," put in Tom, "for we do need +our goods; and if we reached the settlement ourselves, we would have to +send back for our things, with the uncertainty of getting them all." + +So it was agreed that they would make a forced march back through the +jungle to where they had been deserted by Jacinto. There they would +make camp for the night, and until such time as Tolpec could return +with a force of porters. + +It was not easy, that backward tramp through the jungle, especially as +night had fallen. But the new Indian guide could see like a cat, and +led the party along paths they never could have found by themselves. +The use of their pocket electric lights was a great help, and possibly +served to ward off the attacks of jungle beasts, for as they tramped +along they could hear stealthy sounds in the underbush on either side +of the path, as though tigers were stalking them. For there was in the +woods an animal of the leopard family, called tiger or "tigre" by the +natives, that was exceedingly fierce and dangerous. But watchfulness +prevented any accident, and eventually the party reached the place +where they had left their goods. Nothing had been disturbed, and +finally a fire was made, the tents set up and a light meal, with hot +tea served. + +"We'll get ahead of Beecher yet," said Tom. + +"You seem as anxious as Professor Bumper," observed Mr. Damon. + +"I guess I am," admitted Tom. "I want to see that idol of gold in the +possession of our party." + +The night passed without incident, and then, telling his new friends +that he would return as soon as possible with help, Tolpec, taking a +small supply of food with him, set out through the jungle again. + +As the green vines and creepers closed after him, and the explorers +were left alone with their possessions piled around them, Ned remarked: + +"After all, I wonder if it was wise to let him go?" + +"Why not?" asked Tom. + +"Well, maybe he only wanted to get us back here, and then he'll desert, +too. Maybe that's what he's done now, making us lose two or three days +by inducing us to return, waiting for what will never happen--his +return with other natives." + +A silence followed Ned's intimation. + + + + +CHAPTER XV + +IN THE COILS + + +"Ned, do you really think Tolpec is going to desert us?" asked Tom. + +"Well, I don't know," was the slowly given reply. "It's a possibility, +isn't it?" + +"Yes, it is," broke in Professor Bumper. "But what if it is? We might +as well trust him, and if he proves true, as I believe he will, we'll +be so much better off. If he proves a traitor we'll only have lost a +few days, for if he doesn't come back we can go on again in the way we +started." + +"But that's just it!" complained Tom. "We don't want to lose any time +with that Beecher chap on our trail." + +"I am not so very much concerned about him," remarked Professor Bumper, +dryly. + +"Why not?" snapped out Mr. Damon. + +"Well, because I think he'll have just about as hard work locating the +hidden city, and finding the idol of gold, as we'll have. In other +words it will be an even thing, unless he gets too far ahead of us, or +keeps us back, and I don't believe he can do that now. + +"So I thought it best to take a chance with this Indian. He would +hardly have taken the trouble to come all the way back, and run the +risks he did, just to delay us a few days. However, we'll soon know. +Meanwhile, we'll take it easy and wait for the return of Tolpec and his +friends." + +Though none of them liked to admit it, Ned's words had caused his three +friends some anxiety, and though they busied themselves about the camp +there was an air of waiting impatiently for something to occur. And +waiting is about the hardest work there is. + +But there was nothing for it but to wait, and it might be at least a +week, Professor Bumper said, before the Indian could return with a +party of porters and mules to move their baggage. + +"Yes, Tolpec has not only to locate the settlement," Tom admitted, "but +he must persuade the natives to come back with him. He may have +trouble in that, especially if it is known that he has left Jacinto, +who, I imagine, is a power among the tribes here." + +But there were only two things left to do--wait and hope. The +travelers did both. Four days passed and there was no sign of Tolpec. +Eagerly, and not a little anxiously, they watched the jungle path along +which he had disappeared. + +"Oh, come on!" exclaimed Tom one morning, when the day seemed a bit +cooler than its predecessor. "Let's go for a hunt, or something! I'm +tired of sitting around camp." + +"Bless my watch hands! So am I!" cried Mr. Damon. "Let's all go for a +trip. It will do us good." + +"And perhaps I can get some specimens of interest," added Professor +Bumper, who, in addition to being an archaeologist, was something of a +naturalist. + +Accordingly, having made everything snug in camp, the party, Tom and +Ned equipped with electric rifles, and the professor with a butterfly +net and specimen boxes, set forth. Mr. Damon said he would carry a +stout club as his weapon. + +The jungle, as usual, was teeming with life, but as Ned and Tom did not +wish to kill wantonly they refrained from shooting until later in the +day. For once it was dead, game did not keep well in that hot climate, +and needed to be cooked almost immediately. + +"We'll try some shots on our back trip," said the young inventor. + +Professor Bumper found plenty of his own particular kind of "game" +which he caught in the net, transferring the specimens to the boxes he +carried. There were beautiful butterflies, moths and strange bugs in +the securing of which the scientist evinced great delight, though when +one beetle nipped him firmly and painfully on his thumb his involuntary +cry of pain was as real as that of any other person. + +"But I didn't let him get away," he said in triumph when he had dropped +the clawing insect into the cyanide bottle where death came painlessly. +"It is well worth a sore thumb." + +They wandered on through the jungle, taking care not to get too far +from their camp, for they did not want to lose their way, nor did they +want to be absent too long in case Tolpec and his native friends should +return. + +"Well, it's about time we shot something, I think," remarked Ned, when +they had been out about two hours. "Let's try for some of these wild +turkeys. They ought to go well roasted even if it isn't Thanksgiving." + +"I'm with you," agreed Tom. "Let's see who has the best luck. But +tone down the charge in your rifle and use a smaller projectile, or +you'll have nothing but a bunch of feathers to show for your shot. The +guns are loaded for deer." + +The change was made, and once more the two young men started off, a +little ahead of Professor Bumper and Mr. Damon. Tom and Ned had not +gone far, however, before they heard a strange cry from Mr. Damon. + +"Tom! Ned!" shouted the eccentric man, "Here's a monster after me! Come +quick!" + +"A tiger!" ejaculated Tom, as he began once more to change the charge +in his rifle to a larger one, running back, meanwhile, in the direction +of the sound of the voice. + +There were really no tigers in Honduras, the jaguar being called a +tiger by the natives, while the cougar is called a lion. The presence +of these animals, often dangerous to man, had been indicated around +camp, and it was possible that one had been bold enough to attack Mr. +Damon, not through hunger, but because of being cornered. + +"Come on, Ned!" cried Tom. "He's in some sort of trouble!" + +But when, a moment later, the young inventor burst through a fringe of +bushes and saw Mr. Damon standing in a little clearing, with upraised +club, Tom could not repress a laugh. + +"Kill it, Tom! Kill it!" begged the eccentric man. "Bless my insurance +policy, but it's a terrible beast!" + +And so it was, at first glance. For it was a giant iguana, one of the +most repulsive-looking of the lizards. Not unlike an alligator in +shape, with spikes on its head and tail, with a warty, squatty +ridge-encrusted body, a big pouch beneath its chin, and long-toed +claws, it was enough to strike terror into the heart of almost any one. +Even the smaller ones look dangerous, and this one, which was about +five feet long, looked capable of attacking a man and injuring him. As +a matter of fact the iguanas are harmless, their shape and coloring +being designed to protect them. + +"Don't be afraid, Mr. Damon," called Tom, still laughing. "It won't +hurt you!" + +"I'm not so positive of that. It won't let me pass." + +"Just take your club and poke it out of the way," the young inventor +advised. "It's only waiting to be shoved." + +"Then you do it, Tom. Bless my looking glass, but I don't want to go +near it! If my wife could see me now she'd say it served me just right." + +Mr. Damon was not a coward, but the giant iguana was not pleasant to +look at. Tom, with the butt of his rifle, gave it a gentle shove, +whereupon the creature scurried off through the brush as though glad to +make its escape unscathed. + +"I thought it was a new kind of alligator," said Mr. Damon with a sigh +of relief. + +"Where is it?" asked Professor Bumper, coming up at this juncture. "A +new species of alligator? Let me see it!" + +"It's too horrible," said Mr. Damon. "I never want to see one again. +It was worse than a vampire bat!" + +Notwithstanding this, when he heard that it was one of the largest +sized iguanas ever seen, the professor started through the jungle after +it. + +"We can't take it with us if we get it," Tom called after his friend. + +"We might take the skin," answered the professor. "I have a standing +order for such things from one of the museums I represent. I'd like to +get it. Then they are often eaten. We can have a change of diet, you +see." + +"We'd better follow him," said Tom to Ned. "We'll have to let the +turkeys go for a while. He may get into trouble. Come on." + +Off they started through the jungle, trailing after the impetuous +professor who was intent on capturing the iguana. The giant lizard's +progress could be traced by the disturbance of the leaves and +underbrush, and the professor was following as closely as possible. + +So fast did he go that Ned, Tom and Mr. Damon, following, lost sight of +him several times, and Tom finally called: + +"Wait a minute. We'll all be lost if you keep this up." + +"I'll have him in another minute," answered the professor. "I can +almost reach him now. Then---- Oh!" + +His voice ended in a scream that seemed to be one of terror. So sudden +was the change that Tom and Ned, who were together, ahead of Mr. Damon, +looked at one another in fear. + +"What has happened?" whispered Ned, pausing. + +"Don't stop to ask--come on!" shouted Tom. + +At that instant again came the voice of the savant. + +"Tom! Ned!" he gasped, rather than cried. + +"I'm caught in the coils! Quick--quick if you would save me!" + +"In the coils!" repeated Ned. "What does he mean? Can the giant +iguana----" + +Tom Swift did not stop to answer. With his electric rifle in +readiness, he leaped forward through the jungle. + + + + +CHAPTER XVI + +A MEETING IN THE JUNGLE + + +Before Tom and Ned reached the place whence Professor Bumper had +called, they heard strange noises, other than the imploring voice of +their friend. It seemed as though some great body was threshing about +in the jungle, lashing the trees, bushes and leaves about, and when the +two young men, followed by Mr. Damon, reached the scene they saw that, +in a measure, this really accounted for what they heard. + +Something like a great whip was beating about close to two trees that +grew near together. And then, when the storm of twigs, leaves and +dirt, caused by the leaping, threshing thing ceased for a moment, the +onlookers saw something that filled them with terror. + +Between the two trees, and seemingly bound to them by a great coiled +rope, spotted and banded, was the body of Professor Bumper. His arms +were pinioned to his sides and there was horror and terror on his face, +that looked imploringly at the youths from above the topmost coil of +those encircling him. + +"What is it?" cried Mr. Damon, as he ran pantingly up. "What has +caught him? Is it the giant iguana?" + +"It's a snake--a great boa!" gasped Tom. "It has him in its coils. +But it is wound around the trees, too. That alone prevents it from +crushing the professor to death. + +"Ned, be ready with your rifle. Put in the heaviest charge, and watch +your chance to fire!" + +The great, ugly head of the boa reared itself up from the coils which +it had, with the quickness of thought, thrown about the man between the +two trees. This species of snake is not poisonous, and kills its prey +by crushing it to death, making it into a pulpy mass, with scarcely a +bone left unbroken, after which it swallows its meal. The crushing +power of one of these boas, some of which reach a length of thirty +feet, with a body as large around as that of a full-grown man, is +enormous. + +"I'm going to fire!" suddenly cried Tom. He had seen his chance and he +took it. There was the faint report--the crack of the electric +rifle--and the folds of the serpent seemed to relax. + +"I see a good chance now," added Ned, who had taken the small charge +from his weapon, replacing it with a heavier one. + +His rifle was also discharged in the direction of the snake, and Tom +saw that the hit was a good one, right through the ugly head of the +reptile. + +"One other will be enough to make him loosen his coils!" cried Tom, as +he fired again, and such was the killing power of the electric bullets +that the snake, though an immense one, and one that short of +decapitation could have received many injuries without losing power, +seemed to shrivel up. + +Its folds relaxed, and the coils of the great body fell in a heap at +the roots of the two trees, between which the scientist had been +standing. + +Professor Bumper seemed to fall backward as the grip of the serpent +relaxed, but Tom, dropping his rifle, and calling to Ned to keep an eye +on the snake, leaped forward and caught his friend. + +"Are you hurt?" asked Tom, carrying the limp form over to a grassy +place. There was no answer, the savant's eyes were closed and he +breathed but faintly. + +Ned Newton fired two more electric bullets into the still writhing body +of the boa. + +"I guess he's all in," he called to Tom. + +"Bless my horseradish! And so our friend seems to be," commented Mr. +Damon. "Have you anything with which to revive him, Tom?" + +"Yes. Some ammonia. See if you can find a little water." + +"I have some in my flask." + +Tom mixed a dose of the spirits which he carried with him, and this, +forced between the pallid lips of the scientist, revived him. + +"What happened?" he asked faintly as he opened his eyes. "Oh, yes, I +remember," he added slowly. "The boa----" + +"Don't try to talk," urged Tom. "You're all right. The snake is dead, +or dying. Are you much hurt?" + +Professor Bumper appeared to be considering. He moved first one limb, +then another. He seemed to have the power over all his muscles. + +"I see how it happened," he said, as he sat up, after taking a little +more of the ammonia. "I was following the iguana, and when the big +lizard came to a stop, in a little hollow place in the ground, at the +foot of those two trees, I leaned over to slip a noose of rope about +its neck. Then I felt myself caught, as if in the hands of a giant, +and bound fast between the two trees." + +"It was the big boa that whipped itself around you, as you leaned +over," explained Tom, as Ned came up to announce that the snake was no +longer dangerous. "But when it coiled around you it also coiled around +the two trees, you, fortunately slipping between them. Had it not been +that their trunks took off some of the pressure of the coils you +wouldn't have lasted a minute." + +"Well, I was pretty badly squeezed as it was," remarked the professor. +"I hardly had breath enough left to call to you. I tried to fight off +the serpent, but it was of no use." + +"I should say not!" cried Mr. Damon. "Bless my circus ring! one might +as well try to combat an elephant! But, my dear professor, are you all +right now?" + +"I think so--yes. Though I shall be lame and stiff for a few days, I +fear. I can hardly walk." + +Professor Bumper was indeed unable to go about much for a few days +after his encounter with the great serpent. He stretched out in a +hammock under trees in the camp clearing, and with his friends waited +for the possible return of Tolpec and the porters. + +Ned and Tom made one or two short hunting trips, and on these occasions +they kept a lookout in the direction the Indian had taken when he went +away. + +"For he's sure to come back that way--if he comes at all," declared +Ned; "which I am beginning to doubt." + +"Well, he may not come," agreed Tom, who was beginning to lose some of +his first hope. "But he won't necessarily come from the same direction +he took. He may have had to go in an entirely different way to get +help. We'll hope for the best." + +A week passed. Professor Bumper was able to be about, and Tom and Ned +noticed that there was an anxious look on his face. Was he, too, +beginning to despair? + +"Well, this isn't hunting for golden idols very fast," said Mr. Damon, +the morning of the eighth day after their desertion by the faithless +Jacinto. "What do you say, Professor Bumper; ought we not to start off +on our own account?" + +"We had better if Tolpec does not return today," was the answer. + +They had eaten breakfast, had put their camp in order, and were about +to have a consultation on what was best to do, when Tom suddenly called +to Ned, who was whistling: + +"Hark!" + +Through the jungle came a faint sound of singing--not a harmonious air, +but the somewhat barbaric chant of the natives. + +"It is Tolpec coming back!" cried Mr. Damon. "Hurray! Now our troubles +are over! Bless my meal ticket! Now we can start!" + +"It may be Jacinto," suggested Ned. + +"Nonsense! you old cold-water pitcher!" cried Tom. "It's Tolpec! I can +see him! He's a good scout all right!" + +And then, walking at the head of a band of Indians who were weirdly +chanting while behind them came a train of mules, was Tolpec, a +cheerful grin covering his honest, if homely, dark face. + +"Me come back!" he exclaimed in gutteral English, using about half of +his foreign vocabulary. + +"I see you did," answered Professor Bumper in the man's own tongue. +"Glad to see you. Is everything all right?" + +"All right," was the answer. "These Indians will take you where you +want to go, and will not leave you as Jacinto did." + +"We'll start in the morning!" exclaimed the savant his own cheerful +self again, now that there was a prospect of going further into the +interior. "Tell the men to get something to eat, Tolpec. There is +plenty for all." + +"Good!" grunted the new guide and soon the hungry Indians, who had come +far, were satisfying their hunger. + +As they ate Tolpec explained to Professor Bumper, who repeated it to +the youths and Mr. Damon, that it had been necessary to go farther than +he had intended to get the porters and mules. But the Indians were a +friendly tribe, of which he was a member, and could be depended on. + +There was a feast and a sort of celebration in camp that night. Tom +and Ned shot two deer, and these formed the main part of the feast and +the Indians made merry about the fire until nearly midnight. They did +not seem to mind in the least the swarms of mosquitoes and other bugs +that flew about, attracted by the light. As for Tom Swift and his +friends, their nets protected them. + +An early start was made the following morning. Such packages of goods +and supplies as could not well be carried by the Indians in their head +straps, were loaded on the backs of the pack-mules. Tolpec explained +that on reaching the Indian village, where he had secured the porters, +they could get some ox-carts which would be a convenience in traveling +into the interior toward the Copan valley. + +The march onward for the next two days was tiresome; but the Indians +Tolpec had secured were as faithful and efficient as he had described +them, and good progress was made. + +There were a few accidents. One native fell into a swiftly running +stream as they were fording it and lost a box containing some +much-needed things. But as the man's life was saved Professor Bumper +said it made up for the other loss. Another accident did not end so +auspiciously. One of the bearers was bitten by a poisonous snake, and +though prompt measures were taken, the poison spread so rapidly that +the man died. + +In due season the Indian village was reached, where, after a day spent +in holding funeral services over the dead bearer, preparations were +made for proceeding farther. + +This time some of the bearers were left behind, and ox-carts were +substituted for them, as it was possible to carry more goods this way. + +"And now we're really off for Copan!" exclaimed Professor Bumper one +morning, when the cavalcade, led by Tolpec in the capacity of head +guide, started off. "I hope we have no more delays." + +"I hope not, either," agreed Tom. "That Beecher may be there ahead of +us." + +Weary marches fell to their portion. There were mountains to climb, +streams to ford or swim, sending the carts over on rudely made rafts. +There were storms to endure, and the eternal heat to fight. + +But finally the party emerged from the lowlands of the coast and went +up in among the hills, where though the going was harder, the climate +was better. It was not so hot and moist. + +Not wishing to attract attention in Copan itself, Professor Bumper and +his party made a detour, and finally, after much consultation with Tom +over the ancient maps, the scientist announced that he thought they +were in the vicinity of the buried city. + +"We will begin test excavations in the morning," he said. + +The party was in camp, and preparations were made for spending the +night in the forest, when from among the trees there floated to the +ears of our friends a queer Indian chant. + +"Some one is coming," said Tom to Ned. + +Almost as he spoke there filed into the clearing where the camp had +been set up, a cavalcade of white men, followed by Indians. And at the +sight of one of the white men Tom Swift uttered a cry. + +"Professor Beecher!" gasped the young inventor. + + + + +CHAPTER XVII + +THE LOST MAP + + +The on-marching company of white men, with their Indian attendants, +came to a halt on the edge of the clearing as they caught sight of the +tents already set up there. The barbaric chant of the native bearers +ceased abruptly, and there was a look of surprise shown on the face of +Professor Fenimore Beecher. For Professor Beecher it was, in the lead +of the rival expedition. + +"Bless my shoe laces!" exclaimed Mr. Damon. + +"Is it really Beecher?" asked Ned, though he knew as well as Tom that +it was the young archaeologist. + +"It certainly is!" declared Tom. "And he has nerve to follow us so +closely!" + +"Maybe he thinks we have nerve to get here ahead of him," suggested +Ned, smiling grimly. + +"Probably," agreed Tom, with a short laugh. "Well, it evidently +surprises him to find us here at all, after the mean trick he played on +us to get Jacinto to lead us into the jungle and desert us." + +"That's right," assented Ned. "Well, what's the next move?" + +There seemed to be some doubt about this on the part of both +expeditions. At the sight of Professor Beecher, Professor Bumper, who +had come out of his tent, hurriedly turned to Tom and asked him what he +thought it best to do. + +"Do!" exclaimed the eccentric Mr. Damon, not giving Tom time to reply. +"Why, stand your ground, of course! Bless my house and lot! but we're +here first! For the matter of that, I suppose the jungle is free and we +can no more object to his coming here than he can to our coming. +First come, first served, I suppose is the law of the forest." + +Meanwhile the surprise occasioned by the unexpected meeting of their +rivals seemed to have spread something like consternation among the +white members of the Beecher party. As for the natives they evidently +did not care one way or the other. + +There was a hasty consultation among the professors accompanying Mr. +Beecher, and then the latter himself advanced toward the tents of Tom +and his friends and asked: + +"How long have you been here?" + +"I don't see that we are called upon to answer that question," replied +Professor Bumper stiffly. + +"Perhaps not, and yet----" + +"There is no perhaps about it!" said Professor Bumper quickly. "I know +what your object is, as I presume you do mine. And, after what I may +term your disgraceful and unsportsmanlike conduct toward me and my +friends, I prefer not to have anything further to do with you. We must +meet as strangers hereafter." + +"Very well," and Professor Beecher's voice was as cold and +uncompromising as was his rival's. "Let it be as your wish. But I +must say I don't know what you mean by unsportsmanlike conduct." + +"An explanation would be wasted on you," said Professor Bumper stiffly. +"But in order that you may know I fully understand what you did I will +say that your efforts to thwart us through your tool Jacinto came to +nothing. We are here ahead of you." + +"Jacinto!" cried Professor Beecher in real or simulated surprise. +"Why, he was not my 'tool,' as you term it." + +"Your denial is useless in the light of his confession," asserted +Professor Bumper. + +"Confession?" + +"Now look here!" exclaimed the older professor, "I do not propose to +lower myself by quarreling with you. I know certainly what you and +your party tried to do to prevent us from getting here. But we got out +of the trap you set for us, and we are on the ground first. I +recognize your right to make explorations as well as ourselves, and I +presume you have not fallen so low that you will not recognize the +unwritten law in a case of this kind--the law which says the right of +discovery belongs to the one who first makes it." + +"I shall certainly abide by such conduct as is usual under the +circumstances," said Professor Beecher more stiffly than before. "At +the same time I must deny having set a trap. And as for Jacinto----" + +"It will be useless to discuss it further!" broke in Professor Bumper. + +"Then no more need be said," retorted the younger man. "I shall give +orders to my friends, as well as to the natives, to keep away from your +camp, and I shall expect you to do the same regarding mine." + +"I should have suggested the same thing myself," came from Tom's +friend, and the two rival scientists fairly glared at one another, the +others of both parties looking on with interest. + +Professor Bumper turned and walked defiantly back to his tent. +Professor Beecher did the same thing. Then, after a short consultation +among the white members of the latter's organization, their tents were +set up in another clearing, removed and separated by a screen of trees +and bushes from those of Tom Swift's friends. The natives of the +Beecher party also withdrew a little way from those of Professor +Bumper's organization, and then preparations for spending the night in +the jungle went on in the rival headquarters. + +"Well, he certainly had nerve, to deny, practically, that he had set +Jacinto up to do what he did," commented Tom. + +"I should say so!" agreed Ned. + +"How do you imagine he got here nearly as soon as we did, when he did +not start until later?" asked Mr. Damon. + +"He did not have the unfortunate experience of being deserted in the +jungle," replied Tom. "He probably had Jacinto, or some of that +unprincipled scoundrel's friends, show him a short route to Copan and +he came on from there." + +"Well, I did hope we might have the ground to ourselves, at least for +the preliminary explorations and excavations. But it is not to be. My +rival is here," sighed Professor Bumper. + +"Don't let that discourage you!" exclaimed Tom. "We can fight all the +better now the foe is in the open, and we know where he is." + +"Yes, Tom Swift, that is true," agreed the scientist. "I am not going +to give up, but I shall have to change my plans a little. Perhaps you +will come into the tent with me," and he nodded to Tom and Ned. "I +want to talk over certain matters with you and Mr. Damon." + +"Pleased to," assented the young inventor, and his financial secretary +nodded. + +A little later, supper having been eaten, the camp made shipshape and +the natives settled down, Tom, Ned, Mr. Damon and Professor Bumper +assembled in the tent of the scientist, where a dry battery lamp gave +sufficient illumination to show a number of maps and papers scattered +over an improvised table. + +"Now, gentlemen," said the professor, "I have called you here to go +over my plans more in detail than I have hitherto done, now we are on +the ground. You know in a general way what I hope to accomplish, but +the time has come when I must be specific. + +"Aside from being on the spot, below which, or below the vicinity +where, I believe, lies the lost city of Kurzon and, I hope, the idol of +gold, a situation has arisen--an unexpected situation, I may say--which +calls for different action from that I had counted on. + +"I refer to the presence of my rival, Professor Beecher. I will not +dwell now on what he has done. It is better to consider what he may +do." + +"That's right," agreed Ned. "He may get up in the night, dig up this +city and skip with that golden image before we know it." + +"Hardly," grinned Tom. + +"No," said Professor Bumper. "Excavating buried cities in the jungle +of Honduras is not as simple as that. There is much work to be done. +But accidents may happen, and in case one should occur to me, and I be +unable to prosecute the search, I want one of you to do it. For that +reason I am going to show you the maps and ancient documents and point +out to you where I believe the lost city lies. Now, if you will give +me your attention, I'll proceed." + +The professor went over in detail the story of how he had found the old +documents relating to the lost city of Kurzon, and of how, after much +labor and research, he had located the city in the Copan valley. The +great idol of gold was one of the chief possessions of Kurzon, and it +was often referred to in the old papers; copies and translations of +which the professor had with him. + +"But this is the most valuable of all," he said, as he opened an +oiled-silk packet. "And before I show it to you, suppose you two young +men take a look outside the tent." + +"What for?" asked Mr. Damon. + +"To make sure that no emissaries from the Beecher crowd are sneaking +around to overhear what we say," was the somewhat bitter answer of the +scientist. "I do not trust him, in spite of his attempted denial." + +Tom and Ned took a quick but thorough observation outside the tent. +The blackness of the jungle night was in strange contrast to the light +they had just left. + +"Doesn't seem to be any one around here," remarked Ned, after waiting a +minute or two. + +"No. All's quiet along the Potomac. Those Beecher natives are having +some sort of a song-fest, though." + +In the distance, and from the direction of their rivals' camp, came the +weird chant. + +"Well, as long as they stay there we'll be all right," said Tom. "Come +on in. I'm anxious to hear what the professor has to say." + +"Everything's quiet," reported Ned. + +"Then give me your attention," begged the scientist. + +Carefully, as though about to exhibit some, precious jewel, he loosened +the oiled-silk wrappings and showed a large map, on thin but tough +paper. + +"This is drawn from the old charts," the professor explained. "I +worked on it many months, and it is the only copy in the world. If it +were to be destroyed I should have to go all the way back to New York +to make another copy. I have the original there in a safe deposit +vault." + +"Wouldn't it have been wise to make two copies?" asked Tom. + +"It would have only increased the risk. With one copy, and that +constantly in my possession, I can be sure of my ground. Otherwise +not. That is why I am so careful of this. Now I will show you why I +believe we are about over the ancient city of Kurzon." + +"Over it!" cried Mr. Damon. "Bless my gunpowder! What do you mean?" +and he looked down at the earthen floor of the tent as though expecting +it to open and swallow him. + +"I mean that the city, like many others of Central and South America, +is buried below the refuse of centuries," went on the professor. "Very +soon, if we are fortunate, we shall be looking on the civilization of +hundreds of years ago--how long no one knows. + +"Considerable excavation has been done in Central America," went on +Professor Bumper, "and certain ruins have been brought to light. Near +us are those of Copan, while toward the frontier are those of Quirigua, +which are even better preserved than the former. We may visit them if +we have time. But I have reason to believe that in this section of +Copan is a large city, the existence of which has not been made certain +of by any one save myself--and, perhaps, Professor Beecher. + +"Certainly no part of it has seen the light of day for many centuries. +It shall be our pleasure to uncover it, if possible, and secure the +idol of gold." + +"How long ago do you think the city was buried?" asked Tom. + +"It would be hard to say. From the carvings and hieroglyphics I have +studied it would seem that the Mayan civilization lasted about five +hundred years, and that it began perhaps in the year A. D. five +hundred." + +"That would mean," said Mr. Damon, "that the ancient cities were in +ruins, buried, perhaps, long before Columbus discovered the new world." + +"Yes," assented the professor. "Probably Kurzon, which we now seek, +was buried deep for nearly five hundred years before Columbus landed at +San Salvadore. The specimens of writing and architecture heretofore +disclosed indicate that. But, as a matter of fact, it is very hard to +decipher the Mayan pictographs. So far, little but the ability to read +their calendars and numerical system is possessed by us, though we are +gradually making headway. + +"Now this is the map of the district, and by the markings you can see +where I hope to find what I seek. We shall begin digging here," and he +made a small mark with a pencil on the map. + +"Of course," the professor explained, "I may be wrong, and it will take +some time to discover the error if we make one. When a city is buried +thirty or forty feet deep beneath earth and great trees have grown over +it, it is not easy to dig down to it." + +"How do you ever expect to find it?" asked Ned. + +"Well, we will sink shafts here and there. If we find carved stones, +the remains of ancient pottery and weapons, parts of buildings or +building stones, we shall know we are on the right track," was the +answer. "And now that I have shown you the map, and explained how +valuable it is, I will put it away again. We shall begin our +excavations in the morning." + +"At what point?" asked Tom. + +"At a point I shall indicate after a further consultation of the map. +I must see the configuration of the country by daylight to decide. And +now let's get some rest. We have had a hard day." + +The two tents housing the four white members of the Bumper party were +close together, and it was decided that the night would be divided into +four watches, to guard against possible treachery on the part of the +Beecher crowd. + +"It seems an unkind precaution to take against a fellow scientist," +said Professor Bumper, "but I can not afford to take chances after what +has occurred." + +The others agreed with him, and though standing guard was not pleasant +it was done. However the night passed without incident, and then came +morning and the excitement of getting breakfast, over which the Indians +made merry. They did not like the cold and darkness, and always +welcomed the sun, no matter how hot. + +"And now," cried Tom, when the meal was over, "let us begin the work +that has brought us here." + +"Yes," agreed Professor Bumper, "I will consult the map, and start the +diggers where I think the city lies, far below the surface. Now, +gentlemen, if you will give me your attention----" + +He was seeking through his outer coat pockets, after an ineffectual +search in the inner one. A strange look came over his face. + +"What's the matter?" asked Tom. + +"The map--the map!" gasped the professor. "The map I was showing you +last night! The map that tells where we are to dig for the idol of +gold! It's gone!" + +"The map gone?" gasped Mr. Damon. + +"I--I'm afraid so," faltered the professor. "I put it away carefully, +but now----" + +He ceased speaking to make a further search in all his pockets. + +"Maybe you left it in another coat," suggested Ned. + +"Or maybe some of the Beecher crowd took it!" snapped Tom. + + + + +CHAPTER XVIII + +"EL TIGRE!" + + +The four men gazed at one another. Consternation showed on the face of +Professor Bumper, and was reflected, more or less, on the countenances +of his companions. + +"Are you sure the map is gone?" asked Tom. "I know how easy it is to +mislay anything in a camp of this sort. I couldn't at first find my +safety razor this morning, and when I did locate it the hoe was in one +of my shoes. I'm sure a rat or some jungle animal must have dragged it +there. Now maybe they took your map, Professor. That oiled silk in +which it was wrapped might have appealed to the taste of a rat or a +snake." + +"It is no joking matter," said Professor Bumper. "But I know you +appreciate the seriousness of it as much as I do, Tom. But I had the +map in the pocket of this coat, and now it is gone!" + +"When did you put it there?" asked Ned. + +"This morning, just before I came to breakfast." + +"Oh, then you have had it since last night!" Tom ejaculated. + +"Yes, I slept with it under my clothes that I rolled up for a pillow, +and when it was my turn to stand guard I took it with me. Then I put +it back again and went to sleep. When I awoke and dressed I put the +packet in my pocket and ate breakfast. Now when I look for it--why, +it's gone!" + +"The map or the oiled-silk package?" asked Mr. Damon, who, once having +been a businessman, was sometimes a stickler for small points. + +"Both," answered the professor. "I opened the silk to tie it more +smoothly, so it would not be such a lump in my pocket, and I made sure +the map was inside." + +"Then the whole thing has been taken--or you have lost it," suggested +Ned. + +"I am not in the habit of losing valuable maps," retorted the +scientist. "And the pocket of my coat I had made deep, for the purpose +of carrying the long map. It could not drop out." + +"Well, we mustn't overlook any possible chances," suggested Tom. "Come +on now, we'll search every inch of the ground over which you traveled +this morning, Professor." + +"It MUST be found," murmured the scientist. "Without it all our work +will go for naught." + +They all went into the tent where the professor and Mr. Damon had slept +when they were not on guard. The camp was a busy place, with the +Indians finishing their morning meal, and getting ready for the work of +the day. For word had been given out that there would be no more long +periods of travel. + +In consequence, efforts were being directed by the head men of the +bearers to making a more permanent camp in the wilderness. Shelters of +palm-thatched huts were being built, a site for cooking fires made, +and, at the direction of Mr. Damon, to whom this part was entrusted, +some sanitary regulations were insisted on. + +Leaving this busy scene, the four, with solemn faces, proceeded to the +tent where it was hoped the map would be found. But though they went +through everything, and traced and retraced every place the professor +could remember having traversed about the canvas shelter, no signs of +the important document could be found. + +"I don't believe I dropped it out of my pocket," said the scientist, +for perhaps the twentieth time. + +"Then it was taken," declared Tom. + +"That's what I say!" chimed in Ned. "And by some of Beecher's party!" + +"Easy, my boy," cautioned Mr. Damon. "We don't want to make +accusations we can't prove." + +"That is true," agreed Professor Bumper. "But, though I am sorry to +say it of a fellow archaelogist, I can not help thinking Beecher had +something to do with the taking of my map." + +"But how could any of them get it?" asked Mr. Damon. "You say you had +the map this morning, and certainly none of them has been in our camp +since dawn, though of course it is possible that some of them sneaked +in during the night." + +"It does seem a mystery how it could have been taken in open daylight, +while we were about camp together," said Tom. "But is the loss such a +grave one, Professor Bumper?" + +"Very grave. In fact I may say it is impossible to proceed with the +excavating without the map." + +"Then what are we to do?" asked Ned. + +"We must get it back!" declared Tom. + +"Yes," agreed the scientist, "we can not work without it. As soon as I +make a little further search, to make sure it could not have dropped in +some out-of-the-way place, I shall go over to Professor Beecher's camp +and demand that he give me back my property." + +"Suppose he says he hasn't taken it?" asked Tom. + +"Well, I'm sure he either took it personally, or one of his party did. +And yet I can't understand how they could have come here without our +seeing them," and the professor shook his head in puzzled despair. + +A more detailed search did not reveal the missing map, and Mr. Damon +and his friend the scientist were on the point of departing for the +camp of their rivals, less than a mile away, when Tom had what really +amounted to an inspiration. + +"Look here, Professor!" he cried. "Can you remember any of the details +of your map--say, for instance, where we ought to begin excavating to +get at the wonders of the underground city?" + +"Well, Tom, I did intend to compare my map with the configuration of +the country about here. There is a certain mountain which serves as a +landmark and a guide for a starting point. I think that is it over +there," and the scientist pointed to a distant snow-capped peak. + +The party had left the low and marshy land of the true jungle, and were +among the foothills, though all about them was dense forest and +underbush, which, in reality, was as much a jungle as the lower plains, +but was less wet. + +"The point where I believe we should start to dig," said the professor, +"is near the spot where the top of the mountain casts a shadow when the +sun is one hour high. At least that is the direction given in the old +manuscripts. So, though we can do little without the map, we might +make a start by digging there." + +"No, not there!" exclaimed Tom. + +"Why not?" + +"Because we don't want to let Beecher's crowd know that we are on the +track of the idol of gold." + +"But they know anyhow, for they have the map," commented Ned, puzzled +by his chum's words. + +"Maybe not," said Tom slowly. "I think this is a time for a big bluff. +It may work and it may not. Beecher's crowd either has the map or they +have not. If they have it they will lose no time in trying to find the +right place to start digging and then they'll begin excavating. + +"Very good! If they do that we have a right to dig near the same place. +But if they have not the map, which is possible, and if we start to dig +where the professor's memory tells him is the right spot, we'll only +give them the tip, and they'll dig there also." + +"I'm sure they have the map," the professor said. "But I believe your +plan is a good one, Tom." + +"Just what do you propose doing?" asked Ned. + +"Fooling 'em!" exclaimed Tom quickly. "We'll dig in some place remote +from the spot where the mountain casts its shadow. They will think, if +they haven't the map, that we are proceeding by it, and they'll dig, +too. When they find nothing, as will also happen to us, they may go +away. + +"If, on the other hand, they have the map, and see us digging at a spot +not indicated on it, they will be puzzled, knowing we must have some +idea of where the buried city lies. They will think the map is at +fault, perhaps, and not make use of it. Then we can get it back." + +"Bless my hatband!" cried Mr. Damon. "I believe you're right, Tom. +We'll dig in the wrong place to fool 'em." + +And this was done. Search for the precious map was given up for the +time being, and the professor and his friends set the natives to work +digging shafts in the ground, as though sinking them down to the level +of the buried city. + +But though this false work was prosecuted with vigor for several days, +there was a feeling of despair among the Bumper party over the loss of +the map. + +"If we could only get it back!" exclaimed the professor, again and +again. + +Meanwhile the Beecher party seemed inactive. True, some members of it +did come over to look on from a respectful distance at what the diggers +were doing. Some of the rival helpers, under the direction of the head +of the expedition, also began sinking shafts. But they were not in the +locality remembered by Professor Bumper as being correct. + +"I can't imagine what they're up to," he said. "If they have my map +they would act differently, I should think." + +"Whatever they're up to," answered Tom, "the time has come when we can +dig at the place where we can hope for results." And the following day +shafts were started in the shadow of the mountain. + +Until some evidence should have been obtained by digging, as to the +location beneath the surface of a buried city, there was nothing for +the travelers to do but wait. Turns were taken in directing the +efforts of the diggers, and an occasional inspection was made of the +shafts. + +"What do you expect to find first?" asked Tom of Professor Bumper one +day, when the latter was at the top of a shaft waiting for a bucket +load of dirt to be hoisted up. + +"Potsherds and artifacts," was the answer. + +"What sort of bugs are they?" asked Ned with a laugh. He and Tom were +about to go hunting with their electric rifles. + +"Artifacts are things made by the Indians--or whatever members of the +race who built the ancient cities were called--such as household +articles, vases, ornaments, tools and so on. Anything made by +artificial means is called an artifact." + +"And potsherds are things with those Chinese laundry ticket scratches +on them," added Tom. + +"Exactly," said the professor, laughing. "Though some of the +strange-appearing inscriptions give much valuable information. As soon +as we find some of them--say a broken bit of pottery with hieroglyphics +on--I will know I am on the right track." + +And while the scientist and Mr. Damon kept watch at the top of the +shaft, Tom and Ned went out into the jungle to hunt. They had killed +some game, and were stalking a fine big deer, which would provide a +feast for the natives, when suddenly the silence of the lonely forest +was broken by a piercing scream, followed by an agonized cry of +"El tigre! El tigre!" + + + + +CHAPTER XIX + +POISONED ARROWS + + +"Did you hear that, Tom?" asked Ned, in a hoarse whisper. + +"Surely," was the cautious answer. "Keep still, and I'll try for a +shot." + +"Better be quick," advised Ned in a tense voice. "The chap who did +that yelling seems to be in trouble!" + +And as Ned's voice trailed off into a whisper, again came the cry, this +time in frenzied pain. + +"El tigre! El tigre!" Then there was a jumble of words. + +"It's over this way!" and this time Ned shouted, seeing no need for low +voices since the other was so loud. + +Tom looked to where Ned had parted the bushes alongside a jungle path. +Through the opening the young inventor saw, in a little glade, that +which caused him to take a firmer grip on his electric rifle, and also +a firmer grip on his nerves. + +Directly in front of him and Ned, and not more than a hundred yards +away, was a great tawny and spotted jaguar--the "tigre" or tiger of +Central America. The beast, with lashing tail, stood over an Indian +upon whom it seemed to have sprung from some lair, beating the +unfortunate man to the ground. Nor had he fallen scatheless, for there +was blood on the green leaves about him, and it was not the blood of +the spotted beast. + +"Oh, Tom, can you--can you----" and Ned faltered. + +The young inventor understood the unspoken question. + +"I think I can make a shot of it without hitting the man," he answered, +never turning his head. "It's a question, though, if the beast won't +claw him in the death struggle. It won't last long, however, if the +electric bullet goes to the right place, and I've got to take the +chance." + +Cautiously Tom brought his weapon to bear. Quiet as Ned and he had +been after the discovery, the jaguar seemed to feel that something was +wrong. Intent on his prey, for a time he had stood over it, gloating. +Now the brute glanced uneasily from side to side, its tail nervously +twitching, and it seemed trying to gain, by a sniffing of the air, some +information as to the direction in which danger lay, for Tom and Ned +had stooped low, concealing themselves by a screen of leaves. + +The Indian, after his first frenzied outburst of fear, now lay quiet, +as though fearing to move, moaning in pain. + +Suddenly the jaguar, attracted either by some slight movement on the +part of Ned or Tom, or perhaps by having winded them, turned his head +quickly and gazed with cruel eyes straight at the spot where the two +young men stood behind the bushes. + +"He's seen us," whispered Ned. + +"Yes," assented Tom. "And it's a perfect shot. Hope I don't miss!" + +It was not like Tom Swift to miss, nor did he on this occasion. There +was a slight report from the electric rifle--a report not unlike the +crackle of the wireless--and the powerful projectile sped true to its +mark. + +Straight through the throat and chest under the uplifted jaw of the +jaguar it went--through heart and lungs. Then with a great coughing, +sighing snarl the beast reared up, gave a convulsive leap forward +toward its newly discovered enemies, and fell dead in a limp heap, just +beyond the native over which it had been crouching before it delivered +the death stroke, now never to fall. + +"You did it, Tom! You did it!" cried Ned, springing up from where he +had been kneeling to give his chum a better chance to shoot. "You did +it, and saved the man's life!" And Ned would have rushed out toward the +still twitching body. + +"Just a minute!" interposed Tom. "Those beasts sometimes have as many +lives as a cat. I'll give it one more for luck." Another electric +projectile through the head of the jaguar produced no further effect +than to move the body slightly, and this proved conclusively that there +was no life left. It was safe to approach, which Tom and Ned did. + +Their first thought, after a glance at the jaguar, was for the Indian. +It needed but a brief examination to show that he was not badly hurt. +The jaguar had leaped on him from a low tree as he passed under it, as +the boys learned afterward, and had crushed the man to earth by the +weight of the spotted body more than by a stroke of the paw. + +The American jaguar is not so formidable a beast as the native name of +tiger would cause one to suppose, though they are sufficiently +dangerous, and this one had rather badly clawed the Indian. +Fortunately the scratches were on the fleshy parts of the arms and +shoulders, where, though painful, they were not necessarily serious. + +"But if you hadn't shot just when you did, Tom, it would have been all +up with him," commented Ned. + +"Oh, well, I guess you'd have hit him if I hadn't," returned the young +inventor. "But let's see what we can do for this chap." + +The man sat up wonderingly--hardly able to believe that he had been +saved from the dreaded "tigre." His wounds were bleeding rather +freely, and as Tom and Ned carried with them a first-aid kit they now +brought it into use. The wounds were bound up, the man was given water +to drink and then, as he was able to walk, Tom and Ned offered to help +him wherever he wanted to go. + +"Blessed if I can tell whether he's one of our Indians or whether he +belongs to the Beecher crowd," remarked Tom. + +"Senor Beecher," said the Indian, adding, in Spanish, that he lived in +the vicinity and had only lately been engaged by the young professor +who hoped to discover the idol of gold before Tom's scientific friend +could do so. + +Tom and Ned knew a little Spanish, and with that, and simple but +expressive signs on the part of the Indian, they learned his story. He +had his palm-thatched hut not far from the Beecher camp, in a small +Indian village, and he, with others, had been hired on the arrival of +the Beecher party to help with the excavations. These, for some +reason, were delayed. + +"Delayed because they daren't use the map they stole from us," +commented Ned. + +"Maybe," agreed Tom. + +The Indian, whose name, it developed, was Tal, as nearly as Tom and Ned +could master it, had left camp to go to visit his wife and child in the +jungle hut, intending to return to the Beecher camp at night. But as +he passed through the forest the jaguar had dropped on him, bearing him +to earth. + +"But you saved my life, Senor," he said to Tom, dropping on one knee +and trying to kiss Tom's hand, which our hero avoided. "And now my +life is yours," added the Indian. + +"Well, you'd better get home with it and take care of it," said Tom. +"I'll have Professor Bumper come over and dress your scratches in a +better and more careful way. The bandages we put on are only +temporary." + +"My wife she make a poultice of leaves--they cure me," said the Indian. + +"I guess that will be the best way," observed Ned. "These natives can +doctor themselves for some things, better than we can." + +"Well, we'll take him home," suggested Tom. "He might keel over from +loss of blood. Come on," he added to Tal, indicating his object. + +It was not far to the native's hut from the place where the jaguar had +been killed, and there Tom and Ned underwent another demonstration of +affection as soon as those of Tal's immediate family and the other +natives understood what had happened. + +"I hate this business!" complained Tom, after having been knelt to by +the Indian's wife and child, who called him the "preserver" and other +endearing titles of the same kind. "Come on, let's hike back." + +But Indian hospitality, especially after a life has been saved, is not +so simple as all that. + +"My life--my house--all that I own is yours," said Tal in deep +gratitude. "Take everything," and he waved his hand to indicate all +the possessions in his humble hut. + +"Thanks," answered Tom, "but I guess you need all you have. That's a +fine specimen of blow gun though," he added, seeing one hanging on the +wall. "I wouldn't mind having one like that. If you get well enough +to make me one, Tal, and some arrows to go with it, I'd like it for a +curiosity to hang in my room at home." + +"The Senor shall have a dozen," promised the Indian. + +"Look, Ned," went on Tom, pointing to the native weapon. "I never saw +one just like this. They use small arrows or darts, tipped with wild +cotton, instead of feathers." + +"These the arrows," explained Tal's wife, bringing a bundle from a +corner of the one-room hut. As she held them out her husband gave a +cry of fear. + +"Poisoned arrows! Poisoned arrows!" he exclaimed. "One scratch and the +senors are dead men. Put them away!" + +In fear the Indian wife prepared to obey, but as she did so Tom Swift +caught sight of the package and uttered a strange cry. + +"Thundering hoptoads, Ned!" he exclaimed. "The poisoned arrows are +wrapped in the piece of oiled silk that was around the professor's +missing map!" + + + + +CHAPTER XX + +AN OLD LEGEND + + +Fascinated, Tom and Ned gazed at the package the Indian woman held out +to them. Undoubtedly it was oiled silk on the outside, and through the +almost transparent covering could be seen the small arrows, or darts, +used in the blow gun. + +"Where did you get that?" asked Tom, pointing to the bundle and gazing +sternly at Tal. + +"What is the matter, Senor?" asked the Indian in turn. "Is it that you +are afraid of the poisoned arrows? Be assured they will not harm you +unless you are scratched by them." + +Tom and Ned found it difficult to comprehend all the rapid Spanish +spoken by their host, but they managed to understand some, and his +eloquent gestures made up the rest. + +"We're not afraid," Tom said, noting that the oiled skin well covered +the dangerous darts. "But where did you get that?" + +"I picked it up, after another Indian had thrown it away. He got it in +your camp, Senor. I will not lie to you. I did not steal. Valdez +went to your camp to steal--he is a bad Indian--and he brought back +this wrapping. It contained something he thought was gold, but it was +not, so he----" + +"Quick! Yes! Tell us!" demanded Tom eagerly. "What did he do with the +professor's map that was in the oiled silk? Where is it?" + +"Oh, Senors!" exclaimed the Indian woman, thinking perhaps her husband +was about to be dealt harshly with when she heard Tom's excited voice. +"Tal do no harm!" + +"No, he did no harm," went on Tom, in a reassuring tone. "But he can +do a whole lot of good if he tells us what became of the map that was +in this oiled silk. Where is it?" he asked again. + +"Valdez burn it up," answered Tal. + +"What, burned the professor's map?" cried Ned. + +"If that was in this yellow cloth--yes," answered the injured man. +"Valdez he is bad. He say to me he is going to your camp to see what +he can take. How he got this I know not, but he come back one morning +with the yellow package. I see him, but he make me promise not to +tell. But you save my life I tell you everything. + +"Valdez open the package; but it is not gold, though he think so +because it is yellow, and the man with no hair on his head keep it in +his pocket close, so close," and Tal hugged himself to indicate what he +meant. + +"That's Professor Bumper," explained Ned. + +"How did Valdez get the map out of the professor's coat?" asked Tom. + +"Valdez he very much smart. When man with no hair on his head take +coat off for a minute to eat breakfast Valdez take yellow thing out of +pocket." + +"The Indian must have sneaked into camp when we were eating," said Tom. +"Those from Beecher's party and our workers look all alike to us. We +wouldn't know one from the other, and one of our rival's might slip in." + +"One evidently did, if this is really the piece of oiled silk that was +around the professor's map," said Ned. + +"It certainly is the same," declared the young inventor. "See, there +is his name," and he stretched out his hand to point. + +"Don't touch!" cried Tal. "Poisoned arrows snake poison--very +dead-like and quick." + +"Don't worry, I won't touch," said Tom grimly. "But go on. You say +Valdez sneaked into our camp, took the oiled-silk package from the coat +pocket of Professor Bumper and went back to his own camp with it, +thinking it was gold." + +"Yes," answered Tal, though it is doubtful if he understood all that +Tom said, as it was half Spanish and half English. But the Indian knew +a little English, too. "Valdez, when he find no gold is very mad. +Only papers in the yellow silk-papers with queer marks on. Valdez +think it maybe a charm to work evil, so he burn them up--all up!" + +"Burned that rare map!" gasped Tom. + +"All in fire," went on Tal, indicating by his hands the play of flames. +"Valdez throw away yellow silk, and I take for my arrows so rain not +wash off poison. I give to you, if you like, with blow gun." + +"No, thank you," answered Tom, in disappointed tones. "The oiled silk +is of no use without the map, and that's gone. Whew! but this is +tough!" he said to his chum. "As long as it was only stolen there was +a chance to get it back, but if it's burned, the jig is up." + +"It looks so," agreed Ned. "We'd better get back and tell the +professor. It he can't get along without the map it's time he started +a movement toward getting another. So it wasn't Beecher, after all, +who got it." + +"Evidently not," assented Tom. "But I believe him capable of it." + +"You haven't much use for him," remarked Ned. + +"Huh!" was all the answer given by his chum. + +"I am sorry, Senors," went on Tal, "but I could not stop Valdez, and +the burning of the papers----" + +"No, you could not help it," interrupted the young inventor. "But it +just happens that it brings bad luck to us. You see, Tal, the papers +in this yellow covering, told of an old buried city that the +bald-headed professor--the-man-with-no-hair-on-his-head--is very +anxious to discover. It is somewhere under the ground," and he waved +to the jungle all about them, pointing earthwards. + +"Paper Valdez burn tell of lost city?" asked Tal, his face lighting up. + +"Yes. But now, of course, we can't tell where to dig for it." + +The Indian turned to his wife and talked rapidly with her in their own +dialect. She, too, seemed greatly excited, making quick gestures. +Finally she ran out of the hut. + +"Where is she going?" asked Tom suspiciously. + +"To get her grandfather. He very old Indian. He know story of buried +cities under trees. Very old story--what you call legend, maybe. But +Goosal know. He tell same as his grandfather told him. You wait. +Goosal come, and you listen." + +"Good, Ned!" suddenly cried Tom. "Maybe, we'll get on the track of +lost Kurzon after all, through some ancient Indian legend. Maybe we +won't need the map!" + +"It hardly seems possible," said Ned slowly. "What can these Indians +know of buried cities that were out of existence before Columbus came +here? Why, they haven't any written history." + +"No, and that may be just the reason they are more likely to be right," +returned Tom. "Legends handed down from one grandfather to another go +back a good many hundred years. If they were written they might be +destroyed as the professor's map was. Somehow or other, though I can't +tell why, I begin to see daylight ahead of us." + +"I wish I did," remarked Ned. + +"Here comes Goosal I think," murmured Tom, and he pointed to an Indian, +bent with the weight of years, who, led by Tal's wife, was slowly +approaching the hut. + + + + +CHAPTER XXI + +THE CAVERN + + +"Now Goosal can tell you," said Tal, evidently pleased that he had, in +a measure, solved the problem caused by the burning of the professor's +map. "Goosal very old Indian. He know old stories--legends--very old." + +"Well, if he can tell us how to find the buried city of Kurzon and +the--the things in it," said Tom, "he's all right!" + +The aged Indian proceeded slowly toward the hut where the impatient +youths awaited him. + +"I know what you seek in the buried city," remarked Tal. + +"Do you?" cried Tom, wondering if some one had indiscreetly spoken of +the idol of gold. + +"Yes you want pieces of rock, with strange writings on them, old +weapons, broken pots. I know. I have helped white men before." + +"Yes, those are the things we want," agreed Tom, with a glance at his +chum. "That is--some of them. But does your wife's grandfather talk +our language?" + +"No, but I can tell you what he says." + +By this time the old man, led by "Mrs. Tal"--as the young men called +the wife of the Indian they had helped--entered the hut. He seemed +nervous and shy, and glanced from Tom and Ned to his grandson-in-law, +as the latter talked rapidly in the Indian dialect. Then Goosal made +answer, but what it was all about the boys could not tell. + +"Goosal say," translated Tal, "that he know a story of a very old city +away down under ground." + +"Tell us about it!" urged Tom eagerly. + +But a difficulty very soon developed. Tal's intentions were good, but +he was not equal to the task of translating. Nor was the understanding +of Tom and Ned of Spanish quite up to the mark. + +"Say, this is too much for me!" exclaimed Tom. "We are losing the most +valuable part of this by not understanding what Goosal says, and what +Tal translates." + +"What can we do?" asked Ned. + +"Get the professor here as soon as possible. He can manage this +dialect, and he'll get the information at first hand. If Goosal can +tell where to begin excavating for the city he ought to tell the +professor, not us." + +"That's right," agreed Ned. "We'll bring the professor here as soon as +we can." + +Accordingly they stopped the somewhat difficult task of listening to +the translated story and told Tal, as well as they could, that they +would bring the "man-with-no-hair-on-his-head" to listen to the tale. + +This seemed to suit the Indians, all of whom in the small colony +appeared to be very grateful to Tom and Ned for having saved the life +of Tal. + +"That was a good shot you made when you bowled over the jaguar," said +Ned, as the two young explorers started back to their camp. + +"Better than I realized, if it leads to the discovery of Kurzon and the +idol of gold," remarked Tom. + +"And to think we should come across the oiled-silk holding the poisoned +arrows!" went on Ned. "That's the strangest part of the whole affair. +If it hadn't been that you shot the jaguar this never would have come +about." + +That Professor Bumper was astonished, and Mr. Damon likewise, when they +heard the story of Tom and Ned, is stating it mildly. + +"Come on!" exclaimed the scientist, as Tom finished, "we must see this +Goosal at once. If my map is destroyed, and it seems to be, this old +Indian may be our only hope. Where did he say the buried city was, +Tom?" + +"Oh, somewhere in this vicinity, as nearly as I could make out. But +you'd better talk with him yourself. We didn't say anything about the +idol of gold." + +"That's right. It's just as well to let the natives think we are only +after ordinary relics." + +"Bless my insurance policy!" gasped Mr. Damon. "It does not seem +possible that we are on the right track." + +"Well, I think we are, from what little information Goosal gave us," +remarked Tom. "This buried city of his must be a wonderful place." + +"It is, if it is what I take it to be," agreed the professor. "I told +you I would bring you to a land of wonders, Tom Swift, and they have +hardly begun yet. Come, I am anxious to talk to Goosal." + +In order that the Indians in the Bumper camp might not hear rumors of +the new plan to locate the hidden city, and, at the same time, to keep +rumors from spreading to the camp of the rivals, the scientist and his +friends started a new shaft, and put a shift of men at work on it. + +"We'll pretend we are on the right track, and very busy," said Tom. +"That will fool Beecher." + +"Are you glad to know he did not take your map Professor Bumper?" asked +Mr. Damon. + +"Well, yes. It is hard to believe such things of a fellow scientist." + +"If he didn't take it he wanted to," said Tom. "And he has done, or +will do, things as unsportsmanlike." + +"Oh, you are hardly fair, perhaps, Tom," commented Ned. + +"Um!" was all the answer he received. + +With the Indians in camp busy on the excavation work, and having +ascertained that similar work was going on in the Beecher outfit, +Professor Bumper, with Mr. Damon and the young men, set off to visit +the Indian village and listen to Goosal's story. They passed the place +where Tom had slain the jaguar, but nothing was left but the bones; the +ants, vultures and jungle animals having picked them clean in the night. + +On the arrival of Tom and his friends at the Indian's hut, Goosal told, +in language which Professor Bumper could understand, the ancient legend +of the buried city as he had had it from his grandfather. + +"But is that all you know about it, Goosal?" asked the savant. + +"No, Learned One. It is true most of what I have told you was told to +me by my father and his father's father. But I--I myself--with these +eyes, have looked upon the lost city." + +"You have!" cried the professor, this time in English. "Where? When? +Take us to it! How do you get here?" + +"Through the cavern of the dead," was the answer when the questions +were modified. + +"Bless my diamond ring!" exclaimed Mr. Damon, when Professor Bumper +translated the reply. "What does he mean?" + +And then, after some talk, this information came out. Years before, +when Goosal was a young man, he had been taken by his grandfather on a +journey through the jungle. They stopped one day at the foot of a high +mountain, and, clearing away the brush and stones at a certain place, +an entrance to a great cavern was revealed. This, it appeared, was the +Indian burial ground, and had been used for generations. + +Goosal, though in fear and trembling, was lead through it, and came to +another cavern, vaster than the first. And there he saw strange and +wonderful sights, for it was the remains of a buried city, that had +once been the home of a great and powerful tribe unlike the +Indians--the ancient Mayas it would seem. + +"Can you take us to this cavern?" asked the professor. + +"Yes," answered Goosal. "I will lead to it those who saved the life of +Tal--them and their friends. I will take you to the lost city!" + +"Good!" cried Mr. Damon, when this had been translated. "Now let +Beecher try to play any more tricks on us! Ho! for the cavern and the +lost city of Kurzon." + +"And the idol of gold," said Tom Swift to himself. "I hope we can get +it ahead of Beecher. Perhaps if I can help in that--Oh, well, here's +hoping, that's all!" and a little smile curved his lips. + +Greatly excited by the strange news, but maintaining as calm an air +outwardly as possible, so as not to excite the Indians, Tom and his +friends returned to camp to prepare for their trip. Goosal had said +the cavern lay distant more than a two-days' journey into the jungle. + + + + +CHAPTER XXII + +THE STORM + + +"Now," remarked Tom, once they were back again in their camp, "we must +go about this trip to the cavern in a way that will cause no suspicion +over there as to what our object is," and he nodded in the direction of +the quarters of his rival. + +"Do you mean to go off quietly?" asked Ned. + +"Yes. And to keep the work going on here, at these shafts," put in the +scientist, "so that if any of their spies happen to come here they will +think we still believe the buried city to be just below us. To that +end we must keep the Indians digging, though I am convinced now that it +is useless." + +Accordingly preparations were made for an expedition into the jungle +under the leadership of Goosal. Tal had not sufficiently recovered +from the jaguar wounds to go with the party, but the old man, in spite +of his years, was hale and hearty and capable of withstanding hardships. + +One of the most intelligent of the Indians was put in charge of the +digging gangs as foreman, and told to keep them at work, and not to let +them stray. Tolpec, whose brother Tom had tried to save, proved a +treasure. He agreed to remain behind and look after the interests of +his friends, and see that none of their baggage or stores were taken. + +"Well, I guess we're as ready as we ever shall be," remarked Tom, as +the cavalcade made ready to start. Mules carried the supplies that +were to be taken into the jungle, and others of the sturdy animals were +to be ridden by the travelers. The trail was not an easy one, Goosal +warned them. + +Tom and his friends found it even worse than they had expected, for all +their experience in jungle and mountain traveling. In places it was +necessary to dismount and lead the mules along, sometimes pushing and +dragging them. More than once the trail fairly hung on the edge of +some almost bottomless gorge, and again it wound its way between great +walls of rock, so poised that they appeared about to topple over and +crush the travelers. But they kept on with dogged patience, through +many hardships. + +To add to their troubles they seemed to have entered the abode of the +fiercest mosquitoes encountered since coming to Honduras. At times it +was necessary to ride along with hats covered with mosquito netting, +and hands encased in gloves. + +They had taken plenty of condensed food with them, and they did not +suffer in this respect. Game, too, was plentiful and the electric +rifles of Tom and Ned added to the larder. + +One night, after a somewhat sound sleep induced by hard travel on the +trail that day, Tom awoke to hear some one or something moving about +among their goods, which included their provisions. + +"Who's there?" asked the young inventor sharply, as he reached for his +electric rifle. + +There was no answer, but a rattling of the pans. + +"Speak, or I'll fire!" Tom warned, adding this in such Spanish as he +could muster, for he thought it might be one of the Indians. No reply +came, and then, seeing by the light of the stars a dark form moving in +front of the tent occupied by himself and Ned, Tom fired. + +There was a combined grunt and squeal of pain, then a savage growl, and +Ned yelled: + +"What's the matter, Tom?" for he had been awakened, and heard the +crackle of the electrical discharge. + +"I don't know," Tom answered. "But I shot something--or somebody!" + +"Maybe some of Beecher's crowd," ventured his chum. But when they got +their electric torches, and focused them on the inert, black object, it +was found to be a bear which had come to nose about the camp for dainty +morsels. + +Bruin was quite dead, and as he was in prime condition there was a +feast of bear meat at the following dinner. The white travelers found +it rather too strong for their palates, but the Indians reveled in it. + +It was shortly after noon the next day, when Goosal, after remarking +that a storm seemed brewing, announced that they would be at the +entrance to the cavern in another hour. + +"Good!" cried Professor Bumper. "At last we are near the buried city." + +"Don't be too sure," advised Mr. Damon, "We may be disappointed. +Though I hope not for your sake, my dear Professor." + +Goosal now took the lead, and the old Indian, traveling on foot, for he +said he could better look for the old landmark that way than on the +back of a mule, walked slowly along a rough cliff. + +"Here, somewhere, is the entrance to the cavern," said the aged man. +"It was many years ago that I was here--many years. But it seems as +though yesterday. It is little changed." + +Indeed little did change in that land of wonders. Only nature caused +what alterations there were. The hand of man had long been absent. + +Slowly Goosal walked along the rocky trail, on one side a sheer rock, +towering a hundred feet or more toward the sky. On the other side a +deep gash leading to a great fertile valley below. + +Suddenly the old man paused, and looked about him as though uncertain. +Then, more slowly still, he put out his hand and pulled at some bushes +that grew on a ledge of the rock. They came away, having no depth of +earth, and a small opening was disclosed. + +"It is here," said Goosal quietly. "The entrance to the cavern that +leads to the burial place of the dead, and the city that is dead also. +It is here." + +He stood aside while the others hurried forward. It took but a few +minutes to prove that he was right--at least as to the existence of the +cavern--for the four men were soon peering into the opening. + +"Come on!" cried Tom, impetuously. + +"Wait a moment," suggested the professor, "Sometimes the air in these +places is foul. We must test it." But a torch one of the Indians +threw in burned with a steady glow. That test was conclusive at least. +They made ready to enter. + +Torches of a light bark, that glowed with a steady flame and little +smoke, had been provided, as well as a good supply of electric +dry-battery lamps, and the way into the cavern was thus well lighted. +At first the Indians were afraid to enter, but a word or two from +Goosal reassured them, and they followed Professor Bumper, Tom, and the +others into the cavern. + +For several hundred feet there was nothing remarkable about the cave. +It was like any other cavern of the mountains, though wonderful for the +number of crystal formations on the roof and walls--formations that +sparkled like a million diamonds in the flickering lights. + +"Talk about a wonderland!" cried Tom. "This is fairyland!" + +A moment later, as Goosal walked on beside the professor and Tom, the +aged Indian came to a pause, and, pointing ahead, murmured: + +"The city of the dead!" + +They saw the niches cut in the rock walls, niches that held the +countless bones of those who had died many, many years before. It was +a vast Indian grave. + +"Doubtless a wealth of material of historic interest here," said +Professor Bumper, flashing his torch on the skeletons. "But it will +keep. Where is the city you spoke of, Goosal?" + +"Farther on, Senor. Follow me." + +Past the stone graves they went, deeper and deeper into the great cave. +Their footsteps echoed and re-echoed. Suddenly Tom, who with Ned had +gone a little ahead, came to a sudden halt and said: + +"Well, this may be a burial place sure enough, but I think I see +something alive all right--if it isn't a ghost." + +He pointed ahead. Surely those were lights flickering and moving +about, and, yes, there were men carrying them. The Bumper party came +to a surprised halt. The other lights advanced, and then, to the great +astonishment of Professor Bumper and his friends, there confronted them +in the cave several scientists of Professor Beecher's party and a score +or more of Indians. Professor Hylop, who was known to Professor +Bumper, stepped forward and asked sharply: + +"What are you doing here?" + +"I might ask you the same thing," was the retort. + +"You might, but you would not be answered," came sharply. "We have a +right here, having discovered this cavern, and we claim it under a +concession of the Honduras Government. I shall have to ask you to +withdraw." + +"Do you mean leave here?" asked Mr Damon. + +"That is it, exactly. We first discovered this cave. We have been +conducting explorations in it for several days, and we wish no +outsiders." + +"Are you speaking for Professor Beecher?" asked Tom. + +"I am. But he is here in the cave, and will speak for himself if you +desire it. But I represent him, and I order you to leave. If you do +not go peaceably we will use force. We have plenty of it," and he +glanced back at the Indians grouped behind him--scowling savage Indians. + +"We have no wish to intrude," observed Professor Bumper, "and I fully +recognize the right of prior discovery. But one member of our party +(he did not say which one) was in this cave many years ago. He led us +to it." + +"Ours is a government concession!" exclaimed Professor Hylop harshly. +"We want no intruders! Go!" and he pointed toward the direction whence +Tom's party had come. + +"Drive them out!" he ordered the Indians in Spanish, and with muttered +threats the dark-skinned men advanced toward Tom and the others. + +"You need not use force," said Professor Bumper. + +He and Professor Hylop had quarreled bitterly years before on some +scientific matter, and the matter was afterward found to be wrong. +Perhaps this made him vindictive. + +Tom stepped forward and started to protest, but Professor Bumper +interposed. + +"I guess there is no help for it but to go. It seems to be theirs by +right of discovery and government concession," he said, in disappointed +tone. "Come friends"; and dejectedly they retraced their steps. + +Followed by the threatening Indians, the Bumper party made its way back +to the entrance. They had hoped for great things, but if the cavern +gave access to the buried city--the ancient city of Kurzon on the chief +altar of which stood the golden idol, Quitzel--it looked as though they +were never to enter it. + +"We'll have to get our Indians and drive those fellows out!" declared +Tom. "I'm not going to be beaten this way--and by Beecher!" + +"It is galling," declared Professor Bumper. "Still he has right on his +side, and I must give in to priority, as I would expect him to. It is +the unwritten law." + +"Then we've failed!" cried Tom bitterly. + +"Not yet," said Professor Bumper. "If I can not unearth that buried +city I may find another in this wonderland. I shall not give up." + +"Hark! What's that noise?" asked Tom, as they approached the entrance +to the cave. + +"Sounds like a great wind blowing," commented Ned. + +It was. As they stood in the entrance they looked out to find a fierce +storm raging. The wind was sweeping down the rocky trail, the rain was +falling in veritable bucketfuls from the overhanging cliff, and +deafening thunder and blinding lightning roared and flashed. + +"Surely you would not drive us out in this storm," said Professor +Bumper to his former rival. + +"You can not stay in the cave! You must get out!" was the answer, as a +louder crash of thunder than usual seemed to shake the very mountain. + + + + +CHAPTER XXIII + +ENTOMBED ALIVE + + +For an instant Tom and his friends paused at the entrance to the +wonderful cavern, and looked at the raging storm. It seemed madness to +venture out into it, yet they had been driven from the cave by those +who had every right of discovery to say who, and who should not, +partake of its hospitality. + +"We can't go out into that blow!" cried Ned. "It's enough to loosen +the very mountains!" + +"Let's stay here and defy them!" murmured Tom. "If the--if what we +seek--is here we have as good a right to it as they have." + +"We must go out," said Professor Bumper simply. "I recognize the right +of my rival to dispossess us." + +"He may have the right, but it isn't human," said Mr. Damon. "Bless my +overshoes! If Beecher himself were here he wouldn't have the heart to +send us out in this storm." + +"I would not give him the satisfaction of appealing to him," remarked +Professor Bumper. "Come, we will go out. We have our ponchos, and we +are not fair-weather explorers. If we can't get to the lost city one +way we will another. Come my friends." + +And despite the downpour, the deafening thunder and the lightning that +seemed ready to sear one's eyes, he walked out of the cave entrance, +followed by Tom and the others. + +"Come on!" cried Tom, in a voice he tried to render confident, as they +went out into the terrible storm. "We'll beat 'em yet!" + +The rain fell harder than ever. Small torrents were now rushing down +the trail, and it was only a question of a few minutes before the place +where they stood would be a raging river, so quickly does the rain +collect in the mountains and speed toward the valleys. + +"We must take to the forest!" cried Tom. "There'll be some shelter +there, and I don't like the way the geography of this place is +behaving. There may be a landslide at any moment." + +As he spoke he motioned upward through the mist of the rain to the +sloping side of the mountain towering above them. Loose stones were +beginning to roll down, accompanied by patches of earth loosened by the +water. Some of the patches carried with them bunches of grass and +small bushes. + +"Yes, it will be best to move into the jungle," said the professor. +"Goosal, you had better take the lead." + +It was wonderful to see how well the aged Indian bore up in spite of +his years, and walked on ahead. They had left their mules tethered +some distance back, in a sheltering clump of trees, and they hoped the +animals would be safe. + +The guide found a place where they could leave the trail, though going +down a dangerous slope, and take to the forest. As carefully as +possible they descended this, the rain continuing to fall, the wind to +blow, the lightning to sizzle all about them and the thunder to boom in +their ears. + +They went on until they were beneath the shelter of the thick jungle +growth of trees, which kept off some of the pelting drops. + +"This is better!" exclaimed Ned, shaking his poncho and getting rid of +some of the water that had settled on it. + +"Bless my overcoat!" cried Mr. Damon. "We seem to have gotten out of +the frying pan into the fire!" + +"How?" asked Tom. "We are partly sheltered here, though had we stayed +in the cave in spite of----" + +A deafening crash interrupted him, and following the flash one of the +giant trees of the forest was seen to blaze up and then topple over. + +"Struck by lightning!" yelled Ned. + +"Yes; and it may happen to us!" exclaimed Mr. Damon. "We were safer +from the lightning in the open. Maybe----" + +Again came an interruption, but this time a different one. The very +ground beneath their feet seemed to be shaking and trembling. + +"What is it?" gasped Ned, while Goosal fell on his knees and began +fervently to pray. + +"It's an earthquake!" yelled Tom Swift. + +As he spoke there came another sound--the sound of a mass of earth in +motion. It came from the direction of the mountain trail they had just +left. They looked toward it and their horror-stricken eyes saw the +whole side of the mountain sliding down. + +Slowly at first the earth slid down, but constantly gathering force and +speed. In the face of this new disaster the rain seemed to have ceased +and the thunder and lightning to be less severe. It was as though one +force of nature gave way to the other. + +"Look! Look!" gasped Ned. + +In silence, which was broken now only by a low and ominous rumble, more +menacing than had been the awful fury of the elements, the travelers +looked. + +Suddenly there was a quicker movement of seemingly one whole section of +the mountain. Great rocks and trees, carried down by the appalling +force of the landslide were slipping over the trail, obliterating it as +though it had never existed. + +"There goes the entrance to the cavern!" cried Ned, and as the others +looked to where he pointed they saw the hole in the side of the +mountain--the mouth of the cave that led to the lost city of +Kurzon--completely covered by thousands of tons of earth and stones. + +"That's the end of them!" exclaimed Tom, as the rumble of the +earthquake died away. + +"Of----" Ned stopped, his eyes staring. + +"Of Professor Beecher's party. They're entombed alive!" + + + + +CHAPTER XXIV + +THE REVOLVING STONE + + +Stunned, not alone by the realization of the awfulness of the fate of +their rivals, but also by the terrific storm and the effect of the +earthquake and the landslide, Tom and his friends remained for a moment +gazing toward the mouth of the cavern, now completely out of sight, +buried by a mass of broken trees, tangled bushes, rocks and earth. +Somewhere, far beyond that mass, was the Beecher party, held prisoners +in the cave that formed the entrance to the buried city. + +Tom was the first to come to a realization of what was needed to be +done. + +"We must help them!" he exclaimed, and it was characteristic of him +that he harbored no enmity. + +"How?" asked Ned. + +"We must get a force of Indians and dig them out," was the prompt +answer. + +At Tom's vigorous words Professor Bumper's forces were energized into +action, and he stated: "Fortunately we have plenty of excavating tools. +We may be in time to save them. Come on! the storm seems to have +passed as suddenly as it came up, and the earthquake, which, after all +did not cover a wide area, seems to be over. We must start the work of +rescue at once. We must go back to camp and get all the help we can +muster." + +The storm, indeed, seemed to be over, but it was no easy matter to get +back over the soggy, rain-soaked ground to the trail they had left to +take shelter in the forest. Fortunately the earthquake had not +involved that portion where they had left their mules, but most of the +frightened animals had broken loose, and it was some little time before +they could all be caught. + +"It is no use to try to get back to camp tonight," said Tom, when the +last of the pack and saddle animals had been corralled. "It is getting +late and there is no telling the condition of the trail. We must stay +here until morning." + +"But what about them?" and Mr. Damon nodded in the direction of the +entombed ones. + +"We can help them best by waiting until the beginning of a new day," +said the professor. "We shall need a large force, and we could not +bring it up to-night. Besides, Tom is right, and if we tried to go +along the trail after dark, torn and disturbed as it is bound to be by +the rain, we might get into difficulties ourselves. No, we must camp +here until morning and then go for help." + +They all decided finally this was best. The professor, too, pointed +out that their rivals were in a large and roomy cave, not likely to +suffer from lack of air nor food or water, since they must have +supplies with them. + +"The only danger is that the cave has been crushed in," added Tom; "but +in that event we would be of no service to them anyhow." + +The night seemed very long, and it was a most uncomfortable one, +because of the shock and exertions through which the party had passed. +Added to this was the physical discomfort caused by the storm. + +But in time there was the light in the east that meant morning was at +hand, and with it came action. A hasty breakfast, cups of steaming +coffee forming a most welcome part, put them all in better condition, +and once more they were on their way, heading back to the main camp +where they had left their force of Indians. + +"My!" exclaimed Tom, as they made their way slowly along, "it surely +was some storm! Look at those big trees uprooted over there. They're +almost as big as the giant redwoods of California, and yet they were +bowled over as if they were tenpins." + +"I wonder if the wind did it or the earthquake," ventured Mr. Damon. + +"No wind could do that," declared Ned. "It must have been the +landslide caused by the earthquake." + +"The wind could do it if the ground was made soft by the rain; and that +was probably what did it," suggested Tom. + +"There is no harm in settling the point," commented Professor Bumper. +"It is not far off our trail, and will take only a few minutes to go +over to the trees. I should like to get some photographs to accompany +an article that perhaps I shall write on the effects of sudden and +severe tropical storms. We will go to look at the overturned trees and +then we'll hurry on to camp to get the rescue party." + +The uprooted trees lay on one side of the mountain trail, perhaps a +mile from the mouth of the cave which had been covered over, entombing +the Beecher party. Leaving the mules in charge of one of the Indians, +Professor Bumper and his friends, accompanied by Goosal, approached the +fallen trees. As they neared them they saw that in falling the trees +had lifted with their roots a large mass of earth and imbedded rocks +that had clung to the twisted and gnarled fibers. This mass was as +large as a house. + +"Look at the hole left when the roots pulled out!" cried Ned. "Why, +it's like the crater of a small volcano!" he added. And, as they stood +on the edge of it looking curiously at the hole made, the others agreed +with Tom's chum. + +Professor Bumper was looking about, trying to ascertain if there were +any evidences of the earthquake in the vicinity, when Tom, who had +cautiously gone a little way down into the excavation caused by the +fallen trees, uttered a cry of surprise. + +"Look!" he shouted. "Isn't that some sort of tunnel or underground +passage?" and he pointed to a square opening, perhaps seven feet high +and nearly as broad, which extended, no one knew where, downward and +onward from the side of the hole made by the uprooting of the trees. + +"It's an underground passage all right," said Professor Bumper eagerly; +"and not a natural one, either. That was fashioned by the hand of man, +if I am any judge. It seems to go right under the mountain, too. +Friends, we must explore this! It may be of the utmost importance! +Come, we have our electric torches, and we shall need them, for it's +very dark in there," and he peered into the passage in front of which +they all stood now. It seemed to have been tunneled through the earth, +the sides being lined by either slabs of stone, or walls made by a sort +of concrete. + +"But what about the rescue work?" asked Mr. Damon. + +"I am not forgetting Professor Beecher and his friends," answered the +scientist. + +"Perhaps this may be a better means of rescuing them than by digging +them out, which will take a week at least," observed Tom. + +"This a better way?" asked Ned, pointing to the tunnel. + +"That's it," confirmed the savant. "If you will notice it extends back +in the direction of the cave from which we were driven. Now if there +is a buried city beneath all this jungle, this mountain of earth and +stones, the accumulation of centuries, it is probably on the bottom of +some vast cavern. It is my opinion that we were only in one end of +that cavern, and this may be the entrance to another end of it." + +"Then," asked Mr. Damon, "do you mean that we can enter here, get into +the cave that contains the buried city, or part of it, and find there +Beecher and his friends?" + +"That's it. It is possible, and if we could it would save an immense +lot of work, and probably be a surer way to save their lives than by +digging a tunnel through the landslide to find the mouth of the cave +where we first entered." + +"It's a chance worth taking," said Mr. Damon. "Of course it is a +chance. But then everything connected with this expedition is; so one +is no worse than another. As you say, we may find the entombed men +more easily this way than any other." + +"I wonder," said Tom slowly, "if, by any chance, we shall find, through +this passage, the lost city we are looking for." + +"And the idol of gold," added Ned. + +"Goosal, do you know anything about this?" asked Professor Bumper. +"Did you ever hear of another passage leading to the cave where you saw +the ancient city?" + +"No, Learned One, though I have heard stories about there being many +cities, or parts of a big one, beneath the mountain, and when it was +above ground there were many entrances to it." + +"That settles it!" cried the professor in English, having talked to +Goosal in Spanish. "We'll try this and see where it leads." + +They entered the stone-lined passage. In spite of the fact that it had +probably been buried and concealed from light and air for centuries, as +evidenced by the growth of the giant trees above it, the air was fresh. + +"And this is one reason," said Tom, in commenting on this fact, "why I +believe it leads to some vast cavern which is connected in some fashion +with the outer air. Well, perhaps we shall soon make a discovery." + +Eagerly and anxiously the little party pressed forward by the light of +the pocket electric lamps. They were obsessed by two thoughts--what +they might find and the necessity for aiding in the rescue of their +rivals. + +On and on they went, the darkness illuminated only by the torches they +carried. But they noticed that the air was still fresh, and that a +gentle wind blew toward them. The passage was undoubtedly artificial, +a tunnel made by the hands of men now long crumbled into dust. It had +a slightly upward slope, and this, Professor Bumper said, indicated +that it was bored upward and perhaps into the very heart of the +mountain somewhere in the interior of which was the Beecher party. + +Just how far they went they did not know, but it must have been more +than two miles. Yet they did not tire, for the way was smooth. + +Suddenly Tom, who, with Professor Bumper, was in the lead, uttered a +cry, as he held his torch above his head and flashed it about in a +circle. + +"We're blocked!" he exclaimed. "We're up against a stone wall!" + +It was but too true. Confronting them, and extending from side to side +across the passage and from roof to floor, was a great rough stone. +Immense and solid it seemed when they pushed on it in vain. + +"Nothing short of dynamite will move that," said Ned in despair. "This +is a blind lead. We'll have to go back." + +"But there must be something on the other side of that stone," cried +Tom. "See, it is pierced with holes, and through them comes a current +of air. If we could only move the stone!" + +"I believe it is an ancient door," remarked Professor Bumper. + +Eagerly and frantically they tried to move it by their combined weight. +The stone did not give the fraction of the breadth of a hair. + +"We'll have to go back and get some of your big tunnel blasting powder, +Tom," suggested Ned. + +As he spoke old Goosal glided forward. He had remained behind them in +the passage while they were trying to move the rock. Now he said +something in Spanish. + +"What does he mean?" asked Ned. + +"He asks that he be allowed to try," translated Professor Bumper. +"Sometimes, he says, there is a secret way of opening stone doors in +these underground caves. Let him try." + +Goosal seemed to be running his fingers lightly over the outer edge of +the door. He was muttering to himself in his Indian tongue. + +Suddenly he uttered an exclamation, and, as he did so, there was a +noise from the door itself. It was a grinding, scraping sound, a +rumble as though rocks were being rolled one against the other. + +Then the astonished eyes of the adventurers saw the great stone door +revolve on its axis and swing to one side, leaving a passage open +through which they could pass. Goosal had discovered the hidden +mechanism. + +What lay before them? + + + + +CHAPTER XXV + +THE IDOL OF GOLD + + +"Forward! cried Tom Swift. + +"Where?" asked Mr Damon, hanging back for an instant. "Bless my +compass, Tom! do you know where you're going?" + +"I haven't the least idea, but it must lead to something, or the +ancients who made this revolving stone door wouldn't have taken such +care to block the passage." + +"Ask Goosal if he knows anything about it," suggested Mr. Damon to the +professor. + +"He says he never was here before," translated the savant, "but years +ago, when he went into the hidden city by the cave we left yesterday, +he saw doors like this which opened this way." + +"Then we're on the right track!" cried Tom. "If this is the same kind +of door, it must lead to the same place. Ho for Kurzon and the idol of +gold!" + +As they passed through the stone door, Tom and Professor Bumper tried +to get some idea of the mechanism by which it worked. But they found +this impossible, it being hidden within the stone itself or in the +adjoining walls. But, in order that it might not close of itself and +entomb them, the portal was blocked open with stones found in the +passage. + +"It's always well to have a line of retreat open," said Tom. "There's +no telling what may lie beyond us." + +For a time there seemed to be nothing more than the same passage along +which they had come. Then the passage suddenly widened, like the large +end of a square funnel. Upward and outward the stone walls swept, and +they saw dimly before them, in the light of their torches, a vast +cavern, seemingly formed by the falling in of mountains, which, in +toppling over, had met overhead in a sort of rough arch, thus +protecting, in a great measure, that which lay beneath them. + +Goosal, who had brought with him some of the fiber bark torches, set a +bundle of them aflame. As they flared up, a wondrous sight was +revealed to Tom Swift and his friends. + +Stretching out before them, as though they stood at the end of an +elevated street and gazed down on it, was a city--a large city, with +streets, houses, open squares, temples, statues, fountains, dry for +centuries--a buried and forgotten city--a city in ruins--a city of the +dead, now dry as dust, but still a city, or, rather, the strangely +preserved remains of one. + +"Look!" whispered Tom. A louder voice just then, would have seemed a +sacrilege. "Look!" + +"Is it what we are looking for?" asked Ned in a low voice. + +"I believe it is," replied the professor. "It is the lost city of +Kurzon, or one just like it. And now if we can find the idol of gold +our search will be ended--at least the major part of it." + +"Where did you expect to find the idol?" asked Tom. + +"It should be in the main temple. Come, we will walk in the ancient +streets--streets where no feet but ours have trod in many centuries. +Come!" + +In eager silence they pressed on through this newly discovered +wonderland. For it was a wonderful city, or had been. Though much of +it was in ruins, probably caused by an earthquake or an eruption from a +volcano, the central portion, covered as it was by the overtoppling +mountains that formed the arching roof, was well preserved. + +There were rude but beautiful stone buildings. There were archways; +temples; public squares; and images, not at all beautiful, for they +seemed to be of man-monsters--doubtless ancient gods. There were +smoothly paved streets; wondrously carved fountains, some in ruins, all +now as dry as bone, but which must have been places of beauty where +youths and maidens gathered in the ancient days. + +Of the ancient population there was not a trace left. Tom and his +friends penetrated some of the houses, but not so much as a bone or a +heap of mouldering dust showed where the remains of the people were. +Either they had fled at the approaching doom of the city and were +buried elsewhere, or some strange fire or other force of nature had +consumed and obliterated them. + +"What a wealth of historic information I shall find here!" murmured +Professor Bumper, as he caught sight of many inscriptions in strange +characters on the walls and buildings. "I shall never get to the end +of them." + +"But what about the idol of gold?" asked Mr. Damon, "Do you think +you'll find that?" + +"We must hurry on to the temple over there," said the scientist, +indicating a building further along. + +"And then we must see about rescuing your rivals, Professor," put in +Tom. + +"Yes, Tom. But fortunately we are on the ground here before them," +agreed the professor. + +Undoubtedly it was the chief temple, or place of worship, of the +long-dead race which the explorers now entered. It was a building +beautiful in its barbaric style, and yet simple. There were massive +walls, and a great inner court, at the end of which seemed to be some +sort of altar. And then, as they lighted fresh torches, and pressed +forward with them and their electric lights, they saw that which caused +a cry of satisfaction to burst from all of them. + +"The idol of gold!" + +Yes, there it squatted, an ugly, misshapen, figure, a cross between a +toad and a gila monster, half man, half beast, with big red +eyes--rubies probably--that gleamed in the repulsive golden face. And +the whole figure, weighing many pounds, seemed to be of SOLID GOLD! + +Eagerly the others followed Professor Bumper up the altar steps to the +very throne of the golden idol. The scientist touched it, tried to +raise it and make sure of its solidity and material. + +"This is it!" he cried. "It is the idol of gold! I have found-- We have +found it, for it belongs to all of us!" + +"Hurray!" cried Tom Swift, and Ned and Mr. Damon joined in the cry. + +There was no need for silence or caution now; and yet, as they stood +about the squat and ugly figure, which, in spite of its hideousness, +was worth a fortune intrinsically and as an antique, they heard from +the direction of the stone passage a noise. + +"What is it?" asked Tom Swift. + +There was a murmur of voices. + +"Indians!" cried Professor Bumper, recognizing the language--a mixture +of Spanish and Indian. + +The cave was illuminated by the glare of other torches which seemed to +rush forward. A moment later it was seen that they were being carried +by a number of Indians. + +"Friends," murmured Goosal, using the Spanish term, "Amigos." + +"They are our own Indians!" cried Tom Swift. "I see Tolpec!" and he +pointed to the native who had deserted from Jacinto's force to help +them. + +"How did they get here?" asked Professor Bumper. + +This was quickly told. In their camp, where, under the leadership of +Tolpec they had been left to do the excavating, the natives had heard, +seen and felt the effects of the storm and the earthquake, though it +did little damage in their vicinity. But they became alarmed for the +safety of the professor and his party and, at Tolpec's suggestion, set +off in search of them. + +The Indians had seen, passing along the trail, the uprooted trees, and +had noted the footsteps of the explorers going down to the stone +passage. It was easy for them to determine that Tom and his friends +had gone in, since the marks of their boots were plainly in evidence in +the soft soil. + +None of the Indians was as much wrought up over the discovery of Kurzon +and the idol as were the white adventurers. The gold, of course, meant +something to the natives, but they were indifferent to the wonders of +the underground city. Perhaps they had heard too many legends +concerning such things to be impressed. + +"That statue is yours--all yours," said old Goosal when he had talked +with his relatives and friends among the natives. "They all say what +you find you keep, and we will help you keep it." + +"That's good," murmured Professor Bumper. "There was some doubt in my +mind as to our right to this, but after all, the natives who live in +this land are the original owners, and if they pass title to us it is +clear. That settles the last difficulty." + +"Except that of getting the idol out," said Mr. Damon. + +"Oh, we'll accomplish that!" cried Tom. + +"I can hardly believe my good luck," declared Professor Bumper. "I +shall write a whole book on this idol alone and then----" + +Once more came an interruption. This time it was from another +direction, but it was of the same character--an approaching band of +torch-bearers. They were Indians, too, but leading them were a number +of whites. + +And at their head was no less personage than Professor Beecher himself. + +For a moment, as the three parties stood together in the ancient +temple, in the glare of many torches, no one spoke. Then Professor +Bumper found his voice. + +"We are glad to see you," he said to his rival. "That is glad to see +you alive, for we saw the landslide bury you. And we were coming to +dig you out. We thought this cave--the cave of the buried city--would +lead us to you easier than by digging through the slide. We have just +discovered this idol," and he put his hand on the grim golden image. + +"Oh, you have discovered it, have you?" asked Professor Beecher, and +his voice was bitter. + +"Yes, not ten minutes ago. The natives have kindly acknowledged my +right to it under the law of priority. I am sorry but----" + +With a look of disgust and chagrined disappointment on his face, +Professor Beecher turned to the other scientists and said: + +"Let us go. We are too late. He has what I came after." + +"Well, it is the fortune of war--and discovery," put in Mr. Hardy, one +of the party who seemed the least ill-natured. "Your luck might have +been ours, Professor Bumper. I congratulate you." + +"Thank you! Are you sure your party is all right--not in need of +assistance? How did you get out of the place you were buried?" + +"Thank you! We do not require any help. It was good of you to think of +us. But we got out the way we came in. We did not enter the tunnel as +you did, but came in through another entrance which was not closed by +the landslide. Then we made a turn through a gateway in a tunnel +connecting with ours--a gateway which seems to have been opened by the +earthquake--and we came here, just now. + +"Too late, I see, to claim the discovery of the idol of gold," went on +Mr. Hardy. "But I trust you will be generous, and allow us to make +observations of the buildings and other relics." + +"As much as you please, and with the greatest pleasure in the world," +was the prompt answer of Professor Bumper. "All I lay sole claim to is +the golden idol. You are at liberty to take whatever else you find in +Kurzon and to make what observations you like." + +"That is generous of you, and quite in contrast to--er--to the conduct +of our leader. I trust he may awaken to a sense of the injustice he +did you." + +But Professor Beecher was not there to hear this. He had stalked away +in anger. + +"Humph!" grunted Tom. Then he continued: "That story about a +government concession was all a fake, Professor, else he'd have put up +a fight now. Contemptible sneak!" + + +In fact the story of Tom Swift's trip to the underground land of +wonders is ended, for with the discovery of the idol of gold the main +object of the expedition was accomplished. But their adventures were +not over by any means, though there is not room in this volume to +record them. + +Suffice it to say that means were at once taken to get the golden image +out of the cave of the ancient city. It was not accomplished without +hard work, for the gold was heavy, and Professor Bumper would not, +naturally, consent to the shaving off of so much as an ear or part of +the flat nose, to say nothing of one of the half dozen extra arms and +legs with which the ugly idol was furnished. + +Finally it was safely taken out of the cave, and along the stone +passage to the opening formed by the overthrown trees, and thence on to +camp. + +And at the camp a surprise awaited Tom. + +Some long-delayed mail had been forwarded from the nearest place of +civilization and there were letters for all, including several for our +hero. One in particular he picked out first and read eagerly. + +"Well, is every little thing all right, Tom?" asked Ned, as he saw a +cheerful grin spread itself over his chum's face. + +"I should say it is, and then some! Look here, Ned. This is a letter +from----" + +"I know. Mary Nestor. Go on." + +"How'd you guess?" + +"Oh, I'm a mind-reader." + +"Huh! Well, you know she was away when I went to call to say good-bye, +and I was a little afraid Beecher had got an inside edge on me." + +"Had he?" + +"No, but he tried hard enough. He went to see Mary in Fayetteville, +just as you heard, before he came on to join his party, but he didn't +pay much of a visit to her." + +"No?" + +"No. Mary told him he'd better hurry along to Central America, or +wherever it was he intended going, as she didn't care for him as much +as he flattered himself she did." + +"Good!" cried Ned. "Shake, old man. I'm glad!" + +They shook hands. + +"Well, what's the matter? Didn't you read all of her letter?" asked +Ned when he saw his chum once more perusing the epistle. + +"No. There's a postscript here." + + +"'Sorry I couldn't see you before you left. It was a mistake, but when +you come back----'" + + +"Oh, that part isn't any of your affair!" and, blushing under his tan, +Tom thrust the letter into his pocket and strode away, while Ned +laughed happily. + +With the idol of gold safe in their possession, Professor Bumper's +party could devote their time to making other explorations in the +buried city. This they did, as is testified to by a long list of books +and magazine articles since turned out by the scientist, dealing +strictly with archaeological subjects, touching on the ancient Mayan +race and its civilization, with particular reference to their system of +computing time. + +Professor Beecher, young and foolish, would not consent to delve into +the riches of the ancient city, being too much chagrined over the loss +of the idol. It seems he had really promised to give a part of it to +Mary Nestor. But he never got the chance. + +His colleagues, after their first disappointment at being beaten, +joined forces with Professor Bumper in exploring the old city, and made +many valuable discoveries. + +In one point Professor Bumper had done his rival an injustice. That +was in thinking Professor Beecher was responsible for the treachery of +Jacinto. That was due to the plotter's own work. It was true that +Professor Beecher had tentatively engaged Jacinto, and had sent word to +him to keep other explorers away from the vicinity of the ancient city +if possible; but Jacinto, who did not return Professor Bumper's money, +as he had promised, had acted treacherously in order to enrich himself. +Professor Beecher had nothing to do with that, nor had he with the +taking of the map, as has been seen, the loss of which, after all, was +a blessing in disguise, for Kurzon would never have been located by +following the directions given there, as it was very inaccurate. + +In another point it was demonstrated that the old documents were at +fault. This was in reference to the golden idol having been overthrown +and another set up in its place, an act which had caused the +destruction of Kurzon. + +It is true that the city was destroyed, or rather, buried, but this +catastrophe was probably brought about by an earthquake. And another +great idol, one of clay, was found, perhaps a rival of Quitzel, but it +was this clay image which was thrown down and broken, and not the +golden one. + +Perhaps an effort had been made, just before the burying of the city, +to change idols and the system of worship, but Quitzel seemed to have +held his own. The old manuscripts were not very reliable, it was +found, except in general. + +"Well, I guess this will hold Beecher for a while," said Tom, the night +of the arrival of Mary's letter, and after he had written one in +answer, which was dispatched by a runner to the nearest place whence +mail could be forwarded. + +"Yes, luck seems to favor you," replied Ned. "You've had a hand in the +discovery of the idol of gold, and----" + +"Yes. And I discovered something else I wasn't quite sure of," +interrupted Tom, as he felt to make sure he had a certain letter safe +in his pocket. + +It was several weeks later that the explorations of Kurzon came to an +end--a temporary end, for the rainy season set in, when the tropics are +unsuitable for white men. Tom, Professor Bumper, Ned and Mr. Damon set +sail for the United States, the valuable idol of gold safe on board. + +And there, with their vessel plowing the blue waters of the Caribbean +Sea, we will take leave of Tom Swift and his friends. + + + + + + + + + +End of the Project Gutenberg EBook of Tom Swift in the Land of Wonders, by +Victor Appleton + +*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK TOM SWIFT IN THE LAND OF WONDERS *** + +***** This file should be named 499.txt or 499.zip ***** +This and all associated files of various formats will be found in: + https://www.gutenberg.org/4/9/499/ + +Produced by Charles Keller. + +Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions +will be renamed. + +Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no +one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation +(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without +permission and without paying copyright royalties. Special rules, +set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to +copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to +protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark. Project +Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you +charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission. If you +do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the +rules is very easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose +such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and +research. They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do +practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks. Redistribution is +subject to the trademark license, especially commercial +redistribution. + + + +*** START: FULL LICENSE *** + +THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE +PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK + +To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free +distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work +(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project +Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project +Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at +https://gutenberg.org/license). + + +Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic works + +1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to +and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property +(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all +the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy +all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession. +If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the +terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or +entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8. + +1.B. "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark. It may only be +used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who +agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few +things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works +even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See +paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement +and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. See paragraph 1.E below. + +1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation" +or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works. Nearly all the individual works in the +collection are in the public domain in the United States. If an +individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are +located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from +copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative +works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg +are removed. Of course, we hope that you will support the Project +Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by +freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of +this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with +the work. You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by +keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project +Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others. + +1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern +what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are in +a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, check +the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement +before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or +creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project +Gutenberg-tm work. The Foundation makes no representations concerning +the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United +States. + +1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg: + +1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate +access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently +whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the +phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project +Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed, +copied or distributed: + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + +1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived +from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is +posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied +and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees +or charges. If you are redistributing or providing access to a work +with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the +work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 +through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the +Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or +1.E.9. + +1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted +with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution +must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional +terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms will be linked +to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the +permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work. + +1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this +work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm. + +1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this +electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without +prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with +active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project +Gutenberg-tm License. + +1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary, +compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any +word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access to or +distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than +"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version +posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org), +you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a +copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon +request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other +form. Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1. + +1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying, +performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works +unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. + +1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing +access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided +that + +- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from + the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method + you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is + owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he + has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the + Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments + must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you + prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax + returns. Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and + sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the + address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to + the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation." + +- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies + you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he + does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm + License. You must require such a user to return or + destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium + and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of + Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any + money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the + electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days + of receipt of the work. + +- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free + distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set +forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from +both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael +Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark. Contact the +Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below. + +1.F. + +1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable +effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread +public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm +collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain +"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or +corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual +property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a +computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by +your equipment. + +1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right +of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project +Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all +liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal +fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT +LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE +PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH F3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE +TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE +LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR +INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH +DAMAGE. + +1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a +defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can +receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a +written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you +received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with +your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you with +the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a +refund. If you received the work electronically, the person or entity +providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to +receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If the second copy +is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further +opportunities to fix the problem. + +1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth +in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS' WITH NO OTHER +WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO +WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE. + +1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied +warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages. +If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the +law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be +interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by +the applicable state law. The invalidity or unenforceability of any +provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions. + +1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the +trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone +providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance +with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production, +promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works, +harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees, +that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do +or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm +work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any +Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause. + + +Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm + +Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of +electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers +including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It exists +because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from +people in all walks of life. + +Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the +assistance they need, is critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's +goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will +remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure +and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations. +To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation +and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4 +and the Foundation web page at https://www.pglaf.org. + + +Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive +Foundation + +The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit +501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the +state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal +Revenue Service. The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification +number is 64-6221541. Its 501(c)(3) letter is posted at +https://pglaf.org/fundraising. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent +permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws. + +The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S. +Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered +throughout numerous locations. Its business office is located at +809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email +business@pglaf.org. Email contact links and up to date contact +information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official +page at https://pglaf.org + +For additional contact information: + Dr. Gregory B. Newby + Chief Executive and Director + gbnewby@pglaf.org + + +Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation + +Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide +spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of +increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be +freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest +array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations +($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt +status with the IRS. + +The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating +charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United +States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a +considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up +with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations +where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To +SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any +particular state visit https://pglaf.org + +While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we +have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition +against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who +approach us with offers to donate. + +International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make +any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from +outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff. + +Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation +methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other +ways including including checks, online payments and credit card +donations. To donate, please visit: https://pglaf.org/donate + + +Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. + +Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm +concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared +with anyone. For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project +Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support. + + +Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed +editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S. +unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not necessarily +keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition. + + +Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility: + + https://www.gutenberg.org + +This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm, +including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary +Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to +subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks. Binary files differdiff --git a/LICENSE.txt b/LICENSE.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..6312041 --- /dev/null +++ b/LICENSE.txt @@ -0,0 +1,11 @@ +This eBook, including all associated images, markup, improvements, +metadata, and any other content or labor, has been confirmed to be +in the PUBLIC DOMAIN IN THE UNITED STATES. + +Procedures for determining public domain status are described in +the "Copyright How-To" at https://www.gutenberg.org. + +No investigation has been made concerning possible copyrights in +jurisdictions other than the United States. Anyone seeking to utilize +this eBook outside of the United States should confirm copyright +status under the laws that apply to them. diff --git a/README.md b/README.md new file mode 100644 index 0000000..118151a --- /dev/null +++ b/README.md @@ -0,0 +1,2 @@ +Project Gutenberg (https://www.gutenberg.org) public repository for +eBook #499 (https://www.gutenberg.org/ebooks/499) diff --git a/old/20tom10.txt b/old/20tom10.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..26b3b87 --- /dev/null +++ b/old/20tom10.txt @@ -0,0 +1,7520 @@ +The Project Gutenberg Etext of Tom Swift in the Land of Wonders +****Subtitled: The Underground Search for the Idol of Gold**** + +#20 in our Tom Swift series + + +Copyright laws are changing all over the world, be sure to check +the copyright laws for your country before posting these files!! + +Please take a look at the important information in this header. +We encourage you to keep this file on your own disk, keeping an +electronic path open for the next readers. Do not remove this. + + +**Welcome To The World of Free Plain Vanilla Electronic Texts** + +**Etexts Readable By Both Humans and By Computers, Since 1971** + +*These Etexts Prepared By Hundreds of Volunteers and Donations* + +Information on contacting Project Gutenberg to get Etexts, and +further information is included below. We need your donations. + + +Tom Swift in the Land of Wonders + +by Victor Appleton + +April, 1996 [Etext #499] + + +The Project Gutenberg Etext of Tom Swift in the Land of Wonders +*****This file should be named 20tom10.txt or 20tom10.zip****** + +Corrected EDITIONS of our etexts get a new NUMBER, 20tom11.txt. +VERSIONS based on separate sources get new LETTER, 20tom10a.txt. + + +We are now trying to release all our books one month in advance +of the official release dates, for time for better editing. + +Please note: neither this list nor its contents are final till +midnight of the last day of the month of any such announcement. +The official release date of all Project Gutenberg Etexts is at +Midnight, Central Time, of the last day of the stated month. A +preliminary version may often be posted for suggestion, comment +and editing by those who wish to do so. To be sure you have an +up to date first edition [xxxxx10x.xxx] please check file sizes +in the first week of the next month. Since our ftp program has +a bug in it that scrambles the date [tried to fix and failed] a +look at the file size will have to do, but we will try to see a +new copy has at least one byte more or less. + + +Information about Project Gutenberg (one page) + +We produce about two million dollars for each hour we work. The +fifty hours is one conservative estimate for how long it we take +to get any etext selected, entered, proofread, edited, copyright +searched and analyzed, the copyright letters written, etc. This +projected audience is one hundred million readers. If our value +per text is nominally estimated at one dollar then we produce $2 +million dollars per hour this year as we release thirty-two text +files per month: or 400 more Etexts in 1996 for a total of 800. +If these reach just 10% of the computerized population, then the +total should reach 80 billion Etexts. + +The Goal of Project Gutenberg is to Give Away One Trillion Etext +Files by the December 31, 2001. [10,000 x 100,000,000=Trillion] +This is ten thousand titles each to one hundred million readers, +which is only 10% of the present number of computer users. 2001 +should have at least twice as many computer users as that, so it +will require us reaching less than 5% of the users in 2001. + + +We need your donations more than ever! + + +All donations should be made to "Project Gutenberg/IBC", and are +tax deductible to the extent allowable by law ("IBC" is Illinois +Benedictine College). (Subscriptions to our paper newsletter go +to IBC, too) + +For these and other matters, please mail to: + +Project Gutenberg +P. O. Box 2782 +Champaign, IL 61825 + +When all other email fails try our Executive Director: +Michael S. Hart <hart@pobox.com> + +We would prefer to send you this information by email +(Internet, Bitnet, Compuserve, ATTMAIL or MCImail). + +****** +If you have an FTP program (or emulator), please +FTP directly to the Project Gutenberg archives: +[Mac users, do NOT point and click. . .type] + +ftp uiarchive.cso.uiuc.edu +login: anonymous +password: your@login +cd etext/etext90 through /etext96 +or cd etext/articles [get suggest gut for more information] +dir [to see files] +get or mget [to get files. . .set bin for zip files] +GET INDEX?00.GUT +for a list of books +and +GET NEW GUT for general information +and +MGET GUT* for newsletters. + +**Information prepared by the Project Gutenberg legal advisor** +(Three Pages) + + +***START**THE SMALL PRINT!**FOR PUBLIC DOMAIN ETEXTS**START*** +Why is this "Small Print!" statement here? You know: lawyers. +They tell us you might sue us if there is something wrong with +your copy of this etext, even if you got it for free from +someone other than us, and even if what's wrong is not our +fault. So, among other things, this "Small Print!" statement +disclaims most of our liability to you. It also tells you how +you can distribute copies of this etext if you want to. + +*BEFORE!* YOU USE OR READ THIS ETEXT +By using or reading any part of this PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm +etext, you indicate that you understand, agree to and accept +this "Small Print!" statement. If you do not, you can receive +a refund of the money (if any) you paid for this etext by +sending a request within 30 days of receiving it to the person +you got it from. If you received this etext on a physical +medium (such as a disk), you must return it with your request. + +ABOUT PROJECT GUTENBERG-TM ETEXTS +This PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm etext, like most PROJECT GUTENBERG- +tm etexts, is a "public domain" work distributed by Professor +Michael S. Hart through the Project Gutenberg Association at +Illinois Benedictine College (the "Project"). Among other +things, this means that no one owns a United States copyright +on or for this work, so the Project (and you!) can copy and +distribute it in the United States without permission and +without paying copyright royalties. Special rules, set forth +below, apply if you wish to copy and distribute this etext +under the Project's "PROJECT GUTENBERG" trademark. + +To create these etexts, the Project expends considerable +efforts to identify, transcribe and proofread public domain +works. Despite these efforts, the Project's etexts and any +medium they may be on may contain "Defects". Among other +things, Defects may take the form of incomplete, inaccurate or +corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other +intellectual property infringement, a defective or damaged +disk or other etext medium, a computer virus, or computer +codes that damage or cannot be read by your equipment. + +LIMITED WARRANTY; DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES +But for the "Right of Replacement or Refund" described below, +[1] the Project (and any other party you may receive this +etext from as a PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm etext) disclaims all +liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including +legal fees, and [2] YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE OR +UNDER STRICT LIABILITY, OR FOR BREACH OF WARRANTY OR CONTRACT, +INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE +OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES, EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE +POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. + +If you discover a Defect in this etext within 90 days of +receiving it, you can receive a refund of the money (if any) +you paid for it by sending an explanatory note within that +time to the person you received it from. If you received it +on a physical medium, you must return it with your note, and +such person may choose to alternatively give you a replacement +copy. If you received it electronically, such person may +choose to alternatively give you a second opportunity to +receive it electronically. + +THIS ETEXT IS OTHERWISE PROVIDED TO YOU "AS-IS". NO OTHER +WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, ARE MADE TO YOU AS +TO THE ETEXT OR ANY MEDIUM IT MAY BE ON, INCLUDING BUT NOT +LIMITED TO WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A +PARTICULAR PURPOSE. + +Some states do not allow disclaimers of implied warranties or +the exclusion or limitation of consequential damages, so the +above disclaimers and exclusions may not apply to you, and you +may have other legal rights. + +INDEMNITY +You will indemnify and hold the Project, its directors, +officers, members and agents harmless from all liability, cost +and expense, including legal fees, that arise directly or +indirectly from any of the following that you do or cause: +[1] distribution of this etext, [2] alteration, modification, +or addition to the etext, or [3] any Defect. + +DISTRIBUTION UNDER "PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm" +You may distribute copies of this etext electronically, or by +disk, book or any other medium if you either delete this +"Small Print!" and all other references to Project Gutenberg, +or: + +[1] Only give exact copies of it. Among other things, this + requires that you do not remove, alter or modify the + etext or this "small print!" statement. You may however, + if you wish, distribute this etext in machine readable + binary, compressed, mark-up, or proprietary form, + including any form resulting from conversion by word pro- + cessing or hypertext software, but only so long as + *EITHER*: + + [*] The etext, when displayed, is clearly readable, and + does *not* contain characters other than those + intended by the author of the work, although tilde + (~), asterisk (*) and underline (_) characters may + be used to convey punctuation intended by the + author, and additional characters may be used to + indicate hypertext links; OR + + [*] The etext may be readily converted by the reader at + no expense into plain ASCII, EBCDIC or equivalent + form by the program that displays the etext (as is + the case, for instance, with most word processors); + OR + + [*] You provide, or agree to also provide on request at + no additional cost, fee or expense, a copy of the + etext in its original plain ASCII form (or in EBCDIC + or other equivalent proprietary form). + +[2] Honor the etext refund and replacement provisions of this + "Small Print!" statement. + +[3] Pay a trademark license fee to the Project of 20% of the + net profits you derive calculated using the method you + already use to calculate your applicable taxes. If you + don't derive profits, no royalty is due. Royalties are + payable to "Project Gutenberg Association / Illinois + Benedictine College" within the 60 days following each + date you prepare (or were legally required to prepare) + your annual (or equivalent periodic) tax return. + +WHAT IF YOU *WANT* TO SEND MONEY EVEN IF YOU DON'T HAVE TO? +The Project gratefully accepts contributions in money, time, +scanning machines, OCR software, public domain etexts, royalty +free copyright licenses, and every other sort of contribution +you can think of. Money should be paid to "Project Gutenberg +Association / Illinois Benedictine College". + +*END*THE SMALL PRINT! FOR PUBLIC DOMAIN ETEXTS*Ver.04.29.93*END* + + + + + +Scanned by Charles Keller with +OmniPage Professional OCR software +donated by Caere Corporation, 1-800-535-7226. +Contact Mike Lough <Mikel@caere.com> + + + + + +TOM SWIFT IN THE LAND OF WONDERS + +OR + +The Underground Search +for the Idol of Gold + + +BY VICTOR APPLETON + +AUTHOR OF +"TOM SWIFT AND HIS MOTORCYCLE," +"TOM SWIFT AND HIS BIG TUNNEL," +"THE MOVING PICTURE BOYS SERIES," +"THE MOTION PICTURE CHUMS SERIES," ETC. + + + + +THE TOM SWIFT SERIES + +1 TOM SWIFT AND HIS MOTOR CYCLE +2 TOM SWIFT AND HIS MOTOR BOAT +3 TOM SWIFT AND HIS AIRSHIP +4 TOM SWIFT AND HIS SUBMARINE BOAT +5 TOM SWIFT AND HIS ELECTRIC RUNABOUT +6 TOM SWIFT AND HIS WIRELESS MESSAGE +7 TOM SWIFT AMONG THE DIAMOND MAKERS +8 TOM SWIFT IN THE CAVES OF ICE +9 TOM SWIFT AND HIS SKY RACER +10 TOM SWIFT AND HIS ELECTRIC RIFLE +11 TOM SWIFT IN THE CITY OF GOLD +12 TOM SWIFT AND HIS AIR GLIDER +13 TOM SWIFT IN CAPTIVITY +14 TOM SWIFT AND HIS WIZARD CAMERA +15 TOM SWIFT AND HIS GREAT SEARCHLIGHT +16 TOM SWIFT AND HIS GIANT CANNON +17 TOM SWIFT AND HIS PHOTO TELEPHONE +18 TOM SWIFT AND HIS AERIAL WARSHIP +19 TOM SWIFT AND HIS BIG TUNNEL +20 TOM SWIFT IN THE LAND OF WONDERS +21 TOM SWIFT AND HIS WAR TANK +22 TOM SWIFT AND HIS AIR SCOUT +23 TOM SWIFT AND HIS UNDERSEA SEARCH +24 TOM SWIFT AMONG THE FIRE FIGHTERS +25 TOM SWIFT AND HIS ELECTRIC LOCOMOTIVE +26 TOM SWIFT AND HIS FLYING BOAT +27 TOM SWIFT AND HIS GREAT OIL GUSHER +28 TOM SWIFT AND HIS CHEST OF SECRETS +29 TOM SWIFT AND HIS AIRLINE EXPRESS +*** + + + + +Tom Swift in the Land of Wonders + + + + +CONTENTS + + + +I A WONDERFUL STORY +II PROFESSOR BUMPER ARRIVES +III BLESSINGS AND ENTHUSIASM +IV FENIMORE BEECHER +V THE LITTLE GREEN GOD +VI UNPLEASANT NEWS +VII TOM HEARS SOMETHING +VIII OFF FOR HONDURAS +IX VAL JACINTO +X IN THE WILDS +XI THE VAMPIRES +XII A FALSE FRIEND +XIII FORWARD AGAIN +XIV A NEW GUIDE +XV IN THE COILS +XVI A MEETING IN THE JUNGLE +XVII THE LOST MAP +XVIII "EL TIGRE!" +XIX POISONED ARROWS +XX AN OLD LEGEND +XXI THE CAVERN +XXII THE STORM +XXIII ENTOMBED ALIVE +XXIV THE REVOLVING STONE +XXV THE IDOL OF GOLD + + + + + +TOM SWIFT IN THE LAND OF WONDERS + + + + + +CHAPTER I + +A WONDERFUL STORY + + +Tom Swift, who had been slowly looking +through the pages of a magazine, in the contents +of which he seemed to be deeply interested, +turned the final folio, ruffled the sheets back +again to look at a certain map and drawing, and +then, slapping the book down on a table before +him, with a noise not unlike that of a shot, +exclaimed: + +"Well, that is certainly one wonderful story!" + +"What's it about, Tom?" asked his chum, Ned +Newton. "Something about inside baseball, or a +new submarine that can be converted into an +airship on short notice?" + +"Neither one, you--you unscientific heathen," +answered Tom, with a laugh at Ned. "Though +that isn't saying such a machine couldn't be invented." + +"I believe you--that is if you got on its trail," +returned Ned, and there was warm admiration in +his voice. + +"As for inside baseball, or outside, for that +matter, I hardly believe I'd be able to tell third +base from the second base, it's so long since I +went to a game," proceeded Tom. "I've been +too busy on that new airship stabilizer dad gave +me an idea for. I've been working too hard, +that's a fact. I need a vacation, and maybe a +good baseball game----" + +He stopped and looked at the magazine he had +so hastily slapped down. Something he had read +in it seemed to fascinate him. + +"I wonder if it can possibly be true," he went +on. "It sounds like the wildest dream of a +professional sleep-walker; and yet, when I stop to +think, it isn't much worse than some of the +things we've gone through with, Ned." + +"Say, for the love of rice-pudding! will you +get down to brass tacks and strike a trial +balance? What are you talking of, anyhow? Is it +a joke?" + +"A joke?" + +"Yes. What you just read in that magazine +which seems to cause you so much excitement." + +"Well, it may be a joke; and yet the professor +seems very much in earnest about it," replied +Tom. "It certainly is one wonderful story!" + +"So you said before. Come on--the `fillium' +is busted. Splice it, or else put in a new reel and +on with the show. I'd like to know what's doing. +What professor are you talking of?" + +"Professor Swyington Bumper." + +"Swyington Bumper?" and Ned's voice +showed that his memory was a bit hazy. + +"Yes. You ought to remember him. He was +on the steamer when I went down to Peru to +help the Titus Brothers dig the big tunnel. That +plotter Waddington, or some of his tools, +dropped a bomb where it might have done us +some injury, but Professor Bumper, who was a +fellow passenger, on his way to South America +to look for the lost city of Pelone, calmly picked +up the bomb, plucked out the fuse, and saved +us from bad injuries, if not death. And he was +as cool about it as an ice-cream cone. Surely +you remember!" + +"Swyington Bumper! Oh, yes, now I remember +him," said Ned Newton. "But what has +he got to do with a wonderful story? Has he +written more about the lost city of Pelone? If +he has I don't see anything so very wonderful +in that." + +"There isn't," agreed Tom. "But this isn't +that," and Tom picked up the magazine and +leafed it to find the article he had been reading. + +"Let's have a look at it," suggested Ned. "You +act as though you might be vitally interested +in it. Maybe you're thinking of joining forces +with the professor again, as you did when you +dug the big tunnel." + +"Oh, no. I haven't any such idea," Tom said. +"I've got enough work laid out now to keep me +in Shopton for the next year. I have no notion +of going anywhere with Professor Bumper. Yet +I can't help being impressed by this," and, +having found the article in the magazine to which +he referred, he handed it to his chum. + +"Why, it's by Bumper himself!" exclaimed Ned. + +"Yes. Though there's nothing remarkable in +that, seeing that he is constantly contributing +articles to various publications or writing books. +It's the story itself that's so wonderful. To +save you the trouble of wading through a lot +of scientific detail, which I know you don't care +about, I'll tell you that the story is about a queer +idol of solid gold, weighing many pounds, and, +in consequence, of great value." + +"Of solid gold you say?" asked Ned eagerly. + +"That's it. Got on your banking air already," +Tom laughed. "To sum it up for you--notice +I use the word `sum,' which is very appropriate +for a bank--the professor has got on the track +of another lost or hidden city. This one, the +name of which doesn't appear, is in the Copan +valley of Honduras, and----" + +"Copan," interrupted Ned. "It sounds like +the name of some new floor varnish." + +"Well, it isn't, though it might be," laughed +Tom. "Copan is a city, in the Department of +Copan, near the boundary between Honduras and +Guatemala. A fact I learned from the article +and not because I remembered my geography." + +"I was going to say," remarked Ned with a +smile, "that you were coming it rather strong +on the school-book stuff." + +"Oh, it's all plainly written down there," and +Tom waved toward the magazine at which Ned +was looking. "As you'll see, if you take the +trouble to go through it, as I did, Copan is, or +maybe was, for all I know, one of the most +important centers of the Mayan civilization." + +"What's Mayan?" asked Ned. "You see I'm +going to imbibe my information by the deductive +rather than the excavative process," he added +with a laugh. + +"I see," laughed Tom. "Well, Mayan refers +to the Mayas, an aboriginal people of Yucatan. +The Mayas had a peculiar civilization of their +own, thousands of years ago, and their calendar +system was so involved----" + +"Never mind about dates," again interrupted +Ned. "Get down to brass tacks. I'm willing +to take your word for it that there's a Copan +valley in Honduras. But what has your friend +Professor Bumper to do with it?" + +"This. He has come across some old +manuscripts, or ancient document records, referring +to this valley, and they state, according to this +article he has written for the magazine, that +somewhere in the valley is a wonderful city, +traces of which have been found twenty to forty +feet below the surface, on which great trees are +growing, showing that the city was covered +hundreds, if not thousands, of years ago." + +"But where does the idol of gold come in?" + +"I'm coming to that," said Tom. "Though, +if Professor Bumper has his way, the idol will +be coming out instead of coming in." + +"You mean he wants to get it and take it +away from the Copan valley, Tom?" + +"That's it, Ned. It has great value not only +from the amount of pure gold that is in it, but +as an antique. I fancy the professor is more +interested in that aspect of it. But he's written +a wonderful story, telling how he happened to +come across the ancient manuscripts in the tomb +of some old Indian whose mummy he unearthed +on a trip to Central America. + +"Then he tells of the trouble he had in +discovering how to solve the key to the translation +code; but when he did, he found a great story +unfolded to him. + +"This story has to do with the hidden city, +and tells of the ancient civilization of those who +lived in the Copan valley thousands of years ago. +The people held this idol of gold to be their +greatest treasure, and they put to death many of +other tribes who sought to steal it." + +"Whew!" whistled Ned. "That IS some yarn. +But what is Professor Bumper going to do about it?" + +"I don't know. The article seems to be written +with an idea of interesting scientists and +research societies, so that they will raise money +to conduct a searching expedition. + +"Perhaps by this time the party may be +organized--this magazine is several months old. +I have been so busy on my stabilizer patent that +I haven't kept up with current literature. Take +it home and read it! Ned. That is if you're +through telling me about my affairs," for Ned, +who had formerly worked in the Shopton bank, +had recently been made general financial man- +ager of the interests of Tom and his father. The +two were inventors and proverbially poor business +men, though they had amassed a fortune. + +"Your financial affairs are all right, Tom," said +Ned. "I have just been going over the books, +and I'll submit a detailed report later." + +The telephone bell rang and Tom picked up +the instrument from the desk. As he answered in +the usual way and then listened a moment, a +strange look came over his face. + +"Well, this certainly is wonderful!" he exclaimed, +in much the same manner as when he had finished +reading the article about the idol. "It certainly +is a strange coincidence," he added, +speaking in an aside to Ned while he himself +still listened to what was being told to him +over the telephone wire. + + + +CHAPTER II + +PROFESSOR BUMPER ARRIVES + + +"What's the matter, Tom? What is it?" +asked Ned Newton, attracted by the strange +manner of his chum at the telephone. "Has +anything happened?" + +But the young inventor was too busy listening +to the unseen speaker to answer his chum, +even if he heard what Ned remarked, which is +doubtful. + +"Well, I might as well wait until he is +through," mused Ned, as he started to leave the +room. Then as Tom motioned to him to remain, +he murmured: "He may have something +to say to me later. But I wonder who is talking +to him." + +There was no way of finding out, however, +until Tom had a chance to talk to Ned, and at +present the young scientist was eagerly listening +to what came over the wire. Occasionally Ned +could hear him say: + +"You don't tell me! That is surprising! Yes +--yes! Of course if it's true it means a big +thing, I can understand that. What's that? No, +I couldn't make a promise like that. I'm sorry, +but----" + +Then the person at the other end of the wire +must have plunged into something very interesting +and absorbing, for Tom did not again +interrupt by interjected remarks. + +Tom. Swift, as has been said, was an inventor, +as was his father. Mr. Swift was now rather old +and feeble, taking only a nominal part in the +activities of the firm made up of himself and his +son. But his inventions were still used, many +of them being vital to the business and trade of +this country. + +Tom and his father lived in the village of +Shopton, New York, and their factories covered +many acres of ground. Those who wish to read +of the earliest activities of Tom in the inventive +line are referred to the initial volume, "Tom +Swift and His Motor Cycle." From then on he +and his father had many and exciting adventures. +In a motor boat, an airship, and a submarine +respectively the young inventor had gone through +many perils. On some of the trips his chum, +Ned Newton, accompanied him, and very often +in the party was a Mr. Wakefield Damon, who +had a curious habit of "blessing" everything +that happened to strike his fancy. + +Besides Tom and his father, the Swift household +was made up of Eradicate Sampson, a colored +man-of-all-work, who, with his mule Boomerang, +did what he could to keep the grounds +around the house in order. There was also Mrs. +Baggert, the housekeeper, Tom's mother being +dead. Mr. Damon, living in a neighboring town, +was a frequent visitor in the Swift home. + +Mary Nestor, a girl of Shopton, might also +be mentioned. She and Tom were more than +just good friends. Tom had an idea that some +day----. But there, I promised not to tell that +part, at least until the young people themselves +were ready to have a certain fact announced. + +From one activity to another had Tom Swift +gone, now constructing some important invention +for himself, as among others, when he made +the photo-telephone, or developed a great +searchlight which he presented to the Government +for use in detecting smugglers on the +border. + +The book immediately preceding this is called +"Tom Swift and His Bit, Tunnel," and deals +with the efforts of the young inventor to help a +firm of contractors penetrate a mountain in +Peru. How this was done and how, incidental- +ly, the lost city of Pelone was discovered, bringing +joy to the heart of Professor Swyington +Bumper, will be found fully set forth in the book. + +Tom had been back from the Peru trip for +some months, when we again find him interested +in some of the work of Professor Bumper, +as set forth in the magazine mentioned. + +"Well, he certainly is having some conversation," +reflected Ned, as, after more than five +minutes, Tom's ear was still at the receiver of +the instrument, into the transmitter of which +he had said only a few words. + +"All right," Tom finally answered, as he hung +the receiver up, "I'll be here," and then he turned +to Ned, whose curiosity had been growing with +the telephone talk, and remarked: + +"That certainly was wonderful!" + +"What was?" asked Ned. "Do you think I'm +a mind reader to be able to guess?" + +"No, indeed! I beg your pardon. I'll tell you +at once. But I couldn't break away. It was +too important. To whom do you think I was +talking just then?" + +"I can imagine almost any one, seeing I know +something of what you have done. It might be +almost anybody from some person you met up +in the caves of ice to a red pygmy from the +wilds of Africa." + +"I'm afraid neither of them would be quite +up to telephone talk yet," laughed Tom. "No, +this was the gentleman who wrote that interesting +article about the idol of gold," and he +motioned to the magazine Ned held in his hand. + +"You don't mean Professor Bumper!" + +"That's just whom I do mean." + +"What did he want? Where did he call +from?" + +"He wants me to help organize an expedition +to go to Central America--to the Copan valley, +to be exact--to look for this somewhat mythical +idol of gold. Incidentally the professor will +gather in any other antiques of more or less +value, if he can find any, and he hopes, even if he +doesn't find the idol, to get enough historical +material for half a dozen books, to say nothing +of magazine articles." + +"Where did he call from; did you say?" + +"I didn't say. But it was a long-distance call +from New York. The Professor stopped off +there on his way from Boston, where he has been +lecturing before some society. And now he's +coming here to see me," finished Tom. + +"What! Is he going to lecture here?" cried +Ned. "If he is, and spouts a whole lot of that +bone-dry stuff about the ancient Mayan civilization +and their antiquities, with side lights on +how the old-time Indians used to scalp their +enemies, I'm going to the moving pictures! I'm +willing to be your financial manager, Tom Swift, +but please don't ask me to be a high-brow. I +wasn't built for that." + +"Nor I, Ned. The professor isn't going to +lecture. He's only going to talk, he says." + +"What about?" + +"He's going to try to induce me to join his +expedition to the Copan valley." + +"Do you feel inclined to go?" + +"No, Ned, I do not. I've got too many other +irons in the fire. I shall have to give the professor +a polite but firm refusal." + +"Well, maybe you're right, Tom; and yet that +idol of gold--GOLD--weighing how many pounds +did you say?" + +"Oh, you're thinking of its money value, Ned, +old man!" + +"Yes, I'd like to see what a big chunk of gold +like that would bring. It must be quite a nugget. +But I'm not likely to get a glimpse of it +if you don't go with the professor." + +"I don't see how I can go, Ned. But come +over and meet the delightful gentleman when +he arrives. I expect him day after to-morrow." + +"I'll be here," promised Ned; and then he +went downtown to attend to some matters con- +nected with his new duties, which were much +less irksome than those he had had when he +had been in the bank. + +"Well, Tom, have you heard any more about +your friend?" asked Ned, two days later, as he +came to the Swift home with some papers needing +the signature of the young inventor and his +father. + +"You mean----?" + +"Professor Bumper." + +"No, I haven't heard from him since he +telephoned. But I guess he'll be here all right. +He's very punctual. Did you see anything of +my giant Koku as you came in?" + +"Yes, he and Eradicate were having an +argument about who should move a heavy casting +from one of the shops. Rad wanted to do it +all alone, but Koku said he was like a baby now." + +"Poor Rad is getting old," said Tom with a +sigh. "But he has been very faithful. He and +Koku never seem to get along well together." + +Koku was an immense man, a veritable giant, +one of two whom Tom had brought back with +him after an exciting trip to a strange land. The +giant's strength was very useful to the young +inventor. + +"Now Tom, about this business of leasing to +the English Government the right to manufac- +ture that new explosive of yours," began Ned, +plunging into the business at hand. "I think +if you stick out a little you can get a better +royalty price." + +"But I don't want to gouge 'em, Ned. I'm +satisfied with a fair profit. The trouble with +you is you think too much of money. Now----" + +At that moment a voice was heard in the hall +of the house saying: + +"Now, my dear lady, don't trouble yourself. +I can find my way in to Tom Swift perfectly well +by myself, and while I appreciate your courtesy +I do not want to trouble you." + +"No, don't come, Mrs. Baggert," added another +voice. "Bless my hat band, I think I know my +way about the house by this time!" + +"Mr. Damon!" ejaculated Ned. + +"And Professor Bumper is with him," added +Tom. "Come in!" he cried, opening the hall +door, to confront a bald-headed man who stood +peering at our hero with bright snapping eyes, +like those of some big bird spying out the land +from afar. "Come in, Professor Bumper; and +you too, Mr. Damon!" + + + +CHAPTER III + +BLESSINGS AND ENTHUSIASM + + +Greetings and inquiries as to health having +been passed, not without numerous blessings on +the part of Mr. Damon, the little party gathered +in the library of the home of Tom Swift sat +down and looked at one another. + +On Professor Bumper's face there was, plainly +to be seen, a look of expectation, and it seemed +to be shared by Mr. Damon, who seemed eager +to burst into enthusiastic talk. On the other +hand Tom Swift appeared a bit indifferent. + +Ned himself admitted that he was frankly +curious. The story of the big idol of gold had +occupied his thoughts for many hours. + +"Well, I'm glad to see you both," said Tom +again. "You got here all right, I see, Professor +Bumper. But I didn't expect you to meet and +bring Mr. Damon with you." + +"I met him on the train," explained the author +of the book on the lost city of Pelone, as well +as books on other antiquities. "I had no +expectation of seeing him, and we were both +surprised when we met on the express." + +"It stopped at Waterfield, Tom," explained +Mr. Damon, "which it doesn't usually do, being +an aristocratic sort of train, not given even to +hesitating at our humble little town. There +were some passengers to get off, which caused +the flier to stop, I suppose. And, as I wanted +to come over to see you, I got aboard." + +"Glad you did," voiced Tom. + +"Then I happened to see Professor Bumper a +few seats ahead of me," went on Mr. Damon, +"and, bless my scarfpin! he was coming to see +you also." + +"Well, I'm doubly glad," answered Tom. + +"So here we are," went on Mr. Damon, "and +you've simply got to come, Tom Swift. You +must go with us!" and Mr. Damon, in his +enthusiasm, banged his fist down on the table with +such force that he knocked some books to the floor. + +Koku, the giant, who was in the hall, opened +the door and in his imperfect English asked: + +"Master Tom knock for him bigs man?" + +"No," answered Tom with a smile, "I didn't knock +or call you, Koku. Some books fell, that is all." + +"Massa Tom done called fo' me, dat's what he done!" +broke in the petulant voice of Eradicate. + +"No, Rad, I don't need anything," Tom said. +"Though you might make a pitcher of lemonade. +It's rather warm." + +"Right away, Massa Tom! Right away!" cried +the old colored man, eager to be of service. + +"Me help, too!" rumbled Koku, in his deep +voice. "Me punch de lemons!" and away he +hurried after Eradicate, fearful lest the old +servant do all the honors. + +"Same old Rad and Koku," observed Mr. +Damon with a smile. "But now, Tom, while +they're making the lemonade, let's get down to +business. You're going with us, of course!" + +"Where?" asked Tom, more from habit than +because he did not know. + +"Where? Why to Honduras, of course! After +the idol of gold! Why, bless my fountain pen, +it's the most wonderful story I ever heard of! +You've read Professor Bumper's article, of +course. He told me you had. I read it on the +train coming over. He also told me about it, +and---- Well, I'm going with him, Tom Swift. + +"And think of all the adventures that may +befall us! We'll get lost in buried cities, ride down +raging torrents on a raft, fall over a cliff maybe +and be rescued. Why, it makes me feel quite +young again!" and Mr. Damon arose, to pace +excitedly up and down the room. + +Up to this time Professor Bumper had said +very little. He had sat still in his chair +listening to Mr. Damon. But now that the latter had +ceased, at least for a time, Tom and Ned looked +toward the scientist. + +"I understand, Tom," he said, "that you read +my article in the magazine, about the possibility +of locating some of the lost and buried cities of +Honduras?" + +"Yes, Ned and I each read it. It was quite +wonderful." + +"And yet there are more wonders to tell," went +on the professor. "I did not give all the details +in that article. I will tell you some of them. I +have brought copies of the documents with me," +and he opened a small valise and took out several +bundles tied with pink tape. + +"As Mr. Damon said," he went on while +arranging his papers, "he met me on the train, and +he was so taken by the story of the idol of gold +that he agreed to accompany me to Central America." + +"On one condition!" put in the eccentric man. + +"What's that? You didn't make any conditions +while we were talking," said the scientist. + +"Yes, I said I'd go if Tom Swift did." + +"Oh, yes. You did say that. But I don't call +that a condition, for of course Tom Swift will go. +Now let me tell you something more than I could +impart over the telephone. + +"Soon after I called you up, Tom--and it was +quite a coincidence that it should have been at a +time when you had just finished my magazine +article. Soon after that, as I was saying, I +arranged to come on to Shopton. And now I'm +glad we're all here together. + +"But how comes it, Ned Newton, that you are +not in the bank?" + +"I've left there," explained Ned. + +"He's now general financial man for the Swift +Company," Tom explained. "My father and I +found that we could not look after the inventing +and experimental end, and money matters, too, +and as Ned had had considerable experience this +way we made him take over those worries," and +Tom laughed genially. + +"No worries at all, as far as the Swift +Company is concerned," returned Ned. + +"Well, I guess you earn your salary," laughed +Tom. "But now, Professor Bumper, let's hear +from you. Is there anything more about this +idol of gold that you can tell us?" + +"Plenty, Tom, plenty. I could talk all day, +and not get to the end of the story. But a lot +of it would be scientific detail that might be too +dry for you in spite of this excellent lemonade," + +Between them Koku and Eradicate had managed +to make a pitcher of the beverage, though +Mrs. Baggert, the housekeeper, told Tom afterward +that the two had a quarrel in the kitchen +as to who should squeeze the lemons, the giant +insisting that he had the better right to "punch" +them. + +"So, not to go into too many details," went on +the professor, "I'll just give you a brief outline +of this story of the idol of gold. + +"Honduras, as you of course know, is a +republic of Central America, and it gets its name +from something that happened on the fourth +voyage of Columbus. He and his men had had +days of weary sailing and had sought in vain +for shallow water in which they might come to +an anchorage. Finally they reached the point +now known as Cape Gracias-a-Dios, and when +they let the anchor go, and found that in a short +time it came to rest on the floor of the ocean, +some one of the sailors--perhaps Columbus himself-- +is said to have remarked: + +"`Thank the Lord, we have left the deep +waters (honduras)' that being the Spanish word +for unfathomable depths. So Honduras it was +called, and has been to this day. + +"It is a queer land with many traces of an +ancient civilization, a civilization which I +believe dates back farther than some in the far +East. On the sculptured stones in the Copan +valley there are characters which seem to +resemble very ancient writing, but this pictographic +writing is largely untranslatable. + +"Honduras, I might add, is about the size of +our state of Ohio. It is rather an elevated table- +land, though there are stretches of tropical +forest, but it is not so tropical a country as many +suppose it to be. There is much gold scattered +throughout Honduras, though of late it has not +been found in large quantities. + +"In the old days, however, before the Spaniards +came, it was plentiful, so much, so that the +natives made idols of it. And it is one of the +largest of these idols--by name Quitzel--that I +am going to seek." + +"Do you know where it is?" asked Ned. + +"Well, it isn't locked up in a safe deposit box, +of that I'm sure," laughed the professor. "No, +I don't know exactly where it is, except that it +is somewhere in an ancient and buried city +known as Kurzon. If I knew exactly where +it was there wouldn't be much fun in going after +it. And if it was known to others it would have +been taken away long ago. + +"No, we've got to hunt for the idol of gold +in this land of wonders where I hope soon to be. +Later on I'll show you the documents that put +me on the track of this idol. Enough now to +show you an old map I found, or, rather, a copy +of it, and some of the papers that tell of the idol," +and he spread out his packet of papers on the +table in front of him, his eyes shining with +excitement and pleasure. Mr. Damon, too, leaned +eagerly forward. + +"So, Tom Swift," went on the professor, "I +come to you for help in this matter. I want +you to aid me in organizing an expedition to go +to Honduras after the idol of gold. Will you?" + +"I'll help you, of course," said Tom. "You +may use any of my inventions you choose--my +airships, my motor boats and submarines, even +my giant cannon if you think you can take it +with you. And as for the money part, Ned will +arrange that for you. But as for going with you +myself, it is out of the question. I can't. No +Honduras for me!" + + + +CHAPTER IX + +FENIMORE BEECHER + + +Had Tom Swift's giant cannon been discharged +somewhere in the vicinity of his home it could +have caused but little more astonishment to +Mr. Damon and Professor Bumper than did the +simple announcement of the young inventor. +The professor seemed to shrink back in his chair, +collapsing like an automobile tire when the air +is let out. As for Mr. Damon he jumped up and +cried: + +"Bless my----!" + +But that is as far as he got--at least just then. +He did not seem to know what to bless, but he +looked as though he would have liked to include +most of the universe. + +"Surely you don't mean it, Tom Swift," +gasped Professor Bumper at length. "Won't +you come with us?" + +"No," said Tom, slowly. "Really I can't go. +I'm working on an invention of a new aeroplane +stabilizer, and if I go now it will be just at a +time when I am within striking distance of success. +And the stabilizer is very much needed." + +"If it's a question of making a profit on it, +Tom," began Mr. Damon, "I can let you have +some money until----" + +"Oh, no! It isn't the money!" cried Tom. +"Don't think that for a moment. You see the +European war has called for the use of a large +number of aeroplanes, and as the pilots of them +frequently have to fight, and so can not give their +whole attention to the machines, some form of +automatic stabilizer is needed to prevent them +turning turtle, or going off at a wrong tangent. + +"So I have been working out a sort of +modified gyroscope, and it seems to answer the +purpose. I have already received advance orders +for a number of my devices from abroad, and as +they are destined to save lives I feel that I ought +to keep on with my work. + +"I'd like to go, don't misunderstand me, but +I can't go at this time. It is out of the question. +If you wait a year, or maybe six months----" + +"No, it is impossible to wait, Tom," declared +Professor Bumper. + +"Is it so important then to hurry?" asked Mr. +Damon. "You did not mention that to me, Professor +Bumper." + +"No, I did not have time. There are so many ends +to my concerns. But, Tom Swift, you simply must go!" + +"I can't, my dear professor, much as I should like to." + +"But, Tom, think of it!" cried Mr. Damon, +who was as much excited as was the little bald- +headed scientist. "You never saw such an idol +of gold as this. What's its name?" and he +looked questioningly at the professor. + +"Quitzel the idol is called," supplied Professor +Bumper. "And it is supposed to be in a +buried city named Kurzon, somewhere in the +Sierra de Merendon range of mountains, in the +vicinity of the Copan valley. Copan is a city, +or maybe we'll find it only a town when we get +there, and it is not far from the borders of +Guatemala. + +"Tom, if I could show you the translations I +have made of the ancient documents, referring +to this idol and the wonderful city over which +it kept guard, I'm sure you'd come with us." + +"Please don't tempt me," Tom said with a +laugh. "I'm only too anxious to go, and if it +wasn't for the stabilizer I'd be with you in a +minute. But---- Well, you'll have to get along +without me. Maybe I can join you later." + +"What's this about the idol keeping guard +over the ancient city?" asked Ned, for he was +interested in strange stories. + +"It seems," explained the professor, "that in +the early days there was a strange race of people, +inhabiting Central America, with a somewhat +high civilization, only traces of which remained +when the Spaniards came. + +"But these traces, and such hieroglyphics, or, +to be more exact pictographs, as I have been able +to decipher from the old documents, tell of one +country, or perhaps it was only a city, over which +this great golden idol of Quitzel presided. + +"There is in some of these papers a description +of the idol, which is not exactly a beauty, +judged from modern standards. But the main +fact is that it is made of solid gold, and may +weigh anywhere from one to two tons." + +"Two tons of gold!" cried New Newton. "Why, +if that's the case it would be worth----" and +he fell to doing a sum in mental arithmetic. + +"I am not so concerned about the monetary +value of the statue as I am about its antiquity," +went on Professor Bumper. "There are other +statues in this buried city of Kurzon, and though +they may not be so valuable they will give me +a wealth of material for my research work." + +"How do you know there are other statues?" +asked Mr. Damon. + +"Because my documents tell me so. It was +because the people made other idols, in opposition, +as it were, to Quitzel, that their city or +country was destroyed. At least that is the +legend. Quitzel, so the story goes, wanted to be +the chief god, and when the image of a rival was +set up in the temple near him, he toppled over +in anger, and part of the temple went with him, +the whole place being buried in ruins. All the +inhabitants were killed, and trace of the ancient +city was lost forever. No, I hope not forever, +for I expect to find it." + +"If all the people were killed, and the city +buried, how did the story of Quitzel become +known?" asked Mr. Damon. + +"One only of the priests in the temple of +Quitzel escaped and set down part of the tale," said +the professor. "It is his narrative, or one based +on it, that I have given you." + +"And now, what I want to do, is to go and +make a search for this buried city. I have fairly +good directions as to how it may be reached. +We will have little difficulty in getting to +Honduras, as there are fruit steamers frequently +sailing. Of course going into the interior--to the +Copan valley--is going to be harder. But an +expedition from a large college was recently +there and succeeded, after much labor, in ex- +cavating part of a buried city. Whether or not +it was Kurzon I am unable to say. + +"But if there was one ancient city there must +be more. So I want to make an attempt. And +I counted on you, Tom. You have had considerable +experience in strange quarters of the earth, +and you're just the one to help me. I don't +need money, for I have interested a certain +millionaire, and my own college will put up part +of the funds." + +"Oh, it isn't a question of money," said Tom. +"It's time." + +"That's just what it is with me!" exclaimed +Professor Bumper. "I haven't any time to lose. +My rivals may, even now, be on their way to Honduras!" + +"Your rivals!" cried Tom. "You didn't say anything about them!" + +"No, I believe I didn't There were so many +other things to talk about. But there is a rival +archaeologist who would ask nothing better than +to get ahead of me in this matter. He is younger +than I am, and youth is a big asset nowadays." + +"Pooh! You're not old!" cried Mr. Damon. +"You're no older than I am, and I'm still young. +I'm a lot younger than some of these boys who +are afraid to tackle a trip through a tropical +wilderness," and he playfully nudged Tom in the ribs. + +"I'm not a bit afraid!" retorted the young inventor. + +"No, I know you're not," laughed Mr. Damon. +"But I've got to say something, Tom, to stir you +up. Ned, how about you? Would you go?" + +"I can't, unless Tom does. You see I'm his +financial man now." + +"There you are, Tom Swift!" cried Mr. Damon. +"You see you are holding back a number +of persons just because you don't want to go." + +"I certainly wouldn't like to go without Tom," +said the professor slowly. "I really need his +help. You know, Tom, we would never have +found the city of Pelone if it had not been for +you and your marvelous powder. The conditions +in the Copan valley are likely to be still +more difficult to overcome, and I feel that I risk +failure without your young energy and your +inventive mind to aid in the work and to suggest +possible means of attaining our object. Come, +Tom, reconsider, and decide to make the trip." + +"And my promise to go was dependent on +Tom's agreement to accompany us," said Mr. +Damon + +"Come on!" urged the professor, much as one boy +might urge another to take part in a ball game. +"Don't let my rival get ahead of me." + +"I wouldn't like to see that," Tom said slowly. +"Who is he--any one I know?" + +"I don't believe so, Tom. He's connected +with a large, new college that has plenty of +money to spend on explorations and research +work. Beecher is his name--Fenimore Beecher." + +"Beecher!" exclaimed Tom, and there was +such a change in his manner that his friends +could not help noticing it. He jumped to his +feet, his eyes snapping, and he looked eagerly +and anxiously at Professor Bumper. + +"Did you say his name was Fenimore Beecher?" +Tom asked in a tense voice. + +"That's what it is--Professor Fenimore Beecher. +He is really a learned young man, and +thoroughly in earnest, though I do not like his +manner. But he is trying to get ahead of me, +which may account for my feeling." + +Tom Swift did not answer. Instead he hurried +from the room with a murmured apology. + +"I'll be back in about five minutes," he said, +as he went out. + +"Well, what's up now?" asked Mr. Damon of +Ned, as the young inventor departed. "What +set him off that way?" + +"The mention of Beecher's name, evidently. +Though I never heard him mention such a person +before." + +"Nor did I ever hear Professor Beecher speak +of Tom," said the bald-headed scientist. "Well, +we'll just have to wait until----" + +At that moment Tom came back into the room. + +"Gentlemen," he said, "I have reconsidered my +refusal to go to the Copan valley after the idol +of gold. I'm going with you!" + +"Good!" cried Professor Bumper. + +"Fine!" ejaculated Mr. Damon. "Bless my time-table! +I thought you'd come around, Tom Swift." + +"But what about your stabilizer?" asked Ned. + +"I was just talking to my father about it,' +the young inventor replied. "He will be able +to put the finishing touches on it. So I'll leave +it with him. As soon as I can get ready I'll go, +since you say haste is necessary, Professor Bumper." + +"It is, if we are to get ahead of Beecher." + +"Then we'll get ahead of him!" cried Tom. +"I'm with you now from the start to the finish. +I'll show him what I can do!" he added, while +Ned and the others wondered at the sudden +change in their friend's manner. + + + + +CHAPTER V + +THE LITTLE GREEN GOD + + +"Tom how soon can we go?" asked Professor +Bumper, as he began arranging his papers, maps +and documents ready to place them back in the +valise. + +"Within a week, if you want to start that +soon." + +"The sooner the better. A week will suit me. +I don't know just what Beecher's plans are, but, +he may try to get on the ground first. Though, +without boasting, I may say that he has not had +as much experience as I have had, thanks to +you, Tom, when you helped me find the lost city +of Pelone." + +"Well, I hope we'll be as successful this time," +murmured Tom. "I don't want to see Beecher +beat you." + +"I didn't know you knew him, Tom," said the +professor. + +"Oh, yes, I have met him. once," and there +was something in Tom's manner, though he tried +to speak indifferently, that made Ned believe +there was more behind his chum's sudden change +of determination than had yet appeared. + +"He never mentioned you," went on Professor +Bumper; "yet the last time I saw him I said I +was coming to see you, though I did not tell +him why." + +"No, he wouldn't be likely to speak of me," +said Tom significantly. + +"Well, if that's all settled, I guess I'll go back +home and pack up," said Mr. Damon, making a +move to depart. + +"There's no special rush," Tom said. "We +won't leave for a week. I can't get ready in +much less time than that." + +"Bless my socks! I know that," ejaculated Mr. +Damon. "But if I get my things packed I can +go to a hotel to stay while my wife is away. She +might take a notion to come home unexpectedly, +and, though she is a dear, good soul, she doesn't +altogether approve of my going off on these wild +trips with you, Tom Swift. But if I get all +packed, and clear out, she can't find me and she +can't hold me back. She is visiting her mother +now. I can send her a wire from Kurzon after +I get there." + +"I don't believe the telegraph there is work- +ing," laughed Professor Bumper. "But suit +yourself. I must go back to New York to arrange +for the goods we'll have to take with us. +In a week, Tom, we'll start." + +"You must stay to dinner," Tom said. "You +can't get a train now anyhow, and father wants +to meet you again. He's pretty well, considering +his age. And he's much better I verily +believe since I said I'd turn over to him the task +of finishing the stabilizer. He likes to work." + +"We'll stay and take the night train back," +agreed Mr. Damon. "It will be like old times, +Tom," he went on, "traveling off together into +the wilds. Central America is pretty wild, isn't +it?" he asked, as if in fear of being disappointed! +on that score. + +"Oh, it's wild enough to suit any one," +answered Professor Bumper. + +"Well, now to settle a few details," observed +Tom. "Ned, what is the situation as regards the +financial affairs of my father and myself? Nothing +will come to grief if we go away, will there?" + +"I guess not, Tom. But are you going to take +your father with you?" + +"No, of course not." + +"But you spoke of `we.' " + +"I meant you and I are going." + +"Me, Tom?" + +"Sure, you! I wouldn't think of leaving you +behind. You want Ned along, don't you, Professor?" + +"Of course. It will be an ideal party--we +four. We'll have to take natives when we get +to Honduras, and make up a mule pack-train for +the interior. I had some thoughts of asking +you to take an airship along, but it might frighten +the Indians, and I shall have to depend on +them for guides, as well as for porters. So it +will be an old-fashioned expedition, in a way." + +Mr. Swift came in at this point to meet his old +friends. + +"The boy needs a little excitement," he said. +"He's been puttering over that stabilizer invention +too long. I can finish the model for him +in a very short time." + +Professor Bumper told Mr. Swift something +about the proposed trip, while Mr. Damon went +out with Tom and Ned to one of the shops to +look at a new model aeroplane the young inventor +had designed. + +There was a merry party around the table at +dinner, though now and then Ned noticed that +Tom had an abstracted and preoccupied air. + +"Thinking about the idol of gold?" asked Ned +in a whisper to his chum, when they were about +to leave the table. + +"The idol of gold? Oh, yes! Of course! It +will be great if we can bring that back with us." +But the manner in which he said this made Ned +feel sure that Tom had had other thoughts, +and that he had used a little subterfuge in his +answer. + +Ned was right, as he proved for himself a little +later, when, Mr. Damon and the professor having +gone home, the young financial secretary +took his friend to a quiet corner and asked: + +"What's the matter, Tom?" + +"Matter? What do you mean?" + +"I mean what made you make up your mind +so quickly to go on this expedition when you +heard Beecher was going?" + +"Oh--er--well, you wouldn't want to see our +old friend Professor Bumper left, would you, +after he had worked out the secret of the idol +of gold? You wouldn't want some young +whipper-snapper to beat him in the race, would +you, Ned?" + +"No, of course not." + +"Neither would I. That's why I changed my +mind. This Beecher isn't going to get that idol +if I can stop him!" + +"You seem rather bitter against him." + +"Bitter? Oh, not at all. I simply don't want +to see my friends disappointed." + +"Then Beecher isn't a friend of yours?" + +"Oh, I've met him, that is all," and Tom tried +to speak indifferently. + +"Humph!" mused Ned, "there's more here than I dreamed of. +I'm going to get at the bottom of it." + +But though Ned tried to pump Tom, he was +not successful. The young inventor admitted +knowing the youthful scientist, but that was all, +Tom reiterating his determination not to let Professor +Bumper be beaten in the race for the idol +of gold. + +"Let me see," mused Ned, as he went home +that evening. "Tom did not change his mind +until he heard Beecher's name mentioned. Now +this shows that Beecher had something to do +with it. The only reason Tom doesn't want +Beecher to get this idol or find the buried city +is because Professor Bumper is after it. And +yet the professor is not an old or close friend +of Tom's. They met only when Tom went to +dig his big tunnel. There must be some other +reason." + +Ned did some more thinking. Then he +clapped his hands together, and a smile spread +over his face. + +"I believe I have it!" he cried. "The little +green god as compared to the idol of gold! +That's it. I'm going to make a call on my way home." + +This he did, stopping at the home of Mary +Nestor, a pretty girl, who, rumor had it, was +tacitly engaged to Tom. Mary was not at home, +but Mr. Nestor was, and for Ned's purpose this +answered. + +"Well, well, glad to see you!" exclaimed +Mary's father. "Isn't Tom with you?" he asked +a moment later, seeing that Ned was alone. + +"No, Tom isn't with me this evening," Ned +answered. "The fact is, he's getting ready to +go off on another expedition, and I'm going with him." + +"You young men are always going somewhere," +remarked Mrs. Nestor. "Where is it to this time?" + +"Some place in Central America," Ned +answered, not wishing to be too particular. He +was wondering how he could find out what he +wanted to know, when Mary's mother unexpectedly +gave him just the information he was after. + +"Central America!" she exclaimed. "Why, +Father," and she looked at her husband, "that's +where Professor Beecher is going, isn't it?" + +"Yes, I believe he did mention something about that." + +"Professor Beecher, the man who is an author- +ity on Aztec ruins?" asked Ned, taking a shot in +the dark. + +"Yes," said Mr. Nestor. "And a mighty fine +young man he is, too. I knew his father well. +He was here on a visit not long ago, young +Beecher was, and he talked most entertainingly +about his discoveries. You remember how +interested Mary was, Mother?" + +"Yes, she seemed to be," said Mrs. Nestor. +"Tom Swift dropped in during the course of +the evening," she added to Ned, "and Mary +introduced him to Professor Beecher. But I can't +say that Tom was much interested in the +professor's talk." + +"No?" questioned Ned. + +"No, not at all. But Tom did not stay long. +He left just as Mary and the professor were +drawing a map so the professor could indicate +where he had once made a big discovery." + +"I see," murmured Ned. "Well, I suppose +Tom must have been thinking of something else +at the time." + +"Very likely," agreed Mr. Nestor. "But Tom +missed a very profitable talk. I was very much +interested myself in what the professor told us, +and so was Mary. She invited Mr. Beecher to +come again. He takes after his father in being +very thorough in what he does. + +"Sometimes I think," went on Mr. Nestor, "that +Tom isn't quite steady enough. He's thinking +of so many things, perhaps, that he can't get his +mind down to the commonplace. I remember he +once sent something here in a box labeled +`dynamite.' Though there was no explosive in it, +it gave us a great fright. But Tom is a boy, in +spite of his years. Professor Beecher seems +much older. We all like him very much." + +"That's nice," said Ned, as he took his +departure. He had found out what he had come +to learn. + +"I knew it!" Ned exclaimed as he walked +home. "I knew something was in the wind. +The little green god of jealousy has Tom in his +clutches. That's why my inventive friend was +so anxious to go on this expedition when he +learned Beecher was to go. He wants to beat +him. I guess the professor has plainly shown +that he wouldn't like anything better than to +cut Tom out with Mary. Whew! that's something +to think about!" + + + +CHAPTER VI + +UNPLEASANT NEWS + + +Ned Newton decided to keep to himself what +he had heard at the Nestor home. Not for the +world would he let Tom Swift know of the +situation. + +"That is, I won't let him know that I know," +said Ned to himself, "though he is probably as +well aware of the situation as I am. But it sure +is queer that this Professor Beecher should have +taken such a fancy to Mary, and that her father +should regard him so well. That is natural, +I suppose. But I wonder how Mary herself +feels about it. That is the part Tom would +be most interested in. + +"No wonder Tom wants to get ahead of this +young college chap, who probably thinks he's +the whole show. If he can find the buried city, +and get the idol of gold, it would be a big +feather in his cap. + +"He'd have no end of honors heaped on him, +and I suppose his hat wouldn't come within +three sizes of fitting him. Then he'd stand in +better than ever with Mr. Nestor. And, maybe, +with Mary, too, though I think she is loyal +to Tom. But one never can tell. + +"However, I'm glad I know about it. I'll +do all I can to help Tom, without letting him +know that I know. And if I can do anything +to help in finding that idol of gold for Professor +Bumper, and, incidentally, Tom, I'll do it," and +he spoke aloud in his enthusiasm. + +Ned, who was walking along in the darkness, +clapped his open hand down on Tom's magazine +he was carrying home to read again, and +the resultant noise was a sharp crack. As it +sounded a figure jumped from behind a tree +and called tensely: + +"Hold on there!" + +Ned stopped short, thinking he was to be +the victim of a holdup, but his fears were +allayed when he beheld one of the police force of +Shopton confronting him. + +"I heard what you said about gettin' the gold," +went on the officer. "I was walkin' along and I +heard you talkin'. Where's your pal?" + +"I haven't any, Mr. Newbold," answered Ned +with a laugh, as he recognized the man. + +"Oh, pshaw! It's Ned Newton!" exclaimed +the disappointed officer. "I thought you was +talkin' to a confederate about gold, and figured +maybe you was goin' to rob the bank." + +"No, nothing like that," answered Ned, still +much amused. "I was talking to myself about +a trip Tom Swift and I are going to take +and----" + +"Oh, that's all right," responded the +policeman. "I can understand it, if it had anything to +do with Tom. He's a great boy." + +"Indeed he is," agreed Ned, making a mental +resolve not to be so public with his thoughts +in the future. He chatted for a moment with +the officer, and then, bidding him good-night, +walked on to his home, his mind in a whirl with +conglomerate visions of buried cities, great grinning +idols of gold, and rival professors seeking +to be first at the goal. + +The next few days were busy ones for Tom, +Ned and, in fact, the whole Swift household. +Tom and his father had several consultations and +conducted several experiments in regard to the +new stabilizer, the completion of which was so +earnestly desired. Mr. Swift was sure he could +carry the invention to a successful conclusion. + +Ned was engaged in putting the financial +affairs of the Swift Company in shape, so they +would practically run themselves during his ab- +sence. Then, too, there was the packing of their +baggage which must be seen to. + +Of course, the main details of the trip were +left to Professor Bumper, who knew just what +to do. He had told Tom and Ned that all they +and Mr. Damon would have to do would be to +meet him at the pier in New York, where they +would find all arrangements made. + +One day, near the end of the week (the beginning +of the next being set for the start) Eradicate +came shuffling into the room where Tom was +sorting out the possessions he desired to take +with him, Ned assisting him in the task. + +"Well, Rad, what is it?" asked Tom, with +businesslike energy. + +"I done heah, Massa Tom, dat yo' all's gwine +off on a long trip once mo'. Am dat so?" + +"Yes, that's so, Rad." + +"Well, den, I'se come to ast yo' whut I'd bettah +take wif me. Shall I took warm clothes or cool +clothes?" + +"Well, if you were going, Rad," answered Tom +with a smile, "you'd need cool clothes, for we're +going to a sort of jungle-land. But I'm sorry to +say you're not going this trip." + +"I---- I ain't gwine? Does yo' mean dat yo' +all ain't gwine to take me, Massa Tom?" + +"That's it, Rad. It isn't any trip for you." + +"In certain not!" broke in the voice of Koku, +the giant, who entered with a big trunk Tom had +sent him for. "Master want strong man like a +bull. He take Koku!" + +"Look heah!" spluttered Eradicate, and his eyes +flashed. "Yo'--yo' giant yo'--yo' may be strong +laik a bull, but ya' ain't got as much sense as +mah mule, Boomerang! Massa Tom don't want +no sich pusson wif him. He's gwine to take me." + +"He take me!" cried Koku, and his voice was +a roar while he beat on his mighty chest with his +huge fists. + +Tom, seeing that the dispute was likely to be +bothersome, winked at Ned and began to speak. + +"I don't believe you'd like it there, Rad--not +where we're going. It's a bad country. Why +the mosquitoes there bite holes in you--raise +bumps on you as big as eggs." + +"Oh, good land!" ejaculated the old colored man. +"Am dat so Massa Tom?" + +"It sure is. Then there's another kind of bug +that burrows under your fingernails, and if you +don't get 'em out, your fingers drop off." + +"Oh, good land, Massa Tom! Am dat a fact?" + +"It sure is. I don't want to see those things +happen to you, Rad." + +Slowly the old colored man shook his head. + +"I don't mahse'f," he said. "I---- I guess I +won't go." + +Eradicate did not stop to ask how Tom and +Ned proposed to combat these two species of +insects. + +But there remained Koku to dispose of, and he +stood smiling broadly as Eradicate shuffled of. + +"Me no 'fraid bugs," said the giant. + +"No," said Tom, with a look at Ned, for he did +not want to take the big man on the trip for +various reasons. "No, maybe not, Koku. Your +skin is pretty tough. But I understand there are +deep pools of water in the land where we are +going, and in them lives a fish that has a hide +like an alligator and a jaw like a shark. If you +fall in it's all up with you." + +"Dat true, Master Tom?" and Koku's voice +trembled. + +"Well, I've never seen such a fish, I'm sure, +but the natives tell about it." + +Koku seemed to be considering the matter. +Strange as it may seem, the giant, though afraid +of nothing human and brave when it came to a +hand-to-claw argument with a wild animal, had +a very great fear of the water and the unseen +life within it. Even a little fresh-water crab in +a brook was enough to send him shrieking to +shore. So when Tom told of this curious fish, +which many natives of Central America firmly +believe in, the giant took thought with himself. +Finally, he gave a sigh and said: + +"Me stay home and keep bad mans out of +master's shop." + +"Yes, I guess that's the best thing for you," +assented Tom with an air of relief. He and Ned +had talked the matter over, and they had agreed +that the presence of such a big man as Koku, in +an expedition going on a more or less secret mission, +would attract too much attention. + +"Well, I guess that clears matters up," said +Tom, as he looked over a collection of rifles and +small arms, to decide which to take. "We won't +have them to worry about." + +"No, only Professor Beecher," remarked Ned, +with a sharp look at his chum. + +"Oh, we'll dispose of him all right!" asserted +Tom boldly. "He hasn't had any experience in +business of this sort, and with that you and +Professor Bumper and Mr. Damon know we +ought to have little trouble in getting ahead of +the young man." + +"Not to speak of your own aid," added Ned. + +"Oh, I'll do what I can, of course," said Tom, +with an air of indifference. But Ned knew his +chum would work ceaselessly to help get the idol +of gold. + +Tom gave no sign that there was any complication +in his affair with Mary Nestor, and of +course Ned did not tell anything of what he knew +about it. + +That night saw the preparations of Ned and +Tom about completed. There were one or two +matters yet to finish on Tom's part in relation +to his business, but these offered no difficulties. + +The two chums were in the Swift home, talking +over the prospective trip, when Mrs. Baggert, +answering a ring at the front door, announced +that Mr. Damon was outside. + +"Tell him to come in," ordered Tom. + +"Bless my baggage check!" exclaimed the +excitable man, as he shook hands with Tom and +Ned and noted the packing evidences all about. +"You're ready to go to the land of wonders." + +"The land of wonders?" repeated Ned. + +"Yes, that's what Professor Bumper calls the +part of Honduras we're going to. And it must +be wonderful, Tom. Think of whole cities, +some of them containing idols and temples of +gold, buried thirty and forty feet under the +surface! Wonderful is hardly the name for it!" + +"It'll be great!" cried Ned. "I suppose you're +ready, Mr. Damon--you and the professor?" + +"Yes. But, Tom, I have a bit of unpleasant +news for you." + +"Unpleasant news?" + +"Yes. You know Professor Bumper spoke of +a rival--a man named Beecher who is a member +of the faculty of a new and wealthy college." + +"I heard him speak of him--yes," and the way +Tom said it no one would have suspected that +he had any personal interest in the matter. + +"He isn't going to give his secret away," +thought Ned. + +"Well, this Professor Beecher, you know," +went on Mr. Damon, "also knows about the idol +of gold, and is trying to get ahead of Professor +Bumper in the search." + +"He did say something of it, but nothing was +certain," remarked Tom. + +"But it is certain!" exclaimed Mr. Damon. +"Bless my toothpick, it's altogether too certain!" + +"How is that?" asked Tom. "Is Beecher +certainly going to Honduras?" + +"Yes, of course. But what is worse, he and +his party will leave New York on the same +steamer with us!" + + + +CHAPTER VII + +TOM HEARS SOMETHING + + +On hearing Mr. Damon's rather startling +announcement, Tom and Ned looked at one another. +There seemed to be something back of +the simple statement--an ominous and portending +"something." + +"On the same steamer with us, is he?" mused Tom. + +"How did you learn this?" asked Ned. + +"Just got a wire from Professor Bumper +telling me. He asked me to telephone to you about +it, as he was too busy to call up on the long +distance from New York. But instead of 'phoning +I decided to come over myself." + +"Glad you did," said Tom, heartily. "Did +Professor Bumper want us to do anything +special, now that it is certain his rival will be +so close on his trail?" + +"Yes, he asked me to warn you to be careful +what you did and said in reference to the expedition." + +"Then does he fear something?" asked Ned. + +"Yes, in a way. I think he is very much afraid +this young Beecher will not only be first on the +site of the underground city, but that he may +be the first to discover the idol of gold. It would +be a great thing for a young archaeologist like +Beecher to accomplish a mission of this sort, +and beat Professor Bumper in the race." + +"Do you think that's why Beecher decided to +go on the same steamer we are to take?" asked Ned. + +"Yes, I do," said Mr. Damon. "Though from +what Professor Bumper said I know he regards +Professor Beecher as a perfectly honorable man, +as well as a brilliant student. I do not believe +Beecher or his party would stoop to anything +dishonorable or underhand, though they would +not hesitate, nor would we, to take advantage of +every fair chance to win in the race." + +"No, I suppose that's right," observed Tom; +but there was a queer gleam in his eye, and his +chum wondered if Tom did not have in mind the +prospective race between himself and Fenimore +Beecher for the regard of Mary Nestor. "We'll +do our best to win, and any one is at liberty to +travel on the same steamer we are to take," added +the young inventor, and his tone became more +incisive. + +"It will be all the livelier with two expeditions +after the same golden idol," remarked Ned. + +"Yes, I think we're in for some excitement," +observed Tom grimly. But even he did not +realize all that lay before them ere they would +reach Kurzon. + +Mr. Damon, having delivered his message, and +remarking that his preparations for leaving were +nearly completed, went back to Waterfield, from +there to proceed to New York in a few days +with Tom and Ned, to meet Professor Bumper. + +"Well, I guess we have everything in pretty +good shape," remarked Tom to his chum a day +or so after the visit of Mr. Damon. "Everything +is packed, and as I have a few personal matters +to attend to I think I'll take the afternoon off." + +"Go to it!" laughed Ned, guessing a thing of two. +"I've got a raft of stuff myself to look after, +but don't let that keep you." + +"If there is anything I can do," began Tom, +"don't hesitate to----" + +"Nonsense!" exclaimed Ned. "I can do it all alone. +It's some of the company's business, anyhow, +and I'm paid for looking after that." + +"All right, then I'll cut along," Tom said, and +he wore a relieved air. + +"He's going to see Mary," observed Ned with +a grin, as he observed Tom hop into his trim +little roadster, which under his orders, Koku had +polished and cleaned until it looked as though +it had just come from the factory. + +A little later the trim and speedy car drew up +in front of the Nestor home, and Tom bounded +up on the front porch, his heart not altogether +as light as his feet. + +"No, I'm sorry, but Mary isn't in," said Mrs. +Nestor, answering his inquiry after greeting him. + +"Not at home?" + +"No, she went on a little visit to her cousin's at +Fayetteville. She said something about letting +you know she was going." + +"She did drop me a card," answered Tom, and, +somehow he did not feel at all cheerful. "But +I thought it wasn't until next week she was +going." + +"That was her plan, Tom. But she changed +it. Her cousin wired, asking her to advance +the date, and this Mary did. There was something +about a former school chum who was also +to be at Myra's house--Myra is Mary's cousin +you know." + +"Yes, I know," assented the young inventor. +"And so Mary is gone. How long is she going +to stay?" + +"Oh, about two weeks. She wasn't quite +certain. It depends on the kind of a time she has, +I suppose." + +"Yes, I suppose so," agreed Tom. "Well, if +you write before I do you might say I called, +Mrs. Nestor." + +"I will, Tom. And I know Mary will be sorry +she wasn't here to take a ride with you; it's +such a nice day," and the lady smiled as she +looked at the speedy roadster. + +"Maybe--maybe you'd like to come for a spin?" +asked Tom, half desperately. + +"No, thank you. I'm too old to be jounced +around in one of those small cars." + +"Nonsense! She rides as easily as a Pullman +sleeper." + +"Well, I have to go to a Red Cross meeting, +anyhow, so I can't come, Tom. Thank you, +just the same." + +Tom did not drive back immediately to his +home. He wanted to do a bit of thinking, and +he believed he could do it best by himself. So +it was late afternoon when he again greeted Ned, +who, meanwhile, had been kept very busy. + +"Well?" called Tom's chum. + +"Um!" was the only answer, and Tom called +Koku to put the car away in the garage. + +"Something wrong," mused Ned. + +The next three days were crowded with events +and with work. Mr. Damon came over +frequently to consult with Tom and Ned, and +finally the last of their baggage had been packed, +certain of Tom's inventions and implements sent +on by express to New York to be taken to Honduras, +and then our friends themselves followed +to the metropolis. + +"Good-bye, Tom," said his father. "Good- +bye, and good luck! If you don't get the idol +of gold I'm sure you'll have experiences that +will be valuable to you." + +"We're going to get the idol of gold!" said +Tom determinedly. + +"Look out for the bad bugs," suggested Eradicate. + +"We will," promised Ned. + +Tom's last act was to send a message to Mary +Nestor, and then he, with Ned and Mr. Damon, +who blessed everything in sight from the gasoline +in the automobile to the blue sky overhead, +started for the station. + +New York was reached without incident. The +trio put up at the hotel where Professor Bumper +was to meet them. + +"He hasn't arrived yet," said Tom, after +glancing over the names on the hotel register and +not seeing Professor Bumper's among them. + +"Oh, he'll be here all right," asserted Mr. +Damon. "Bless my galvanic battery! he sent me +a telegram at one o'clock this morning saying +he'd be sure to meet us in New York. No fear +of him not starting for the land of wonders." + +"There are some other professors registered, +though," observed Ned, as he glanced at the +book, noting the names of several scientists of +whom he and Tom had read. + +"Yes. I wonder what they're doing in New +York," replied Tom. "They are from New +England. Maybe there's a convention going on. +Well, we'll have to wait, that's all, until +Professor Bumper comes." + +And during that wait Tom heard something +that surprised him and caused him no little +worry. It was when Ned came back to his +room, which adjoined Tom's, that the young +treasurer gave his chum the news. + +"I say, Tom!" Ned exclaimed. "Who do you +think those professors are, whose names we saw +on the register?" + +"I haven't the least idea." + +"Why, they're of Beecher's party!" + +"You don't mean it!" + +"I surely do." + +"How do you know?" + +"I happened to overhear two of them talking +down in the lobby a while ago. They didn't +make any secret of it. They spoke freely of going +with Beecher to some ancient city in Honduras, +to look for an idol of gold." + +"They did? But where is Beecher?" + +"He hasn't joined them yet. Their plans +have been changed. Instead of leaving on the +same steamer we are to take in the morning +they are to come on a later one. The professors +here are waiting for Beecher to come." + +"Why isn't he here now?" + +"Well, I heard one of the other scientists say +that he had gone to a place called Fayetteville, +and will come on from there." + +"Fayetteville!" ejaculated Tom. +"Yes. That isn't far from Shopton." + +"I know," assented Tom. "I wonder--I wonder +why he is going there?" + +"I can tell you that, too." + +"You can? You're a regular detective." + +"No, I just happened to overhear it. Beecher +is going to call on Mary Nestor in Fayetteville, +so his friends here said he told them, and his call +has to do with an important matter--to him!" +and Ned gazed curiously at his chum. + + + +CHAPTER VIII + +OFF FOR HONDURAS + + +Just what Tom's thoughts were, Ned, of +course, could not guess. But by the flush that +showed under the tan of his chum's cheeks the +young financial secretary felt pretty certain that +Tom was a bit apprehensive of the outcome of +Professor Beecher's call on Mary Nestor. + +"So he is going to see her about `something +important,' Ned?" + +"That's what some members of his party called +it." + +"And they're waiting here for him to join +them?" + +"Yes. And it means waiting a week for +another steamer. It must be something pretty +important, don't you think, to cause Beecher to +risk that delay in starting after the idol of gold?" + +"Important? Yes, I suppose so," assented +Tom. "And yet even if he waits for the next +steamer he will get to Honduras nearly as soon +as we do." + +"How is that?" + +"The next boat is a faster one." + +"Then why don't we take that? I hate dawdling +along on a slow freighter." + +"Well, for one thing it would hardly do to +change now, when all our goods are on board. +And besides, the captain of the _Relstab_, on which +we are going to sail, is a friend of Professor +Bumper's." + +"Well, I'm just as glad Beecher and his party +aren't going with us," resumed Ned, after a +pause. "It might make trouble." + +"Oh, I'm ready for any trouble HE might make!" +quickly exclaimed Tom. + +He meant trouble that might be developed in +going to Honduras, and starting the search +for the lost city and the idol of gold. This kind +of trouble Tom and his friends had experienced +before, on other trips where rivals had sought +to frustrate their ends. + +But, in his heart, though he said nothing to +Ned about it, Tom was worried. Much as he +disliked to admit it to himself, he feared the visit +of Professor Beecher to Mary Nestor in Fayetteville +had but one meaning. + +"I wonder if he's going to propose to her," +thought Tom. "He has the field all to himself +now, and her father likes him. That's in his favor. +I guess Mr. Nestor has never quite forgiven me +for that mistake about the dynamite box, and +that wasn't my fault. Then, too, the Beecher +and Nestor families have been friends for years. +Yes, he surely has the inside edge on me, and +if he gets her to throw me over---- Well, I +won't give up without a fight!" and Tom mentally +girded himself for a battle of wits. + +"He's relying on the prestige he'll get out of +this idol of gold if his party finds it," thought +on the young inventor. "But I'll help find it +first. I'm glad to have a little start of him, anyhow, +even if it isn't more than two days. Though +if our vessel is held back much by storms he may +get on the ground first. However, that can't +be helped. I'll do the best I can." + +These thoughts shot through Tom's mind +even as Ned was asking his questions and making +comments. Then the young inventor, shaking +his shoulders as though to rid them of some +weight, remarked: + +"Well, come on out and see the sights. It will +be long before we look on Broadway again." + +When the chums returned from their sightseeing +excursion, they found that Professor Bumper +had arrived. + +"Where's Professor Bumper?" asked Ned, the next day. + +"In his room, going over books, papers and +maps to make sure he has everything." + +"And Mr. Damon?" + +Tom did not have to answer that last question. +Into the apartment came bursting the excited +individual himself. + +"Bless my overshoes!" he cried, "I've been +looking everywhere for you! Come on, there's +no time to lose!" + +"What's the matter now?" asked Ned. "Is the +hotel on fire?" + +"Has anything happened to Professor Bumper?" +Tom demanded, a wild idea forming in his +head that perhaps some one of the Beecher party +had tried to kidnap the discoverer of the lost +city of Pelone. + +"Oh, everything is all right," answered Mr. +Damon. "But it's nearly time for the show to +start, and we don't want to be late. I have +tickets." + +"For what?" asked Tom and Ned together. + +"The movies," was the laughing reply. "Bless +my loose ribs! but I wouldn't miss him for anything. +He's in a new play called `Up in a Balloon +Boys.' It's great!" and Mr. Damon named +a certain comic moving picture star in whose +horse-play Mr. Damon took a curious interest. +Tom and Ned were glad enough to go, Tom +that he might have a chance to do a certain +amount of thinking, and Ned because he was +still boy enough to like moving pictures. + +"I wonder, Tom," said Mr. Damon, as they +came out of the theater two hours later, all three +chuckling at the remembrance of what they had +seen, "I wonder you never turned your inventive +mind to the movies." + +"Maybe I will, some day," said Tom. + +He spoke rather uncertainly. The truth of +the matter was that he was still thinking deeply +of the visit of Professor Beecher to Mary Nestor, +and wondering what it portended. + +But if Tom's sleep was troubled that night he +said nothing of it to his friends. He was up +early the next morning, for they were to leave +that day, and there was still considerable to be +done in seeing that their baggage and supplies +were safely loaded, and in attending to the last +details of some business matters. + +While at the hotel they had several glimpses +of the members of the Beecher party who were +awaiting the arrival of the young professor who +was to lead them into the wilds of Honduras. +But our friends did not seek the acquaintance +of their rivals. The latter, likewise, remained +by themselves, though they knew doubtless +that there was likely to be a strenuous race for +the possession of the idol of gold, then, it was +presumed, buried deep in some forest-covered +city. + +Professor Bumper had made his arrangements +carefully. As he explained to his friends, they +would take the steamer from New York to Puerto +Cortes, one of the principal seaports of +Honduras. This is a town of about three thousand +inhabitants, with an excellent harbor and a +big pier along which vessels can tie up and +discharge their cargoes directly into waiting cars. + +The preparations were finally completed. +The party went aboard the steamer, which was +a large freight vessel, carrying a limited number +of passengers, and late one afternoon swung +down New York Bay. + +"Off for Honduras!" cried Ned gaily, as they +passed the Statue of Liberty. "I wonder what +will happen before we see that little lady again." + +"Who knows?" asked Tom, shrugging his +shoulders, Spanish fashion. And there came before +him the vision of a certain "little lady," about +whom he had been thinking deeply of late. + + + +CHAPTER IX + +VAL JACINTO + + +"Rather tame, isn't it, Tom?" + +"Well, Ned, it isn't exactly like going up in +an airship," and Tom Swift who was gazing +over the rail down into the deep blue water of +the Caribbean Sea, over which their vessel was +then steaming, looked at his chum beside him. + +"No, and your submarine voyage had it all over +this one for excitement," went on Ned. "When +I think of that----" + +"Bless my sea legs!" interrupted Mr. Damon, +overhearing the conversation. "Don't speak of +THAT trip. My wife never forgave me for going +on it. But I had a fine time," he added with a +twinkle of his eyes. + +"Yes, that was quite a trip," observed Tom, +as his mind went back to it. "But this one isn't +over yet remember. And I shouldn't be surprised +if we had a little excitement very soon." + +"What do you mean?" asked Ned. + +Up to this time the voyage from New York +down into the tropical seas had been anything +but exciting. There were not many passengers +besides themselves, and the weather had been +fine. + +At first, used as they were to the actions of +unscrupulous rivals in trying to thwart their +efforts, Tom and Ned had been on the alert for +any signs of hidden enemies on board the steamer. +But aside from a little curiosity when it became +known that they were going to explore +little-known portions of Honduras, the other +passengers took hardly any interest in our travelers. + +It was thought best to keep secret the fact +that they were going to search for a wonderful +idol of gold. Not even the mule and ox-cart +drivers, whom they would hire to take them into +the wilds of the interior would be told of the real +object of the search. It would be given out that +they were looking for interesting ruins of ancient +cities, with a view to getting such antiquities +as might be there. + +"What do you mean?" asked Ned again, when +Tom did not answer him immediately. "What's +the excitement?" + +"I think we're in for a storm," was the reply. +"The barometer is falling and I see the crew +going about making everything snug. So we +may have a little trouble toward this end of our +trip." + +"Let it come!" exclaimed Mr. Damon. "We're +not afraid of trouble, Tom. Swift, are we?" + +"No, to be sure we're not. And yet it looks +as though the storm would be a bad one." + +"Then I am going to see if my books and +papers are ready, so I can get them together in a +hurry in case we have to take to the life-boats," +said Professor Bumper, coming on deck at that +moment. "It won't do to lose them. If we +didn't have the map we might not be able to find----" + +"Ahem!" exclaimed Tom, with unnecessary +emphasis it seemed. "I'll help you go over your +papers, Professor," he added, and with a wink +and a motion of his hand, he enjoined silence on +his friend. Ned looked around for a reason for +this, and observed a man, evidently of Spanish +extraction, passing them as he paced up and +down the deck. + +"What's the matter?" asked the scientist in +a whisper, as the man went on. "Do you know +him? Is he a----?" + +"I don't know anything about him," said Tom; +"but it is best not to speak of our trip before +strangers." + +"You are right, Tom," said Professor Bumper. +"I'll be more careful." + +A storm was brewing, that was certain. A +dull, sickly yellow began to obscure the sky, and +the water, from a beautiful blue, turned a slate +color and ran along the sides of the vessel with a +hissing sound as though the sullen waves would +ask nothing better than to suck the craft down +into their depths. The wind, which had been +freshening, now sang in louder tones as it +hummed through the rigging and the funnel stays +and bowled over the receiving conductors of the +wireless. + +Sharp commands from the ship's officers +hastened the work of the crew in making things +snug, and life lines were strung along deck for +the safety of such of the passengers as might +venture up when the blow began. + +The storm was not long in coming. The +howling of the wind grew louder, flecks of foam +began to separate themselves from the crests of +the waves, and the vessel pitched, rolled and +tossed more violently. At first Tom and his +friends thought they were in for no more than +an ordinary blow, but as the storm progressed, +and the passengers became aware of the anxiety +on the part of the officers and crew, the alarm +spread among them. + +It really was a violent storm, approaching a +hurricane in force, and at one time it seemed as +though the craft, having been heeled far over +under a staggering wave that swept her decks, +would not come back to an even keel. + +There was a panic among some of the +passengers, and a few excited men behaved in a +way that caused prompt action on the part of +the first officer, who drove them back to the +main cabin under threat of a revolver. For the +men were determined to get to the lifeboats, and +a small craft would not have had a minute to live +in such seas as were running. + +But the vessel proved herself sturdier than the +timid ones had dared to hope, and she was soon +running before the blast, going out of her course, +it is true, but avoiding the danger among the +many cays, or small islands, that dot the Caribbean +Sea. + +There was nothing to do but to let the storm +blow itself out, which it did in two days. Then +came a period of delightful weather. The cargo +had shifted somewhat, which gave the steamer +a rather undignified list. + +This, as well as the loss of a deckhand +overboard, was the effect of the hurricane, and +though the end of the trip came amid sunshine +and sweet-scented tropical breezes, many could +not forget the dangers through which they had +passed. + +In due time Tom and his party found +themselves safely housed in the small hotel at Puerto +Cortes, their belongings stored in a convenient +warehouse and themselves, rather weary by reason +of the stress of weather, ready for the start +into the interior wilds of Honduras. + +"How are we going to make the trip?" asked +Ned, as they sat at supper, the first night after +their arrival, eating of several dishes, the red- +pepper condiments of which caused frequent trips +to the water pitcher. + +"We can go in two ways, and perhaps we shall +find it to our advantage to use both means," said +Professor Bumper. "To get to this city of Kurzon," +he proceeded in a low voice, so that none +of the others in the dining-room would hear +them, "we will have to go either by mule back +or boat to a point near Copan. As near as I +can tell by the ancient maps, Kurzon is in the +Copan valley. + +"Now the Chamelecon river seems to run to +within a short distance of there, but there is +no telling how far up it may be navigable. If +we can go by boat it will be much more comfortable. +Travel by mules and ox-carts is slow and +sure, but the roads are very bad, as I have heard +from friends who have made explorations in +Honduras. + +"And, as I said, we may have to use both land +and water travel to get us where we want to go. +We can proceed as far as possible up the river, +and then take to the mules." + +"What about arranging for boats and animals?" +asked Tom. "I should think----" + +He suddenly ceased talking and reached for +the water, taking several large swallows. + +"Whew!" he exclaimed, when he could catch his breath. +"That was a hot one." + +"What did you do?" asked Ned. + +"Bit into a nest of red pepper. Guess I'll have +to tell that cook to scatter his hits. He's bunching +'em too much in my direction," and Tom +wiped the tears from his eyes. + +"To answer your question," said Professor +Bumper, "I will say that I have made partial +arrangements for men and animals, and boats +if it is found feasible to use them. I've been in +correspondence with one of the merchants here, +and he promised to make arrangements for us." + +"When do we leave?" asked Mr. Damon. + +"As soon as possible. I am not going to risk +anything by delay," and it was evident the professor +referred to his young rival whose arrival +might be expected almost any time. + +As the party was about to leave the table, +they were approached by a tall, dignified Spaniard +who bowed low, rather exaggeratedly low, +Ned thought, and addressed them in fairly good +English. + +"Your pardons, Senors," he began, "but if it +will please you to avail yourself of the humble +services of myself, I shall have great pleasure +in guiding you into the interior. I have at my +command both mules and boats." + +"How do you know we are going into the +interior?" asked Tom, a bit sharply, for he did +not like the assurance of the man. + +"Pardon, Senor. I saw that you are from the +States. And those from the States do not come +to Honduras except for two reasons. To travel +and make explorations or to start trade, and +professors do not usually engage in trade," and +he bowed to Professor Bumper. + +"I saw your name on the register," he proceeded, +"and it was not difficult to guess your mission," +and he flashed a smile on the party, his +white teeth showing brilliantly beneath his +small, black moustache. + +"I make it my business to outfit traveling +parties, either for business, pleasure or scientific +matters. I am, at your service, Val Jacinto," +and he introduced himself with another low bow. + +For a moment Tom and his friends hardly +knew how to accept this offer. It might be, +as the man had said, that he was a professional +tour conductor, like those who have charge of +Egyptian donkey-boys and guides. Or might he +not be a spy? + +This occurred to Tom no less than to Professor +Bumper. They looked at one another while +Val Jacinto bowed again and murmured: + +"At your service!" + +"Can you provide means for taking us to the +Copan valley?" asked the professor. "You are +right in one respect. I am a scientist and I purpose +doing some exploring near Copan. Can +you get us there?" + +"Most expensively--I mean, most expeditionlessly," +said Val Jacinto eagerly. "Pardon my +unhappy English. I forget at times. The +charges will be most moderate. I can send you +by boat as far as the river travel is good, and +then have mules and ox-carts in waiting." + +"How far is it?" asked Tom. + +"A hundred miles as the vulture flies, Senor, +but much farther by river and road. We shall +be a week going." + +"A hundred miles in a week!" groaned Ned. +"Say, Tom, if you had your aeroplane we'd be +there in an hour." + +"Yes, but we haven't it. However, we're in +no great rush." + +"But we must not lose time," said Professor +Bumper. "I shall consider your offer," he added +to Val Jacinto. + +"Very good, Senor. I am sure you will be +pleased with the humble service I may offer you, +and my charges will be small. Adios," and he +bowed himself away. + +"What do you think of him?" asked Ned, as +they went up to their rooms in the hotel, or +rather one large room, containing several beds. + +"He's a pretty slick article," said Mr. Damon. +"Bless my check-book! but he spotted us at +once, in spite of our secrecy." + +"I guess these guide purveyors are trained +for that sort of thing," observed the scientist. +"I know my friends have often spoken of having +had the same experience. However, I shall +ask my friend, who is in business here, about +this Val Jacinto, and if I find him all right we +may engage him " + +Inquiries next morning brought the information, +from the head of a rubber exporting firm +with whom the professor was acquainted, that +the Spaniard was regularly engaged in transporting +parties into the interior, and was considered +efficient, careful and as honest as pos- +sible, considering the men he engaged as workers. + +"So we have decided to engage you," Professor +Bumper informed Val Jacinto the afternoon +following the meeting. + +"I am more than pleased, Senor. I shall take +you into the wilds of Honduras. At your +service!" and he bowed low. + +"Humph! I don't just like the way our friend +Val says that," observed Tom to Ned a little +later. "I'd have been better pleased if he had +said he'd guide us into the wilds and out again." + +If Tom could have seen the crafty smile on +the face of the Spaniard as the man left the +hotel, the young inventor might have felt even +less confidence in the guide. + + + +CHAPTER X + +IN THE WILDS + + +"All aboard! Step lively now! This boat +makes no stops this side of Boston!" cried Ned +Newton gaily, as he got into one of the several +tree canoes provided for the transportation of +the party up the Chamelecon river, for the first +stage of their journey into the wilds of +Honduras. "All aboard! This reminds me of my +old camping days, Tom." + +It brought those days back, in a measure, to +Tom also. For there were a number of canoes +filled with the goods of the party, while the +members themselves occupied a larger one with their +personal baggage. Strong, half-naked Indian +paddlers were in charge of the canoes which +were of sturdy construction and light draft, since +the river, like most tropical streams, was of +uncertain depths, choked here and there with sand +bars or tropical growths. + +Finding that Val Jacinto was regularly engaged +in the business of taking explorers and +mine prospectors into the interior, Professor +Bumper had engaged the man. He seemed to be +efficient. At the promised time he had the +canoes and paddlers on hand and the goods safely +stowed away while one big craft was fitted up +as comfortably as possible for the men of the +party. + +As Ned remarked, it did look like a camping +party, for in the canoes were tents, cooking +utensils and, most important, mosquito canopies +of heavy netting. + +The insect pests of Honduras, as in all tropical +countries, are annoying and dangerous. Therefore +it was imperative to sleep under mosquito +netting. + +On the advice of Val Jacinto, who was to +accompany them, the travelers were to go up the +river about fifty miles. This was as far as it +would be convenient to use the canoes, the guide +told Tom and his friends, and from there on +the trip to the Copan valley would be made on +the backs of mules, which would carry most of +the baggage and equipment. The heavier portions +would be transported in ox-carts. + +As Professor Bumper expected to do considerable +excavating in order to locate the buried +city, or cities, as the case might be, he had to +contract for a number of Indian diggers and +laborers. These could be hired in Copan, it was +said. + +The plan, therefore, was to travel by canoes +during the less heated parts of the day, and tie +up at night, making camp on shore in the net- +protected tents. As for the Indians, they did +not seem to mind the bites of the insects. They +sometimes made a smudge fire, Val Jacinto had +said, but that was all. + +"Well, we haven't seen anything of Beecher +and his friends," remarked the young inventor +as they were about to start. + +"No, he doesn't seem to have arrived," agreed +Professor Bumper. "We'll get ahead of him, +and so much the better. + +"Well, are we all ready to start?" he continued, +as he looked over the little flotilla which carried +his party and his goods. + +"The sooner the better!" cried Tom, and Ned +fancied his chum was unusually eager. + +"I guess he wants to make good before Beecher +gets the chance to show Mary Nestor what +he can do," thought Ned. "Tom sure is after +that idol of gold." + +"You may start, Senor Jacinto," said the +professor, and the guide called something in Indian +dialect to the rowers. Lines were cast off and +the boats moved out into the stream under the +influence of the sturdy paddlers. + +"Well, this isn't so bad," observed Ned, as he +made himself comfortable in his canoe. "How +about it, Tom?" + +"Oh, no. But this is only the beginning." + +A canopy had been arranged over their boat +to keep off the scorching rays of the sun. The +boat containing the exploring party and Val +Jacinto took the lead, the baggage craft following. +At the place where it flowed into the bay +on which Puerto Cortes was built, the stream +was wide and deep. + +The guide called something to the Indians, +who increased their stroke. + +"I tell them to pull hard and that at the end +of the day's journey they will have much rest +and refreshment," he translated to Professor +Bumper and the others. + +"Bless my ham sandwich, but they'll need +plenty of some sort of refreshment," said Mr. +Damon, with a sigh. "I never knew it to be +so hot." + +"Don't complain yet," advised Tom, with a +laugh. "The worst is yet to come." + +It really was not unpleasant traveling, aside +from the heat. And they had expected that, +coming as they had to a tropical land. But, as +Tom said, what lay before them might be worse. + +In a little while they had left behind them all +signs of civilization. The river narrowed and +flowed sluggishly between the banks which were +luxuriant with tropical growth. Now and then +some lonely Indian hut could be seen, and +occasionally a craft propelled by a man who was +trying to gain a meager living from the rubber +forest which hemmed in the stream on either +side. + +As the canoe containing the men was paddled +along, there floated down beside it what seemed +to be a big, rough log. + +"I wonder if that is mahogany," remarked Mr. +Damon, reaching over to touch it. "Mahogany +is one of the most valuable woods of Honduras, +and if this is a log of that nature---- + +"Bless my watch chain!" he suddenly cried. It's alive!" + +And the "log" was indeed so, for there was a +sudden flash of white teeth, a long red opening +showed, and then came a click as an immense +alligator, having opened and closed his mouth, +sank out of sight in a swirl of water. + +Mr. Damon drew back so suddenly that he +tilted the canoe, and the black paddlers looked +around wonderingly. + +"Alligator," explained Jacinto succinctly, in +their tongue. + +"Ugh!" they grunted. + +"Bless my--bless my----" hesitated Mr. +Damon, and for one of the very few times in +his life his language failed him. + +"Are there many of them hereabouts?" asked +Ned, looking back at the swirl left by the saurian. + +"Plenty," said the guide, with a shrug of his +shoulders. He seemed to do as much talking that +way, and with his hands, as he did in speech. +"The river is full of them." + +"Dangerous?" queried Tom. + +"Don't go in swimming," was the significant +advice. "Wait, I'll show you," and he called +up the canoe just behind. + +In this canoe was a quantity of provisions. +There was a chunk of meat among other things, +a gristly piece, seeing which Mr. Damon had +objected to its being brought along, but the guide +had said it would do for fish bait. With a quick +motion of his hand, as he sat in the awning- +covered stern with Tom, Ned and the others, +Jacinto sent the chunk of meat out into the muddy +stream. + +Hardly a second later there was a rushing in +the water as though a submarine were about +to come up. An ugly snout was raised, two +rows of keen teeth snapped shut as a scissors- +like jaw opened, and the meat was gone. + +"See!" was the guide's remark, and something +like a cold shiver of fear passed over the white +members of the party. "This water is not made +in which to swim. Be careful!" + +"We certainly shall," agreed Tom. "They're fierce." + +"And always hungry," observed Jacinto grimly. + +"And to think that I--that I nearly had my +hand on it," murmured Mr. Damon. "Ugh! +Bless my eyeglasses!" + +"The alligator nearly had your hand," said the +guide. "They can turn in the water like a flash, +wherefore it is not wise to pat one on the tail +lest it present its mouth instead." + +They paddled on up the river, the dusky Indians +now and then breaking out into a chant +that seemed to give their muscles new energy. +The song, if song it was, passed from one boat +to the other, and as the chant boomed forth +the craft shot ahead more swiftly. + +They made a landing about noon, and lunch +was served. Tom and his friends were hungry +in spite of the heat. Moreover, they were +experienced travelers and had learned not to fret +over inconveniences and discomforts. the Ind- +ians ate by themselves, two acting as servants +to Jacinto and the professor's party. + +As is usual in traveling in the tropics, a halt +was made during the heated middle of the day. +Then, as the afternoon shadows were waning, +the party again took to the canoes and paddled +on up the river. + +"Do you know of a good place to stop during +the night?" asked Professor Bumper of Jacinto. + +"Oh, yes; a most excellent place. It is where +I always bring scientific parties I am guiding. +You may rely on me." + +It was within an hour of dusk--none too much +time to allow in which to pitch camp in the +tropics, where night follows day suddenly--when +a halt was called, as a turn of the river showed a +little clearing on the edge of the forest-bound +river. + +"We stay here for the night," said Jacinto. +"It is a good place." + +"It looks picturesque enough," observed Mr. +Damon. "But it is rather wild." + +"We are a good distance from a settlement," +agreed the guide. "But one can not explore-- +and find treasure in cities," and he shrugged +his shoulders again. + +"Find treasure? What do you mean?" asked Tom quickly. +"Do you think that we----?" + +"Pardon, Senor," replied Jacinto softly. "I meant +no offense. I think that all you scientific +parties will take treasure if you can find it." + +"We are looking for traces of the old Honduras +civilization," put in Professor Bumper. + +"And doubtless you will find it," was the +somewhat too courteous answer of the guide. +"Make camp quickly!" he called to the Indians +in their tongue. "You must soon get under the +nets or you will be eaten alive!" he told Tom. +"There are many mosquitoes here." + +The tents were set up, smudge fires built and +supper quickly prepared. Dusk fell rapidly, and +as Tom and Ned walked a little way down +toward the river before turning in under the +mosquito canopies, the young financial man said: + +"Sort of lonesome and gloomy, isn't it, Tom?" + +"Yes. But you didn't expect to find a moving +picture show in the wilds of Honduras, did you?" + +"No, and yet-- Look out! What's that?" +suddenly cried Ned, as a great soft, black shadow +seemed to sweep out of a clump of trees toward +him. Involuntarily he clutched Tom's arm and +pointed, his face showing fear in the fast-gathering +darkness. + + + +CHAPTER XI + +THE VAMPIRES + + +Tom Swift looked deliberately around. It +was characteristic of him that, though by nature +he was prompt in action, he never acted so hurriedly +as to obscure his judgment. So, though +now Ned showed a trace of strange excitement, +Tom was cool. + +"What is it?" asked the young inventor. +"What's the matter? What did you think you saw, +Ned; another alligator?" + +"Alligator? Nonsense! Up on shore? I saw +a black shadow, and I didn't THINK I saw it, +either. I really did." + +Tom laughed quietly. + +"A shadow!" he exclaimed. "Since when +were you afraid of shadows, Ned?" + +"I'm not afraid of ordinary shadows," answered +Ned, and in his voice there was an uncertain +tone. "I'm not afraid of my shadow or +yours, Tom, or anybody's that I can see. But +this wasn't any human shadow. It was as if a +great big blob of wet darkness had been waved +over your head." + +"That's a queer explanation," Tom said in a +low voice. "A great big blob of wet darkness!" + +"But that just describes it," went on Ned, +looking up and around. "It was just as if you were in +some dark room, and some one waved a wet +velvet cloak over your head--spooky like! It +didn't make a sound, but there was a smell as +if a den of some wild beast was near here. I +remember that odor from the time we went +hunting with your electric rifle in the jungle, and +got near the den in the rocks where the tigers +lived." + +"Well, there is a wild beast smell all around +here," admitted Tom, sniffing the air. "It's the +alligators in the river I guess. You know they +have an odor of musk." + +"Do you mean to say you didn't feel that +shadow flying over us just now?" asked Ned. + +"Well, I felt something sail through the air, +but I took it to be a big bird. I didn't pay much +attention. To tell you the truth I was thinking +about Beecher--wondering when he would get +here," added Tom quickly as if to forestall any +question as to whether or not his thoughts had +to do with Beecher in connection with Tom's +affair of the heart. + +"Well it wasn't a bird--at least not a regular +bird," said Ned in a low voice, as once more he +looked at the dark and gloomy jungle that +stretched back from the river and behind the +little clearing where the camp had been made. + +"Come on!" cried Tom, in what he tried to +make a cheerful voice. "This is getting on your +nerves, Ned, and I didn't know you had any. +Let's go back and turn in. I'm dog-tired and +the mosquitoes are beginning to find that we're +here. Let's get under the nets. Then the black +shadows won't get you." + +Not at all unwilling to leave so gloomy a scene, +Ned, after a brief glance up and down the dark +river, followed his chum. They found Professor +Bumper and Mr. Damon in their tent, a separate +one having been set up for the two men adjoining +that of the youths. + +"Bless my fountain pen!" exclaimed Mr. Damon, +as he caught sight of Tom and Ned in the +flickering light of the smudge fire between the +two canvas shelters. "We were just wondering +what had become of you." + +"We were chasing shadows!" laughed Tom. +"At least Ned was. But you look cozy enough in there." + +It did, indeed, look cheerful in contrast to the +damp and dark jungle all about. Professor Bumper, +being an experienced traveler, knew how to +provide for such comforts as were possible. Folding +cots had been opened for himself, Mr. Damon +and the guide to sleep on, others, similar, being +set up in the tent where Tom and Ned were to +sleep. In the middle of the tent the professor +had made a table of his own and Mr. +Damon's suit cases, and on this placed a small +dry battery electric light. He was making some +notes, doubtless for a future book. Jacinto was +going about the camp, seeing that the Indians +were at their duties, though most of them had +gone directly to sleep after supper. + +"Better get inside and under the nets," advised +Professor Bumper to Tom and Ned. "The mosquitoes +here are the worst I ever saw." + +"We're beginning to believe that," returned +Ned, who was unusually quiet. "Come on, +Tom. I can't stand it any longer. I'm itching +in a dozen places now from their bites." + +As Tom and Ned had no wish for a light, +which would be sure to attract insects, they +entered their tent in the dark, and were soon +stretched out in comparative comfort. Tom was +just on the edge of a deep sleep when he heard +Ned murmur: + +"I can't understand it!" + +"What's that?" asked the young inventor. + +"I say I can't understand it." + +"Understand what?" + +"That shadow. It was real and yet----" + +"Oh, go to sleep!" advised Tom, and, turning +over, he was soon breathing heavily and regularly, +indicating that he, at least, had taken his own advice. + +Ned, too, finally succumbed to the overpowering +weariness of the first day of travel, and he, +too, slept, though it was an uneasy slumber, +disturbed by a feeling as though some one were +holding a heavy black quilt over his head, +preventing him from breathing. + +The feeling, sensation or dream--whatever it +was--perhaps a nightmare--became at last so +real to Ned that he struggled himself into +wakefulness. With an effort he sat up, uttering an +inarticulate cry. To his surprise he was +answered. Some one asked: + +"What is the matter?" + +"Who--who are you?" asked Ned quickly, +trying to peer through the darkness. + +"This is Jacinto--your guide," was the soft +answer. "I was walking about camp and, hearing +you murmuring, I came to your tent. Is +anything wrong?" + +For a moment Ned did not answer. He +listened and could tell by the continued heavy +and regular breathing of his chum that Tom +was still asleep. + +"Are you in our tent?" asked Ned, at length: + +"Yes," answered Jacinto. "I came in to see +what was the matter with you. Are you ill?" + +"No, of course not," said Ned, a bit shortly. +"I--I had a bad dream, that was all. All +right now." + +"For that I am glad. Try to get all the sleep +you can, for we must start early to avoid the +heat of the day," and there was the sound of +the guide leaving and arranging the folds of the +mosquito net behind him to keep out the night- +flying insects. + +Once more Ned composed himself to sleep, and +this time successfully, for he did not have any +more unpleasant dreams. The quiet of the +jungle settled down over the camp, at least the +comparative quiet of the jungle, for there were +always noises of some sort going on, from the +fall of some rotten tree limb to the scream or +growl of a wild beast, while, now and again, from +the river came the pig-like grunts of the alligators. + +It was about two o'clock in the morning, as +they ascertained later, when the whole camp-- +white travelers and all--was suddenly awakened +by a wild scream. It seemed to come from one +of the natives, who called out a certain word +ever and over again. To Tom and Ned it +sounded like: + +"Oshtoo! Oshtoo! Oshtoo!" + +"What's the matter?" cried Professor Bumper. + +"The vampires!" came the answering voice of +Jacinto. "One of the Indians has been attacked +by a big vampire bat! Look out, every one! +It may be a raid by the dangerous creatures! +Be careful!" + +Notwithstanding this warning Ned stuck his +head out of the tent. The same instant he was +aware of a dark enfolding shadow passing over +him, and, with a shudder of fear, he jumped back. + + + +CHAPTER XII + +A FALSE FRIEND + + +"What is it? What's the matter?" cried Tom +springing from his cot and hastening to the side +of his chum in the tent. "What has happened, Ned?" + +"I don't know, but Jacinto is yelling +something about vampires!" + +"Vampires?" + +"Yes. Big bats. And he's warning us to be +careful. I stuck my head out just now and I +felt that same sort of shadow I felt this evening +when we were down near the river." + +"Nonsense!" + +"I tell you I did!" + +At that instant Tom flashed a pocket electric +lamp he had taken from beneath his pillow and +in the gleam of it he and Ned saw fluttering +about the tent some dark, shadow-like form, at +the sight of which Tom's chum cried: + +"There it is! That's the shadow! Look out!" +and he held up his hands instinctively to shield +his face. + +"Shadow!" yelled Tom, unconsciously adding +to the din that seemed to pervade every part of +the camp. "That isn't a shadow. It's +substance. It's a monster bat, and here goes +for a strike at it!" + +He caught up his camera tripod which was near +his cot, and made a swing with it at the creature +that had flown into the tent through an opening +it had made for itself. + +"Look out!" yelled Ned. "If it's a vampire it'll----" + +"It won't do anything to me!" shouted Tom, +as he struck the creature, knocking it into the +corner of the tent with a thud that told it must +be completely stunned, if not killed. "But +what's it all about, anyhow?" Tom asked. +"What's the row?" + +From without the tent came the Indian cries of: + +"Oshtoo! Oshtoo!" + +Mingled with them were calls of Jacinto, partly +in Spanish, partly in the Indian tongue and +partly in English. + +"It is a raid by vampire bats!" was all Tom +and Ned could distinguish. "We shall have +to light fires to keep them away, if we can suc- +ceed. Every one grab up a club and strike hard!" + +"Come on!" cried Tom, getting on some clothes +by the light of his gleaming electric light +which he had set on his cot. + +"You're not going out there, are you?" asked Ned. + +"I certainly am! If there's a fight I want to +be in it, bats or anything else. Here, you have +a light like mine. Flash it on, and hang it +somewhere on yourself. Then get a club and +come on. The lights will blind the bats, and +we can see to hit 'em!" + +Tom's plan seemed to be a good one. His +lamp and Ned's had small hooks on them, so +they could be carried in the upper coat pocket, +showing a gleam of light and leaving the hands +free for use. + +Out of the tents rushed the young men to find +Professor Bumper and Mr. Damon before them. +The two men had clubs and were striking about +in the half darkness, for now the Indians had set +several fires aglow. And in the gleams, +constantly growing brighter as more fuel was piled +on, the young inventor and his chum saw a +weird sight. + +Circling and wheeling about in the camp clearing +were many of the black shadowy forms that +had caused Ned such alarm. Great bats they +were, and a dangerous species, if Jacinto was +to be believed. + +The uncanny creatures flew in and out among +the trees and tents, now swooping low near the +Indians or the travelers. At such times clubs +would be used, often with the effect of killing or +stunning the flying pests. For a time it seemed +as if the bats would fairly overwhelm the camp, +so many of them were there. But the increasing +lights, and the attacks made by the Indians and +the white travelers turned the tide of battle, and, +with silent flappings of their soft, velvety wings, +the bats flew back to the jungle whence they had emerged. + +"We are safe--for the present!" exclaimed +Jacinto with a sigh of relief. + +"Do you think they will come back?" asked Tom. + +"They may--there is no telling." + +"Bless my speedometer!" cried Mr. Damon, +"If those beasts or birds--whatever they are-- +come back I'll go and hide in the river and take +my chances with the alligators!" + +"The alligators aren't much worse," asserted +Jacinto with a visible shiver. "These vampire +bats sometimes depopulate a whole village." + +"Bless my shoe laces!" cried Mr. Damon. "You +don't mean to say that the creatures can eat up a +whole village?" + +"Not quite. Though they might if they got +the chance," was the answer of the Spanish +guide. "These vampire bats fly from place to +place in great swarms, and they are so large and +blood-thirsty that a few of them can kill a horse +or an ox in a short time by sucking its blood. So +when the villagers find they are visited by a +colony of these vampires they get out, taking +their live stock with them, and stay in caves or in +densely wooded places until the bats fly on. +Then the villagers come back. + +"It was only a small colony that visited us to- +night or we would have had more trouble. I do +not think this lot will come back. We have +killed too many of them," and he looked about +on the ground where many of the uncanny creatures +were still twitching in the death struggle. + +"Come back again!" cried Mr. Damon. "Bless +my skin! I hope not! I've had enough of bats-- +and mosquitoes," he added, as he slapped at his +face and neck. + +Indeed the party of whites were set upon by +the night insects to such an extent that it was +necessary to hurry back to the protection of the +nets. + +Tom and Ned kicked outside the bat the former +had killed in their tent, and then both went back +to their cots. But it was some little time +before they fell asleep. And they did not have +much time to rest, for an early start must be +made to avoid the terrible heat of the middle of +the day. + +"Whew!" whistled Ned, as he and Tom arose +in the gray dawn of the morning when Jacinto +announced the breakfast which the Indian cook +had prepared. "That was some night! If this +is a sample of the wilds of Honduras, give me +the tameness of Shopton." + +"Oh, we've gone through with worse than +this," laughed Tom. "It's all in the day's work. +We've only got started. I guess we're a bit +soft, Ned, though we had hard enough work in +that tunnel-digging." + +After breakfast, while the Indians were making +ready the canoes, Professor Bumper, who, +in a previous visit to Central America, had +become interested in the subject, made a brief +examination of some of the dead bats. They were +exceptionally large, some almost as big as hawks. +and were of the sub-family _Desmodidae_, the scientist +said. + +"This is a true blood-sucking bat," went on +the professor. "This," and he pointed to the +nose-leaves, "is the sucking apparatus. The +bat makes an opening in the skin with its sharp +teeth and proceeds to extract the blood. I can +well believe two or three of them, attacking a +steer or mule at once, could soon weaken it so +the animal would die." + +"And a man, too?" asked Ned. + +"Well a man has hands with which to use +weapons, but a helpless quadruped has not. +Though if a sufficient number of these bats +attacked a man at the same time, he would have +small chance to escape alive. Their bites, too, +may be poisonous for all I know." + +The Indians seemed glad to leave the "place +of the bats," as they called the camp site. Jacinto +explained that the Indians believed a vampire +could kill them while they slept, and they were +very much afraid of the blood-sucking bats. +There were many other species in the tropics, +Professor Bumper explained, most of which +lived on fruit or on insects they caught. The +blood-sucking bats were comparatively few, and +the migratory sort fewer still. + +"Well, we're on our way once more," +remarked Tom as again they were in the canoes +being paddled up the river. "How much +longer does your water trip take, Professor?" + +"I hardly know," and Professor Bumper looked +to Jacinto to answer. + +"We go two more days in the canoes," the +guide answered, "and then we shall find the +mules waiting for us at a place called Hidjio. +From then on we travel by land until--well until +you get to the place where you are going. + +"I suppose you know where it is?" he added, +nodding toward the professor. "I am leaving +that part to you." + +"Oh, I have a map, showing where I want to +begin some excavations," was the answer. "We +must first go to Copan and see what arrangements +we can make for laborers. After that--well, we +shall trust to luck for what we shall find." + +"There are said to be many curious things," +went on Jacinto, speaking as though he had no +interest. "You have mentioned buried cities. +Have you thought what may be in them--great +heathen temples, idols, perhaps?" + +For a moment none of the professor's +companions spoke. It was as though Jacinto had +tried to get some information. Finally the +scientist said: + +"Oh, yes, we may find an idol. I understand +the ancient people, who were here long before +the Spaniards came, worshiped idols. But we +shall take whatever antiquities we find." + +"Huh!" grunted Jacinto, and then he called +to the paddlers to increase their strokes. + +The journey up the river was not very +eventful. Many alligators were seen, and Tom and +Ned shot several with the electric rifle. Toward +the close of the third day's travel there was a +cry from one of the rear boats, and an alarm of +a man having fallen overboard was given. + +Tom turned in time to see the poor fellow's +struggles, and at the same time there was a swirl +in the water and a black object shot forward. + +"An alligator is after him!" yelled Ned. + +"I see," observed Tom calmly. "Hand me the rifle, Ned." + +Tom took quick aim and pulled the trigger. +The explosive electric bullet went true to its +mark, and the great animal turned over in a death +struggle. But the river was filled with them, and +no sooner had the one nearest the unfortunate +Indian been disposed of than another made a +dash for the man. + +There was a wild scream of agony and then +a dark arm shot up above the red foam. The +waters seethed and bubbled as the alligators +fought under it for possession of the paddler. +Tom fired bullet after bullet from his wonderful +rifle into the spot, but though he killed some +of the alligators this did not save the man's life. +His body was not seen again, though search was +made for it. + +The accident cast a little damper over the +party, and there was a feeling of gloom among +the Indians. Professor Bumper announced that +he would see to it that the man's family did not +want, and this seemed to give general satisfaction, +especially to a brother who was with the +party. + +Aside from being caught in a drenching storm +and one or two minor accidents, nothing else +of moment marked the remainder of the river +journey, and at the end of the third day the +canoes pulled to shore and a night camp was +made. + +"But where are the mules we are to use in +traveling to-morrow?" asked the professor of Jacinto. + +"In the next village. We shall march there +in the morning. No use to go there at night +when all is dark." + +"I suppose that is so." + +The Indians made camp as usual, the goods being +brought from the canoes and piled up near +the tents. Then night settled down. + +"Hello!" cried Tom, awakening the next morning +to find the sun streaming into his tent. "We +must have overslept, Ned. We were to start +before old Sol got in his heavy work, but we +haven't had breakfast yet." + +"I didn't hear any one call us," remarked Ned. + +"Nor I. Wonder if we're the only lazy birds." +He looked from the tent in time to see Mr. +Damon and the professor emerging. Then Tom +noticed something queer. The canoes were not +on the river bank. There was not an Indian +in sight, and no evidence of Jacinto. + +"What's the matter?" asked the young +inventor. "Have the others gone on ahead?" + +"I rather think they've gone back," was the +professor's dry comment. + +"Gone back?" + +"Yes. The Indians seem to have deserted us +at the ending of this stage of our journey." + +"Bless my time-table!" cried Mr. Damon. +"You don't say so! What does it mean? What +has becomes of our friend Jacinto?" + +"I'm afraid he was rather a false friend," was +the professor's answer. "This is the note he left. +He has gone and taken the canoes and all the +Indians with him," and he held out a paper on +which was some scribbled writing. + + + +CHAPTER XIII + +FORWARD AGAIN + + +"What does it all mean?" asked Tom, seeing +that the note was written in Spanish, a tongue +which he could speak slightly but read indifferently. + +"This is some of Beecher's work," was +Professor Bumper's grim comment. "It seems that +Jacinto was in his pay." + +"In his pay!" cried Mr. Damon. "Do you mean +that Beecher deliberately hired Jacinto to betray us?" + +"Well, no. Not that exactly. Here, I'll translate +this note for you," and the professor proceeded to read: + + +"Senors: I greatly regret the step I have to +take, but I am a gentleman, and, having given +my word, I must keep it. No harm shall come +to you, I swear it on my honor!" + + +"Queer idea of honor he has!" commented Tom, grimly. + +Professor Bumper read on: + + +"Know then, that before I engaged myself to +you I had been engaged by Professor Beecher +through a friend to guide him into the Copan +valley, where he wants to make some explorations, +for what I know not, save maybe that it +is for gold. I agreed, in case any rival expeditions +came to lead them astray if I could. + +"So, knowing from what you said that you +were going to this place, I engaged myself to you, +planning to do what I have done. I greatly regret +it, as I have come to like you, but I had +given my promise to Professor Beecher's friend, +that I would first lead him to the Copan valley, +and would keep others away until he had had a +chance to do his exploration. + +"So I have led you to this wilderness. It is +far from the Copan, but you are near an Indian +village, and you will be able to get help in a week +or so. In the meanwhile you will not starve, as +you have plenty of supplies. If you will travel +northeast you will come again to Puerto Cortes +in due season. As for the money I had from +you, I deposit it to your credit, Professor Beecher +having made me an allowance for steering rival +parties on the wrong trail. So I lose nothing, +and I save my honor. + +"I write this note as I am leaving in the night +with the Indians. I put some harmless sedative +in your tea that you might sleep soundly, and not +awaken until we were well on our way. Do not +try to follow us, as the river will carry us swiftly +away. And, let me add, there is no personal +animosity on the part of Professor Beecher +against you. I should have done to any rival +expedition the same as I have done with you. + JACINTO." + + +For a moment there was silence, and then Tom +Swift burst out with: + +"Well, of all the mean, contemptible tricks +of a human skunk this is the limit!" + +"Bless my hairbrush, but he is a scoundrel!" +ejaculated Mr. Damon, with great warmth. + +"I'd like to start after him the biggest alligator +in the river," was Ned's comment. + +Professor Bumper said nothing for several +seconds. There was a strange look on his face, +and then he laughed shortly, as though the humor +of the situation appealed to him. + +"Professor Beecher has more gumption than I gave +him credit for," he said. "It was a clever trick!" + +"Trick!" cried Tom. + +"Yes. I can't exactly agree that it was the +right thing to do, but he, or some friend acting +for him, seems to have taken precautions that +we are not to suffer or lose money. Beecher +goes on the theory that all is fair in love and +war, I suppose, and he may call this a sort of +scientific war." + +Ned wondered, as he looked at his chum, how +much love there was in it. Clearly Beecher was +determined to get that idol of gold. + +"Well, it can't be helped, and we must make +the best of it," said Tom, after a pause. + +"True. But now, boys, let's have breakfast, +and then we'll make what goods we can't take +with us as snug as possible, until we can send +the mule drivers after them," went on Professor +Bumper. + +"Send the mule drivers after them?" questioned Ned. +"What do you mean to do?" + +"Do? Why keep on, of course. You don't +suppose I'm going to let a little thing like this +stand between me and the discovery of Kurzon +and the idol of gold, do you?" + +"But," began Mr. Damon, "I don't see how--" + +"Oh, we'll find a way," interrupted Tom. "It +isn't the first time I've been pretty well stranded +on an expedition of this kind, and sometimes +from the same cause--the actions of a rival. +Now we'll turn the tables on the other fellows +and see how they like it. The professor's right +--let's have breakfast. Jacinto seems to have +told the truth. Nothing of ours is missing." + +Tom and Ned got the meal, and then a +consultation was held as to what was best to be +done. + +"We can't go on any further by water, that's +sure," said Tom. "In the first place the river +is too shallow, and secondly we have no canoes. +So the only thing is to go on foot through the +jungle." + +"But how can we, and carry all this stuff?" +asked Ned. + +"We needn't carry it!" cried Professor Bumper. +"We'll leave it here, where it will be safe enough, +and tramp on to the nearest Indian village. +There we'll hire bearers to take our stuff on until +we can get mules. I'm not going to turn back!" + +"Good!" cried Mr. Damon. "Bless my +rubber boots! but that's what I say--keep on!" + +"Oh, no! we'll never turn back," agreed Tom. + +"But how can we manage it?" asked Ned. + +"We've just got to! And when you have +to do a thing, it's a whole lot easier to do than +if you just feel as though you ought to. So, +lively is the word!" cried Tom, in answer. + +"We'll pack up what we can carry and leave +the rest," added the scientist. + +Being an experienced traveler Professor Bumper +had arranged his baggage so that it could +be carried by porters if necessary. Everything +could be put into small packages, including the +tents and food supply. + +"There are four of us," remarked Tom, "and if +we can not pack enough along with us to enable +us to get to the nearest village, we had better +go back to civilization. I'm not afraid to try." + +"Nor I!" cried Mr. Damon. + +The baggage, stores and supplies that were +to be left behind were made as snug as possible, +and so piled up that wild beasts could do the +least harm. Then a pack was made up for each +one to carry. + +They would take weapons, of course, Tom +Swift's electric rifle being the one he choose for +himself. They expected to be able to shoot +game on their way, and this would provide them +food in addition to the concentrated supply they +carried. Small tents, in sections, were carried, +there being two, one for Tom and Ned and one +for Mr. Damon and the professor. + +As far as could be learned from a casual +inspection, Jacinto and his deserting Indians had +taken back with them only a small quantity of +food. They were traveling light and down +stream, and could reach the town much more +quickly than they had come away from it. + +"That Beecher certainly was slick," commented +Professor Bumper when they were ready to +start. "He must have known about what time +I would arrive, and he had Jacinto waiting for +us. I thought it was too good to be true, to get +an experienced guide like him so easily. But it +was all planned, and I was so engrossed in thinking +of the ancient treasures I hope to find that +I never thought of a possible trick. Well, let's +start!" and he led the way into the jungle, carrying +his heavy pack as lightly as did Tom. + +Professor Bumper had a general idea in which +direction lay a number of native villages, and it +was determined to head for them, blazing a path +through the wilderness, so that the Indians could +follow it back to the goods left behind. + +It was with rather heavy hearts that the party +set off, but Tom's spirits could not long stay +clouded, and the scientist was so good-natured +about the affair and seemed so eager to do the +utmost to render Beecher's trick void, that the +others fell into a lighter mood, and went on +more cheerfully, though the way was rough and +the packs heavy. + +They stopped at noon under a bower they made +of palms, and, spreading the nets over them, got a +little rest after a lunch. Then, when the sun +was less hot, they started off again. + +"Forward is the word!" cried Ned cheerfully. "Forward!"' + +They had not gone more than an hour on the +second stage of their tramp when Tom, who +was in the lead, following the direction laid out +by the compass, suddenly stopped, and reached +around for his electric rifle, which he was carrying +at his back. + +"What is it?" asked Ned in a whisper. + +"I don't know, but it's some big animal there +in the bushes," was Tom's low-voiced answer. +"I'm ready for it." + +The rustling increased, and a form could be +seen indistinctly. Tom aimed the deadly gun +and stood ready to pull the trigger. + +Ned, tho had a side view into the underbrush, +gave a sudden cry. + +"Don't shoot, Tom!" he yelled. "It's a man!" + + + +CHAPTER XIV: + +A NEW GUIDE + + +In spite of Ned Newton's cry, Tom's finger +pressed the switch-trigger of the electric rifle, +for previous experience had taught him that it +was sometimes the best thing to awe the natives +in out-of-the-way corners of the earth. But the +young inventor quickly elevated the muzzle, and +the deadly missile went hissing through the air +over the head of a native Indian who, at that +moment, stepped from the bush. + +The man, startled and alarmed, shrank back +and was about to run into the jungle whence he +had emerged. Small wonder if he had, considering +the reception he so unwittingly met with. +But Tom. aware of the necessity for making +inquiries of one who knew that part of the jungle, +quickly called to him. + +"Hold on!" he shouted. "Wait a minute. I didn't +mean that. I thought at first you were a +tapir or a tiger. No harm intended. I say, +Professor," Tom called back to the savant, +"you'd better speak to him in his lingo, I can't +manage it. He may be useful in guiding us to +that Indian village Jacinto told us of." + +This Professor Bumper did, being able to make +himself understood in the queer part-Spanish +dialect used by the native Hondurians, though +he could not, of course, speak it as fluently as +had Jacinto. + +Professor Bumper had made only a few remarks +to the man who had so unexpectedly appeared +out of the jungle when the scientist gave an +exclamation of surprise at some of the answers made. + +"Bless my moving picture!" cried Mr. Damon. + +"What's the matter now? Is anything wrong? +Does he refuse to help us?" + +"No, it isn't that," was the answer. "In fact +he came here to help us. Tom, this is the brother +of the Indian who fell overboard and who was eaten +by the alligators. He says you were very kind +to try to save his brother with your rifle, +and for that reason he has come back to help us." + +"Come back?" queried Tom. + +"Yes, he went off with the rest of the Indians +when Jacinto deserted us, but he could not stand +being a traitor, after you had tried to save his +brother's life. These Indians are queer people. + +They don't show much emotion, but they have +deep feelings. This one says he will devote +himself to your service from now on. I believe +we can count on him. He is deeply grateful to +you, Tom." + +"I'm glad of that for all our sakes. But what +does he say about Jacinto?" + +The professor asked some more questions, +receiving answers, and then translated them. + +"This Indian, whose name is Tolpec, says +Jacinto is a fraud," exclaimed Professor Bumper. +"He made all the Indians leave us in the night, +though many of them were willing to stay and +fill the contract they had made. But Jacinto +would not let them, making them desert. Tolpec +went away with the others, but because of what +Tom had done he planned to come back at the +first chance and be our guide. Accordingly he +jumped ashore from one of the canoes, and made +his way to our camp. He got there, found it +deserted and followed us, coming up just now." + +"Well I'm glad I didn't frighten him off with +my gun," remarked Tom grimly. "So he agrees +with us that Jacinto is a scoundrel, does he? +I guess he might as well classify Professor +Beecher in the same way." + +"I am not quite so sure of that," said Professor +Bumper slowly. "I can not believe Beecher +would play such a trick as this, though some +over-zealous friend of his might." + +"Oh, of course Beecher did it!" cried Tom. +"He heard we were coming here, figured out that +we'd start ahead of him, and he wanted to side- +track us. Well, he did it all right," and Tom's +voice was bitter. + +"He has only side-tracked us for a while," +announced Professor Bumper in cheerful tones. + +"What do you mean?" asked Mr. Damon. + +"I mean that this Indian comes just in the nick +of time. He is well acquainted with this part +of the jungle, having lived here all his life, +and he offers to guide us to a place where we can +get mules to transport ourselves and our baggage +to Copan." + +"Fine!" cried Ned. "When can we start?" + +Once more the professor and the native +conversed in the strange tongue, and then Professor +Bumper announced: + +"He says it will be better for us to go back +where we left our things and camp there. He +will stay with us to-night and in the morning go +on to the nearest Indian town and come back +with porters and helpers." + +"I think that is good advice to follow," put in +Tom, "for we do need our goods; and if we +reached the settlement ourselves, we would have +to send back for our things, with the uncertainty +of getting them all." + +So it was agreed that they would make a forced +march back through the jungle to where they +had been deserted by Jacinto. There they would +make camp for the night, and until such time as +Tolpec could return with a force of porters. + +It was not easy, that backward tramp through +the jungle, especially as night had fallen. But +the new Indian guide could see like a cat, and +led the party along paths they never could have +found by themselves. The use of their pocket +electric lights was a great help, and possibly +served to ward off the attacks of jungle beasts, +for as they tramped along they could hear stealthy +sounds in the underbush on either side of the +path, as though tigers were stalking them. For +there was in the woods an animal of the leopard +family, called tiger or "tigre" by the natives, +that was exceedingly fierce and dangerous. But +watchfulness prevented any accident, and eventually +the party reached the place where they had +left their goods. Nothing had been disturbed, +and finally a fire was made, the tents set up and +a light meal, with hot tea served. + +"We'll get ahead of Beecher yet," said Tom. + +"You seem as anxious as Professor Bumper," +observed Mr. Damon, + +"I guess I am," admitted Tom. "I want to +see that idol of gold in the possession of our +party." + +The night passed without incident, and then, +telling his new friends that he would return as +soon as possible with help, Tolpec, taking a +small supply of food with him, set out through +the jungle again. + +As the green vines and creepers closed after +him, and the explorers were left alone with their +possessions piled around them, Ned remarked: + +"After all, I wonder if it was wise to let him go?" + +"Why not?" asked Tom. + +"Well, maybe he only wanted to get us back +here, and then he'll desert, too. Maybe that's +what he's done now, making us lose two or three +days by inducing us to return, waiting for what +will never happen--his return with other +natives." + +A silence followed Ned's intimation. + + + +CHAPTER XV + +IN THE COILS + + +"Ned, do you really think Tolpec is going to +desert us?" asked Tom. + +"Well, I don't know," was the slowly given reply. +"It's a possibility, isn't it?" + +"Yes, it is," broke in Professor Bumper. "But +what if it is? We might as well trust him, and +if he proves true, as I believe he will, we'll be +so much better off. If he proves a traitor we'll +only have lost a few days, for if he doesn't come +back we can go on again in the way we started." + +"But that's just it!" complained Tom. "We +don't want to lose any time with that Beecher +chap on our trail." + +"I am not so very much concerned about him," +remarked Professor Bumper, dryly. + +"Why not?" snapped out Mr. Damon. + +"Well, because I think he'll have just about +as hard work locating the hidden city, and finding +the idol of gold, as we'll have. In other words +it will be an even thing, unless he gets too far +ahead of us, or keeps us back, and I don't believe +he can do that now. + +"So I thought it best to take a chance with this +Indian. He would hardly have taken the trouble +to come all the way back, and run the risks he +did, just to delay us a few days. However, we'll +soon know. Meanwhile, we'll take it easy and +wait for the return of Tolpec and his friends." + +Though none of them liked to admit it, Ned's +words had caused his three friends some anxiety, +and though they busied themselves about the +camp there was an air of waiting impatiently for +something to occur. And waiting is about the +hardest work there is. + +But there was nothing for it but to wait, and +it might be at least a week, Professor Bumper +said, before the Indian could return with a party +of porters and mules to move their baggage. + +"Yes, Tolpec has not only to locate the +settlement," Tom admitted, "but he must persuade the +natives to come back with him. He may have +trouble in that, especially if it is known that he +has left Jacinto, who, I imagine, is a power among +the tribes here." + +But there were only two things left to do--wait +and hope. The travelers did both. Four days +passed and there was no sign of Tolpec. Eager- +ly, and not a little anxiously, they watched the +jungle path along which he had disappeared. + +"Oh, come on!" exclaimed Tom one morning, +when the day seemed a bit cooler than its +predecessor. "Let's go for a hunt, or something! +I'm tired of sitting around camp." + +"Bless my watch hands! So am I!" cried Mr. Damon. +"Let's all go for a trip. It will do us good." + +"And perhaps I can get some specimens of interest," +added Professor Bumper, who, in addition to being +an archaeologist, was something of a naturalist. + +Accordingly, having made everything snug in +camp, the party, Tom and Ned equipped with +electric rifles, and the professor with a butterfly +net and specimen boxes, set forth. Mr. Damon +said he would carry a stout club as his weapon. + +The jungle, as usual, was teeming with life, +but as Ned and Tom did not wish to kill wantonly +they refrained from shooting until later in the +day. For once it was dead, game did not keep +well in that hot climate, and needed to be cooked +almost immediately. + +"We'll try some shots on our back trip," said +the young inventor. + +Professor Bumper found plenty of his own +particular kind of "game" which he caught in the +net, transferring the specimens to the boxes he +carried. There were beautiful butterflies, moths +and strange bugs in the securing of which the +scientist evinced great delight, though when one +beetle nipped him firmly and painfully on his +thumb his involuntary cry of pain was as real +as that of any other person. + +"But I didn't let him get away," he said in +triumph when he had dropped the clawing insect +into the cyanide bottle where death came painlessly. +"It is well worth a sore thumb." + +They wandered on through the jungle, taking +care not to get too far from their camp, for they +did not want to lose their way, nor did they want +to be absent too long in case Tolpec and his +native friends should return. + +"Well, it's about time we shot something, I +think," remarked Ned, when they had been out +about two hours. "Let's try for some of these +wild turkeys. They ought to go well roasted +even if it isn't Thanksgiving." + +"I'm with you," agreed Tom. "Let's see who +has the best luck. But tone down the charge +in your rifle and use a smaller projectile, or you'll +have nothing but a bunch of feathers to show +for your shot. The guns are loaded for deer." + +The change was made, and once more the two +young men started off, a little ahead of Professor +Bumper and Mr. Damon. Tom and Ned had +not gone far, however, before they heard a strange +cry from Mr. Damon. + +"Tom! Ned!" shouted the eccentric man, +"Here's a monster after me! Come quick!" + +"A tiger!" ejaculated Tom, as he began once +more to change the charge in his rifle to a larger +one, running back, meanwhile, in the direction +of the sound of the voice. + +There were really no tigers in Honduras, the +jaguar being called a tiger by the natives, while +the cougar is called a lion. The presence of these +animals, often dangerous to man, had been indicated +around camp, and it was possible that one had been +bold enough to attack Mr. Damon, not through hunger, +but because of being cornered. + +"Come on, Ned!" cried Tom. "He's in some +sort of trouble!" + +But when, a moment later, the young inventor +burst through a fringe of bushes and saw Mr. +Damon standing in a little clearing, with upraised +club, Tom could not repress a laugh. + +"Kill it, Tom! Kill it!" begged the eccentric man. +"Bless my insurance policy, but it's a terrible beast!" + +And so it was, at first glance. For it was a +giant iguana, one of the most repulsive-looking +of the lizards. Not unlike an alligator in shape, +with spikes on its head and tail, with a warty, +squatty ridge-encrusted body, a big pouch beneath +its chin, and long-toed claws, it was enough +to strike terror into the heart of almost any one. +Even the smaller ones look dangerous, and this +one, which was about five feet long, looked +capable of attacking a man and injuring him. As +a matter of fact the iguanas are harmless, their +shape and coloring being designed to protect them. + +"Don't be afraid, Mr. Damon," called Tom, still +laughing. "It won't hurt you!" + +"I'm not so positive of that. It won't let me pass." + +"Just take your club and poke it out of the way," +the young inventor advised. "It's only waiting +to be shoved." + +"Then you do it, Tom. Bless my looking glass, +but I don't want to go near it! If my wife could +see me now she'd say it served me just right." + +Mr. Damon was not a coward, but the giant +iguana was not pleasant to look at. Tom, with +the butt of his rifle, gave it a gentle shove, +whereupon the creature scurried off through the brush +as though glad to make its escape unscathed. + +"I thought it was a new kind of alligator," said +Mr. Damon with a sigh of relief. + +"Where is it?" asked Professor Bumper, coming +up at this juncture. "A new species of alligator? +Let me see it!" + +"It's too horrible," said Mr. Damon. "I never +want to see one again. It was worse than a +vampire bat!" + +Notwithstanding this, when he heard that it +was one of the largest sized iguanas ever seen, +the professor started through the jungle after it. + +"We can't take it with us if we get it," Tom +called after his friend. + +"We might take the skin," answered the +professor. "I have a standing order for such things +from one of the museums I represent. I'd like +to get it. Then they are often eaten. We can +have a change of diet. you see." + +"We'd better follow him," said Tom to Ned. +"We'll have to let the turkeys go for a while. +He may get into trouble. Come on." + +Off they started through the jungle, trailing +after the impetuous professor who was intent on +capturing the iguana. The giant lizard's progress +could be traced by the disturbance of the +leaves and underbrush, and the professor was +following as closely as possible. + +So fast did he go that Ned, Tom and Mr. +Damon, following, lost sight of him several +times, and Tom finally called: + +"Wait a minute. We'll all be lost if you keep +this up." + +"I'll have him in another minute," answered +the professor. "I can almost reach him now. +Then---- Oh!" + +His voice ended in a scream that seemed to +be one of terror. So sudden was the change that +Tom and Ned, who were together, ahead of Mr. +Damon, looked at one another in fear. + +"What has happened?" whispered Ned, pausing. + +"Don't stop to ask--come on!" shouted Tom. + +At that instant again came the voice of the savant. + +"Tom! Ned!" he gasped, rather than cried. + +"I'm caught in the coils! Quick--quick if you +would save me!" + +"In the coils!" repeated Ned. "What does he mean? +Can the giant iguana----" + +Tom Swift did not stop to answer. With his +electric rifle in readiness, he leaped forward +through the jungle. + + + +CHAPTER XVI + +A MEETING IN THE JUNGLE + + +Before Tom and Ned reached the place +whence Professor Bumper had called, they heard +strange noises, other than the imploring voice of +their friend. It seemed as though some great +body was threshing about in the jungle, lashing +the trees, bushes and leaves about, and when +the two young men, followed by Mr. Damon, +reached the scene they saw that, in a measure, +this really accounted for what they heard. + +Something like a great whip was beating about +close to two trees that grew near together. And +then, when the storm of twigs, leaves and dirt, +caused by the leaping, threshing thing ceased for +a moment, the onlookers saw something that +filled them with terror. + +Between the two trees, and seemingly bound +to them by a great coiled rope, spotted and banded, +was the body of Professor Bumper. His arms +were pinioned to his sides and there was horror +and terror on his face, that looked imploringly +at the youths from above the topmost coil of +those encircling him. + +"What is it?" cried Mr. Damon, as he ran +pantingly up. "What has caught him? Is it the +giant iguana?" + +"It's a snake--a great boa!" gasped Tom. "It +has him in its coils. But it is wound around +the trees, too. That alone prevents it from +crushing the professor to death. + +"Ned, be ready with your rifle. Put in the +heaviest charge, and watch your chance to fire!" + +The great, ugly head of the boa reared itself +up from the coils which it had, with the quickness +of thought, thrown about the man between +the two trees. This species of snake is not +poisonous, and kills its prey by crushing it to +death, making it into a pulpy mass, with scarcely +a bone left unbroken, after which it swallows +its meal. The crushing power of one of these +boas, some of which reach a length of thirty +feet, with a body as large around as that of a +full-grown man, is enormous. + +"I'm going to fire!" suddenly cried Tom. He +had seen his chance and he took it. There was +the faint report--the crack of the electric rifle-- +and the folds of the serpent seemed to relax. + +"I see a good chance now," added Ned, who +had taken the small charge from his weapon, +replacing it with a heavier one. + +His rifle was also discharged in the direction +of the snake, and Tom saw that the hit was a +good one, right through the ugly head of the reptile. + +"One other will be enough to make him loosen +his coils!" cried Tom, as he fired again, and such +was the killing power of the electric bullets that +the snake, though an immense one, and one that +short of decapitation could have received many +injuries without losing power, seemed to shrivel up. + +Its folds relaxed, and the coils of the great +body fell in a heap at the roots of the two trees, +between which the scientist had been standing. + +Professor Bumper seemed to fall backward as +the grip of the serpent relaxed, but Tom, dropping +his rifle, and calling to Ned to keep an eye +on the snake, leaped forward and caught his friend. + +"Are you hurt?" asked Tom, carrying the limp +form over to a grassy place. There was no +answer, the savant's eyes were closed and he +breathed but faintly. + +Ned Newton fired two more electric bullets +into the still writhing body of the boa. + +"I guess he's all in," he called to Tom. + +"Bless my horseradish! And so our friend +seems to be," commented Mr. Damon. "Have +you anything with which to revive him, Tom?" + +"Yes. Some ammonia. See if you can find a +little water." + +"I have some in my flask." + +Tom mixed a dose of the spirits which he +carried with him, and this, forced between the pallid +lips of the scientist, revived him. + +"What happened?" he asked faintly as he opened +his eyes. "Oh, yes, I remember," he added +slowly. "The boa----" + +"Don't try to talk," urged Tom. "You're all +right. The snake is dead, or dying. Are you +much hurt?" + +Professor Bumper appeared to be considering. +He moved first one limb, then another. He +seemed to have the power over all his muscles. + +"I see how it happened," he said, as he sat +up, after taking a little more of the ammonia. "I +was following the iguana, and when the big lizard +came to a stop, in a little hollow place in the +ground, at the foot of those two trees, I leaned +over to slip a noose of rope about its neck. Then +I felt myself caught, as if in the hands of a giant, +and bound fast between the two trees." + +"It was the big boa that whipped itself around +you, as you leaned over," explained Tom, as Ned +came up to announce that the snake was no +longer dangerous. "But when it coiled around +you it also coiled around the two trees, you, +fortunately slipping between them. Had it not +been that their trunks took off some of the pressure +of the coils you wouldn't have lasted a minute." + +"Well, I was pretty badly squeezed as it was," +remarked the professor. "I hardly had breath +enough left to call to you. I tried to fight off the +serpent, but it was of no use." + +"I should say not!" cried Mr. Damon. "Bless my +circus ring! one might as well try to combat +an elephant! But, my dear professor, are you all +right now?" + +"I think so--yes. Though I shall be lame and +stiff for a few days, I fear. I can hardly walk." + +Professor Bumper was indeed unable to go +about much for a few days after his encounter +with the great serpent. He stretched out in a +hammock under trees in the camp clearing, and +with his friends waited for the possible return +of Tolpec and the porters. + +Ned and Tom made one or two short hunting +trips, and on these occasions they kept a lookout +in the direction the Indian had taken when he +went away. + +"For he's sure to come back that way--if he +comes at all," declared Ned; "which I am beginning +to doubt." + +"Well, he may not come," agreed Tom, who +was beginning to lose some of his first hope. +"But he won't necessarily come from the same +direction he took. He may have had to go in an +entirely different way to get help. We'll hope +for the best." + +A week passed. Professor Bumper was able +to be about, and Tom and Ned noticed that +there was an anxious look on his face. Was he, +too, beginning to despair? + +"Well, this isn't hunting for golden idols very +fast," said Mr. Damon, the morning of the eighth +day after their desertion by the faithless Jacinto. +"What do you say, Professor Bumper; ought +we not to start off on our own account?" + +"We had better if Tolpec does not return +today," was the answer. + +They had eaten breakfast, had put their camp +in order, and were about to have a consultation +on what was best to do, when Tom suddenly +called to Ned, who was whistling: + +"Hark!" + +Through the jungle came a faint sound of singing +--not a harmonious air, but the somewhat +barbaric chant of the natives. + +"It is Tolpec coming back!" cried Mr. Damon. +"Hurray! Now our troubles are over t Bless my +meal ticket! Now we can start!" + +"It may be Jacinto," suggested Ned. + +"Nonsense! you old cold-water pitcher!" +cried Tom. "It's Tolpec! I can see him! He's +a good scout all right!" + +And then, walking at the head of a band of +Indians who were weirdly chanting while behind +them came a train of mules, was Tolpec, a cheerful +grin covering his honest, if homely, dark face. + +"Me come back!" he exclaimed in gutteral +English, using about half of his foreign vocabulary. + +"I see you did," answered Professor Bumper +in the man's own tongue. "Glad to see you. +Is everything all right?" + +"All right," was the answer. "These Indians +will take you where you want to go, and will not +leave you as Jacinto did." + +"We'll start in the morning!" exclaimed the +savant his own cheerful self again, now that +there was a prospect of going further into the +interior. "Tell the men to get something to eat, +Tolpec. There is plenty for all." + +"Good!" grunted the new guide and soon the +hungry Indians, who had come far, were satisfying +their hunger. + +As they ate Tolpec explained to Professor +Bumper, who repeated it to the youths and Mr. +Damon, that it had been necessary to go farther +than he had intended to get the porters and +mules. But the Indians were a friendly tribe, +of which he was a member, and could be depended on. + +There was a feast and a sort of celebration in +camp that night. Tom and Ned shot two deer, +and these formed the main part of the feast and +the Indians made merry about the fire until nearly +midnight. They did not seem to mind in the +least the swarms of mosquitoes and other bugs +that flew about, attracted by the light. As for +Tom Swift and his friends, their nets protected +them. + +An early start was made the following morning. +Such packages of goods and supplies as could +not well be carried by the Indians in their head +straps, were loaded on the backs of the pack- +mules. Tolpec explained that on reaching the +Indian village, where he had secured the porters, +they could get some ox-carts which would be a +convenience in traveling into the interior toward +the Copan valley. + +The march onward for the next two days was +tiresome; but the Indians Tolpec had secured +were as faithful and efficient as he had described +them, and good progress was made. + +There were a few accidents. One native fell +into a swiftly running stream as they were fording +it and lost a box containing some much-needed +things. But as the man's life was saved Professor +Bumper said it made up for the other loss. +Another accident did not end so auspiciously. +One of the bearers was bitten by a poisonous +snake, and though prompt measures were taken, +the poison spread so rapidly that the man died. + +In due season the Indian village was reached. +where, after a day spent in holding funeral services +over the dead bearer, preparations were +made for proceeding farther. + +This time some of the bearers were left behind, +and ox-carts were substituted for them, as it was +possible to carry more goods this way, + +"And now we're really off for Copan!" +exclaimed Professor Bumper one morning, when +the cavalcade, led by Tolpec in the capacity of +head guide, started off. "I hope we have no +more delays." + +"I hope not, either," agreed Tom. "That +Beecher may be there ahead of us." + +Weary marches fell to their portion. There +were mountains to climb, streams to ford or swim, +sending the carts over on rudely made rafts. +There were storms to endure, and the eternal heat +to fight. + +But finally the party emerged from the +lowlands of the coast and went up in among the +hills, where though the going was harder, the +climate was better. It was not so hot and moist. + +Not wishing to attract attention in Copan +itself, Professor Bumper and his party made a +detour, and finally, after much consultation with +Tom over the ancient maps, the scientist announced +that he thought they were in the vicinity +of the buried city. + +"We will begin test excavations in the +morning," he said. + +The party was in camp, and preparations were +made for spending the night in the forest, when +from among the trees there floated to the ears +of our friends a queer Indian chant. + +"Some one is coming," said Tom to Ned. + +Almost as he spoke there filed into the clearing +where the camp had been set up, a cavalcade of white men, +followed by Indians. And at the sight of one +of the white men Tom Swift uttered a cry. + +"Professor Beecher!" gasped the young inventor. + + + +CHAPTER XVII + +THE LOST MAP + + +The on-marching company of white men, with +their Indian attendants, came to a halt on the +edge of the clearing as they caught sight of the +tents already set up there. The barbaric chant +of the native bearers ceased abruptly, and there +was a look of surprise shown on the face of +Professor Fenimore Beecher. For Professor Beecher +it was, in the lead of the rival expedition. + +"Bless my shoe laces!" exclaimed Mr. Damon. + +"Is it really Beecher?" asked Ned, though he knew +as well as Tom that it was the young archaeologist. + +"It certainly is!" declared Tom. "And he has +nerve to follow us so closely!" + +"Maybe he thinks we have nerve to get here +ahead of him," suggested Ned, smiling grimly. + +"Probably," agreed Tom, with a short laugh. +"Well, it evidently surprises him to find us here +at all, after the mean trick he played on us to +get Jacinto to lead us into the jungle and desert +us." + +"That's right," assented Ned. "Well, what's +the next move?" + +There seemed to be some doubt about this +on the part of both expeditions. At the sight +of Professor Beecher, Professor Bumper, who had +come out of his tent, hurriedly turned to Tom +and asked him what he thought it best to do. + +"Do!" exclaimed the eccentric Mr. Damon, +not giving Tom time to reply. "Why, stand +your ground, of course! Bless my house and +lot! but we're here first! For the matter of that, +I suppose the jungle is free and we can no more +object to his coming: here than he can to our +coming. First come, first served, I suppose is the +law of the forest." + +Meanwhile the surprise occasioned by the +unexpected meeting of their rivals seemed to have +spread something like consternation among the +white members of the Beecher party. As for the +natives they evidently did not care one way or +the other. + +There was a hasty consultation among the +professors accompanying Mr. Beecher, and then the +latter himself advanced toward the tents of Tom +and his friends and asked: + +"How long have you been here?" + +"I don't see that we are called upon to answer +that question," replied Professor Bumper stiffly. + +"Perhaps not, and yet----" + +"There is no perhaps about it!" said Professor +Bumper quickly. "I know what your object is, +as I presume you do mine. And, after what +I may term your disgraceful and unsportsmanlike +conduct toward me and my friends, I prefer +not to have anything further to do with you. +We must meet as strangers hereafter." + +"Very well," and Professor Beecher's voice was +as cold and uncompromising as was his rival's. +"Let it be as your wish. But I must say I don't +know what you mean by unsportsmanlike conduct." + +"An explanation would be wasted on you," +said Professor Bumper stiffly. "But in order that +you may know I fully understand what you did +I will say that your efforts to thwart us through +your tool Jacinto came to nothing. We are here +ahead of you." + +"Jacinto!" cried Professor Beecher in real or +simulated surprise. "Why, he was not my `tool,' +as you term it." + +"Your denial is useless in the light of his +confession," asserted Professor Bumper. + +"Confession?" + +"Now look here!" exclaimed the older +professor, "I do not propose to lower myself by +quarreling with you. I know certainly what +you and your party tried to do to prevent us +from getting here. But we got out of the trap +you set for us, and we are on the ground first. +I recognize your right to make explorations as +well as ourselves, and I presume you have not +fallen so low that you will not recognize the +unwritten law in a case of this kind--the law +which says the right of discovery belongs to the +one who first makes it." + +"I shall certainly abide by such conduct as +is usual under the circumstances," said +Professor Beecher more stiffly than before. +"At the same time I must deny having set a trap. +And as for Jacinto----" + +"It will be useless to discuss it further!" +broke in Professor Bumper. + +"Then no more need be said," retorted the +younger man. "I shall give orders to my friends, +as well as to the natives, to keep away from +your camp, and I shall expect you to do the +same regarding mine." + +"I should have suggested the same thing +myself," came from Tom's friend, and the two rival +scientists fairly glared at one another, the others +of both parties looking on with interest. + +Professor Bumper turned and walked defiantly +back to his tent. Professor Beecher did the same +thing. Then, after a short consultation among +the white members of the latter's organization, +their tents were set up in another clearing, +removed and separated by a screen of trees and +bushes from those of Tom Swift's friends. The +natives of the Beecher party also withdrew a little +way from those of Professor Bumper's organization, +and then preparations for spending the +night in the jungle went on in the rival +headquarters. + +"Well, he certainly had nerve, to deny, practically, +that he had set Jacinto up to do what he did," commented Tom. + +"I should say so!" agreed Ned. + +"How do you imagine he got here nearly as +soon as we did, when he did not start until +later?" asked Mr. Damon. + +"He did not have the unfortunate experience +of being deserted in the jungle," replied Tom. +"He probably had Jacinto, or some of that +unprincipled scoundrel's friends, show him a short +route to Copan and he came on from there." + +"Well, I did hope we might have the ground +to ourselves, at least for the preliminary explorations +and excavations. But it is not to be. My +rival is here," sighed Professor Bumper. + +"Don't let that discourage you!" exclaimed Tom. +"We can fight all the better now the foe +is in the open, and we know where he is." + +"Yes, Tom Swift, that is true," agreed the +scientist. "I am not going to give up, but I +shall have to change my plans a little. Perhaps +you will come into the tent with me," and he +nodded to Tom and Ned. "I want to talk over +certain matters with you and Mr. Damon." + +"Pleased to," assented the young inventor, and +his financial secretary nodded. + +A little later, supper having been eaten, the +camp made shipshape and the natives settled +down, Tom, Ned, Mr. Damon and Professor +Bumper assembled in the tent of the scientist, +where a dry battery lamp gave sufficient illumination +to show a number of maps and papers scattered +over an improvised table. + +"Now, gentlemen," said the professor, "I have +called you here to go over my plans more in +detail than I have hitherto done, now we are on +the ground. You know in a general way what +I hope to accomplish, but the time has come +when I must be specific. + +"Aside from being on the spot, below which, +or below the vicinity where, I believe, lies the +lost city of Kurzon and, I hope, the idol of gold, +a situation has arisen--an unexpected situation, +I may say--which calls for different action from +that I had counted on. + +"I refer to the presence of my rival, Professor +Beecher. I will not dwell now on what he has +done. It is better to consider what he may do." + +"That's right," agreed Ned. "He may get up in +the night, dig up this city and skip with that +golden image before we know it." + +"Hardly," grinned Tom. + +"No," said Professor Bumper. "Excavating +buried cities in the jungle of Honduras is not +as simple as that. There is much work to be +done. But accidents may happen, and in case +one should occur to me, and I be unable to prosecute +the search, I want one of you to do it. For +that reason I am going to show you the maps +and ancient documents and point out to you +where I believe the lost city lies. Now, if you +will give me your attention, I'll proceed." + +The professor went over in detail the story +of how he had found the old documents relating +to the lost city of Kurzon, and of how, after +much labor and research, he had located the +city in the Copan valley. The great idol of +gold was one of the chief possessions of Kurzon, +and it was often referred to in the old +papers; copies and translations of which the +professor had with him. + +"But this is the most valuable of all," he said, +as he opened an oiled-silk packet. "And before +I show it to you, suppose you two young men +take a look outside the tent." + +"What for?" asked Mr. Damon. + +"To make sure that no emissaries from the +Beecher crowd are sneaking around to overhear +what we say," was the somewhat bitter answer +of the scientist. "I do not trust him, in spite +of his attempted denial." + +Tom and Ned took a quick but thorough +observation outside the tent. The blackness of the +jungle night was in strange contrast to the light +they had just left. + +"Doesn't seem to be any one around here," +remarked Ned, after waiting a minute or two. + +"No. All's quiet along the Potomac. Those +Beecher natives are having some sort of a song- +fest, though." + +In the distance, and from the direction of their +rivals' camp, came the weird chant. + +"Well, as long as they stay there we'll be all +right," said Tom. "Come on in. I'm anxious to +hear what the professor has to say." + +"Everything's quiet," reported Ned. + +"Then give me your attention," begged the +scientist. + +Carefully, as though about to exhibit some, +precious jewel, he loosened the oiled-silk wrappings +and showed a large map, on thin but tough +paper. + +"This is drawn from the old charts," the +professor explained. "I worked on it many months, +and it is the only copy in the world. If it were +to be destroyed I should have to go all the way +back to New York to make another copy. I have +the original there in a safe deposit vault." + +"Wouldn't it have been wise to make two +copies?" asked Tom. + +"It would have only increased the risk. With +one copy, and that constantly in my possession, +I can be sure of my ground. Otherwise not. +That is why I am so careful of this. Now I will +show you why I believe we are about over the +ancient city of Kurzon." + +"Over it!" cried Mr. Damon. "Bless my +gunpowder! What do you mean?" and he looked +down at the earthen floor of the tent as though +expecting it to open and swallow him. + +"I mean that the city, like many others of +Central and South America, is buried below the +refuse of centuries," went on the professor. +"Very soon, if we are fortunate, we shall be +looking on the civilization of hundreds of years +ago--how long no one knows. + +"Considerable excavation has been done in +Central America," went on Professor Bumper, +"and certain ruins have been brought to light. +Near us are those of Copan, while toward the +frontier are those of Quirigua, which are even +better preserved than the former. We may visit +them if we have time. But I have reason to +believe that in this section of Copan is a large +city, the existence of which has not been made +certain of by any one save myself--and, perhaps, +Professor Beecher. + +"Certainly no part of it has seen the light of +day for many centuries. It shall be our pleasure +to uncover it, if possible, and secure the idol of +gold." + +"How long ago do you think the city was +buried?" asked Tom. + +"It would be hard to say. From the carvings +and hieroglyphics I have studied it would seem +that the Mayan civilization lasted about five +hundred years, and that it began perhaps in the +year A. D. five hundred." + +"That would mean," said Mr. Damon, "that +the ancient cities were in ruins, buried, perhaps, +long before Columbus discovered the new +world." + +"Yes," assented the professor. "Probably +Kurzon, which we now seek, was buried deep for +nearly five hundred years before Columbus landed +at San Salvadore. The specimens of writing and +architecture heretofore disclosed indicate that. +But, as a matter of fact, it is very hard to +decipher the Mayan pictographs. So far, little but +the ability to read their calendars and numerical +system is possessed by us, though we are gradually +making headway. + +"Now this is the map of the district, and by the +markings you can see where I hope to find what +I seek. We shall begin digging here," and he +made a small mark with a pencil on the map. + +"Of course," the professor explained, "I may be +wrong, and it will take some time to discover the +error if we make one. When a city is buried thirty +or forty feet deep beneath earth and great trees +have grown over it, it is not easy to dig down to it." + +"How do you ever expect to find it?" asked Ned. + +"Well, we will sink shafts here and there. If +we find carved stones, the remains of ancient +pottery and weapons, parts of buildings or building +stones, we shall know we are on the right +track," was the answer. "And now that I have +shown you the map, and explained how valuable +it is, I will put it away again. We shall begin +our excavations in the morning." + +"At what point?" asked Tom. + +"At a point I shall indicate after a further +consultation of the map. I must see the configuration +of the country by daylight to decide. +And now let's get some rest. We have had a +hard day." + +The two tents housing the four white members +of the Bumper party were close together, +and it was decided that the night would be divided +into four watches, to guard against possible +treachery on the part of the Beecher crowd. + +"It seems an unkind precaution to take against +a fellow scientist," said Professor Bumper, "but +I can not afford to take chances after what has +occurred." + +The others agreed with him, and though standing +guard was not pleasant it was done. However +the night passed without incident, and then +came morning and the excitement of getting +breakfast, over which the Indians made merry. +They did not like the cold and darkness, and +always welcomed the sun, no matter how hot. + +"And now," cried Tom, when the meal was +over, "let us begin the work that has brought us +here." + +"Yes," agreed Professor Bumper, "I will +consult the map, and start the diggers where I think +the city lies, far below the surface. Now, gentlemen, +if you will give me your attention----" + +He was seeking through his outer coat pockets, +after an ineffectual search in the inner one. A +strange look came over his face. + +"What's the matter?" asked Tom. + +"The map--the map!" gasped the professor. +"The map I was showing you last night! The map +that tells where we are to dig for the idol of gold! +It's gone!" + +"The map gone?" gasped Mr. Damon. + +"I--I'm afraid so," faltered the professor. +"I put it away carefully, but now----" + +He ceased speaking to make a further search +in all his pockets. + +"Maybe you left it in another coat," suggested Ned. + +"Or maybe some of the Beecher crowd took it!" snapped Tom. + + + +CHAPTER XVIII + +"EL TIGRE!" + + +The four men gazed at one another. +Consternation showed on the face of Professor +Bumper, and was reflected, more or less, on the +countenances of his companions. + +"Are you sure the map is gone?" asked Tom. +"I know how easy it is to mislay anything in a +camp of this sort. I couldn't at first find my +safety razor this morning, and when I did locate +it the hoe was in one of my shoes. I'm sure a +rat or some jungle animal must have dragged +it there. Now maybe they took your map, +Professor. That oiled silk in which it was wrapped +might have appealed to the taste of a rat or a +snake." + +"It is no joking matter," said Professor +Bumper. "But I know you appreciate the seriousness +of it as much as I do, Tom. But I had the map +in the pocket of this coat, and now it is gone!" + +"When did you put it there?" asked Ned. + +"This morning, just before I came to breakfast." + +"Oh, then you have had it since last night!" +Tom ejaculated. + +"Yes, I slept with it under my clothes that I +rolled up for a pillow, and when it was my turn +to stand guard I took it with me. Then I put +it back again and went to sleep. When I awoke +and dressed I put the packet in my pocket and +ate breakfast. Now when I look for it--why, +it's gone!" + +"The map or the oiled-silk package?" asked +Mr. Damon, who, once having been a businessman, +was sometimes a stickler for small points. + +"Both," answered the professor. "I opened +the silk to tie it more smoothly, so it would not +be such a lump in my pocket, and I made sure +the map was inside." + +"Then the whole thing has been taken--or you +have lost it," suggested Ned. + +"I am not in the habit of losing valuable maps," +retorted the scientist. "And the pocket of my +coat I had made deep, for the purpose of carrying +the long map. It could not drop out." + +"Well, we mustn't overlook any possible +chances," suggested Tom. "Come on now, we'll +search every inch of the ground over which you +traveled this morning, Professor." + +"It MUST be found," murmured the scientist. +"Without it all our work will go for naught." + +They all went into the tent where the professor +and Mr. Damon had slept when they were not +on guard. The camp was a busy place, with the +Indians finishing their morning meal, and getting +ready for the work of the day. For word +had been given out that there would be no more +long periods of travel. + +In consequence, efforts were being directed by +the head men of the bearers to making a more +permanent camp in the wilderness. Shelters of +palm-thatched huts were being built, a site for +cooking fires made, and, at the direction of Mr. +Damon, to whom this part was entrusted, some +sanitary regulations were insisted on. + +Leaving this busy scene, the four, with solemn +faces, proceeded to the tent where it was hoped +the map would be found. But though they went +through everything, and traced and retraced +every place the professor could remember having +traversed about the canvas shelter, no signs of +the important document could be found. + +"I don't believe I dropped it out of my pocket," +said the scientist, for perhaps the twentieth time. + +"Then it was taken," declared Tom. + +"That's what I say!" chimed in Ned. +"And by some of Beecher's party!" + +"Easy, my boy," cautioned Mr. Damon. "We +don't want to make accusations we can't prove." + +"That is true," agreed Professor Bumper. +"But, though I am sorry to say it of a fellow +archaelogist, I can not help thinking Beecher +had something to do with the taking of my map." + +"But how could any of them get it?" asked Mr. Damon. +"You say you had the map this morning, and certainly +none of them has been in our camp since dawn, +though of course it is possible that some of them +sneaked in during the night." + +"It does seem a mystery how it could have +been taken in open daylight, while we were about +camp together," said Tom. "But is the loss +such a grave one, Professor Bumper?" + +"Very grave. In fact I may say it is impossible +to proceed with the excavating without the map." + +"Then what are we to do?" asked Ned. + +"We must get it back!" declared Tom. + +"Yes," agreed the scientist, "we can not work +without it. As soon as I make a little further +search, to make sure it could not have dropped +in some out-of-the-way place, I shall go over to +Professor Beecher's camp and demand that he +give me back my property." + +"Suppose he says he hasn't taken it?" asked Tom. + +"Well, I'm sure he either took it personally, +or one of his party did. And yet I can't understand +how they could have come here without our +seeing them," and the professor shook his head +in puzzled despair. + +A more detailed search did not reveal the missing +map, and Mr. Damon and his friend the +scientist were on the point of departing for the +camp of their rivals, less than a mile away, when +Tom had what really amounted to an inspiration. + +"Look here, Professor!" he cried. "Can you +remember any of the details of your map--say, +for instance, where we ought to begin excavating +to get at the wonders of the underground city?" + +"Well, Tom, I did intend to compare my map +with the configuration of the country about here. +There is a certain mountain which serves as a +landmark and a guide for a starting point. I +think that is it over there," and the scientist +pointed to a distant snow-capped peak. + +The party had left the low and marshy land +of the true jungle, and were among the foothills, +though all about them was dense forest and +underbush, which, in reality, was as much a jungle +as the lower plains, but was less wet. + +"The point where I believe we should start +to dig," said the professor, "is near the spot +where the top of the mountain casts a shadow +when the sun is one hour high. At least that is +the direction given in the old manuscripts. So, +though we can do little without the map, we +might make a start by digging there." + +"No, not there!" exclaimed Tom. + +"Why not?" + +"Because we don't want to let Beecher's crowd +know that we are on the track of the idol of gold." + +"But they know anyhow, for they have the map," +commented Ned, puzzled by his chum's words. + +"Maybe not," said Tom slowly. "I think this +is a time for a big bluff. It may work and it +may not. Beecher's crowd either has the map or +they have not. If they have it they will lose +no time in trying to find the right place to start +digging and then they'll begin excavating. + +"Very good! If they do that we have a right +to dig near the same place. But if they have not +the map, which is possible, and if we start to dig +where the professor's memory tells him is the +right spot, we'll only give them the tip, and they'll +dig there also." + +"I'm sure they have the map," the professor said. +"But I believe your plan is a good one, Tom." + +"Just what do you propose doing?" asked Ned. + +"Fooling 'em!" exclaimed Tom quickly. "We'll +dig in some place remote from the spot where the +mountain casts its shadow. They will think, if +they haven't the map, that we are proceeding by +it, and they'll dig, too. When they find nothing, +as will also happen to us, they may go away. + +"If, on the other hand, they have the map, and +see us digging at a spot not indicated on it, they +will be puzzled, knowing we must have some idea +of where the buried city lies. They will think +the map is at fault, perhaps, and not make use of +it. Then we can get it back." + +"Bless my hatband!" cried Mr. Damon. +"I believe you're right, Tom. +We'll dig in the wrong place to fool 'em." + +And this was done. Search for the precious +map was given up for the time being, and the +professor and his friends set the natives to work +digging shafts in the ground, as though sinking +them down to the level of the buried city. + +But though this false work was prosecuted with +vigor for several days, there was a feeling of +despair among the Bumper party over the loss of +the map. + +"If we could only get it back!" exclaimed the +professor, again and again. + +Meanwhile the Beecher party seemed inactive. +True, some members of it did come over to look +on from a respectful distance at what the diggers +were doing. Some of the rival helpers, under +the direction of the head of the expedition, also +began sinking shafts. But they were not in the +locality remembered by Professor Bumper as being +correct. + +"I can't imagine what they're up to," he said. +"If they have my map they would act differently, +I should think." + +"Whatever they're up to," answered Tom, "the +time has come when we can dig at the place +where we can hope for results." And the following +day shafts were started in the shadow of the +mountain. + +Until some evidence should have been obtained +by digging, as to the location beneath the surface +of a buried city, there was nothing for the +travelers to do but wait. Turns were taken in +directing the efforts of the diggers, and an +occasional inspection was made of the shafts. + +"What do you expect to find first?" asked Tom +of Professor Bumper one day, when the latter was +at the top of a shaft waiting for a bucket load +of dirt to be hoisted up. + +"Potsherds and artifacts," was the answer. + +"What sort of bugs are they?" asked Ned with +a laugh. He and Tom were about to go hunting +with their electric rifles. + +"Artifacts are things made by the Indians--or +whatever members of the race who built the +ancient cities were called--such as household articles, +vases, ornaments, tools and so on. Anything +made by artificial means is called an artifact." + +"And potsherds are things with those Chinese +laundry ticket scratches on them," added Tom. + +"Exactly," said the professor, laughing. +"Though some of the strange-appearing inscriptions +give much valuable information. As soon +as we find some of them--say a broken bit of +pottery with hieroglyphics on--I will know I am +on the right track." + +And while the scientist and Mr. Damon kept +watch at the top of the shaft, Tom and Ned went +out into the jungle to hunt. They had killed some +game, and were stalking a fine big deer, which +would provide a feast for the natives, when suddenly +the silence of the lonely forest was broken +by a piercing scream, followed by an agonized +cry of + +"El tigre! El tigre!" + + + +CHAPTER XIX + +POISONED ARROWS + + +"Did you hear that, Tom?" asked Ned, in a +hoarse whisper. + +"Surely," was the cautious answer. "Keep +still, and I'll try for a shot." + +"Better be quick," advised Ned in a tense voice. +"The chap who did that yelling seems to be in +trouble!" + +And as Ned's voice trailed off into a whisper, +again came the cry, this time in frenzied pain. + +"El tigre! El tigre!" Then there was a jumble of words. + +"It's over this way!" and this time Ned shouted, +seeing no need for low voices since the other was so loud. + +Tom looked to where Ned had parted the +bushes alongside a jungle path. Through the +opening the young inventor saw, in a little glade, +that which caused him to take a firmer grip on his +electric rifle, and also a firmer grip on his nerves. + +Directly in front of him and Ned, and not more +than a hundred yards away, was a great tawny +and spotted jaguar--the "tigre" or tiger of Central +America. The beast, with lashing tail, stood +over an Indian upon whom it seemed to have +sprung from some lair, beating the unfortunate +man to the ground. Nor had he fallen scatheless, +for there was blood on the green leaves about +him, and it was not the blood of the spotted +beast. + +"Oh, Tom, can you--can you----" and Ned +faltered. + +The young inventor understood the unspoken +question. + +"I think I can make a shot of it without hitting +the man," he answered, never turning his head. +"It's a question, though, if the beast won't claw +him in the death struggle. It won't last long, +however, if the electric bullet goes to the right +place, and I've got to take the chance." + +Cautiously Tom brought his weapon to bear. +Quiet as Ned and he had been after the discovery, +the jaguar seemed to feel that something was +wrong. Intent on his prey, for a time he had +stood over it, gloating. Now the brute glanced +uneasily from side to side, its tail nervously +twitching, and it seemed trying to gain, by a sniffing +of the air, some information as to the direction +in which danger lay, for Tom and Ned had +stooped low, concealing themselves by a screen +of leaves. + +The Indian, after his first frenzied outburst +of fear, now lay quiet, as though fearing to move, +moaning in pain. + +Suddenly the jaguar, attracted either by some +slight movement on the part of Ned or Tom, or +perhaps by having winded them, turned his head +quickly and gazed with cruel eyes straight at the +spot where the two young men stood behind the +bushes. + +"He's seen us," whispered Ned. + +"Yes," assented Tom. "And it's a perfect shot. +Hope I don't miss!" + +It was not like Tom Swift to miss, nor did he +on this occasion. There was a slight report from +the electric rifle--a report not unlike the crackle +of the wireless--and the powerful projectile sped +true to its mark. + +Straight through the throat and chest under +the uplifted jaw of the jaguar it went--through +heart and lungs. Then with a great coughing, +sighing snarl the beast reared up, gave a convulsive +leap forward toward its newly discovered +enemies, and fell dead in a limp heap, just beyond +the native over which it had been crouching before +it delivered the death stroke, now never to fall. + +"You did it, Tom! You did it!" cried +Ned, springing up from where he had been kneeling +to give his chum a better chance to shoot. +"You did it, and saved the man's life!" And Ned +would have rushed out toward the still twitching body. + +"Just a minute!" interposed Tom. "Those +beasts sometimes have as many lives as a cat. +I'll give it one more for luck." Another electric +projectile through the head of the jaguar produced +no further effect than to move the body +slightly, and this proved conclusively that there +was no life left. It was safe to approach, which +Tom and Ned did. + +Their first thought, after a glance at the +jaguar, was for the Indian. It needed but a brief +examination to show that he was not badly hurt. +The jaguar had leaped on him from a low tree +as he passed under it, as the boys learned afterward, +and had crushed the man to earth by the +weight of the spotted body more than by a stroke +of the paw. + +The American jaguar is not so formidable a +beast as the native name of tiger would cause +one to suppose, though they are sufficiently dan- +gerous, and this one had rather badly clawed the +Indian. Fortunately the scratches were on the +fleshy parts of the arms and shoulders, where, +though painful, they were not necessarily serious. + +"But if you hadn't shot just when you did, Tom, +it would have been all up with him," commented +Ned. + +"Oh, well, I guess you'd have hit him if I +hadn't," returned the young inventor. "But let's +see what we can do for this chap." + +The man sat up wonderingly--hardly able to +believe that he had been saved from the dreaded +"tigre." His wounds were bleeding rather freely, +and as Tom and Ned carried with them a first-aid +kit they now brought it into use. The wounds +were bound up, the man was given water to +drink and then, as he was able to walk, Tom and +Ned offered to help him wherever he wanted to +go. + +"Blessed if I can tell whether he's one of our +Indians or whether he belongs to the Beecher +crowd," remarked Tom. + +"Senor Beecher," said the Indian, adding, in +Spanish, that he lived in the vicinity and had +only lately been engaged by the young professor +who hoped to discover the idol of gold before +Tom's scientific friend could do so. + +Tom and Ned knew a little Spanish, and with +that, and simple but expressive signs on the part +of the Indian, they learned his story. He had his +palm-thatched hut not far from the Beecher camp, +in a small Indian village, and he, with others, +had been hired on the arrival of the Beecher party +to help with the excavations. These, for some +reason, were delayed. + +"Delayed because they daren't use the map they +stole from us," commented Ned. + +"Maybe," agreed Tom. + +The Indian, whose name, it developed, was Tal, +as nearly as Tom and Ned could master it, had +left camp to go to visit his wife and child in the +jungle hut, intending to return to the Beecher +camp at night. But as he passed through the +forest the jaguar had dropped on him, bearing him +to earth. + +"But you saved my life, Senor," he said to +Tom, dropping on one knee and trying to kiss +Tom's hand, which our hero avoided. "And now +my life is yours," added the Indian. + +"Well, you'd better get home with it and take +care of it," said Tom. "I'll have Professor Bumper +come over and dress your scratches in a better +and more careful way. The bandages we put +on are only temporary." + +"My wife she make a poultice of leaves--they +cure me," said the Indian. + +"I guess that will be the best way," observed +Ned. "These natives can doctor themselves for +some things, better than we can." + +"Well, we'll take him home," suggested Tom. +"He might keel over from loss of blood. +Come on," he added to Tal, indicating his object. + +It was not far to the native's hut from the place +where the jaguar had been killed, and there Tom +and Ned underwent another demonstration of affection +as soon as those of Tal's immediate family and the +other natives understood what had happened. + +"I hate this business!" complained Tom, after +having been knelt to by the Indian's wife and +child, who called him the "preserver" and other +endearing titles of the same kind. "Come on, +let's hike back." + +But Indian hospitality, especially after a life +has been saved, is not so simple as all that. + +"My life--my house--all that I own is yours," +said Tal in deep gratitude. "Take everything," +and he waved his hand to indicate all the possessions +in his humble hut. + +"Thanks," answered Tom, "but I guess you +need all you have. That's a fine specimen of +blow gun though," he added, seeing one hanging +on the wall. "I wouldn't mind having one like +that. If you get well enough to make me one, +Tal, and some arrows to go with it, I'd like it +for a curiosity to hang in my room at home." + +"The Senor shall have a dozen," promised the +Indian. + +"Look, Ned," went on Tom, pointing to the +native weapon. "I never saw one just like this. +They use small arrows or darts, tipped with wild +cotton, instead of feathers." + +"These the arrows," explained Tal's wife, +bringing a bundle from a corner of the one-room +hut. As she held them out her husband gave a +cry of fear. + +"Poisoned arrows! Poisoned arrows!" he exclaimed. +"One scratch and the senors are dead men. Put them away!" + +In fear the Indian wife prepared to obey, but +as she did so Tom Swift caught sight of the package +and uttered a strange cry. + +"Thundering hoptoads, Ned!" he exclaimed. +"The poisoned arrows are wrapped in the piece of oiled +silk that was around the professor's missing map!" + + + +CHAPTER XX + +AN OLD LEGEND + + +Fascinated, Tom and Ned gazed at the package +the Indian woman held out to them. Undoubtedly +it was oiled silk on the outside, and through +the almost transparent covering could be seen +the small arrows, or darts, used in the blow gun. + +"Where did you get that?" asked Tom, pointing +to the bundle and gazing sternly at Tal. + +"What is the matter, Senor?" asked the Indian in turn. +"Is it that you are afraid of the poisoned arrows? +Be assured they will not harm you unless +you are scratched by them." + +Tom and Ned found it difficult to comprehend +all the rapid Spanish spoken by their host, but +they managed to understand some, and his +eloquent gestures made up the rest. + +"We're not afraid," Tom said, noting that the +oiled skin well covered the dangerous darts. "But +where did you get that?" + +"I picked it up, after another Indian had thrown +it away. He got it in your camp, Senor. I +will not lie to you. I did not steal. Valdez +went to your camp to steal--he is a bad Indian-- +and he brought back this wrapping. It contained +something he thought was gold, but it was +not, so he----" + +"Quick! Yes! Tell us!" demanded Tom +eagerly. "What did he do with the professor's +map that was in the oiled silk? Where is it?" + +"Oh, Senors!" exclaimed the Indian woman, +thinking perhaps her husband was about to be +dealt harshly with when she heard Tom's +excited voice. "Tal do no harm!" + +"No, he did no harm," went on Tom, in a +reassuring tone. "But he can do a whole lot of good +if he tells us what became of the map that was in +this oiled silk. Where is it?" he asked again. + +"Valdez burn it up," answered Tal. + +"What, burned the professor's map?" cried Ned. + +"If that was in this yellow cloth--yes," +answered the injured man. "Valdez he is bad. He +say to me he is going to your camp to see what +he can take. How he got this I know not, but +he come back one morning with the yellow pack- +age. I see him, but he make me promise not +to tell. But you save my life I tell you everything. + +"Valdez open the package; but it is not gold, +though he think so because it is yellow, and the +man with no hair on his head keep it in his pocket +close, so close," and Tal hugged himself to indicate +what he meant. + +"That's Professor Bumper," explained Ned. + +"How did Valdez get the map out of the +professor's coat?" asked Tom. + +"Valdez he very much smart. When man +with no hair on his head take coat off for a +minute to eat breakfast Valdez take yellow thing +out of pocket." + +"The Indian must have sneaked into camp +when we were eating," said Tom. "Those from +Beecher's party and our workers look all alike +to us. We wouldn't know one from the other, +and one of our rival's might slip in." + +"One evidently did, if this is really the piece of +oiled silk that was around the professor's map," +said Ned. + +"It certainly is the same," declared the young +inventor. "See, there is his name," and he +stretched out his hand to point. + +"Don't touch!" cried Tal. "Poisoned arrows +snake poison--very dead-like and quick." + +"Don't worry, I won't touch," said Tom grimly. +"But go on. You say Valdez sneaked into our +camp, took the oiled-silk package from the coat +pocket of Professor Bumper and went back to +his own camp with it, thinking it was gold." + +"Yes," answered Tal, though it is doubtful if +he understood all that Tom said, as it was half +Spanish and half English. But the Indian knew +a little English, too. "Valdez, when he find no +gold is very mad. Only papers in the yellow +silk-papers with queer marks on. Valdez think +it maybe a charm to work evil, so he burn them +up--all up!" + +"Burned that rare map!" gasped Tom. + +"All in fire," went on Tal, indicating by his +hands the play of flames. "Valdez throw away +yellow silk, and I take for my arrows so rain not +wash off poison. I give to you, if you like, with +blow gun." + +"No, thank you," answered Tom, in disappointed +tones. "The oiled silk is of no use without +the map, and that's gone. Whew! but this is +tough!" he said to his chum. "As long as it was +only stolen there was a chance to get it back, +but if it's burned, the jig is up." + +"It looks so," agreed Ned. "We'd better get +back and tell the professor. It he can't get along +without the map it's time he started a movement +toward getting another. So it wasn't Beecher, +after all, who got it." + +"Evidently not," assented Tom. "But I +believe him capable of it." + +"You haven't much use for him," remarked Ned. + +"Huh!" was all the answer given by his chum. + +"I am sorry, Senors," went on Tal, "but I +could not stop Valdez, and the burning of the +papers----" + +"No, you could not help it," interrupted the +young inventor. "But it just happens that it +brings bad luck to us. You see, Tal, the papers +in this yellow covering, told of an old buried +city that the bald-headed professor--the-man- +with-no-hair-on-his-head--is very anxious to +discover. It is somewhere under the ground," and +he waved to the jungle all about them, pointing +earthwards. + +"Paper Valdez burn tell of lost city?" asked +Tal, his face lighting up. + +"Yes. But now, of course, we can't tell where +to dig for it." + +The Indian turned to his wife and talked rapidly +with her in their own dialect. She, too, seemed +greatly excited, making quick gestures. Finally +she ran out of the hut. + +"Where is she going?" asked Tom suspiciously. + +"To get her grandfather. He very old Indian. +He know story of buried cities under trees. Very +old story--what you call legend, maybe. But +Goosal know. He tell same as his grandfather +told him. You wait. Goosal come, and you listen." + +"Good, Ned!" suddenly cried Tom. "Maybe, +we'll get on the track of lost Kurzon after all, +through some ancient Indian legend. Maybe we +won't need the map!" + +"It hardly seems possible," said Ned slowly. +"What can these Indians know of buried cities +that were out of existence before Columbus came +here? Why, they haven't any written history." + +"No, and that may be just the reason they are +more likely to be right," returned Tom. "Legends +handed down from one grandfather to another +go back a good many hundred years. If +they were written they might be destroyed as +the professor's map was. Somehow or other, +though I can't tell why, I begin to see daylight +ahead of us." + +"I wish I did," remarked Ned. + +"Here comes Goosal I think," murmured Tom, +and he pointed to an Indian, bent with the weight +of years, who, led by Tal's wife, was slowly +approaching the hut. + + + +CHAPTER XXI + +THE CAVERN + + +"Now Goosal can tell you," said Tal, evidently +pleased that he had, in a measure, solved the +problem caused by the burning of the professor's +map. "Goosal very old Indian. He know old +stories--legends--very old." + +"Well, if he can tell us how to find the buried +city of Kurzon and the--the things in it," said +Tom, "he's all right!" + +The aged Indian proceeded slowly toward the +hut where the impatient youths awaited him. + +"I know what you seek in the buried city," +remarked Tal. + +"Do you?" cried Tom, wondering if some one +had indiscreetly spoken of the idol of gold. + +"Yes you want pieces of rock, with strange +writings on them, old weapons, broken pots. +I know. I have helped white men before." + +"Yes, those are the things we want," agreed +Tom, with a glance at his chum. "That is--some +of them. But does your wife's grandfather talk +our language?" + +"No, but I can tell you what he says." + +By this time the old man, led by "Mrs. Tal"-- +as the young men called the wife of the Indian +they had helped--entered the hut. He seemed +nervous and shy, and glanced from Tom and Ned +to his grandson-in-law, as the latter talked rapidly +in the Indian dialect. Then Goosal made answer, +but what it was all about the boys could +not tell. + +"Goosal say," translated Tal, "that he know a +story of a very old city away down under ground." + +"Tell us about it!" urged Tom eagerly. + +But a difficulty very soon developed. Tal's +intentions were good, but he was not equal to +the task of translating. Nor was the understanding +of Tom and Ned of Spanish quite up to the mark. + +"Say, this is too much for me!" exclaimed Tom. +"We are losing the most valuable part of this by +not understanding what Goosal says, and what +Tal translates." + +"What can we do?" asked Ned. + +"Get the professor here as soon as possible. +He can manage this dialect, and he'll get the +information at first hand. If Goosal can tell +where to begin excavating for the city he ought +to tell the professor, not us." + +"That's right," agreed Ned. "We'll bring the +professor here as soon as we can." + +Accordingly they stopped the somewhat difficult +task of listening to the translated story and +told Tal, as well as they could, that they would +bring the "man-with-no-hair-on-his-head" to +listen to the tale. + +This seemed to suit the Indians, all of whom +in the small colony appeared to be very grateful +to Tom and Ned for having saved the life of +Tal. + +"That was a good shot you made when you +bowled over the jaguar," said Ned, as the two +young explorers started back to their camp. + +"Better than I realized, if it leads to the discovery +of Kurzon and the idol of gold," remarked Tom. + +"And to think we should come across the oiled- +silk holding the poisoned arrows!" went on Ned. +"That's the strangest part of the whole affair. +If it hadn't been that you shot the jaguar this +never would have come about." + +That Professor Bumper was astonished, and +Mr. Damon likewise, when they heard the story +of Tom and Ned, is stating it mildly. + +"Come on!" exclaimed the scientist, as Tom +finished, "we must see this Goosal at once. +If my map is destroyed, and it seems to be, +this old Indian may be our only hope. +Where did he say the buried city was, Tom?" + +"Oh, somewhere in this vicinity, as nearly as +I could make out. But you'd better talk with +him yourself. We didn't say anything about the +idol of gold." + +"That's right. It's just as well to let the +natives think we are only after ordinary relics." + +"Bless my insurance policy!" gasped Mr. Damon. +"It does not seem possible that we are on +the right track." + +"Well, I think we are, from what little information +Goosal gave us," remarked Tom. "This buried city +of his must be a wonderful place." + +"It is, if it is what I take it to be," agreed the +professor. "I told you I would bring you to a +land of wonders, Tom Swift, and they have hardly +begun yet. Come, I am anxious to talk to Goosal." + +In order that the Indians in the Bumper camp +might not hear rumors of the new plan to locate +the hidden city, and, at the same time, to keep +rumors from spreading to the camp of the rivals, +the scientist and his friends started a new shaft, +and put a shift of men at work on it. + +"We'll pretend we are on the right track, and +very busy," said Tom. "That will fool Beecher." + +"Are you glad to know he did not take your +map Professor Bumper?" asked Mr. Damon. + +"Well, yes. It is hard to believe such things of +a fellow scientist." + +"If he didn't take it he wanted to," said Tom. +"And he has done, or will do, things as unsportsmanlike." + +"Oh, you are hardly fair, perhaps, Tom," +commented Ned. + +"Um!" was all the answer he received. + +With the Indians in camp busy on the excavation +work, and having ascertained that similar +work was going on in the Beecher outfit, +Professor Bumper, with Mr. Damon and the young +men, set off to visit the Indian village and listen +to Goosal's story. They passed the place where +Tom had slain the jaguar, but nothing was left +but the bones; the ants, vultures and jungle animals +having picked them clean in the night. + +On the arrival of Tom and his friends at the +Indian's hut, Goosal told, in language which +Professor Bumper could understand, the ancient +legend of the buried city as he had had it from his +grandfather. + +"But is that all you know about it, Goosal?" +asked the savant. + +"No, Learned One. It is true most of what I +have told you was told to me by my father and +his father's father. But I--I myself--with these +eyes, have looked upon the lost city." + +"You have!" cried the professor, this time in +English. "Where? When? Take us to it! +How do you get here?" + +"Through the cavern of the dead," was the +answer when the questions were modified. + +"Bless my diamond ring!" exclaimed Mr. +Damon, when Professor Bumper translated the reply. +"What does he mean?" + +And then, after some talk, this information +came out. Years before, when Goosal was a +young man, he had been taken by his grandfather +on a journey through the jungle. They +stopped one day at the foot of a high mountain, +and, clearing away the brush and stones at a +certain place, an entrance to a great cavern was +revealed. This, it appeared, was the Indian burial +ground, and had been used for generations. + +Goosal, though in fear and trembling, was lead +through it, and came to another cavern, vaster +than the first. And there he saw strange and +wonderful sights, for it was the remains of a buried +city, that had once been the home of a great +and powerful tribe unlike the Indians--the ancient +Mayas it would seem. + +"Can you take us to this cavern?" asked the professor. + +"Yes," answered Goosal. "I will lead to it +those who saved the life of Tal--them and their +friends. I will take you to the lost city!" + +"Good!" cried Mr. Damon, when this had been +translated. "Now let Beecher try to play any +more tricks on us! Ho! for the cavern and the +lost city of Kurzon." + +"And the idol of gold," said Tom Swift to +himself. "I hope we can get it ahead of Beecher. +Perhaps if I can help in that--Oh, well, here's hoping, +that's all!" and a little smile curved his lips. + +Greatly excited by the strange news, but +maintaining as calm an air outwardly as possible, so +as not to excite the Indians, Tom and his friends +returned to camp to prepare for their trip. Goosal +had said the cavern lay distant more than a two- +days' journey into the jungle. + + + +CHAPTER XXII + +THE STORM + + +"Now," remarked Tom, once they were back +again in their camp, "we must go about this trip +to the cavern in a way that will cause no suspicion +over there as to what our object is," and he +nodded in the direction of the quarters of his +rival. + +"Do you mean to go off quietly?" asked Ned. + +"Yes. And to keep the work going on here, +at these shafts," put in the scientist, "so that +if any of their spies happen to come here they +will think we still believe the buried city to be +just below us. To that end we must keep the +Indians digging, though I am convinced now that +it is useless." + +Accordingly preparations were made for an +expedition into the jungle under the leadership of +Goosal. Tal had not sufficiently recovered from +the jaguar wounds to go with the party, but the +old man, in spite of his years, was hale and hearty +and capable of withstanding hardships. + +One of the most intelligent of the Indians was +put in charge of the digging gangs as foreman, +and told to keep them at work, and not to let +them stray. Tolpec, whose brother Tom had +tried to save, proved a treasure. He agreed to +remain behind and look after the interests of his +friends, and see that none of their baggage or +stores were taken. + +"Well, I guess we're as ready as we ever +shall be," remarked Tom, as the cavalcade made +ready to start. Mules carried the supplies that +were to be taken into the jungle, and others of +the sturdy animals were to be ridden by the +travelers. The trail was not an easy one, Goosal +warned them. + +Tom and his friends found it even worse than +they had expected, for all their experience in +jungle and mountain traveling. In places it was +necessary to dismount and lead the mules along, +sometimes pushing and dragging them. More +than once the trail fairly hung on the edge of +some almost bottomless gorge, and again it +wound its way between great walls of rock, +so poised that they appeared about to topple +over and crush the travelers. But they kept on +with dogged patience, through many hardships. + +To add to their troubles they seemed to have +entered the abode of the fiercest mosquitoes +encountered since coming to Honduras. At times +it was necessary to ride along with hats covered +with mosquito netting, and hands encased in +gloves. + +They had taken plenty of condensed food with +them, and they did not suffer in this respect. +Game, too, was plentiful and the electric rifles of +Tom and Ned added to the larder. + +One night, after a somewhat sound sleep +induced by hard travel on the trail that day, Tom +awoke to hear some one or something moving +about among their goods, which included their +provisions. + +"Who's there?" asked the young inventor +sharply, as he reached for his electric rifle. + +There was no answer, but a rattling of the pans. + +"Speak, or I'll fire!" Tom warned, adding this +in such Spanish as he could muster, for he thought +it might be one of the Indians. No reply came, +and then, seeing by the light of the stars a dark +form moving in front of the tent occupied by +himself and Ned, Tom fired. + +There was a combined grunt and squeal of +pain, then a savage growl, and Ned yelled: + +"What's the matter, Tom?" for he had been +awakened, and heard the crackle of the electrical +discharge. + +"I don't know," Tom answered. "But I shot +something--or somebody!" + +"Maybe some of Beecher's crowd," ventured +his chum. But when they got their electric +torches, and focused them on the inert, black +object, it was found to be a bear which had come +to nose about the camp for dainty morsels. + +Bruin was quite dead, and as he was in prime +condition there was a feast of bear meat at the +following dinner. The white travelers found it +rather too strong for their palates, but the Indians +reveled in it. + +It was shortly after noon the next day, when +Goosal, after remarking that a storm seemed +brewing, announced that they would be at the +entrance to the cavern in another hour. + +"Good!" cried Professor Bumper. "At last +we are near the buried city." + +"Don't be too sure," advised Mr. Damon, +"We may be disappointed. Though I hope not +for your sake, my dear Professor." + +Goosal now took the lead, and the old Indian, +traveling on foot, for he said he could better look +for the old landmark that way than on the back +of a mule, walked slowly along a rough cliff. + +"Here. somewhere, is the entrance to the cav- +ern," said the aged man. "It was many years +ago that I was here--many years. But it seems +as though yesterday. It is little changed." + +Indeed little did change in that land of wonders. +Only nature caused what alterations there were. +The hand of man had long been absent. + +Slowly Goosal walked along the rocky trail, +on one side a sheer rock, towering a hundred feet +or more toward the sky. On the other side a +deep gash leading to a great fertile valley below. + +Suddenly the old man paused, and looked about +him as though uncertain. Then, more slowly +still, he put out his hand and pulled at some +bushes that grew on a ledge of the rock. They +came away, having no depth of earth, and a small +opening was disclosed. + +"It is here," said Goosal quietly. "The +entrance to the cavern that leads to the burial +place of the dead, and the city that is dead also. +It is here." + +He stood aside while the others hurried +forward. It took but a few minutes to prove that +he was right--at least as to the existence of the +cavern--for the four men were soon peering into +the opening. + +"Come on!" cried Tom, impetuously. + +"Wait a moment," suggested the professor, +"Sometimes the air in these places is foul. We +must test it." But a torch one of the Indians +threw in burned with a steady glow. That test +was conclusive at least. They made ready to enter. + +Torches of a light bark, that glowed with a +steady flame and little smoke, had been provided, +as well as a good supply of electric dry-battery +lamps, and the way into the cavern was thus well +lighted. At first the Indians were afraid to +enter, but a word or two from Goosal reassured +them, and they followed Professor Bumper, Tom, +and the others into the cavern. + +For several hundred feet there was nothing +remarkable about the cave. It was like any +other cavern of the mountains, though wonderful +for the number of crystal formations on the root +and walls--formations that sparkled like a million +diamonds in the flickering lights. + +"Talk about a wonderland!" cried Tom. +"This is fairyland!" + +A moment later, as Goosal walked on beside +the professor and Tom, the aged Indian came to +a pause, and, pointing ahead, murmured: + +"The city of the dead!" + +They saw the niches cut in the rock walls. +niches that held the countless bones of those who +had died many, many years before. It was a +vast Indian grave. + +"Doubtless a wealth of material of historic +interest here," said Professor Bumper, flashing +his torch on the skeletons. "But it will keep. +Where is the city you spoke of, Goosal?" + +"Farther on, Senor. Follow me." + +Past the stone graves they went, deeper and +deeper into the great cave. Their footsteps +echoed and re-echoed. Suddenly Tom, who with +Ned had gone a little ahead, came to a sudden +halt and said: + +"Well, this may be a burial place sure enough, +but I think I see something alive all right--if +it isn't a ghost." + +He pointed ahead. Surely those were lights +flickering and moving about, and, yes, there were +men carrying them. The Bumper party came to +a surprised halt. The other lights advanced, +and then, to the great astonishment of Professor +Bumper and his friends, there confronted them +in the cave several scientists of Professor Beecher's +party and a score or more of Indians. Professor +Hylop, who was known to Professor Bumper, +stepped forward and asked sharply: + +"What are you doing here?" + +"I might ask you the same thing," was the +retort. + +"You might, but you would not be answered," +came sharply. "We have a right here, having +discovered this cavern, and we claim it under a +concession of the Honduras Government. I shall +have to ask you to withdraw." + +"Do you mean leave here?" asked Mr Damon. + +"That is it, exactly. We first discovered this +cave. We have been conducting explorations in +it for several days, and we wish no outsiders." + +"Are you speaking for Professor Beecher"' asked Tom. + +"I am. But he is here in the cave, and will +speak for himself if you desire it. But I represent +him, and I order you to leave. If you do +not go peaceably we will use force. We have +plenty of it," and he glanced back at the Indians +grouped behind him--scowling savage Indians. + +"We have no wish to intrude," observed +Professor Bumper, "and I fully recognize the right +of prior discovery. But one member of our +party (he did not say which one) was in this +cave many years ago. He led us to it." + +"Ours is a government concession!" exclaimed +Professor Hylop harshly. "We want no intruders! +Go!" and he pointed toward the direction +whence Tom's party had come. + +"Drive them out!" he ordered the Indians in +Spanish, and with muttered threats the dark- +skinned men advanced toward Tom and the +others. + +"You need not use force," said Professor Bumper. + +He and Professor Hylop had quarreled bitterly +years before on some scientific matter, and the +matter was afterward found to be wrong. Perhaps +this made him vindictive. + +Tom stepped forward and started to protest, +but Professor Bumper interposed. + +"I guess there is no help for it but to go. It +seems to be theirs by right of discovery and +government concession," he said, in disappointed +tone. "Come friends"; and dejectedly they +retraced their steps. + +Followed by the threatening Indians, the +Bumper party made its way back to the entrance. +They had hoped for great things, but if the cavern +gave access to the buried city--the ancient +city of Kurzon on the chief altar of which stood +the golden idol, Quitzel--it looked as though +they were never to enter it. + +"We'll have to get our Indians and drive those +fellows out!" declared Tom. "I'm not going to +be beaten this way--and by Beecher!" + +"It is galling," declared Professor Bumper. +"Still he has right on his side, and I must give +in to priority, as I would expect him to. It is +the unwritten law." + +"Then we've failed!" cried Tom bitterly. + +"Not yet," said Professor Bumper. "If I can +not unearth that buried city I may find another +in this wonderland. I shall not give up." + +"Hark! What's that noise?" asked Tom, as +they approached the entrance to the cave. + +"Sounds like a great wind blowing," commented Ned. + +It was. As they stood in the entrance they +looked out to find a fierce storm raging. The +wind was sweeping down the rocky trail, the +rain was falling in veritable bucketfuls from the +overhanging cliff, and deafening thunder and +blinding lightning roared and flashed. + +"Surely you would not drive us out in this +storm," said Professor Bumper to his former +rival. + +"You can not stay in the cave! You must get +out!" was the answer, as a louder crash of thunder +than usual seemed to shake the very mountain. + + + +CHAPTER XXIII + +ENTOMBED ALIVE + + +For an instant Tom and his friends paused at +the entrance to the wonderful cavern, and looked +at the raging storm. It seemed madness to +venture out into it, yet they had been driven +from the cave by those who had every right of +discovery to say who, and who should not, partake +of its hospitality. + +"We can't go out into that blow!" cried Ned. +"It's enough to loosen the very mountains!" + +"Let's stay here and defy them!" murmured Tom. +"If the--if what we seek--is here we have +as good a right to it as they have." + +"We must go out," said Professor Bumper simply. +"I recognize the right of my rival to dispossess us." + +"He may have the right, but it isn't human," +said Mr. Damon. "Bless my overshoes! If +Beecher himself were here he wouldn't have the +heart to send us out in this storm." + +"I would not give him the satisfaction of +appealing to him," remarked Professor Bumper. +"Come, we will go out. We have our ponchos, +and we are not fair-weather explorers. If we +can't get to the lost city one way we will +another. Come my friends." + +And despite the downpour, the deafening +thunder and the lightning that seemed ready to sear +one's eyes, he walked out of the cave entrance, +followed by Tom and the others. + +"Come on!" cried Tom, in a voice he tried to +render confident, as they went out into the +terrible storm. "We'll beat 'em yet!" + +The rain fell harder than ever. Small torrents +were now rushing down the trail, and it was only +a question of a few minutes before the place +where they stood would be a raging river, so +quickly does the rain collect in the mountains and +speed toward the valleys. + +"We must take to the forest!" cried Tom. +"There'll be some shelter there, and I don't like +the way the geography of this place is behaving. +There may be a landslide at any moment." + +As he spoke he motioned upward through the +mist of the rain to the sloping side of the mountain +towering above them. Loose stones were +beginning to roll down, accompanied by patches +of earth loosened by the water. Some of the +patches carried with them bunches of grass and +small bushes. + +"Yes, it will be best to move into the jungle," +said the professor. "Goosal, you had better take +the lead." + +It was wonderful to see how well the aged Indian +bore up in spite of his years, and walked on +ahead. They had left their mules tethered some +distance back, in a sheltering clump of trees, and +they hoped the animals would be safe. + +The guide found a place where they could +leave the trail, though going down a dangerous +slope, and take to the forest. As carefully as +possible they descended this, the rain continuing to +fall, the wind to blow, the lightning to sizzle all +about them and the thunder to boom in their ears. + +They went on until they were beneath the +shelter of the thick jungle growth of trees, which +kept off some of the pelting drops. + +"This is better!" exclaimed Ned, shaking his +poncho and getting rid of some of the water that +had settled on it. + +"Bless my overcoat!" cried Mr. Damon. "We seem +to have gotten out of the frying pan into the fire!" + +"How?" asked Tom. "We are partly sheltered here, +though had we stayed in the cave in spite of----" + +A deafening crash interrupted him, and following +the flash one of the giant trees of the forest +was seen to blaze up and then topple over. + +"Struck by lightning!" yelled Ned. + +"Yes; and it may happen to us!" exclaimed +Mr. Damon. "We were safer from the lightning +in the open. Maybe----" + +Again came an interruption, but this time a +different one. The very ground beneath their feet +seemed to be shaking and trembling. + +"What is it?" gasped Ned, while Goosal fell on +his knees and began fervently to pray. + +"It's an earthquake!" yelled Tom Swift. + +As he spoke there came another sound--the +sound of a mass of earth in motion. It came +from the direction of the mountain trail they had +just left. They looked toward it and their horror- +stricken eyes saw the whole side of the +mountain sliding down. + +Slowly at first the earth slid down, but +constantly gathering force and speed. In the face +of this new disaster the rain seemed to have +ceased and the thunder and lightning to be less +severe. It was as though one force of nature +gave way to the other. + +"Look! Look!" gasped Ned. + +In silence, which was broken now only by a +low and ominous rumble, more menacing than +had been the awful fury of the elements, the +travelers looked. + +Suddenly there was a quicker movement of +seemingly one whole section of the mountain. +Great rocks and trees, carried down by the +appalling force of the landslide were slipping over +the trail, obliterating it as though it had never existed. + +"There goes the entrance to the cavern!" cried Ned, +and as the others looked to where he pointed +they saw the hole in the side of the mountain +--the mouth of the cave that led to the lost city +of Kurzon--completely covered by thousands of +tons of earth and stones. + +"That's the end of them!" exclaimed Tom, as +the rumble of the earthquake died away. + +"Of----" Ned stopped, his eyes staring. + +"Of Professor Beecher's party. They're +entombed alive!" + + + +CHAPTER XXIV + +THE REVOLVING STONE + +Stunned, not alone by the realization of the +awfulness of the fate of their rivals, but also by +the terrific storm and the effect of the earthquake +and the landslide, Tom and his friends remained +for a moment gazing toward the mouth of the +cavern, now completely out of sight, buried by +a mass of broken trees, tangled bushes, rocks and +earth. Somewhere, far beyond that mass, was +the Beecher party, held prisoners in the cave +that formed the entrance to the buried city. + +Tom was the first to come to a realization of +what was needed to be done. + +"We must help them!" he exclaimed, and it was +characteristic of him that he harbored no enmity. + +"How?" asked Ned. + +"We must get a force of Indians and dig them +out," was the prompt answer. + +At Tom's vigorous words Professor Bumper's +forces were energized into action, and he stated: +"Fortunately we have plenty of excavating +tools. We may be in time to save them. Come +on! the storm seems to have passed as suddenly +as it came up, and the earthquake, which, after +all did not cover a wide area, seems to be over. +We must start the work of rescue at once. We +must go back to camp and get all the help we +can muster." + +The storm, indeed, seemed to be over, but it +was no easy matter to get back over the soggy, +rain-soaked ground to the trail they had left to +take shelter in the forest. Fortunately the earthquake +had not involved that portion where they +had left their mules, but most of the frightened +animals had broken loose, and it was some little +time before they could all be caught. + +"It is no use to try to get back to camp to- +night," said Tom, when the last of the pack and +saddle animals had been corralled. "It is getting +late and there is no telling the condition of the +trail. We must stay here until morning." + +"But what about them?" and Mr. Damon +nodded in the direction of the entombed ones. + +"We can help them best by waiting until the +beginning of a new day," said the professor. "We +shall need a large force, and we could not bring +it up to-night. Besides, Tom is right, and if we +tried to go along the trail after dark, torn and +disturbed as it is bound to be by the rain, we +might get into difficulties ourselves. No, we +must camp here until morning and then go for +help." + +They all decided finally this was best. The +professor, too, pointed out that their rivals were +in a large and roomy cave, not likely to suffer +from lack of air nor food or water, since they +must have supplies with them. + +"The only danger is that the cave has been +crushed in," added Tom; "but in that event we +would be of no service to them anyhow." + +The night seemed very long, and it was a most +uncomfortable one, because of the shock and +exertions through which the party had passed. +Added to this was the physical discomfort caused +by the storm. + +But in time there was the light in the east that +meant morning was at hand, and with it came +action. A hasty breakfast, cups of steaming coffee +forming a most welcome part, put them all +in better condition, and once more they were on +their way, heading back to the main camp where +they had left their force of Indians. + +"My!" exclaimed Tom, as they made their +way slowly along, "it surely was some storm! +Look at those big trees uprooted over there. +They're almost as big as the giant redwoods of +California, and yet they were bowled over as if +they were tenpins." + +"I wonder if the wind did it or the earthquake," +ventured Mr. Damon. + +"No wind could do that," declared Ned. "It must +have been the landslide caused by the earthquake." + +"The wind could do it if the ground was made +soft by the rain; and that was probably what +did it," suggested Tom. + +"There is no harm in settling the point," +commented Professor Bumper. "It is not far off our +trail, and will take only a few minutes to go +over to the trees. I should like to get some +photographs to accompany an article that perhaps +I shall write on the effects of sudden and +severe tropical storms. We will go to look at +the overturned trees and then we'll hurry on to +camp to get the rescue party." + +The uprooted trees lay on one side of the +mountain trail, perhaps a mile from the mouth of +the cave which had been covered over, entombing +the Beecher party. Leaving the mules in +charge of one of the Indians, Professor Bumper +and his friends, accompanied by Goosal, approached +the fallen trees. As they neared them +they saw that in falling the trees had lifted with +their roots a large mass of earth and imbedded +rocks that had clung to the twisted and gnarled +fibers. This mass was as large as a house. + +"Look at the hole left when the roots pulled +out!" cried Ned. "Why, it's like the crater of +a small volcano!" he added. And, as they stood +on the edge of it looking curiously at the hole +made, the others agreed with Tom's chum. + +Professor Bumper was looking about, trying +to ascertain if there were any evidences of the +earthquake in the vicinity, when Tom, who had +cautiously gone a little way down into the excavation +caused by the fallen trees, uttered a cry of surprise. + +"Look!" he shouted. "Isn't that some sort of +tunnel or underground passage?" and he pointed +to a square opening, perhaps seven feet high and +nearly as broad, which extended, no one knew +where, downward and onward from the side of +the hole made by the uprooting of the trees. + +"It's an underground passage all right," said +Professor Bumper eagerly; "and not a natural +one, either. That was fashioned by the hand +of man, if I am any judge. It seems to go right +under the mountain, too. Friends, we must +explore this! It may be of the utmost importance! +Come, we have our electric torches, and we shall +need them, for it's very dark in there," and he +peered into the passage in front of which they +all stood now. It seemed to have been tunneled +through the earth, the sides being lined by either +slabs of stone, or walls made by a sort of concrete. + +"But what about the rescue work?" asked Mr. Damon. + +"I am not forgetting Professor Beecher and his +friends," answered the scientist. + +"Perhaps this may be a better means of rescuing +them than by digging them out, which will take +a week at least," observed Tom. + +"This a better way?" asked Ned, pointing to the tunnel. + +"That's it," confirmed the savant. "If you +will notice it extends back in the direction +of the cave from which we were driven. +Now if there is a buried city beneath all this +jungle, this mountain of earth and stones, the +accumulation of centuries, it is probably on the +bottom of some vast cavern. It is my opinion +that we were only in one end of that cavern, and +this may be the entrance to another end of it." + +"Then," asked Mr. Damon, "do you mean that +we can enter here, get into the cave that contains +the buried city, or part of it, and find there +Beecher and his friends?" + +"That's it. It is possible, and if we could it +would save an immense lot of work, and probably +be a surer way to save their lives than by +digging a tunnel through the landslide to find +the mouth of the cave where we first entered." + +"It's a chance worth taking," said Mr. Damon. +"Of course it is a chance. But then everything +connected with this expedition is; so one is no +worse than another. As you say, we may find +the entombed men more easily this way than any +other." + +"I wonder," said Tom slowly, "if, by any +chance, we shall find, through this passage, the +lost city we are looking for." + +"And the idol of gold," added Ned. + +"Goosal, do you know anything about this?" +asked Professor Bumper. "Did you ever hear +of another passage leading to the cave where you +saw the ancient city?" + +"No, Learned One, though I have heard stories +about there being many cities, or parts of a big +one, beneath the mountain, and when it was +above ground there were many entrances to it." + +"That settles it!" cried the professor in +English, having talked to Goosal in Spanish. +"We'll try this and see where it leads." + +They entered the stone-lined passage. In +spite of the fact that it had probably been buried +and concealed from light and air for centuries, +as evidenced by the growth of the giant trees +above it, the air was fresh. + +"And this is one reason," said Tom, in +commenting on this fact, "why I believe it leads to +some vast cavern which is connected in some +fashion with the outer air. Well, perhaps we +shall soon make a discovery." + +Eagerly and anxiously the little party pressed +forward by the light of the pocket electric lamps. +They were obsessed by two thoughts--what they +might find and the necessity for aiding in the +rescue of their rivals. + +On and on they went, the darkness illuminated +only by the torches they carried. But they +noticed that the air was still fresh, and that a +gentle wind blew toward them. The passage +was undoubtedly artificial, a tunnel made by the +hands of men now long crumbled into dust. It +had a slightly upward slope, and this, Professor +Bumper said, indicated that it was bored upward +and perhaps into the very heart of the mountain +somewhere in the interior of which was the +Beecher party. + +Just how far they went they did not know, but +it must have been more than two miles. Yet +they did not tire, for the way was smooth. + +Suddenly Tom, who, with Professor Bumper, +was in the lead, uttered a cry, as he held his +torch above his head and flashed it about in a +circle. + +"We're blocked!" he exclaimed. "We're up +against a stone wall!" + +It was but too true. Confronting them, and +extending from side to side across the passage +and from roof to floor, was a great rough stone. +Immense and solid it seemed when they pushed +on it in vain. + +"Nothing short of dynamite will move that," +said Ned in despair. "This is a blind lead. +We'll have to go back." + +"But there must be something on the other +side of that stone," cried Tom. "See, it is pierced +with holes, and through them comes a current of +air. If we could only move the stone!" + +"I believe it is an ancient door," remarked +Professor Bumper. + +Eagerly and frantically they tried to move it +by their combined weight. The stone did not +give the fraction of the breadth of a hair. + +"We'll have to go back and get some of your +big tunnel blasting powder, Tom," suggested Ned. + +As he spoke old Goosal glided forward. He +had remained behind them in the passage while +they were trying to move the rock. Now he +said something in Spanish. + +"What does he mean?" asked Ned. + +"He asks that he be allowed to try," translated +Professor Bumper. "Sometimes, he says, there +is a secret way of opening stone doors in these +underground caves. Let him try." + +Goosal seemed to be running his fingers lightly +over the outer edge of the door. He was muttering +to himself in his Indian tongue. + +Suddenly he uttered an exclamation, and, as +he did so, there was a noise from the door itself. +It was a grinding, scraping sound, a rumble as +though rocks were being rolled one against the +other. + +Then the astonished eyes of the adventurers +saw the great stone door revolve on its axis +and swing to one side, leaving a passage open +through which they could pass. Goosal had +discovered the hidden mechanism. + +What lay before them? + + + +CHAPTER XXV + +THE IDOL OF GOLD + + +"Forward! cried Tom Swift. + +"Where?" asked Mr Damon, hanging back for +an instant. "Bless my compass, Tom! do you +know where you're going?" + +"I haven't the least idea, but it must lead to +something, or the ancients who made this +revolving stone door wouldn't have taken such care +to block the passage." + +"Ask Goosal if he knows anything about it," +suggested Mr. Damon to the professor. + +"He says he never was here before," translated +the savant, "but years ago, when he went into +the hidden city by the cave we left yesterday, he +saw doors like this which opened this way." + +"Then we're on the right track!" cried Tom. +"If this is the same kind of door, it must lead +to the same place. Ho for Kurzon and the idol +of gold!" + +As they passed through the stone door, Tom +and Professor Bumper tried to get some idea of +the mechanism by which it worked. But they +found this impossible, it being hidden within the +stone itself or in the adjoining walls. But, in +order that it might not close of itself and entomb +them, the portal was blocked open with stones +found in the passage. + +"It's always well to have a line of retreat open," +said Tom. "There's no telling what may lie beyond us." + +For a time there seemed to be nothing more +than the same passage along which they had +come. Then the passage suddenly widened, like +the large end of a square funnel. Upward and +outward the stone walls swept, and they saw +dimly before them, in the light of their torches, +a vast cavern, seemingly formed by the falling +in of mountains, which, in toppling over, had met +overhead in a sort of rough arch, thus protecting, +in a great measure, that which lay beneath +them. + +Goosal, who had brought with him some of +the fiber bark torches, set a bundle of them +aflame. As they flared up, a wondrous sight +was revealed to Tom Swift and his friends. + +Stretching out before them, as though they +stood at the end of an elevated street and gazed +down on it, was a city--a large city, with streets, +houses, open squares, temples, statues, fountains, +dry for centuries--a buried and forgotten city-- +a city in ruins--a city of the dead, now dry as +dust, but still a city, or, rather, the strangely +preserved remains of one. + +"Look!" whispered Tom. A louder voice just then, +would have seemed a sacrilege. "Look!" + +"Is it what we are looking for?" asked Ned in a low voice. + +"I believe it is," replied the professor. "It is +the lost city of Kurzon, or one just like it. And +now if we can find the idol of gold our search will +be ended--at least the major part of it." + +"Where did you expect to find the idol?" asked Tom. + +"It should be in the main temple. Come, we +will walk in the ancient streets--streets where +no feet but ours have trod in many centuries. +Come!" + +In eager silence they pressed on through this +newly discovered wonderland. For it was a +wonderful city, or had been. Though much of +it was in ruins, probably caused by an earthquake +or an eruption from a volcano, the central +portion, covered as it was by the overtoppling +mountains that formed the arching roof, was well +preserved. + +There were rude but beautiful stone buildings. +There were archways; temples; public squares; +and images, not at all beautiful, for they seemed +to be of man-monsters--doubtless ancient gods. +There were smoothly paved streets; wondrously +carved fountains, some in ruins, all now as dry +as bone, but which must have been places of +beauty where youths and maidens gathered in +the ancient days. + +Of the ancient population there was not a +trace left. Tom and his friends penetrated some +of the houses, but not so much as a bone or a +heap of mouldering dust showed where the +remains of the people were. Either they had fled +at the approaching doom of the city and were +buried elsewhere, or some strange fire or other +force of nature had consumed and obliterated +them. + +"What a wealth of historic information I shall +find here!" murmured Professor Bumper, as he +caught sight of many inscriptions in strange +characters on the walls and buildings. +"I shall never get to the end of them." + +"But what about the idol of gold?" asked Mr. +Damon, "Do you think you'll find that?" + +"We must hurry on to the temple over there," +said the scientist, indicating a building further along. + +"And then we must see about rescuing your +rivals, Professor," put in Tom. + +"Yes, Tom. But fortunately we are on the +ground here before them," agreed the professor. + +Undoubtedly it was the chief temple, or place +of worship, of the long-dead race which the +explorers now entered. It was a building beautiful +in its barbaric style, and yet simple. There were +massive walls, and a great inner court, at the end +of which seemed to be some sort of altar. And +then, as they lighted fresh torches, and pressed +forward with them and their electric lights, they +saw that which caused a cry of satisfaction to +burst from all of them. + +"The idol of gold!" + +Yes, there it squatted, an ugly, misshapen, +figure, a cross between a toad and a gila monster, +half man, half beast, with big red eyes--rubies +probably--that gleamed in the repulsive golden +face. And the whole figure, weighing many +pounds, seemed to be of SOLID GOLD! + +Eagerly the others followed Professor Bumper +up the altar steps to the very throne of the golden +idol. The scientist touched it, tried to raise it +and make sure of its solidity and material. + +"This is it!" he cried. "It is the idol of gold! +I have found We have found it, for it +belongs to all of us!" + +"Hurray!" cried Tom Swift, and Ned and Mr. +Damon joined in the cry. + +There was no need for silence or caution now; +and yet, as they stood about the squat and ugly +figure, which, in spite of its hideousness, was +worth a fortune intrinsically and as an antique, +they heard from the direction of the stone passage +a noise. + +"What is it?" asked Tom Swift. + +There was a murmur of voices. + +"Indians!" cried Professor Bumper, recognizing +the language--a mixture of Spanish and Indian. + +The cave was illuminated by the glare of other +torches which seemed to rush forward. A moment +later it was seen that they were being carried +by a number of Indians. + +"Friends," murmured Goosal, using the +Spanish term, "Amigos." + +"They are our own Indians!" cried Tom Swift. +"I see Tolpec!" and he pointed to the native who +had deserted from Jacinto's force to help them. + +"How did they get here?" asked Professor Bumper. + +This was quickly told. In their camp, where, +under the leadership of Tolpec they had been +left to do the excavating, the natives had heard, +seen and felt the effects of the storm and the +earthquake, though it did little damage in their +vicinity. But they became alarmed for the safety +of the professor and his party and, at Tolpec's +suggestion, set off in search of them. + +The Indians had seen, passing along the trail, +the uprooted trees, and had noted the footsteps +of the explorers going down to the stone passage. +It was easy for them to determine that Tom +and his friends had gone in, since the marks of +their boots were plainly in evidence in the soft +soil. + +None of the Indians was as much wrought up +over the discovery of Kurzon and the idol as +were the white adventurers. The gold, of course, +meant something to the natives, but they were +indifferent to the wonders of the underground +city. Perhaps they had heard too many legends +concerning such things to be impressed. + +"That statue is yours--all yours," said old +Goosal when he had talked with his relatives and +friends among the natives. "They all say what +you find you keep, and we will help you keep it." + +"That's good," murmured Professor Bumper. +"There was some doubt in my mind as to our +right to this, but after all, the natives who live +in this land are the original owners, and if they +pass title to us it is clear. That settles the last +difficulty." + +"Except that of getting the idol out," said Mr. Damon. + +"Oh, we'll accomplish that!" cried Tom. + +"I can hardly believe my good luck," declared +Professor Bumper. "I shall write a whole book +on this idol alone and then----" + +Once more came an interruption. This time +it was from another direction, but it was of the +same character--an approaching band of torch- +bearers. They were Indians, too, but leading +them were a number of whites. + +And at their head was no less personage than +Professor Beecher himself. + +For a moment, as the three parties stood +together in the ancient temple, in the glare of +many torches, no one spoke. Then Professor +Bumper found his voice. + +"We are glad to see you," he said to his rival. +"That is glad to see you alive, for we saw the +landslide bury you. And we were coming to +dig you out. We thought this cave--the cave of +the buried city--would lead us to you easier than +by digging through the slide. We have just +discovered this idol," and he put his hand on the +grim golden image. + +"Oh, you have discovered it, have you?" asked +Professor Beecher, and his voice was bitter. + +"Yes, not ten minutes ago. The natives have +kindly acknowledged my right to it under the law +of priority. I am sorry but----" + +With a look of disgust and chagrined +disappointment on his face, Professor Beecher turned +to the other scientists and said: + +"Let us go. We are too late. He has what +I came after." + +"Well, it is the fortune of war--and discovery," +put in Mr. Hardy, one of the party who seemed +the least ill-natured. "Your luck might have +been ours, Professor Bumper. I congratulate +you." + +"Thank you! Are you sure your party is all +right--not in need of assistance? How did you +get out of the place you were buried?" + +"Thank you! We do not require any help. It +was good of you to think of us. But we got +out the way we came in. We did not enter the +tunnel as you did, but came in through another +entrance which was not closed by the landslide. +Then we made a turn through a gateway in a +tunnel connecting with ours--a gateway which +seems to have been opened by the earthquake-- +and we came here, just now. + +"Too late, I see, to claim the discovery of the +idol of gold," went on Mr. Hardy. "But I trust +you will be generous, and allow us to make +observations of the buildings and other relics." + +"As much as you please, and with the greatest +pleasure in the world," was the prompt answer +of Professor Bumper. "All I lay sole +claim to is the golden idol. You are at liberty +to take whatever else you find in Kurzon and to +make what observations you like." + +"That is generous of you, and quite in contrast +to--er--to the conduct of our leader. I trust +he may awaken to a sense of the injustice he +did you." + +But Professor Beecher was not there to hear +this. He had stalked away in anger. + +"Humph!" grunted Tom. Then he continued: +"That story about a government concession was all +a fake, Professor, else he'd have put up a fight now. +Contemptible sneak!" + + +In fact the story of Tom Swift's trip to the +underground land of wonders is ended, for with +the discovery of the idol of gold the main object +of the expedition was accomplished. But their +adventures were not over by any means, though +there is not room in this volume to record them. + +Suffice it to say that means were at once taken +to get the golden image out of the cave of the +ancient city. It was not accomplished without +hard work, for the gold was heavy, and Professor +Bumper would not, naturally, consent to +the shaving off of so much as an ear or part of +the flat nose, to say nothing of one of the half +dozen extra arms and legs with which the ugly +idol was furnished. + +Finally it was safely taken out of the cave, +and along the stone passage to the opening +formed by the overthrown trees, and thence on +to camp. + +And at the camp a surprise awaited Tom. + +Some long-delayed mail had been forwarded +from the nearest place of civilization and there +were letters for all, including several for our hero. +One in particular he picked out first and read +eagerly. + +"Well, is every little thing all right, Tom?" +asked Ned, as he saw a cheerful grin spread itself +over his chum's face. + +"I should say it is, and then some! Look +here, Ned. This is a letter from----" + +"I know. Mary Nestor. Go on." + +"How'd you guess?" + +"Oh, I'm a mind-reader." + +"Huh! Well, you know she was away when +I went to call to say good-bye, and I was a little +afraid Beecher had got an inside edge on me." + +"Had he?" + +"No, but he tried hard enough. He went to +see Mary in Fayetteville, just as you heard, be- +fore he came on to join his party, but he didn't +pay much of a visit to her." + +"No?" + +"No. Mary told him he'd better hurry along +to Central America, or wherever it was he +intended going, as she didn't care for him as much +as he flattered himself she did." + +"Good!" cried Ned. "Shake, old man. I'm glad!" + +They shook hands. + +"Well, what's the matter? Didn't you read +all of her letter?" asked Ned when he saw his +chum once more perusing the epistle. + +"No. There's a postscript here. + + +"`Sorry I couldn't see you before you left. It +was a mistake, but when you come back----' + + +"Oh, that part isn't any of your affair!" and, +blushing under his tan, Tom thrust the letter +into his pocket and strode away, while Ned +laughed happily. + +With the idol of gold safe in their possession, +Professor Bumper's party could devote their +time to making other explorations in the buried +city. This they did, as is testified to by a long +list of books and magazine articles since turned +out by the scientist, dealing strictly with archaeo- +logical subjects, touching on the ancient Mayan +race and its civilization, with particular reference +to their system of computing time. + +Professor Beecher, young and foolish, would +not consent to delve into the riches of the ancient +city, being too much chagrined over the loss of +the idol. It seems he had really promised to +give a part of it to Mary Nestor. But he never +got the chance. + +His colleagues, after their first disappointment +at being beaten, joined forces with Professor +Bumper in exploring the old city, and made many +valuable discoveries. + +In one point Professor Bumper had done his +rival an injustice. That was in thinking +Professor Beecher was responsible for the treachery +of Jacinto. That was due to the plotter's own +work. It was true that Professor Beecher had +tentatively engaged Jacinto, and had sent word +to him to keep other explorers away from the +vicinity of the ancient city if possible; but +Jacinto, who did not return Professor Bumper's +money, as he had promised, had acted treacherously +in order to enrich himself. Professor +Beecher had nothing to do with that, nor had he +with the taking of the map, as has been seen, the +loss of which, after all, was a blessing in disguise, +for Kurzon would never have been located +by following the directions given there, as it was +very inaccurate. + +In another point it was demonstrated that the +old documents were at fault. This was in reference +to the golden idol having been overthrown +and another set up in its place, an act which had +caused the destruction of Kurzon. + +It is true that the city was destroyed, or rather, +buried, but this catastrophe was probably +brought about by an earthquake. And another +great idol, one of clay, was found, perhaps a +rival of Quitzel, but it was this clay image which +was thrown down and broken, and not the golden +one. + +Perhaps an effort had been made, just before +the burying of the city, to change idols and the +system of worship, but Quitzel seemed to have +held his own. The old manuscripts were not +very reliable, it was found, except in general. + +"Well, I guess this will hold Beecher for a +while," said Tom, the night of the arrival of +Mary's letter, and after he had written one in +answer, which was dispatched by a runner to +the nearest place whence mail could be +forwarded. + +"Yes, luck seems to favor you," replied Ned. +"You've had a hand in the discovery of the idol +of gold, and----" + +"Yes. And I discovered something else I +wasn't quite sure of," interrupted Tom, as he +felt to make sure he had a certain letter safe in +his pocket. + +It was several weeks later that the explorations +of Kurzon came to an end--a temporary end, for +the rainy season set in, when the tropics are +unsuitable for white men. Tom, Professor Bumper, +Ned and Mr. Damon set sail for the United +States, the valuable idol of gold safe on board. + +And there, with their vessel plowing the blue +waters of the Caribbean Sea, we will take leave +of Tom Swift and his friends. + + + + + + +End of The Project Gutenberg Etext of Tom Swift in the Land of Wonders + diff --git a/old/20tom10.zip b/old/20tom10.zip Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..5060e74 --- /dev/null +++ b/old/20tom10.zip diff --git a/old/20tom10h.htm b/old/20tom10h.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..9f1c2e3 --- /dev/null +++ b/old/20tom10h.htm @@ -0,0 +1,6309 @@ +<!DOCTYPE HTML PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 4.01 Transitional//EN"> +<html> +<head> +<title>Tom Swift in the Land of Wonders</title> +<meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content= +"text/html; charset=iso-8859-1"> +<style type="text/css"> +<!-- +body {margin:10%; text-align:justify} +blockquote {font-size:14pt} +P {font-size:14pt} +--> +</style> +</head> +<body> +<p>The Project Gutenberg Etext of Tom Swift in the Land of +Wonders ****Subtitled: The Underground Search for the Idol of +Gold****<br> +</p> + +<p>#1 in our Tom Swift series #20 of the Tom Swift books<br> +</p> + +Copyright laws are changing all over the world, be sure to check +the copyright laws for your country before posting these files!! +<br> +<p>Please take a look at the important information in this +header. We encourage you to keep this file on your own disk, +keeping an electronic path open for the next readers. Do not +remove this.<br> +</p> + +**Welcome To The World of Free Plain Vanilla Electronic Texts** +<br> +<p>**Etexts Readable By Both Humans and By Computers, Since +1971**<br> +</p> + +*These Etexts Prepared By Hundreds of Volunteers and Donations* +<br> +<p>Information on contacting Project Gutenberg to get Etexts, and +further information is included below. We need your +donations.<br> +</p> + +Tom Swift in the Land of Wonders <br> +<p>by Victor Appleton<br> +</p> + +April, 1996 [Etext #499] <br> +<p>The Project Gutenberg Etext of Tom Swift in the Land of +Wonders *****This file should be named dasym10.txt or +dasym10.zip******<br> +</p> + +Corrected EDITIONS of our etexts get a new NUMBER, dasym11.txt. +VERSIONS based on separate sources get new LETTER, dasym10a.txt. +<br> +<p>We are now trying to release all our books one month in +advance of the official release dates, for time for better +editing.<br> +</p> + +Please note: neither this list nor its contents are final till +midnight of the last day of the month of any such announcement. +The official release date of all Project Gutenberg Etexts is at +Midnight, Central Time, of the last day of the stated month. A +preliminary version may often be posted for suggestion, comment +and editing by those who wish to do so. To be sure you have an up +to date first edition [xxxxx10x.xxx] please check file sizes in +the first week of the next month. Since our ftp program has a bug +in it that scrambles the date [tried to fix and failed] a look at +the file size will have to do, but we will try to see a new copy +has at least one byte more or less. <br> +<p>Information about Project Gutenberg (one page)<br> +</p> + +We produce about two million dollars for each hour we work. The +fifty hours is one conservative estimate for how long it we take +to get any etext selected, entered, proofread, edited, copyright +searched and analyzed, the copyright letters written, etc. This +projected audience is one hundred million readers. If our value +per text is nominally estimated at one dollar then we produce $2 +million dollars per hour this year as we release thirty-two text +files per month: or 400 more Etexts in 1996 for a total of 800. +If these reach just 10% of the computerized population, then the +total should reach 80 billion Etexts. <br> +<p>The Goal of Project Gutenberg is to Give Away One Trillion +Etext Files by the December 31, 2001. [10,000 x +100,000,000=Trillion] This is ten thousand titles each to one +hundred million readers, which is only 10% of the present number +of computer users. 2001 should have at least twice as many +computer users as that, so it will require us reaching less than +5% of the users in 2001.<br> +</p> + +We need your donations more than ever! <br> +<p>All donations should be made to "Project Gutenberg/IBC", and +are tax deductible to the extent allowable by law ("IBC" is +Illinois Benedictine College). (Subscriptions to our paper +newsletter go to IBC, too)<br> +</p> + +For these and other matters, please mail to: <br> +<p>Project Gutenberg P. O. Box 2782 Champaign, IL 61825<br> +</p> + +When all other email fails try our Executive Director: Michael S. +Hart [hart pobox.com="" /]<br> +<p>We would prefer to send you this information by email +(Internet, Bitnet, Compuserve, ATTMAIL or MCImail).<br> +</p> + +****** If you have an FTP program (or emulator), please FTP +directly to the Project Gutenberg archives: [Mac users, do NOT +point and click. . .type] <br> +<p>ftp uiarchive.cso.uiuc.edu login: anonymous password: +your@login cd etext/etext90 through /etext96 or cd etext/articles +[get suggest gut for more information] dir [to see files] get or +mget [to get files. . .set bin for zip files] GET INDEX?00.GUT +for a list of books and GET NEW GUT for general information and +MGET GUT* for newsletters.<br> +</p> + +**Information prepared by the Project Gutenberg legal advisor** +(Three Pages) <br> +<p>***START**THE SMALL PRINT!**FOR PUBLIC DOMAIN ETEXTS**START*** +Why is this "Small Print!" statement here? You know: lawyers. +They tell us you might sue us if there is something wrong with +your copy of this etext, even if you got it for free from someone +other than us, and even if what's wrong is not our fault. So, +among other things, this "Small Print!" statement disclaims most +of our liability to you. It also tells you how you can distribute +copies of this etext if you want to.<br> +</p> + +*BEFORE!* YOU USE OR READ THIS ETEXT By using or reading any part +of this PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm etext, you indicate that you +understand, agree to and accept this "Small Print!" statement. If +you do not, you can receive a refund of the money (if any) you +paid for this etext by sending a request within 30 days of +receiving it to the person you got it from. If you received this +etext on a physical medium (such as a disk), you must return it +with your request. <br> +<p>ABOUT PROJECT GUTENBERG-TM ETEXTS This PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm +etext, like most PROJECT GUTENBERGtm etexts, is a "public domain" +work distributed by Professor Michael S. Hart through the Project +Gutenberg Association at Illinois Benedictine College (the +"Project"). Among other things, this means that no one owns a +United States copyright on or for this work, so the Project (and +you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without +permission and without paying copyright royalties. Special rules, +set forth below, apply if you wish to copy and distribute this +etext under the Project's "PROJECT GUTENBERG" trademark.<br> +</p> + +To create these etexts, the Project expends considerable efforts +to identify, transcribe and proofread public domain works. +Despite these efforts, the Project's etexts and any medium they +may be on may contain "Defects". Among other things, Defects may +take the form of incomplete, inaccurate or corrupt data, +transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual property +infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other etext medium, +a computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read +by your equipment. <br> +<p>LIMITED WARRANTY; DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES But for the "Right of +Replacement or Refund" described below, [1] the Project (and any +other party you may receive this etext from as a PROJECT +GUTENBERG-tm etext) disclaims all liability to you for damages, +costs and expenses, including legal fees, and [2] YOU HAVE NO +REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE OR UNDER STRICT LIABILITY, OR FOR BREACH +OF WARRANTY OR CONTRACT, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO INDIRECT, +CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES, EVEN IF YOU GIVE +NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.<br> +</p> + +If you discover a Defect in this etext within 90 days of +receiving it, you can receive a refund of the money (if any) you +paid for it by sending an explanatory note within that time to +the person you received it from. If you received it on a physical +medium, you must return it with your note, and such person may +choose to alternatively give you a replacement copy. If you +received it electronically, such person may choose to +alternatively give you a second opportunity to receive it +electronically. <br> +<p>THIS ETEXT IS OTHERWISE PROVIDED TO YOU "AS-IS". NO OTHER +WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, ARE MADE TO YOU AS TO +THE ETEXT OR ANY MEDIUM IT MAY BE ON, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED +TO WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR +PURPOSE.<br> +</p> + +Some states do not allow disclaimers of implied warranties or the +exclusion or limitation of consequential damages, so the above +disclaimers and exclusions may not apply to you, and you may have +other legal rights. <br> +<p>INDEMNITY You will indemnify and hold the Project, its +directors, officers, members and agents harmless from all +liability, cost and expense, including legal fees, that arise +directly or indirectly from any of the following that you do or +cause: [1] distribution of this etext, [2] alteration, +modification, or addition to the etext, or [3] any Defect.<br> +</p> + +DISTRIBUTION UNDER "PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm" You may distribute +copies of this etext electronically, or by disk, book or any +other medium if you either delete this "Small Print!" and all +other references to Project Gutenberg, or: <br> +<p>[1] Only give exact copies of it. Among other things, this +requires that you do not remove, alter or modify the etext or +this "small print!" statement. You may however, if you wish, +distribute this etext in machine readable binary, compressed, +mark-up, or proprietary form, including any form resulting from +conversion by word pro cessing or hypertext software, but only so +long as *EITHER*:<br> +</p> + +[*] The etext, when displayed, is clearly readable, and does +*not* contain characters other than those intended by the author +of the work, although tilde (~), asterisk (*) and underline (_) +characters may be used to convey punctuation intended by the +author, and additional characters may be used to indicate +hypertext links; OR <br> +<p>[*] The etext may be readily converted by the reader at no +expense into plain ASCII, EBCDIC or equivalent form by the +program that displays the etext (as is the case, for instance, +with most word processors); OR<br> +</p> + +[*] You provide, or agree to also provide on request at no +additional cost, fee or expense, a copy of the etext in its +original plain ASCII form (or in EBCDIC or other equivalent +proprietary form). <br> +<p>[2] Honor the etext refund and replacement provisions of this +"Small Print!" statement.<br> +</p> + +[3] Pay a trademark license fee to the Project of 20% of the net +profits you derive calculated using the method you already use to +calculate your applicable taxes. If you don't derive profits, no +royalty is due. Royalties are payable to "Project Gutenberg +Association / Illinois Benedictine College" within the 60 days +following each date you prepare (or were legally required to +prepare) your annual (or equivalent periodic) tax return. <br> +<p>WHAT IF YOU *WANT* TO SEND MONEY EVEN IF YOU DON'T HAVE TO? +The Project gratefully accepts contributions in money, time, +scanning machines, OCR software, public domain etexts, royalty +free copyright licenses, and every other sort of contribution you +can think of. Money should be paid to "Project Gutenberg +Association / Illinois Benedictine College".<br> +</p> + +*END*THE SMALL PRINT! FOR PUBLIC DOMAIN ETEXTS*Ver.04.29.93*END* +<br> +<p><br> +</p> + +<br> +<p>Scanned by Charles Keller with OmniPage Professional OCR +software donated by Caere Corporation, 1-800-535-7226. Contact +Mike Lough [mikel caere.com="" /]<br> +</p> + +<br> +<p><br> +</p> + +<br> +<br> +<br> +<h1>TOM SWIFT IN THE LAND OF WONDERS</h1> + +<br> +<h4>OR</h4> + +<br> +<h3>The Underground Search for the Idol of Gold</h3> + +<br> +<br> +<h2>BY VICTOR APPLETON</h2> + +<br> +<br> +<br> +<br> +AUTHOR OF "TOM SWIFT AND HIS MOTORCYCLE," "TOM SWIFT AND HIS BIG +TUNNEL," "THE MOVING PICTURE BOYS SERIES," "THE MOTION PICTURE +CHUMS SERIES," ETC. <br> +<p><br> +</p> + +THE TOM SWIFT SERIES <br> +<p>1 TOM SWIFT AND HIS MOTOR CYCLE 2 TOM SWIFT AND HIS MOTOR BOAT +3 TOM SWIFT AND HIS AIRSHIP 4 TOM SWIFT AND HIS SUBMARINE BOAT 5 +TOM SWIFT AND HIS ELECTRIC RUNABOUT 6 TOM SWIFT AND HIS WIRELESS +MESSAGE 7 TOM SWIFT AMONG THE DIAMOND MAKERS 8 TOM SWIFT IN THE +CAVES OF ICE 9 TOM SWIFT AND HIS SKY RACER 10 TOM SWIFT AND HIS +ELECTRIC RIFLE 11 TOM SWIFT IN THE CITY OF GOLD 12 TOM SWIFT AND +HIS AIR GLIDER 13 TOM SWIFT IN CAPTIVITY 14 TOM SWIFT AND HIS +WIZARD CAMERA 15 TOM SWIFT AND HIS GREAT SEARCHLIGHT 16 TOM SWIFT +AND HIS GIANT CANNON 17 TOM SWIFT AND HIS PHOTO TELEPHONE 18 TOM +SWIFT AND HIS AERIAL WARSHIP 19 TOM SWIFT AND HIS BIG TUNNEL 20 +TOM SWIFT IN THE LAND OF WONDERS 21 TOM SWIFT AND HIS WAR TANK 22 +TOM SWIFT AND HIS AIR SCOUT 23 TOM SWIFT AND HIS UNDERSEA SEARCH +24 TOM SWIFT AMONG THE FIRE FIGHTERS 25 TOM SWIFT AND HIS +ELECTRIC LOCOMOTIVE 26 TOM SWIFT AND HIS FLYING BOAT 27 TOM SWIFT +AND HIS GREAT OIL GUSHER 28 TOM SWIFT AND HIS CHEST OF SECRETS 29 +TOM SWIFT AND HIS AIRLINE EXPRESS ***<br> +</p> + +TOM SWIFT IN THE LAND OF WONDERS <br> +<p><br> +</p> + +<br> +<h1 id="ref_1">CHAPTER I</h1> + +A WONDERFUL STORY <br> +Tom Swift, who had been slowly looking through the pages of a +magazine, in the contents of which he seemed to be deeply +interested, turned the final folio, ruffled the sheets back again +to look at a certain map and drawing, and then, slapping the book +down on a table before him, with a noise not unlike that of a +shot, exclaimed: <br> +<p>"Well, that is certainly one wonderful story!"<br> +</p> + +"What's it about, Tom?" asked his chum, Ned Newton. "Something +about inside baseball, or a new submarine that can be converted +into an airship on short notice?" <br> +<p>"Neither one, you--you unscientific heathen," answered Tom, +with a laugh at Ned. "Though that isn't saying such a machine +couldn't be invented."<br> +</p> + +"I believe you--that is if you got on its trail," returned Ned, +and there was warm admiration in his voice. <br> +<p>"As for inside baseball, or outside, for that matter, I hardly +believe I'd be able to tell third base from the second base, it's +so long since I went to a game," proceeded Tom. "I've been too +busy on that new airship stabilizer dad gave me an idea for. I've +been working too hard, that's a fact. I need a vacation, and +maybe a good baseball game----"<br> +</p> + +He stopped and looked at the magazine he had so hastily slapped +down. Something he had read in it seemed to fascinate him. <br> +<p>"I wonder if it can possibly be true," he went on. "It sounds +like the wildest dream of a professional sleep-walker; and yet, +when I stop to think, it isn't much worse than some of the things +we've gone through with, Ned."<br> +</p> + +"Say, for the love of rice-pudding! will you get down to brass +tacks and strike a trial balance? What are you talking of, +anyhow? Is it a joke?" <br> +<p>"A joke?"<br> +</p> + +"Yes. What you just read in that magazine which seems to cause +you so much excitement." <br> +<p>"Well, it may be a joke; and yet the professor seems very much +in earnest about it," replied Tom. "It certainly is one wonderful +story!"<br> +</p> + +"So you said before. Come on--the `fillium' is busted. Splice it, +or else put in a new reel and on with the show. I'd like to know +what's doing. What professor are you talking of?" <br> +<p>"Professor Swyington Bumper."<br> +</p> + +"Swyington Bumper?" and Ned's voice showed that his memory was a +bit hazy. <br> +<p>"Yes. You ought to remember him. He was on the steamer when I +went down to Peru to help the Titus Brothers dig the big tunnel. +That plotter Waddington, or some of his tools, dropped a bomb +where it might have done us some injury, but Professor Bumper, +who was a fellow passenger, on his way to South America to look +for the lost city of Pelone, calmly picked up the bomb, plucked +out the fuse, and saved us from bad injuries, if not death. And +he was as cool about it as an ice-cream cone. Surely you +remember!"<br> +</p> + +"Swyington Bumper! Oh, yes, now I remember him," said Ned Newton. +"But what has he got to do with a wonderful story? Has he written +more about the lost city of Pelone? If he has I don't see +anything so very wonderful in that." <br> +<p>"There isn't," agreed Tom. "But this isn't that," and Tom +picked up the magazine and leafed it to find the article he had +been reading.<br> +</p> + +"Let's have a look at it," suggested Ned. "You act as though you +might be vitally interested in it. Maybe you're thinking of +joining forces with the professor again, as you did when you dug +the big tunnel." <br> +<p>"Oh, no. I haven't any such idea," Tom said. "I've got enough +work laid out now to keep me in Shopton for the next year. I have +no notion of going anywhere with Professor Bumper. Yet I can't +help being impressed by this," and, having found the article in +the magazine to which he referred, he handed it to his chum.<br> +</p> + +"Why, it's by Bumper himself!" exclaimed Ned. <br> +<p>"Yes. Though there's nothing remarkable in that, seeing that +he is constantly contributing articles to various publications or +writing books. It's the story itself that's so wonderful. To save +you the trouble of wading through a lot of scientific detail, +which I know you don't care about, I'll tell you that the story +is about a queer idol of solid gold, weighing many pounds, and, +in consequence, of great value."<br> +</p> + +"Of solid gold you say?" asked Ned eagerly. <br> +<p>"That's it. Got on your banking air already," Tom laughed. "To +sum it up for you--notice I use the word `sum,' which is very +appropriate for a bank--the professor has got on the track of +another lost or hidden city. This one, the name of which doesn't +appear, is in the Copan valley of Honduras, and----"<br> +</p> + +"Copan," interrupted Ned. "It sounds like the name of some new +floor varnish." <br> +<p>"Well, it isn't, though it might be," laughed Tom. "Copan is a +city, in the Department of Copan, near the boundary between +Honduras and Guatemala. A fact I learned from the article and not +because I remembered my geography."<br> +</p> + +"I was going to say," remarked Ned with a smile, "that you were +coming it rather strong on the school-book stuff." <br> +<p>"Oh, it's all plainly written down there," and Tom waved +toward the magazine at which Ned was looking. "As you'll see, if +you take the trouble to go through it, as I did, Copan is, or +maybe was, for all I know, one of the most important centers of +the Mayan civilization."<br> +</p> + +"What's Mayan?" asked Ned. "You see I'm going to imbibe my +information by the deductive rather than the excavative process," +he added with a laugh. <br> +<p>"I see," laughed Tom. "Well, Mayan refers to the Mayas, an +aboriginal people of Yucatan. The Mayas had a peculiar +civilization of their own, thousands of years ago, and their +calendar system was so involved----"<br> +</p> + +"Never mind about dates," again interrupted Ned. "Get down to +brass tacks. I'm willing to take your word for it that there's a +Copan valley in Honduras. But what has your friend Professor +Bumper to do with it?" <br> +<p>"This. He has come across some old manuscripts, or ancient +document records, referring to this valley, and they state, +according to this article he has written for the magazine, that +somewhere in the valley is a wonderful city, traces of which have +been found twenty to forty feet below the surface, on which great +trees are growing, showing that the city was covered hundreds, if +not thousands, of years ago."<br> +</p> + +"But where does the idol of gold come in?" <br> +<p>"I'm coming to that," said Tom. "Though, if Professor Bumper +has his way, the idol will be coming out instead of coming +in."<br> +</p> + +"You mean he wants to get it and take it away from the Copan +valley, Tom?" <br> +<p>"That's it, Ned. It has great value not only from the amount +of pure gold that is in it, but as an antique. I fancy the +professor is more interested in that aspect of it. But he's +written a wonderful story, telling how he happened to come across +the ancient manuscripts in the tomb of some old Indian whose +mummy he unearthed on a trip to Central America.<br> +</p> + +"Then he tells of the trouble he had in discovering how to solve +the key to the translation code; but when he did, he found a +great story unfolded to him. <br> +<p>"This story has to do with the hidden city, and tells of the +ancient civilization of those who lived in the Copan valley +thousands of years ago. The people held this idol of gold to be +their greatest treasure, and they put to death many of other +tribes who sought to steal it."<br> +</p> + +"Whew!" whistled Ned. "That IS some yarn. But what is Professor +Bumper going to do about it?" <br> +<p>"I don't know. The article seems to be written with an idea of +interesting scientists and research societies, so that they will +raise money to conduct a searching expedition.<br> +</p> + +"Perhaps by this time the party may be organized--this magazine +is several months old. I have been so busy on my stabilizer +patent that I haven't kept up with current literature. Take it +home and read it! Ned. That is if you're through telling me about +my affairs," for Ned, who had formerly worked in the Shopton +bank, had recently been made general financial manager of the +interests of Tom and his father. The two were inventors and +proverbially poor business men, though they had amassed a +fortune. <br> +<p>"Your financial affairs are all right, Tom," said Ned. "I have +just been going over the books, and I'll submit a detailed report +later."<br> +</p> + +The telephone bell rang and Tom picked up the instrument from the +desk. As he answered in the usual way and then listened a moment, +a strange look came over his face. <br> +<p>"Well, this certainly is wonderful!" he exclaimed, in much the +same manner as when he had finished reading the article about the +idol. "It certainly is a strange coincidence," he added, speaking +in an aside to Ned while he himself still listened to what was +being told to him over the telephone wire.<br> +</p> + +<br> +<h1 id="ref_2">CHAPTER II</h1> + +PROFESSOR BUMPER ARRIVES <br> +"What's the matter, Tom? What is it?" asked Ned Newton, attracted +by the strange manner of his chum at the telephone. "Has anything +happened?" <br> +<p>But the young inventor was too busy listening to the unseen +speaker to answer his chum, even if he heard what Ned remarked, +which is doubtful.<br> +</p> + +"Well, I might as well wait until he is through," mused Ned, as +he started to leave the room. Then as Tom motioned to him to +remain, he murmured: "He may have something to say to me later. +But I wonder who is talking to him." <br> +<p>There was no way of finding out, however, until Tom had a +chance to talk to Ned, and at present the young scientist was +eagerly listening to what came over the wire. Occasionally Ned +could hear him say:<br> +</p> + +"You don't tell me! That is surprising! Yes --yes! Of course if +it's true it means a big thing, I can understand that. What's +that? No, I couldn't make a promise like that. I'm sorry, +but----" <br> +<p>Then the person at the other end of the wire must have plunged +into something very interesting and absorbing, for Tom did not +again interrupt by interjected remarks.<br> +</p> + +Tom. Swift, as has been said, was an inventor, as was his father. +Mr. Swift was now rather old and feeble, taking only a nominal +part in the activities of the firm made up of himself and his +son. But his inventions were still used, many of them being vital +to the business and trade of this country. <br> +<p>Tom and his father lived in the village of Shopton, New York, +and their factories covered many acres of ground. Those who wish +to read of the earliest activities of Tom in the inventive line +are referred to the initial volume, "Tom Swift and His Motor +Cycle." From then on he and his father had many and exciting +adventures. In a motor boat, an airship, and a submarine +respectively the young inventor had gone through many perils. On +some of the trips his chum, Ned Newton, accompanied him, and very +often in the party was a Mr. Wakefield Damon, who had a curious +habit of "blessing" everything that happened to strike his +fancy.<br> +</p> + +Besides Tom and his father, the Swift household was made up of +Eradicate Sampson, a colored man-of-all-work, who, with his mule +Boomerang, did what he could to keep the grounds around the house +in order. There was also Mrs. Baggert, the housekeeper, Tom's +mother being dead. Mr. Damon, living in a neighboring town, was a +frequent visitor in the Swift home. <br> +<p>Mary Nestor, a girl of Shopton, might also be mentioned. She +and Tom were more than just good friends. Tom had an idea that +some day----. But there, I promised not to tell that part, at +least until the young people themselves were ready to have a +certain fact announced.<br> +</p> + +From one activity to another had Tom Swift gone, now constructing +some important invention for himself, as among others, when he +made the photo-telephone, or developed a great searchlight which +he presented to the Government for use in detecting smugglers on +the border. <br> +<p>The book immediately preceding this is called "Tom Swift and +His Bit, Tunnel," and deals with the efforts of the young +inventor to help a firm of contractors penetrate a mountain in +Peru. How this was done and how, incidentally, the lost city of +Pelone was discovered, bringing joy to the heart of Professor +Swyington Bumper, will be found fully set forth in the book.<br> +</p> + +Tom had been back from the Peru trip for some months, when we +again find him interested in some of the work of Professor +Bumper, as set forth in the magazine mentioned. <br> +<p>"Well, he certainly is having some conversation," reflected +Ned, as, after more than five minutes, Tom's ear was still at the +receiver of the instrument, into the transmitter of which he had +said only a few words.<br> +</p> + +"All right," Tom finally answered, as he hung the receiver up, +"I'll be here," and then he turned to Ned, whose curiosity had +been growing with the telephone talk, and remarked: <br> +<p>"That certainly was wonderful!"<br> +</p> + +"What was?" asked Ned. "Do you think I'm a mind reader to be able +to guess?" <br> +<p>"No, indeed! I beg your pardon. I'll tell you at once. But I +couldn't break away. It was too important. To whom do you think I +was talking just then?"<br> +</p> + +"I can imagine almost any one, seeing I know something of what +you have done. It might be almost anybody from some person you +met up in the caves of ice to a red pygmy from the wilds of +Africa." <br> +<p>"I'm afraid neither of them would be quite up to telephone +talk yet," laughed Tom. "No, this was the gentleman who wrote +that interesting article about the idol of gold," and he motioned +to the magazine Ned held in his hand.<br> +</p> + +"You don't mean Professor Bumper!" <br> +<p>"That's just whom I do mean."<br> +</p> + +"What did he want? Where did he call from?" <br> +<p>"He wants me to help organize an expedition to go to Central +America--to the Copan valley, to be exact--to look for this +somewhat mythical idol of gold. Incidentally the professor will +gather in any other antiques of more or less value, if he can +find any, and he hopes, even if he doesn't find the idol, to get +enough historical material for half a dozen books, to say nothing +of magazine articles."<br> +</p> + +"Where did he call from; did you say?" <br> +<p>"I didn't say. But it was a long-distance call from New York. +The Professor stopped off there on his way from Boston, where he +has been lecturing before some society. And now he's coming here +to see me," finished Tom.<br> +</p> + +"What! Is he going to lecture here?" cried Ned. "If he is, and +spouts a whole lot of that bone-dry stuff about the ancient Mayan +civilization and their antiquities, with side lights on how the +old-time Indians used to scalp their enemies, I'm going to the +moving pictures! I'm willing to be your financial manager, Tom +Swift, but please don't ask me to be a high-brow. I wasn't built +for that." <br> +<p>"Nor I, Ned. The professor isn't going to lecture. He's only +going to talk, he says."<br> +</p> + +"What about?" <br> +<p>"He's going to try to induce me to join his expedition to the +Copan valley."<br> +</p> + +"Do you feel inclined to go?" <br> +<p>"No, Ned, I do not. I've got too many other irons in the fire. +I shall have to give the professor a polite but firm +refusal."<br> +</p> + +"Well, maybe you're right, Tom; and yet that idol of +gold--GOLD--weighing how many pounds did you say?" <br> +<p>"Oh, you're thinking of its money value, Ned, old man!"<br> +</p> + +"Yes, I'd like to see what a big chunk of gold like that would +bring. It must be quite a nugget. But I'm not likely to get a +glimpse of it if you don't go with the professor." <br> +<p>"I don't see how I can go, Ned. But come over and meet the +delightful gentleman when he arrives. I expect him day after +to-morrow."<br> +</p> + +"I'll be here," promised Ned; and then he went downtown to attend +to some matters connected with his new duties, which were much +less irksome than those he had had when he had been in the bank. +<br> +<p>"Well, Tom, have you heard any more about your friend?" asked +Ned, two days later, as he came to the Swift home with some +papers needing the signature of the young inventor and his +father.<br> +</p> + +"You mean----?" <br> +<p>"Professor Bumper."<br> +</p> + +"No, I haven't heard from him since he telephoned. But I guess +he'll be here all right. He's very punctual. Did you see anything +of my giant Koku as you came in?" <br> +<p>"Yes, he and Eradicate were having an argument about who +should move a heavy casting from one of the shops. Rad wanted to +do it all alone, but Koku said he was like a baby now."<br> +</p> + +"Poor Rad is getting old," said Tom with a sigh. "But he has been +very faithful. He and Koku never seem to get along well +together." <br> +<p>Koku was an immense man, a veritable giant, one of two whom +Tom had brought back with him after an exciting trip to a strange +land. The giant's strength was very useful to the young +inventor.<br> +</p> + +"Now Tom, about this business of leasing to the English +Government the right to manufacture that new explosive of yours," +began Ned, plunging into the business at hand. "I think if you +stick out a little you can get a better royalty price." <br> +<p>"But I don't want to gouge 'em, Ned. I'm satisfied with a fair +profit. The trouble with you is you think too much of money. +Now----"<br> +</p> + +At that moment a voice was heard in the hall of the house saying: +<br> +<p>"Now, my dear lady, don't trouble yourself. I can find my way +in to Tom Swift perfectly well by myself, and while I appreciate +your courtesy I do not want to trouble you."<br> +</p> + +"No, don't come, Mrs. Baggert," added another voice. "Bless my +hat band, I think I know my way about the house by this time!" +<br> +<p>"Mr. Damon!" ejaculated Ned.<br> +</p> + +"And Professor Bumper is with him," added Tom. "Come in!" he +cried, opening the hall door, to confront a bald-headed man who +stood peering at our hero with bright snapping eyes, like those +of some big bird spying out the land from afar. "Come in, +Professor Bumper; and you too, Mr. Damon!" <br> +<p><br> +</p> + +<h1 id="ref_3">CHAPTER III</h1> + +BLESSINGS AND ENTHUSIASM <br> +<p>Greetings and inquiries as to health having been passed, not +without numerous blessings on the part of Mr. Damon, the little +party gathered in the library of the home of Tom Swift sat down +and looked at one another.<br> +</p> + +On Professor Bumper's face there was, plainly to be seen, a look +of expectation, and it seemed to be shared by Mr. Damon, who +seemed eager to burst into enthusiastic talk. On the other hand +Tom Swift appeared a bit indifferent. <br> +<p>Ned himself admitted that he was frankly curious. The story of +the big idol of gold had occupied his thoughts for many +hours.<br> +</p> + +"Well, I'm glad to see you both," said Tom again. "You got here +all right, I see, Professor Bumper. But I didn't expect you to +meet and bring Mr. Damon with you." <br> +<p>"I met him on the train," explained the author of the book on +the lost city of Pelone, as well as books on other antiquities. +"I had no expectation of seeing him, and we were both surprised +when we met on the express."<br> +</p> + +"It stopped at Waterfield, Tom," explained Mr. Damon, "which it +doesn't usually do, being an aristocratic sort of train, not +given even to hesitating at our humble little town. There were +some passengers to get off, which caused the flier to stop, I +suppose. And, as I wanted to come over to see you, I got aboard." +<br> +<p>"Glad you did," voiced Tom.<br> +</p> + +"Then I happened to see Professor Bumper a few seats ahead of +me," went on Mr. Damon, "and, bless my scarfpin! he was coming to +see you also." <br> +<p>"Well, I'm doubly glad," answered Tom.<br> +</p> + +"So here we are," went on Mr. Damon, "and you've simply got to +come, Tom Swift. You must go with us!" and Mr. Damon, in his +enthusiasm, banged his fist down on the table with such force +that he knocked some books to the floor. <br> +<p>Koku, the giant, who was in the hall, opened the door and in +his imperfect English asked:<br> +</p> + +"Master Tom knock for him bigs man?" <br> +<p>"No," answered Tom with a smile, "I didn't knock or call you, +Koku. Some books fell, that is all."<br> +</p> + +"Massa Tom done called fo' me, dat's what he done!" broke in the +petulant voice of Eradicate. <br> +<p>"No, Rad, I don't need anything," Tom said. "Though you might +make a pitcher of lemonade. It's rather warm."<br> +</p> + +"Right away, Massa Tom! Right away!" cried the old colored man, +eager to be of service. <br> +<p>"Me help, too!" rumbled Koku, in his deep voice. "Me punch de +lemons!" and away he hurried after Eradicate, fearful lest the +old servant do all the honors.<br> +</p> + +"Same old Rad and Koku," observed Mr. Damon with a smile. "But +now, Tom, while they're making the lemonade, let's get down to +business. You're going with us, of course!" <br> +<p>"Where?" asked Tom, more from habit than because he did not +know.<br> +</p> + +"Where? Why to Honduras, of course! After the idol of gold! Why, +bless my fountain pen, it's the most wonderful story I ever heard +of! You've read Professor Bumper's article, of course. He told me +you had. I read it on the train coming over. He also told me +about it, and---- Well, I'm going with him, Tom Swift. <br> +<p>"And think of all the adventures that may befall us! We'll get +lost in buried cities, ride down raging torrents on a raft, fall +over a cliff maybe and be rescued. Why, it makes me feel quite +young again!" and Mr. Damon arose, to pace excitedly up and down +the room.<br> +</p> + +Up to this time Professor Bumper had said very little. He had sat +still in his chair listening to Mr. Damon. But now that the +latter had ceased, at least for a time, Tom and Ned looked toward +the scientist. <br> +<p>"I understand, Tom," he said, "that you read my article in the +magazine, about the possibility of locating some of the lost and +buried cities of Honduras?"<br> +</p> + +"Yes, Ned and I each read it. It was quite wonderful." <br> +<p>"And yet there are more wonders to tell," went on the +professor. "I did not give all the details in that article. I +will tell you some of them. I have brought copies of the +documents with me," and he opened a small valise and took out +several bundles tied with pink tape.<br> +</p> + +"As Mr. Damon said," he went on while arranging his papers, "he +met me on the train, and he was so taken by the story of the idol +of gold that he agreed to accompany me to Central America." <br> +<p>"On one condition!" put in the eccentric man.<br> +</p> + +"What's that? You didn't make any conditions while we were +talking," said the scientist. <br> +<p>"Yes, I said I'd go if Tom Swift did."<br> +</p> + +"Oh, yes. You did say that. But I don't call that a condition, +for of course Tom Swift will go. Now let me tell you something +more than I could impart over the telephone. <br> +<p>"Soon after I called you up, Tom--and it was quite a +coincidence that it should have been at a time when you had just +finished my magazine article. Soon after that, as I was saying, I +arranged to come on to Shopton. And now I'm glad we're all here +together.<br> +</p> + +"But how comes it, Ned Newton, that you are not in the bank?" +<br> +<p>"I've left there," explained Ned.<br> +</p> + +"He's now general financial man for the Swift Company," Tom +explained. "My father and I found that we could not look after +the inventing and experimental end, and money matters, too, and +as Ned had had considerable experience this way we made him take +over those worries," and Tom laughed genially. <br> +<p>"No worries at all, as far as the Swift Company is concerned," +returned Ned.<br> +</p> + +"Well, I guess you earn your salary," laughed Tom. "But now, +Professor Bumper, let's hear from you. Is there anything more +about this idol of gold that you can tell us?" <br> +<p>"Plenty, Tom, plenty. I could talk all day, and not get to the +end of the story. But a lot of it would be scientific detail that +might be too dry for you in spite of this excellent +lemonade,"<br> +</p> + +Between them Koku and Eradicate had managed to make a pitcher of +the beverage, though Mrs. Baggert, the housekeeper, told Tom +afterward that the two had a quarrel in the kitchen as to who +should squeeze the lemons, the giant insisting that he had the +better right to "punch" them. <br> +<p>"So, not to go into too many details," went on the professor, +"I'll just give you a brief outline of this story of the idol of +gold.<br> +</p> + +"Honduras, as you of course know, is a republic of Central +America, and it gets its name from something that happened on the +fourth voyage of Columbus. He and his men had had days of weary +sailing and had sought in vain for shallow water in which they +might come to an anchorage. Finally they reached the point now +known as Cape Gracias-a-Dios, and when they let the anchor go, +and found that in a short time it came to rest on the floor of +the ocean, some one of the sailors--perhaps Columbus himself-is +said to have remarked: <br> +<p>"`Thank the Lord, we have left the deep waters (honduras)' +that being the Spanish word for unfathomable depths. So Honduras +it was called, and has been to this day.<br> +</p> + +"It is a queer land with many traces of an ancient civilization, +a civilization which I believe dates back farther than some in +the far East. On the sculptured stones in the Copan valley there +are characters which seem to resemble very ancient writing, but +this pictographic writing is largely untranslatable. <br> +<p>"Honduras, I might add, is about the size of our state of +Ohio. It is rather an elevated tableland, though there are +stretches of tropical forest, but it is not so tropical a country +as many suppose it to be. There is much gold scattered throughout +Honduras, though of late it has not been found in large +quantities.<br> +</p> + +"In the old days, however, before the Spaniards came, it was +plentiful, so much, so that the natives made idols of it. And it +is one of the largest of these idols--by name Quitzel--that I am +going to seek." <br> +<p>"Do you know where it is?" asked Ned.<br> +</p> + +"Well, it isn't locked up in a safe deposit box, of that I'm +sure," laughed the professor. "No, I don't know exactly where it +is, except that it is somewhere in an ancient and buried city +known as Kurzon. If I knew exactly where it was there wouldn't be +much fun in going after it. And if it was known to others it +would have been taken away long ago. <br> +<p>"No, we've got to hunt for the idol of gold in this land of +wonders where I hope soon to be. Later on I'll show you the +documents that put me on the track of this idol. Enough now to +show you an old map I found, or, rather, a copy of it, and some +of the papers that tell of the idol," and he spread out his +packet of papers on the table in front of him, his eyes shining +with excitement and pleasure. Mr. Damon, too, leaned eagerly +forward.<br> +</p> + +"So, Tom Swift," went on the professor, "I come to you for help +in this matter. I want you to aid me in organizing an expedition +to go to Honduras after the idol of gold. Will you?" <br> +<p>"I'll help you, of course," said Tom. "You may use any of my +inventions you choose--my airships, my motor boats and +submarines, even my giant cannon if you think you can take it +with you. And as for the money part, Ned will arrange that for +you. But as for going with you myself, it is out of the question. +I can't. No Honduras for me!"<br> +</p> + +<br> +<h1 id="ref_4">CHAPTER IX</h1> + +FENIMORE BEECHER <br> +Had Tom Swift's giant cannon been discharged somewhere in the +vicinity of his home it could have caused but little more +astonishment to Mr. Damon and Professor Bumper than did the +simple announcement of the young inventor. The professor seemed +to shrink back in his chair, collapsing like an automobile tire +when the air is let out. As for Mr. Damon he jumped up and cried: +<br> +<p>"Bless my----!"<br> +</p> + +But that is as far as he got--at least just then. He did not seem +to know what to bless, but he looked as though he would have +liked to include most of the universe. <br> +<p>"Surely you don't mean it, Tom Swift," gasped Professor Bumper +at length. "Won't you come with us?"<br> +</p> + +"No," said Tom, slowly. "Really I can't go. I'm working on an +invention of a new aeroplane stabilizer, and if I go now it will +be just at a time when I am within striking distance of success. +And the stabilizer is very much needed." <br> +<p>"If it's a question of making a profit on it, Tom," began Mr. +Damon, "I can let you have some money until----"<br> +</p> + +"Oh, no! It isn't the money!" cried Tom. "Don't think that for a +moment. You see the European war has called for the use of a +large number of aeroplanes, and as the pilots of them frequently +have to fight, and so can not give their whole attention to the +machines, some form of automatic stabilizer is needed to prevent +them turning turtle, or going off at a wrong tangent. <br> +<p>"So I have been working out a sort of modified gyroscope, and +it seems to answer the purpose. I have already received advance +orders for a number of my devices from abroad, and as they are +destined to save lives I feel that I ought to keep on with my +work.<br> +</p> + +"I'd like to go, don't misunderstand me, but I can't go at this +time. It is out of the question. If you wait a year, or maybe six +months----" <br> +<p>"No, it is impossible to wait, Tom," declared Professor +Bumper.<br> +</p> + +"Is it so important then to hurry?" asked Mr. Damon. "You did not +mention that to me, Professor Bumper." <br> +<p>"No, I did not have time. There are so many ends to my +concerns. But, Tom Swift, you simply must go!"<br> +</p> + +"I can't, my dear professor, much as I should like to." <br> +<p>"But, Tom, think of it!" cried Mr. Damon, who was as much +excited as was the little baldheaded scientist. "You never saw +such an idol of gold as this. What's its name?" and he looked +questioningly at the professor.<br> +</p> + +"Quitzel the idol is called," supplied Professor Bumper. "And it +is supposed to be in a buried city named Kurzon, somewhere in the +Sierra de Merendon range of mountains, in the vicinity of the +Copan valley. Copan is a city, or maybe we'll find it only a town +when we get there, and it is not far from the borders of +Guatemala. <br> +<p>"Tom, if I could show you the translations I have made of the +ancient documents, referring to this idol and the wonderful city +over which it kept guard, I'm sure you'd come with us."<br> +</p> + +"Please don't tempt me," Tom said with a laugh. "I'm only too +anxious to go, and if it wasn't for the stabilizer I'd be with +you in a minute. But---- Well, you'll have to get along without +me. Maybe I can join you later." <br> +<p>"What's this about the idol keeping guard over the ancient +city?" asked Ned, for he was interested in strange stories.<br> +</p> + +"It seems," explained the professor, "that in the early days +there was a strange race of people, inhabiting Central America, +with a somewhat high civilization, only traces of which remained +when the Spaniards came. <br> +<p>"But these traces, and such hieroglyphics, or, to be more +exact pictographs, as I have been able to decipher from the old +documents, tell of one country, or perhaps it was only a city, +over which this great golden idol of Quitzel presided.<br> +</p> + +"There is in some of these papers a description of the idol, +which is not exactly a beauty, judged from modern standards. But +the main fact is that it is made of solid gold, and may weigh +anywhere from one to two tons." <br> +<p>"Two tons of gold!" cried New Newton. "Why, if that's the case +it would be worth----" and he fell to doing a sum in mental +arithmetic.<br> +</p> + +"I am not so concerned about the monetary value of the statue as +I am about its antiquity," went on Professor Bumper. "There are +other statues in this buried city of Kurzon, and though they may +not be so valuable they will give me a wealth of material for my +research work." <br> +<p>"How do you know there are other statues?" asked Mr. +Damon.<br> +</p> + +"Because my documents tell me so. It was because the people made +other idols, in opposition, as it were, to Quitzel, that their +city or country was destroyed. At least that is the legend. +Quitzel, so the story goes, wanted to be the chief god, and when +the image of a rival was set up in the temple near him, he +toppled over in anger, and part of the temple went with him, the +whole place being buried in ruins. All the inhabitants were +killed, and trace of the ancient city was lost forever. No, I +hope not forever, for I expect to find it." <br> +<p>"If all the people were killed, and the city buried, how did +the story of Quitzel become known?" asked Mr. Damon.<br> +</p> + +"One only of the priests in the temple of Quitzel escaped and set +down part of the tale," said the professor. "It is his narrative, +or one based on it, that I have given you." <br> +<p>"And now, what I want to do, is to go and make a search for +this buried city. I have fairly good directions as to how it may +be reached. We will have little difficulty in getting to +Honduras, as there are fruit steamers frequently sailing. Of +course going into the interior--to the Copan valley--is going to +be harder. But an expedition from a large college was recently +there and succeeded, after much labor, in excavating part of a +buried city. Whether or not it was Kurzon I am unable to say.<br> +</p> + +"But if there was one ancient city there must be more. So I want +to make an attempt. And I counted on you, Tom. You have had +considerable experience in strange quarters of the earth, and +you're just the one to help me. I don't need money, for I have +interested a certain millionaire, and my own college will put up +part of the funds." <br> +<p>"Oh, it isn't a question of money," said Tom. "It's time."<br> +</p> + +"That's just what it is with me!" exclaimed Professor Bumper. "I +haven't any time to lose. My rivals may, even now, be on their +way to Honduras!" <br> +<p>"Your rivals!" cried Tom. "You didn't say anything about +them!"<br> +</p> + +"No, I believe I didn't There were so many other things to talk +about. But there is a rival archaeologist who would ask nothing +better than to get ahead of me in this matter. He is younger than +I am, and youth is a big asset nowadays." <br> +<p>"Pooh! You're not old!" cried Mr. Damon. "You're no older than +I am, and I'm still young. I'm a lot younger than some of these +boys who are afraid to tackle a trip through a tropical +wilderness," and he playfully nudged Tom in the ribs.<br> +</p> + +"I'm not a bit afraid!" retorted the young inventor. <br> +<p>"No, I know you're not," laughed Mr. Damon. "But I've got to +say something, Tom, to stir you up. Ned, how about you? Would you +go?"<br> +</p> + +"I can't, unless Tom does. You see I'm his financial man now." +<br> +<p>"There you are, Tom Swift!" cried Mr. Damon. "You see you are +holding back a number of persons just because you don't want to +go."<br> +</p> + +"I certainly wouldn't like to go without Tom," said the professor +slowly. "I really need his help. You know, Tom, we would never +have found the city of Pelone if it had not been for you and your +marvelous powder. The conditions in the Copan valley are likely +to be still more difficult to overcome, and I feel that I risk +failure without your young energy and your inventive mind to aid +in the work and to suggest possible means of attaining our +object. Come, Tom, reconsider, and decide to make the trip." <br> +<p>"And my promise to go was dependent on Tom's agreement to +accompany us," said Mr. Damon<br> +</p> + +"Come on!" urged the professor, much as one boy might urge +another to take part in a ball game. "Don't let my rival get +ahead of me." <br> +<p>"I wouldn't like to see that," Tom said slowly. "Who is +he--any one I know?"<br> +</p> + +"I don't believe so, Tom. He's connected with a large, new +college that has plenty of money to spend on explorations and +research work. Beecher is his name--Fenimore Beecher." <br> +<p>"Beecher!" exclaimed Tom, and there was such a change in his +manner that his friends could not help noticing it. He jumped to +his feet, his eyes snapping, and he looked eagerly and anxiously +at Professor Bumper.<br> +</p> + +"Did you say his name was Fenimore Beecher?" Tom asked in a tense +voice. <br> +<p>"That's what it is--Professor Fenimore Beecher. He is really a +learned young man, and thoroughly in earnest, though I do not +like his manner. But he is trying to get ahead of me, which may +account for my feeling."<br> +</p> + +Tom Swift did not answer. Instead he hurried from the room with a +murmured apology. <br> +<p>"I'll be back in about five minutes," he said, as he went +out.<br> +</p> + +"Well, what's up now?" asked Mr. Damon of Ned, as the young +inventor departed. "What set him off that way?" <br> +<p>"The mention of Beecher's name, evidently. Though I never +heard him mention such a person before."<br> +</p> + +"Nor did I ever hear Professor Beecher speak of Tom," said the +bald-headed scientist. "Well, we'll just have to wait until----" +<br> +<p>At that moment Tom came back into the room.<br> +</p> + +"Gentlemen," he said, "I have reconsidered my refusal to go to +the Copan valley after the idol of gold. I'm going with you!" +<br> +<p>"Good!" cried Professor Bumper.<br> +</p> + +"Fine!" ejaculated Mr. Damon. "Bless my time-table! I thought +you'd come around, Tom Swift." <br> +<p>"But what about your stabilizer?" asked Ned.<br> +</p> + +"I was just talking to my father about it,' the young inventor +replied. "He will be able to put the finishing touches on it. So +I'll leave it with him. As soon as I can get ready I'll go, since +you say haste is necessary, Professor Bumper." <br> +<p>"It is, if we are to get ahead of Beecher."<br> +</p> + +"Then we'll get ahead of him!" cried Tom. "I'm with you now from +the start to the finish. I'll show him what I can do!" he added, +while Ned and the others wondered at the sudden change in their +friend's manner. <br> +<p><br> +</p> + +<h1 id="ref_5">CHAPTER V</h1> + +<br> +<p>THE LITTLE GREEN GOD<br> +</p> + +"Tom how soon can we go?" asked Professor Bumper, as he began +arranging his papers, maps and documents ready to place them back +in the valise. <br> +<p>"Within a week, if you want to start that soon."<br> +</p> + +"The sooner the better. A week will suit me. I don't know just +what Beecher's plans are, but, he may try to get on the ground +first. Though, without boasting, I may say that he has not had as +much experience as I have had, thanks to you, Tom, when you +helped me find the lost city of Pelone." <br> +<p>"Well, I hope we'll be as successful this time," murmured Tom. +"I don't want to see Beecher beat you."<br> +</p> + +"I didn't know you knew him, Tom," said the professor. <br> +<p>"Oh, yes, I have met him. once," and there was something in +Tom's manner, though he tried to speak indifferently, that made +Ned believe there was more behind his chum's sudden change of +determination than had yet appeared.<br> +</p> + +"He never mentioned you," went on Professor Bumper; "yet the last +time I saw him I said I was coming to see you, though I did not +tell him why." <br> +<p>"No, he wouldn't be likely to speak of me," said Tom +significantly.<br> +</p> + +"Well, if that's all settled, I guess I'll go back home and pack +up," said Mr. Damon, making a move to depart. <br> +<p>"There's no special rush," Tom said. "We won't leave for a +week. I can't get ready in much less time than that."<br> +</p> + +"Bless my socks! I know that," ejaculated Mr. Damon. "But if I +get my things packed I can go to a hotel to stay while my wife is +away. She might take a notion to come home unexpectedly, and, +though she is a dear, good soul, she doesn't altogether approve +of my going off on these wild trips with you, Tom Swift. But if I +get all packed, and clear out, she can't find me and she can't +hold me back. She is visiting her mother now. I can send her a +wire from Kurzon after I get there." <br> +<p>"I don't believe the telegraph there is working," laughed +Professor Bumper. "But suit yourself. I must go back to New York +to arrange for the goods we'll have to take with us. In a week, +Tom, we'll start."<br> +</p> + +"You must stay to dinner," Tom said. "You can't get a train now +anyhow, and father wants to meet you again. He's pretty well, +considering his age. And he's much better I verily believe since +I said I'd turn over to him the task of finishing the stabilizer. +He likes to work." <br> +<p>"We'll stay and take the night train back," agreed Mr. Damon. +"It will be like old times, Tom," he went on, "traveling off +together into the wilds. Central America is pretty wild, isn't +it?" he asked, as if in fear of being disappointed! on that +score.<br> +</p> + +"Oh, it's wild enough to suit any one," answered Professor +Bumper. <br> +<p>"Well, now to settle a few details," observed Tom. "Ned, what +is the situation as regards the financial affairs of my father +and myself? Nothing will come to grief if we go away, will +there?"<br> +</p> + +"I guess not, Tom. But are you going to take your father with +you?" <br> +<p>"No, of course not."<br> +</p> + +"But you spoke of `we.' " <br> +<p>"I meant you and I are going."<br> +</p> + +"Me, Tom?" <br> +<p>"Sure, you! I wouldn't think of leaving you behind. You want +Ned along, don't you, Professor?"<br> +</p> + +"Of course. It will be an ideal party--we four. We'll have to +take natives when we get to Honduras, and make up a mule +pack-train for the interior. I had some thoughts of asking you to +take an airship along, but it might frighten the Indians, and I +shall have to depend on them for guides, as well as for porters. +So it will be an old-fashioned expedition, in a way." <br> +<p>Mr. Swift came in at this point to meet his old friends.<br> +</p> + +"The boy needs a little excitement," he said. "He's been +puttering over that stabilizer invention too long. I can finish +the model for him in a very short time." <br> +<p>Professor Bumper told Mr. Swift something about the proposed +trip, while Mr. Damon went out with Tom and Ned to one of the +shops to look at a new model aeroplane the young inventor had +designed.<br> +</p> + +There was a merry party around the table at dinner, though now +and then Ned noticed that Tom had an abstracted and preoccupied +air. <br> +<p>"Thinking about the idol of gold?" asked Ned in a whisper to +his chum, when they were about to leave the table.<br> +</p> + +"The idol of gold? Oh, yes! Of course! It will be great if we can +bring that back with us." But the manner in which he said this +made Ned feel sure that Tom had had other thoughts, and that he +had used a little subterfuge in his answer. <br> +<p>Ned was right, as he proved for himself a little later, when, +Mr. Damon and the professor having gone home, the young financial +secretary took his friend to a quiet corner and asked:<br> +</p> + +"What's the matter, Tom?" <br> +<p>"Matter? What do you mean?"<br> +</p> + +"I mean what made you make up your mind so quickly to go on this +expedition when you heard Beecher was going?" <br> +<p>"Oh--er--well, you wouldn't want to see our old friend +Professor Bumper left, would you, after he had worked out the +secret of the idol of gold? You wouldn't want some young +whipper-snapper to beat him in the race, would you, Ned?"<br> +</p> + +"No, of course not." <br> +<p>"Neither would I. That's why I changed my mind. This Beecher +isn't going to get that idol if I can stop him!"<br> +</p> + +"You seem rather bitter against him." <br> +<p>"Bitter? Oh, not at all. I simply don't want to see my friends +disappointed."<br> +</p> + +"Then Beecher isn't a friend of yours?" <br> +<p>"Oh, I've met him, that is all," and Tom tried to speak +indifferently.<br> +</p> + +"Humph!" mused Ned, "there's more here than I dreamed of. I'm +going to get at the bottom of it." <br> +<p>But though Ned tried to pump Tom, he was not successful. The +young inventor admitted knowing the youthful scientist, but that +was all, Tom reiterating his determination not to let Professor +Bumper be beaten in the race for the idol of gold.<br> +</p> + +"Let me see," mused Ned, as he went home that evening. "Tom did +not change his mind until he heard Beecher's name mentioned. Now +this shows that Beecher had something to do with it. The only +reason Tom doesn't want Beecher to get this idol or find the +buried city is because Professor Bumper is after it. And yet the +professor is not an old or close friend of Tom's. They met only +when Tom went to dig his big tunnel. There must be some other +reason." <br> +<p>Ned did some more thinking. Then he clapped his hands +together, and a smile spread over his face.<br> +</p> + +"I believe I have it!" he cried. "The little green god as +compared to the idol of gold! That's it. I'm going to make a call +on my way home." <br> +<p>This he did, stopping at the home of Mary Nestor, a pretty +girl, who, rumor had it, was tacitly engaged to Tom. Mary was not +at home, but Mr. Nestor was, and for Ned's purpose this +answered.<br> +</p> + +"Well, well, glad to see you!" exclaimed Mary's father. "Isn't +Tom with you?" he asked a moment later, seeing that Ned was +alone. <br> +<p>"No, Tom isn't with me this evening," Ned answered. "The fact +is, he's getting ready to go off on another expedition, and I'm +going with him."<br> +</p> + +"You young men are always going somewhere," remarked Mrs. Nestor. +"Where is it to this time?" <br> +<p>"Some place in Central America," Ned answered, not wishing to +be too particular. He was wondering how he could find out what he +wanted to know, when Mary's mother unexpectedly gave him just the +information he was after.<br> +</p> + +"Central America!" she exclaimed. "Why, Father," and she looked +at her husband, "that's where Professor Beecher is going, isn't +it?" <br> +<p>"Yes, I believe he did mention something about that."<br> +</p> + +"Professor Beecher, the man who is an authority on Aztec ruins?" +asked Ned, taking a shot in the dark. <br> +<p>"Yes," said Mr. Nestor. "And a mighty fine young man he is, +too. I knew his father well. He was here on a visit not long ago, +young Beecher was, and he talked most entertainingly about his +discoveries. You remember how interested Mary was, Mother?"<br> +</p> + +"Yes, she seemed to be," said Mrs. Nestor. "Tom Swift dropped in +during the course of the evening," she added to Ned, "and Mary +introduced him to Professor Beecher. But I can't say that Tom was +much interested in the professor's talk." <br> +<p>"No?" questioned Ned.<br> +</p> + +"No, not at all. But Tom did not stay long. He left just as Mary +and the professor were drawing a map so the professor could +indicate where he had once made a big discovery." <br> +<p>"I see," murmured Ned. "Well, I suppose Tom must have been +thinking of something else at the time."<br> +</p> + +"Very likely," agreed Mr. Nestor. "But Tom missed a very +profitable talk. I was very much interested myself in what the +professor told us, and so was Mary. She invited Mr. Beecher to +come again. He takes after his father in being very thorough in +what he does. <br> +<p>"Sometimes I think," went on Mr. Nestor, "that Tom isn't quite +steady enough. He's thinking of so many things, perhaps, that he +can't get his mind down to the commonplace. I remember he once +sent something here in a box labeled `dynamite.' Though there was +no explosive in it, it gave us a great fright. But Tom is a boy, +in spite of his years. Professor Beecher seems much older. We all +like him very much."<br> +</p> + +"That's nice," said Ned, as he took his departure. He had found +out what he had come to learn. <br> +<p>"I knew it!" Ned exclaimed as he walked home. "I knew +something was in the wind. The little green god of jealousy has +Tom in his clutches. That's why my inventive friend was so +anxious to go on this expedition when he learned Beecher was to +go. He wants to beat him. I guess the professor has plainly shown +that he wouldn't like anything better than to cut Tom out with +Mary. Whew! that's something to think about!"<br> +</p> + +<br> +<h1 id="ref_6">CHAPTER VI</h1> + +UNPLEASANT NEWS <br> +Ned Newton decided to keep to himself what he had heard at the +Nestor home. Not for the world would he let Tom Swift know of the +situation. <br> +<p>"That is, I won't let him know that I know," said Ned to +himself, "though he is probably as well aware of the situation as +I am. But it sure is queer that this Professor Beecher should +have taken such a fancy to Mary, and that her father should +regard him so well. That is natural, I suppose. But I wonder how +Mary herself feels about it. That is the part Tom would be most +interested in.<br> +</p> + +"No wonder Tom wants to get ahead of this young college chap, who +probably thinks he's the whole show. If he can find the buried +city, and get the idol of gold, it would be a big feather in his +cap. <br> +<p>"He'd have no end of honors heaped on him, and I suppose his +hat wouldn't come within three sizes of fitting him. Then he'd +stand in better than ever with Mr. Nestor. And, maybe, with Mary, +too, though I think she is loyal to Tom. But one never can +tell.<br> +</p> + +"However, I'm glad I know about it. I'll do all I can to help +Tom, without letting him know that I know. And if I can do +anything to help in finding that idol of gold for Professor +Bumper, and, incidentally, Tom, I'll do it," and he spoke aloud +in his enthusiasm. <br> +<p>Ned, who was walking along in the darkness, clapped his open +hand down on Tom's magazine he was carrying home to read again, +and the resultant noise was a sharp crack. As it sounded a figure +jumped from behind a tree and called tensely:<br> +</p> + +"Hold on there!" <br> +<p>Ned stopped short, thinking he was to be the victim of a +holdup, but his fears were allayed when he beheld one of the +police force of Shopton confronting him.<br> +</p> + +"I heard what you said about gettin' the gold," went on the +officer. "I was walkin' along and I heard you talkin'. Where's +your pal?" <br> +<p>"I haven't any, Mr. Newbold," answered Ned with a laugh, as he +recognized the man.<br> +</p> + +"Oh, pshaw! It's Ned Newton!" exclaimed the disappointed officer. +"I thought you was talkin' to a confederate about gold, and +figured maybe you was goin' to rob the bank." <br> +<p>"No, nothing like that," answered Ned, still much amused. "I +was talking to myself about a trip Tom Swift and I are going to +take and----"<br> +</p> + +"Oh, that's all right," responded the policeman. "I can +understand it, if it had anything to do with Tom. He's a great +boy." <br> +<p>"Indeed he is," agreed Ned, making a mental resolve not to be +so public with his thoughts in the future. He chatted for a +moment with the officer, and then, bidding him good-night, walked +on to his home, his mind in a whirl with conglomerate visions of +buried cities, great grinning idols of gold, and rival professors +seeking to be first at the goal.<br> +</p> + +The next few days were busy ones for Tom, Ned and, in fact, the +whole Swift household. Tom and his father had several +consultations and conducted several experiments in regard to the +new stabilizer, the completion of which was so earnestly desired. +Mr. Swift was sure he could carry the invention to a successful +conclusion. <br> +<p>Ned was engaged in putting the financial affairs of the Swift +Company in shape, so they would practically run themselves during +his absence. Then, too, there was the packing of their baggage +which must be seen to.<br> +</p> + +Of course, the main details of the trip were left to Professor +Bumper, who knew just what to do. He had told Tom and Ned that +all they and Mr. Damon would have to do would be to meet him at +the pier in New York, where they would find all arrangements +made. <br> +<p>One day, near the end of the week (the beginning of the next +being set for the start) Eradicate came shuffling into the room +where Tom was sorting out the possessions he desired to take with +him, Ned assisting him in the task.<br> +</p> + +"Well, Rad, what is it?" asked Tom, with businesslike energy. +<br> +<p>"I done heah, Massa Tom, dat yo' all's gwine off on a long +trip once mo'. Am dat so?"<br> +</p> + +"Yes, that's so, Rad." <br> +<p>"Well, den, I'se come to ast yo' whut I'd bettah take wif me. +Shall I took warm clothes or cool clothes?"<br> +</p> + +"Well, if you were going, Rad," answered Tom with a smile, "you'd +need cool clothes, for we're going to a sort of jungle-land. But +I'm sorry to say you're not going this trip." <br> +<p>"I---- I ain't gwine? Does yo' mean dat yo' all ain't gwine to +take me, Massa Tom?"<br> +</p> + +"That's it, Rad. It isn't any trip for you." <br> +<p>"In certain not!" broke in the voice of Koku, the giant, who +entered with a big trunk Tom had sent him for. "Master want +strong man like a bull. He take Koku!"<br> +</p> + +"Look heah!" spluttered Eradicate, and his eyes flashed. +"Yo'--yo' giant yo'--yo' may be strong laik a bull, but ya' ain't +got as much sense as mah mule, Boomerang! Massa Tom don't want no +sich pusson wif him. He's gwine to take me." <br> +<p>"He take me!" cried Koku, and his voice was a roar while he +beat on his mighty chest with his huge fists.<br> +</p> + +Tom, seeing that the dispute was likely to be bothersome, winked +at Ned and began to speak. <br> +<p>"I don't believe you'd like it there, Rad--not where we're +going. It's a bad country. Why the mosquitoes there bite holes in +you--raise bumps on you as big as eggs."<br> +</p> + +"Oh, good land!" ejaculated the old colored man. "Am dat so Massa +Tom?" <br> +<p>"It sure is. Then there's another kind of bug that burrows +under your fingernails, and if you don't get 'em out, your +fingers drop off."<br> +</p> + +"Oh, good land, Massa Tom! Am dat a fact?" <br> +<p>"It sure is. I don't want to see those things happen to you, +Rad."<br> +</p> + +Slowly the old colored man shook his head. <br> +<p>"I don't mahse'f," he said. "I---- I guess I won't go."<br> +</p> + +Eradicate did not stop to ask how Tom and Ned proposed to combat +these two species of insects. <br> +<p>But there remained Koku to dispose of, and he stood smiling +broadly as Eradicate shuffled of.<br> +</p> + +"Me no 'fraid bugs," said the giant. <br> +<p>"No," said Tom, with a look at Ned, for he did not want to +take the big man on the trip for various reasons. "No, maybe not, +Koku. Your skin is pretty tough. But I understand there are deep +pools of water in the land where we are going, and in them lives +a fish that has a hide like an alligator and a jaw like a shark. +If you fall in it's all up with you."<br> +</p> + +"Dat true, Master Tom?" and Koku's voice trembled. <br> +<p>"Well, I've never seen such a fish, I'm sure, but the natives +tell about it."<br> +</p> + +Koku seemed to be considering the matter. Strange as it may seem, +the giant, though afraid of nothing human and brave when it came +to a hand-to-claw argument with a wild animal, had a very great +fear of the water and the unseen life within it. Even a little +fresh-water crab in a brook was enough to send him shrieking to +shore. So when Tom told of this curious fish, which many natives +of Central America firmly believe in, the giant took thought with +himself. Finally, he gave a sigh and said: <br> +<p>"Me stay home and keep bad mans out of master's shop."<br> +</p> + +"Yes, I guess that's the best thing for you," assented Tom with +an air of relief. He and Ned had talked the matter over, and they +had agreed that the presence of such a big man as Koku, in an +expedition going on a more or less secret mission, would attract +too much attention. <br> +<p>"Well, I guess that clears matters up," said Tom, as he looked +over a collection of rifles and small arms, to decide which to +take. "We won't have them to worry about."<br> +</p> + +"No, only Professor Beecher," remarked Ned, with a sharp look at +his chum. <br> +<p>"Oh, we'll dispose of him all right!" asserted Tom boldly. "He +hasn't had any experience in business of this sort, and with that +you and Professor Bumper and Mr. Damon know we ought to have +little trouble in getting ahead of the young man."<br> +</p> + +"Not to speak of your own aid," added Ned. <br> +<p>"Oh, I'll do what I can, of course," said Tom, with an air of +indifference. But Ned knew his chum would work ceaselessly to +help get the idol of gold.<br> +</p> + +Tom gave no sign that there was any complication in his affair +with Mary Nestor, and of course Ned did not tell anything of what +he knew about it. <br> +<p>That night saw the preparations of Ned and Tom about +completed. There were one or two matters yet to finish on Tom's +part in relation to his business, but these offered no +difficulties.<br> +</p> + +The two chums were in the Swift home, talking over the +prospective trip, when Mrs. Baggert, answering a ring at the +front door, announced that Mr. Damon was outside. <br> +<p>"Tell him to come in," ordered Tom.<br> +</p> + +"Bless my baggage check!" exclaimed the excitable man, as he +shook hands with Tom and Ned and noted the packing evidences all +about. "You're ready to go to the land of wonders." <br> +<p>"The land of wonders?" repeated Ned.<br> +</p> + +"Yes, that's what Professor Bumper calls the part of Honduras +we're going to. And it must be wonderful, Tom. Think of whole +cities, some of them containing idols and temples of gold, buried +thirty and forty feet under the surface! Wonderful is hardly the +name for it!" <br> +<p>"It'll be great!" cried Ned. "I suppose you're ready, Mr. +Damon--you and the professor?"<br> +</p> + +"Yes. But, Tom, I have a bit of unpleasant news for you." <br> +<p>"Unpleasant news?"<br> +</p> + +"Yes. You know Professor Bumper spoke of a rival--a man named +Beecher who is a member of the faculty of a new and wealthy +college." <br> +<p>"I heard him speak of him--yes," and the way Tom said it no +one would have suspected that he had any personal interest in the +matter.<br> +</p> + +"He isn't going to give his secret away," thought Ned. <br> +<p>"Well, this Professor Beecher, you know," went on Mr. Damon, +"also knows about the idol of gold, and is trying to get ahead of +Professor Bumper in the search."<br> +</p> + +"He did say something of it, but nothing was certain," remarked +Tom. <br> +<p>"But it is certain!" exclaimed Mr. Damon. "Bless my toothpick, +it's altogether too certain!"<br> +</p> + +"How is that?" asked Tom. "Is Beecher certainly going to +Honduras?" <br> +<p>"Yes, of course. But what is worse, he and his party will +leave New York on the same steamer with us!"<br> +</p> + +<br> +<h1 id="ref_7">CHAPTER VII</h1> + +TOM HEARS SOMETHING <br> +On hearing Mr. Damon's rather startling announcement, Tom and Ned +looked at one another. There seemed to be something back of the +simple statement--an ominous and portending "something." <br> +<p>"On the same steamer with us, is he?" mused Tom.<br> +</p> + +"How did you learn this?" asked Ned. <br> +<p>"Just got a wire from Professor Bumper telling me. He asked me +to telephone to you about it, as he was too busy to call up on +the long distance from New York. But instead of 'phoning I +decided to come over myself."<br> +</p> + +"Glad you did," said Tom, heartily. "Did Professor Bumper want us +to do anything special, now that it is certain his rival will be +so close on his trail?" <br> +<p>"Yes, he asked me to warn you to be careful what you did and +said in reference to the expedition."<br> +</p> + +"Then does he fear something?" asked Ned. <br> +<p>"Yes, in a way. I think he is very much afraid this young +Beecher will not only be first on the site of the underground +city, but that he may be the first to discover the idol of gold. +It would be a great thing for a young archaeologist like Beecher +to accomplish a mission of this sort, and beat Professor Bumper +in the race."<br> +</p> + +"Do you think that's why Beecher decided to go on the same +steamer we are to take?" asked Ned. <br> +<p>"Yes, I do," said Mr. Damon. "Though from what Professor +Bumper said I know he regards Professor Beecher as a perfectly +honorable man, as well as a brilliant student. I do not believe +Beecher or his party would stoop to anything dishonorable or +underhand, though they would not hesitate, nor would we, to take +advantage of every fair chance to win in the race."<br> +</p> + +"No, I suppose that's right," observed Tom; but there was a queer +gleam in his eye, and his chum wondered if Tom did not have in +mind the prospective race between himself and Fenimore Beecher +for the regard of Mary Nestor. "We'll do our best to win, and any +one is at liberty to travel on the same steamer we are to take," +added the young inventor, and his tone became more incisive. <br> +<p>"It will be all the livelier with two expeditions after the +same golden idol," remarked Ned.<br> +</p> + +"Yes, I think we're in for some excitement," observed Tom grimly. +But even he did not realize all that lay before them ere they +would reach Kurzon. <br> +<p>Mr. Damon, having delivered his message, and remarking that +his preparations for leaving were nearly completed, went back to +Waterfield, from there to proceed to New York in a few days with +Tom and Ned, to meet Professor Bumper.<br> +</p> + +"Well, I guess we have everything in pretty good shape," remarked +Tom to his chum a day or so after the visit of Mr. Damon. +"Everything is packed, and as I have a few personal matters to +attend to I think I'll take the afternoon off." <br> +<p>"Go to it!" laughed Ned, guessing a thing of two. "I've got a +raft of stuff myself to look after, but don't let that keep +you."<br> +</p> + +"If there is anything I can do," began Tom, "don't hesitate +to----" <br> +<p>"Nonsense!" exclaimed Ned. "I can do it all alone. It's some +of the company's business, anyhow, and I'm paid for looking after +that."<br> +</p> + +"All right, then I'll cut along," Tom said, and he wore a +relieved air. <br> +<p>"He's going to see Mary," observed Ned with a grin, as he +observed Tom hop into his trim little roadster, which under his +orders, Koku had polished and cleaned until it looked as though +it had just come from the factory.<br> +</p> + +A little later the trim and speedy car drew up in front of the +Nestor home, and Tom bounded up on the front porch, his heart not +altogether as light as his feet. <br> +<p>"No, I'm sorry, but Mary isn't in," said Mrs. Nestor, +answering his inquiry after greeting him.<br> +</p> + +"Not at home?" <br> +<p>"No, she went on a little visit to her cousin's at +Fayetteville. She said something about letting you know she was +going."<br> +</p> + +"She did drop me a card," answered Tom, and, somehow he did not +feel at all cheerful. "But I thought it wasn't until next week +she was going." <br> +<p>"That was her plan, Tom. But she changed it. Her cousin wired, +asking her to advance the date, and this Mary did. There was +something about a former school chum who was also to be at Myra's +house--Myra is Mary's cousin you know."<br> +</p> + +"Yes, I know," assented the young inventor. "And so Mary is gone. +How long is she going to stay?" <br> +<p>"Oh, about two weeks. She wasn't quite certain. It depends on +the kind of a time she has, I suppose."<br> +</p> + +"Yes, I suppose so," agreed Tom. "Well, if you write before I do +you might say I called, Mrs. Nestor." <br> +<p>"I will, Tom. And I know Mary will be sorry she wasn't here to +take a ride with you; it's such a nice day," and the lady smiled +as she looked at the speedy roadster.<br> +</p> + +"Maybe--maybe you'd like to come for a spin?" asked Tom, half +desperately. <br> +<p>"No, thank you. I'm too old to be jounced around in one of +those small cars."<br> +</p> + +"Nonsense! She rides as easily as a Pullman sleeper." <br> +<p>"Well, I have to go to a Red Cross meeting, anyhow, so I can't +come, Tom. Thank you, just the same."<br> +</p> + +Tom did not drive back immediately to his home. He wanted to do a +bit of thinking, and he believed he could do it best by himself. +So it was late afternoon when he again greeted Ned, who, +meanwhile, had been kept very busy. <br> +<p>"Well?" called Tom's chum.<br> +</p> + +"Um!" was the only answer, and Tom called Koku to put the car +away in the garage. <br> +<p>"Something wrong," mused Ned.<br> +</p> + +The next three days were crowded with events and with work. Mr. +Damon came over frequently to consult with Tom and Ned, and +finally the last of their baggage had been packed, certain of +Tom's inventions and implements sent on by express to New York to +be taken to Honduras, and then our friends themselves followed to +the metropolis. <br> +<p>"Good-bye, Tom," said his father. "Goodbye, and good luck! If +you don't get the idol of gold I'm sure you'll have experiences +that will be valuable to you."<br> +</p> + +"We're going to get the idol of gold!" said Tom determinedly. +<br> +<p>"Look out for the bad bugs," suggested Eradicate.<br> +</p> + +"We will," promised Ned. <br> +<p>Tom's last act was to send a message to Mary Nestor, and then +he, with Ned and Mr. Damon, who blessed everything in sight from +the gasoline in the automobile to the blue sky overhead, started +for the station.<br> +</p> + +New York was reached without incident. The trio put up at the +hotel where Professor Bumper was to meet them. <br> +<p>"He hasn't arrived yet," said Tom, after glancing over the +names on the hotel register and not seeing Professor Bumper's +among them.<br> +</p> + +"Oh, he'll be here all right," asserted Mr. Damon. "Bless my +galvanic battery! he sent me a telegram at one o'clock this +morning saying he'd be sure to meet us in New York. No fear of +him not starting for the land of wonders." <br> +<p>"There are some other professors registered, though," observed +Ned, as he glanced at the book, noting the names of several +scientists of whom he and Tom had read.<br> +</p> + +"Yes. I wonder what they're doing in New York," replied Tom. +"They are from New England. Maybe there's a convention going on. +Well, we'll have to wait, that's all, until Professor Bumper +comes." <br> +<p>And during that wait Tom heard something that surprised him +and caused him no little worry. It was when Ned came back to his +room, which adjoined Tom's, that the young treasurer gave his +chum the news.<br> +</p> + +"I say, Tom!" Ned exclaimed. "Who do you think those professors +are, whose names we saw on the register?" <br> +<p>"I haven't the least idea."<br> +</p> + +"Why, they're of Beecher's party!" <br> +<p>"You don't mean it!"<br> +</p> + +"I surely do." <br> +<p>"How do you know?"<br> +</p> + +"I happened to overhear two of them talking down in the lobby a +while ago. They didn't make any secret of it. They spoke freely +of going with Beecher to some ancient city in Honduras, to look +for an idol of gold." <br> +<p>"They did? But where is Beecher?"<br> +</p> + +"He hasn't joined them yet. Their plans have been changed. +Instead of leaving on the same steamer we are to take in the +morning they are to come on a later one. The professors here are +waiting for Beecher to come." <br> +<p>"Why isn't he here now?"<br> +</p> + +"Well, I heard one of the other scientists say that he had gone +to a place called Fayetteville, and will come on from there." +<br> +<p>"Fayetteville!" ejaculated Tom. "Yes. That isn't far from +Shopton."<br> +</p> + +"I know," assented Tom. "I wonder--I wonder why he is going +there?" <br> +<p>"I can tell you that, too."<br> +</p> + +"You can? You're a regular detective." <br> +<p>"No, I just happened to overhear it. Beecher is going to call +on Mary Nestor in Fayetteville, so his friends here said he told +them, and his call has to do with an important matter--to him!" +and Ned gazed curiously at his chum.<br> +</p> + +<br> +<h1 id="ref_8">CHAPTER VIII</h1> + +OFF FOR HONDURAS <br> +Just what Tom's thoughts were, Ned, of course, could not guess. +But by the flush that showed under the tan of his chum's cheeks +the young financial secretary felt pretty certain that Tom was a +bit apprehensive of the outcome of Professor Beecher's call on +Mary Nestor. <br> +<p>"So he is going to see her about `something important,' +Ned?"<br> +</p> + +"That's what some members of his party called it." <br> +<p>"And they're waiting here for him to join them?"<br> +</p> + +"Yes. And it means waiting a week for another steamer. It must be +something pretty important, don't you think, to cause Beecher to +risk that delay in starting after the idol of gold?" <br> +<p>"Important? Yes, I suppose so," assented Tom. "And yet even if +he waits for the next steamer he will get to Honduras nearly as +soon as we do."<br> +</p> + +"How is that?" <br> +<p>"The next boat is a faster one."<br> +</p> + +"Then why don't we take that? I hate dawdling along on a slow +freighter." <br> +<p>"Well, for one thing it would hardly do to change now, when +all our goods are on board. And besides, the captain of the +_Relstab_, on which we are going to sail, is a friend of +Professor Bumper's."<br> +</p> + +"Well, I'm just as glad Beecher and his party aren't going with +us," resumed Ned, after a pause. "It might make trouble." <br> +<p>"Oh, I'm ready for any trouble HE might make!" quickly +exclaimed Tom.<br> +</p> + +He meant trouble that might be developed in going to Honduras, +and starting the search for the lost city and the idol of gold. +This kind of trouble Tom and his friends had experienced before, +on other trips where rivals had sought to frustrate their ends. +<br> +<p>But, in his heart, though he said nothing to Ned about it, Tom +was worried. Much as he disliked to admit it to himself, he +feared the visit of Professor Beecher to Mary Nestor in +Fayetteville had but one meaning.<br> +</p> + +"I wonder if he's going to propose to her," thought Tom. "He has +the field all to himself now, and her father likes him. That's in +his favor. I guess Mr. Nestor has never quite forgiven me for +that mistake about the dynamite box, and that wasn't my fault. +Then, too, the Beecher and Nestor families have been friends for +years. Yes, he surely has the inside edge on me, and if he gets +her to throw me over---- Well, I won't give up without a fight!" +and Tom mentally girded himself for a battle of wits. <br> +<p>"He's relying on the prestige he'll get out of this idol of +gold if his party finds it," thought on the young inventor. "But +I'll help find it first. I'm glad to have a little start of him, +anyhow, even if it isn't more than two days. Though if our vessel +is held back much by storms he may get on the ground first. +However, that can't be helped. I'll do the best I can."<br> +</p> + +These thoughts shot through Tom's mind even as Ned was asking his +questions and making comments. Then the young inventor, shaking +his shoulders as though to rid them of some weight, remarked: +<br> +<p>"Well, come on out and see the sights. It will be long before +we look on Broadway again."<br> +</p> + +When the chums returned from their sightseeing excursion, they +found that Professor Bumper had arrived. <br> +<p>"Where's Professor Bumper?" asked Ned, the next day.<br> +</p> + +"In his room, going over books, papers and maps to make sure he +has everything." <br> +<p>"And Mr. Damon?"<br> +</p> + +Tom did not have to answer that last question. Into the apartment +came bursting the excited individual himself. <br> +<p>"Bless my overshoes!" he cried, "I've been looking everywhere +for you! Come on, there's no time to lose!"<br> +</p> + +"What's the matter now?" asked Ned. "Is the hotel on fire?" <br> +<p>"Has anything happened to Professor Bumper?" Tom demanded, a +wild idea forming in his head that perhaps some one of the +Beecher party had tried to kidnap the discoverer of the lost city +of Pelone.<br> +</p> + +"Oh, everything is all right," answered Mr. Damon. "But it's +nearly time for the show to start, and we don't want to be late. +I have tickets." <br> +<p>"For what?" asked Tom and Ned together.<br> +</p> + +"The movies," was the laughing reply. "Bless my loose ribs! but I +wouldn't miss him for anything. He's in a new play called `Up in +a Balloon Boys.' It's great!" and Mr. Damon named a certain comic +moving picture star in whose horse-play Mr. Damon took a curious +interest. Tom and Ned were glad enough to go, Tom that he might +have a chance to do a certain amount of thinking, and Ned because +he was still boy enough to like moving pictures. <br> +<p>"I wonder, Tom," said Mr. Damon, as they came out of the +theater two hours later, all three chuckling at the remembrance +of what they had seen, "I wonder you never turned your inventive +mind to the movies."<br> +</p> + +"Maybe I will, some day," said Tom. <br> +<p>He spoke rather uncertainly. The truth of the matter was that +he was still thinking deeply of the visit of Professor Beecher to +Mary Nestor, and wondering what it portended.<br> +</p> + +But if Tom's sleep was troubled that night he said nothing of it +to his friends. He was up early the next morning, for they were +to leave that day, and there was still considerable to be done in +seeing that their baggage and supplies were safely loaded, and in +attending to the last details of some business matters. <br> +<p>While at the hotel they had several glimpses of the members of +the Beecher party who were awaiting the arrival of the young +professor who was to lead them into the wilds of Honduras. But +our friends did not seek the acquaintance of their rivals. The +latter, likewise, remained by themselves, though they knew +doubtless that there was likely to be a strenuous race for the +possession of the idol of gold, then, it was presumed, buried +deep in some forest-covered city.<br> +</p> + +Professor Bumper had made his arrangements carefully. As he +explained to his friends, they would take the steamer from New +York to Puerto Cortes, one of the principal seaports of Honduras. +This is a town of about three thousand inhabitants, with an +excellent harbor and a big pier along which vessels can tie up +and discharge their cargoes directly into waiting cars. <br> +<p>The preparations were finally completed. The party went aboard +the steamer, which was a large freight vessel, carrying a limited +number of passengers, and late one afternoon swung down New York +Bay.<br> +</p> + +"Off for Honduras!" cried Ned gaily, as they passed the Statue of +Liberty. "I wonder what will happen before we see that little +lady again." <br> +<p>"Who knows?" asked Tom, shrugging his shoulders, Spanish +fashion. And there came before him the vision of a certain +"little lady," about whom he had been thinking deeply of +late.<br> +</p> + +<br> +<h1 id="ref_9">CHAPTER IX</h1> + +VAL JACINTO <br> +"Rather tame, isn't it, Tom?" <br> +<p>"Well, Ned, it isn't exactly like going up in an airship," and +Tom Swift who was gazing over the rail down into the deep blue +water of the Caribbean Sea, over which their vessel was then +steaming, looked at his chum beside him.<br> +</p> + +"No, and your submarine voyage had it all over this one for +excitement," went on Ned. "When I think of that----" <br> +<p>"Bless my sea legs!" interrupted Mr. Damon, overhearing the +conversation. "Don't speak of THAT trip. My wife never forgave me +for going on it. But I had a fine time," he added with a twinkle +of his eyes.<br> +</p> + +"Yes, that was quite a trip," observed Tom, as his mind went back +to it. "But this one isn't over yet remember. And I shouldn't be +surprised if we had a little excitement very soon." <br> +<p>"What do you mean?" asked Ned.<br> +</p> + +Up to this time the voyage from New York down into the tropical +seas had been anything but exciting. There were not many +passengers besides themselves, and the weather had been fine. +<br> +<p>At first, used as they were to the actions of unscrupulous +rivals in trying to thwart their efforts, Tom and Ned had been on +the alert for any signs of hidden enemies on board the steamer. +But aside from a little curiosity when it became known that they +were going to explore little-known portions of Honduras, the +other passengers took hardly any interest in our travelers.<br> +</p> + +It was thought best to keep secret the fact that they were going +to search for a wonderful idol of gold. Not even the mule and +ox-cart drivers, whom they would hire to take them into the wilds +of the interior would be told of the real object of the search. +It would be given out that they were looking for interesting +ruins of ancient cities, with a view to getting such antiquities +as might be there. <br> +<p>"What do you mean?" asked Ned again, when Tom did not answer +him immediately. "What's the excitement?"<br> +</p> + +"I think we're in for a storm," was the reply. "The barometer is +falling and I see the crew going about making everything snug. So +we may have a little trouble toward this end of our trip." <br> +<p>"Let it come!" exclaimed Mr. Damon. "We're not afraid of +trouble, Tom. Swift, are we?"<br> +</p> + +"No, to be sure we're not. And yet it looks as though the storm +would be a bad one." <br> +<p>"Then I am going to see if my books and papers are ready, so I +can get them together in a hurry in case we have to take to the +life-boats," said Professor Bumper, coming on deck at that +moment. "It won't do to lose them. If we didn't have the map we +might not be able to find----"<br> +</p> + +"Ahem!" exclaimed Tom, with unnecessary emphasis it seemed. "I'll +help you go over your papers, Professor," he added, and with a +wink and a motion of his hand, he enjoined silence on his friend. +Ned looked around for a reason for this, and observed a man, +evidently of Spanish extraction, passing them as he paced up and +down the deck. <br> +<p>"What's the matter?" asked the scientist in a whisper, as the +man went on. "Do you know him? Is he a----?"<br> +</p> + +"I don't know anything about him," said Tom; "but it is best not +to speak of our trip before strangers." <br> +<p>"You are right, Tom," said Professor Bumper. "I'll be more +careful."<br> +</p> + +A storm was brewing, that was certain. A dull, sickly yellow +began to obscure the sky, and the water, from a beautiful blue, +turned a slate color and ran along the sides of the vessel with a +hissing sound as though the sullen waves would ask nothing better +than to suck the craft down into their depths. The wind, which +had been freshening, now sang in louder tones as it hummed +through the rigging and the funnel stays and bowled over the +receiving conductors of the wireless. <br> +<p>Sharp commands from the ship's officers hastened the work of +the crew in making things snug, and life lines were strung along +deck for the safety of such of the passengers as might venture up +when the blow began.<br> +</p> + +The storm was not long in coming. The howling of the wind grew +louder, flecks of foam began to separate themselves from the +crests of the waves, and the vessel pitched, rolled and tossed +more violently. At first Tom and his friends thought they were in +for no more than an ordinary blow, but as the storm progressed, +and the passengers became aware of the anxiety on the part of the +officers and crew, the alarm spread among them. <br> +<p>It really was a violent storm, approaching a hurricane in +force, and at one time it seemed as though the craft, having been +heeled far over under a staggering wave that swept her decks, +would not come back to an even keel.<br> +</p> + +There was a panic among some of the passengers, and a few excited +men behaved in a way that caused prompt action on the part of the +first officer, who drove them back to the main cabin under threat +of a revolver. For the men were determined to get to the +lifeboats, and a small craft would not have had a minute to live +in such seas as were running. <br> +<p>But the vessel proved herself sturdier than the timid ones had +dared to hope, and she was soon running before the blast, going +out of her course, it is true, but avoiding the danger among the +many cays, or small islands, that dot the Caribbean Sea.<br> +</p> + +There was nothing to do but to let the storm blow itself out, +which it did in two days. Then came a period of delightful +weather. The cargo had shifted somewhat, which gave the steamer a +rather undignified list. <br> +<p>This, as well as the loss of a deckhand overboard, was the +effect of the hurricane, and though the end of the trip came amid +sunshine and sweet-scented tropical breezes, many could not +forget the dangers through which they had passed.<br> +</p> + +In due time Tom and his party found themselves safely housed in +the small hotel at Puerto Cortes, their belongings stored in a +convenient warehouse and themselves, rather weary by reason of +the stress of weather, ready for the start into the interior +wilds of Honduras. <br> +<p>"How are we going to make the trip?" asked Ned, as they sat at +supper, the first night after their arrival, eating of several +dishes, the redpepper condiments of which caused frequent trips +to the water pitcher.<br> +</p> + +"We can go in two ways, and perhaps we shall find it to our +advantage to use both means," said Professor Bumper. "To get to +this city of Kurzon," he proceeded in a low voice, so that none +of the others in the dining-room would hear them, "we will have +to go either by mule back or boat to a point near Copan. As near +as I can tell by the ancient maps, Kurzon is in the Copan valley. +<br> +<p>"Now the Chamelecon river seems to run to within a short +distance of there, but there is no telling how far up it may be +navigable. If we can go by boat it will be much more comfortable. +Travel by mules and ox-carts is slow and sure, but the roads are +very bad, as I have heard from friends who have made explorations +in Honduras.<br> +</p> + +"And, as I said, we may have to use both land and water travel to +get us where we want to go. We can proceed as far as possible up +the river, and then take to the mules." <br> +<p>"What about arranging for boats and animals?" asked Tom. "I +should think----"<br> +</p> + +He suddenly ceased talking and reached for the water, taking +several large swallows. <br> +<p>"Whew!" he exclaimed, when he could catch his breath. "That +was a hot one."<br> +</p> + +"What did you do?" asked Ned. <br> +<p>"Bit into a nest of red pepper. Guess I'll have to tell that +cook to scatter his hits. He's bunching 'em too much in my +direction," and Tom wiped the tears from his eyes.<br> +</p> + +"To answer your question," said Professor Bumper, "I will say +that I have made partial arrangements for men and animals, and +boats if it is found feasible to use them. I've been in +correspondence with one of the merchants here, and he promised to +make arrangements for us." <br> +<p>"When do we leave?" asked Mr. Damon.<br> +</p> + +"As soon as possible. I am not going to risk anything by delay," +and it was evident the professor referred to his young rival +whose arrival might be expected almost any time. <br> +<p>As the party was about to leave the table, they were +approached by a tall, dignified Spaniard who bowed low, rather +exaggeratedly low, Ned thought, and addressed them in fairly good +English.<br> +</p> + +"Your pardons, Senors," he began, "but if it will please you to +avail yourself of the humble services of myself, I shall have +great pleasure in guiding you into the interior. I have at my +command both mules and boats." <br> +<p>"How do you know we are going into the interior?" asked Tom, a +bit sharply, for he did not like the assurance of the man.<br> +</p> + +"Pardon, Senor. I saw that you are from the States. And those +from the States do not come to Honduras except for two reasons. +To travel and make explorations or to start trade, and professors +do not usually engage in trade," and he bowed to Professor +Bumper. <br> +<p>"I saw your name on the register," he proceeded, "and it was +not difficult to guess your mission," and he flashed a smile on +the party, his white teeth showing brilliantly beneath his small, +black moustache.<br> +</p> + +"I make it my business to outfit traveling parties, either for +business, pleasure or scientific matters. I am, at your service, +Val Jacinto," and he introduced himself with another low bow. +<br> +<p>For a moment Tom and his friends hardly knew how to accept +this offer. It might be, as the man had said, that he was a +professional tour conductor, like those who have charge of +Egyptian donkey-boys and guides. Or might he not be a spy?<br> +</p> + +This occurred to Tom no less than to Professor Bumper. They +looked at one another while Val Jacinto bowed again and murmured: +<br> +<p>"At your service!"<br> +</p> + +"Can you provide means for taking us to the Copan valley?" asked +the professor. "You are right in one respect. I am a scientist +and I purpose doing some exploring near Copan. Can you get us +there?" <br> +<p>"Most expensively--I mean, most expeditionlessly," said Val +Jacinto eagerly. "Pardon my unhappy English. I forget at times. +The charges will be most moderate. I can send you by boat as far +as the river travel is good, and then have mules and ox-carts in +waiting."<br> +</p> + +"How far is it?" asked Tom. <br> +<p>"A hundred miles as the vulture flies, Senor, but much farther +by river and road. We shall be a week going."<br> +</p> + +"A hundred miles in a week!" groaned Ned. "Say, Tom, if you had +your aeroplane we'd be there in an hour." <br> +<p>"Yes, but we haven't it. However, we're in no great rush."<br> +</p> + +"But we must not lose time," said Professor Bumper. "I shall +consider your offer," he added to Val Jacinto. <br> +<p>"Very good, Senor. I am sure you will be pleased with the +humble service I may offer you, and my charges will be small. +Adios," and he bowed himself away.<br> +</p> + +"What do you think of him?" asked Ned, as they went up to their +rooms in the hotel, or rather one large room, containing several +beds. <br> +<p>"He's a pretty slick article," said Mr. Damon. "Bless my +check-book! but he spotted us at once, in spite of our +secrecy."<br> +</p> + +"I guess these guide purveyors are trained for that sort of +thing," observed the scientist. "I know my friends have often +spoken of having had the same experience. However, I shall ask my +friend, who is in business here, about this Val Jacinto, and if I +find him all right we may engage him " <br> +<p>Inquiries next morning brought the information, from the head +of a rubber exporting firm with whom the professor was +acquainted, that the Spaniard was regularly engaged in +transporting parties into the interior, and was considered +efficient, careful and as honest as possible, considering the men +he engaged as workers.<br> +</p> + +"So we have decided to engage you," Professor Bumper informed Val +Jacinto the afternoon following the meeting. <br> +<p>"I am more than pleased, Senor. I shall take you into the +wilds of Honduras. At your service!" and he bowed low.<br> +</p> + +"Humph! I don't just like the way our friend Val says that," +observed Tom to Ned a little later. "I'd have been better pleased +if he had said he'd guide us into the wilds and out again." <br> +<p>If Tom could have seen the crafty smile on the face of the +Spaniard as the man left the hotel, the young inventor might have +felt even less confidence in the guide.<br> +</p> + +<br> +<h1 id="ref_10">CHAPTER X</h1> + +IN THE WILDS <br> +"All aboard! Step lively now! This boat makes no stops this side +of Boston!" cried Ned Newton gaily, as he got into one of the +several tree canoes provided for the transportation of the party +up the Chamelecon river, for the first stage of their journey +into the wilds of Honduras. "All aboard! This reminds me of my +old camping days, Tom." <br> +<p>It brought those days back, in a measure, to Tom also. For +there were a number of canoes filled with the goods of the party, +while the members themselves occupied a larger one with their +personal baggage. Strong, half-naked Indian paddlers were in +charge of the canoes which were of sturdy construction and light +draft, since the river, like most tropical streams, was of +uncertain depths, choked here and there with sand bars or +tropical growths.<br> +</p> + +Finding that Val Jacinto was regularly engaged in the business of +taking explorers and mine prospectors into the interior, +Professor Bumper had engaged the man. He seemed to be efficient. +At the promised time he had the canoes and paddlers on hand and +the goods safely stowed away while one big craft was fitted up as +comfortably as possible for the men of the party. <br> +<p>As Ned remarked, it did look like a camping party, for in the +canoes were tents, cooking utensils and, most important, mosquito +canopies of heavy netting.<br> +</p> + +The insect pests of Honduras, as in all tropical countries, are +annoying and dangerous. Therefore it was imperative to sleep +under mosquito netting. <br> +<p>On the advice of Val Jacinto, who was to accompany them, the +travelers were to go up the river about fifty miles. This was as +far as it would be convenient to use the canoes, the guide told +Tom and his friends, and from there on the trip to the Copan +valley would be made on the backs of mules, which would carry +most of the baggage and equipment. The heavier portions would be +transported in ox-carts.<br> +</p> + +As Professor Bumper expected to do considerable excavating in +order to locate the buried city, or cities, as the case might be, +he had to contract for a number of Indian diggers and laborers. +These could be hired in Copan, it was said. <br> +<p>The plan, therefore, was to travel by canoes during the less +heated parts of the day, and tie up at night, making camp on +shore in the netprotected tents. As for the Indians, they did not +seem to mind the bites of the insects. They sometimes made a +smudge fire, Val Jacinto had said, but that was all.<br> +</p> + +"Well, we haven't seen anything of Beecher and his friends," +remarked the young inventor as they were about to start. <br> +<p>"No, he doesn't seem to have arrived," agreed Professor +Bumper. "We'll get ahead of him, and so much the better.<br> +</p> + +"Well, are we all ready to start?" he continued, as he looked +over the little flotilla which carried his party and his goods. +<br> +<p>"The sooner the better!" cried Tom, and Ned fancied his chum +was unusually eager.<br> +</p> + +"I guess he wants to make good before Beecher gets the chance to +show Mary Nestor what he can do," thought Ned. "Tom sure is after +that idol of gold." <br> +<p>"You may start, Senor Jacinto," said the professor, and the +guide called something in Indian dialect to the rowers. Lines +were cast off and the boats moved out into the stream under the +influence of the sturdy paddlers.<br> +</p> + +"Well, this isn't so bad," observed Ned, as he made himself +comfortable in his canoe. "How about it, Tom?" <br> +<p>"Oh, no. But this is only the beginning."<br> +</p> + +A canopy had been arranged over their boat to keep off the +scorching rays of the sun. The boat containing the exploring +party and Val Jacinto took the lead, the baggage craft following. +At the place where it flowed into the bay on which Puerto Cortes +was built, the stream was wide and deep. <br> +<p>The guide called something to the Indians, who increased their +stroke.<br> +</p> + +"I tell them to pull hard and that at the end of the day's +journey they will have much rest and refreshment," he translated +to Professor Bumper and the others. <br> +<p>"Bless my ham sandwich, but they'll need plenty of some sort +of refreshment," said Mr. Damon, with a sigh. "I never knew it to +be so hot."<br> +</p> + +"Don't complain yet," advised Tom, with a laugh. "The worst is +yet to come." <br> +<p>It really was not unpleasant traveling, aside from the heat. +And they had expected that, coming as they had to a tropical +land. But, as Tom said, what lay before them might be worse.<br> +</p> + +In a little while they had left behind them all signs of +civilization. The river narrowed and flowed sluggishly between +the banks which were luxuriant with tropical growth. Now and then +some lonely Indian hut could be seen, and occasionally a craft +propelled by a man who was trying to gain a meager living from +the rubber forest which hemmed in the stream on either side. <br> +<p>As the canoe containing the men was paddled along, there +floated down beside it what seemed to be a big, rough log.<br> +</p> + +"I wonder if that is mahogany," remarked Mr. Damon, reaching over +to touch it. "Mahogany is one of the most valuable woods of +Honduras, and if this is a log of that nature--- "Bless my watch +chain!" he suddenly cried. It's alive!" <br> +<p>And the "log" was indeed so, for there was a sudden flash of +white teeth, a long red opening showed, and then came a click as +an immense alligator, having opened and closed his mouth, sank +out of sight in a swirl of water.<br> +</p> + +Mr. Damon drew back so suddenly that he tilted the canoe, and the +black paddlers looked around wonderingly. <br> +<p>"Alligator," explained Jacinto succinctly, in their +tongue.<br> +</p> + +"Ugh!" they grunted. <br> +<p>"Bless my--bless my----" hesitated Mr. Damon, and for one of +the very few times in his life his language failed him.<br> +</p> + +"Are there many of them hereabouts?" asked Ned, looking back at +the swirl left by the saurian. <br> +<p>"Plenty," said the guide, with a shrug of his shoulders. He +seemed to do as much talking that way, and with his hands, as he +did in speech. "The river is full of them."<br> +</p> + +"Dangerous?" queried Tom. <br> +<p>"Don't go in swimming," was the significant advice. "Wait, +I'll show you," and he called up the canoe just behind.<br> +</p> + +In this canoe was a quantity of provisions. There was a chunk of +meat among other things, a gristly piece, seeing which Mr. Damon +had objected to its being brought along, but the guide had said +it would do for fish bait. With a quick motion of his hand, as he +sat in the awningcovered stern with Tom, Ned and the others, +Jacinto sent the chunk of meat out into the muddy stream. <br> +<p>Hardly a second later there was a rushing in the water as +though a submarine were about to come up. An ugly snout was +raised, two rows of keen teeth snapped shut as a scissorslike jaw +opened, and the meat was gone.<br> +</p> + +"See!" was the guide's remark, and something like a cold shiver +of fear passed over the white members of the party. "This water +is not made in which to swim. Be careful!" <br> +<p>"We certainly shall," agreed Tom. "They're fierce."<br> +</p> + +"And always hungry," observed Jacinto grimly. <br> +<p>"And to think that I--that I nearly had my hand on it," +murmured Mr. Damon. "Ugh! Bless my eyeglasses!"<br> +</p> + +"The alligator nearly had your hand," said the guide. "They can +turn in the water like a flash, wherefore it is not wise to pat +one on the tail lest it present its mouth instead." <br> +<p>They paddled on up the river, the dusky Indians now and then +breaking out into a chant that seemed to give their muscles new +energy. The song, if song it was, passed from one boat to the +other, and as the chant boomed forth the craft shot ahead more +swiftly.<br> +</p> + +They made a landing about noon, and lunch was served. Tom and his +friends were hungry in spite of the heat. Moreover, they were +experienced travelers and had learned not to fret over +inconveniences and discomforts. the Indians ate by themselves, +two acting as servants to Jacinto and the professor's party. <br> +<p>As is usual in traveling in the tropics, a halt was made +during the heated middle of the day. Then, as the afternoon +shadows were waning, the party again took to the canoes and +paddled on up the river.<br> +</p> + +"Do you know of a good place to stop during the night?" asked +Professor Bumper of Jacinto. <br> +<p>"Oh, yes; a most excellent place. It is where I always bring +scientific parties I am guiding. You may rely on me."<br> +</p> + +It was within an hour of dusk--none too much time to allow in +which to pitch camp in the tropics, where night follows day +suddenly--when a halt was called, as a turn of the river showed a +little clearing on the edge of the forest-bound river. <br> +<p>"We stay here for the night," said Jacinto. "It is a good +place."<br> +</p> + +"It looks picturesque enough," observed Mr. Damon. "But it is +rather wild." <br> +<p>"We are a good distance from a settlement," agreed the guide. +"But one can not explore-and find treasure in cities," and he +shrugged his shoulders again.<br> +</p> + +"Find treasure? What do you mean?" asked Tom quickly. "Do you +think that we----?" <br> +<p>"Pardon, Senor," replied Jacinto softly. "I meant no offense. +I think that all you scientific parties will take treasure if you +can find it."<br> +</p> + +"We are looking for traces of the old Honduras civilization," put +in Professor Bumper. <br> +<p>"And doubtless you will find it," was the somewhat too +courteous answer of the guide. "Make camp quickly!" he called to +the Indians in their tongue. "You must soon get under the nets or +you will be eaten alive!" he told Tom. "There are many mosquitoes +here."<br> +</p> + +The tents were set up, smudge fires built and supper quickly +prepared. Dusk fell rapidly, and as Tom and Ned walked a little +way down toward the river before turning in under the mosquito +canopies, the young financial man said: <br> +<p>"Sort of lonesome and gloomy, isn't it, Tom?"<br> +</p> + +"Yes. But you didn't expect to find a moving picture show in the +wilds of Honduras, did you?" <br> +<p>"No, and yet-- Look out! What's that?" suddenly cried Ned, as +a great soft, black shadow seemed to sweep out of a clump of +trees toward him. Involuntarily he clutched Tom's arm and +pointed, his face showing fear in the fast-gathering +darkness.<br> +</p> + +<br> +<h1 id="ref_11">CHAPTER XI</h1> + +THE VAMPIRES <br> +Tom Swift looked deliberately around. It was characteristic of +him that, though by nature he was prompt in action, he never +acted so hurriedly as to obscure his judgment. So, though now Ned +showed a trace of strange excitement, Tom was cool. <br> +<p>"What is it?" asked the young inventor. "What's the matter? +What did you think you saw, Ned; another alligator?"<br> +</p> + +"Alligator? Nonsense! Up on shore? I saw a black shadow, and I +didn't THINK I saw it, either. I really did." <br> +<p>Tom laughed quietly.<br> +</p> + +"A shadow!" he exclaimed. "Since when were you afraid of shadows, +Ned?" <br> +<p>"I'm not afraid of ordinary shadows," answered Ned, and in his +voice there was an uncertain tone. "I'm not afraid of my shadow +or yours, Tom, or anybody's that I can see. But this wasn't any +human shadow. It was as if a great big blob of wet darkness had +been waved over your head."<br> +</p> + +"That's a queer explanation," Tom said in a low voice. "A great +big blob of wet darkness!" <br> +<p>"But that just describes it," went on Ned, looking up and +around. "It was just as if you were in some dark room, and some +one waved a wet velvet cloak over your head--spooky like! It +didn't make a sound, but there was a smell as if a den of some +wild beast was near here. I remember that odor from the time we +went hunting with your electric rifle in the jungle, and got near +the den in the rocks where the tigers lived."<br> +</p> + +"Well, there is a wild beast smell all around here," admitted +Tom, sniffing the air. "It's the alligators in the river I guess. +You know they have an odor of musk." <br> +<p>"Do you mean to say you didn't feel that shadow flying over us +just now?" asked Ned.<br> +</p> + +"Well, I felt something sail through the air, but I took it to be +a big bird. I didn't pay much attention. To tell you the truth I +was thinking about Beecher--wondering when he would get here," +added Tom quickly as if to forestall any question as to whether +or not his thoughts had to do with Beecher in connection with +Tom's affair of the heart. <br> +<p>"Well it wasn't a bird--at least not a regular bird," said Ned +in a low voice, as once more he looked at the dark and gloomy +jungle that stretched back from the river and behind the little +clearing where the camp had been made.<br> +</p> + +"Come on!" cried Tom, in what he tried to make a cheerful voice. +"This is getting on your nerves, Ned, and I didn't know you had +any. Let's go back and turn in. I'm dog-tired and the mosquitoes +are beginning to find that we're here. Let's get under the nets. +Then the black shadows won't get you." <br> +<p>Not at all unwilling to leave so gloomy a scene, Ned, after a +brief glance up and down the dark river, followed his chum. They +found Professor Bumper and Mr. Damon in their tent, a separate +one having been set up for the two men adjoining that of the +youths.<br> +</p> + +"Bless my fountain pen!" exclaimed Mr. Damon, as he caught sight +of Tom and Ned in the flickering light of the smudge fire between +the two canvas shelters. "We were just wondering what had become +of you." <br> +<p>"We were chasing shadows!" laughed Tom. "At least Ned was. But +you look cozy enough in there."<br> +</p> + +It did, indeed, look cheerful in contrast to the damp and dark +jungle all about. Professor Bumper, being an experienced +traveler, knew how to provide for such comforts as were possible. +Folding cots had been opened for himself, Mr. Damon and the guide +to sleep on, others, similar, being set up in the tent where Tom +and Ned were to sleep. In the middle of the tent the professor +had made a table of his own and Mr. Damon's suit cases, and on +this placed a small dry battery electric light. He was making +some notes, doubtless for a future book. Jacinto was going about +the camp, seeing that the Indians were at their duties, though +most of them had gone directly to sleep after supper. <br> +<p>"Better get inside and under the nets," advised Professor +Bumper to Tom and Ned. "The mosquitoes here are the worst I ever +saw."<br> +</p> + +"We're beginning to believe that," returned Ned, who was +unusually quiet. "Come on, Tom. I can't stand it any longer. I'm +itching in a dozen places now from their bites." <br> +<p>As Tom and Ned had no wish for a light, which would be sure to +attract insects, they entered their tent in the dark, and were +soon stretched out in comparative comfort. Tom was just on the +edge of a deep sleep when he heard Ned murmur:<br> +</p> + +"I can't understand it!" <br> +<p>"What's that?" asked the young inventor.<br> +</p> + +"I say I can't understand it." <br> +<p>"Understand what?"<br> +</p> + +"That shadow. It was real and yet----" <br> +<p>"Oh, go to sleep!" advised Tom, and, turning over, he was soon +breathing heavily and regularly, indicating that he, at least, +had taken his own advice.<br> +</p> + +Ned, too, finally succumbed to the overpowering weariness of the +first day of travel, and he, too, slept, though it was an uneasy +slumber, disturbed by a feeling as though some one were holding a +heavy black quilt over his head, preventing him from breathing. +<br> +<p>The feeling, sensation or dream--whatever it was--perhaps a +nightmare--became at last so real to Ned that he struggled +himself into wakefulness. With an effort he sat up, uttering an +inarticulate cry. To his surprise he was answered. Some one +asked:<br> +</p> + +"What is the matter?" <br> +<p>"Who--who are you?" asked Ned quickly, trying to peer through +the darkness.<br> +</p> + +"This is Jacinto--your guide," was the soft answer. "I was +walking about camp and, hearing you murmuring, I came to your +tent. Is anything wrong?" <br> +<p>For a moment Ned did not answer. He listened and could tell by +the continued heavy and regular breathing of his chum that Tom +was still asleep.<br> +</p> + +"Are you in our tent?" asked Ned, at length: <br> +<p>"Yes," answered Jacinto. "I came in to see what was the matter +with you. Are you ill?"<br> +</p> + +"No, of course not," said Ned, a bit shortly. "I--I had a bad +dream, that was all. All right now." <br> +<p>"For that I am glad. Try to get all the sleep you can, for we +must start early to avoid the heat of the day," and there was the +sound of the guide leaving and arranging the folds of the +mosquito net behind him to keep out the nightflying insects.<br> +</p> + +Once more Ned composed himself to sleep, and this time +successfully, for he did not have any more unpleasant dreams. The +quiet of the jungle settled down over the camp, at least the +comparative quiet of the jungle, for there were always noises of +some sort going on, from the fall of some rotten tree limb to the +scream or growl of a wild beast, while, now and again, from the +river came the pig-like grunts of the alligators. <br> +<p>It was about two o'clock in the morning, as they ascertained +later, when the whole camp-white travelers and all--was suddenly +awakened by a wild scream. It seemed to come from one of the +natives, who called out a certain word ever and over again. To +Tom and Ned it sounded like:<br> +</p> + +"Oshtoo! Oshtoo! Oshtoo!" <br> +<p>"What's the matter?" cried Professor Bumper.<br> +</p> + +"The vampires!" came the answering voice of Jacinto. "One of the +Indians has been attacked by a big vampire bat! Look out, every +one! It may be a raid by the dangerous creatures! Be careful!" +<br> +<p>Notwithstanding this warning Ned stuck his head out of the +tent. The same instant he was aware of a dark enfolding shadow +passing over him, and, with a shudder of fear, he jumped +back.<br> +</p> + +<br> +<h1 id="ref_12">CHAPTER XII</h1> + +A FALSE FRIEND <br> +"What is it? What's the matter?" cried Tom springing from his cot +and hastening to the side of his chum in the tent. "What has +happened, Ned?" <br> +<p>"I don't know, but Jacinto is yelling something about +vampires!"<br> +</p> + +"Vampires?" <br> +<p>"Yes. Big bats. And he's warning us to be careful. I stuck my +head out just now and I felt that same sort of shadow I felt this +evening when we were down near the river."<br> +</p> + +"Nonsense!" <br> +<p>"I tell you I did!"<br> +</p> + +At that instant Tom flashed a pocket electric lamp he had taken +from beneath his pillow and in the gleam of it he and Ned saw +fluttering about the tent some dark, shadow-like form, at the +sight of which Tom's chum cried: <br> +<p>"There it is! That's the shadow! Look out!" and he held up his +hands instinctively to shield his face.<br> +</p> + +"Shadow!" yelled Tom, unconsciously adding to the din that seemed +to pervade every part of the camp. "That isn't a shadow. It's +substance. It's a monster bat, and here goes for a strike at it!" +<br> +<p>He caught up his camera tripod which was near his cot, and +made a swing with it at the creature that had flown into the tent +through an opening it had made for itself.<br> +</p> + +"Look out!" yelled Ned. "If it's a vampire it'll----" <br> +<p>"It won't do anything to me!" shouted Tom, as he struck the +creature, knocking it into the corner of the tent with a thud +that told it must be completely stunned, if not killed. "But +what's it all about, anyhow?" Tom asked. "What's the row?"<br> +</p> + +From without the tent came the Indian cries of: <br> +<p>"Oshtoo! Oshtoo!"<br> +</p> + +Mingled with them were calls of Jacinto, partly in Spanish, +partly in the Indian tongue and partly in English. <br> +<p>"It is a raid by vampire bats!" was all Tom and Ned could +distinguish. "We shall have to light fires to keep them away, if +we can succeed. Every one grab up a club and strike hard!"<br> +</p> + +"Come on!" cried Tom, getting on some clothes by the light of his +gleaming electric light which he had set on his cot. <br> +<p>"You're not going out there, are you?" asked Ned.<br> +</p> + +"I certainly am! If there's a fight I want to be in it, bats or +anything else. Here, you have a light like mine. Flash it on, and +hang it somewhere on yourself. Then get a club and come on. The +lights will blind the bats, and we can see to hit 'em!" <br> +<p>Tom's plan seemed to be a good one. His lamp and Ned's had +small hooks on them, so they could be carried in the upper coat +pocket, showing a gleam of light and leaving the hands free for +use.<br> +</p> + +Out of the tents rushed the young men to find Professor Bumper +and Mr. Damon before them. The two men had clubs and were +striking about in the half darkness, for now the Indians had set +several fires aglow. And in the gleams, constantly growing +brighter as more fuel was piled on, the young inventor and his +chum saw a weird sight. <br> +<p>Circling and wheeling about in the camp clearing were many of +the black shadowy forms that had caused Ned such alarm. Great +bats they were, and a dangerous species, if Jacinto was to be +believed.<br> +</p> + +The uncanny creatures flew in and out among the trees and tents, +now swooping low near the Indians or the travelers. At such times +clubs would be used, often with the effect of killing or stunning +the flying pests. For a time it seemed as if the bats would +fairly overwhelm the camp, so many of them were there. But the +increasing lights, and the attacks made by the Indians and the +white travelers turned the tide of battle, and, with silent +flappings of their soft, velvety wings, the bats flew back to the +jungle whence they had emerged. <br> +<p>"We are safe--for the present!" exclaimed Jacinto with a sigh +of relief.<br> +</p> + +"Do you think they will come back?" asked Tom. <br> +<p>"They may--there is no telling."<br> +</p> + +"Bless my speedometer!" cried Mr. Damon, "If those beasts or +birds--whatever they are-come back I'll go and hide in the river +and take my chances with the alligators!" <br> +<p>"The alligators aren't much worse," asserted Jacinto with a +visible shiver. "These vampire bats sometimes depopulate a whole +village."<br> +</p> + +"Bless my shoe laces!" cried Mr. Damon. "You don't mean to say +that the creatures can eat up a whole village?" <br> +<p>"Not quite. Though they might if they got the chance," was the +answer of the Spanish guide. "These vampire bats fly from place +to place in great swarms, and they are so large and blood-thirsty +that a few of them can kill a horse or an ox in a short time by +sucking its blood. So when the villagers find they are visited by +a colony of these vampires they get out, taking their live stock +with them, and stay in caves or in densely wooded places until +the bats fly on. Then the villagers come back.<br> +</p> + +"It was only a small colony that visited us tonight or we would +have had more trouble. I do not think this lot will come back. We +have killed too many of them," and he looked about on the ground +where many of the uncanny creatures were still twitching in the +death struggle. <br> +<p>"Come back again!" cried Mr. Damon. "Bless my skin! I hope +not! I've had enough of bats-and mosquitoes," he added, as he +slapped at his face and neck.<br> +</p> + +Indeed the party of whites were set upon by the night insects to +such an extent that it was necessary to hurry back to the +protection of the nets. <br> +<p>Tom and Ned kicked outside the bat the former had killed in +their tent, and then both went back to their cots. But it was +some little time before they fell asleep. And they did not have +much time to rest, for an early start must be made to avoid the +terrible heat of the middle of the day.<br> +</p> + +"Whew!" whistled Ned, as he and Tom arose in the gray dawn of the +morning when Jacinto announced the breakfast which the Indian +cook had prepared. "That was some night! If this is a sample of +the wilds of Honduras, give me the tameness of Shopton." <br> +<p>"Oh, we've gone through with worse than this," laughed Tom. +"It's all in the day's work. We've only got started. I guess +we're a bit soft, Ned, though we had hard enough work in that +tunnel-digging."<br> +</p> + +After breakfast, while the Indians were making ready the canoes, +Professor Bumper, who, in a previous visit to Central America, +had become interested in the subject, made a brief examination of +some of the dead bats. They were exceptionally large, some almost +as big as hawks. and were of the sub-family _Desmodidae_, the +scientist said. <br> +<p>"This is a true blood-sucking bat," went on the professor. +"This," and he pointed to the nose-leaves, "is the sucking +apparatus. The bat makes an opening in the skin with its sharp +teeth and proceeds to extract the blood. I can well believe two +or three of them, attacking a steer or mule at once, could soon +weaken it so the animal would die."<br> +</p> + +"And a man, too?" asked Ned. <br> +<p>"Well a man has hands with which to use weapons, but a +helpless quadruped has not. Though if a sufficient number of +these bats attacked a man at the same time, he would have small +chance to escape alive. Their bites, too, may be poisonous for +all I know."<br> +</p> + +The Indians seemed glad to leave the "place of the bats," as they +called the camp site. Jacinto explained that the Indians believed +a vampire could kill them while they slept, and they were very +much afraid of the blood-sucking bats. There were many other +species in the tropics, Professor Bumper explained, most of which +lived on fruit or on insects they caught. The blood-sucking bats +were comparatively few, and the migratory sort fewer still. <br> +<p>"Well, we're on our way once more," remarked Tom as again they +were in the canoes being paddled up the river. "How much longer +does your water trip take, Professor?"<br> +</p> + +"I hardly know," and Professor Bumper looked to Jacinto to +answer. <br> +<p>"We go two more days in the canoes," the guide answered, "and +then we shall find the mules waiting for us at a place called +Hidjio. From then on we travel by land until--well until you get +to the place where you are going.<br> +</p> + +"I suppose you know where it is?" he added, nodding toward the +professor. "I am leaving that part to you." <br> +<p>"Oh, I have a map, showing where I want to begin some +excavations," was the answer. "We must first go to Copan and see +what arrangements we can make for laborers. After that--well, we +shall trust to luck for what we shall find."<br> +</p> + +"There are said to be many curious things," went on Jacinto, +speaking as though he had no interest. "You have mentioned buried +cities. Have you thought what may be in them--great heathen +temples, idols, perhaps?" <br> +<p>For a moment none of the professor's companions spoke. It was +as though Jacinto had tried to get some information. Finally the +scientist said:<br> +</p> + +"Oh, yes, we may find an idol. I understand the ancient people, +who were here long before the Spaniards came, worshiped idols. +But we shall take whatever antiquities we find." <br> +<p>"Huh!" grunted Jacinto, and then he called to the paddlers to +increase their strokes.<br> +</p> + +The journey up the river was not very eventful. Many alligators +were seen, and Tom and Ned shot several with the electric rifle. +Toward the close of the third day's travel there was a cry from +one of the rear boats, and an alarm of a man having fallen +overboard was given. <br> +<p>Tom turned in time to see the poor fellow's struggles, and at +the same time there was a swirl in the water and a black object +shot forward.<br> +</p> + +"An alligator is after him!" yelled Ned. <br> +<p>"I see," observed Tom calmly. "Hand me the rifle, Ned."<br> +</p> + +Tom took quick aim and pulled the trigger. The explosive electric +bullet went true to its mark, and the great animal turned over in +a death struggle. But the river was filled with them, and no +sooner had the one nearest the unfortunate Indian been disposed +of than another made a dash for the man. <br> +<p>There was a wild scream of agony and then a dark arm shot up +above the red foam. The waters seethed and bubbled as the +alligators fought under it for possession of the paddler. Tom +fired bullet after bullet from his wonderful rifle into the spot, +but though he killed some of the alligators this did not save the +man's life. His body was not seen again, though search was made +for it.<br> +</p> + +The accident cast a little damper over the party, and there was a +feeling of gloom among the Indians. Professor Bumper announced +that he would see to it that the man's family did not want, and +this seemed to give general satisfaction, especially to a brother +who was with the party. <br> +<p>Aside from being caught in a drenching storm and one or two +minor accidents, nothing else of moment marked the remainder of +the river journey, and at the end of the third day the canoes +pulled to shore and a night camp was made.<br> +</p> + +"But where are the mules we are to use in traveling to-morrow?" +asked the professor of Jacinto. <br> +<p>"In the next village. We shall march there in the morning. No +use to go there at night when all is dark."<br> +</p> + +"I suppose that is so." <br> +<p>The Indians made camp as usual, the goods being brought from +the canoes and piled up near the tents. Then night settled +down.<br> +</p> + +"Hello!" cried Tom, awakening the next morning to find the sun +streaming into his tent. "We must have overslept, Ned. We were to +start before old Sol got in his heavy work, but we haven't had +breakfast yet." <br> +<p>"I didn't hear any one call us," remarked Ned.<br> +</p> + +"Nor I. Wonder if we're the only lazy birds." He looked from the +tent in time to see Mr. Damon and the professor emerging. Then +Tom noticed something queer. The canoes were not on the river +bank. There was not an Indian in sight, and no evidence of +Jacinto. <br> +<p>"What's the matter?" asked the young inventor. "Have the +others gone on ahead?"<br> +</p> + +"I rather think they've gone back," was the professor's dry +comment. <br> +<p>"Gone back?"<br> +</p> + +"Yes. The Indians seem to have deserted us at the ending of this +stage of our journey." <br> +<p>"Bless my time-table!" cried Mr. Damon. "You don't say so! +What does it mean? What has becomes of our friend Jacinto?"<br> +</p> + +"I'm afraid he was rather a false friend," was the professor's +answer. "This is the note he left. He has gone and taken the +canoes and all the Indians with him," and he held out a paper on +which was some scribbled writing. <br> +<p><br> +</p> + +<h1 id="ref_13">CHAPTER XIII</h1> + +FORWARD AGAIN <br> +<p>"What does it all mean?" asked Tom, seeing that the note was +written in Spanish, a tongue which he could speak slightly but +read indifferently.<br> +</p> + +"This is some of Beecher's work," was Professor Bumper's grim +comment. "It seems that Jacinto was in his pay." <br> +<p>"In his pay!" cried Mr. Damon. "Do you mean that Beecher +deliberately hired Jacinto to betray us?"<br> +</p> + +"Well, no. Not that exactly. Here, I'll translate this note for +you," and the professor proceeded to read: <br> +<p>"Senors: I greatly regret the step I have to take, but I am a +gentleman, and, having given my word, I must keep it. No harm +shall come to you, I swear it on my honor!"<br> +</p> + +"Queer idea of honor he has!" commented Tom, grimly. <br> +<p>Professor Bumper read on:<br> +</p> + +"Know then, that before I engaged myself to you I had been +engaged by Professor Beecher through a friend to guide him into +the Copan valley, where he wants to make some explorations, for +what I know not, save maybe that it is for gold. I agreed, in +case any rival expeditions came to lead them astray if I could. +<br> +<p>"So, knowing from what you said that you were going to this +place, I engaged myself to you, planning to do what I have done. +I greatly regret it, as I have come to like you, but I had given +my promise to Professor Beecher's friend, that I would first lead +him to the Copan valley, and would keep others away until he had +had a chance to do his exploration.<br> +</p> + +"So I have led you to this wilderness. It is far from the Copan, +but you are near an Indian village, and you will be able to get +help in a week or so. In the meanwhile you will not starve, as +you have plenty of supplies. If you will travel northeast you +will come again to Puerto Cortes in due season. As for the money +I had from you, I deposit it to your credit, Professor Beecher +having made me an allowance for steering rival parties on the +wrong trail. So I lose nothing, and I save my honor. <br> +<p>"I write this note as I am leaving in the night with the +Indians. I put some harmless sedative in your tea that you might +sleep soundly, and not awaken until we were well on our way. Do +not try to follow us, as the river will carry us swiftly away. +And, let me add, there is no personal animosity on the part of +Professor Beecher against you. I should have done to any rival +expedition the same as I have done with you. JACINTO."<br> +</p> + +For a moment there was silence, and then Tom Swift burst out +with: <br> +<p>"Well, of all the mean, contemptible tricks of a human skunk +this is the limit!"<br> +</p> + +"Bless my hairbrush, but he is a scoundrel!" ejaculated Mr. +Damon, with great warmth. <br> +<p>"I'd like to start after him the biggest alligator in the +river," was Ned's comment.<br> +</p> + +Professor Bumper said nothing for several seconds. There was a +strange look on his face, and then he laughed shortly, as though +the humor of the situation appealed to him. <br> +<p>"Professor Beecher has more gumption than I gave him credit +for," he said. "It was a clever trick!"<br> +</p> + +"Trick!" cried Tom. <br> +<p>"Yes. I can't exactly agree that it was the right thing to do, +but he, or some friend acting for him, seems to have taken +precautions that we are not to suffer or lose money. Beecher goes +on the theory that all is fair in love and war, I suppose, and he +may call this a sort of scientific war."<br> +</p> + +Ned wondered, as he looked at his chum, how much love there was +in it. Clearly Beecher was determined to get that idol of gold. +<br> +<p>"Well, it can't be helped, and we must make the best of it," +said Tom, after a pause.<br> +</p> + +"True. But now, boys, let's have breakfast, and then we'll make +what goods we can't take with us as snug as possible, until we +can send the mule drivers after them," went on Professor Bumper. +<br> +<p>"Send the mule drivers after them?" questioned Ned. "What do +you mean to do?"<br> +</p> + +"Do? Why keep on, of course. You don't suppose I'm going to let a +little thing like this stand between me and the discovery of +Kurzon and the idol of gold, do you?" <br> +<p>"But," began Mr. Damon, "I don't see how--"<br> +</p> + +"Oh, we'll find a way," interrupted Tom. "It isn't the first time +I've been pretty well stranded on an expedition of this kind, and +sometimes from the same cause--the actions of a rival. Now we'll +turn the tables on the other fellows and see how they like it. +The professor's right --let's have breakfast. Jacinto seems to +have told the truth. Nothing of ours is missing." <br> +<p>Tom and Ned got the meal, and then a consultation was held as +to what was best to be done.<br> +</p> + +"We can't go on any further by water, that's sure," said Tom. "In +the first place the river is too shallow, and secondly we have no +canoes. So the only thing is to go on foot through the jungle." +<br> +<p>"But how can we, and carry all this stuff?" asked Ned.<br> +</p> + +"We needn't carry it!" cried Professor Bumper. "We'll leave it +here, where it will be safe enough, and tramp on to the nearest +Indian village. There we'll hire bearers to take our stuff on +until we can get mules. I'm not going to turn back!" <br> +<p>"Good!" cried Mr. Damon. "Bless my rubber boots! but that's +what I say--keep on!"<br> +</p> + +"Oh, no! we'll never turn back," agreed Tom. <br> +<p>"But how can we manage it?" asked Ned.<br> +</p> + +"We've just got to! And when you have to do a thing, it's a whole +lot easier to do than if you just feel as though you ought to. +So, lively is the word!" cried Tom, in answer. <br> +<p>"We'll pack up what we can carry and leave the rest," added +the scientist.<br> +</p> + +Being an experienced traveler Professor Bumper had arranged his +baggage so that it could be carried by porters if necessary. +Everything could be put into small packages, including the tents +and food supply. <br> +<p>"There are four of us," remarked Tom, "and if we can not pack +enough along with us to enable us to get to the nearest village, +we had better go back to civilization. I'm not afraid to +try."<br> +</p> + +"Nor I!" cried Mr. Damon. <br> +<p>The baggage, stores and supplies that were to be left behind +were made as snug as possible, and so piled up that wild beasts +could do the least harm. Then a pack was made up for each one to +carry.<br> +</p> + +They would take weapons, of course, Tom Swift's electric rifle +being the one he choose for himself. They expected to be able to +shoot game on their way, and this would provide them food in +addition to the concentrated supply they carried. Small tents, in +sections, were carried, there being two, one for Tom and Ned and +one for Mr. Damon and the professor. <br> +<p>As far as could be learned from a casual inspection, Jacinto +and his deserting Indians had taken back with them only a small +quantity of food. They were traveling light and down stream, and +could reach the town much more quickly than they had come away +from it.<br> +</p> + +"That Beecher certainly was slick," commented Professor Bumper +when they were ready to start. "He must have known about what +time I would arrive, and he had Jacinto waiting for us. I thought +it was too good to be true, to get an experienced guide like him +so easily. But it was all planned, and I was so engrossed in +thinking of the ancient treasures I hope to find that I never +thought of a possible trick. Well, let's start!" and he led the +way into the jungle, carrying his heavy pack as lightly as did +Tom. <br> +<p>Professor Bumper had a general idea in which direction lay a +number of native villages, and it was determined to head for +them, blazing a path through the wilderness, so that the Indians +could follow it back to the goods left behind.<br> +</p> + +It was with rather heavy hearts that the party set off, but Tom's +spirits could not long stay clouded, and the scientist was so +good-natured about the affair and seemed so eager to do the +utmost to render Beecher's trick void, that the others fell into +a lighter mood, and went on more cheerfully, though the way was +rough and the packs heavy. <br> +<p>They stopped at noon under a bower they made of palms, and, +spreading the nets over them, got a little rest after a lunch. +Then, when the sun was less hot, they started off again.<br> +</p> + +"Forward is the word!" cried Ned cheerfully. "Forward!"' <br> +<p>They had not gone more than an hour on the second stage of +their tramp when Tom, who was in the lead, following the +direction laid out by the compass, suddenly stopped, and reached +around for his electric rifle, which he was carrying at his +back.<br> +</p> + +"What is it?" asked Ned in a whisper. <br> +<p>"I don't know, but it's some big animal there in the bushes," +was Tom's low-voiced answer. "I'm ready for it."<br> +</p> + +The rustling increased, and a form could be seen indistinctly. +Tom aimed the deadly gun and stood ready to pull the trigger. +<br> +<p>Ned, tho had a side view into the underbrush, gave a sudden +cry.<br> +</p> + +"Don't shoot, Tom!" he yelled. "It's a man!" <br> +<p><br> +</p> + +<h1 id="ref_14">CHAPTER XIV:</h1> + +A NEW GUIDE <br> +<p>In spite of Ned Newton's cry, Tom's finger pressed the +switch-trigger of the electric rifle, for previous experience had +taught him that it was sometimes the best thing to awe the +natives in out-of-the-way corners of the earth. But the young +inventor quickly elevated the muzzle, and the deadly missile went +hissing through the air over the head of a native Indian who, at +that moment, stepped from the bush.<br> +</p> + +The man, startled and alarmed, shrank back and was about to run +into the jungle whence he had emerged. Small wonder if he had, +considering the reception he so unwittingly met with. But Tom. +aware of the necessity for making inquiries of one who knew that +part of the jungle, quickly called to him. <br> +<p>"Hold on!" he shouted. "Wait a minute. I didn't mean that. I +thought at first you were a tapir or a tiger. No harm intended. I +say, Professor," Tom called back to the savant, "you'd better +speak to him in his lingo, I can't manage it. He may be useful in +guiding us to that Indian village Jacinto told us of."<br> +</p> + +This Professor Bumper did, being able to make himself understood +in the queer part-Spanish dialect used by the native Hondurians, +though he could not, of course, speak it as fluently as had +Jacinto. <br> +<p>Professor Bumper had made only a few remarks to the man who +had so unexpectedly appeared out of the jungle when the scientist +gave an exclamation of surprise at some of the answers made.<br> +</p> + +"Bless my moving picture!" cried Mr. Damon. <br> +<p>"What's the matter now? Is anything wrong? Does he refuse to +help us?"<br> +</p> + +"No, it isn't that," was the answer. "In fact he came here to +help us. Tom, this is the brother of the Indian who fell +overboard and who was eaten by the alligators. He says you were +very kind to try to save his brother with your rifle, and for +that reason he has come back to help us." <br> +<p>"Come back?" queried Tom.<br> +</p> + +"Yes, he went off with the rest of the Indians when Jacinto +deserted us, but he could not stand being a traitor, after you +had tried to save his brother's life. These Indians are queer +people. <br> +<p>They don't show much emotion, but they have deep feelings. +This one says he will devote himself to your service from now on. +I believe we can count on him. He is deeply grateful to you, +Tom."<br> +</p> + +"I'm glad of that for all our sakes. But what does he say about +Jacinto?" <br> +<p>The professor asked some more questions, receiving answers, +and then translated them.<br> +</p> + +"This Indian, whose name is Tolpec, says Jacinto is a fraud," +exclaimed Professor Bumper. "He made all the Indians leave us in +the night, though many of them were willing to stay and fill the +contract they had made. But Jacinto would not let them, making +them desert. Tolpec went away with the others, but because of +what Tom had done he planned to come back at the first chance and +be our guide. Accordingly he jumped ashore from one of the +canoes, and made his way to our camp. He got there, found it +deserted and followed us, coming up just now." <br> +<p>"Well I'm glad I didn't frighten him off with my gun," +remarked Tom grimly. "So he agrees with us that Jacinto is a +scoundrel, does he? I guess he might as well classify Professor +Beecher in the same way."<br> +</p> + +"I am not quite so sure of that," said Professor Bumper slowly. +"I can not believe Beecher would play such a trick as this, +though some over-zealous friend of his might." <br> +<p>"Oh, of course Beecher did it!" cried Tom. "He heard we were +coming here, figured out that we'd start ahead of him, and he +wanted to sidetrack us. Well, he did it all right," and Tom's +voice was bitter.<br> +</p> + +"He has only side-tracked us for a while," announced Professor +Bumper in cheerful tones. <br> +<p>"What do you mean?" asked Mr. Damon.<br> +</p> + +"I mean that this Indian comes just in the nick of time. He is +well acquainted with this part of the jungle, having lived here +all his life, and he offers to guide us to a place where we can +get mules to transport ourselves and our baggage to Copan." <br> +<p>"Fine!" cried Ned. "When can we start?"<br> +</p> + +Once more the professor and the native conversed in the strange +tongue, and then Professor Bumper announced: <br> +<p>"He says it will be better for us to go back where we left our +things and camp there. He will stay with us to-night and in the +morning go on to the nearest Indian town and come back with +porters and helpers."<br> +</p> + +"I think that is good advice to follow," put in Tom, "for we do +need our goods; and if we reached the settlement ourselves, we +would have to send back for our things, with the uncertainty of +getting them all." <br> +<p>So it was agreed that they would make a forced march back +through the jungle to where they had been deserted by Jacinto. +There they would make camp for the night, and until such time as +Tolpec could return with a force of porters.<br> +</p> + +It was not easy, that backward tramp through the jungle, +especially as night had fallen. But the new Indian guide could +see like a cat, and led the party along paths they never could +have found by themselves. The use of their pocket electric lights +was a great help, and possibly served to ward off the attacks of +jungle beasts, for as they tramped along they could hear stealthy +sounds in the underbush on either side of the path, as though +tigers were stalking them. For there was in the woods an animal +of the leopard family, called tiger or "tigre" by the natives, +that was exceedingly fierce and dangerous. But watchfulness +prevented any accident, and eventually the party reached the +place where they had left their goods. Nothing had been +disturbed, and finally a fire was made, the tents set up and a +light meal, with hot tea served. <br> +<p>"We'll get ahead of Beecher yet," said Tom.<br> +</p> + +"You seem as anxious as Professor Bumper," observed Mr. Damon, +<br> +<p>"I guess I am," admitted Tom. "I want to see that idol of gold +in the possession of our party."<br> +</p> + +The night passed without incident, and then, telling his new +friends that he would return as soon as possible with help, +Tolpec, taking a small supply of food with him, set out through +the jungle again. <br> +<p>As the green vines and creepers closed after him, and the +explorers were left alone with their possessions piled around +them, Ned remarked:<br> +</p> + +"After all, I wonder if it was wise to let him go?" <br> +<p>"Why not?" asked Tom.<br> +</p> + +"Well, maybe he only wanted to get us back here, and then he'll +desert, too. Maybe that's what he's done now, making us lose two +or three days by inducing us to return, waiting for what will +never happen--his return with other natives." <br> +<p>A silence followed Ned's intimation.<br> +</p> + +<br> +<h1 id="ref_15">CHAPTER XV</h1> + +IN THE COILS <br> +"Ned, do you really think Tolpec is going to desert us?" asked +Tom. <br> +<p>"Well, I don't know," was the slowly given reply. "It's a +possibility, isn't it?"<br> +</p> + +"Yes, it is," broke in Professor Bumper. "But what if it is? We +might as well trust him, and if he proves true, as I believe he +will, we'll be so much better off. If he proves a traitor we'll +only have lost a few days, for if he doesn't come back we can go +on again in the way we started." <br> +<p>"But that's just it!" complained Tom. "We don't want to lose +any time with that Beecher chap on our trail."<br> +</p> + +"I am not so very much concerned about him," remarked Professor +Bumper, dryly. <br> +<p>"Why not?" snapped out Mr. Damon.<br> +</p> + +"Well, because I think he'll have just about as hard work +locating the hidden city, and finding the idol of gold, as we'll +have. In other words it will be an even thing, unless he gets too +far ahead of us, or keeps us back, and I don't believe he can do +that now. <br> +<p>"So I thought it best to take a chance with this Indian. He +would hardly have taken the trouble to come all the way back, and +run the risks he did, just to delay us a few days. However, we'll +soon know. Meanwhile, we'll take it easy and wait for the return +of Tolpec and his friends."<br> +</p> + +Though none of them liked to admit it, Ned's words had caused his +three friends some anxiety, and though they busied themselves +about the camp there was an air of waiting impatiently for +something to occur. And waiting is about the hardest work there +is. <br> +<p>But there was nothing for it but to wait, and it might be at +least a week, Professor Bumper said, before the Indian could +return with a party of porters and mules to move their +baggage.<br> +</p> + +"Yes, Tolpec has not only to locate the settlement," Tom +admitted, "but he must persuade the natives to come back with +him. He may have trouble in that, especially if it is known that +he has left Jacinto, who, I imagine, is a power among the tribes +here." <br> +<p>But there were only two things left to do--wait and hope. The +travelers did both. Four days passed and there was no sign of +Tolpec. Eagerly, and not a little anxiously, they watched the +jungle path along which he had disappeared.<br> +</p> + +"Oh, come on!" exclaimed Tom one morning, when the day seemed a +bit cooler than its predecessor. "Let's go for a hunt, or +something! I'm tired of sitting around camp." <br> +<p>"Bless my watch hands! So am I!" cried Mr. Damon. "Let's all +go for a trip. It will do us good."<br> +</p> + +"And perhaps I can get some specimens of interest," added +Professor Bumper, who, in addition to being an archaeologist, was +something of a naturalist. <br> +<p>Accordingly, having made everything snug in camp, the party, +Tom and Ned equipped with electric rifles, and the professor with +a butterfly net and specimen boxes, set forth. Mr. Damon said he +would carry a stout club as his weapon.<br> +</p> + +The jungle, as usual, was teeming with life, but as Ned and Tom +did not wish to kill wantonly they refrained from shooting until +later in the day. For once it was dead, game did not keep well in +that hot climate, and needed to be cooked almost immediately. +<br> +<p>"We'll try some shots on our back trip," said the young +inventor.<br> +</p> + +Professor Bumper found plenty of his own particular kind of +"game" which he caught in the net, transferring the specimens to +the boxes he carried. There were beautiful butterflies, moths and +strange bugs in the securing of which the scientist evinced great +delight, though when one beetle nipped him firmly and painfully +on his thumb his involuntary cry of pain was as real as that of +any other person. <br> +<p>"But I didn't let him get away," he said in triumph when he +had dropped the clawing insect into the cyanide bottle where +death came painlessly. "It is well worth a sore thumb."<br> +</p> + +They wandered on through the jungle, taking care not to get too +far from their camp, for they did not want to lose their way, nor +did they want to be absent too long in case Tolpec and his native +friends should return. <br> +<p>"Well, it's about time we shot something, I think," remarked +Ned, when they had been out about two hours. "Let's try for some +of these wild turkeys. They ought to go well roasted even if it +isn't Thanksgiving."<br> +</p> + +"I'm with you," agreed Tom. "Let's see who has the best luck. But +tone down the charge in your rifle and use a smaller projectile, +or you'll have nothing but a bunch of feathers to show for your +shot. The guns are loaded for deer." <br> +<p>The change was made, and once more the two young men started +off, a little ahead of Professor Bumper and Mr. Damon. Tom and +Ned had not gone far, however, before they heard a strange cry +from Mr. Damon.<br> +</p> + +"Tom! Ned!" shouted the eccentric man, "Here's a monster after +me! Come quick!" <br> +<p>"A tiger!" ejaculated Tom, as he began once more to change the +charge in his rifle to a larger one, running back, meanwhile, in +the direction of the sound of the voice.<br> +</p> + +There were really no tigers in Honduras, the jaguar being called +a tiger by the natives, while the cougar is called a lion. The +presence of these animals, often dangerous to man, had been +indicated around camp, and it was possible that one had been bold +enough to attack Mr. Damon, not through hunger, but because of +being cornered. <br> +<p>"Come on, Ned!" cried Tom. "He's in some sort of trouble!"<br> +</p> + +But when, a moment later, the young inventor burst through a +fringe of bushes and saw Mr. Damon standing in a little clearing, +with upraised club, Tom could not repress a laugh. <br> +<p>"Kill it, Tom! Kill it!" begged the eccentric man. "Bless my +insurance policy, but it's a terrible beast!"<br> +</p> + +And so it was, at first glance. For it was a giant iguana, one of +the most repulsive-looking of the lizards. Not unlike an +alligator in shape, with spikes on its head and tail, with a +warty, squatty ridge-encrusted body, a big pouch beneath its +chin, and long-toed claws, it was enough to strike terror into +the heart of almost any one. Even the smaller ones look +dangerous, and this one, which was about five feet long, looked +capable of attacking a man and injuring him. As a matter of fact +the iguanas are harmless, their shape and coloring being designed +to protect them. <br> +<p>"Don't be afraid, Mr. Damon," called Tom, still laughing. "It +won't hurt you!"<br> +</p> + +"I'm not so positive of that. It won't let me pass." <br> +<p>"Just take your club and poke it out of the way," the young +inventor advised. "It's only waiting to be shoved."<br> +</p> + +"Then you do it, Tom. Bless my looking glass, but I don't want to +go near it! If my wife could see me now she'd say it served me +just right." <br> +<p>Mr. Damon was not a coward, but the giant iguana was not +pleasant to look at. Tom, with the butt of his rifle, gave it a +gentle shove, whereupon the creature scurried off through the +brush as though glad to make its escape unscathed.<br> +</p> + +"I thought it was a new kind of alligator," said Mr. Damon with a +sigh of relief. <br> +<p>"Where is it?" asked Professor Bumper, coming up at this +juncture. "A new species of alligator? Let me see it!"<br> +</p> + +"It's too horrible," said Mr. Damon. "I never want to see one +again. It was worse than a vampire bat!" <br> +<p>Notwithstanding this, when he heard that it was one of the +largest sized iguanas ever seen, the professor started through +the jungle after it.<br> +</p> + +"We can't take it with us if we get it," Tom called after his +friend. <br> +<p>"We might take the skin," answered the professor. "I have a +standing order for such things from one of the museums I +represent. I'd like to get it. Then they are often eaten. We can +have a change of diet. you see."<br> +</p> + +"We'd better follow him," said Tom to Ned. "We'll have to let the +turkeys go for a while. He may get into trouble. Come on." <br> +<p>Off they started through the jungle, trailing after the +impetuous professor who was intent on capturing the iguana. The +giant lizard's progress could be traced by the disturbance of the +leaves and underbrush, and the professor was following as closely +as possible.<br> +</p> + +So fast did he go that Ned, Tom and Mr. Damon, following, lost +sight of him several times, and Tom finally called: <br> +<p>"Wait a minute. We'll all be lost if you keep this up."<br> +</p> + +"I'll have him in another minute," answered the professor. "I can +almost reach him now. Then---- Oh!" <br> +<p>His voice ended in a scream that seemed to be one of terror. +So sudden was the change that Tom and Ned, who were together, +ahead of Mr. Damon, looked at one another in fear.<br> +</p> + +"What has happened?" whispered Ned, pausing. <br> +<p>"Don't stop to ask--come on!" shouted Tom.<br> +</p> + +At that instant again came the voice of the savant. <br> +<p>"Tom! Ned!" he gasped, rather than cried.<br> +</p> + +"I'm caught in the coils! Quick--quick if you would save me!" +<br> +<p>"In the coils!" repeated Ned. "What does he mean? Can the +giant iguana----"<br> +</p> + +Tom Swift did not stop to answer. With his electric rifle in +readiness, he leaped forward through the jungle. <br> +<p><br> +</p> + +<h1 id="ref_16">CHAPTER XVI</h1> + +A MEETING IN THE JUNGLE <br> +<p>Before Tom and Ned reached the place whence Professor Bumper +had called, they heard strange noises, other than the imploring +voice of their friend. It seemed as though some great body was +threshing about in the jungle, lashing the trees, bushes and +leaves about, and when the two young men, followed by Mr. Damon, +reached the scene they saw that, in a measure, this really +accounted for what they heard.<br> +</p> + +Something like a great whip was beating about close to two trees +that grew near together. And then, when the storm of twigs, +leaves and dirt, caused by the leaping, threshing thing ceased +for a moment, the onlookers saw something that filled them with +terror. <br> +<p>Between the two trees, and seemingly bound to them by a great +coiled rope, spotted and banded, was the body of Professor +Bumper. His arms were pinioned to his sides and there was horror +and terror on his face, that looked imploringly at the youths +from above the topmost coil of those encircling him.<br> +</p> + +"What is it?" cried Mr. Damon, as he ran pantingly up. "What has +caught him? Is it the giant iguana?" <br> +<p>"It's a snake--a great boa!" gasped Tom. "It has him in its +coils. But it is wound around the trees, too. That alone prevents +it from crushing the professor to death.<br> +</p> + +"Ned, be ready with your rifle. Put in the heaviest charge, and +watch your chance to fire!" <br> +<p>The great, ugly head of the boa reared itself up from the +coils which it had, with the quickness of thought, thrown about +the man between the two trees. This species of snake is not +poisonous, and kills its prey by crushing it to death, making it +into a pulpy mass, with scarcely a bone left unbroken, after +which it swallows its meal. The crushing power of one of these +boas, some of which reach a length of thirty feet, with a body as +large around as that of a full-grown man, is enormous.<br> +</p> + +"I'm going to fire!" suddenly cried Tom. He had seen his chance +and he took it. There was the faint report--the crack of the +electric rifle-and the folds of the serpent seemed to relax. <br> +<p>"I see a good chance now," added Ned, who had taken the small +charge from his weapon, replacing it with a heavier one.<br> +</p> + +His rifle was also discharged in the direction of the snake, and +Tom saw that the hit was a good one, right through the ugly head +of the reptile. <br> +<p>"One other will be enough to make him loosen his coils!" cried +Tom, as he fired again, and such was the killing power of the +electric bullets that the snake, though an immense one, and one +that short of decapitation could have received many injuries +without losing power, seemed to shrivel up.<br> +</p> + +Its folds relaxed, and the coils of the great body fell in a heap +at the roots of the two trees, between which the scientist had +been standing. <br> +<p>Professor Bumper seemed to fall backward as the grip of the +serpent relaxed, but Tom, dropping his rifle, and calling to Ned +to keep an eye on the snake, leaped forward and caught his +friend.<br> +</p> + +"Are you hurt?" asked Tom, carrying the limp form over to a +grassy place. There was no answer, the savant's eyes were closed +and he breathed but faintly. <br> +<p>Ned Newton fired two more electric bullets into the still +writhing body of the boa.<br> +</p> + +"I guess he's all in," he called to Tom. <br> +<p>"Bless my horseradish! And so our friend seems to be," +commented Mr. Damon. "Have you anything with which to revive him, +Tom?"<br> +</p> + +"Yes. Some ammonia. See if you can find a little water." <br> +<p>"I have some in my flask."<br> +</p> + +Tom mixed a dose of the spirits which he carried with him, and +this, forced between the pallid lips of the scientist, revived +him. <br> +<p>"What happened?" he asked faintly as he opened his eyes. "Oh, +yes, I remember," he added slowly. "The boa----"<br> +</p> + +"Don't try to talk," urged Tom. "You're all right. The snake is +dead, or dying. Are you much hurt?" <br> +<p>Professor Bumper appeared to be considering. He moved first +one limb, then another. He seemed to have the power over all his +muscles.<br> +</p> + +"I see how it happened," he said, as he sat up, after taking a +little more of the ammonia. "I was following the iguana, and when +the big lizard came to a stop, in a little hollow place in the +ground, at the foot of those two trees, I leaned over to slip a +noose of rope about its neck. Then I felt myself caught, as if in +the hands of a giant, and bound fast between the two trees." <br> +<p>"It was the big boa that whipped itself around you, as you +leaned over," explained Tom, as Ned came up to announce that the +snake was no longer dangerous. "But when it coiled around you it +also coiled around the two trees, you, fortunately slipping +between them. Had it not been that their trunks took off some of +the pressure of the coils you wouldn't have lasted a minute."<br> +</p> + +"Well, I was pretty badly squeezed as it was," remarked the +professor. "I hardly had breath enough left to call to you. I +tried to fight off the serpent, but it was of no use." <br> +<p>"I should say not!" cried Mr. Damon. "Bless my circus ring! +one might as well try to combat an elephant! But, my dear +professor, are you all right now?"<br> +</p> + +"I think so--yes. Though I shall be lame and stiff for a few +days, I fear. I can hardly walk." <br> +<p>Professor Bumper was indeed unable to go about much for a few +days after his encounter with the great serpent. He stretched out +in a hammock under trees in the camp clearing, and with his +friends waited for the possible return of Tolpec and the +porters.<br> +</p> + +Ned and Tom made one or two short hunting trips, and on these +occasions they kept a lookout in the direction the Indian had +taken when he went away. <br> +<p>"For he's sure to come back that way--if he comes at all," +declared Ned; "which I am beginning to doubt."<br> +</p> + +"Well, he may not come," agreed Tom, who was beginning to lose +some of his first hope. "But he won't necessarily come from the +same direction he took. He may have had to go in an entirely +different way to get help. We'll hope for the best." <br> +<p>A week passed. Professor Bumper was able to be about, and Tom +and Ned noticed that there was an anxious look on his face. Was +he, too, beginning to despair?<br> +</p> + +"Well, this isn't hunting for golden idols very fast," said Mr. +Damon, the morning of the eighth day after their desertion by the +faithless Jacinto. "What do you say, Professor Bumper; ought we +not to start off on our own account?" <br> +<p>"We had better if Tolpec does not return today," was the +answer.<br> +</p> + +They had eaten breakfast, had put their camp in order, and were +about to have a consultation on what was best to do, when Tom +suddenly called to Ned, who was whistling: <br> +<p>"Hark!"<br> +</p> + +Through the jungle came a faint sound of singing --not a +harmonious air, but the somewhat barbaric chant of the natives. +<br> +<p>"It is Tolpec coming back!" cried Mr. Damon. "Hurray! Now our +troubles are over t Bless my meal ticket! Now we can start!"<br> +</p> + +"It may be Jacinto," suggested Ned. <br> +<p>"Nonsense! you old cold-water pitcher!" cried Tom. "It's +Tolpec! I can see him! He's a good scout all right!"<br> +</p> + +And then, walking at the head of a band of Indians who were +weirdly chanting while behind them came a train of mules, was +Tolpec, a cheerful grin covering his honest, if homely, dark +face. <br> +<p>"Me come back!" he exclaimed in gutteral English, using about +half of his foreign vocabulary.<br> +</p> + +"I see you did," answered Professor Bumper in the man's own +tongue. "Glad to see you. Is everything all right?" <br> +<p>"All right," was the answer. "These Indians will take you +where you want to go, and will not leave you as Jacinto did."<br> +</p> + +"We'll start in the morning!" exclaimed the savant his own +cheerful self again, now that there was a prospect of going +further into the interior. "Tell the men to get something to eat, +Tolpec. There is plenty for all." <br> +<p>"Good!" grunted the new guide and soon the hungry Indians, who +had come far, were satisfying their hunger.<br> +</p> + +As they ate Tolpec explained to Professor Bumper, who repeated it +to the youths and Mr. Damon, that it had been necessary to go +farther than he had intended to get the porters and mules. But +the Indians were a friendly tribe, of which he was a member, and +could be depended on. <br> +<p>There was a feast and a sort of celebration in camp that +night. Tom and Ned shot two deer, and these formed the main part +of the feast and the Indians made merry about the fire until +nearly midnight. They did not seem to mind in the least the +swarms of mosquitoes and other bugs that flew about, attracted by +the light. As for Tom Swift and his friends, their nets protected +them.<br> +</p> + +An early start was made the following morning. Such packages of +goods and supplies as could not well be carried by the Indians in +their head straps, were loaded on the backs of the packmules. +Tolpec explained that on reaching the Indian village, where he +had secured the porters, they could get some ox-carts which would +be a convenience in traveling into the interior toward the Copan +valley. <br> +<p>The march onward for the next two days was tiresome; but the +Indians Tolpec had secured were as faithful and efficient as he +had described them, and good progress was made.<br> +</p> + +There were a few accidents. One native fell into a swiftly +running stream as they were fording it and lost a box containing +some much-needed things. But as the man's life was saved +Professor Bumper said it made up for the other loss. Another +accident did not end so auspiciously. One of the bearers was +bitten by a poisonous snake, and though prompt measures were +taken, the poison spread so rapidly that the man died. <br> +<p>In due season the Indian village was reached. where, after a +day spent in holding funeral services over the dead bearer, +preparations were made for proceeding farther.<br> +</p> + +This time some of the bearers were left behind, and ox-carts were +substituted for them, as it was possible to carry more goods this +way, <br> +<p>"And now we're really off for Copan!" exclaimed Professor +Bumper one morning, when the cavalcade, led by Tolpec in the +capacity of head guide, started off. "I hope we have no more +delays."<br> +</p> + +"I hope not, either," agreed Tom. "That Beecher may be there +ahead of us." <br> +<p>Weary marches fell to their portion. There were mountains to +climb, streams to ford or swim, sending the carts over on rudely +made rafts. There were storms to endure, and the eternal heat to +fight.<br> +</p> + +But finally the party emerged from the lowlands of the coast and +went up in among the hills, where though the going was harder, +the climate was better. It was not so hot and moist. <br> +<p>Not wishing to attract attention in Copan itself, Professor +Bumper and his party made a detour, and finally, after much +consultation with Tom over the ancient maps, the scientist +announced that he thought they were in the vicinity of the buried +city.<br> +</p> + +"We will begin test excavations in the morning," he said. <br> +<p>The party was in camp, and preparations were made for spending +the night in the forest, when from among the trees there floated +to the ears of our friends a queer Indian chant.<br> +</p> + +"Some one is coming," said Tom to Ned. <br> +<p>Almost as he spoke there filed into the clearing where the +camp had been set up, a cavalcade of white men, followed by +Indians. And at the sight of one of the white men Tom Swift +uttered a cry.<br> +</p> + +"Professor Beecher!" gasped the young inventor. <br> +<p><br> +</p> + +<h1 id="ref_17">CHAPTER XVII</h1> + +THE LOST MAP <br> +<p>The on-marching company of white men, with their Indian +attendants, came to a halt on the edge of the clearing as they +caught sight of the tents already set up there. The barbaric +chant of the native bearers ceased abruptly, and there was a look +of surprise shown on the face of Professor Fenimore Beecher. For +Professor Beecher it was, in the lead of the rival +expedition.<br> +</p> + +"Bless my shoe laces!" exclaimed Mr. Damon. <br> +<p>"Is it really Beecher?" asked Ned, though he knew as well as +Tom that it was the young archaeologist.<br> +</p> + +"It certainly is!" declared Tom. "And he has nerve to follow us +so closely!" <br> +<p>"Maybe he thinks we have nerve to get here ahead of him," +suggested Ned, smiling grimly.<br> +</p> + +"Probably," agreed Tom, with a short laugh. "Well, it evidently +surprises him to find us here at all, after the mean trick he +played on us to get Jacinto to lead us into the jungle and desert +us." <br> +<p>"That's right," assented Ned. "Well, what's the next +move?"<br> +</p> + +There seemed to be some doubt about this on the part of both +expeditions. At the sight of Professor Beecher, Professor Bumper, +who had come out of his tent, hurriedly turned to Tom and asked +him what he thought it best to do. <br> +<p>"Do!" exclaimed the eccentric Mr. Damon, not giving Tom time +to reply. "Why, stand your ground, of course! Bless my house and +lot! but we're here first! For the matter of that, I suppose the +jungle is free and we can no more object to his coming: here than +he can to our coming. First come, first served, I suppose is the +law of the forest."<br> +</p> + +Meanwhile the surprise occasioned by the unexpected meeting of +their rivals seemed to have spread something like consternation +among the white members of the Beecher party. As for the natives +they evidently did not care one way or the other. <br> +<p>There was a hasty consultation among the professors +accompanying Mr. Beecher, and then the latter himself advanced +toward the tents of Tom and his friends and asked:<br> +</p> + +"How long have you been here?" <br> +<p>"I don't see that we are called upon to answer that question," +replied Professor Bumper stiffly.<br> +</p> + +"Perhaps not, and yet----" <br> +<p>"There is no perhaps about it!" said Professor Bumper quickly. +"I know what your object is, as I presume you do mine. And, after +what I may term your disgraceful and unsportsmanlike conduct +toward me and my friends, I prefer not to have anything further +to do with you. We must meet as strangers hereafter."<br> +</p> + +"Very well," and Professor Beecher's voice was as cold and +uncompromising as was his rival's. "Let it be as your wish. But I +must say I don't know what you mean by unsportsmanlike conduct." +<br> +<p>"An explanation would be wasted on you," said Professor Bumper +stiffly. "But in order that you may know I fully understand what +you did I will say that your efforts to thwart us through your +tool Jacinto came to nothing. We are here ahead of you."<br> +</p> + +"Jacinto!" cried Professor Beecher in real or simulated surprise. +"Why, he was not my `tool,' as you term it." <br> +<p>"Your denial is useless in the light of his confession," +asserted Professor Bumper.<br> +</p> + +"Confession?" <br> +<p>"Now look here!" exclaimed the older professor, "I do not +propose to lower myself by quarreling with you. I know certainly +what you and your party tried to do to prevent us from getting +here. But we got out of the trap you set for us, and we are on +the ground first. I recognize your right to make explorations as +well as ourselves, and I presume you have not fallen so low that +you will not recognize the unwritten law in a case of this +kind--the law which says the right of discovery belongs to the +one who first makes it."<br> +</p> + +"I shall certainly abide by such conduct as is usual under the +circumstances," said Professor Beecher more stiffly than before. +"At the same time I must deny having set a trap. And as for +Jacinto----" <br> +<p>"It will be useless to discuss it further!" broke in Professor +Bumper.<br> +</p> + +"Then no more need be said," retorted the younger man. "I shall +give orders to my friends, as well as to the natives, to keep +away from your camp, and I shall expect you to do the same +regarding mine." <br> +<p>"I should have suggested the same thing myself," came from +Tom's friend, and the two rival scientists fairly glared at one +another, the others of both parties looking on with interest.<br> +</p> + +Professor Bumper turned and walked defiantly back to his tent. +Professor Beecher did the same thing. Then, after a short +consultation among the white members of the latter's +organization, their tents were set up in another clearing, +removed and separated by a screen of trees and bushes from those +of Tom Swift's friends. The natives of the Beecher party also +withdrew a little way from those of Professor Bumper's +organization, and then preparations for spending the night in the +jungle went on in the rival headquarters. <br> +<p>"Well, he certainly had nerve, to deny, practically, that he +had set Jacinto up to do what he did," commented Tom.<br> +</p> + +"I should say so!" agreed Ned. <br> +<p>"How do you imagine he got here nearly as soon as we did, when +he did not start until later?" asked Mr. Damon.<br> +</p> + +"He did not have the unfortunate experience of being deserted in +the jungle," replied Tom. "He probably had Jacinto, or some of +that unprincipled scoundrel's friends, show him a short route to +Copan and he came on from there." <br> +<p>"Well, I did hope we might have the ground to ourselves, at +least for the preliminary explorations and excavations. But it is +not to be. My rival is here," sighed Professor Bumper.<br> +</p> + +"Don't let that discourage you!" exclaimed Tom. "We can fight all +the better now the foe is in the open, and we know where he is." +<br> +<p>"Yes, Tom Swift, that is true," agreed the scientist. "I am +not going to give up, but I shall have to change my plans a +little. Perhaps you will come into the tent with me," and he +nodded to Tom and Ned. "I want to talk over certain matters with +you and Mr. Damon."<br> +</p> + +"Pleased to," assented the young inventor, and his financial +secretary nodded. <br> +<p>A little later, supper having been eaten, the camp made +shipshape and the natives settled down, Tom, Ned, Mr. Damon and +Professor Bumper assembled in the tent of the scientist, where a +dry battery lamp gave sufficient illumination to show a number of +maps and papers scattered over an improvised table.<br> +</p> + +"Now, gentlemen," said the professor, "I have called you here to +go over my plans more in detail than I have hitherto done, now we +are on the ground. You know in a general way what I hope to +accomplish, but the time has come when I must be specific. <br> +<p>"Aside from being on the spot, below which, or below the +vicinity where, I believe, lies the lost city of Kurzon and, I +hope, the idol of gold, a situation has arisen--an unexpected +situation, I may say--which calls for different action from that +I had counted on.<br> +</p> + +"I refer to the presence of my rival, Professor Beecher. I will +not dwell now on what he has done. It is better to consider what +he may do." <br> +<p>"That's right," agreed Ned. "He may get up in the night, dig +up this city and skip with that golden image before we know +it."<br> +</p> + +"Hardly," grinned Tom. <br> +<p>"No," said Professor Bumper. "Excavating buried cities in the +jungle of Honduras is not as simple as that. There is much work +to be done. But accidents may happen, and in case one should +occur to me, and I be unable to prosecute the search, I want one +of you to do it. For that reason I am going to show you the maps +and ancient documents and point out to you where I believe the +lost city lies. Now, if you will give me your attention, I'll +proceed."<br> +</p> + +The professor went over in detail the story of how he had found +the old documents relating to the lost city of Kurzon, and of +how, after much labor and research, he had located the city in +the Copan valley. The great idol of gold was one of the chief +possessions of Kurzon, and it was often referred to in the old +papers; copies and translations of which the professor had with +him. <br> +<p>"But this is the most valuable of all," he said, as he opened +an oiled-silk packet. "And before I show it to you, suppose you +two young men take a look outside the tent."<br> +</p> + +"What for?" asked Mr. Damon. <br> +<p>"To make sure that no emissaries from the Beecher crowd are +sneaking around to overhear what we say," was the somewhat bitter +answer of the scientist. "I do not trust him, in spite of his +attempted denial."<br> +</p> + +Tom and Ned took a quick but thorough observation outside the +tent. The blackness of the jungle night was in strange contrast +to the light they had just left. <br> +<p>"Doesn't seem to be any one around here," remarked Ned, after +waiting a minute or two.<br> +</p> + +"No. All's quiet along the Potomac. Those Beecher natives are +having some sort of a songfest, though." <br> +<p>In the distance, and from the direction of their rivals' camp, +came the weird chant.<br> +</p> + +"Well, as long as they stay there we'll be all right," said Tom. +"Come on in. I'm anxious to hear what the professor has to say." +<br> +<p>"Everything's quiet," reported Ned.<br> +</p> + +"Then give me your attention," begged the scientist. <br> +<p>Carefully, as though about to exhibit some, precious jewel, he +loosened the oiled-silk wrappings and showed a large map, on thin +but tough paper.<br> +</p> + +"This is drawn from the old charts," the professor explained. "I +worked on it many months, and it is the only copy in the world. +If it were to be destroyed I should have to go all the way back +to New York to make another copy. I have the original there in a +safe deposit vault." <br> +<p>"Wouldn't it have been wise to make two copies?" asked +Tom.<br> +</p> + +"It would have only increased the risk. With one copy, and that +constantly in my possession, I can be sure of my ground. +Otherwise not. That is why I am so careful of this. Now I will +show you why I believe we are about over the ancient city of +Kurzon." <br> +<p>"Over it!" cried Mr. Damon. "Bless my gunpowder! What do you +mean?" and he looked down at the earthen floor of the tent as +though expecting it to open and swallow him.<br> +</p> + +"I mean that the city, like many others of Central and South +America, is buried below the refuse of centuries," went on the +professor. "Very soon, if we are fortunate, we shall be looking +on the civilization of hundreds of years ago--how long no one +knows. <br> +<p>"Considerable excavation has been done in Central America," +went on Professor Bumper, "and certain ruins have been brought to +light. Near us are those of Copan, while toward the frontier are +those of Quirigua, which are even better preserved than the +former. We may visit them if we have time. But I have reason to +believe that in this section of Copan is a large city, the +existence of which has not been made certain of by any one save +myself--and, perhaps, Professor Beecher.<br> +</p> + +"Certainly no part of it has seen the light of day for many +centuries. It shall be our pleasure to uncover it, if possible, +and secure the idol of gold." <br> +<p>"How long ago do you think the city was buried?" asked +Tom.<br> +</p> + +"It would be hard to say. From the carvings and hieroglyphics I +have studied it would seem that the Mayan civilization lasted +about five hundred years, and that it began perhaps in the year +A. D. five hundred." <br> +<p>"That would mean," said Mr. Damon, "that the ancient cities +were in ruins, buried, perhaps, long before Columbus discovered +the new world."<br> +</p> + +"Yes," assented the professor. "Probably Kurzon, which we now +seek, was buried deep for nearly five hundred years before +Columbus landed at San Salvadore. The specimens of writing and +architecture heretofore disclosed indicate that. But, as a matter +of fact, it is very hard to decipher the Mayan pictographs. So +far, little but the ability to read their calendars and numerical +system is possessed by us, though we are gradually making +headway. <br> +<p>"Now this is the map of the district, and by the markings you +can see where I hope to find what I seek. We shall begin digging +here," and he made a small mark with a pencil on the map.<br> +</p> + +"Of course," the professor explained, "I may be wrong, and it +will take some time to discover the error if we make one. When a +city is buried thirty or forty feet deep beneath earth and great +trees have grown over it, it is not easy to dig down to it." <br> +<p>"How do you ever expect to find it?" asked Ned.<br> +</p> + +"Well, we will sink shafts here and there. If we find carved +stones, the remains of ancient pottery and weapons, parts of +buildings or building stones, we shall know we are on the right +track," was the answer. "And now that I have shown you the map, +and explained how valuable it is, I will put it away again. We +shall begin our excavations in the morning." <br> +<p>"At what point?" asked Tom.<br> +</p> + +"At a point I shall indicate after a further consultation of the +map. I must see the configuration of the country by daylight to +decide. And now let's get some rest. We have had a hard day." +<br> +<p>The two tents housing the four white members of the Bumper +party were close together, and it was decided that the night +would be divided into four watches, to guard against possible +treachery on the part of the Beecher crowd.<br> +</p> + +"It seems an unkind precaution to take against a fellow +scientist," said Professor Bumper, "but I can not afford to take +chances after what has occurred." <br> +<p>The others agreed with him, and though standing guard was not +pleasant it was done. However the night passed without incident, +and then came morning and the excitement of getting breakfast, +over which the Indians made merry. They did not like the cold and +darkness, and always welcomed the sun, no matter how hot.<br> +</p> + +"And now," cried Tom, when the meal was over, "let us begin the +work that has brought us here." <br> +<p>"Yes," agreed Professor Bumper, "I will consult the map, and +start the diggers where I think the city lies, far below the +surface. Now, gentlemen, if you will give me your +attention----"<br> +</p> + +He was seeking through his outer coat pockets, after an +ineffectual search in the inner one. A strange look came over his +face. <br> +<p>"What's the matter?" asked Tom.<br> +</p> + +"The map--the map!" gasped the professor. "The map I was showing +you last night! The map that tells where we are to dig for the +idol of gold! It's gone!" <br> +<p>"The map gone?" gasped Mr. Damon.<br> +</p> + +"I--I'm afraid so," faltered the professor. "I put it away +carefully, but now----" <br> +<p>He ceased speaking to make a further search in all his +pockets.<br> +</p> + +"Maybe you left it in another coat," suggested Ned. <br> +<p>"Or maybe some of the Beecher crowd took it!" snapped Tom.<br> +</p> + +<br> +<h1 id="ref_18">CHAPTER XVIII</h1> + +"EL TIGRE!" <br> +The four men gazed at one another. Consternation showed on the +face of Professor Bumper, and was reflected, more or less, on the +countenances of his companions. <br> +<p>"Are you sure the map is gone?" asked Tom. "I know how easy it +is to mislay anything in a camp of this sort. I couldn't at first +find my safety razor this morning, and when I did locate it the +hoe was in one of my shoes. I'm sure a rat or some jungle animal +must have dragged it there. Now maybe they took your map, +Professor. That oiled silk in which it was wrapped might have +appealed to the taste of a rat or a snake."<br> +</p> + +"It is no joking matter," said Professor Bumper. "But I know you +appreciate the seriousness of it as much as I do, Tom. But I had +the map in the pocket of this coat, and now it is gone!" <br> +<p>"When did you put it there?" asked Ned.<br> +</p> + +"This morning, just before I came to breakfast." <br> +<p>"Oh, then you have had it since last night!" Tom +ejaculated.<br> +</p> + +"Yes, I slept with it under my clothes that I rolled up for a +pillow, and when it was my turn to stand guard I took it with me. +Then I put it back again and went to sleep. When I awoke and +dressed I put the packet in my pocket and ate breakfast. Now when +I look for it--why, it's gone!" <br> +<p>"The map or the oiled-silk package?" asked Mr. Damon, who, +once having been a businessman, was sometimes a stickler for +small points.<br> +</p> + +"Both," answered the professor. "I opened the silk to tie it more +smoothly, so it would not be such a lump in my pocket, and I made +sure the map was inside." <br> +<p>"Then the whole thing has been taken--or you have lost it," +suggested Ned.<br> +</p> + +"I am not in the habit of losing valuable maps," retorted the +scientist. "And the pocket of my coat I had made deep, for the +purpose of carrying the long map. It could not drop out." <br> +<p>"Well, we mustn't overlook any possible chances," suggested +Tom. "Come on now, we'll search every inch of the ground over +which you traveled this morning, Professor."<br> +</p> + +"It MUST be found," murmured the scientist. "Without it all our +work will go for naught." <br> +<p>They all went into the tent where the professor and Mr. Damon +had slept when they were not on guard. The camp was a busy place, +with the Indians finishing their morning meal, and getting ready +for the work of the day. For word had been given out that there +would be no more long periods of travel.<br> +</p> + +In consequence, efforts were being directed by the head men of +the bearers to making a more permanent camp in the wilderness. +Shelters of palm-thatched huts were being built, a site for +cooking fires made, and, at the direction of Mr. Damon, to whom +this part was entrusted, some sanitary regulations were insisted +on. <br> +<p>Leaving this busy scene, the four, with solemn faces, +proceeded to the tent where it was hoped the map would be found. +But though they went through everything, and traced and retraced +every place the professor could remember having traversed about +the canvas shelter, no signs of the important document could be +found.<br> +</p> + +"I don't believe I dropped it out of my pocket," said the +scientist, for perhaps the twentieth time. <br> +<p>"Then it was taken," declared Tom.<br> +</p> + +"That's what I say!" chimed in Ned. "And by some of Beecher's +party!" <br> +<p>"Easy, my boy," cautioned Mr. Damon. "We don't want to make +accusations we can't prove."<br> +</p> + +"That is true," agreed Professor Bumper. "But, though I am sorry +to say it of a fellow archaelogist, I can not help thinking +Beecher had something to do with the taking of my map." <br> +<p>"But how could any of them get it?" asked Mr. Damon. "You say +you had the map this morning, and certainly none of them has been +in our camp since dawn, though of course it is possible that some +of them sneaked in during the night."<br> +</p> + +"It does seem a mystery how it could have been taken in open +daylight, while we were about camp together," said Tom. "But is +the loss such a grave one, Professor Bumper?" <br> +<p>"Very grave. In fact I may say it is impossible to proceed +with the excavating without the map."<br> +</p> + +"Then what are we to do?" asked Ned. <br> +<p>"We must get it back!" declared Tom.<br> +</p> + +"Yes," agreed the scientist, "we can not work without it. As soon +as I make a little further search, to make sure it could not have +dropped in some out-of-the-way place, I shall go over to +Professor Beecher's camp and demand that he give me back my +property." <br> +<p>"Suppose he says he hasn't taken it?" asked Tom.<br> +</p> + +"Well, I'm sure he either took it personally, or one of his party +did. And yet I can't understand how they could have come here +without our seeing them," and the professor shook his head in +puzzled despair. <br> +<p>A more detailed search did not reveal the missing map, and Mr. +Damon and his friend the scientist were on the point of departing +for the camp of their rivals, less than a mile away, when Tom had +what really amounted to an inspiration.<br> +</p> + +"Look here, Professor!" he cried. "Can you remember any of the +details of your map--say, for instance, where we ought to begin +excavating to get at the wonders of the underground city?" <br> +<p>"Well, Tom, I did intend to compare my map with the +configuration of the country about here. There is a certain +mountain which serves as a landmark and a guide for a starting +point. I think that is it over there," and the scientist pointed +to a distant snow-capped peak.<br> +</p> + +The party had left the low and marshy land of the true jungle, +and were among the foothills, though all about them was dense +forest and underbush, which, in reality, was as much a jungle as +the lower plains, but was less wet. <br> +<p>"The point where I believe we should start to dig," said the +professor, "is near the spot where the top of the mountain casts +a shadow when the sun is one hour high. At least that is the +direction given in the old manuscripts. So, though we can do +little without the map, we might make a start by digging +there."<br> +</p> + +"No, not there!" exclaimed Tom. <br> +<p>"Why not?"<br> +</p> + +"Because we don't want to let Beecher's crowd know that we are on +the track of the idol of gold." <br> +<p>"But they know anyhow, for they have the map," commented Ned, +puzzled by his chum's words.<br> +</p> + +"Maybe not," said Tom slowly. "I think this is a time for a big +bluff. It may work and it may not. Beecher's crowd either has the +map or they have not. If they have it they will lose no time in +trying to find the right place to start digging and then they'll +begin excavating. <br> +<p>"Very good! If they do that we have a right to dig near the +same place. But if they have not the map, which is possible, and +if we start to dig where the professor's memory tells him is the +right spot, we'll only give them the tip, and they'll dig there +also."<br> +</p> + +"I'm sure they have the map," the professor said. "But I believe +your plan is a good one, Tom." <br> +<p>"Just what do you propose doing?" asked Ned.<br> +</p> + +"Fooling 'em!" exclaimed Tom quickly. "We'll dig in some place +remote from the spot where the mountain casts its shadow. They +will think, if they haven't the map, that we are proceeding by +it, and they'll dig, too. When they find nothing, as will also +happen to us, they may go away. <br> +<p>"If, on the other hand, they have the map, and see us digging +at a spot not indicated on it, they will be puzzled, knowing we +must have some idea of where the buried city lies. They will +think the map is at fault, perhaps, and not make use of it. Then +we can get it back."<br> +</p> + +"Bless my hatband!" cried Mr. Damon. "I believe you're right, +Tom. We'll dig in the wrong place to fool 'em." <br> +<p>And this was done. Search for the precious map was given up +for the time being, and the professor and his friends set the +natives to work digging shafts in the ground, as though sinking +them down to the level of the buried city.<br> +</p> + +But though this false work was prosecuted with vigor for several +days, there was a feeling of despair among the Bumper party over +the loss of the map. <br> +<p>"If we could only get it back!" exclaimed the professor, again +and again.<br> +</p> + +Meanwhile the Beecher party seemed inactive. True, some members +of it did come over to look on from a respectful distance at what +the diggers were doing. Some of the rival helpers, under the +direction of the head of the expedition, also began sinking +shafts. But they were not in the locality remembered by Professor +Bumper as being correct. <br> +<p>"I can't imagine what they're up to," he said. "If they have +my map they would act differently, I should think."<br> +</p> + +"Whatever they're up to," answered Tom, "the time has come when +we can dig at the place where we can hope for results." And the +following day shafts were started in the shadow of the mountain. +<br> +<p>Until some evidence should have been obtained by digging, as +to the location beneath the surface of a buried city, there was +nothing for the travelers to do but wait. Turns were taken in +directing the efforts of the diggers, and an occasional +inspection was made of the shafts.<br> +</p> + +"What do you expect to find first?" asked Tom of Professor Bumper +one day, when the latter was at the top of a shaft waiting for a +bucket load of dirt to be hoisted up. <br> +<p>"Potsherds and artifacts," was the answer.<br> +</p> + +"What sort of bugs are they?" asked Ned with a laugh. He and Tom +were about to go hunting with their electric rifles. <br> +<p>"Artifacts are things made by the Indians--or whatever members +of the race who built the ancient cities were called--such as +household articles, vases, ornaments, tools and so on. Anything +made by artificial means is called an artifact."<br> +</p> + +"And potsherds are things with those Chinese laundry ticket +scratches on them," added Tom. <br> +<p>"Exactly," said the professor, laughing. "Though some of the +strange-appearing inscriptions give much valuable information. As +soon as we find some of them--say a broken bit of pottery with +hieroglyphics on--I will know I am on the right track."<br> +</p> + +And while the scientist and Mr. Damon kept watch at the top of +the shaft, Tom and Ned went out into the jungle to hunt. They had +killed some game, and were stalking a fine big deer, which would +provide a feast for the natives, when suddenly the silence of the +lonely forest was broken by a piercing scream, followed by an +agonized cry of <br> +<p>"El tigre! El tigre!"<br> +</p> + +<br> +<h1 id="ref_19">CHAPTER XIX</h1> + +POISONED ARROWS <br> +"Did you hear that, Tom?" asked Ned, in a hoarse whisper. <br> +<p>"Surely," was the cautious answer. "Keep still, and I'll try +for a shot."<br> +</p> + +"Better be quick," advised Ned in a tense voice. "The chap who +did that yelling seems to be in trouble!" <br> +<p>And as Ned's voice trailed off into a whisper, again came the +cry, this time in frenzied pain.<br> +</p> + +"El tigre! El tigre!" Then there was a jumble of words. <br> +<p>"It's over this way!" and this time Ned shouted, seeing no +need for low voices since the other was so loud.<br> +</p> + +Tom looked to where Ned had parted the bushes alongside a jungle +path. Through the opening the young inventor saw, in a little +glade, that which caused him to take a firmer grip on his +electric rifle, and also a firmer grip on his nerves. <br> +<p>Directly in front of him and Ned, and not more than a hundred +yards away, was a great tawny and spotted jaguar--the "tigre" or +tiger of Central America. The beast, with lashing tail, stood +over an Indian upon whom it seemed to have sprung from some lair, +beating the unfortunate man to the ground. Nor had he fallen +scatheless, for there was blood on the green leaves about him, +and it was not the blood of the spotted beast.<br> +</p> + +"Oh, Tom, can you--can you----" and Ned faltered. <br> +<p>The young inventor understood the unspoken question.<br> +</p> + +"I think I can make a shot of it without hitting the man," he +answered, never turning his head. "It's a question, though, if +the beast won't claw him in the death struggle. It won't last +long, however, if the electric bullet goes to the right place, +and I've got to take the chance." <br> +<p>Cautiously Tom brought his weapon to bear. Quiet as Ned and he +had been after the discovery, the jaguar seemed to feel that +something was wrong. Intent on his prey, for a time he had stood +over it, gloating. Now the brute glanced uneasily from side to +side, its tail nervously twitching, and it seemed trying to gain, +by a sniffing of the air, some information as to the direction in +which danger lay, for Tom and Ned had stooped low, concealing +themselves by a screen of leaves.<br> +</p> + +The Indian, after his first frenzied outburst of fear, now lay +quiet, as though fearing to move, moaning in pain. <br> +<p>Suddenly the jaguar, attracted either by some slight movement +on the part of Ned or Tom, or perhaps by having winded them, +turned his head quickly and gazed with cruel eyes straight at the +spot where the two young men stood behind the bushes.<br> +</p> + +"He's seen us," whispered Ned. <br> +<p>"Yes," assented Tom. "And it's a perfect shot. Hope I don't +miss!"<br> +</p> + +It was not like Tom Swift to miss, nor did he on this occasion. +There was a slight report from the electric rifle--a report not +unlike the crackle of the wireless--and the powerful projectile +sped true to its mark. <br> +<p>Straight through the throat and chest under the uplifted jaw +of the jaguar it went--through heart and lungs. Then with a great +coughing, sighing snarl the beast reared up, gave a convulsive +leap forward toward its newly discovered enemies, and fell dead +in a limp heap, just beyond the native over which it had been +crouching before it delivered the death stroke, now never to +fall.<br> +</p> + +"You did it, Tom! You did it!" cried Ned, springing up from where +he had been kneeling to give his chum a better chance to shoot. +"You did it, and saved the man's life!" And Ned would have rushed +out toward the still twitching body. <br> +<p>"Just a minute!" interposed Tom. "Those beasts sometimes have +as many lives as a cat. I'll give it one more for luck." Another +electric projectile through the head of the jaguar produced no +further effect than to move the body slightly, and this proved +conclusively that there was no life left. It was safe to +approach, which Tom and Ned did.<br> +</p> + +Their first thought, after a glance at the jaguar, was for the +Indian. It needed but a brief examination to show that he was not +badly hurt. The jaguar had leaped on him from a low tree as he +passed under it, as the boys learned afterward, and had crushed +the man to earth by the weight of the spotted body more than by a +stroke of the paw. <br> +<p>The American jaguar is not so formidable a beast as the native +name of tiger would cause one to suppose, though they are +sufficiently dangerous, and this one had rather badly clawed the +Indian. Fortunately the scratches were on the fleshy parts of the +arms and shoulders, where, though painful, they were not +necessarily serious.<br> +</p> + +"But if you hadn't shot just when you did, Tom, it would have +been all up with him," commented Ned. <br> +<p>"Oh, well, I guess you'd have hit him if I hadn't," returned +the young inventor. "But let's see what we can do for this +chap."<br> +</p> + +The man sat up wonderingly--hardly able to believe that he had +been saved from the dreaded "tigre." His wounds were bleeding +rather freely, and as Tom and Ned carried with them a first-aid +kit they now brought it into use. The wounds were bound up, the +man was given water to drink and then, as he was able to walk, +Tom and Ned offered to help him wherever he wanted to go. <br> +<p>"Blessed if I can tell whether he's one of our Indians or +whether he belongs to the Beecher crowd," remarked Tom.<br> +</p> + +"Senor Beecher," said the Indian, adding, in Spanish, that he +lived in the vicinity and had only lately been engaged by the +young professor who hoped to discover the idol of gold before +Tom's scientific friend could do so. <br> +<p>Tom and Ned knew a little Spanish, and with that, and simple +but expressive signs on the part of the Indian, they learned his +story. He had his palm-thatched hut not far from the Beecher +camp, in a small Indian village, and he, with others, had been +hired on the arrival of the Beecher party to help with the +excavations. These, for some reason, were delayed.<br> +</p> + +"Delayed because they daren't use the map they stole from us," +commented Ned. <br> +<p>"Maybe," agreed Tom.<br> +</p> + +The Indian, whose name, it developed, was Tal, as nearly as Tom +and Ned could master it, had left camp to go to visit his wife +and child in the jungle hut, intending to return to the Beecher +camp at night. But as he passed through the forest the jaguar had +dropped on him, bearing him to earth. <br> +<p>"But you saved my life, Senor," he said to Tom, dropping on +one knee and trying to kiss Tom's hand, which our hero avoided. +"And now my life is yours," added the Indian.<br> +</p> + +"Well, you'd better get home with it and take care of it," said +Tom. "I'll have Professor Bumper come over and dress your +scratches in a better and more careful way. The bandages we put +on are only temporary." <br> +<p>"My wife she make a poultice of leaves--they cure me," said +the Indian.<br> +</p> + +"I guess that will be the best way," observed Ned. "These natives +can doctor themselves for some things, better than we can." <br> +<p>"Well, we'll take him home," suggested Tom. "He might keel +over from loss of blood. Come on," he added to Tal, indicating +his object.<br> +</p> + +It was not far to the native's hut from the place where the +jaguar had been killed, and there Tom and Ned underwent another +demonstration of affection as soon as those of Tal's immediate +family and the other natives understood what had happened. <br> +<p>"I hate this business!" complained Tom, after having been +knelt to by the Indian's wife and child, who called him the +"preserver" and other endearing titles of the same kind. "Come +on, let's hike back."<br> +</p> + +But Indian hospitality, especially after a life has been saved, +is not so simple as all that. <br> +<p>"My life--my house--all that I own is yours," said Tal in deep +gratitude. "Take everything," and he waved his hand to indicate +all the possessions in his humble hut.<br> +</p> + +"Thanks," answered Tom, "but I guess you need all you have. +That's a fine specimen of blow gun though," he added, seeing one +hanging on the wall. "I wouldn't mind having one like that. If +you get well enough to make me one, Tal, and some arrows to go +with it, I'd like it for a curiosity to hang in my room at home." +<br> +<p>"The Senor shall have a dozen," promised the Indian.<br> +</p> + +"Look, Ned," went on Tom, pointing to the native weapon. "I never +saw one just like this. They use small arrows or darts, tipped +with wild cotton, instead of feathers." <br> +<p>"These the arrows," explained Tal's wife, bringing a bundle +from a corner of the one-room hut. As she held them out her +husband gave a cry of fear.<br> +</p> + +"Poisoned arrows! Poisoned arrows!" he exclaimed. "One scratch +and the senors are dead men. Put them away!" <br> +<p>In fear the Indian wife prepared to obey, but as she did so +Tom Swift caught sight of the package and uttered a strange +cry.<br> +</p> + +"Thundering hoptoads, Ned!" he exclaimed. "The poisoned arrows +are wrapped in the piece of oiled silk that was around the +professor's missing map!" <br> +<p><br> +</p> + +<h1 id="ref_20">CHAPTER XX</h1> + +AN OLD LEGEND <br> +<p>Fascinated, Tom and Ned gazed at the package the Indian woman +held out to them. Undoubtedly it was oiled silk on the outside, +and through the almost transparent covering could be seen the +small arrows, or darts, used in the blow gun.<br> +</p> + +"Where did you get that?" asked Tom, pointing to the bundle and +gazing sternly at Tal. <br> +<p>"What is the matter, Senor?" asked the Indian in turn. "Is it +that you are afraid of the poisoned arrows? Be assured they will +not harm you unless you are scratched by them."<br> +</p> + +Tom and Ned found it difficult to comprehend all the rapid +Spanish spoken by their host, but they managed to understand +some, and his eloquent gestures made up the rest. <br> +<p>"We're not afraid," Tom said, noting that the oiled skin well +covered the dangerous darts. "But where did you get that?"<br> +</p> + +"I picked it up, after another Indian had thrown it away. He got +it in your camp, Senor. I will not lie to you. I did not steal. +Valdez went to your camp to steal--he is a bad Indian-and he +brought back this wrapping. It contained something he thought was +gold, but it was not, so he----" <br> +<p>"Quick! Yes! Tell us!" demanded Tom eagerly. "What did he do +with the professor's map that was in the oiled silk? Where is +it?"<br> +</p> + +"Oh, Senors!" exclaimed the Indian woman, thinking perhaps her +husband was about to be dealt harshly with when she heard Tom's +excited voice. "Tal do no harm!" <br> +<p>"No, he did no harm," went on Tom, in a reassuring tone. "But +he can do a whole lot of good if he tells us what became of the +map that was in this oiled silk. Where is it?" he asked +again.<br> +</p> + +"Valdez burn it up," answered Tal. <br> +<p>"What, burned the professor's map?" cried Ned.<br> +</p> + +"If that was in this yellow cloth--yes," answered the injured +man. "Valdez he is bad. He say to me he is going to your camp to +see what he can take. How he got this I know not, but he come +back one morning with the yellow package. I see him, but he make +me promise not to tell. But you save my life I tell you +everything. <br> +<p>"Valdez open the package; but it is not gold, though he think +so because it is yellow, and the man with no hair on his head +keep it in his pocket close, so close," and Tal hugged himself to +indicate what he meant.<br> +</p> + +"That's Professor Bumper," explained Ned. <br> +<p>"How did Valdez get the map out of the professor's coat?" +asked Tom.<br> +</p> + +"Valdez he very much smart. When man with no hair on his head +take coat off for a minute to eat breakfast Valdez take yellow +thing out of pocket." <br> +<p>"The Indian must have sneaked into camp when we were eating," +said Tom. "Those from Beecher's party and our workers look all +alike to us. We wouldn't know one from the other, and one of our +rival's might slip in."<br> +</p> + +"One evidently did, if this is really the piece of oiled silk +that was around the professor's map," said Ned. <br> +<p>"It certainly is the same," declared the young inventor. "See, +there is his name," and he stretched out his hand to point.<br> +</p> + +"Don't touch!" cried Tal. "Poisoned arrows snake poison--very +dead-like and quick." <br> +<p>"Don't worry, I won't touch," said Tom grimly. "But go on. You +say Valdez sneaked into our camp, took the oiled-silk package +from the coat pocket of Professor Bumper and went back to his own +camp with it, thinking it was gold."<br> +</p> + +"Yes," answered Tal, though it is doubtful if he understood all +that Tom said, as it was half Spanish and half English. But the +Indian knew a little English, too. "Valdez, when he find no gold +is very mad. Only papers in the yellow silk-papers with queer +marks on. Valdez think it maybe a charm to work evil, so he burn +them up--all up!" <br> +<p>"Burned that rare map!" gasped Tom.<br> +</p> + +"All in fire," went on Tal, indicating by his hands the play of +flames. "Valdez throw away yellow silk, and I take for my arrows +so rain not wash off poison. I give to you, if you like, with +blow gun." <br> +<p>"No, thank you," answered Tom, in disappointed tones. "The +oiled silk is of no use without the map, and that's gone. Whew! +but this is tough!" he said to his chum. "As long as it was only +stolen there was a chance to get it back, but if it's burned, the +jig is up."<br> +</p> + +"It looks so," agreed Ned. "We'd better get back and tell the +professor. It he can't get along without the map it's time he +started a movement toward getting another. So it wasn't Beecher, +after all, who got it." <br> +<p>"Evidently not," assented Tom. "But I believe him capable of +it."<br> +</p> + +"You haven't much use for him," remarked Ned. <br> +<p>"Huh!" was all the answer given by his chum.<br> +</p> + +"I am sorry, Senors," went on Tal, "but I could not stop Valdez, +and the burning of the papers----" <br> +<p>"No, you could not help it," interrupted the young inventor. +"But it just happens that it brings bad luck to us. You see, Tal, +the papers in this yellow covering, told of an old buried city +that the bald-headed +professor--the-manwith-no-hair-on-his-head--is very anxious to +discover. It is somewhere under the ground," and he waved to the +jungle all about them, pointing earthwards.<br> +</p> + +"Paper Valdez burn tell of lost city?" asked Tal, his face +lighting up. <br> +<p>"Yes. But now, of course, we can't tell where to dig for +it."<br> +</p> + +The Indian turned to his wife and talked rapidly with her in +their own dialect. She, too, seemed greatly excited, making quick +gestures. Finally she ran out of the hut. <br> +<p>"Where is she going?" asked Tom suspiciously.<br> +</p> + +"To get her grandfather. He very old Indian. He know story of +buried cities under trees. Very old story--what you call legend, +maybe. But Goosal know. He tell same as his grandfather told him. +You wait. Goosal come, and you listen." <br> +<p>"Good, Ned!" suddenly cried Tom. "Maybe, we'll get on the +track of lost Kurzon after all, through some ancient Indian +legend. Maybe we won't need the map!"<br> +</p> + +"It hardly seems possible," said Ned slowly. "What can these +Indians know of buried cities that were out of existence before +Columbus came here? Why, they haven't any written history." <br> +<p>"No, and that may be just the reason they are more likely to +be right," returned Tom. "Legends handed down from one +grandfather to another go back a good many hundred years. If they +were written they might be destroyed as the professor's map was. +Somehow or other, though I can't tell why, I begin to see +daylight ahead of us."<br> +</p> + +"I wish I did," remarked Ned. <br> +<p>"Here comes Goosal I think," murmured Tom, and he pointed to +an Indian, bent with the weight of years, who, led by Tal's wife, +was slowly approaching the hut.<br> +</p> + +<br> +<h1 id="ref_21">CHAPTER XXI</h1> + +THE CAVERN <br> +"Now Goosal can tell you," said Tal, evidently pleased that he +had, in a measure, solved the problem caused by the burning of +the professor's map. "Goosal very old Indian. He know old +stories--legends--very old." <br> +<p>"Well, if he can tell us how to find the buried city of Kurzon +and the--the things in it," said Tom, "he's all right!"<br> +</p> + +The aged Indian proceeded slowly toward the hut where the +impatient youths awaited him. <br> +<p>"I know what you seek in the buried city," remarked Tal.<br> +</p> + +"Do you?" cried Tom, wondering if some one had indiscreetly +spoken of the idol of gold. <br> +<p>"Yes you want pieces of rock, with strange writings on them, +old weapons, broken pots. I know. I have helped white men +before."<br> +</p> + +"Yes, those are the things we want," agreed Tom, with a glance at +his chum. "That is--some of them. But does your wife's +grandfather talk our language?" <br> +<p>"No, but I can tell you what he says."<br> +</p> + +By this time the old man, led by "Mrs. Tal"-as the young men +called the wife of the Indian they had helped--entered the hut. +He seemed nervous and shy, and glanced from Tom and Ned to his +grandson-in-law, as the latter talked rapidly in the Indian +dialect. Then Goosal made answer, but what it was all about the +boys could not tell. <br> +<p>"Goosal say," translated Tal, "that he know a story of a very +old city away down under ground."<br> +</p> + +"Tell us about it!" urged Tom eagerly. <br> +<p>But a difficulty very soon developed. Tal's intentions were +good, but he was not equal to the task of translating. Nor was +the understanding of Tom and Ned of Spanish quite up to the +mark.<br> +</p> + +"Say, this is too much for me!" exclaimed Tom. "We are losing the +most valuable part of this by not understanding what Goosal says, +and what Tal translates." <br> +<p>"What can we do?" asked Ned.<br> +</p> + +"Get the professor here as soon as possible. He can manage this +dialect, and he'll get the information at first hand. If Goosal +can tell where to begin excavating for the city he ought to tell +the professor, not us." <br> +<p>"That's right," agreed Ned. "We'll bring the professor here as +soon as we can."<br> +</p> + +Accordingly they stopped the somewhat difficult task of listening +to the translated story and told Tal, as well as they could, that +they would bring the "man-with-no-hair-on-his-head" to listen to +the tale. <br> +<p>This seemed to suit the Indians, all of whom in the small +colony appeared to be very grateful to Tom and Ned for having +saved the life of Tal.<br> +</p> + +"That was a good shot you made when you bowled over the jaguar," +said Ned, as the two young explorers started back to their camp. +<br> +<p>"Better than I realized, if it leads to the discovery of +Kurzon and the idol of gold," remarked Tom.<br> +</p> + +"And to think we should come across the oiledsilk holding the +poisoned arrows!" went on Ned. "That's the strangest part of the +whole affair. If it hadn't been that you shot the jaguar this +never would have come about." <br> +<p>That Professor Bumper was astonished, and Mr. Damon likewise, +when they heard the story of Tom and Ned, is stating it +mildly.<br> +</p> + +"Come on!" exclaimed the scientist, as Tom finished, "we must see +this Goosal at once. If my map is destroyed, and it seems to be, +this old Indian may be our only hope. Where did he say the buried +city was, Tom?" <br> +<p>"Oh, somewhere in this vicinity, as nearly as I could make +out. But you'd better talk with him yourself. We didn't say +anything about the idol of gold."<br> +</p> + +"That's right. It's just as well to let the natives think we are +only after ordinary relics." <br> +<p>"Bless my insurance policy!" gasped Mr. Damon. "It does not +seem possible that we are on the right track."<br> +</p> + +"Well, I think we are, from what little information Goosal gave +us," remarked Tom. "This buried city of his must be a wonderful +place." <br> +<p>"It is, if it is what I take it to be," agreed the professor. +"I told you I would bring you to a land of wonders, Tom Swift, +and they have hardly begun yet. Come, I am anxious to talk to +Goosal."<br> +</p> + +In order that the Indians in the Bumper camp might not hear +rumors of the new plan to locate the hidden city, and, at the +same time, to keep rumors from spreading to the camp of the +rivals, the scientist and his friends started a new shaft, and +put a shift of men at work on it. <br> +<p>"We'll pretend we are on the right track, and very busy," said +Tom. "That will fool Beecher."<br> +</p> + +"Are you glad to know he did not take your map Professor Bumper?" +asked Mr. Damon. <br> +<p>"Well, yes. It is hard to believe such things of a fellow +scientist."<br> +</p> + +"If he didn't take it he wanted to," said Tom. "And he has done, +or will do, things as unsportsmanlike." <br> +<p>"Oh, you are hardly fair, perhaps, Tom," commented Ned.<br> +</p> + +"Um!" was all the answer he received. <br> +<p>With the Indians in camp busy on the excavation work, and +having ascertained that similar work was going on in the Beecher +outfit, Professor Bumper, with Mr. Damon and the young men, set +off to visit the Indian village and listen to Goosal's story. +They passed the place where Tom had slain the jaguar, but nothing +was left but the bones; the ants, vultures and jungle animals +having picked them clean in the night.<br> +</p> + +On the arrival of Tom and his friends at the Indian's hut, Goosal +told, in language which Professor Bumper could understand, the +ancient legend of the buried city as he had had it from his +grandfather. <br> +<p>"But is that all you know about it, Goosal?" asked the +savant.<br> +</p> + +"No, Learned One. It is true most of what I have told you was +told to me by my father and his father's father. But I--I +myself--with these eyes, have looked upon the lost city." <br> +<p>"You have!" cried the professor, this time in English. "Where? +When? Take us to it! How do you get here?"<br> +</p> + +"Through the cavern of the dead," was the answer when the +questions were modified. <br> +<p>"Bless my diamond ring!" exclaimed Mr. Damon, when Professor +Bumper translated the reply. "What does he mean?"<br> +</p> + +And then, after some talk, this information came out. Years +before, when Goosal was a young man, he had been taken by his +grandfather on a journey through the jungle. They stopped one day +at the foot of a high mountain, and, clearing away the brush and +stones at a certain place, an entrance to a great cavern was +revealed. This, it appeared, was the Indian burial ground, and +had been used for generations. <br> +<p>Goosal, though in fear and trembling, was lead through it, and +came to another cavern, vaster than the first. And there he saw +strange and wonderful sights, for it was the remains of a buried +city, that had once been the home of a great and powerful tribe +unlike the Indians--the ancient Mayas it would seem.<br> +</p> + +"Can you take us to this cavern?" asked the professor. <br> +<p>"Yes," answered Goosal. "I will lead to it those who saved the +life of Tal--them and their friends. I will take you to the lost +city!"<br> +</p> + +"Good!" cried Mr. Damon, when this had been translated. "Now let +Beecher try to play any more tricks on us! Ho! for the cavern and +the lost city of Kurzon." <br> +<p>"And the idol of gold," said Tom Swift to himself. "I hope we +can get it ahead of Beecher. Perhaps if I can help in that--Oh, +well, here's hoping, that's all!" and a little smile curved his +lips.<br> +</p> + +Greatly excited by the strange news, but maintaining as calm an +air outwardly as possible, so as not to excite the Indians, Tom +and his friends returned to camp to prepare for their trip. +Goosal had said the cavern lay distant more than a twodays' +journey into the jungle. <br> +<p><br> +</p> + +<h1 id="ref_22">CHAPTER XXII</h1> + +THE STORM <br> +<p>"Now," remarked Tom, once they were back again in their camp, +"we must go about this trip to the cavern in a way that will +cause no suspicion over there as to what our object is," and he +nodded in the direction of the quarters of his rival.<br> +</p> + +"Do you mean to go off quietly?" asked Ned. <br> +<p>"Yes. And to keep the work going on here, at these shafts," +put in the scientist, "so that if any of their spies happen to +come here they will think we still believe the buried city to be +just below us. To that end we must keep the Indians digging, +though I am convinced now that it is useless."<br> +</p> + +Accordingly preparations were made for an expedition into the +jungle under the leadership of Goosal. Tal had not sufficiently +recovered from the jaguar wounds to go with the party, but the +old man, in spite of his years, was hale and hearty and capable +of withstanding hardships. <br> +<p>One of the most intelligent of the Indians was put in charge +of the digging gangs as foreman, and told to keep them at work, +and not to let them stray. Tolpec, whose brother Tom had tried to +save, proved a treasure. He agreed to remain behind and look +after the interests of his friends, and see that none of their +baggage or stores were taken.<br> +</p> + +"Well, I guess we're as ready as we ever shall be," remarked Tom, +as the cavalcade made ready to start. Mules carried the supplies +that were to be taken into the jungle, and others of the sturdy +animals were to be ridden by the travelers. The trail was not an +easy one, Goosal warned them. <br> +<p>Tom and his friends found it even worse than they had +expected, for all their experience in jungle and mountain +traveling. In places it was necessary to dismount and lead the +mules along, sometimes pushing and dragging them. More than once +the trail fairly hung on the edge of some almost bottomless +gorge, and again it wound its way between great walls of rock, so +poised that they appeared about to topple over and crush the +travelers. But they kept on with dogged patience, through many +hardships.<br> +</p> + +To add to their troubles they seemed to have entered the abode of +the fiercest mosquitoes encountered since coming to Honduras. At +times it was necessary to ride along with hats covered with +mosquito netting, and hands encased in gloves. <br> +<p>They had taken plenty of condensed food with them, and they +did not suffer in this respect. Game, too, was plentiful and the +electric rifles of Tom and Ned added to the larder.<br> +</p> + +One night, after a somewhat sound sleep induced by hard travel on +the trail that day, Tom awoke to hear some one or something +moving about among their goods, which included their provisions. +<br> +<p>"Who's there?" asked the young inventor sharply, as he reached +for his electric rifle.<br> +</p> + +There was no answer, but a rattling of the pans. <br> +<p>"Speak, or I'll fire!" Tom warned, adding this in such Spanish +as he could muster, for he thought it might be one of the +Indians. No reply came, and then, seeing by the light of the +stars a dark form moving in front of the tent occupied by himself +and Ned, Tom fired.<br> +</p> + +There was a combined grunt and squeal of pain, then a savage +growl, and Ned yelled: <br> +<p>"What's the matter, Tom?" for he had been awakened, and heard +the crackle of the electrical discharge.<br> +</p> + +"I don't know," Tom answered. "But I shot something--or +somebody!" <br> +<p>"Maybe some of Beecher's crowd," ventured his chum. But when +they got their electric torches, and focused them on the inert, +black object, it was found to be a bear which had come to nose +about the camp for dainty morsels.<br> +</p> + +Bruin was quite dead, and as he was in prime condition there was +a feast of bear meat at the following dinner. The white travelers +found it rather too strong for their palates, but the Indians +reveled in it. <br> +<p>It was shortly after noon the next day, when Goosal, after +remarking that a storm seemed brewing, announced that they would +be at the entrance to the cavern in another hour.<br> +</p> + +"Good!" cried Professor Bumper. "At last we are near the buried +city." <br> +<p>"Don't be too sure," advised Mr. Damon, "We may be +disappointed. Though I hope not for your sake, my dear +Professor."<br> +</p> + +Goosal now took the lead, and the old Indian, traveling on foot, +for he said he could better look for the old landmark that way +than on the back of a mule, walked slowly along a rough cliff. +<br> +<p>"Here. somewhere, is the entrance to the cavern," said the +aged man. "It was many years ago that I was here--many years. But +it seems as though yesterday. It is little changed."<br> +</p> + +Indeed little did change in that land of wonders. Only nature +caused what alterations there were. The hand of man had long been +absent. <br> +<p>Slowly Goosal walked along the rocky trail, on one side a +sheer rock, towering a hundred feet or more toward the sky. On +the other side a deep gash leading to a great fertile valley +below.<br> +</p> + +Suddenly the old man paused, and looked about him as though +uncertain. Then, more slowly still, he put out his hand and +pulled at some bushes that grew on a ledge of the rock. They came +away, having no depth of earth, and a small opening was +disclosed. <br> +<p>"It is here," said Goosal quietly. "The entrance to the cavern +that leads to the burial place of the dead, and the city that is +dead also. It is here."<br> +</p> + +He stood aside while the others hurried forward. It took but a +few minutes to prove that he was right--at least as to the +existence of the cavern--for the four men were soon peering into +the opening. <br> +<p>"Come on!" cried Tom, impetuously.<br> +</p> + +"Wait a moment," suggested the professor, "Sometimes the air in +these places is foul. We must test it." But a torch one of the +Indians threw in burned with a steady glow. That test was +conclusive at least. They made ready to enter. <br> +<p>Torches of a light bark, that glowed with a steady flame and +little smoke, had been provided, as well as a good supply of +electric dry-battery lamps, and the way into the cavern was thus +well lighted. At first the Indians were afraid to enter, but a +word or two from Goosal reassured them, and they followed +Professor Bumper, Tom, and the others into the cavern.<br> +</p> + +For several hundred feet there was nothing remarkable about the +cave. It was like any other cavern of the mountains, though +wonderful for the number of crystal formations on the root and +walls--formations that sparkled like a million diamonds in the +flickering lights. <br> +<p>"Talk about a wonderland!" cried Tom. "This is fairyland!"<br> +</p> + +A moment later, as Goosal walked on beside the professor and Tom, +the aged Indian came to a pause, and, pointing ahead, murmured: +<br> +<p>"The city of the dead!"<br> +</p> + +They saw the niches cut in the rock walls. niches that held the +countless bones of those who had died many, many years before. It +was a vast Indian grave. <br> +<p>"Doubtless a wealth of material of historic interest here," +said Professor Bumper, flashing his torch on the skeletons. "But +it will keep. Where is the city you spoke of, Goosal?"<br> +</p> + +"Farther on, Senor. Follow me." <br> +<p>Past the stone graves they went, deeper and deeper into the +great cave. Their footsteps echoed and re-echoed. Suddenly Tom, +who with Ned had gone a little ahead, came to a sudden halt and +said:<br> +</p> + +"Well, this may be a burial place sure enough, but I think I see +something alive all right--if it isn't a ghost." <br> +<p>He pointed ahead. Surely those were lights flickering and +moving about, and, yes, there were men carrying them. The Bumper +party came to a surprised halt. The other lights advanced, and +then, to the great astonishment of Professor Bumper and his +friends, there confronted them in the cave several scientists of +Professor Beecher's party and a score or more of Indians. +Professor Hylop, who was known to Professor Bumper, stepped +forward and asked sharply:<br> +</p> + +"What are you doing here?" <br> +<p>"I might ask you the same thing," was the retort.<br> +</p> + +"You might, but you would not be answered," came sharply. "We +have a right here, having discovered this cavern, and we claim it +under a concession of the Honduras Government. I shall have to +ask you to withdraw." <br> +<p>"Do you mean leave here?" asked Mr Damon.<br> +</p> + +"That is it, exactly. We first discovered this cave. We have been +conducting explorations in it for several days, and we wish no +outsiders." <br> +<p>"Are you speaking for Professor Beecher"' asked Tom.<br> +</p> + +"I am. But he is here in the cave, and will speak for himself if +you desire it. But I represent him, and I order you to leave. If +you do not go peaceably we will use force. We have plenty of it," +and he glanced back at the Indians grouped behind him--scowling +savage Indians. <br> +<p>"We have no wish to intrude," observed Professor Bumper, "and +I fully recognize the right of prior discovery. But one member of +our party (he did not say which one) was in this cave many years +ago. He led us to it."<br> +</p> + +"Ours is a government concession!" exclaimed Professor Hylop +harshly. "We want no intruders! Go!" and he pointed toward the +direction whence Tom's party had come. <br> +<p>"Drive them out!" he ordered the Indians in Spanish, and with +muttered threats the darkskinned men advanced toward Tom and the +others.<br> +</p> + +"You need not use force," said Professor Bumper. <br> +<p>He and Professor Hylop had quarreled bitterly years before on +some scientific matter, and the matter was afterward found to be +wrong. Perhaps this made him vindictive.<br> +</p> + +Tom stepped forward and started to protest, but Professor Bumper +interposed. <br> +<p>"I guess there is no help for it but to go. It seems to be +theirs by right of discovery and government concession," he said, +in disappointed tone. "Come friends"; and dejectedly they +retraced their steps.<br> +</p> + +Followed by the threatening Indians, the Bumper party made its +way back to the entrance. They had hoped for great things, but if +the cavern gave access to the buried city--the ancient city of +Kurzon on the chief altar of which stood the golden idol, +Quitzel--it looked as though they were never to enter it. <br> +<p>"We'll have to get our Indians and drive those fellows out!" +declared Tom. "I'm not going to be beaten this way--and by +Beecher!"<br> +</p> + +"It is galling," declared Professor Bumper. "Still he has right +on his side, and I must give in to priority, as I would expect +him to. It is the unwritten law." <br> +<p>"Then we've failed!" cried Tom bitterly.<br> +</p> + +"Not yet," said Professor Bumper. "If I can not unearth that +buried city I may find another in this wonderland. I shall not +give up." <br> +<p>"Hark! What's that noise?" asked Tom, as they approached the +entrance to the cave.<br> +</p> + +"Sounds like a great wind blowing," commented Ned. <br> +<p>It was. As they stood in the entrance they looked out to find +a fierce storm raging. The wind was sweeping down the rocky +trail, the rain was falling in veritable bucketfuls from the +overhanging cliff, and deafening thunder and blinding lightning +roared and flashed.<br> +</p> + +"Surely you would not drive us out in this storm," said Professor +Bumper to his former rival. <br> +<p>"You can not stay in the cave! You must get out!" was the +answer, as a louder crash of thunder than usual seemed to shake +the very mountain.<br> +</p> + +<br> +<h1 id="ref_23">CHAPTER XXIII</h1> + +ENTOMBED ALIVE <br> +For an instant Tom and his friends paused at the entrance to the +wonderful cavern, and looked at the raging storm. It seemed +madness to venture out into it, yet they had been driven from the +cave by those who had every right of discovery to say who, and +who should not, partake of its hospitality. <br> +<p>"We can't go out into that blow!" cried Ned. "It's enough to +loosen the very mountains!"<br> +</p> + +"Let's stay here and defy them!" murmured Tom. "If the--if what +we seek--is here we have as good a right to it as they have." +<br> +<p>"We must go out," said Professor Bumper simply. "I recognize +the right of my rival to dispossess us."<br> +</p> + +"He may have the right, but it isn't human," said Mr. Damon. +"Bless my overshoes! If Beecher himself were here he wouldn't +have the heart to send us out in this storm." <br> +<p>"I would not give him the satisfaction of appealing to him," +remarked Professor Bumper. "Come, we will go out. We have our +ponchos, and we are not fair-weather explorers. If we can't get +to the lost city one way we will another. Come my friends."<br> +</p> + +And despite the downpour, the deafening thunder and the lightning +that seemed ready to sear one's eyes, he walked out of the cave +entrance, followed by Tom and the others. <br> +<p>"Come on!" cried Tom, in a voice he tried to render confident, +as they went out into the terrible storm. "We'll beat 'em +yet!"<br> +</p> + +The rain fell harder than ever. Small torrents were now rushing +down the trail, and it was only a question of a few minutes +before the place where they stood would be a raging river, so +quickly does the rain collect in the mountains and speed toward +the valleys. <br> +<p>"We must take to the forest!" cried Tom. "There'll be some +shelter there, and I don't like the way the geography of this +place is behaving. There may be a landslide at any moment."<br> +</p> + +As he spoke he motioned upward through the mist of the rain to +the sloping side of the mountain towering above them. Loose +stones were beginning to roll down, accompanied by patches of +earth loosened by the water. Some of the patches carried with +them bunches of grass and small bushes. <br> +<p>"Yes, it will be best to move into the jungle," said the +professor. "Goosal, you had better take the lead."<br> +</p> + +It was wonderful to see how well the aged Indian bore up in spite +of his years, and walked on ahead. They had left their mules +tethered some distance back, in a sheltering clump of trees, and +they hoped the animals would be safe. <br> +<p>The guide found a place where they could leave the trail, +though going down a dangerous slope, and take to the forest. As +carefully as possible they descended this, the rain continuing to +fall, the wind to blow, the lightning to sizzle all about them +and the thunder to boom in their ears.<br> +</p> + +They went on until they were beneath the shelter of the thick +jungle growth of trees, which kept off some of the pelting drops. +<br> +<p>"This is better!" exclaimed Ned, shaking his poncho and +getting rid of some of the water that had settled on it.<br> +</p> + +"Bless my overcoat!" cried Mr. Damon. "We seem to have gotten out +of the frying pan into the fire!" <br> +<p>"How?" asked Tom. "We are partly sheltered here, though had we +stayed in the cave in spite of----"<br> +</p> + +A deafening crash interrupted him, and following the flash one of +the giant trees of the forest was seen to blaze up and then +topple over. <br> +<p>"Struck by lightning!" yelled Ned.<br> +</p> + +"Yes; and it may happen to us!" exclaimed Mr. Damon. "We were +safer from the lightning in the open. Maybe----" <br> +<p>Again came an interruption, but this time a different one. The +very ground beneath their feet seemed to be shaking and +trembling.<br> +</p> + +"What is it?" gasped Ned, while Goosal fell on his knees and +began fervently to pray. <br> +<p>"It's an earthquake!" yelled Tom Swift.<br> +</p> + +As he spoke there came another sound--the sound of a mass of +earth in motion. It came from the direction of the mountain trail +they had just left. They looked toward it and their +horrorstricken eyes saw the whole side of the mountain sliding +down. <br> +<p>Slowly at first the earth slid down, but constantly gathering +force and speed. In the face of this new disaster the rain seemed +to have ceased and the thunder and lightning to be less severe. +It was as though one force of nature gave way to the other.<br> +</p> + +"Look! Look!" gasped Ned. <br> +<p>In silence, which was broken now only by a low and ominous +rumble, more menacing than had been the awful fury of the +elements, the travelers looked.<br> +</p> + +Suddenly there was a quicker movement of seemingly one whole +section of the mountain. Great rocks and trees, carried down by +the appalling force of the landslide were slipping over the +trail, obliterating it as though it had never existed. <br> +<p>"There goes the entrance to the cavern!" cried Ned, and as the +others looked to where he pointed they saw the hole in the side +of the mountain --the mouth of the cave that led to the lost city +of Kurzon--completely covered by thousands of tons of earth and +stones.<br> +</p> + +"That's the end of them!" exclaimed Tom, as the rumble of the +earthquake died away. <br> +<p>"Of----" Ned stopped, his eyes staring.<br> +</p> + +"Of Professor Beecher's party. They're entombed alive!" <br> +<p><br> +</p> + +<h1 id="ref_24">CHAPTER XXIV</h1> + +THE REVOLVING STONE <br> +<p>Stunned, not alone by the realization of the awfulness of the +fate of their rivals, but also by the terrific storm and the +effect of the earthquake and the landslide, Tom and his friends +remained for a moment gazing toward the mouth of the cavern, now +completely out of sight, buried by a mass of broken trees, +tangled bushes, rocks and earth. Somewhere, far beyond that mass, +was the Beecher party, held prisoners in the cave that formed the +entrance to the buried city.<br> +</p> + +Tom was the first to come to a realization of what was needed to +be done. <br> +<p>"We must help them!" he exclaimed, and it was characteristic +of him that he harbored no enmity.<br> +</p> + +"How?" asked Ned. <br> +<p>"We must get a force of Indians and dig them out," was the +prompt answer.<br> +</p> + +At Tom's vigorous words Professor Bumper's forces were energized +into action, and he stated: "Fortunately we have plenty of +excavating tools. We may be in time to save them. Come on! the +storm seems to have passed as suddenly as it came up, and the +earthquake, which, after all did not cover a wide area, seems to +be over. We must start the work of rescue at once. We must go +back to camp and get all the help we can muster." <br> +<p>The storm, indeed, seemed to be over, but it was no easy +matter to get back over the soggy, rain-soaked ground to the +trail they had left to take shelter in the forest. Fortunately +the earthquake had not involved that portion where they had left +their mules, but most of the frightened animals had broken loose, +and it was some little time before they could all be caught.<br> +</p> + +"It is no use to try to get back to camp tonight," said Tom, when +the last of the pack and saddle animals had been corralled. "It +is getting late and there is no telling the condition of the +trail. We must stay here until morning." <br> +<p>"But what about them?" and Mr. Damon nodded in the direction +of the entombed ones.<br> +</p> + +"We can help them best by waiting until the beginning of a new +day," said the professor. "We shall need a large force, and we +could not bring it up to-night. Besides, Tom is right, and if we +tried to go along the trail after dark, torn and disturbed as it +is bound to be by the rain, we might get into difficulties +ourselves. No, we must camp here until morning and then go for +help." <br> +<p>They all decided finally this was best. The professor, too, +pointed out that their rivals were in a large and roomy cave, not +likely to suffer from lack of air nor food or water, since they +must have supplies with them.<br> +</p> + +"The only danger is that the cave has been crushed in," added +Tom; "but in that event we would be of no service to them +anyhow." <br> +<p>The night seemed very long, and it was a most uncomfortable +one, because of the shock and exertions through which the party +had passed. Added to this was the physical discomfort caused by +the storm.<br> +</p> + +But in time there was the light in the east that meant morning +was at hand, and with it came action. A hasty breakfast, cups of +steaming coffee forming a most welcome part, put them all in +better condition, and once more they were on their way, heading +back to the main camp where they had left their force of Indians. +<br> +<p>"My!" exclaimed Tom, as they made their way slowly along, "it +surely was some storm! Look at those big trees uprooted over +there. They're almost as big as the giant redwoods of California, +and yet they were bowled over as if they were tenpins."<br> +</p> + +"I wonder if the wind did it or the earthquake," ventured Mr. +Damon. <br> +<p>"No wind could do that," declared Ned. "It must have been the +landslide caused by the earthquake."<br> +</p> + +"The wind could do it if the ground was made soft by the rain; +and that was probably what did it," suggested Tom. <br> +<p>"There is no harm in settling the point," commented Professor +Bumper. "It is not far off our trail, and will take only a few +minutes to go over to the trees. I should like to get some +photographs to accompany an article that perhaps I shall write on +the effects of sudden and severe tropical storms. We will go to +look at the overturned trees and then we'll hurry on to camp to +get the rescue party."<br> +</p> + +The uprooted trees lay on one side of the mountain trail, perhaps +a mile from the mouth of the cave which had been covered over, +entombing the Beecher party. Leaving the mules in charge of one +of the Indians, Professor Bumper and his friends, accompanied by +Goosal, approached the fallen trees. As they neared them they saw +that in falling the trees had lifted with their roots a large +mass of earth and imbedded rocks that had clung to the twisted +and gnarled fibers. This mass was as large as a house. <br> +<p>"Look at the hole left when the roots pulled out!" cried Ned. +"Why, it's like the crater of a small volcano!" he added. And, as +they stood on the edge of it looking curiously at the hole made, +the others agreed with Tom's chum.<br> +</p> + +Professor Bumper was looking about, trying to ascertain if there +were any evidences of the earthquake in the vicinity, when Tom, +who had cautiously gone a little way down into the excavation +caused by the fallen trees, uttered a cry of surprise. <br> +<p>"Look!" he shouted. "Isn't that some sort of tunnel or +underground passage?" and he pointed to a square opening, perhaps +seven feet high and nearly as broad, which extended, no one knew +where, downward and onward from the side of the hole made by the +uprooting of the trees.<br> +</p> + +"It's an underground passage all right," said Professor Bumper +eagerly; "and not a natural one, either. That was fashioned by +the hand of man, if I am any judge. It seems to go right under +the mountain, too. Friends, we must explore this! It may be of +the utmost importance! Come, we have our electric torches, and we +shall need them, for it's very dark in there," and he peered into +the passage in front of which they all stood now. It seemed to +have been tunneled through the earth, the sides being lined by +either slabs of stone, or walls made by a sort of concrete. <br> +<p>"But what about the rescue work?" asked Mr. Damon.<br> +</p> + +"I am not forgetting Professor Beecher and his friends," answered +the scientist. <br> +<p>"Perhaps this may be a better means of rescuing them than by +digging them out, which will take a week at least," observed +Tom.<br> +</p> + +"This a better way?" asked Ned, pointing to the tunnel. <br> +<p>"That's it," confirmed the savant. "If you will notice it +extends back in the direction of the cave from which we were +driven. Now if there is a buried city beneath all this jungle, +this mountain of earth and stones, the accumulation of centuries, +it is probably on the bottom of some vast cavern. It is my +opinion that we were only in one end of that cavern, and this may +be the entrance to another end of it."<br> +</p> + +"Then," asked Mr. Damon, "do you mean that we can enter here, get +into the cave that contains the buried city, or part of it, and +find there Beecher and his friends?" <br> +<p>"That's it. It is possible, and if we could it would save an +immense lot of work, and probably be a surer way to save their +lives than by digging a tunnel through the landslide to find the +mouth of the cave where we first entered."<br> +</p> + +"It's a chance worth taking," said Mr. Damon. "Of course it is a +chance. But then everything connected with this expedition is; so +one is no worse than another. As you say, we may find the +entombed men more easily this way than any other." <br> +<p>"I wonder," said Tom slowly, "if, by any chance, we shall +find, through this passage, the lost city we are looking +for."<br> +</p> + +"And the idol of gold," added Ned. <br> +<p>"Goosal, do you know anything about this?" asked Professor +Bumper. "Did you ever hear of another passage leading to the cave +where you saw the ancient city?"<br> +</p> + +"No, Learned One, though I have heard stories about there being +many cities, or parts of a big one, beneath the mountain, and +when it was above ground there were many entrances to it." <br> +<p>"That settles it!" cried the professor in English, having +talked to Goosal in Spanish. "We'll try this and see where it +leads."<br> +</p> + +They entered the stone-lined passage. In spite of the fact that +it had probably been buried and concealed from light and air for +centuries, as evidenced by the growth of the giant trees above +it, the air was fresh. <br> +<p>"And this is one reason," said Tom, in commenting on this +fact, "why I believe it leads to some vast cavern which is +connected in some fashion with the outer air. Well, perhaps we +shall soon make a discovery."<br> +</p> + +Eagerly and anxiously the little party pressed forward by the +light of the pocket electric lamps. They were obsessed by two +thoughts--what they might find and the necessity for aiding in +the rescue of their rivals. <br> +<p>On and on they went, the darkness illuminated only by the +torches they carried. But they noticed that the air was still +fresh, and that a gentle wind blew toward them. The passage was +undoubtedly artificial, a tunnel made by the hands of men now +long crumbled into dust. It had a slightly upward slope, and +this, Professor Bumper said, indicated that it was bored upward +and perhaps into the very heart of the mountain somewhere in the +interior of which was the Beecher party.<br> +</p> + +Just how far they went they did not know, but it must have been +more than two miles. Yet they did not tire, for the way was +smooth. <br> +<p>Suddenly Tom, who, with Professor Bumper, was in the lead, +uttered a cry, as he held his torch above his head and flashed it +about in a circle.<br> +</p> + +"We're blocked!" he exclaimed. "We're up against a stone wall!" +<br> +<p>It was but too true. Confronting them, and extending from side +to side across the passage and from roof to floor, was a great +rough stone. Immense and solid it seemed when they pushed on it +in vain.<br> +</p> + +"Nothing short of dynamite will move that," said Ned in despair. +"This is a blind lead. We'll have to go back." <br> +<p>"But there must be something on the other side of that stone," +cried Tom. "See, it is pierced with holes, and through them comes +a current of air. If we could only move the stone!"<br> +</p> + +"I believe it is an ancient door," remarked Professor Bumper. +<br> +<p>Eagerly and frantically they tried to move it by their +combined weight. The stone did not give the fraction of the +breadth of a hair.<br> +</p> + +"We'll have to go back and get some of your big tunnel blasting +powder, Tom," suggested Ned. <br> +<p>As he spoke old Goosal glided forward. He had remained behind +them in the passage while they were trying to move the rock. Now +he said something in Spanish.<br> +</p> + +"What does he mean?" asked Ned. <br> +<p>"He asks that he be allowed to try," translated Professor +Bumper. "Sometimes, he says, there is a secret way of opening +stone doors in these underground caves. Let him try."<br> +</p> + +Goosal seemed to be running his fingers lightly over the outer +edge of the door. He was muttering to himself in his Indian +tongue. <br> +<p>Suddenly he uttered an exclamation, and, as he did so, there +was a noise from the door itself. It was a grinding, scraping +sound, a rumble as though rocks were being rolled one against the +other.<br> +</p> + +Then the astonished eyes of the adventurers saw the great stone +door revolve on its axis and swing to one side, leaving a passage +open through which they could pass. Goosal had discovered the +hidden mechanism. <br> +<p>What lay before them?<br> +</p> + +<br> +<h1 id="ref_25">CHAPTER XXV</h1> + +THE IDOL OF GOLD <br> +"Forward! cried Tom Swift. <br> +<p>"Where?" asked Mr Damon, hanging back for an instant. "Bless +my compass, Tom! do you know where you're going?"<br> +</p> + +"I haven't the least idea, but it must lead to something, or the +ancients who made this revolving stone door wouldn't have taken +such care to block the passage." <br> +<p>"Ask Goosal if he knows anything about it," suggested Mr. +Damon to the professor.<br> +</p> + +"He says he never was here before," translated the savant, "but +years ago, when he went into the hidden city by the cave we left +yesterday, he saw doors like this which opened this way." <br> +<p>"Then we're on the right track!" cried Tom. "If this is the +same kind of door, it must lead to the same place. Ho for Kurzon +and the idol of gold!"<br> +</p> + +As they passed through the stone door, Tom and Professor Bumper +tried to get some idea of the mechanism by which it worked. But +they found this impossible, it being hidden within the stone +itself or in the adjoining walls. But, in order that it might not +close of itself and entomb them, the portal was blocked open with +stones found in the passage. <br> +<p>"It's always well to have a line of retreat open," said Tom. +"There's no telling what may lie beyond us."<br> +</p> + +For a time there seemed to be nothing more than the same passage +along which they had come. Then the passage suddenly widened, +like the large end of a square funnel. Upward and outward the +stone walls swept, and they saw dimly before them, in the light +of their torches, a vast cavern, seemingly formed by the falling +in of mountains, which, in toppling over, had met overhead in a +sort of rough arch, thus protecting, in a great measure, that +which lay beneath them. <br> +<p>Goosal, who had brought with him some of the fiber bark +torches, set a bundle of them aflame. As they flared up, a +wondrous sight was revealed to Tom Swift and his friends.<br> +</p> + +Stretching out before them, as though they stood at the end of an +elevated street and gazed down on it, was a city--a large city, +with streets, houses, open squares, temples, statues, fountains, +dry for centuries--a buried and forgotten city-a city in ruins--a +city of the dead, now dry as dust, but still a city, or, rather, +the strangely preserved remains of one. <br> +<p>"Look!" whispered Tom. A louder voice just then, would have +seemed a sacrilege. "Look!"<br> +</p> + +"Is it what we are looking for?" asked Ned in a low voice. <br> +<p>"I believe it is," replied the professor. "It is the lost city +of Kurzon, or one just like it. And now if we can find the idol +of gold our search will be ended--at least the major part of +it."<br> +</p> + +"Where did you expect to find the idol?" asked Tom. <br> +<p>"It should be in the main temple. Come, we will walk in the +ancient streets--streets where no feet but ours have trod in many +centuries. Come!"<br> +</p> + +In eager silence they pressed on through this newly discovered +wonderland. For it was a wonderful city, or had been. Though much +of it was in ruins, probably caused by an earthquake or an +eruption from a volcano, the central portion, covered as it was +by the overtoppling mountains that formed the arching roof, was +well preserved. <br> +<p>There were rude but beautiful stone buildings. There were +archways; temples; public squares; and images, not at all +beautiful, for they seemed to be of man-monsters--doubtless +ancient gods. There were smoothly paved streets; wondrously +carved fountains, some in ruins, all now as dry as bone, but +which must have been places of beauty where youths and maidens +gathered in the ancient days.<br> +</p> + +Of the ancient population there was not a trace left. Tom and his +friends penetrated some of the houses, but not so much as a bone +or a heap of mouldering dust showed where the remains of the +people were. Either they had fled at the approaching doom of the +city and were buried elsewhere, or some strange fire or other +force of nature had consumed and obliterated them. <br> +<p>"What a wealth of historic information I shall find here!" +murmured Professor Bumper, as he caught sight of many +inscriptions in strange characters on the walls and buildings. "I +shall never get to the end of them."<br> +</p> + +"But what about the idol of gold?" asked Mr. Damon, "Do you think +you'll find that?" <br> +<p>"We must hurry on to the temple over there," said the +scientist, indicating a building further along.<br> +</p> + +"And then we must see about rescuing your rivals, Professor," put +in Tom. <br> +<p>"Yes, Tom. But fortunately we are on the ground here before +them," agreed the professor.<br> +</p> + +Undoubtedly it was the chief temple, or place of worship, of the +long-dead race which the explorers now entered. It was a building +beautiful in its barbaric style, and yet simple. There were +massive walls, and a great inner court, at the end of which +seemed to be some sort of altar. And then, as they lighted fresh +torches, and pressed forward with them and their electric lights, +they saw that which caused a cry of satisfaction to burst from +all of them. <br> +<p>"The idol of gold!"<br> +</p> + +Yes, there it squatted, an ugly, misshapen, figure, a cross +between a toad and a gila monster, half man, half beast, with big +red eyes--rubies probably--that gleamed in the repulsive golden +face. And the whole figure, weighing many pounds, seemed to be of +SOLID GOLD! <br> +<p>Eagerly the others followed Professor Bumper up the altar +steps to the very throne of the golden idol. The scientist +touched it, tried to raise it and make sure of its solidity and +material.<br> +</p> + +"This is it!" he cried. "It is the idol of gold! I have found We +have found it, for it belongs to all of us!" <br> +<p>"Hurray!" cried Tom Swift, and Ned and Mr. Damon joined in the +cry.<br> +</p> + +There was no need for silence or caution now; and yet, as they +stood about the squat and ugly figure, which, in spite of its +hideousness, was worth a fortune intrinsically and as an antique, +they heard from the direction of the stone passage a noise. <br> +<p>"What is it?" asked Tom Swift.<br> +</p> + +There was a murmur of voices. <br> +<p>"Indians!" cried Professor Bumper, recognizing the language--a +mixture of Spanish and Indian.<br> +</p> + +The cave was illuminated by the glare of other torches which +seemed to rush forward. A moment later it was seen that they were +being carried by a number of Indians. <br> +<p>"Friends," murmured Goosal, using the Spanish term, +"Amigos."<br> +</p> + +"They are our own Indians!" cried Tom Swift. "I see Tolpec!" and +he pointed to the native who had deserted from Jacinto's force to +help them. <br> +<p>"How did they get here?" asked Professor Bumper.<br> +</p> + +This was quickly told. In their camp, where, under the leadership +of Tolpec they had been left to do the excavating, the natives +had heard, seen and felt the effects of the storm and the +earthquake, though it did little damage in their vicinity. But +they became alarmed for the safety of the professor and his party +and, at Tolpec's suggestion, set off in search of them. <br> +<p>The Indians had seen, passing along the trail, the uprooted +trees, and had noted the footsteps of the explorers going down to +the stone passage. It was easy for them to determine that Tom and +his friends had gone in, since the marks of their boots were +plainly in evidence in the soft soil.<br> +</p> + +None of the Indians was as much wrought up over the discovery of +Kurzon and the idol as were the white adventurers. The gold, of +course, meant something to the natives, but they were indifferent +to the wonders of the underground city. Perhaps they had heard +too many legends concerning such things to be impressed. <br> +<p>"That statue is yours--all yours," said old Goosal when he had +talked with his relatives and friends among the natives. "They +all say what you find you keep, and we will help you keep +it."<br> +</p> + +"That's good," murmured Professor Bumper. "There was some doubt +in my mind as to our right to this, but after all, the natives +who live in this land are the original owners, and if they pass +title to us it is clear. That settles the last difficulty." <br> +<p>"Except that of getting the idol out," said Mr. Damon.<br> +</p> + +"Oh, we'll accomplish that!" cried Tom. <br> +<p>"I can hardly believe my good luck," declared Professor +Bumper. "I shall write a whole book on this idol alone and +then----"<br> +</p> + +Once more came an interruption. This time it was from another +direction, but it was of the same character--an approaching band +of torchbearers. They were Indians, too, but leading them were a +number of whites. <br> +<p>And at their head was no less personage than Professor Beecher +himself.<br> +</p> + +For a moment, as the three parties stood together in the ancient +temple, in the glare of many torches, no one spoke. Then +Professor Bumper found his voice. <br> +<p>"We are glad to see you," he said to his rival. "That is glad +to see you alive, for we saw the landslide bury you. And we were +coming to dig you out. We thought this cave--the cave of the +buried city--would lead us to you easier than by digging through +the slide. We have just discovered this idol," and he put his +hand on the grim golden image.<br> +</p> + +"Oh, you have discovered it, have you?" asked Professor Beecher, +and his voice was bitter. <br> +<p>"Yes, not ten minutes ago. The natives have kindly +acknowledged my right to it under the law of priority. I am sorry +but----"<br> +</p> + +With a look of disgust and chagrined disappointment on his face, +Professor Beecher turned to the other scientists and said: <br> +<p>"Let us go. We are too late. He has what I came after."<br> +</p> + +"Well, it is the fortune of war--and discovery," put in Mr. +Hardy, one of the party who seemed the least ill-natured. "Your +luck might have been ours, Professor Bumper. I congratulate you." +<br> +<p>"Thank you! Are you sure your party is all right--not in need +of assistance? How did you get out of the place you were +buried?"<br> +</p> + +"Thank you! We do not require any help. It was good of you to +think of us. But we got out the way we came in. We did not enter +the tunnel as you did, but came in through another entrance which +was not closed by the landslide. Then we made a turn through a +gateway in a tunnel connecting with ours--a gateway which seems +to have been opened by the earthquake-and we came here, just now. +<br> +<p>"Too late, I see, to claim the discovery of the idol of gold," +went on Mr. Hardy. "But I trust you will be generous, and allow +us to make observations of the buildings and other relics."<br> +</p> + +"As much as you please, and with the greatest pleasure in the +world," was the prompt answer of Professor Bumper. "All I lay +sole claim to is the golden idol. You are at liberty to take +whatever else you find in Kurzon and to make what observations +you like." <br> +<p>"That is generous of you, and quite in contrast to--er--to the +conduct of our leader. I trust he may awaken to a sense of the +injustice he did you."<br> +</p> + +But Professor Beecher was not there to hear this. He had stalked +away in anger. <br> +<p>"Humph!" grunted Tom. Then he continued: "That story about a +government concession was all a fake, Professor, else he'd have +put up a fight now. Contemptible sneak!"<br> +</p> + +In fact the story of Tom Swift's trip to the underground land of +wonders is ended, for with the discovery of the idol of gold the +main object of the expedition was accomplished. But their +adventures were not over by any means, though there is not room +in this volume to record them. <br> +<p>Suffice it to say that means were at once taken to get the +golden image out of the cave of the ancient city. It was not +accomplished without hard work, for the gold was heavy, and +Professor Bumper would not, naturally, consent to the shaving off +of so much as an ear or part of the flat nose, to say nothing of +one of the half dozen extra arms and legs with which the ugly +idol was furnished.<br> +</p> + +Finally it was safely taken out of the cave, and along the stone +passage to the opening formed by the overthrown trees, and thence +on to camp. <br> +<p>And at the camp a surprise awaited Tom.<br> +</p> + +Some long-delayed mail had been forwarded from the nearest place +of civilization and there were letters for all, including several +for our hero. One in particular he picked out first and read +eagerly. <br> +<p>"Well, is every little thing all right, Tom?" asked Ned, as he +saw a cheerful grin spread itself over his chum's face.<br> +</p> + +"I should say it is, and then some! Look here, Ned. This is a +letter from----" <br> +<p>"I know. Mary Nestor. Go on."<br> +</p> + +"How'd you guess?" <br> +<p>"Oh, I'm a mind-reader."<br> +</p> + +"Huh! Well, you know she was away when I went to call to say +good-bye, and I was a little afraid Beecher had got an inside +edge on me." <br> +<p>"Had he?"<br> +</p> + +"No, but he tried hard enough. He went to see Mary in +Fayetteville, just as you heard, before he came on to join his +party, but he didn't pay much of a visit to her." <br> +<p>"No?"<br> +</p> + +"No. Mary told him he'd better hurry along to Central America, or +wherever it was he intended going, as she didn't care for him as +much as he flattered himself she did." <br> +<p>"Good!" cried Ned. "Shake, old man. I'm glad!"<br> +</p> + +They shook hands. <br> +<p>"Well, what's the matter? Didn't you read all of her letter?" +asked Ned when he saw his chum once more perusing the +epistle.<br> +</p> + +"No. There's a postscript here. <br> +<p>"`Sorry I couldn't see you before you left. It was a mistake, +but when you come back----'<br> +</p> + +"Oh, that part isn't any of your affair!" and, blushing under his +tan, Tom thrust the letter into his pocket and strode away, while +Ned laughed happily. <br> +<p>With the idol of gold safe in their possession, Professor +Bumper's party could devote their time to making other +explorations in the buried city. This they did, as is testified +to by a long list of books and magazine articles since turned out +by the scientist, dealing strictly with archaeological subjects, +touching on the ancient Mayan race and its civilization, with +particular reference to their system of computing time.<br> +</p> + +Professor Beecher, young and foolish, would not consent to delve +into the riches of the ancient city, being too much chagrined +over the loss of the idol. It seems he had really promised to +give a part of it to Mary Nestor. But he never got the chance. +<br> +<p>His colleagues, after their first disappointment at being +beaten, joined forces with Professor Bumper in exploring the old +city, and made many valuable discoveries.<br> +</p> + +In one point Professor Bumper had done his rival an injustice. +That was in thinking Professor Beecher was responsible for the +treachery of Jacinto. That was due to the plotter's own work. It +was true that Professor Beecher had tentatively engaged Jacinto, +and had sent word to him to keep other explorers away from the +vicinity of the ancient city if possible; but Jacinto, who did +not return Professor Bumper's money, as he had promised, had +acted treacherously in order to enrich himself. Professor Beecher +had nothing to do with that, nor had he with the taking of the +map, as has been seen, the loss of which, after all, was a +blessing in disguise, for Kurzon would never have been located by +following the directions given there, as it was very inaccurate. +<br> +<p>In another point it was demonstrated that the old documents +were at fault. This was in reference to the golden idol having +been overthrown and another set up in its place, an act which had +caused the destruction of Kurzon.<br> +</p> + +It is true that the city was destroyed, or rather, buried, but +this catastrophe was probably brought about by an earthquake. And +another great idol, one of clay, was found, perhaps a rival of +Quitzel, but it was this clay image which was thrown down and +broken, and not the golden one. <br> +<p>Perhaps an effort had been made, just before the burying of +the city, to change idols and the system of worship, but Quitzel +seemed to have held his own. The old manuscripts were not very +reliable, it was found, except in general.<br> +</p> + +"Well, I guess this will hold Beecher for a while," said Tom, the +night of the arrival of Mary's letter, and after he had written +one in answer, which was dispatched by a runner to the nearest +place whence mail could be forwarded. <br> +<p>"Yes, luck seems to favor you," replied Ned. "You've had a +hand in the discovery of the idol of gold, and----"<br> +</p> + +"Yes. And I discovered something else I wasn't quite sure of," +interrupted Tom, as he felt to make sure he had a certain letter +safe in his pocket. <br> +<p>It was several weeks later that the explorations of Kurzon +came to an end--a temporary end, for the rainy season set in, +when the tropics are unsuitable for white men. Tom, Professor +Bumper, Ned and Mr. Damon set sail for the United States, the +valuable idol of gold safe on board.<br> +</p> + +And there, with their vessel plowing the blue waters of the +Caribbean Sea, we will take leave of Tom Swift and his friends. +<br> +<p><br> +</p> + +<br> +<p>End of The Project Gutenberg Etext of Tom Swift in the Land of +Wonders<br> +</p> +</body> +</html> + diff --git a/old/20tom10h.zip b/old/20tom10h.zip Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..30d865b --- /dev/null +++ b/old/20tom10h.zip diff --git a/old/20tom10l.lit b/old/20tom10l.lit Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..6e9f045 --- /dev/null +++ b/old/20tom10l.lit diff --git a/old/20tom10l.zip b/old/20tom10l.zip Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..1674209 --- /dev/null +++ b/old/20tom10l.zip diff --git a/old/20tom10p.prc b/old/20tom10p.prc Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..886a6b5 --- /dev/null +++ b/old/20tom10p.prc diff --git a/old/20tom10p.zip b/old/20tom10p.zip Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..7f0466b --- /dev/null +++ b/old/20tom10p.zip diff --git a/old/20tom11.txt b/old/20tom11.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..d7875ca --- /dev/null +++ b/old/20tom11.txt @@ -0,0 +1,7626 @@ +The Project Gutenberg EBook of Tom Swift in the Land of Wonders +by Victor Appleton +(#20 in our series by Victor Appleton) + +Copyright laws are changing all over the world. Be sure to check the +copyright laws for your country before downloading or redistributing +this or any other Project Gutenberg eBook. + +This header should be the first thing seen when viewing this Project +Gutenberg file. Please do not remove it. Do not change or edit the +header without written permission. + +Please read the "legal small print," and other information about the +eBook and Project Gutenberg at the bottom of this file. Included is +important information about your specific rights and restrictions in +how the file may be used. You can also find out about how to make a +donation to Project Gutenberg, and how to get involved. + + +**Welcome To The World of Free Plain Vanilla Electronic Texts** + +**eBooks Readable By Both Humans and By Computers, Since 1971** + +*****These eBooks Were Prepared By Thousands of Volunteers!***** + + +Title: Tom Swift in the Land of Wonders + +Author: Victor Appleton + +Release Date: Apr, 1996 [EBook #499] +[Yes, we are more than one year ahead of schedule] +[This file was first posted on March 11, 2002] +[Most recently updated: March 11, 2002] + +Edition: 11 + +Language: English + +Character set encoding: ASCII + +************************************************************************ + + + + +Scanned by Charles Keller with +OmniPage Professional OCR software +donated by Caere Corporation, 1-800-535-7226. +Contact Mike Lough <Mikel@caere.com> + + + + + +TOM SWIFT IN THE LAND OF WONDERS + +OR + +The Underground Search +for the Idol of Gold + + +BY VICTOR APPLETON + +AUTHOR OF +"TOM SWIFT AND HIS MOTORCYCLE," +"TOM SWIFT AND HIS BIG TUNNEL," +"THE MOVING PICTURE BOYS SERIES," +"THE MOTION PICTURE CHUMS SERIES," ETC. + + + + +THE TOM SWIFT SERIES + +1 TOM SWIFT AND HIS MOTOR CYCLE +2 TOM SWIFT AND HIS MOTOR BOAT +3 TOM SWIFT AND HIS AIRSHIP +4 TOM SWIFT AND HIS SUBMARINE BOAT +5 TOM SWIFT AND HIS ELECTRIC RUNABOUT +6 TOM SWIFT AND HIS WIRELESS MESSAGE +7 TOM SWIFT AMONG THE DIAMOND MAKERS +8 TOM SWIFT IN THE CAVES OF ICE +9 TOM SWIFT AND HIS SKY RACER +10 TOM SWIFT AND HIS ELECTRIC RIFLE +11 TOM SWIFT IN THE CITY OF GOLD +12 TOM SWIFT AND HIS AIR GLIDER +13 TOM SWIFT IN CAPTIVITY +14 TOM SWIFT AND HIS WIZARD CAMERA +15 TOM SWIFT AND HIS GREAT SEARCHLIGHT +16 TOM SWIFT AND HIS GIANT CANNON +17 TOM SWIFT AND HIS PHOTO TELEPHONE +18 TOM SWIFT AND HIS AERIAL WARSHIP +19 TOM SWIFT AND HIS BIG TUNNEL +20 TOM SWIFT IN THE LAND OF WONDERS +21 TOM SWIFT AND HIS WAR TANK +22 TOM SWIFT AND HIS AIR SCOUT +23 TOM SWIFT AND HIS UNDERSEA SEARCH +24 TOM SWIFT AMONG THE FIRE FIGHTERS +25 TOM SWIFT AND HIS ELECTRIC LOCOMOTIVE +26 TOM SWIFT AND HIS FLYING BOAT +27 TOM SWIFT AND HIS GREAT OIL GUSHER +28 TOM SWIFT AND HIS CHEST OF SECRETS +29 TOM SWIFT AND HIS AIRLINE EXPRESS +*** + + + + +Tom Swift in the Land of Wonders + + + + +CONTENTS + + + +I A WONDERFUL STORY +II PROFESSOR BUMPER ARRIVES +III BLESSINGS AND ENTHUSIASM +IV FENIMORE BEECHER +V THE LITTLE GREEN GOD +VI UNPLEASANT NEWS +VII TOM HEARS SOMETHING +VIII OFF FOR HONDURAS +IX VAL JACINTO +X IN THE WILDS +XI THE VAMPIRES +XII A FALSE FRIEND +XIII FORWARD AGAIN +XIV A NEW GUIDE +XV IN THE COILS +XVI A MEETING IN THE JUNGLE +XVII THE LOST MAP +XVIII "EL TIGRE!" +XIX POISONED ARROWS +XX AN OLD LEGEND +XXI THE CAVERN +XXII THE STORM +XXIII ENTOMBED ALIVE +XXIV THE REVOLVING STONE +XXV THE IDOL OF GOLD + + + + + +TOM SWIFT IN THE LAND OF WONDERS + + + + + +CHAPTER I + +A WONDERFUL STORY + + +Tom Swift, who had been slowly looking +through the pages of a magazine, in the contents +of which he seemed to be deeply interested, +turned the final folio, ruffled the sheets back +again to look at a certain map and drawing, and +then, slapping the book down on a table before +him, with a noise not unlike that of a shot, +exclaimed: + +"Well, that is certainly one wonderful story!" + +"What's it about, Tom?" asked his chum, Ned +Newton. "Something about inside baseball, or a +new submarine that can be converted into an +airship on short notice?" + +"Neither one, you--you unscientific heathen," +answered Tom, with a laugh at Ned. "Though +that isn't saying such a machine couldn't be invented." + +"I believe you--that is if you got on its trail," +returned Ned, and there was warm admiration in +his voice. + +"As for inside baseball, or outside, for that +matter, I hardly believe I'd be able to tell third +base from the second base, it's so long since I +went to a game," proceeded Tom. "I've been +too busy on that new airship stabilizer dad gave +me an idea for. I've been working too hard, +that's a fact. I need a vacation, and maybe a +good baseball game----" + +He stopped and looked at the magazine he had +so hastily slapped down. Something he had read +in it seemed to fascinate him. + +"I wonder if it can possibly be true," he went +on. "It sounds like the wildest dream of a +professional sleep-walker; and yet, when I stop to +think, it isn't much worse than some of the +things we've gone through with, Ned." + +"Say, for the love of rice-pudding! will you +get down to brass tacks and strike a trial +balance? What are you talking of, anyhow? Is it +a joke?" + +"A joke?" + +"Yes. What you just read in that magazine +which seems to cause you so much excitement." + +"Well, it may be a joke; and yet the professor +seems very much in earnest about it," replied +Tom. "It certainly is one wonderful story!" + +"So you said before. Come on--the `fillium' +is busted. Splice it, or else put in a new reel and +on with the show. I'd like to know what's doing. +What professor are you talking of?" + +"Professor Swyington Bumper." + +"Swyington Bumper?" and Ned's voice +showed that his memory was a bit hazy. + +"Yes. You ought to remember him. He was +on the steamer when I went down to Peru to +help the Titus Brothers dig the big tunnel. That +plotter Waddington, or some of his tools, +dropped a bomb where it might have done us +some injury, but Professor Bumper, who was a +fellow passenger, on his way to South America +to look for the lost city of Pelone, calmly picked +up the bomb, plucked out the fuse, and saved +us from bad injuries, if not death. And he was +as cool about it as an ice-cream cone. Surely +you remember!" + +"Swyington Bumper! Oh, yes, now I remember +him," said Ned Newton. "But what has +he got to do with a wonderful story? Has he +written more about the lost city of Pelone? If +he has I don't see anything so very wonderful +in that." + +"There isn't," agreed Tom. "But this isn't +that," and Tom picked up the magazine and +leafed it to find the article he had been reading. + +"Let's have a look at it," suggested Ned. "You +act as though you might be vitally interested +in it. Maybe you're thinking of joining forces +with the professor again, as you did when you +dug the big tunnel." + +"Oh, no. I haven't any such idea," Tom said. +"I've got enough work laid out now to keep me +in Shopton for the next year. I have no notion +of going anywhere with Professor Bumper. Yet +I can't help being impressed by this," and, +having found the article in the magazine to which +he referred, he handed it to his chum. + +"Why, it's by Bumper himself!" exclaimed Ned. + +"Yes. Though there's nothing remarkable in +that, seeing that he is constantly contributing +articles to various publications or writing books. +It's the story itself that's so wonderful. To +save you the trouble of wading through a lot +of scientific detail, which I know you don't care +about, I'll tell you that the story is about a queer +idol of solid gold, weighing many pounds, and, +in consequence, of great value." + +"Of solid gold you say?" asked Ned eagerly. + +"That's it. Got on your banking air already," +Tom laughed. "To sum it up for you--notice +I use the word `sum,' which is very appropriate +for a bank--the professor has got on the track +of another lost or hidden city. This one, the +name of which doesn't appear, is in the Copan +valley of Honduras, and----" + +"Copan," interrupted Ned. "It sounds like +the name of some new floor varnish." + +"Well, it isn't, though it might be," laughed +Tom. "Copan is a city, in the Department of +Copan, near the boundary between Honduras and +Guatemala. A fact I learned from the article +and not because I remembered my geography." + +"I was going to say," remarked Ned with a +smile, "that you were coming it rather strong +on the school-book stuff." + +"Oh, it's all plainly written down there," and +Tom waved toward the magazine at which Ned +was looking. "As you'll see, if you take the +trouble to go through it, as I did, Copan is, or +maybe was, for all I know, one of the most +important centers of the Mayan civilization." + +"What's Mayan?" asked Ned. "You see I'm +going to imbibe my information by the deductive +rather than the excavative process," he added +with a laugh. + +"I see," laughed Tom. "Well, Mayan refers +to the Mayas, an aboriginal people of Yucatan. +The Mayas had a peculiar civilization of their +own, thousands of years ago, and their calendar +system was so involved----" + +"Never mind about dates," again interrupted +Ned. "Get down to brass tacks. I'm willing +to take your word for it that there's a Copan +valley in Honduras. But what has your friend +Professor Bumper to do with it?" + +"This. He has come across some old +manuscripts, or ancient document records, referring +to this valley, and they state, according to this +article he has written for the magazine, that +somewhere in the valley is a wonderful city, +traces of which have been found twenty to forty +feet below the surface, on which great trees are +growing, showing that the city was covered +hundreds, if not thousands, of years ago." + +"But where does the idol of gold come in?" + +"I'm coming to that," said Tom. "Though, +if Professor Bumper has his way, the idol will +be coming out instead of coming in." + +"You mean he wants to get it and take it +away from the Copan valley, Tom?" + +"That's it, Ned. It has great value not only +from the amount of pure gold that is in it, but +as an antique. I fancy the professor is more +interested in that aspect of it. But he's written +a wonderful story, telling how he happened to +come across the ancient manuscripts in the tomb +of some old Indian whose mummy he unearthed +on a trip to Central America. + +"Then he tells of the trouble he had in +discovering how to solve the key to the translation +code; but when he did, he found a great story +unfolded to him. + +"This story has to do with the hidden city, +and tells of the ancient civilization of those who +lived in the Copan valley thousands of years ago. +The people held this idol of gold to be their +greatest treasure, and they put to death many of +other tribes who sought to steal it." + +"Whew!" whistled Ned. "That IS some yarn. +But what is Professor Bumper going to do about it?" + +"I don't know. The article seems to be written +with an idea of interesting scientists and +research societies, so that they will raise money +to conduct a searching expedition. + +"Perhaps by this time the party may be +organized--this magazine is several months old. +I have been so busy on my stabilizer patent that +I haven't kept up with current literature. Take +it home and read it! Ned. That is if you're +through telling me about my affairs," for Ned, +who had formerly worked in the Shopton bank, +had recently been made general financial man- +ager of the interests of Tom and his father. The +two were inventors and proverbially poor business +men, though they had amassed a fortune. + +"Your financial affairs are all right, Tom," said +Ned. "I have just been going over the books, +and I'll submit a detailed report later." + +The telephone bell rang and Tom picked up +the instrument from the desk. As he answered in +the usual way and then listened a moment, a +strange look came over his face. + +"Well, this certainly is wonderful!" he exclaimed, +in much the same manner as when he had finished +reading the article about the idol. "It certainly +is a strange coincidence," he added, +speaking in an aside to Ned while he himself +still listened to what was being told to him +over the telephone wire. + + + +CHAPTER II + +PROFESSOR BUMPER ARRIVES + + +"What's the matter, Tom? What is it?" +asked Ned Newton, attracted by the strange +manner of his chum at the telephone. "Has +anything happened?" + +But the young inventor was too busy listening +to the unseen speaker to answer his chum, +even if he heard what Ned remarked, which is +doubtful. + +"Well, I might as well wait until he is +through," mused Ned, as he started to leave the +room. Then as Tom motioned to him to remain, +he murmured: "He may have something +to say to me later. But I wonder who is talking +to him." + +There was no way of finding out, however, +until Tom had a chance to talk to Ned, and at +present the young scientist was eagerly listening +to what came over the wire. Occasionally Ned +could hear him say: + +"You don't tell me! That is surprising! Yes +--yes! Of course if it's true it means a big +thing, I can understand that. What's that? No, +I couldn't make a promise like that. I'm sorry, +but----" + +Then the person at the other end of the wire +must have plunged into something very interesting +and absorbing, for Tom did not again +interrupt by interjected remarks. + +Tom. Swift, as has been said, was an inventor, +as was his father. Mr. Swift was now rather old +and feeble, taking only a nominal part in the +activities of the firm made up of himself and his +son. But his inventions were still used, many +of them being vital to the business and trade of +this country. + +Tom and his father lived in the village of +Shopton, New York, and their factories covered +many acres of ground. Those who wish to read +of the earliest activities of Tom in the inventive +line are referred to the initial volume, "Tom +Swift and His Motor Cycle." From then on he +and his father had many and exciting adventures. +In a motor boat, an airship, and a submarine +respectively the young inventor had gone through +many perils. On some of the trips his chum, +Ned Newton, accompanied him, and very often +in the party was a Mr. Wakefield Damon, who +had a curious habit of "blessing" everything +that happened to strike his fancy. + +Besides Tom and his father, the Swift household +was made up of Eradicate Sampson, a colored +man-of-all-work, who, with his mule Boomerang, +did what he could to keep the grounds +around the house in order. There was also Mrs. +Baggert, the housekeeper, Tom's mother being +dead. Mr. Damon, living in a neighboring town, +was a frequent visitor in the Swift home. + +Mary Nestor, a girl of Shopton, might also +be mentioned. She and Tom were more than +just good friends. Tom had an idea that some +day----. But there, I promised not to tell that +part, at least until the young people themselves +were ready to have a certain fact announced. + +From one activity to another had Tom Swift +gone, now constructing some important invention +for himself, as among others, when he made +the photo-telephone, or developed a great +searchlight which he presented to the Government +for use in detecting smugglers on the +border. + +The book immediately preceding this is called +"Tom Swift and His Bit, Tunnel," and deals +with the efforts of the young inventor to help a +firm of contractors penetrate a mountain in +Peru. How this was done and how, incidental- +ly, the lost city of Pelone was discovered, bringing +joy to the heart of Professor Swyington +Bumper, will be found fully set forth in the book. + +Tom had been back from the Peru trip for +some months, when we again find him interested +in some of the work of Professor Bumper, +as set forth in the magazine mentioned. + +"Well, he certainly is having some conversation," +reflected Ned, as, after more than five +minutes, Tom's ear was still at the receiver of +the instrument, into the transmitter of which +he had said only a few words. + +"All right," Tom finally answered, as he hung +the receiver up, "I'll be here," and then he turned +to Ned, whose curiosity had been growing with +the telephone talk, and remarked: + +"That certainly was wonderful!" + +"What was?" asked Ned. "Do you think I'm +a mind reader to be able to guess?" + +"No, indeed! I beg your pardon. I'll tell you +at once. But I couldn't break away. It was +too important. To whom do you think I was +talking just then?" + +"I can imagine almost any one, seeing I know +something of what you have done. It might be +almost anybody from some person you met up +in the caves of ice to a red pygmy from the +wilds of Africa." + +"I'm afraid neither of them would be quite +up to telephone talk yet," laughed Tom. "No, +this was the gentleman who wrote that interesting +article about the idol of gold," and he +motioned to the magazine Ned held in his hand. + +"You don't mean Professor Bumper!" + +"That's just whom I do mean." + +"What did he want? Where did he call +from?" + +"He wants me to help organize an expedition +to go to Central America--to the Copan valley, +to be exact--to look for this somewhat mythical +idol of gold. Incidentally the professor will +gather in any other antiques of more or less +value, if he can find any, and he hopes, even if he +doesn't find the idol, to get enough historical +material for half a dozen books, to say nothing +of magazine articles." + +"Where did he call from; did you say?" + +"I didn't say. But it was a long-distance call +from New York. The Professor stopped off +there on his way from Boston, where he has been +lecturing before some society. And now he's +coming here to see me," finished Tom. + +"What! Is he going to lecture here?" cried +Ned. "If he is, and spouts a whole lot of that +bone-dry stuff about the ancient Mayan civilization +and their antiquities, with side lights on +how the old-time Indians used to scalp their +enemies, I'm going to the moving pictures! I'm +willing to be your financial manager, Tom Swift, +but please don't ask me to be a high-brow. I +wasn't built for that." + +"Nor I, Ned. The professor isn't going to +lecture. He's only going to talk, he says." + +"What about?" + +"He's going to try to induce me to join his +expedition to the Copan valley." + +"Do you feel inclined to go?" + +"No, Ned, I do not. I've got too many other +irons in the fire. I shall have to give the professor +a polite but firm refusal." + +"Well, maybe you're right, Tom; and yet that +idol of gold--GOLD--weighing how many pounds +did you say?" + +"Oh, you're thinking of its money value, Ned, +old man!" + +"Yes, I'd like to see what a big chunk of gold +like that would bring. It must be quite a nugget. +But I'm not likely to get a glimpse of it +if you don't go with the professor." + +"I don't see how I can go, Ned. But come +over and meet the delightful gentleman when +he arrives. I expect him day after to-morrow." + +"I'll be here," promised Ned; and then he +went downtown to attend to some matters con- +nected with his new duties, which were much +less irksome than those he had had when he +had been in the bank. + +"Well, Tom, have you heard any more about +your friend?" asked Ned, two days later, as he +came to the Swift home with some papers needing +the signature of the young inventor and his +father. + +"You mean----?" + +"Professor Bumper." + +"No, I haven't heard from him since he +telephoned. But I guess he'll be here all right. +He's very punctual. Did you see anything of +my giant Koku as you came in?" + +"Yes, he and Eradicate were having an +argument about who should move a heavy casting +from one of the shops. Rad wanted to do it +all alone, but Koku said he was like a baby now." + +"Poor Rad is getting old," said Tom with a +sigh. "But he has been very faithful. He and +Koku never seem to get along well together." + +Koku was an immense man, a veritable giant, +one of two whom Tom had brought back with +him after an exciting trip to a strange land. The +giant's strength was very useful to the young +inventor. + +"Now Tom, about this business of leasing to +the English Government the right to manufac- +ture that new explosive of yours," began Ned, +plunging into the business at hand. "I think +if you stick out a little you can get a better +royalty price." + +"But I don't want to gouge 'em, Ned. I'm +satisfied with a fair profit. The trouble with +you is you think too much of money. Now----" + +At that moment a voice was heard in the hall +of the house saying: + +"Now, my dear lady, don't trouble yourself. +I can find my way in to Tom Swift perfectly well +by myself, and while I appreciate your courtesy +I do not want to trouble you." + +"No, don't come, Mrs. Baggert," added another +voice. "Bless my hat band, I think I know my +way about the house by this time!" + +"Mr. Damon!" ejaculated Ned. + +"And Professor Bumper is with him," added +Tom. "Come in!" he cried, opening the hall +door, to confront a bald-headed man who stood +peering at our hero with bright snapping eyes, +like those of some big bird spying out the land +from afar. "Come in, Professor Bumper; and +you too, Mr. Damon!" + + + +CHAPTER III + +BLESSINGS AND ENTHUSIASM + + +Greetings and inquiries as to health having +been passed, not without numerous blessings on +the part of Mr. Damon, the little party gathered +in the library of the home of Tom Swift sat +down and looked at one another. + +On Professor Bumper's face there was, plainly +to be seen, a look of expectation, and it seemed +to be shared by Mr. Damon, who seemed eager +to burst into enthusiastic talk. On the other +hand Tom Swift appeared a bit indifferent. + +Ned himself admitted that he was frankly +curious. The story of the big idol of gold had +occupied his thoughts for many hours. + +"Well, I'm glad to see you both," said Tom +again. "You got here all right, I see, Professor +Bumper. But I didn't expect you to meet and +bring Mr. Damon with you." + +"I met him on the train," explained the author +of the book on the lost city of Pelone, as well +as books on other antiquities. "I had no +expectation of seeing him, and we were both +surprised when we met on the express." + +"It stopped at Waterfield, Tom," explained +Mr. Damon, "which it doesn't usually do, being +an aristocratic sort of train, not given even to +hesitating at our humble little town. There +were some passengers to get off, which caused +the flier to stop, I suppose. And, as I wanted +to come over to see you, I got aboard." + +"Glad you did," voiced Tom. + +"Then I happened to see Professor Bumper a +few seats ahead of me," went on Mr. Damon, +"and, bless my scarfpin! he was coming to see +you also." + +"Well, I'm doubly glad," answered Tom. + +"So here we are," went on Mr. Damon, "and +you've simply got to come, Tom Swift. You +must go with us!" and Mr. Damon, in his +enthusiasm, banged his fist down on the table with +such force that he knocked some books to the floor. + +Koku, the giant, who was in the hall, opened +the door and in his imperfect English asked: + +"Master Tom knock for him bigs man?" + +"No," answered Tom with a smile, "I didn't knock +or call you, Koku. Some books fell, that is all." + +"Massa Tom done called fo' me, dat's what he done!" +broke in the petulant voice of Eradicate. + +"No, Rad, I don't need anything," Tom said. +"Though you might make a pitcher of lemonade. +It's rather warm." + +"Right away, Massa Tom! Right away!" cried +the old colored man, eager to be of service. + +"Me help, too!" rumbled Koku, in his deep +voice. "Me punch de lemons!" and away he +hurried after Eradicate, fearful lest the old +servant do all the honors. + +"Same old Rad and Koku," observed Mr. +Damon with a smile. "But now, Tom, while +they're making the lemonade, let's get down to +business. You're going with us, of course!" + +"Where?" asked Tom, more from habit than +because he did not know. + +"Where? Why to Honduras, of course! After +the idol of gold! Why, bless my fountain pen, +it's the most wonderful story I ever heard of! +You've read Professor Bumper's article, of +course. He told me you had. I read it on the +train coming over. He also told me about it, +and---- Well, I'm going with him, Tom Swift. + +"And think of all the adventures that may +befall us! We'll get lost in buried cities, ride down +raging torrents on a raft, fall over a cliff maybe +and be rescued. Why, it makes me feel quite +young again!" and Mr. Damon arose, to pace +excitedly up and down the room. + +Up to this time Professor Bumper had said +very little. He had sat still in his chair +listening to Mr. Damon. But now that the latter had +ceased, at least for a time, Tom and Ned looked +toward the scientist. + +"I understand, Tom," he said, "that you read +my article in the magazine, about the possibility +of locating some of the lost and buried cities of +Honduras?" + +"Yes, Ned and I each read it. It was quite +wonderful." + +"And yet there are more wonders to tell," went +on the professor. "I did not give all the details +in that article. I will tell you some of them. I +have brought copies of the documents with me," +and he opened a small valise and took out several +bundles tied with pink tape. + +"As Mr. Damon said," he went on while +arranging his papers, "he met me on the train, and +he was so taken by the story of the idol of gold +that he agreed to accompany me to Central America." + +"On one condition!" put in the eccentric man. + +"What's that? You didn't make any conditions +while we were talking," said the scientist. + +"Yes, I said I'd go if Tom Swift did." + +"Oh, yes. You did say that. But I don't call +that a condition, for of course Tom Swift will go. +Now let me tell you something more than I could +impart over the telephone. + +"Soon after I called you up, Tom--and it was +quite a coincidence that it should have been at a +time when you had just finished my magazine +article. Soon after that, as I was saying, I +arranged to come on to Shopton. And now I'm +glad we're all here together. + +"But how comes it, Ned Newton, that you are +not in the bank?" + +"I've left there," explained Ned. + +"He's now general financial man for the Swift +Company," Tom explained. "My father and I +found that we could not look after the inventing +and experimental end, and money matters, too, +and as Ned had had considerable experience this +way we made him take over those worries," and +Tom laughed genially. + +"No worries at all, as far as the Swift +Company is concerned," returned Ned. + +"Well, I guess you earn your salary," laughed +Tom. "But now, Professor Bumper, let's hear +from you. Is there anything more about this +idol of gold that you can tell us?" + +"Plenty, Tom, plenty. I could talk all day, +and not get to the end of the story. But a lot +of it would be scientific detail that might be too +dry for you in spite of this excellent lemonade," + +Between them Koku and Eradicate had managed +to make a pitcher of the beverage, though +Mrs. Baggert, the housekeeper, told Tom afterward +that the two had a quarrel in the kitchen +as to who should squeeze the lemons, the giant +insisting that he had the better right to "punch" +them. + +"So, not to go into too many details," went on +the professor, "I'll just give you a brief outline +of this story of the idol of gold. + +"Honduras, as you of course know, is a +republic of Central America, and it gets its name +from something that happened on the fourth +voyage of Columbus. He and his men had had +days of weary sailing and had sought in vain +for shallow water in which they might come to +an anchorage. Finally they reached the point +now known as Cape Gracias-a-Dios, and when +they let the anchor go, and found that in a short +time it came to rest on the floor of the ocean, +some one of the sailors--perhaps Columbus himself-- +is said to have remarked: + +"`Thank the Lord, we have left the deep +waters (honduras)' that being the Spanish word +for unfathomable depths. So Honduras it was +called, and has been to this day. + +"It is a queer land with many traces of an +ancient civilization, a civilization which I +believe dates back farther than some in the far +East. On the sculptured stones in the Copan +valley there are characters which seem to +resemble very ancient writing, but this pictographic +writing is largely untranslatable. + +"Honduras, I might add, is about the size of +our state of Ohio. It is rather an elevated table- +land, though there are stretches of tropical +forest, but it is not so tropical a country as many +suppose it to be. There is much gold scattered +throughout Honduras, though of late it has not +been found in large quantities. + +"In the old days, however, before the Spaniards +came, it was plentiful, so much, so that the +natives made idols of it. And it is one of the +largest of these idols--by name Quitzel--that I +am going to seek." + +"Do you know where it is?" asked Ned. + +"Well, it isn't locked up in a safe deposit box, +of that I'm sure," laughed the professor. "No, +I don't know exactly where it is, except that it +is somewhere in an ancient and buried city +known as Kurzon. If I knew exactly where +it was there wouldn't be much fun in going after +it. And if it was known to others it would have +been taken away long ago. + +"No, we've got to hunt for the idol of gold +in this land of wonders where I hope soon to be. +Later on I'll show you the documents that put +me on the track of this idol. Enough now to +show you an old map I found, or, rather, a copy +of it, and some of the papers that tell of the idol," +and he spread out his packet of papers on the +table in front of him, his eyes shining with +excitement and pleasure. Mr. Damon, too, leaned +eagerly forward. + +"So, Tom Swift," went on the professor, "I +come to you for help in this matter. I want +you to aid me in organizing an expedition to go +to Honduras after the idol of gold. Will you?" + +"I'll help you, of course," said Tom. "You +may use any of my inventions you choose--my +airships, my motor boats and submarines, even +my giant cannon if you think you can take it +with you. And as for the money part, Ned will +arrange that for you. But as for going with you +myself, it is out of the question. I can't. No +Honduras for me!" + + + +CHAPTER IX + +FENIMORE BEECHER + + +Had Tom Swift's giant cannon been discharged +somewhere in the vicinity of his home it could +have caused but little more astonishment to +Mr. Damon and Professor Bumper than did the +simple announcement of the young inventor. +The professor seemed to shrink back in his chair, +collapsing like an automobile tire when the air +is let out. As for Mr. Damon he jumped up and +cried: + +"Bless my----!" + +But that is as far as he got--at least just then. +He did not seem to know what to bless, but he +looked as though he would have liked to include +most of the universe. + +"Surely you don't mean it, Tom Swift," +gasped Professor Bumper at length. "Won't +you come with us?" + +"No," said Tom, slowly. "Really I can't go. +I'm working on an invention of a new aeroplane +stabilizer, and if I go now it will be just at a +time when I am within striking distance of success. +And the stabilizer is very much needed." + +"If it's a question of making a profit on it, +Tom," began Mr. Damon, "I can let you have +some money until----" + +"Oh, no! It isn't the money!" cried Tom. +"Don't think that for a moment. You see the +European war has called for the use of a large +number of aeroplanes, and as the pilots of them +frequently have to fight, and so can not give their +whole attention to the machines, some form of +automatic stabilizer is needed to prevent them +turning turtle, or going off at a wrong tangent. + +"So I have been working out a sort of +modified gyroscope, and it seems to answer the +purpose. I have already received advance orders +for a number of my devices from abroad, and as +they are destined to save lives I feel that I ought +to keep on with my work. + +"I'd like to go, don't misunderstand me, but +I can't go at this time. It is out of the question. +If you wait a year, or maybe six months----" + +"No, it is impossible to wait, Tom," declared +Professor Bumper. + +"Is it so important then to hurry?" asked Mr. +Damon. "You did not mention that to me, Professor +Bumper." + +"No, I did not have time. There are so many ends +to my concerns. But, Tom Swift, you simply must go!" + +"I can't, my dear professor, much as I should like to." + +"But, Tom, think of it!" cried Mr. Damon, +who was as much excited as was the little bald- +headed scientist. "You never saw such an idol +of gold as this. What's its name?" and he +looked questioningly at the professor. + +"Quitzel the idol is called," supplied Professor +Bumper. "And it is supposed to be in a +buried city named Kurzon, somewhere in the +Sierra de Merendon range of mountains, in the +vicinity of the Copan valley. Copan is a city, +or maybe we'll find it only a town when we get +there, and it is not far from the borders of +Guatemala. + +"Tom, if I could show you the translations I +have made of the ancient documents, referring +to this idol and the wonderful city over which +it kept guard, I'm sure you'd come with us." + +"Please don't tempt me," Tom said with a +laugh. "I'm only too anxious to go, and if it +wasn't for the stabilizer I'd be with you in a +minute. But---- Well, you'll have to get along +without me. Maybe I can join you later." + +"What's this about the idol keeping guard +over the ancient city?" asked Ned, for he was +interested in strange stories. + +"It seems," explained the professor, "that in +the early days there was a strange race of people, +inhabiting Central America, with a somewhat +high civilization, only traces of which remained +when the Spaniards came. + +"But these traces, and such hieroglyphics, or, +to be more exact pictographs, as I have been able +to decipher from the old documents, tell of one +country, or perhaps it was only a city, over which +this great golden idol of Quitzel presided. + +"There is in some of these papers a description +of the idol, which is not exactly a beauty, +judged from modern standards. But the main +fact is that it is made of solid gold, and may +weigh anywhere from one to two tons." + +"Two tons of gold!" cried New Newton. "Why, +if that's the case it would be worth----" and +he fell to doing a sum in mental arithmetic. + +"I am not so concerned about the monetary +value of the statue as I am about its antiquity," +went on Professor Bumper. "There are other +statues in this buried city of Kurzon, and though +they may not be so valuable they will give me +a wealth of material for my research work." + +"How do you know there are other statues?" +asked Mr. Damon. + +"Because my documents tell me so. It was +because the people made other idols, in opposition, +as it were, to Quitzel, that their city or +country was destroyed. At least that is the +legend. Quitzel, so the story goes, wanted to be +the chief god, and when the image of a rival was +set up in the temple near him, he toppled over +in anger, and part of the temple went with him, +the whole place being buried in ruins. All the +inhabitants were killed, and trace of the ancient +city was lost forever. No, I hope not forever, +for I expect to find it." + +"If all the people were killed, and the city +buried, how did the story of Quitzel become +known?" asked Mr. Damon. + +"One only of the priests in the temple of +Quitzel escaped and set down part of the tale," said +the professor. "It is his narrative, or one based +on it, that I have given you." + +"And now, what I want to do, is to go and +make a search for this buried city. I have fairly +good directions as to how it may be reached. +We will have little difficulty in getting to +Honduras, as there are fruit steamers frequently +sailing. Of course going into the interior--to the +Copan valley--is going to be harder. But an +expedition from a large college was recently +there and succeeded, after much labor, in ex- +cavating part of a buried city. Whether or not +it was Kurzon I am unable to say. + +"But if there was one ancient city there must +be more. So I want to make an attempt. And +I counted on you, Tom. You have had considerable +experience in strange quarters of the earth, +and you're just the one to help me. I don't +need money, for I have interested a certain +millionaire, and my own college will put up part +of the funds." + +"Oh, it isn't a question of money," said Tom. +"It's time." + +"That's just what it is with me!" exclaimed +Professor Bumper. "I haven't any time to lose. +My rivals may, even now, be on their way to Honduras!" + +"Your rivals!" cried Tom. "You didn't say anything about them!" + +"No, I believe I didn't There were so many +other things to talk about. But there is a rival +archaeologist who would ask nothing better than +to get ahead of me in this matter. He is younger +than I am, and youth is a big asset nowadays." + +"Pooh! You're not old!" cried Mr. Damon. +"You're no older than I am, and I'm still young. +I'm a lot younger than some of these boys who +are afraid to tackle a trip through a tropical +wilderness," and he playfully nudged Tom in the ribs. + +"I'm not a bit afraid!" retorted the young inventor. + +"No, I know you're not," laughed Mr. Damon. +"But I've got to say something, Tom, to stir you +up. Ned, how about you? Would you go?" + +"I can't, unless Tom does. You see I'm his +financial man now." + +"There you are, Tom Swift!" cried Mr. Damon. +"You see you are holding back a number +of persons just because you don't want to go." + +"I certainly wouldn't like to go without Tom," +said the professor slowly. "I really need his +help. You know, Tom, we would never have +found the city of Pelone if it had not been for +you and your marvelous powder. The conditions +in the Copan valley are likely to be still +more difficult to overcome, and I feel that I risk +failure without your young energy and your +inventive mind to aid in the work and to suggest +possible means of attaining our object. Come, +Tom, reconsider, and decide to make the trip." + +"And my promise to go was dependent on +Tom's agreement to accompany us," said Mr. +Damon + +"Come on!" urged the professor, much as one boy +might urge another to take part in a ball game. +"Don't let my rival get ahead of me." + +"I wouldn't like to see that," Tom said slowly. +"Who is he--any one I know?" + +"I don't believe so, Tom. He's connected +with a large, new college that has plenty of +money to spend on explorations and research +work. Beecher is his name--Fenimore Beecher." + +"Beecher!" exclaimed Tom, and there was +such a change in his manner that his friends +could not help noticing it. He jumped to his +feet, his eyes snapping, and he looked eagerly +and anxiously at Professor Bumper. + +"Did you say his name was Fenimore Beecher?" +Tom asked in a tense voice. + +"That's what it is--Professor Fenimore Beecher. +He is really a learned young man, and +thoroughly in earnest, though I do not like his +manner. But he is trying to get ahead of me, +which may account for my feeling." + +Tom Swift did not answer. Instead he hurried +from the room with a murmured apology. + +"I'll be back in about five minutes," he said, +as he went out. + +"Well, what's up now?" asked Mr. Damon of +Ned, as the young inventor departed. "What +set him off that way?" + +"The mention of Beecher's name, evidently. +Though I never heard him mention such a person +before." + +"Nor did I ever hear Professor Beecher speak +of Tom," said the bald-headed scientist. "Well, +we'll just have to wait until----" + +At that moment Tom came back into the room. + +"Gentlemen," he said, "I have reconsidered my +refusal to go to the Copan valley after the idol +of gold. I'm going with you!" + +"Good!" cried Professor Bumper. + +"Fine!" ejaculated Mr. Damon. "Bless my time-table! +I thought you'd come around, Tom Swift." + +"But what about your stabilizer?" asked Ned. + +"I was just talking to my father about it,' +the young inventor replied. "He will be able +to put the finishing touches on it. So I'll leave +it with him. As soon as I can get ready I'll go, +since you say haste is necessary, Professor Bumper." + +"It is, if we are to get ahead of Beecher." + +"Then we'll get ahead of him!" cried Tom. +"I'm with you now from the start to the finish. +I'll show him what I can do!" he added, while +Ned and the others wondered at the sudden +change in their friend's manner. + + + + +CHAPTER V + +THE LITTLE GREEN GOD + + +"Tom how soon can we go?" asked Professor +Bumper, as he began arranging his papers, maps +and documents ready to place them back in the +valise. + +"Within a week, if you want to start that +soon." + +"The sooner the better. A week will suit me. +I don't know just what Beecher's plans are, but, +he may try to get on the ground first. Though, +without boasting, I may say that he has not had +as much experience as I have had, thanks to +you, Tom, when you helped me find the lost city +of Pelone." + +"Well, I hope we'll be as successful this time," +murmured Tom. "I don't want to see Beecher +beat you." + +"I didn't know you knew him, Tom," said the +professor. + +"Oh, yes, I have met him. once," and there +was something in Tom's manner, though he tried +to speak indifferently, that made Ned believe +there was more behind his chum's sudden change +of determination than had yet appeared. + +"He never mentioned you," went on Professor +Bumper; "yet the last time I saw him I said I +was coming to see you, though I did not tell +him why." + +"No, he wouldn't be likely to speak of me," +said Tom significantly. + +"Well, if that's all settled, I guess I'll go back +home and pack up," said Mr. Damon, making a +move to depart. + +"There's no special rush," Tom said. "We +won't leave for a week. I can't get ready in +much less time than that." + +"Bless my socks! I know that," ejaculated Mr. +Damon. "But if I get my things packed I can +go to a hotel to stay while my wife is away. She +might take a notion to come home unexpectedly, +and, though she is a dear, good soul, she doesn't +altogether approve of my going off on these wild +trips with you, Tom Swift. But if I get all +packed, and clear out, she can't find me and she +can't hold me back. She is visiting her mother +now. I can send her a wire from Kurzon after +I get there." + +"I don't believe the telegraph there is work- +ing," laughed Professor Bumper. "But suit +yourself. I must go back to New York to arrange +for the goods we'll have to take with us. +In a week, Tom, we'll start." + +"You must stay to dinner," Tom said. "You +can't get a train now anyhow, and father wants +to meet you again. He's pretty well, considering +his age. And he's much better I verily +believe since I said I'd turn over to him the task +of finishing the stabilizer. He likes to work." + +"We'll stay and take the night train back," +agreed Mr. Damon. "It will be like old times, +Tom," he went on, "traveling off together into +the wilds. Central America is pretty wild, isn't +it?" he asked, as if in fear of being disappointed! +on that score. + +"Oh, it's wild enough to suit any one," +answered Professor Bumper. + +"Well, now to settle a few details," observed +Tom. "Ned, what is the situation as regards the +financial affairs of my father and myself? Nothing +will come to grief if we go away, will there?" + +"I guess not, Tom. But are you going to take +your father with you?" + +"No, of course not." + +"But you spoke of `we.' " + +"I meant you and I are going." + +"Me, Tom?" + +"Sure, you! I wouldn't think of leaving you +behind. You want Ned along, don't you, Professor?" + +"Of course. It will be an ideal party--we +four. We'll have to take natives when we get +to Honduras, and make up a mule pack-train for +the interior. I had some thoughts of asking +you to take an airship along, but it might frighten +the Indians, and I shall have to depend on +them for guides, as well as for porters. So it +will be an old-fashioned expedition, in a way." + +Mr. Swift came in at this point to meet his old +friends. + +"The boy needs a little excitement," he said. +"He's been puttering over that stabilizer invention +too long. I can finish the model for him +in a very short time." + +Professor Bumper told Mr. Swift something +about the proposed trip, while Mr. Damon went +out with Tom and Ned to one of the shops to +look at a new model aeroplane the young inventor +had designed. + +There was a merry party around the table at +dinner, though now and then Ned noticed that +Tom had an abstracted and preoccupied air. + +"Thinking about the idol of gold?" asked Ned +in a whisper to his chum, when they were about +to leave the table. + +"The idol of gold? Oh, yes! Of course! It +will be great if we can bring that back with us." +But the manner in which he said this made Ned +feel sure that Tom had had other thoughts, +and that he had used a little subterfuge in his +answer. + +Ned was right, as he proved for himself a little +later, when, Mr. Damon and the professor having +gone home, the young financial secretary +took his friend to a quiet corner and asked: + +"What's the matter, Tom?" + +"Matter? What do you mean?" + +"I mean what made you make up your mind +so quickly to go on this expedition when you +heard Beecher was going?" + +"Oh--er--well, you wouldn't want to see our +old friend Professor Bumper left, would you, +after he had worked out the secret of the idol +of gold? You wouldn't want some young +whipper-snapper to beat him in the race, would +you, Ned?" + +"No, of course not." + +"Neither would I. That's why I changed my +mind. This Beecher isn't going to get that idol +if I can stop him!" + +"You seem rather bitter against him." + +"Bitter? Oh, not at all. I simply don't want +to see my friends disappointed." + +"Then Beecher isn't a friend of yours?" + +"Oh, I've met him, that is all," and Tom tried +to speak indifferently. + +"Humph!" mused Ned, "there's more here than I dreamed of. +I'm going to get at the bottom of it." + +But though Ned tried to pump Tom, he was +not successful. The young inventor admitted +knowing the youthful scientist, but that was all, +Tom reiterating his determination not to let Professor +Bumper be beaten in the race for the idol +of gold. + +"Let me see," mused Ned, as he went home +that evening. "Tom did not change his mind +until he heard Beecher's name mentioned. Now +this shows that Beecher had something to do +with it. The only reason Tom doesn't want +Beecher to get this idol or find the buried city +is because Professor Bumper is after it. And +yet the professor is not an old or close friend +of Tom's. They met only when Tom went to +dig his big tunnel. There must be some other +reason." + +Ned did some more thinking. Then he +clapped his hands together, and a smile spread +over his face. + +"I believe I have it!" he cried. "The little +green god as compared to the idol of gold! +That's it. I'm going to make a call on my way home." + +This he did, stopping at the home of Mary +Nestor, a pretty girl, who, rumor had it, was +tacitly engaged to Tom. Mary was not at home, +but Mr. Nestor was, and for Ned's purpose this +answered. + +"Well, well, glad to see you!" exclaimed +Mary's father. "Isn't Tom with you?" he asked +a moment later, seeing that Ned was alone. + +"No, Tom isn't with me this evening," Ned +answered. "The fact is, he's getting ready to +go off on another expedition, and I'm going with him." + +"You young men are always going somewhere," +remarked Mrs. Nestor. "Where is it to this time?" + +"Some place in Central America," Ned +answered, not wishing to be too particular. He +was wondering how he could find out what he +wanted to know, when Mary's mother unexpectedly +gave him just the information he was after. + +"Central America!" she exclaimed. "Why, +Father," and she looked at her husband, "that's +where Professor Beecher is going, isn't it?" + +"Yes, I believe he did mention something about that." + +"Professor Beecher, the man who is an author- +ity on Aztec ruins?" asked Ned, taking a shot in +the dark. + +"Yes," said Mr. Nestor. "And a mighty fine +young man he is, too. I knew his father well. +He was here on a visit not long ago, young +Beecher was, and he talked most entertainingly +about his discoveries. You remember how +interested Mary was, Mother?" + +"Yes, she seemed to be," said Mrs. Nestor. +"Tom Swift dropped in during the course of +the evening," she added to Ned, "and Mary +introduced him to Professor Beecher. But I can't +say that Tom was much interested in the +professor's talk." + +"No?" questioned Ned. + +"No, not at all. But Tom did not stay long. +He left just as Mary and the professor were +drawing a map so the professor could indicate +where he had once made a big discovery." + +"I see," murmured Ned. "Well, I suppose +Tom must have been thinking of something else +at the time." + +"Very likely," agreed Mr. Nestor. "But Tom +missed a very profitable talk. I was very much +interested myself in what the professor told us, +and so was Mary. She invited Mr. Beecher to +come again. He takes after his father in being +very thorough in what he does. + +"Sometimes I think," went on Mr. Nestor, "that +Tom isn't quite steady enough. He's thinking +of so many things, perhaps, that he can't get his +mind down to the commonplace. I remember he +once sent something here in a box labeled +`dynamite.' Though there was no explosive in it, +it gave us a great fright. But Tom is a boy, in +spite of his years. Professor Beecher seems +much older. We all like him very much." + +"That's nice," said Ned, as he took his +departure. He had found out what he had come +to learn. + +"I knew it!" Ned exclaimed as he walked +home. "I knew something was in the wind. +The little green god of jealousy has Tom in his +clutches. That's why my inventive friend was +so anxious to go on this expedition when he +learned Beecher was to go. He wants to beat +him. I guess the professor has plainly shown +that he wouldn't like anything better than to +cut Tom out with Mary. Whew! that's something +to think about!" + + + +CHAPTER VI + +UNPLEASANT NEWS + + +Ned Newton decided to keep to himself what +he had heard at the Nestor home. Not for the +world would he let Tom Swift know of the +situation. + +"That is, I won't let him know that I know," +said Ned to himself, "though he is probably as +well aware of the situation as I am. But it sure +is queer that this Professor Beecher should have +taken such a fancy to Mary, and that her father +should regard him so well. That is natural, +I suppose. But I wonder how Mary herself +feels about it. That is the part Tom would +be most interested in. + +"No wonder Tom wants to get ahead of this +young college chap, who probably thinks he's +the whole show. If he can find the buried city, +and get the idol of gold, it would be a big +feather in his cap. + +"He'd have no end of honors heaped on him, +and I suppose his hat wouldn't come within +three sizes of fitting him. Then he'd stand in +better than ever with Mr. Nestor. And, maybe, +with Mary, too, though I think she is loyal +to Tom. But one never can tell. + +"However, I'm glad I know about it. I'll +do all I can to help Tom, without letting him +know that I know. And if I can do anything +to help in finding that idol of gold for Professor +Bumper, and, incidentally, Tom, I'll do it," and +he spoke aloud in his enthusiasm. + +Ned, who was walking along in the darkness, +clapped his open hand down on Tom's magazine +he was carrying home to read again, and +the resultant noise was a sharp crack. As it +sounded a figure jumped from behind a tree +and called tensely: + +"Hold on there!" + +Ned stopped short, thinking he was to be +the victim of a holdup, but his fears were +allayed when he beheld one of the police force of +Shopton confronting him. + +"I heard what you said about gettin' the gold," +went on the officer. "I was walkin' along and I +heard you talkin'. Where's your pal?" + +"I haven't any, Mr. Newbold," answered Ned +with a laugh, as he recognized the man. + +"Oh, pshaw! It's Ned Newton!" exclaimed +the disappointed officer. "I thought you was +talkin' to a confederate about gold, and figured +maybe you was goin' to rob the bank." + +"No, nothing like that," answered Ned, still +much amused. "I was talking to myself about +a trip Tom Swift and I are going to take +and----" + +"Oh, that's all right," responded the +policeman. "I can understand it, if it had anything to +do with Tom. He's a great boy." + +"Indeed he is," agreed Ned, making a mental +resolve not to be so public with his thoughts +in the future. He chatted for a moment with +the officer, and then, bidding him good-night, +walked on to his home, his mind in a whirl with +conglomerate visions of buried cities, great grinning +idols of gold, and rival professors seeking +to be first at the goal. + +The next few days were busy ones for Tom, +Ned and, in fact, the whole Swift household. +Tom and his father had several consultations and +conducted several experiments in regard to the +new stabilizer, the completion of which was so +earnestly desired. Mr. Swift was sure he could +carry the invention to a successful conclusion. + +Ned was engaged in putting the financial +affairs of the Swift Company in shape, so they +would practically run themselves during his ab- +sence. Then, too, there was the packing of their +baggage which must be seen to. + +Of course, the main details of the trip were +left to Professor Bumper, who knew just what +to do. He had told Tom and Ned that all they +and Mr. Damon would have to do would be to +meet him at the pier in New York, where they +would find all arrangements made. + +One day, near the end of the week (the beginning +of the next being set for the start) Eradicate +came shuffling into the room where Tom was +sorting out the possessions he desired to take +with him, Ned assisting him in the task. + +"Well, Rad, what is it?" asked Tom, with +businesslike energy. + +"I done heah, Massa Tom, dat yo' all's gwine +off on a long trip once mo'. Am dat so?" + +"Yes, that's so, Rad." + +"Well, den, I'se come to ast yo' whut I'd bettah +take wif me. Shall I took warm clothes or cool +clothes?" + +"Well, if you were going, Rad," answered Tom +with a smile, "you'd need cool clothes, for we're +going to a sort of jungle-land. But I'm sorry to +say you're not going this trip." + +"I---- I ain't gwine? Does yo' mean dat yo' +all ain't gwine to take me, Massa Tom?" + +"That's it, Rad. It isn't any trip for you." + +"In certain not!" broke in the voice of Koku, +the giant, who entered with a big trunk Tom had +sent him for. "Master want strong man like a +bull. He take Koku!" + +"Look heah!" spluttered Eradicate, and his eyes +flashed. "Yo'--yo' giant yo'--yo' may be strong +laik a bull, but ya' ain't got as much sense as +mah mule, Boomerang! Massa Tom don't want +no sich pusson wif him. He's gwine to take me." + +"He take me!" cried Koku, and his voice was +a roar while he beat on his mighty chest with his +huge fists. + +Tom, seeing that the dispute was likely to be +bothersome, winked at Ned and began to speak. + +"I don't believe you'd like it there, Rad--not +where we're going. It's a bad country. Why +the mosquitoes there bite holes in you--raise +bumps on you as big as eggs." + +"Oh, good land!" ejaculated the old colored man. +"Am dat so Massa Tom?" + +"It sure is. Then there's another kind of bug +that burrows under your fingernails, and if you +don't get 'em out, your fingers drop off." + +"Oh, good land, Massa Tom! Am dat a fact?" + +"It sure is. I don't want to see those things +happen to you, Rad." + +Slowly the old colored man shook his head. + +"I don't mahse'f," he said. "I---- I guess I +won't go." + +Eradicate did not stop to ask how Tom and +Ned proposed to combat these two species of +insects. + +But there remained Koku to dispose of, and he +stood smiling broadly as Eradicate shuffled of. + +"Me no 'fraid bugs," said the giant. + +"No," said Tom, with a look at Ned, for he did +not want to take the big man on the trip for +various reasons. "No, maybe not, Koku. Your +skin is pretty tough. But I understand there are +deep pools of water in the land where we are +going, and in them lives a fish that has a hide +like an alligator and a jaw like a shark. If you +fall in it's all up with you." + +"Dat true, Master Tom?" and Koku's voice +trembled. + +"Well, I've never seen such a fish, I'm sure, +but the natives tell about it." + +Koku seemed to be considering the matter. +Strange as it may seem, the giant, though afraid +of nothing human and brave when it came to a +hand-to-claw argument with a wild animal, had +a very great fear of the water and the unseen +life within it. Even a little fresh-water crab in +a brook was enough to send him shrieking to +shore. So when Tom told of this curious fish, +which many natives of Central America firmly +believe in, the giant took thought with himself. +Finally, he gave a sigh and said: + +"Me stay home and keep bad mans out of +master's shop." + +"Yes, I guess that's the best thing for you," +assented Tom with an air of relief. He and Ned +had talked the matter over, and they had agreed +that the presence of such a big man as Koku, in +an expedition going on a more or less secret mission, +would attract too much attention. + +"Well, I guess that clears matters up," said +Tom, as he looked over a collection of rifles and +small arms, to decide which to take. "We won't +have them to worry about." + +"No, only Professor Beecher," remarked Ned, +with a sharp look at his chum. + +"Oh, we'll dispose of him all right!" asserted +Tom boldly. "He hasn't had any experience in +business of this sort, and with that you and +Professor Bumper and Mr. Damon know we +ought to have little trouble in getting ahead of +the young man." + +"Not to speak of your own aid," added Ned. + +"Oh, I'll do what I can, of course," said Tom, +with an air of indifference. But Ned knew his +chum would work ceaselessly to help get the idol +of gold. + +Tom gave no sign that there was any complication +in his affair with Mary Nestor, and of +course Ned did not tell anything of what he knew +about it. + +That night saw the preparations of Ned and +Tom about completed. There were one or two +matters yet to finish on Tom's part in relation +to his business, but these offered no difficulties. + +The two chums were in the Swift home, talking +over the prospective trip, when Mrs. Baggert, +answering a ring at the front door, announced +that Mr. Damon was outside. + +"Tell him to come in," ordered Tom. + +"Bless my baggage check!" exclaimed the +excitable man, as he shook hands with Tom and +Ned and noted the packing evidences all about. +"You're ready to go to the land of wonders." + +"The land of wonders?" repeated Ned. + +"Yes, that's what Professor Bumper calls the +part of Honduras we're going to. And it must +be wonderful, Tom. Think of whole cities, +some of them containing idols and temples of +gold, buried thirty and forty feet under the +surface! Wonderful is hardly the name for it!" + +"It'll be great!" cried Ned. "I suppose you're +ready, Mr. Damon--you and the professor?" + +"Yes. But, Tom, I have a bit of unpleasant +news for you." + +"Unpleasant news?" + +"Yes. You know Professor Bumper spoke of +a rival--a man named Beecher who is a member +of the faculty of a new and wealthy college." + +"I heard him speak of him--yes," and the way +Tom said it no one would have suspected that +he had any personal interest in the matter. + +"He isn't going to give his secret away," +thought Ned. + +"Well, this Professor Beecher, you know," +went on Mr. Damon, "also knows about the idol +of gold, and is trying to get ahead of Professor +Bumper in the search." + +"He did say something of it, but nothing was +certain," remarked Tom. + +"But it is certain!" exclaimed Mr. Damon. +"Bless my toothpick, it's altogether too certain!" + +"How is that?" asked Tom. "Is Beecher +certainly going to Honduras?" + +"Yes, of course. But what is worse, he and +his party will leave New York on the same +steamer with us!" + + + +CHAPTER VII + +TOM HEARS SOMETHING + + +On hearing Mr. Damon's rather startling +announcement, Tom and Ned looked at one another. +There seemed to be something back of +the simple statement--an ominous and portending +"something." + +"On the same steamer with us, is he?" mused Tom. + +"How did you learn this?" asked Ned. + +"Just got a wire from Professor Bumper +telling me. He asked me to telephone to you about +it, as he was too busy to call up on the long +distance from New York. But instead of 'phoning +I decided to come over myself." + +"Glad you did," said Tom, heartily. "Did +Professor Bumper want us to do anything +special, now that it is certain his rival will be +so close on his trail?" + +"Yes, he asked me to warn you to be careful +what you did and said in reference to the expedition." + +"Then does he fear something?" asked Ned. + +"Yes, in a way. I think he is very much afraid +this young Beecher will not only be first on the +site of the underground city, but that he may +be the first to discover the idol of gold. It would +be a great thing for a young archaeologist like +Beecher to accomplish a mission of this sort, +and beat Professor Bumper in the race." + +"Do you think that's why Beecher decided to +go on the same steamer we are to take?" asked Ned. + +"Yes, I do," said Mr. Damon. "Though from +what Professor Bumper said I know he regards +Professor Beecher as a perfectly honorable man, +as well as a brilliant student. I do not believe +Beecher or his party would stoop to anything +dishonorable or underhand, though they would +not hesitate, nor would we, to take advantage of +every fair chance to win in the race." + +"No, I suppose that's right," observed Tom; +but there was a queer gleam in his eye, and his +chum wondered if Tom did not have in mind the +prospective race between himself and Fenimore +Beecher for the regard of Mary Nestor. "We'll +do our best to win, and any one is at liberty to +travel on the same steamer we are to take," added +the young inventor, and his tone became more +incisive. + +"It will be all the livelier with two expeditions +after the same golden idol," remarked Ned. + +"Yes, I think we're in for some excitement," +observed Tom grimly. But even he did not +realize all that lay before them ere they would +reach Kurzon. + +Mr. Damon, having delivered his message, and +remarking that his preparations for leaving were +nearly completed, went back to Waterfield, from +there to proceed to New York in a few days +with Tom and Ned, to meet Professor Bumper. + +"Well, I guess we have everything in pretty +good shape," remarked Tom to his chum a day +or so after the visit of Mr. Damon. "Everything +is packed, and as I have a few personal matters +to attend to I think I'll take the afternoon off." + +"Go to it!" laughed Ned, guessing a thing of two. +"I've got a raft of stuff myself to look after, +but don't let that keep you." + +"If there is anything I can do," began Tom, +"don't hesitate to----" + +"Nonsense!" exclaimed Ned. "I can do it all alone. +It's some of the company's business, anyhow, +and I'm paid for looking after that." + +"All right, then I'll cut along," Tom said, and +he wore a relieved air. + +"He's going to see Mary," observed Ned with +a grin, as he observed Tom hop into his trim +little roadster, which under his orders, Koku had +polished and cleaned until it looked as though +it had just come from the factory. + +A little later the trim and speedy car drew up +in front of the Nestor home, and Tom bounded +up on the front porch, his heart not altogether +as light as his feet. + +"No, I'm sorry, but Mary isn't in," said Mrs. +Nestor, answering his inquiry after greeting him. + +"Not at home?" + +"No, she went on a little visit to her cousin's at +Fayetteville. She said something about letting +you know she was going." + +"She did drop me a card," answered Tom, and, +somehow he did not feel at all cheerful. "But +I thought it wasn't until next week she was +going." + +"That was her plan, Tom. But she changed +it. Her cousin wired, asking her to advance +the date, and this Mary did. There was something +about a former school chum who was also +to be at Myra's house--Myra is Mary's cousin +you know." + +"Yes, I know," assented the young inventor. +"And so Mary is gone. How long is she going +to stay?" + +"Oh, about two weeks. She wasn't quite +certain. It depends on the kind of a time she has, +I suppose." + +"Yes, I suppose so," agreed Tom. "Well, if +you write before I do you might say I called, +Mrs. Nestor." + +"I will, Tom. And I know Mary will be sorry +she wasn't here to take a ride with you; it's +such a nice day," and the lady smiled as she +looked at the speedy roadster. + +"Maybe--maybe you'd like to come for a spin?" +asked Tom, half desperately. + +"No, thank you. I'm too old to be jounced +around in one of those small cars." + +"Nonsense! She rides as easily as a Pullman +sleeper." + +"Well, I have to go to a Red Cross meeting, +anyhow, so I can't come, Tom. Thank you, +just the same." + +Tom did not drive back immediately to his +home. He wanted to do a bit of thinking, and +he believed he could do it best by himself. So +it was late afternoon when he again greeted Ned, +who, meanwhile, had been kept very busy. + +"Well?" called Tom's chum. + +"Um!" was the only answer, and Tom called +Koku to put the car away in the garage. + +"Something wrong," mused Ned. + +The next three days were crowded with events +and with work. Mr. Damon came over +frequently to consult with Tom and Ned, and +finally the last of their baggage had been packed, +certain of Tom's inventions and implements sent +on by express to New York to be taken to Honduras, +and then our friends themselves followed +to the metropolis. + +"Good-bye, Tom," said his father. "Good- +bye, and good luck! If you don't get the idol +of gold I'm sure you'll have experiences that +will be valuable to you." + +"We're going to get the idol of gold!" said +Tom determinedly. + +"Look out for the bad bugs," suggested Eradicate. + +"We will," promised Ned. + +Tom's last act was to send a message to Mary +Nestor, and then he, with Ned and Mr. Damon, +who blessed everything in sight from the gasoline +in the automobile to the blue sky overhead, +started for the station. + +New York was reached without incident. The +trio put up at the hotel where Professor Bumper +was to meet them. + +"He hasn't arrived yet," said Tom, after +glancing over the names on the hotel register and +not seeing Professor Bumper's among them. + +"Oh, he'll be here all right," asserted Mr. +Damon. "Bless my galvanic battery! he sent me +a telegram at one o'clock this morning saying +he'd be sure to meet us in New York. No fear +of him not starting for the land of wonders." + +"There are some other professors registered, +though," observed Ned, as he glanced at the +book, noting the names of several scientists of +whom he and Tom had read. + +"Yes. I wonder what they're doing in New +York," replied Tom. "They are from New +England. Maybe there's a convention going on. +Well, we'll have to wait, that's all, until +Professor Bumper comes." + +And during that wait Tom heard something +that surprised him and caused him no little +worry. It was when Ned came back to his +room, which adjoined Tom's, that the young +treasurer gave his chum the news. + +"I say, Tom!" Ned exclaimed. "Who do you +think those professors are, whose names we saw +on the register?" + +"I haven't the least idea." + +"Why, they're of Beecher's party!" + +"You don't mean it!" + +"I surely do." + +"How do you know?" + +"I happened to overhear two of them talking +down in the lobby a while ago. They didn't +make any secret of it. They spoke freely of going +with Beecher to some ancient city in Honduras, +to look for an idol of gold." + +"They did? But where is Beecher?" + +"He hasn't joined them yet. Their plans +have been changed. Instead of leaving on the +same steamer we are to take in the morning +they are to come on a later one. The professors +here are waiting for Beecher to come." + +"Why isn't he here now?" + +"Well, I heard one of the other scientists say +that he had gone to a place called Fayetteville, +and will come on from there." + +"Fayetteville!" ejaculated Tom. +"Yes. That isn't far from Shopton." + +"I know," assented Tom. "I wonder--I wonder +why he is going there?" + +"I can tell you that, too." + +"You can? You're a regular detective." + +"No, I just happened to overhear it. Beecher +is going to call on Mary Nestor in Fayetteville, +so his friends here said he told them, and his call +has to do with an important matter--to him!" +and Ned gazed curiously at his chum. + + + +CHAPTER VIII + +OFF FOR HONDURAS + + +Just what Tom's thoughts were, Ned, of +course, could not guess. But by the flush that +showed under the tan of his chum's cheeks the +young financial secretary felt pretty certain that +Tom was a bit apprehensive of the outcome of +Professor Beecher's call on Mary Nestor. + +"So he is going to see her about `something +important,' Ned?" + +"That's what some members of his party called +it." + +"And they're waiting here for him to join +them?" + +"Yes. And it means waiting a week for +another steamer. It must be something pretty +important, don't you think, to cause Beecher to +risk that delay in starting after the idol of gold?" + +"Important? Yes, I suppose so," assented +Tom. "And yet even if he waits for the next +steamer he will get to Honduras nearly as soon +as we do." + +"How is that?" + +"The next boat is a faster one." + +"Then why don't we take that? I hate dawdling +along on a slow freighter." + +"Well, for one thing it would hardly do to +change now, when all our goods are on board. +And besides, the captain of the _Relstab_, on which +we are going to sail, is a friend of Professor +Bumper's." + +"Well, I'm just as glad Beecher and his party +aren't going with us," resumed Ned, after a +pause. "It might make trouble." + +"Oh, I'm ready for any trouble HE might make!" +quickly exclaimed Tom. + +He meant trouble that might be developed in +going to Honduras, and starting the search +for the lost city and the idol of gold. This kind +of trouble Tom and his friends had experienced +before, on other trips where rivals had sought +to frustrate their ends. + +But, in his heart, though he said nothing to +Ned about it, Tom was worried. Much as he +disliked to admit it to himself, he feared the visit +of Professor Beecher to Mary Nestor in Fayetteville +had but one meaning. + +"I wonder if he's going to propose to her," +thought Tom. "He has the field all to himself +now, and her father likes him. That's in his favor. +I guess Mr. Nestor has never quite forgiven me +for that mistake about the dynamite box, and +that wasn't my fault. Then, too, the Beecher +and Nestor families have been friends for years. +Yes, he surely has the inside edge on me, and +if he gets her to throw me over---- Well, I +won't give up without a fight!" and Tom mentally +girded himself for a battle of wits. + +"He's relying on the prestige he'll get out of +this idol of gold if his party finds it," thought +on the young inventor. "But I'll help find it +first. I'm glad to have a little start of him, anyhow, +even if it isn't more than two days. Though +if our vessel is held back much by storms he may +get on the ground first. However, that can't +be helped. I'll do the best I can." + +These thoughts shot through Tom's mind +even as Ned was asking his questions and making +comments. Then the young inventor, shaking +his shoulders as though to rid them of some +weight, remarked: + +"Well, come on out and see the sights. It will +be long before we look on Broadway again." + +When the chums returned from their sightseeing +excursion, they found that Professor Bumper +had arrived. + +"Where's Professor Bumper?" asked Ned, the next day. + +"In his room, going over books, papers and +maps to make sure he has everything." + +"And Mr. Damon?" + +Tom did not have to answer that last question. +Into the apartment came bursting the excited +individual himself. + +"Bless my overshoes!" he cried, "I've been +looking everywhere for you! Come on, there's +no time to lose!" + +"What's the matter now?" asked Ned. "Is the +hotel on fire?" + +"Has anything happened to Professor Bumper?" +Tom demanded, a wild idea forming in his +head that perhaps some one of the Beecher party +had tried to kidnap the discoverer of the lost +city of Pelone. + +"Oh, everything is all right," answered Mr. +Damon. "But it's nearly time for the show to +start, and we don't want to be late. I have +tickets." + +"For what?" asked Tom and Ned together. + +"The movies," was the laughing reply. "Bless +my loose ribs! but I wouldn't miss him for anything. +He's in a new play called `Up in a Balloon +Boys.' It's great!" and Mr. Damon named +a certain comic moving picture star in whose +horse-play Mr. Damon took a curious interest. +Tom and Ned were glad enough to go, Tom +that he might have a chance to do a certain +amount of thinking, and Ned because he was +still boy enough to like moving pictures. + +"I wonder, Tom," said Mr. Damon, as they +came out of the theater two hours later, all three +chuckling at the remembrance of what they had +seen, "I wonder you never turned your inventive +mind to the movies." + +"Maybe I will, some day," said Tom. + +He spoke rather uncertainly. The truth of +the matter was that he was still thinking deeply +of the visit of Professor Beecher to Mary Nestor, +and wondering what it portended. + +But if Tom's sleep was troubled that night he +said nothing of it to his friends. He was up +early the next morning, for they were to leave +that day, and there was still considerable to be +done in seeing that their baggage and supplies +were safely loaded, and in attending to the last +details of some business matters. + +While at the hotel they had several glimpses +of the members of the Beecher party who were +awaiting the arrival of the young professor who +was to lead them into the wilds of Honduras. +But our friends did not seek the acquaintance +of their rivals. The latter, likewise, remained +by themselves, though they knew doubtless +that there was likely to be a strenuous race for +the possession of the idol of gold, then, it was +presumed, buried deep in some forest-covered +city. + +Professor Bumper had made his arrangements +carefully. As he explained to his friends, they +would take the steamer from New York to Puerto +Cortes, one of the principal seaports of +Honduras. This is a town of about three thousand +inhabitants, with an excellent harbor and a +big pier along which vessels can tie up and +discharge their cargoes directly into waiting cars. + +The preparations were finally completed. +The party went aboard the steamer, which was +a large freight vessel, carrying a limited number +of passengers, and late one afternoon swung +down New York Bay. + +"Off for Honduras!" cried Ned gaily, as they +passed the Statue of Liberty. "I wonder what +will happen before we see that little lady again." + +"Who knows?" asked Tom, shrugging his +shoulders, Spanish fashion. And there came before +him the vision of a certain "little lady," about +whom he had been thinking deeply of late. + + + +CHAPTER IX + +VAL JACINTO + + +"Rather tame, isn't it, Tom?" + +"Well, Ned, it isn't exactly like going up in +an airship," and Tom Swift who was gazing +over the rail down into the deep blue water of +the Caribbean Sea, over which their vessel was +then steaming, looked at his chum beside him. + +"No, and your submarine voyage had it all over +this one for excitement," went on Ned. "When +I think of that----" + +"Bless my sea legs!" interrupted Mr. Damon, +overhearing the conversation. "Don't speak of +THAT trip. My wife never forgave me for going +on it. But I had a fine time," he added with a +twinkle of his eyes. + +"Yes, that was quite a trip," observed Tom, +as his mind went back to it. "But this one isn't +over yet remember. And I shouldn't be surprised +if we had a little excitement very soon." + +"What do you mean?" asked Ned. + +Up to this time the voyage from New York +down into the tropical seas had been anything +but exciting. There were not many passengers +besides themselves, and the weather had been +fine. + +At first, used as they were to the actions of +unscrupulous rivals in trying to thwart their +efforts, Tom and Ned had been on the alert for +any signs of hidden enemies on board the steamer. +But aside from a little curiosity when it became +known that they were going to explore +little-known portions of Honduras, the other +passengers took hardly any interest in our travelers. + +It was thought best to keep secret the fact +that they were going to search for a wonderful +idol of gold. Not even the mule and ox-cart +drivers, whom they would hire to take them into +the wilds of the interior would be told of the real +object of the search. It would be given out that +they were looking for interesting ruins of ancient +cities, with a view to getting such antiquities +as might be there. + +"What do you mean?" asked Ned again, when +Tom did not answer him immediately. "What's +the excitement?" + +"I think we're in for a storm," was the reply. +"The barometer is falling and I see the crew +going about making everything snug. So we +may have a little trouble toward this end of our +trip." + +"Let it come!" exclaimed Mr. Damon. "We're +not afraid of trouble, Tom. Swift, are we?" + +"No, to be sure we're not. And yet it looks +as though the storm would be a bad one." + +"Then I am going to see if my books and +papers are ready, so I can get them together in a +hurry in case we have to take to the life-boats," +said Professor Bumper, coming on deck at that +moment. "It won't do to lose them. If we +didn't have the map we might not be able to find----" + +"Ahem!" exclaimed Tom, with unnecessary +emphasis it seemed. "I'll help you go over your +papers, Professor," he added, and with a wink +and a motion of his hand, he enjoined silence on +his friend. Ned looked around for a reason for +this, and observed a man, evidently of Spanish +extraction, passing them as he paced up and +down the deck. + +"What's the matter?" asked the scientist in +a whisper, as the man went on. "Do you know +him? Is he a----?" + +"I don't know anything about him," said Tom; +"but it is best not to speak of our trip before +strangers." + +"You are right, Tom," said Professor Bumper. +"I'll be more careful." + +A storm was brewing, that was certain. A +dull, sickly yellow began to obscure the sky, and +the water, from a beautiful blue, turned a slate +color and ran along the sides of the vessel with a +hissing sound as though the sullen waves would +ask nothing better than to suck the craft down +into their depths. The wind, which had been +freshening, now sang in louder tones as it +hummed through the rigging and the funnel stays +and bowled over the receiving conductors of the +wireless. + +Sharp commands from the ship's officers +hastened the work of the crew in making things +snug, and life lines were strung along deck for +the safety of such of the passengers as might +venture up when the blow began. + +The storm was not long in coming. The +howling of the wind grew louder, flecks of foam +began to separate themselves from the crests of +the waves, and the vessel pitched, rolled and +tossed more violently. At first Tom and his +friends thought they were in for no more than +an ordinary blow, but as the storm progressed, +and the passengers became aware of the anxiety +on the part of the officers and crew, the alarm +spread among them. + +It really was a violent storm, approaching a +hurricane in force, and at one time it seemed as +though the craft, having been heeled far over +under a staggering wave that swept her decks, +would not come back to an even keel. + +There was a panic among some of the +passengers, and a few excited men behaved in a +way that caused prompt action on the part of +the first officer, who drove them back to the +main cabin under threat of a revolver. For the +men were determined to get to the lifeboats, and +a small craft would not have had a minute to live +in such seas as were running. + +But the vessel proved herself sturdier than the +timid ones had dared to hope, and she was soon +running before the blast, going out of her course, +it is true, but avoiding the danger among the +many cays, or small islands, that dot the Caribbean +Sea. + +There was nothing to do but to let the storm +blow itself out, which it did in two days. Then +came a period of delightful weather. The cargo +had shifted somewhat, which gave the steamer +a rather undignified list. + +This, as well as the loss of a deckhand +overboard, was the effect of the hurricane, and +though the end of the trip came amid sunshine +and sweet-scented tropical breezes, many could +not forget the dangers through which they had +passed. + +In due time Tom and his party found +themselves safely housed in the small hotel at Puerto +Cortes, their belongings stored in a convenient +warehouse and themselves, rather weary by reason +of the stress of weather, ready for the start +into the interior wilds of Honduras. + +"How are we going to make the trip?" asked +Ned, as they sat at supper, the first night after +their arrival, eating of several dishes, the red- +pepper condiments of which caused frequent trips +to the water pitcher. + +"We can go in two ways, and perhaps we shall +find it to our advantage to use both means," said +Professor Bumper. "To get to this city of Kurzon," +he proceeded in a low voice, so that none +of the others in the dining-room would hear +them, "we will have to go either by mule back +or boat to a point near Copan. As near as I +can tell by the ancient maps, Kurzon is in the +Copan valley. + +"Now the Chamelecon river seems to run to +within a short distance of there, but there is +no telling how far up it may be navigable. If +we can go by boat it will be much more comfortable. +Travel by mules and ox-carts is slow and +sure, but the roads are very bad, as I have heard +from friends who have made explorations in +Honduras. + +"And, as I said, we may have to use both land +and water travel to get us where we want to go. +We can proceed as far as possible up the river, +and then take to the mules." + +"What about arranging for boats and animals?" +asked Tom. "I should think----" + +He suddenly ceased talking and reached for +the water, taking several large swallows. + +"Whew!" he exclaimed, when he could catch his breath. +"That was a hot one." + +"What did you do?" asked Ned. + +"Bit into a nest of red pepper. Guess I'll have +to tell that cook to scatter his hits. He's bunching +'em too much in my direction," and Tom +wiped the tears from his eyes. + +"To answer your question," said Professor +Bumper, "I will say that I have made partial +arrangements for men and animals, and boats +if it is found feasible to use them. I've been in +correspondence with one of the merchants here, +and he promised to make arrangements for us." + +"When do we leave?" asked Mr. Damon. + +"As soon as possible. I am not going to risk +anything by delay," and it was evident the professor +referred to his young rival whose arrival +might be expected almost any time. + +As the party was about to leave the table, +they were approached by a tall, dignified Spaniard +who bowed low, rather exaggeratedly low, +Ned thought, and addressed them in fairly good +English. + +"Your pardons, Senors," he began, "but if it +will please you to avail yourself of the humble +services of myself, I shall have great pleasure +in guiding you into the interior. I have at my +command both mules and boats." + +"How do you know we are going into the +interior?" asked Tom, a bit sharply, for he did +not like the assurance of the man. + +"Pardon, Senor. I saw that you are from the +States. And those from the States do not come +to Honduras except for two reasons. To travel +and make explorations or to start trade, and +professors do not usually engage in trade," and +he bowed to Professor Bumper. + +"I saw your name on the register," he proceeded, +"and it was not difficult to guess your mission," +and he flashed a smile on the party, his +white teeth showing brilliantly beneath his +small, black moustache. + +"I make it my business to outfit traveling +parties, either for business, pleasure or scientific +matters. I am, at your service, Val Jacinto," +and he introduced himself with another low bow. + +For a moment Tom and his friends hardly +knew how to accept this offer. It might be, +as the man had said, that he was a professional +tour conductor, like those who have charge of +Egyptian donkey-boys and guides. Or might he +not be a spy? + +This occurred to Tom no less than to Professor +Bumper. They looked at one another while +Val Jacinto bowed again and murmured: + +"At your service!" + +"Can you provide means for taking us to the +Copan valley?" asked the professor. "You are +right in one respect. I am a scientist and I purpose +doing some exploring near Copan. Can +you get us there?" + +"Most expensively--I mean, most expeditionlessly," +said Val Jacinto eagerly. "Pardon my +unhappy English. I forget at times. The +charges will be most moderate. I can send you +by boat as far as the river travel is good, and +then have mules and ox-carts in waiting." + +"How far is it?" asked Tom. + +"A hundred miles as the vulture flies, Senor, +but much farther by river and road. We shall +be a week going." + +"A hundred miles in a week!" groaned Ned. +"Say, Tom, if you had your aeroplane we'd be +there in an hour." + +"Yes, but we haven't it. However, we're in +no great rush." + +"But we must not lose time," said Professor +Bumper. "I shall consider your offer," he added +to Val Jacinto. + +"Very good, Senor. I am sure you will be +pleased with the humble service I may offer you, +and my charges will be small. Adios," and he +bowed himself away. + +"What do you think of him?" asked Ned, as +they went up to their rooms in the hotel, or +rather one large room, containing several beds. + +"He's a pretty slick article," said Mr. Damon. +"Bless my check-book! but he spotted us at +once, in spite of our secrecy." + +"I guess these guide purveyors are trained +for that sort of thing," observed the scientist. +"I know my friends have often spoken of having +had the same experience. However, I shall +ask my friend, who is in business here, about +this Val Jacinto, and if I find him all right we +may engage him " + +Inquiries next morning brought the information, +from the head of a rubber exporting firm +with whom the professor was acquainted, that +the Spaniard was regularly engaged in transporting +parties into the interior, and was considered +efficient, careful and as honest as pos- +sible, considering the men he engaged as workers. + +"So we have decided to engage you," Professor +Bumper informed Val Jacinto the afternoon +following the meeting. + +"I am more than pleased, Senor. I shall take +you into the wilds of Honduras. At your +service!" and he bowed low. + +"Humph! I don't just like the way our friend +Val says that," observed Tom to Ned a little +later. "I'd have been better pleased if he had +said he'd guide us into the wilds and out again." + +If Tom could have seen the crafty smile on +the face of the Spaniard as the man left the +hotel, the young inventor might have felt even +less confidence in the guide. + + + +CHAPTER X + +IN THE WILDS + + +"All aboard! Step lively now! This boat +makes no stops this side of Boston!" cried Ned +Newton gaily, as he got into one of the several +tree canoes provided for the transportation of +the party up the Chamelecon river, for the first +stage of their journey into the wilds of +Honduras. "All aboard! This reminds me of my +old camping days, Tom." + +It brought those days back, in a measure, to +Tom also. For there were a number of canoes +filled with the goods of the party, while the +members themselves occupied a larger one with their +personal baggage. Strong, half-naked Indian +paddlers were in charge of the canoes which +were of sturdy construction and light draft, since +the river, like most tropical streams, was of +uncertain depths, choked here and there with sand +bars or tropical growths. + +Finding that Val Jacinto was regularly engaged +in the business of taking explorers and +mine prospectors into the interior, Professor +Bumper had engaged the man. He seemed to be +efficient. At the promised time he had the +canoes and paddlers on hand and the goods safely +stowed away while one big craft was fitted up +as comfortably as possible for the men of the +party. + +As Ned remarked, it did look like a camping +party, for in the canoes were tents, cooking +utensils and, most important, mosquito canopies +of heavy netting. + +The insect pests of Honduras, as in all tropical +countries, are annoying and dangerous. Therefore +it was imperative to sleep under mosquito +netting. + +On the advice of Val Jacinto, who was to +accompany them, the travelers were to go up the +river about fifty miles. This was as far as it +would be convenient to use the canoes, the guide +told Tom and his friends, and from there on +the trip to the Copan valley would be made on +the backs of mules, which would carry most of +the baggage and equipment. The heavier portions +would be transported in ox-carts. + +As Professor Bumper expected to do considerable +excavating in order to locate the buried +city, or cities, as the case might be, he had to +contract for a number of Indian diggers and +laborers. These could be hired in Copan, it was +said. + +The plan, therefore, was to travel by canoes +during the less heated parts of the day, and tie +up at night, making camp on shore in the net- +protected tents. As for the Indians, they did +not seem to mind the bites of the insects. They +sometimes made a smudge fire, Val Jacinto had +said, but that was all. + +"Well, we haven't seen anything of Beecher +and his friends," remarked the young inventor +as they were about to start. + +"No, he doesn't seem to have arrived," agreed +Professor Bumper. "We'll get ahead of him, +and so much the better. + +"Well, are we all ready to start?" he continued, +as he looked over the little flotilla which carried +his party and his goods. + +"The sooner the better!" cried Tom, and Ned +fancied his chum was unusually eager. + +"I guess he wants to make good before Beecher +gets the chance to show Mary Nestor what +he can do," thought Ned. "Tom sure is after +that idol of gold." + +"You may start, Senor Jacinto," said the +professor, and the guide called something in Indian +dialect to the rowers. Lines were cast off and +the boats moved out into the stream under the +influence of the sturdy paddlers. + +"Well, this isn't so bad," observed Ned, as he +made himself comfortable in his canoe. "How +about it, Tom?" + +"Oh, no. But this is only the beginning." + +A canopy had been arranged over their boat +to keep off the scorching rays of the sun. The +boat containing the exploring party and Val +Jacinto took the lead, the baggage craft following. +At the place where it flowed into the bay +on which Puerto Cortes was built, the stream +was wide and deep. + +The guide called something to the Indians, +who increased their stroke. + +"I tell them to pull hard and that at the end +of the day's journey they will have much rest +and refreshment," he translated to Professor +Bumper and the others. + +"Bless my ham sandwich, but they'll need +plenty of some sort of refreshment," said Mr. +Damon, with a sigh. "I never knew it to be +so hot." + +"Don't complain yet," advised Tom, with a +laugh. "The worst is yet to come." + +It really was not unpleasant traveling, aside +from the heat. And they had expected that, +coming as they had to a tropical land. But, as +Tom said, what lay before them might be worse. + +In a little while they had left behind them all +signs of civilization. The river narrowed and +flowed sluggishly between the banks which were +luxuriant with tropical growth. Now and then +some lonely Indian hut could be seen, and +occasionally a craft propelled by a man who was +trying to gain a meager living from the rubber +forest which hemmed in the stream on either +side. + +As the canoe containing the men was paddled +along, there floated down beside it what seemed +to be a big, rough log. + +"I wonder if that is mahogany," remarked Mr. +Damon, reaching over to touch it. "Mahogany +is one of the most valuable woods of Honduras, +and if this is a log of that nature---- + +"Bless my watch chain!" he suddenly cried. It's alive!" + +And the "log" was indeed so, for there was a +sudden flash of white teeth, a long red opening +showed, and then came a click as an immense +alligator, having opened and closed his mouth, +sank out of sight in a swirl of water. + +Mr. Damon drew back so suddenly that he +tilted the canoe, and the black paddlers looked +around wonderingly. + +"Alligator," explained Jacinto succinctly, in +their tongue. + +"Ugh!" they grunted. + +"Bless my--bless my----" hesitated Mr. +Damon, and for one of the very few times in +his life his language failed him. + +"Are there many of them hereabouts?" asked +Ned, looking back at the swirl left by the saurian. + +"Plenty," said the guide, with a shrug of his +shoulders. He seemed to do as much talking that +way, and with his hands, as he did in speech. +"The river is full of them." + +"Dangerous?" queried Tom. + +"Don't go in swimming," was the significant +advice. "Wait, I'll show you," and he called +up the canoe just behind. + +In this canoe was a quantity of provisions. +There was a chunk of meat among other things, +a gristly piece, seeing which Mr. Damon had +objected to its being brought along, but the guide +had said it would do for fish bait. With a quick +motion of his hand, as he sat in the awning- +covered stern with Tom, Ned and the others, +Jacinto sent the chunk of meat out into the muddy +stream. + +Hardly a second later there was a rushing in +the water as though a submarine were about +to come up. An ugly snout was raised, two +rows of keen teeth snapped shut as a scissors- +like jaw opened, and the meat was gone. + +"See!" was the guide's remark, and something +like a cold shiver of fear passed over the white +members of the party. "This water is not made +in which to swim. Be careful!" + +"We certainly shall," agreed Tom. "They're fierce." + +"And always hungry," observed Jacinto grimly. + +"And to think that I--that I nearly had my +hand on it," murmured Mr. Damon. "Ugh! +Bless my eyeglasses!" + +"The alligator nearly had your hand," said the +guide. "They can turn in the water like a flash, +wherefore it is not wise to pat one on the tail +lest it present its mouth instead." + +They paddled on up the river, the dusky Indians +now and then breaking out into a chant +that seemed to give their muscles new energy. +The song, if song it was, passed from one boat +to the other, and as the chant boomed forth +the craft shot ahead more swiftly. + +They made a landing about noon, and lunch +was served. Tom and his friends were hungry +in spite of the heat. Moreover, they were +experienced travelers and had learned not to fret +over inconveniences and discomforts. the Ind- +ians ate by themselves, two acting as servants +to Jacinto and the professor's party. + +As is usual in traveling in the tropics, a halt +was made during the heated middle of the day. +Then, as the afternoon shadows were waning, +the party again took to the canoes and paddled +on up the river. + +"Do you know of a good place to stop during +the night?" asked Professor Bumper of Jacinto. + +"Oh, yes; a most excellent place. It is where +I always bring scientific parties I am guiding. +You may rely on me." + +It was within an hour of dusk--none too much +time to allow in which to pitch camp in the +tropics, where night follows day suddenly--when +a halt was called, as a turn of the river showed a +little clearing on the edge of the forest-bound +river. + +"We stay here for the night," said Jacinto. +"It is a good place." + +"It looks picturesque enough," observed Mr. +Damon. "But it is rather wild." + +"We are a good distance from a settlement," +agreed the guide. "But one can not explore-- +and find treasure in cities," and he shrugged +his shoulders again. + +"Find treasure? What do you mean?" asked Tom quickly. +"Do you think that we----?" + +"Pardon, Senor," replied Jacinto softly. "I meant +no offense. I think that all you scientific +parties will take treasure if you can find it." + +"We are looking for traces of the old Honduras +civilization," put in Professor Bumper. + +"And doubtless you will find it," was the +somewhat too courteous answer of the guide. +"Make camp quickly!" he called to the Indians +in their tongue. "You must soon get under the +nets or you will be eaten alive!" he told Tom. +"There are many mosquitoes here." + +The tents were set up, smudge fires built and +supper quickly prepared. Dusk fell rapidly, and +as Tom and Ned walked a little way down +toward the river before turning in under the +mosquito canopies, the young financial man said: + +"Sort of lonesome and gloomy, isn't it, Tom?" + +"Yes. But you didn't expect to find a moving +picture show in the wilds of Honduras, did you?" + +"No, and yet-- Look out! What's that?" +suddenly cried Ned, as a great soft, black shadow +seemed to sweep out of a clump of trees toward +him. Involuntarily he clutched Tom's arm and +pointed, his face showing fear in the fast-gathering +darkness. + + + +CHAPTER XI + +THE VAMPIRES + + +Tom Swift looked deliberately around. It +was characteristic of him that, though by nature +he was prompt in action, he never acted so hurriedly +as to obscure his judgment. So, though +now Ned showed a trace of strange excitement, +Tom was cool. + +"What is it?" asked the young inventor. +"What's the matter? What did you think you saw, +Ned; another alligator?" + +"Alligator? Nonsense! Up on shore? I saw +a black shadow, and I didn't THINK I saw it, +either. I really did." + +Tom laughed quietly. + +"A shadow!" he exclaimed. "Since when +were you afraid of shadows, Ned?" + +"I'm not afraid of ordinary shadows," answered +Ned, and in his voice there was an uncertain +tone. "I'm not afraid of my shadow or +yours, Tom, or anybody's that I can see. But +this wasn't any human shadow. It was as if a +great big blob of wet darkness had been waved +over your head." + +"That's a queer explanation," Tom said in a +low voice. "A great big blob of wet darkness!" + +"But that just describes it," went on Ned, +looking up and around. "It was just as if you were in +some dark room, and some one waved a wet +velvet cloak over your head--spooky like! It +didn't make a sound, but there was a smell as +if a den of some wild beast was near here. I +remember that odor from the time we went +hunting with your electric rifle in the jungle, and +got near the den in the rocks where the tigers +lived." + +"Well, there is a wild beast smell all around +here," admitted Tom, sniffing the air. "It's the +alligators in the river I guess. You know they +have an odor of musk." + +"Do you mean to say you didn't feel that +shadow flying over us just now?" asked Ned. + +"Well, I felt something sail through the air, +but I took it to be a big bird. I didn't pay much +attention. To tell you the truth I was thinking +about Beecher--wondering when he would get +here," added Tom quickly as if to forestall any +question as to whether or not his thoughts had +to do with Beecher in connection with Tom's +affair of the heart. + +"Well it wasn't a bird--at least not a regular +bird," said Ned in a low voice, as once more he +looked at the dark and gloomy jungle that +stretched back from the river and behind the +little clearing where the camp had been made. + +"Come on!" cried Tom, in what he tried to +make a cheerful voice. "This is getting on your +nerves, Ned, and I didn't know you had any. +Let's go back and turn in. I'm dog-tired and +the mosquitoes are beginning to find that we're +here. Let's get under the nets. Then the black +shadows won't get you." + +Not at all unwilling to leave so gloomy a scene, +Ned, after a brief glance up and down the dark +river, followed his chum. They found Professor +Bumper and Mr. Damon in their tent, a separate +one having been set up for the two men adjoining +that of the youths. + +"Bless my fountain pen!" exclaimed Mr. Damon, +as he caught sight of Tom and Ned in the +flickering light of the smudge fire between the +two canvas shelters. "We were just wondering +what had become of you." + +"We were chasing shadows!" laughed Tom. +"At least Ned was. But you look cozy enough in there." + +It did, indeed, look cheerful in contrast to the +damp and dark jungle all about. Professor Bumper, +being an experienced traveler, knew how to +provide for such comforts as were possible. Folding +cots had been opened for himself, Mr. Damon +and the guide to sleep on, others, similar, being +set up in the tent where Tom and Ned were to +sleep. In the middle of the tent the professor +had made a table of his own and Mr. +Damon's suit cases, and on this placed a small +dry battery electric light. He was making some +notes, doubtless for a future book. Jacinto was +going about the camp, seeing that the Indians +were at their duties, though most of them had +gone directly to sleep after supper. + +"Better get inside and under the nets," advised +Professor Bumper to Tom and Ned. "The mosquitoes +here are the worst I ever saw." + +"We're beginning to believe that," returned +Ned, who was unusually quiet. "Come on, +Tom. I can't stand it any longer. I'm itching +in a dozen places now from their bites." + +As Tom and Ned had no wish for a light, +which would be sure to attract insects, they +entered their tent in the dark, and were soon +stretched out in comparative comfort. Tom was +just on the edge of a deep sleep when he heard +Ned murmur: + +"I can't understand it!" + +"What's that?" asked the young inventor. + +"I say I can't understand it." + +"Understand what?" + +"That shadow. It was real and yet----" + +"Oh, go to sleep!" advised Tom, and, turning +over, he was soon breathing heavily and regularly, +indicating that he, at least, had taken his own advice. + +Ned, too, finally succumbed to the overpowering +weariness of the first day of travel, and he, +too, slept, though it was an uneasy slumber, +disturbed by a feeling as though some one were +holding a heavy black quilt over his head, +preventing him from breathing. + +The feeling, sensation or dream--whatever it +was--perhaps a nightmare--became at last so +real to Ned that he struggled himself into +wakefulness. With an effort he sat up, uttering an +inarticulate cry. To his surprise he was +answered. Some one asked: + +"What is the matter?" + +"Who--who are you?" asked Ned quickly, +trying to peer through the darkness. + +"This is Jacinto--your guide," was the soft +answer. "I was walking about camp and, hearing +you murmuring, I came to your tent. Is +anything wrong?" + +For a moment Ned did not answer. He +listened and could tell by the continued heavy +and regular breathing of his chum that Tom +was still asleep. + +"Are you in our tent?" asked Ned, at length: + +"Yes," answered Jacinto. "I came in to see +what was the matter with you. Are you ill?" + +"No, of course not," said Ned, a bit shortly. +"I--I had a bad dream, that was all. All +right now." + +"For that I am glad. Try to get all the sleep +you can, for we must start early to avoid the +heat of the day," and there was the sound of +the guide leaving and arranging the folds of the +mosquito net behind him to keep out the night- +flying insects. + +Once more Ned composed himself to sleep, and +this time successfully, for he did not have any +more unpleasant dreams. The quiet of the +jungle settled down over the camp, at least the +comparative quiet of the jungle, for there were +always noises of some sort going on, from the +fall of some rotten tree limb to the scream or +growl of a wild beast, while, now and again, from +the river came the pig-like grunts of the alligators. + +It was about two o'clock in the morning, as +they ascertained later, when the whole camp-- +white travelers and all--was suddenly awakened +by a wild scream. It seemed to come from one +of the natives, who called out a certain word +ever and over again. To Tom and Ned it +sounded like: + +"Oshtoo! Oshtoo! Oshtoo!" + +"What's the matter?" cried Professor Bumper. + +"The vampires!" came the answering voice of +Jacinto. "One of the Indians has been attacked +by a big vampire bat! Look out, every one! +It may be a raid by the dangerous creatures! +Be careful!" + +Notwithstanding this warning Ned stuck his +head out of the tent. The same instant he was +aware of a dark enfolding shadow passing over +him, and, with a shudder of fear, he jumped back. + + + +CHAPTER XII + +A FALSE FRIEND + + +"What is it? What's the matter?" cried Tom +springing from his cot and hastening to the side +of his chum in the tent. "What has happened, Ned?" + +"I don't know, but Jacinto is yelling +something about vampires!" + +"Vampires?" + +"Yes. Big bats. And he's warning us to be +careful. I stuck my head out just now and I +felt that same sort of shadow I felt this evening +when we were down near the river." + +"Nonsense!" + +"I tell you I did!" + +At that instant Tom flashed a pocket electric +lamp he had taken from beneath his pillow and +in the gleam of it he and Ned saw fluttering +about the tent some dark, shadow-like form, at +the sight of which Tom's chum cried: + +"There it is! That's the shadow! Look out!" +and he held up his hands instinctively to shield +his face. + +"Shadow!" yelled Tom, unconsciously adding +to the din that seemed to pervade every part of +the camp. "That isn't a shadow. It's +substance. It's a monster bat, and here goes +for a strike at it!" + +He caught up his camera tripod which was near +his cot, and made a swing with it at the creature +that had flown into the tent through an opening +it had made for itself. + +"Look out!" yelled Ned. "If it's a vampire it'll----" + +"It won't do anything to me!" shouted Tom, +as he struck the creature, knocking it into the +corner of the tent with a thud that told it must +be completely stunned, if not killed. "But +what's it all about, anyhow?" Tom asked. +"What's the row?" + +From without the tent came the Indian cries of: + +"Oshtoo! Oshtoo!" + +Mingled with them were calls of Jacinto, partly +in Spanish, partly in the Indian tongue and +partly in English. + +"It is a raid by vampire bats!" was all Tom +and Ned could distinguish. "We shall have +to light fires to keep them away, if we can suc- +ceed. Every one grab up a club and strike hard!" + +"Come on!" cried Tom, getting on some clothes +by the light of his gleaming electric light +which he had set on his cot. + +"You're not going out there, are you?" asked Ned. + +"I certainly am! If there's a fight I want to +be in it, bats or anything else. Here, you have +a light like mine. Flash it on, and hang it +somewhere on yourself. Then get a club and +come on. The lights will blind the bats, and +we can see to hit 'em!" + +Tom's plan seemed to be a good one. His +lamp and Ned's had small hooks on them, so +they could be carried in the upper coat pocket, +showing a gleam of light and leaving the hands +free for use. + +Out of the tents rushed the young men to find +Professor Bumper and Mr. Damon before them. +The two men had clubs and were striking about +in the half darkness, for now the Indians had set +several fires aglow. And in the gleams, +constantly growing brighter as more fuel was piled +on, the young inventor and his chum saw a +weird sight. + +Circling and wheeling about in the camp clearing +were many of the black shadowy forms that +had caused Ned such alarm. Great bats they +were, and a dangerous species, if Jacinto was +to be believed. + +The uncanny creatures flew in and out among +the trees and tents, now swooping low near the +Indians or the travelers. At such times clubs +would be used, often with the effect of killing or +stunning the flying pests. For a time it seemed +as if the bats would fairly overwhelm the camp, +so many of them were there. But the increasing +lights, and the attacks made by the Indians and +the white travelers turned the tide of battle, and, +with silent flappings of their soft, velvety wings, +the bats flew back to the jungle whence they had emerged. + +"We are safe--for the present!" exclaimed +Jacinto with a sigh of relief. + +"Do you think they will come back?" asked Tom. + +"They may--there is no telling." + +"Bless my speedometer!" cried Mr. Damon, +"If those beasts or birds--whatever they are-- +come back I'll go and hide in the river and take +my chances with the alligators!" + +"The alligators aren't much worse," asserted +Jacinto with a visible shiver. "These vampire +bats sometimes depopulate a whole village." + +"Bless my shoe laces!" cried Mr. Damon. "You +don't mean to say that the creatures can eat up a +whole village?" + +"Not quite. Though they might if they got +the chance," was the answer of the Spanish +guide. "These vampire bats fly from place to +place in great swarms, and they are so large and +blood-thirsty that a few of them can kill a horse +or an ox in a short time by sucking its blood. So +when the villagers find they are visited by a +colony of these vampires they get out, taking +their live stock with them, and stay in caves or in +densely wooded places until the bats fly on. +Then the villagers come back. + +"It was only a small colony that visited us to- +night or we would have had more trouble. I do +not think this lot will come back. We have +killed too many of them," and he looked about +on the ground where many of the uncanny creatures +were still twitching in the death struggle. + +"Come back again!" cried Mr. Damon. "Bless +my skin! I hope not! I've had enough of bats-- +and mosquitoes," he added, as he slapped at his +face and neck. + +Indeed the party of whites were set upon by +the night insects to such an extent that it was +necessary to hurry back to the protection of the +nets. + +Tom and Ned kicked outside the bat the former +had killed in their tent, and then both went back +to their cots. But it was some little time +before they fell asleep. And they did not have +much time to rest, for an early start must be +made to avoid the terrible heat of the middle of +the day. + +"Whew!" whistled Ned, as he and Tom arose +in the gray dawn of the morning when Jacinto +announced the breakfast which the Indian cook +had prepared. "That was some night! If this +is a sample of the wilds of Honduras, give me +the tameness of Shopton." + +"Oh, we've gone through with worse than +this," laughed Tom. "It's all in the day's work. +We've only got started. I guess we're a bit +soft, Ned, though we had hard enough work in +that tunnel-digging." + +After breakfast, while the Indians were making +ready the canoes, Professor Bumper, who, +in a previous visit to Central America, had +become interested in the subject, made a brief +examination of some of the dead bats. They were +exceptionally large, some almost as big as hawks. +and were of the sub-family _Desmodidae_, the scientist +said. + +"This is a true blood-sucking bat," went on +the professor. "This," and he pointed to the +nose-leaves, "is the sucking apparatus. The +bat makes an opening in the skin with its sharp +teeth and proceeds to extract the blood. I can +well believe two or three of them, attacking a +steer or mule at once, could soon weaken it so +the animal would die." + +"And a man, too?" asked Ned. + +"Well a man has hands with which to use +weapons, but a helpless quadruped has not. +Though if a sufficient number of these bats +attacked a man at the same time, he would have +small chance to escape alive. Their bites, too, +may be poisonous for all I know." + +The Indians seemed glad to leave the "place +of the bats," as they called the camp site. Jacinto +explained that the Indians believed a vampire +could kill them while they slept, and they were +very much afraid of the blood-sucking bats. +There were many other species in the tropics, +Professor Bumper explained, most of which +lived on fruit or on insects they caught. The +blood-sucking bats were comparatively few, and +the migratory sort fewer still. + +"Well, we're on our way once more," +remarked Tom as again they were in the canoes +being paddled up the river. "How much +longer does your water trip take, Professor?" + +"I hardly know," and Professor Bumper looked +to Jacinto to answer. + +"We go two more days in the canoes," the +guide answered, "and then we shall find the +mules waiting for us at a place called Hidjio. +From then on we travel by land until--well until +you get to the place where you are going. + +"I suppose you know where it is?" he added, +nodding toward the professor. "I am leaving +that part to you." + +"Oh, I have a map, showing where I want to +begin some excavations," was the answer. "We +must first go to Copan and see what arrangements +we can make for laborers. After that--well, we +shall trust to luck for what we shall find." + +"There are said to be many curious things," +went on Jacinto, speaking as though he had no +interest. "You have mentioned buried cities. +Have you thought what may be in them--great +heathen temples, idols, perhaps?" + +For a moment none of the professor's +companions spoke. It was as though Jacinto had +tried to get some information. Finally the +scientist said: + +"Oh, yes, we may find an idol. I understand +the ancient people, who were here long before +the Spaniards came, worshiped idols. But we +shall take whatever antiquities we find." + +"Huh!" grunted Jacinto, and then he called +to the paddlers to increase their strokes. + +The journey up the river was not very +eventful. Many alligators were seen, and Tom and +Ned shot several with the electric rifle. Toward +the close of the third day's travel there was a +cry from one of the rear boats, and an alarm of +a man having fallen overboard was given. + +Tom turned in time to see the poor fellow's +struggles, and at the same time there was a swirl +in the water and a black object shot forward. + +"An alligator is after him!" yelled Ned. + +"I see," observed Tom calmly. "Hand me the rifle, Ned." + +Tom took quick aim and pulled the trigger. +The explosive electric bullet went true to its +mark, and the great animal turned over in a death +struggle. But the river was filled with them, and +no sooner had the one nearest the unfortunate +Indian been disposed of than another made a +dash for the man. + +There was a wild scream of agony and then +a dark arm shot up above the red foam. The +waters seethed and bubbled as the alligators +fought under it for possession of the paddler. +Tom fired bullet after bullet from his wonderful +rifle into the spot, but though he killed some +of the alligators this did not save the man's life. +His body was not seen again, though search was +made for it. + +The accident cast a little damper over the +party, and there was a feeling of gloom among +the Indians. Professor Bumper announced that +he would see to it that the man's family did not +want, and this seemed to give general satisfaction, +especially to a brother who was with the +party. + +Aside from being caught in a drenching storm +and one or two minor accidents, nothing else +of moment marked the remainder of the river +journey, and at the end of the third day the +canoes pulled to shore and a night camp was +made. + +"But where are the mules we are to use in +traveling to-morrow?" asked the professor of Jacinto. + +"In the next village. We shall march there +in the morning. No use to go there at night +when all is dark." + +"I suppose that is so." + +The Indians made camp as usual, the goods being +brought from the canoes and piled up near +the tents. Then night settled down. + +"Hello!" cried Tom, awakening the next morning +to find the sun streaming into his tent. "We +must have overslept, Ned. We were to start +before old Sol got in his heavy work, but we +haven't had breakfast yet." + +"I didn't hear any one call us," remarked Ned. + +"Nor I. Wonder if we're the only lazy birds." +He looked from the tent in time to see Mr. +Damon and the professor emerging. Then Tom +noticed something queer. The canoes were not +on the river bank. There was not an Indian +in sight, and no evidence of Jacinto. + +"What's the matter?" asked the young +inventor. "Have the others gone on ahead?" + +"I rather think they've gone back," was the +professor's dry comment. + +"Gone back?" + +"Yes. The Indians seem to have deserted us +at the ending of this stage of our journey." + +"Bless my time-table!" cried Mr. Damon. +"You don't say so! What does it mean? What +has becomes of our friend Jacinto?" + +"I'm afraid he was rather a false friend," was +the professor's answer. "This is the note he left. +He has gone and taken the canoes and all the +Indians with him," and he held out a paper on +which was some scribbled writing. + + + +CHAPTER XIII + +FORWARD AGAIN + + +"What does it all mean?" asked Tom, seeing +that the note was written in Spanish, a tongue +which he could speak slightly but read indifferently. + +"This is some of Beecher's work," was +Professor Bumper's grim comment. "It seems that +Jacinto was in his pay." + +"In his pay!" cried Mr. Damon. "Do you mean +that Beecher deliberately hired Jacinto to betray us?" + +"Well, no. Not that exactly. Here, I'll translate +this note for you," and the professor proceeded to read: + + +"Senors: I greatly regret the step I have to +take, but I am a gentleman, and, having given +my word, I must keep it. No harm shall come +to you, I swear it on my honor!" + + +"Queer idea of honor he has!" commented Tom, grimly. + +Professor Bumper read on: + + +"Know then, that before I engaged myself to +you I had been engaged by Professor Beecher +through a friend to guide him into the Copan +valley, where he wants to make some explorations, +for what I know not, save maybe that it +is for gold. I agreed, in case any rival expeditions +came to lead them astray if I could. + +"So, knowing from what you said that you +were going to this place, I engaged myself to you, +planning to do what I have done. I greatly regret +it, as I have come to like you, but I had +given my promise to Professor Beecher's friend, +that I would first lead him to the Copan valley, +and would keep others away until he had had a +chance to do his exploration. + +"So I have led you to this wilderness. It is +far from the Copan, but you are near an Indian +village, and you will be able to get help in a week +or so. In the meanwhile you will not starve, as +you have plenty of supplies. If you will travel +northeast you will come again to Puerto Cortes +in due season. As for the money I had from +you, I deposit it to your credit, Professor Beecher +having made me an allowance for steering rival +parties on the wrong trail. So I lose nothing, +and I save my honor. + +"I write this note as I am leaving in the night +with the Indians. I put some harmless sedative +in your tea that you might sleep soundly, and not +awaken until we were well on our way. Do not +try to follow us, as the river will carry us swiftly +away. And, let me add, there is no personal +animosity on the part of Professor Beecher +against you. I should have done to any rival +expedition the same as I have done with you. + JACINTO." + + +For a moment there was silence, and then Tom +Swift burst out with: + +"Well, of all the mean, contemptible tricks +of a human skunk this is the limit!" + +"Bless my hairbrush, but he is a scoundrel!" +ejaculated Mr. Damon, with great warmth. + +"I'd like to start after him the biggest alligator +in the river," was Ned's comment. + +Professor Bumper said nothing for several +seconds. There was a strange look on his face, +and then he laughed shortly, as though the humor +of the situation appealed to him. + +"Professor Beecher has more gumption than I gave +him credit for," he said. "It was a clever trick!" + +"Trick!" cried Tom. + +"Yes. I can't exactly agree that it was the +right thing to do, but he, or some friend acting +for him, seems to have taken precautions that +we are not to suffer or lose money. Beecher +goes on the theory that all is fair in love and +war, I suppose, and he may call this a sort of +scientific war." + +Ned wondered, as he looked at his chum, how +much love there was in it. Clearly Beecher was +determined to get that idol of gold. + +"Well, it can't be helped, and we must make +the best of it," said Tom, after a pause. + +"True. But now, boys, let's have breakfast, +and then we'll make what goods we can't take +with us as snug as possible, until we can send +the mule drivers after them," went on Professor +Bumper. + +"Send the mule drivers after them?" questioned Ned. +"What do you mean to do?" + +"Do? Why keep on, of course. You don't +suppose I'm going to let a little thing like this +stand between me and the discovery of Kurzon +and the idol of gold, do you?" + +"But," began Mr. Damon, "I don't see how--" + +"Oh, we'll find a way," interrupted Tom. "It +isn't the first time I've been pretty well stranded +on an expedition of this kind, and sometimes +from the same cause--the actions of a rival. +Now we'll turn the tables on the other fellows +and see how they like it. The professor's right +--let's have breakfast. Jacinto seems to have +told the truth. Nothing of ours is missing." + +Tom and Ned got the meal, and then a +consultation was held as to what was best to be +done. + +"We can't go on any further by water, that's +sure," said Tom. "In the first place the river +is too shallow, and secondly we have no canoes. +So the only thing is to go on foot through the +jungle." + +"But how can we, and carry all this stuff?" +asked Ned. + +"We needn't carry it!" cried Professor Bumper. +"We'll leave it here, where it will be safe enough, +and tramp on to the nearest Indian village. +There we'll hire bearers to take our stuff on until +we can get mules. I'm not going to turn back!" + +"Good!" cried Mr. Damon. "Bless my +rubber boots! but that's what I say--keep on!" + +"Oh, no! we'll never turn back," agreed Tom. + +"But how can we manage it?" asked Ned. + +"We've just got to! And when you have +to do a thing, it's a whole lot easier to do than +if you just feel as though you ought to. So, +lively is the word!" cried Tom, in answer. + +"We'll pack up what we can carry and leave +the rest," added the scientist. + +Being an experienced traveler Professor Bumper +had arranged his baggage so that it could +be carried by porters if necessary. Everything +could be put into small packages, including the +tents and food supply. + +"There are four of us," remarked Tom, "and if +we can not pack enough along with us to enable +us to get to the nearest village, we had better +go back to civilization. I'm not afraid to try." + +"Nor I!" cried Mr. Damon. + +The baggage, stores and supplies that were +to be left behind were made as snug as possible, +and so piled up that wild beasts could do the +least harm. Then a pack was made up for each +one to carry. + +They would take weapons, of course, Tom +Swift's electric rifle being the one he choose for +himself. They expected to be able to shoot +game on their way, and this would provide them +food in addition to the concentrated supply they +carried. Small tents, in sections, were carried, +there being two, one for Tom and Ned and one +for Mr. Damon and the professor. + +As far as could be learned from a casual +inspection, Jacinto and his deserting Indians had +taken back with them only a small quantity of +food. They were traveling light and down +stream, and could reach the town much more +quickly than they had come away from it. + +"That Beecher certainly was slick," commented +Professor Bumper when they were ready to +start. "He must have known about what time +I would arrive, and he had Jacinto waiting for +us. I thought it was too good to be true, to get +an experienced guide like him so easily. But it +was all planned, and I was so engrossed in thinking +of the ancient treasures I hope to find that +I never thought of a possible trick. Well, let's +start!" and he led the way into the jungle, carrying +his heavy pack as lightly as did Tom. + +Professor Bumper had a general idea in which +direction lay a number of native villages, and it +was determined to head for them, blazing a path +through the wilderness, so that the Indians could +follow it back to the goods left behind. + +It was with rather heavy hearts that the party +set off, but Tom's spirits could not long stay +clouded, and the scientist was so good-natured +about the affair and seemed so eager to do the +utmost to render Beecher's trick void, that the +others fell into a lighter mood, and went on +more cheerfully, though the way was rough and +the packs heavy. + +They stopped at noon under a bower they made +of palms, and, spreading the nets over them, got a +little rest after a lunch. Then, when the sun +was less hot, they started off again. + +"Forward is the word!" cried Ned cheerfully. "Forward!"' + +They had not gone more than an hour on the +second stage of their tramp when Tom, who +was in the lead, following the direction laid out +by the compass, suddenly stopped, and reached +around for his electric rifle, which he was carrying +at his back. + +"What is it?" asked Ned in a whisper. + +"I don't know, but it's some big animal there +in the bushes," was Tom's low-voiced answer. +"I'm ready for it." + +The rustling increased, and a form could be +seen indistinctly. Tom aimed the deadly gun +and stood ready to pull the trigger. + +Ned, tho had a side view into the underbrush, +gave a sudden cry. + +"Don't shoot, Tom!" he yelled. "It's a man!" + + + +CHAPTER XIV: + +A NEW GUIDE + + +In spite of Ned Newton's cry, Tom's finger +pressed the switch-trigger of the electric rifle, +for previous experience had taught him that it +was sometimes the best thing to awe the natives +in out-of-the-way corners of the earth. But the +young inventor quickly elevated the muzzle, and +the deadly missile went hissing through the air +over the head of a native Indian who, at that +moment, stepped from the bush. + +The man, startled and alarmed, shrank back +and was about to run into the jungle whence he +had emerged. Small wonder if he had, considering +the reception he so unwittingly met with. +But Tom. aware of the necessity for making +inquiries of one who knew that part of the jungle, +quickly called to him. + +"Hold on!" he shouted. "Wait a minute. I didn't +mean that. I thought at first you were a +tapir or a tiger. No harm intended. I say, +Professor," Tom called back to the savant, +"you'd better speak to him in his lingo, I can't +manage it. He may be useful in guiding us to +that Indian village Jacinto told us of." + +This Professor Bumper did, being able to make +himself understood in the queer part-Spanish +dialect used by the native Hondurians, though +he could not, of course, speak it as fluently as +had Jacinto. + +Professor Bumper had made only a few remarks +to the man who had so unexpectedly appeared +out of the jungle when the scientist gave an +exclamation of surprise at some of the answers made. + +"Bless my moving picture!" cried Mr. Damon. + +"What's the matter now? Is anything wrong? +Does he refuse to help us?" + +"No, it isn't that," was the answer. "In fact +he came here to help us. Tom, this is the brother +of the Indian who fell overboard and who was eaten +by the alligators. He says you were very kind +to try to save his brother with your rifle, +and for that reason he has come back to help us." + +"Come back?" queried Tom. + +"Yes, he went off with the rest of the Indians +when Jacinto deserted us, but he could not stand +being a traitor, after you had tried to save his +brother's life. These Indians are queer people. + +They don't show much emotion, but they have +deep feelings. This one says he will devote +himself to your service from now on. I believe +we can count on him. He is deeply grateful to +you, Tom." + +"I'm glad of that for all our sakes. But what +does he say about Jacinto?" + +The professor asked some more questions, +receiving answers, and then translated them. + +"This Indian, whose name is Tolpec, says +Jacinto is a fraud," exclaimed Professor Bumper. +"He made all the Indians leave us in the night, +though many of them were willing to stay and +fill the contract they had made. But Jacinto +would not let them, making them desert. Tolpec +went away with the others, but because of what +Tom had done he planned to come back at the +first chance and be our guide. Accordingly he +jumped ashore from one of the canoes, and made +his way to our camp. He got there, found it +deserted and followed us, coming up just now." + +"Well I'm glad I didn't frighten him off with +my gun," remarked Tom grimly. "So he agrees +with us that Jacinto is a scoundrel, does he? +I guess he might as well classify Professor +Beecher in the same way." + +"I am not quite so sure of that," said Professor +Bumper slowly. "I can not believe Beecher +would play such a trick as this, though some +over-zealous friend of his might." + +"Oh, of course Beecher did it!" cried Tom. +"He heard we were coming here, figured out that +we'd start ahead of him, and he wanted to side- +track us. Well, he did it all right," and Tom's +voice was bitter. + +"He has only side-tracked us for a while," +announced Professor Bumper in cheerful tones. + +"What do you mean?" asked Mr. Damon. + +"I mean that this Indian comes just in the nick +of time. He is well acquainted with this part +of the jungle, having lived here all his life, +and he offers to guide us to a place where we can +get mules to transport ourselves and our baggage +to Copan." + +"Fine!" cried Ned. "When can we start?" + +Once more the professor and the native +conversed in the strange tongue, and then Professor +Bumper announced: + +"He says it will be better for us to go back +where we left our things and camp there. He +will stay with us to-night and in the morning go +on to the nearest Indian town and come back +with porters and helpers." + +"I think that is good advice to follow," put in +Tom, "for we do need our goods; and if we +reached the settlement ourselves, we would have +to send back for our things, with the uncertainty +of getting them all." + +So it was agreed that they would make a forced +march back through the jungle to where they +had been deserted by Jacinto. There they would +make camp for the night, and until such time as +Tolpec could return with a force of porters. + +It was not easy, that backward tramp through +the jungle, especially as night had fallen. But +the new Indian guide could see like a cat, and +led the party along paths they never could have +found by themselves. The use of their pocket +electric lights was a great help, and possibly +served to ward off the attacks of jungle beasts, +for as they tramped along they could hear stealthy +sounds in the underbush on either side of the +path, as though tigers were stalking them. For +there was in the woods an animal of the leopard +family, called tiger or "tigre" by the natives, +that was exceedingly fierce and dangerous. But +watchfulness prevented any accident, and eventually +the party reached the place where they had +left their goods. Nothing had been disturbed, +and finally a fire was made, the tents set up and +a light meal, with hot tea served. + +"We'll get ahead of Beecher yet," said Tom. + +"You seem as anxious as Professor Bumper," +observed Mr. Damon, + +"I guess I am," admitted Tom. "I want to +see that idol of gold in the possession of our +party." + +The night passed without incident, and then, +telling his new friends that he would return as +soon as possible with help, Tolpec, taking a +small supply of food with him, set out through +the jungle again. + +As the green vines and creepers closed after +him, and the explorers were left alone with their +possessions piled around them, Ned remarked: + +"After all, I wonder if it was wise to let him go?" + +"Why not?" asked Tom. + +"Well, maybe he only wanted to get us back +here, and then he'll desert, too. Maybe that's +what he's done now, making us lose two or three +days by inducing us to return, waiting for what +will never happen--his return with other +natives." + +A silence followed Ned's intimation. + + + +CHAPTER XV + +IN THE COILS + + +"Ned, do you really think Tolpec is going to +desert us?" asked Tom. + +"Well, I don't know," was the slowly given reply. +"It's a possibility, isn't it?" + +"Yes, it is," broke in Professor Bumper. "But +what if it is? We might as well trust him, and +if he proves true, as I believe he will, we'll be +so much better off. If he proves a traitor we'll +only have lost a few days, for if he doesn't come +back we can go on again in the way we started." + +"But that's just it!" complained Tom. "We +don't want to lose any time with that Beecher +chap on our trail." + +"I am not so very much concerned about him," +remarked Professor Bumper, dryly. + +"Why not?" snapped out Mr. Damon. + +"Well, because I think he'll have just about +as hard work locating the hidden city, and finding +the idol of gold, as we'll have. In other words +it will be an even thing, unless he gets too far +ahead of us, or keeps us back, and I don't believe +he can do that now. + +"So I thought it best to take a chance with this +Indian. He would hardly have taken the trouble +to come all the way back, and run the risks he +did, just to delay us a few days. However, we'll +soon know. Meanwhile, we'll take it easy and +wait for the return of Tolpec and his friends." + +Though none of them liked to admit it, Ned's +words had caused his three friends some anxiety, +and though they busied themselves about the +camp there was an air of waiting impatiently for +something to occur. And waiting is about the +hardest work there is. + +But there was nothing for it but to wait, and +it might be at least a week, Professor Bumper +said, before the Indian could return with a party +of porters and mules to move their baggage. + +"Yes, Tolpec has not only to locate the +settlement," Tom admitted, "but he must persuade the +natives to come back with him. He may have +trouble in that, especially if it is known that he +has left Jacinto, who, I imagine, is a power among +the tribes here." + +But there were only two things left to do--wait +and hope. The travelers did both. Four days +passed and there was no sign of Tolpec. Eager- +ly, and not a little anxiously, they watched the +jungle path along which he had disappeared. + +"Oh, come on!" exclaimed Tom one morning, +when the day seemed a bit cooler than its +predecessor. "Let's go for a hunt, or something! +I'm tired of sitting around camp." + +"Bless my watch hands! So am I!" cried Mr. Damon. +"Let's all go for a trip. It will do us good." + +"And perhaps I can get some specimens of interest," +added Professor Bumper, who, in addition to being +an archaeologist, was something of a naturalist. + +Accordingly, having made everything snug in +camp, the party, Tom and Ned equipped with +electric rifles, and the professor with a butterfly +net and specimen boxes, set forth. Mr. Damon +said he would carry a stout club as his weapon. + +The jungle, as usual, was teeming with life, +but as Ned and Tom did not wish to kill wantonly +they refrained from shooting until later in the +day. For once it was dead, game did not keep +well in that hot climate, and needed to be cooked +almost immediately. + +"We'll try some shots on our back trip," said +the young inventor. + +Professor Bumper found plenty of his own +particular kind of "game" which he caught in the +net, transferring the specimens to the boxes he +carried. There were beautiful butterflies, moths +and strange bugs in the securing of which the +scientist evinced great delight, though when one +beetle nipped him firmly and painfully on his +thumb his involuntary cry of pain was as real +as that of any other person. + +"But I didn't let him get away," he said in +triumph when he had dropped the clawing insect +into the cyanide bottle where death came painlessly. +"It is well worth a sore thumb." + +They wandered on through the jungle, taking +care not to get too far from their camp, for they +did not want to lose their way, nor did they want +to be absent too long in case Tolpec and his +native friends should return. + +"Well, it's about time we shot something, I +think," remarked Ned, when they had been out +about two hours. "Let's try for some of these +wild turkeys. They ought to go well roasted +even if it isn't Thanksgiving." + +"I'm with you," agreed Tom. "Let's see who +has the best luck. But tone down the charge +in your rifle and use a smaller projectile, or you'll +have nothing but a bunch of feathers to show +for your shot. The guns are loaded for deer." + +The change was made, and once more the two +young men started off, a little ahead of Professor +Bumper and Mr. Damon. Tom and Ned had +not gone far, however, before they heard a strange +cry from Mr. Damon. + +"Tom! Ned!" shouted the eccentric man, +"Here's a monster after me! Come quick!" + +"A tiger!" ejaculated Tom, as he began once +more to change the charge in his rifle to a larger +one, running back, meanwhile, in the direction +of the sound of the voice. + +There were really no tigers in Honduras, the +jaguar being called a tiger by the natives, while +the cougar is called a lion. The presence of these +animals, often dangerous to man, had been indicated +around camp, and it was possible that one had been +bold enough to attack Mr. Damon, not through hunger, +but because of being cornered. + +"Come on, Ned!" cried Tom. "He's in some +sort of trouble!" + +But when, a moment later, the young inventor +burst through a fringe of bushes and saw Mr. +Damon standing in a little clearing, with upraised +club, Tom could not repress a laugh. + +"Kill it, Tom! Kill it!" begged the eccentric man. +"Bless my insurance policy, but it's a terrible beast!" + +And so it was, at first glance. For it was a +giant iguana, one of the most repulsive-looking +of the lizards. Not unlike an alligator in shape, +with spikes on its head and tail, with a warty, +squatty ridge-encrusted body, a big pouch beneath +its chin, and long-toed claws, it was enough +to strike terror into the heart of almost any one. +Even the smaller ones look dangerous, and this +one, which was about five feet long, looked +capable of attacking a man and injuring him. As +a matter of fact the iguanas are harmless, their +shape and coloring being designed to protect them. + +"Don't be afraid, Mr. Damon," called Tom, still +laughing. "It won't hurt you!" + +"I'm not so positive of that. It won't let me pass." + +"Just take your club and poke it out of the way," +the young inventor advised. "It's only waiting +to be shoved." + +"Then you do it, Tom. Bless my looking glass, +but I don't want to go near it! If my wife could +see me now she'd say it served me just right." + +Mr. Damon was not a coward, but the giant +iguana was not pleasant to look at. Tom, with +the butt of his rifle, gave it a gentle shove, +whereupon the creature scurried off through the brush +as though glad to make its escape unscathed. + +"I thought it was a new kind of alligator," said +Mr. Damon with a sigh of relief. + +"Where is it?" asked Professor Bumper, coming +up at this juncture. "A new species of alligator? +Let me see it!" + +"It's too horrible," said Mr. Damon. "I never +want to see one again. It was worse than a +vampire bat!" + +Notwithstanding this, when he heard that it +was one of the largest sized iguanas ever seen, +the professor started through the jungle after it. + +"We can't take it with us if we get it," Tom +called after his friend. + +"We might take the skin," answered the +professor. "I have a standing order for such things +from one of the museums I represent. I'd like +to get it. Then they are often eaten. We can +have a change of diet. you see." + +"We'd better follow him," said Tom to Ned. +"We'll have to let the turkeys go for a while. +He may get into trouble. Come on." + +Off they started through the jungle, trailing +after the impetuous professor who was intent on +capturing the iguana. The giant lizard's progress +could be traced by the disturbance of the +leaves and underbrush, and the professor was +following as closely as possible. + +So fast did he go that Ned, Tom and Mr. +Damon, following, lost sight of him several +times, and Tom finally called: + +"Wait a minute. We'll all be lost if you keep +this up." + +"I'll have him in another minute," answered +the professor. "I can almost reach him now. +Then---- Oh!" + +His voice ended in a scream that seemed to +be one of terror. So sudden was the change that +Tom and Ned, who were together, ahead of Mr. +Damon, looked at one another in fear. + +"What has happened?" whispered Ned, pausing. + +"Don't stop to ask--come on!" shouted Tom. + +At that instant again came the voice of the savant. + +"Tom! Ned!" he gasped, rather than cried. + +"I'm caught in the coils! Quick--quick if you +would save me!" + +"In the coils!" repeated Ned. "What does he mean? +Can the giant iguana----" + +Tom Swift did not stop to answer. With his +electric rifle in readiness, he leaped forward +through the jungle. + + + +CHAPTER XVI + +A MEETING IN THE JUNGLE + + +Before Tom and Ned reached the place +whence Professor Bumper had called, they heard +strange noises, other than the imploring voice of +their friend. It seemed as though some great +body was threshing about in the jungle, lashing +the trees, bushes and leaves about, and when +the two young men, followed by Mr. Damon, +reached the scene they saw that, in a measure, +this really accounted for what they heard. + +Something like a great whip was beating about +close to two trees that grew near together. And +then, when the storm of twigs, leaves and dirt, +caused by the leaping, threshing thing ceased for +a moment, the onlookers saw something that +filled them with terror. + +Between the two trees, and seemingly bound +to them by a great coiled rope, spotted and banded, +was the body of Professor Bumper. His arms +were pinioned to his sides and there was horror +and terror on his face, that looked imploringly +at the youths from above the topmost coil of +those encircling him. + +"What is it?" cried Mr. Damon, as he ran +pantingly up. "What has caught him? Is it the +giant iguana?" + +"It's a snake--a great boa!" gasped Tom. "It +has him in its coils. But it is wound around +the trees, too. That alone prevents it from +crushing the professor to death. + +"Ned, be ready with your rifle. Put in the +heaviest charge, and watch your chance to fire!" + +The great, ugly head of the boa reared itself +up from the coils which it had, with the quickness +of thought, thrown about the man between +the two trees. This species of snake is not +poisonous, and kills its prey by crushing it to +death, making it into a pulpy mass, with scarcely +a bone left unbroken, after which it swallows +its meal. The crushing power of one of these +boas, some of which reach a length of thirty +feet, with a body as large around as that of a +full-grown man, is enormous. + +"I'm going to fire!" suddenly cried Tom. He +had seen his chance and he took it. There was +the faint report--the crack of the electric rifle-- +and the folds of the serpent seemed to relax. + +"I see a good chance now," added Ned, who +had taken the small charge from his weapon, +replacing it with a heavier one. + +His rifle was also discharged in the direction +of the snake, and Tom saw that the hit was a +good one, right through the ugly head of the reptile. + +"One other will be enough to make him loosen +his coils!" cried Tom, as he fired again, and such +was the killing power of the electric bullets that +the snake, though an immense one, and one that +short of decapitation could have received many +injuries without losing power, seemed to shrivel up. + +Its folds relaxed, and the coils of the great +body fell in a heap at the roots of the two trees, +between which the scientist had been standing. + +Professor Bumper seemed to fall backward as +the grip of the serpent relaxed, but Tom, dropping +his rifle, and calling to Ned to keep an eye +on the snake, leaped forward and caught his friend. + +"Are you hurt?" asked Tom, carrying the limp +form over to a grassy place. There was no +answer, the savant's eyes were closed and he +breathed but faintly. + +Ned Newton fired two more electric bullets +into the still writhing body of the boa. + +"I guess he's all in," he called to Tom. + +"Bless my horseradish! And so our friend +seems to be," commented Mr. Damon. "Have +you anything with which to revive him, Tom?" + +"Yes. Some ammonia. See if you can find a +little water." + +"I have some in my flask." + +Tom mixed a dose of the spirits which he +carried with him, and this, forced between the pallid +lips of the scientist, revived him. + +"What happened?" he asked faintly as he opened +his eyes. "Oh, yes, I remember," he added +slowly. "The boa----" + +"Don't try to talk," urged Tom. "You're all +right. The snake is dead, or dying. Are you +much hurt?" + +Professor Bumper appeared to be considering. +He moved first one limb, then another. He +seemed to have the power over all his muscles. + +"I see how it happened," he said, as he sat +up, after taking a little more of the ammonia. "I +was following the iguana, and when the big lizard +came to a stop, in a little hollow place in the +ground, at the foot of those two trees, I leaned +over to slip a noose of rope about its neck. Then +I felt myself caught, as if in the hands of a giant, +and bound fast between the two trees." + +"It was the big boa that whipped itself around +you, as you leaned over," explained Tom, as Ned +came up to announce that the snake was no +longer dangerous. "But when it coiled around +you it also coiled around the two trees, you, +fortunately slipping between them. Had it not +been that their trunks took off some of the pressure +of the coils you wouldn't have lasted a minute." + +"Well, I was pretty badly squeezed as it was," +remarked the professor. "I hardly had breath +enough left to call to you. I tried to fight off the +serpent, but it was of no use." + +"I should say not!" cried Mr. Damon. "Bless my +circus ring! one might as well try to combat +an elephant! But, my dear professor, are you all +right now?" + +"I think so--yes. Though I shall be lame and +stiff for a few days, I fear. I can hardly walk." + +Professor Bumper was indeed unable to go +about much for a few days after his encounter +with the great serpent. He stretched out in a +hammock under trees in the camp clearing, and +with his friends waited for the possible return +of Tolpec and the porters. + +Ned and Tom made one or two short hunting +trips, and on these occasions they kept a lookout +in the direction the Indian had taken when he +went away. + +"For he's sure to come back that way--if he +comes at all," declared Ned; "which I am beginning +to doubt." + +"Well, he may not come," agreed Tom, who +was beginning to lose some of his first hope. +"But he won't necessarily come from the same +direction he took. He may have had to go in an +entirely different way to get help. We'll hope +for the best." + +A week passed. Professor Bumper was able +to be about, and Tom and Ned noticed that +there was an anxious look on his face. Was he, +too, beginning to despair? + +"Well, this isn't hunting for golden idols very +fast," said Mr. Damon, the morning of the eighth +day after their desertion by the faithless Jacinto. +"What do you say, Professor Bumper; ought +we not to start off on our own account?" + +"We had better if Tolpec does not return +today," was the answer. + +They had eaten breakfast, had put their camp +in order, and were about to have a consultation +on what was best to do, when Tom suddenly +called to Ned, who was whistling: + +"Hark!" + +Through the jungle came a faint sound of singing +--not a harmonious air, but the somewhat +barbaric chant of the natives. + +"It is Tolpec coming back!" cried Mr. Damon. +"Hurray! Now our troubles are over t Bless my +meal ticket! Now we can start!" + +"It may be Jacinto," suggested Ned. + +"Nonsense! you old cold-water pitcher!" +cried Tom. "It's Tolpec! I can see him! He's +a good scout all right!" + +And then, walking at the head of a band of +Indians who were weirdly chanting while behind +them came a train of mules, was Tolpec, a cheerful +grin covering his honest, if homely, dark face. + +"Me come back!" he exclaimed in gutteral +English, using about half of his foreign vocabulary. + +"I see you did," answered Professor Bumper +in the man's own tongue. "Glad to see you. +Is everything all right?" + +"All right," was the answer. "These Indians +will take you where you want to go, and will not +leave you as Jacinto did." + +"We'll start in the morning!" exclaimed the +savant his own cheerful self again, now that +there was a prospect of going further into the +interior. "Tell the men to get something to eat, +Tolpec. There is plenty for all." + +"Good!" grunted the new guide and soon the +hungry Indians, who had come far, were satisfying +their hunger. + +As they ate Tolpec explained to Professor +Bumper, who repeated it to the youths and Mr. +Damon, that it had been necessary to go farther +than he had intended to get the porters and +mules. But the Indians were a friendly tribe, +of which he was a member, and could be depended on. + +There was a feast and a sort of celebration in +camp that night. Tom and Ned shot two deer, +and these formed the main part of the feast and +the Indians made merry about the fire until nearly +midnight. They did not seem to mind in the +least the swarms of mosquitoes and other bugs +that flew about, attracted by the light. As for +Tom Swift and his friends, their nets protected +them. + +An early start was made the following morning. +Such packages of goods and supplies as could +not well be carried by the Indians in their head +straps, were loaded on the backs of the pack- +mules. Tolpec explained that on reaching the +Indian village, where he had secured the porters, +they could get some ox-carts which would be a +convenience in traveling into the interior toward +the Copan valley. + +The march onward for the next two days was +tiresome; but the Indians Tolpec had secured +were as faithful and efficient as he had described +them, and good progress was made. + +There were a few accidents. One native fell +into a swiftly running stream as they were fording +it and lost a box containing some much-needed +things. But as the man's life was saved Professor +Bumper said it made up for the other loss. +Another accident did not end so auspiciously. +One of the bearers was bitten by a poisonous +snake, and though prompt measures were taken, +the poison spread so rapidly that the man died. + +In due season the Indian village was reached. +where, after a day spent in holding funeral services +over the dead bearer, preparations were +made for proceeding farther. + +This time some of the bearers were left behind, +and ox-carts were substituted for them, as it was +possible to carry more goods this way, + +"And now we're really off for Copan!" +exclaimed Professor Bumper one morning, when +the cavalcade, led by Tolpec in the capacity of +head guide, started off. "I hope we have no +more delays." + +"I hope not, either," agreed Tom. "That +Beecher may be there ahead of us." + +Weary marches fell to their portion. There +were mountains to climb, streams to ford or swim, +sending the carts over on rudely made rafts. +There were storms to endure, and the eternal heat +to fight. + +But finally the party emerged from the +lowlands of the coast and went up in among the +hills, where though the going was harder, the +climate was better. It was not so hot and moist. + +Not wishing to attract attention in Copan +itself, Professor Bumper and his party made a +detour, and finally, after much consultation with +Tom over the ancient maps, the scientist announced +that he thought they were in the vicinity +of the buried city. + +"We will begin test excavations in the +morning," he said. + +The party was in camp, and preparations were +made for spending the night in the forest, when +from among the trees there floated to the ears +of our friends a queer Indian chant. + +"Some one is coming," said Tom to Ned. + +Almost as he spoke there filed into the clearing +where the camp had been set up, a cavalcade of white men, +followed by Indians. And at the sight of one +of the white men Tom Swift uttered a cry. + +"Professor Beecher!" gasped the young inventor. + + + +CHAPTER XVII + +THE LOST MAP + + +The on-marching company of white men, with +their Indian attendants, came to a halt on the +edge of the clearing as they caught sight of the +tents already set up there. The barbaric chant +of the native bearers ceased abruptly, and there +was a look of surprise shown on the face of +Professor Fenimore Beecher. For Professor Beecher +it was, in the lead of the rival expedition. + +"Bless my shoe laces!" exclaimed Mr. Damon. + +"Is it really Beecher?" asked Ned, though he knew +as well as Tom that it was the young archaeologist. + +"It certainly is!" declared Tom. "And he has +nerve to follow us so closely!" + +"Maybe he thinks we have nerve to get here +ahead of him," suggested Ned, smiling grimly. + +"Probably," agreed Tom, with a short laugh. +"Well, it evidently surprises him to find us here +at all, after the mean trick he played on us to +get Jacinto to lead us into the jungle and desert +us." + +"That's right," assented Ned. "Well, what's +the next move?" + +There seemed to be some doubt about this +on the part of both expeditions. At the sight +of Professor Beecher, Professor Bumper, who had +come out of his tent, hurriedly turned to Tom +and asked him what he thought it best to do. + +"Do!" exclaimed the eccentric Mr. Damon, +not giving Tom time to reply. "Why, stand +your ground, of course! Bless my house and +lot! but we're here first! For the matter of that, +I suppose the jungle is free and we can no more +object to his coming: here than he can to our +coming. First come, first served, I suppose is the +law of the forest." + +Meanwhile the surprise occasioned by the +unexpected meeting of their rivals seemed to have +spread something like consternation among the +white members of the Beecher party. As for the +natives they evidently did not care one way or +the other. + +There was a hasty consultation among the +professors accompanying Mr. Beecher, and then the +latter himself advanced toward the tents of Tom +and his friends and asked: + +"How long have you been here?" + +"I don't see that we are called upon to answer +that question," replied Professor Bumper stiffly. + +"Perhaps not, and yet----" + +"There is no perhaps about it!" said Professor +Bumper quickly. "I know what your object is, +as I presume you do mine. And, after what +I may term your disgraceful and unsportsmanlike +conduct toward me and my friends, I prefer +not to have anything further to do with you. +We must meet as strangers hereafter." + +"Very well," and Professor Beecher's voice was +as cold and uncompromising as was his rival's. +"Let it be as your wish. But I must say I don't +know what you mean by unsportsmanlike conduct." + +"An explanation would be wasted on you," +said Professor Bumper stiffly. "But in order that +you may know I fully understand what you did +I will say that your efforts to thwart us through +your tool Jacinto came to nothing. We are here +ahead of you." + +"Jacinto!" cried Professor Beecher in real or +simulated surprise. "Why, he was not my `tool,' +as you term it." + +"Your denial is useless in the light of his +confession," asserted Professor Bumper. + +"Confession?" + +"Now look here!" exclaimed the older +professor, "I do not propose to lower myself by +quarreling with you. I know certainly what +you and your party tried to do to prevent us +from getting here. But we got out of the trap +you set for us, and we are on the ground first. +I recognize your right to make explorations as +well as ourselves, and I presume you have not +fallen so low that you will not recognize the +unwritten law in a case of this kind--the law +which says the right of discovery belongs to the +one who first makes it." + +"I shall certainly abide by such conduct as +is usual under the circumstances," said +Professor Beecher more stiffly than before. +"At the same time I must deny having set a trap. +And as for Jacinto----" + +"It will be useless to discuss it further!" +broke in Professor Bumper. + +"Then no more need be said," retorted the +younger man. "I shall give orders to my friends, +as well as to the natives, to keep away from +your camp, and I shall expect you to do the +same regarding mine." + +"I should have suggested the same thing +myself," came from Tom's friend, and the two rival +scientists fairly glared at one another, the others +of both parties looking on with interest. + +Professor Bumper turned and walked defiantly +back to his tent. Professor Beecher did the same +thing. Then, after a short consultation among +the white members of the latter's organization, +their tents were set up in another clearing, +removed and separated by a screen of trees and +bushes from those of Tom Swift's friends. The +natives of the Beecher party also withdrew a little +way from those of Professor Bumper's organization, +and then preparations for spending the +night in the jungle went on in the rival +headquarters. + +"Well, he certainly had nerve, to deny, practically, +that he had set Jacinto up to do what he did," commented Tom. + +"I should say so!" agreed Ned. + +"How do you imagine he got here nearly as +soon as we did, when he did not start until +later?" asked Mr. Damon. + +"He did not have the unfortunate experience +of being deserted in the jungle," replied Tom. +"He probably had Jacinto, or some of that +unprincipled scoundrel's friends, show him a short +route to Copan and he came on from there." + +"Well, I did hope we might have the ground +to ourselves, at least for the preliminary explorations +and excavations. But it is not to be. My +rival is here," sighed Professor Bumper. + +"Don't let that discourage you!" exclaimed Tom. +"We can fight all the better now the foe +is in the open, and we know where he is." + +"Yes, Tom Swift, that is true," agreed the +scientist. "I am not going to give up, but I +shall have to change my plans a little. Perhaps +you will come into the tent with me," and he +nodded to Tom and Ned. "I want to talk over +certain matters with you and Mr. Damon." + +"Pleased to," assented the young inventor, and +his financial secretary nodded. + +A little later, supper having been eaten, the +camp made shipshape and the natives settled +down, Tom, Ned, Mr. Damon and Professor +Bumper assembled in the tent of the scientist, +where a dry battery lamp gave sufficient illumination +to show a number of maps and papers scattered +over an improvised table. + +"Now, gentlemen," said the professor, "I have +called you here to go over my plans more in +detail than I have hitherto done, now we are on +the ground. You know in a general way what +I hope to accomplish, but the time has come +when I must be specific. + +"Aside from being on the spot, below which, +or below the vicinity where, I believe, lies the +lost city of Kurzon and, I hope, the idol of gold, +a situation has arisen--an unexpected situation, +I may say--which calls for different action from +that I had counted on. + +"I refer to the presence of my rival, Professor +Beecher. I will not dwell now on what he has +done. It is better to consider what he may do." + +"That's right," agreed Ned. "He may get up in +the night, dig up this city and skip with that +golden image before we know it." + +"Hardly," grinned Tom. + +"No," said Professor Bumper. "Excavating +buried cities in the jungle of Honduras is not +as simple as that. There is much work to be +done. But accidents may happen, and in case +one should occur to me, and I be unable to prosecute +the search, I want one of you to do it. For +that reason I am going to show you the maps +and ancient documents and point out to you +where I believe the lost city lies. Now, if you +will give me your attention, I'll proceed." + +The professor went over in detail the story +of how he had found the old documents relating +to the lost city of Kurzon, and of how, after +much labor and research, he had located the +city in the Copan valley. The great idol of +gold was one of the chief possessions of Kurzon, +and it was often referred to in the old +papers; copies and translations of which the +professor had with him. + +"But this is the most valuable of all," he said, +as he opened an oiled-silk packet. "And before +I show it to you, suppose you two young men +take a look outside the tent." + +"What for?" asked Mr. Damon. + +"To make sure that no emissaries from the +Beecher crowd are sneaking around to overhear +what we say," was the somewhat bitter answer +of the scientist. "I do not trust him, in spite +of his attempted denial." + +Tom and Ned took a quick but thorough +observation outside the tent. The blackness of the +jungle night was in strange contrast to the light +they had just left. + +"Doesn't seem to be any one around here," +remarked Ned, after waiting a minute or two. + +"No. All's quiet along the Potomac. Those +Beecher natives are having some sort of a song- +fest, though." + +In the distance, and from the direction of their +rivals' camp, came the weird chant. + +"Well, as long as they stay there we'll be all +right," said Tom. "Come on in. I'm anxious to +hear what the professor has to say." + +"Everything's quiet," reported Ned. + +"Then give me your attention," begged the +scientist. + +Carefully, as though about to exhibit some, +precious jewel, he loosened the oiled-silk wrappings +and showed a large map, on thin but tough +paper. + +"This is drawn from the old charts," the +professor explained. "I worked on it many months, +and it is the only copy in the world. If it were +to be destroyed I should have to go all the way +back to New York to make another copy. I have +the original there in a safe deposit vault." + +"Wouldn't it have been wise to make two +copies?" asked Tom. + +"It would have only increased the risk. With +one copy, and that constantly in my possession, +I can be sure of my ground. Otherwise not. +That is why I am so careful of this. Now I will +show you why I believe we are about over the +ancient city of Kurzon." + +"Over it!" cried Mr. Damon. "Bless my +gunpowder! What do you mean?" and he looked +down at the earthen floor of the tent as though +expecting it to open and swallow him. + +"I mean that the city, like many others of +Central and South America, is buried below the +refuse of centuries," went on the professor. +"Very soon, if we are fortunate, we shall be +looking on the civilization of hundreds of years +ago--how long no one knows. + +"Considerable excavation has been done in +Central America," went on Professor Bumper, +"and certain ruins have been brought to light. +Near us are those of Copan, while toward the +frontier are those of Quirigua, which are even +better preserved than the former. We may visit +them if we have time. But I have reason to +believe that in this section of Copan is a large +city, the existence of which has not been made +certain of by any one save myself--and, perhaps, +Professor Beecher. + +"Certainly no part of it has seen the light of +day for many centuries. It shall be our pleasure +to uncover it, if possible, and secure the idol of +gold." + +"How long ago do you think the city was +buried?" asked Tom. + +"It would be hard to say. From the carvings +and hieroglyphics I have studied it would seem +that the Mayan civilization lasted about five +hundred years, and that it began perhaps in the +year A. D. five hundred." + +"That would mean," said Mr. Damon, "that +the ancient cities were in ruins, buried, perhaps, +long before Columbus discovered the new +world." + +"Yes," assented the professor. "Probably +Kurzon, which we now seek, was buried deep for +nearly five hundred years before Columbus landed +at San Salvadore. The specimens of writing and +architecture heretofore disclosed indicate that. +But, as a matter of fact, it is very hard to +decipher the Mayan pictographs. So far, little but +the ability to read their calendars and numerical +system is possessed by us, though we are gradually +making headway. + +"Now this is the map of the district, and by the +markings you can see where I hope to find what +I seek. We shall begin digging here," and he +made a small mark with a pencil on the map. + +"Of course," the professor explained, "I may be +wrong, and it will take some time to discover the +error if we make one. When a city is buried thirty +or forty feet deep beneath earth and great trees +have grown over it, it is not easy to dig down to it." + +"How do you ever expect to find it?" asked Ned. + +"Well, we will sink shafts here and there. If +we find carved stones, the remains of ancient +pottery and weapons, parts of buildings or building +stones, we shall know we are on the right +track," was the answer. "And now that I have +shown you the map, and explained how valuable +it is, I will put it away again. We shall begin +our excavations in the morning." + +"At what point?" asked Tom. + +"At a point I shall indicate after a further +consultation of the map. I must see the configuration +of the country by daylight to decide. +And now let's get some rest. We have had a +hard day." + +The two tents housing the four white members +of the Bumper party were close together, +and it was decided that the night would be divided +into four watches, to guard against possible +treachery on the part of the Beecher crowd. + +"It seems an unkind precaution to take against +a fellow scientist," said Professor Bumper, "but +I can not afford to take chances after what has +occurred." + +The others agreed with him, and though standing +guard was not pleasant it was done. However +the night passed without incident, and then +came morning and the excitement of getting +breakfast, over which the Indians made merry. +They did not like the cold and darkness, and +always welcomed the sun, no matter how hot. + +"And now," cried Tom, when the meal was +over, "let us begin the work that has brought us +here." + +"Yes," agreed Professor Bumper, "I will +consult the map, and start the diggers where I think +the city lies, far below the surface. Now, gentlemen, +if you will give me your attention----" + +He was seeking through his outer coat pockets, +after an ineffectual search in the inner one. A +strange look came over his face. + +"What's the matter?" asked Tom. + +"The map--the map!" gasped the professor. +"The map I was showing you last night! The map +that tells where we are to dig for the idol of gold! +It's gone!" + +"The map gone?" gasped Mr. Damon. + +"I--I'm afraid so," faltered the professor. +"I put it away carefully, but now----" + +He ceased speaking to make a further search +in all his pockets. + +"Maybe you left it in another coat," suggested Ned. + +"Or maybe some of the Beecher crowd took it!" snapped Tom. + + + +CHAPTER XVIII + +"EL TIGRE!" + + +The four men gazed at one another. +Consternation showed on the face of Professor +Bumper, and was reflected, more or less, on the +countenances of his companions. + +"Are you sure the map is gone?" asked Tom. +"I know how easy it is to mislay anything in a +camp of this sort. I couldn't at first find my +safety razor this morning, and when I did locate +it the hoe was in one of my shoes. I'm sure a +rat or some jungle animal must have dragged +it there. Now maybe they took your map, +Professor. That oiled silk in which it was wrapped +might have appealed to the taste of a rat or a +snake." + +"It is no joking matter," said Professor +Bumper. "But I know you appreciate the seriousness +of it as much as I do, Tom. But I had the map +in the pocket of this coat, and now it is gone!" + +"When did you put it there?" asked Ned. + +"This morning, just before I came to breakfast." + +"Oh, then you have had it since last night!" +Tom ejaculated. + +"Yes, I slept with it under my clothes that I +rolled up for a pillow, and when it was my turn +to stand guard I took it with me. Then I put +it back again and went to sleep. When I awoke +and dressed I put the packet in my pocket and +ate breakfast. Now when I look for it--why, +it's gone!" + +"The map or the oiled-silk package?" asked +Mr. Damon, who, once having been a businessman, +was sometimes a stickler for small points. + +"Both," answered the professor. "I opened +the silk to tie it more smoothly, so it would not +be such a lump in my pocket, and I made sure +the map was inside." + +"Then the whole thing has been taken--or you +have lost it," suggested Ned. + +"I am not in the habit of losing valuable maps," +retorted the scientist. "And the pocket of my +coat I had made deep, for the purpose of carrying +the long map. It could not drop out." + +"Well, we mustn't overlook any possible +chances," suggested Tom. "Come on now, we'll +search every inch of the ground over which you +traveled this morning, Professor." + +"It MUST be found," murmured the scientist. +"Without it all our work will go for naught." + +They all went into the tent where the professor +and Mr. Damon had slept when they were not +on guard. The camp was a busy place, with the +Indians finishing their morning meal, and getting +ready for the work of the day. For word +had been given out that there would be no more +long periods of travel. + +In consequence, efforts were being directed by +the head men of the bearers to making a more +permanent camp in the wilderness. Shelters of +palm-thatched huts were being built, a site for +cooking fires made, and, at the direction of Mr. +Damon, to whom this part was entrusted, some +sanitary regulations were insisted on. + +Leaving this busy scene, the four, with solemn +faces, proceeded to the tent where it was hoped +the map would be found. But though they went +through everything, and traced and retraced +every place the professor could remember having +traversed about the canvas shelter, no signs of +the important document could be found. + +"I don't believe I dropped it out of my pocket," +said the scientist, for perhaps the twentieth time. + +"Then it was taken," declared Tom. + +"That's what I say!" chimed in Ned. +"And by some of Beecher's party!" + +"Easy, my boy," cautioned Mr. Damon. "We +don't want to make accusations we can't prove." + +"That is true," agreed Professor Bumper. +"But, though I am sorry to say it of a fellow +archaelogist, I can not help thinking Beecher +had something to do with the taking of my map." + +"But how could any of them get it?" asked Mr. Damon. +"You say you had the map this morning, and certainly +none of them has been in our camp since dawn, +though of course it is possible that some of them +sneaked in during the night." + +"It does seem a mystery how it could have +been taken in open daylight, while we were about +camp together," said Tom. "But is the loss +such a grave one, Professor Bumper?" + +"Very grave. In fact I may say it is impossible +to proceed with the excavating without the map." + +"Then what are we to do?" asked Ned. + +"We must get it back!" declared Tom. + +"Yes," agreed the scientist, "we can not work +without it. As soon as I make a little further +search, to make sure it could not have dropped +in some out-of-the-way place, I shall go over to +Professor Beecher's camp and demand that he +give me back my property." + +"Suppose he says he hasn't taken it?" asked Tom. + +"Well, I'm sure he either took it personally, +or one of his party did. And yet I can't understand +how they could have come here without our +seeing them," and the professor shook his head +in puzzled despair. + +A more detailed search did not reveal the missing +map, and Mr. Damon and his friend the +scientist were on the point of departing for the +camp of their rivals, less than a mile away, when +Tom had what really amounted to an inspiration. + +"Look here, Professor!" he cried. "Can you +remember any of the details of your map--say, +for instance, where we ought to begin excavating +to get at the wonders of the underground city?" + +"Well, Tom, I did intend to compare my map +with the configuration of the country about here. +There is a certain mountain which serves as a +landmark and a guide for a starting point. I +think that is it over there," and the scientist +pointed to a distant snow-capped peak. + +The party had left the low and marshy land +of the true jungle, and were among the foothills, +though all about them was dense forest and +underbush, which, in reality, was as much a jungle +as the lower plains, but was less wet. + +"The point where I believe we should start +to dig," said the professor, "is near the spot +where the top of the mountain casts a shadow +when the sun is one hour high. At least that is +the direction given in the old manuscripts. So, +though we can do little without the map, we +might make a start by digging there." + +"No, not there!" exclaimed Tom. + +"Why not?" + +"Because we don't want to let Beecher's crowd +know that we are on the track of the idol of gold." + +"But they know anyhow, for they have the map," +commented Ned, puzzled by his chum's words. + +"Maybe not," said Tom slowly. "I think this +is a time for a big bluff. It may work and it +may not. Beecher's crowd either has the map or +they have not. If they have it they will lose +no time in trying to find the right place to start +digging and then they'll begin excavating. + +"Very good! If they do that we have a right +to dig near the same place. But if they have not +the map, which is possible, and if we start to dig +where the professor's memory tells him is the +right spot, we'll only give them the tip, and they'll +dig there also." + +"I'm sure they have the map," the professor said. +"But I believe your plan is a good one, Tom." + +"Just what do you propose doing?" asked Ned. + +"Fooling 'em!" exclaimed Tom quickly. "We'll +dig in some place remote from the spot where the +mountain casts its shadow. They will think, if +they haven't the map, that we are proceeding by +it, and they'll dig, too. When they find nothing, +as will also happen to us, they may go away. + +"If, on the other hand, they have the map, and +see us digging at a spot not indicated on it, they +will be puzzled, knowing we must have some idea +of where the buried city lies. They will think +the map is at fault, perhaps, and not make use of +it. Then we can get it back." + +"Bless my hatband!" cried Mr. Damon. +"I believe you're right, Tom. +We'll dig in the wrong place to fool 'em." + +And this was done. Search for the precious +map was given up for the time being, and the +professor and his friends set the natives to work +digging shafts in the ground, as though sinking +them down to the level of the buried city. + +But though this false work was prosecuted with +vigor for several days, there was a feeling of +despair among the Bumper party over the loss of +the map. + +"If we could only get it back!" exclaimed the +professor, again and again. + +Meanwhile the Beecher party seemed inactive. +True, some members of it did come over to look +on from a respectful distance at what the diggers +were doing. Some of the rival helpers, under +the direction of the head of the expedition, also +began sinking shafts. But they were not in the +locality remembered by Professor Bumper as being +correct. + +"I can't imagine what they're up to," he said. +"If they have my map they would act differently, +I should think." + +"Whatever they're up to," answered Tom, "the +time has come when we can dig at the place +where we can hope for results." And the following +day shafts were started in the shadow of the +mountain. + +Until some evidence should have been obtained +by digging, as to the location beneath the surface +of a buried city, there was nothing for the +travelers to do but wait. Turns were taken in +directing the efforts of the diggers, and an +occasional inspection was made of the shafts. + +"What do you expect to find first?" asked Tom +of Professor Bumper one day, when the latter was +at the top of a shaft waiting for a bucket load +of dirt to be hoisted up. + +"Potsherds and artifacts," was the answer. + +"What sort of bugs are they?" asked Ned with +a laugh. He and Tom were about to go hunting +with their electric rifles. + +"Artifacts are things made by the Indians--or +whatever members of the race who built the +ancient cities were called--such as household articles, +vases, ornaments, tools and so on. Anything +made by artificial means is called an artifact." + +"And potsherds are things with those Chinese +laundry ticket scratches on them," added Tom. + +"Exactly," said the professor, laughing. +"Though some of the strange-appearing inscriptions +give much valuable information. As soon +as we find some of them--say a broken bit of +pottery with hieroglyphics on--I will know I am +on the right track." + +And while the scientist and Mr. Damon kept +watch at the top of the shaft, Tom and Ned went +out into the jungle to hunt. They had killed some +game, and were stalking a fine big deer, which +would provide a feast for the natives, when suddenly +the silence of the lonely forest was broken +by a piercing scream, followed by an agonized +cry of + +"El tigre! El tigre!" + + + +CHAPTER XIX + +POISONED ARROWS + + +"Did you hear that, Tom?" asked Ned, in a +hoarse whisper. + +"Surely," was the cautious answer. "Keep +still, and I'll try for a shot." + +"Better be quick," advised Ned in a tense voice. +"The chap who did that yelling seems to be in +trouble!" + +And as Ned's voice trailed off into a whisper, +again came the cry, this time in frenzied pain. + +"El tigre! El tigre!" Then there was a jumble of words. + +"It's over this way!" and this time Ned shouted, +seeing no need for low voices since the other was so loud. + +Tom looked to where Ned had parted the +bushes alongside a jungle path. Through the +opening the young inventor saw, in a little glade, +that which caused him to take a firmer grip on his +electric rifle, and also a firmer grip on his nerves. + +Directly in front of him and Ned, and not more +than a hundred yards away, was a great tawny +and spotted jaguar--the "tigre" or tiger of Central +America. The beast, with lashing tail, stood +over an Indian upon whom it seemed to have +sprung from some lair, beating the unfortunate +man to the ground. Nor had he fallen scatheless, +for there was blood on the green leaves about +him, and it was not the blood of the spotted +beast. + +"Oh, Tom, can you--can you----" and Ned +faltered. + +The young inventor understood the unspoken +question. + +"I think I can make a shot of it without hitting +the man," he answered, never turning his head. +"It's a question, though, if the beast won't claw +him in the death struggle. It won't last long, +however, if the electric bullet goes to the right +place, and I've got to take the chance." + +Cautiously Tom brought his weapon to bear. +Quiet as Ned and he had been after the discovery, +the jaguar seemed to feel that something was +wrong. Intent on his prey, for a time he had +stood over it, gloating. Now the brute glanced +uneasily from side to side, its tail nervously +twitching, and it seemed trying to gain, by a sniffing +of the air, some information as to the direction +in which danger lay, for Tom and Ned had +stooped low, concealing themselves by a screen +of leaves. + +The Indian, after his first frenzied outburst +of fear, now lay quiet, as though fearing to move, +moaning in pain. + +Suddenly the jaguar, attracted either by some +slight movement on the part of Ned or Tom, or +perhaps by having winded them, turned his head +quickly and gazed with cruel eyes straight at the +spot where the two young men stood behind the +bushes. + +"He's seen us," whispered Ned. + +"Yes," assented Tom. "And it's a perfect shot. +Hope I don't miss!" + +It was not like Tom Swift to miss, nor did he +on this occasion. There was a slight report from +the electric rifle--a report not unlike the crackle +of the wireless--and the powerful projectile sped +true to its mark. + +Straight through the throat and chest under +the uplifted jaw of the jaguar it went--through +heart and lungs. Then with a great coughing, +sighing snarl the beast reared up, gave a convulsive +leap forward toward its newly discovered +enemies, and fell dead in a limp heap, just beyond +the native over which it had been crouching before +it delivered the death stroke, now never to fall. + +"You did it, Tom! You did it!" cried +Ned, springing up from where he had been kneeling +to give his chum a better chance to shoot. +"You did it, and saved the man's life!" And Ned +would have rushed out toward the still twitching body. + +"Just a minute!" interposed Tom. "Those +beasts sometimes have as many lives as a cat. +I'll give it one more for luck." Another electric +projectile through the head of the jaguar produced +no further effect than to move the body +slightly, and this proved conclusively that there +was no life left. It was safe to approach, which +Tom and Ned did. + +Their first thought, after a glance at the +jaguar, was for the Indian. It needed but a brief +examination to show that he was not badly hurt. +The jaguar had leaped on him from a low tree +as he passed under it, as the boys learned afterward, +and had crushed the man to earth by the +weight of the spotted body more than by a stroke +of the paw. + +The American jaguar is not so formidable a +beast as the native name of tiger would cause +one to suppose, though they are sufficiently dan- +gerous, and this one had rather badly clawed the +Indian. Fortunately the scratches were on the +fleshy parts of the arms and shoulders, where, +though painful, they were not necessarily serious. + +"But if you hadn't shot just when you did, Tom, +it would have been all up with him," commented +Ned. + +"Oh, well, I guess you'd have hit him if I +hadn't," returned the young inventor. "But let's +see what we can do for this chap." + +The man sat up wonderingly--hardly able to +believe that he had been saved from the dreaded +"tigre." His wounds were bleeding rather freely, +and as Tom and Ned carried with them a first-aid +kit they now brought it into use. The wounds +were bound up, the man was given water to +drink and then, as he was able to walk, Tom and +Ned offered to help him wherever he wanted to +go. + +"Blessed if I can tell whether he's one of our +Indians or whether he belongs to the Beecher +crowd," remarked Tom. + +"Senor Beecher," said the Indian, adding, in +Spanish, that he lived in the vicinity and had +only lately been engaged by the young professor +who hoped to discover the idol of gold before +Tom's scientific friend could do so. + +Tom and Ned knew a little Spanish, and with +that, and simple but expressive signs on the part +of the Indian, they learned his story. He had his +palm-thatched hut not far from the Beecher camp, +in a small Indian village, and he, with others, +had been hired on the arrival of the Beecher party +to help with the excavations. These, for some +reason, were delayed. + +"Delayed because they daren't use the map they +stole from us," commented Ned. + +"Maybe," agreed Tom. + +The Indian, whose name, it developed, was Tal, +as nearly as Tom and Ned could master it, had +left camp to go to visit his wife and child in the +jungle hut, intending to return to the Beecher +camp at night. But as he passed through the +forest the jaguar had dropped on him, bearing him +to earth. + +"But you saved my life, Senor," he said to +Tom, dropping on one knee and trying to kiss +Tom's hand, which our hero avoided. "And now +my life is yours," added the Indian. + +"Well, you'd better get home with it and take +care of it," said Tom. "I'll have Professor Bumper +come over and dress your scratches in a better +and more careful way. The bandages we put +on are only temporary." + +"My wife she make a poultice of leaves--they +cure me," said the Indian. + +"I guess that will be the best way," observed +Ned. "These natives can doctor themselves for +some things, better than we can." + +"Well, we'll take him home," suggested Tom. +"He might keel over from loss of blood. +Come on," he added to Tal, indicating his object. + +It was not far to the native's hut from the place +where the jaguar had been killed, and there Tom +and Ned underwent another demonstration of affection +as soon as those of Tal's immediate family and the +other natives understood what had happened. + +"I hate this business!" complained Tom, after +having been knelt to by the Indian's wife and +child, who called him the "preserver" and other +endearing titles of the same kind. "Come on, +let's hike back." + +But Indian hospitality, especially after a life +has been saved, is not so simple as all that. + +"My life--my house--all that I own is yours," +said Tal in deep gratitude. "Take everything," +and he waved his hand to indicate all the possessions +in his humble hut. + +"Thanks," answered Tom, "but I guess you +need all you have. That's a fine specimen of +blow gun though," he added, seeing one hanging +on the wall. "I wouldn't mind having one like +that. If you get well enough to make me one, +Tal, and some arrows to go with it, I'd like it +for a curiosity to hang in my room at home." + +"The Senor shall have a dozen," promised the +Indian. + +"Look, Ned," went on Tom, pointing to the +native weapon. "I never saw one just like this. +They use small arrows or darts, tipped with wild +cotton, instead of feathers." + +"These the arrows," explained Tal's wife, +bringing a bundle from a corner of the one-room +hut. As she held them out her husband gave a +cry of fear. + +"Poisoned arrows! Poisoned arrows!" he exclaimed. +"One scratch and the senors are dead men. Put them away!" + +In fear the Indian wife prepared to obey, but +as she did so Tom Swift caught sight of the package +and uttered a strange cry. + +"Thundering hoptoads, Ned!" he exclaimed. +"The poisoned arrows are wrapped in the piece of oiled +silk that was around the professor's missing map!" + + + +CHAPTER XX + +AN OLD LEGEND + + +Fascinated, Tom and Ned gazed at the package +the Indian woman held out to them. Undoubtedly +it was oiled silk on the outside, and through +the almost transparent covering could be seen +the small arrows, or darts, used in the blow gun. + +"Where did you get that?" asked Tom, pointing +to the bundle and gazing sternly at Tal. + +"What is the matter, Senor?" asked the Indian in turn. +"Is it that you are afraid of the poisoned arrows? +Be assured they will not harm you unless +you are scratched by them." + +Tom and Ned found it difficult to comprehend +all the rapid Spanish spoken by their host, but +they managed to understand some, and his +eloquent gestures made up the rest. + +"We're not afraid," Tom said, noting that the +oiled skin well covered the dangerous darts. "But +where did you get that?" + +"I picked it up, after another Indian had thrown +it away. He got it in your camp, Senor. I +will not lie to you. I did not steal. Valdez +went to your camp to steal--he is a bad Indian-- +and he brought back this wrapping. It contained +something he thought was gold, but it was +not, so he----" + +"Quick! Yes! Tell us!" demanded Tom +eagerly. "What did he do with the professor's +map that was in the oiled silk? Where is it?" + +"Oh, Senors!" exclaimed the Indian woman, +thinking perhaps her husband was about to be +dealt harshly with when she heard Tom's +excited voice. "Tal do no harm!" + +"No, he did no harm," went on Tom, in a +reassuring tone. "But he can do a whole lot of good +if he tells us what became of the map that was in +this oiled silk. Where is it?" he asked again. + +"Valdez burn it up," answered Tal. + +"What, burned the professor's map?" cried Ned. + +"If that was in this yellow cloth--yes," +answered the injured man. "Valdez he is bad. He +say to me he is going to your camp to see what +he can take. How he got this I know not, but +he come back one morning with the yellow pack- +age. I see him, but he make me promise not +to tell. But you save my life I tell you everything. + +"Valdez open the package; but it is not gold, +though he think so because it is yellow, and the +man with no hair on his head keep it in his pocket +close, so close," and Tal hugged himself to indicate +what he meant. + +"That's Professor Bumper," explained Ned. + +"How did Valdez get the map out of the +professor's coat?" asked Tom. + +"Valdez he very much smart. When man +with no hair on his head take coat off for a +minute to eat breakfast Valdez take yellow thing +out of pocket." + +"The Indian must have sneaked into camp +when we were eating," said Tom. "Those from +Beecher's party and our workers look all alike +to us. We wouldn't know one from the other, +and one of our rival's might slip in." + +"One evidently did, if this is really the piece of +oiled silk that was around the professor's map," +said Ned. + +"It certainly is the same," declared the young +inventor. "See, there is his name," and he +stretched out his hand to point. + +"Don't touch!" cried Tal. "Poisoned arrows +snake poison--very dead-like and quick." + +"Don't worry, I won't touch," said Tom grimly. +"But go on. You say Valdez sneaked into our +camp, took the oiled-silk package from the coat +pocket of Professor Bumper and went back to +his own camp with it, thinking it was gold." + +"Yes," answered Tal, though it is doubtful if +he understood all that Tom said, as it was half +Spanish and half English. But the Indian knew +a little English, too. "Valdez, when he find no +gold is very mad. Only papers in the yellow +silk-papers with queer marks on. Valdez think +it maybe a charm to work evil, so he burn them +up--all up!" + +"Burned that rare map!" gasped Tom. + +"All in fire," went on Tal, indicating by his +hands the play of flames. "Valdez throw away +yellow silk, and I take for my arrows so rain not +wash off poison. I give to you, if you like, with +blow gun." + +"No, thank you," answered Tom, in disappointed +tones. "The oiled silk is of no use without +the map, and that's gone. Whew! but this is +tough!" he said to his chum. "As long as it was +only stolen there was a chance to get it back, +but if it's burned, the jig is up." + +"It looks so," agreed Ned. "We'd better get +back and tell the professor. It he can't get along +without the map it's time he started a movement +toward getting another. So it wasn't Beecher, +after all, who got it." + +"Evidently not," assented Tom. "But I +believe him capable of it." + +"You haven't much use for him," remarked Ned. + +"Huh!" was all the answer given by his chum. + +"I am sorry, Senors," went on Tal, "but I +could not stop Valdez, and the burning of the +papers----" + +"No, you could not help it," interrupted the +young inventor. "But it just happens that it +brings bad luck to us. You see, Tal, the papers +in this yellow covering, told of an old buried +city that the bald-headed professor--the-man- +with-no-hair-on-his-head--is very anxious to +discover. It is somewhere under the ground," and +he waved to the jungle all about them, pointing +earthwards. + +"Paper Valdez burn tell of lost city?" asked +Tal, his face lighting up. + +"Yes. But now, of course, we can't tell where +to dig for it." + +The Indian turned to his wife and talked rapidly +with her in their own dialect. She, too, seemed +greatly excited, making quick gestures. Finally +she ran out of the hut. + +"Where is she going?" asked Tom suspiciously. + +"To get her grandfather. He very old Indian. +He know story of buried cities under trees. Very +old story--what you call legend, maybe. But +Goosal know. He tell same as his grandfather +told him. You wait. Goosal come, and you listen." + +"Good, Ned!" suddenly cried Tom. "Maybe, +we'll get on the track of lost Kurzon after all, +through some ancient Indian legend. Maybe we +won't need the map!" + +"It hardly seems possible," said Ned slowly. +"What can these Indians know of buried cities +that were out of existence before Columbus came +here? Why, they haven't any written history." + +"No, and that may be just the reason they are +more likely to be right," returned Tom. "Legends +handed down from one grandfather to another +go back a good many hundred years. If +they were written they might be destroyed as +the professor's map was. Somehow or other, +though I can't tell why, I begin to see daylight +ahead of us." + +"I wish I did," remarked Ned. + +"Here comes Goosal I think," murmured Tom, +and he pointed to an Indian, bent with the weight +of years, who, led by Tal's wife, was slowly +approaching the hut. + + + +CHAPTER XXI + +THE CAVERN + + +"Now Goosal can tell you," said Tal, evidently +pleased that he had, in a measure, solved the +problem caused by the burning of the professor's +map. "Goosal very old Indian. He know old +stories--legends--very old." + +"Well, if he can tell us how to find the buried +city of Kurzon and the--the things in it," said +Tom, "he's all right!" + +The aged Indian proceeded slowly toward the +hut where the impatient youths awaited him. + +"I know what you seek in the buried city," +remarked Tal. + +"Do you?" cried Tom, wondering if some one +had indiscreetly spoken of the idol of gold. + +"Yes you want pieces of rock, with strange +writings on them, old weapons, broken pots. +I know. I have helped white men before." + +"Yes, those are the things we want," agreed +Tom, with a glance at his chum. "That is--some +of them. But does your wife's grandfather talk +our language?" + +"No, but I can tell you what he says." + +By this time the old man, led by "Mrs. Tal"-- +as the young men called the wife of the Indian +they had helped--entered the hut. He seemed +nervous and shy, and glanced from Tom and Ned +to his grandson-in-law, as the latter talked rapidly +in the Indian dialect. Then Goosal made answer, +but what it was all about the boys could +not tell. + +"Goosal say," translated Tal, "that he know a +story of a very old city away down under ground." + +"Tell us about it!" urged Tom eagerly. + +But a difficulty very soon developed. Tal's +intentions were good, but he was not equal to +the task of translating. Nor was the understanding +of Tom and Ned of Spanish quite up to the mark. + +"Say, this is too much for me!" exclaimed Tom. +"We are losing the most valuable part of this by +not understanding what Goosal says, and what +Tal translates." + +"What can we do?" asked Ned. + +"Get the professor here as soon as possible. +He can manage this dialect, and he'll get the +information at first hand. If Goosal can tell +where to begin excavating for the city he ought +to tell the professor, not us." + +"That's right," agreed Ned. "We'll bring the +professor here as soon as we can." + +Accordingly they stopped the somewhat difficult +task of listening to the translated story and +told Tal, as well as they could, that they would +bring the "man-with-no-hair-on-his-head" to +listen to the tale. + +This seemed to suit the Indians, all of whom +in the small colony appeared to be very grateful +to Tom and Ned for having saved the life of +Tal. + +"That was a good shot you made when you +bowled over the jaguar," said Ned, as the two +young explorers started back to their camp. + +"Better than I realized, if it leads to the discovery +of Kurzon and the idol of gold," remarked Tom. + +"And to think we should come across the oiled- +silk holding the poisoned arrows!" went on Ned. +"That's the strangest part of the whole affair. +If it hadn't been that you shot the jaguar this +never would have come about." + +That Professor Bumper was astonished, and +Mr. Damon likewise, when they heard the story +of Tom and Ned, is stating it mildly. + +"Come on!" exclaimed the scientist, as Tom +finished, "we must see this Goosal at once. +If my map is destroyed, and it seems to be, +this old Indian may be our only hope. +Where did he say the buried city was, Tom?" + +"Oh, somewhere in this vicinity, as nearly as +I could make out. But you'd better talk with +him yourself. We didn't say anything about the +idol of gold." + +"That's right. It's just as well to let the +natives think we are only after ordinary relics." + +"Bless my insurance policy!" gasped Mr. Damon. +"It does not seem possible that we are on +the right track." + +"Well, I think we are, from what little information +Goosal gave us," remarked Tom. "This buried city +of his must be a wonderful place." + +"It is, if it is what I take it to be," agreed the +professor. "I told you I would bring you to a +land of wonders, Tom Swift, and they have hardly +begun yet. Come, I am anxious to talk to Goosal." + +In order that the Indians in the Bumper camp +might not hear rumors of the new plan to locate +the hidden city, and, at the same time, to keep +rumors from spreading to the camp of the rivals, +the scientist and his friends started a new shaft, +and put a shift of men at work on it. + +"We'll pretend we are on the right track, and +very busy," said Tom. "That will fool Beecher." + +"Are you glad to know he did not take your +map Professor Bumper?" asked Mr. Damon. + +"Well, yes. It is hard to believe such things of +a fellow scientist." + +"If he didn't take it he wanted to," said Tom. +"And he has done, or will do, things as unsportsmanlike." + +"Oh, you are hardly fair, perhaps, Tom," +commented Ned. + +"Um!" was all the answer he received. + +With the Indians in camp busy on the excavation +work, and having ascertained that similar +work was going on in the Beecher outfit, +Professor Bumper, with Mr. Damon and the young +men, set off to visit the Indian village and listen +to Goosal's story. They passed the place where +Tom had slain the jaguar, but nothing was left +but the bones; the ants, vultures and jungle animals +having picked them clean in the night. + +On the arrival of Tom and his friends at the +Indian's hut, Goosal told, in language which +Professor Bumper could understand, the ancient +legend of the buried city as he had had it from his +grandfather. + +"But is that all you know about it, Goosal?" +asked the savant. + +"No, Learned One. It is true most of what I +have told you was told to me by my father and +his father's father. But I--I myself--with these +eyes, have looked upon the lost city." + +"You have!" cried the professor, this time in +English. "Where? When? Take us to it! +How do you get here?" + +"Through the cavern of the dead," was the +answer when the questions were modified. + +"Bless my diamond ring!" exclaimed Mr. +Damon, when Professor Bumper translated the reply. +"What does he mean?" + +And then, after some talk, this information +came out. Years before, when Goosal was a +young man, he had been taken by his grandfather +on a journey through the jungle. They +stopped one day at the foot of a high mountain, +and, clearing away the brush and stones at a +certain place, an entrance to a great cavern was +revealed. This, it appeared, was the Indian burial +ground, and had been used for generations. + +Goosal, though in fear and trembling, was lead +through it, and came to another cavern, vaster +than the first. And there he saw strange and +wonderful sights, for it was the remains of a buried +city, that had once been the home of a great +and powerful tribe unlike the Indians--the ancient +Mayas it would seem. + +"Can you take us to this cavern?" asked the professor. + +"Yes," answered Goosal. "I will lead to it +those who saved the life of Tal--them and their +friends. I will take you to the lost city!" + +"Good!" cried Mr. Damon, when this had been +translated. "Now let Beecher try to play any +more tricks on us! Ho! for the cavern and the +lost city of Kurzon." + +"And the idol of gold," said Tom Swift to +himself. "I hope we can get it ahead of Beecher. +Perhaps if I can help in that--Oh, well, here's hoping, +that's all!" and a little smile curved his lips. + +Greatly excited by the strange news, but +maintaining as calm an air outwardly as possible, so +as not to excite the Indians, Tom and his friends +returned to camp to prepare for their trip. Goosal +had said the cavern lay distant more than a two- +days' journey into the jungle. + + + +CHAPTER XXII + +THE STORM + + +"Now," remarked Tom, once they were back +again in their camp, "we must go about this trip +to the cavern in a way that will cause no suspicion +over there as to what our object is," and he +nodded in the direction of the quarters of his +rival. + +"Do you mean to go off quietly?" asked Ned. + +"Yes. And to keep the work going on here, +at these shafts," put in the scientist, "so that +if any of their spies happen to come here they +will think we still believe the buried city to be +just below us. To that end we must keep the +Indians digging, though I am convinced now that +it is useless." + +Accordingly preparations were made for an +expedition into the jungle under the leadership of +Goosal. Tal had not sufficiently recovered from +the jaguar wounds to go with the party, but the +old man, in spite of his years, was hale and hearty +and capable of withstanding hardships. + +One of the most intelligent of the Indians was +put in charge of the digging gangs as foreman, +and told to keep them at work, and not to let +them stray. Tolpec, whose brother Tom had +tried to save, proved a treasure. He agreed to +remain behind and look after the interests of his +friends, and see that none of their baggage or +stores were taken. + +"Well, I guess we're as ready as we ever +shall be," remarked Tom, as the cavalcade made +ready to start. Mules carried the supplies that +were to be taken into the jungle, and others of +the sturdy animals were to be ridden by the +travelers. The trail was not an easy one, Goosal +warned them. + +Tom and his friends found it even worse than +they had expected, for all their experience in +jungle and mountain traveling. In places it was +necessary to dismount and lead the mules along, +sometimes pushing and dragging them. More +than once the trail fairly hung on the edge of +some almost bottomless gorge, and again it +wound its way between great walls of rock, +so poised that they appeared about to topple +over and crush the travelers. But they kept on +with dogged patience, through many hardships. + +To add to their troubles they seemed to have +entered the abode of the fiercest mosquitoes +encountered since coming to Honduras. At times +it was necessary to ride along with hats covered +with mosquito netting, and hands encased in +gloves. + +They had taken plenty of condensed food with +them, and they did not suffer in this respect. +Game, too, was plentiful and the electric rifles of +Tom and Ned added to the larder. + +One night, after a somewhat sound sleep +induced by hard travel on the trail that day, Tom +awoke to hear some one or something moving +about among their goods, which included their +provisions. + +"Who's there?" asked the young inventor +sharply, as he reached for his electric rifle. + +There was no answer, but a rattling of the pans. + +"Speak, or I'll fire!" Tom warned, adding this +in such Spanish as he could muster, for he thought +it might be one of the Indians. No reply came, +and then, seeing by the light of the stars a dark +form moving in front of the tent occupied by +himself and Ned, Tom fired. + +There was a combined grunt and squeal of +pain, then a savage growl, and Ned yelled: + +"What's the matter, Tom?" for he had been +awakened, and heard the crackle of the electrical +discharge. + +"I don't know," Tom answered. "But I shot +something--or somebody!" + +"Maybe some of Beecher's crowd," ventured +his chum. But when they got their electric +torches, and focused them on the inert, black +object, it was found to be a bear which had come +to nose about the camp for dainty morsels. + +Bruin was quite dead, and as he was in prime +condition there was a feast of bear meat at the +following dinner. The white travelers found it +rather too strong for their palates, but the Indians +reveled in it. + +It was shortly after noon the next day, when +Goosal, after remarking that a storm seemed +brewing, announced that they would be at the +entrance to the cavern in another hour. + +"Good!" cried Professor Bumper. "At last +we are near the buried city." + +"Don't be too sure," advised Mr. Damon, +"We may be disappointed. Though I hope not +for your sake, my dear Professor." + +Goosal now took the lead, and the old Indian, +traveling on foot, for he said he could better look +for the old landmark that way than on the back +of a mule, walked slowly along a rough cliff. + +"Here. somewhere, is the entrance to the cav- +ern," said the aged man. "It was many years +ago that I was here--many years. But it seems +as though yesterday. It is little changed." + +Indeed little did change in that land of wonders. +Only nature caused what alterations there were. +The hand of man had long been absent. + +Slowly Goosal walked along the rocky trail, +on one side a sheer rock, towering a hundred feet +or more toward the sky. On the other side a +deep gash leading to a great fertile valley below. + +Suddenly the old man paused, and looked about +him as though uncertain. Then, more slowly +still, he put out his hand and pulled at some +bushes that grew on a ledge of the rock. They +came away, having no depth of earth, and a small +opening was disclosed. + +"It is here," said Goosal quietly. "The +entrance to the cavern that leads to the burial +place of the dead, and the city that is dead also. +It is here." + +He stood aside while the others hurried +forward. It took but a few minutes to prove that +he was right--at least as to the existence of the +cavern--for the four men were soon peering into +the opening. + +"Come on!" cried Tom, impetuously. + +"Wait a moment," suggested the professor, +"Sometimes the air in these places is foul. We +must test it." But a torch one of the Indians +threw in burned with a steady glow. That test +was conclusive at least. They made ready to enter. + +Torches of a light bark, that glowed with a +steady flame and little smoke, had been provided, +as well as a good supply of electric dry-battery +lamps, and the way into the cavern was thus well +lighted. At first the Indians were afraid to +enter, but a word or two from Goosal reassured +them, and they followed Professor Bumper, Tom, +and the others into the cavern. + +For several hundred feet there was nothing +remarkable about the cave. It was like any +other cavern of the mountains, though wonderful +for the number of crystal formations on the root +and walls--formations that sparkled like a million +diamonds in the flickering lights. + +"Talk about a wonderland!" cried Tom. +"This is fairyland!" + +A moment later, as Goosal walked on beside +the professor and Tom, the aged Indian came to +a pause, and, pointing ahead, murmured: + +"The city of the dead!" + +They saw the niches cut in the rock walls. +niches that held the countless bones of those who +had died many, many years before. It was a +vast Indian grave. + +"Doubtless a wealth of material of historic +interest here," said Professor Bumper, flashing +his torch on the skeletons. "But it will keep. +Where is the city you spoke of, Goosal?" + +"Farther on, Senor. Follow me." + +Past the stone graves they went, deeper and +deeper into the great cave. Their footsteps +echoed and re-echoed. Suddenly Tom, who with +Ned had gone a little ahead, came to a sudden +halt and said: + +"Well, this may be a burial place sure enough, +but I think I see something alive all right--if +it isn't a ghost." + +He pointed ahead. Surely those were lights +flickering and moving about, and, yes, there were +men carrying them. The Bumper party came to +a surprised halt. The other lights advanced, +and then, to the great astonishment of Professor +Bumper and his friends, there confronted them +in the cave several scientists of Professor Beecher's +party and a score or more of Indians. Professor +Hylop, who was known to Professor Bumper, +stepped forward and asked sharply: + +"What are you doing here?" + +"I might ask you the same thing," was the +retort. + +"You might, but you would not be answered," +came sharply. "We have a right here, having +discovered this cavern, and we claim it under a +concession of the Honduras Government. I shall +have to ask you to withdraw." + +"Do you mean leave here?" asked Mr Damon. + +"That is it, exactly. We first discovered this +cave. We have been conducting explorations in +it for several days, and we wish no outsiders." + +"Are you speaking for Professor Beecher"' asked Tom. + +"I am. But he is here in the cave, and will +speak for himself if you desire it. But I represent +him, and I order you to leave. If you do +not go peaceably we will use force. We have +plenty of it," and he glanced back at the Indians +grouped behind him--scowling savage Indians. + +"We have no wish to intrude," observed +Professor Bumper, "and I fully recognize the right +of prior discovery. But one member of our +party (he did not say which one) was in this +cave many years ago. He led us to it." + +"Ours is a government concession!" exclaimed +Professor Hylop harshly. "We want no intruders! +Go!" and he pointed toward the direction +whence Tom's party had come. + +"Drive them out!" he ordered the Indians in +Spanish, and with muttered threats the dark- +skinned men advanced toward Tom and the +others. + +"You need not use force," said Professor Bumper. + +He and Professor Hylop had quarreled bitterly +years before on some scientific matter, and the +matter was afterward found to be wrong. Perhaps +this made him vindictive. + +Tom stepped forward and started to protest, +but Professor Bumper interposed. + +"I guess there is no help for it but to go. It +seems to be theirs by right of discovery and +government concession," he said, in disappointed +tone. "Come friends"; and dejectedly they +retraced their steps. + +Followed by the threatening Indians, the +Bumper party made its way back to the entrance. +They had hoped for great things, but if the cavern +gave access to the buried city--the ancient +city of Kurzon on the chief altar of which stood +the golden idol, Quitzel--it looked as though +they were never to enter it. + +"We'll have to get our Indians and drive those +fellows out!" declared Tom. "I'm not going to +be beaten this way--and by Beecher!" + +"It is galling," declared Professor Bumper. +"Still he has right on his side, and I must give +in to priority, as I would expect him to. It is +the unwritten law." + +"Then we've failed!" cried Tom bitterly. + +"Not yet," said Professor Bumper. "If I can +not unearth that buried city I may find another +in this wonderland. I shall not give up." + +"Hark! What's that noise?" asked Tom, as +they approached the entrance to the cave. + +"Sounds like a great wind blowing," commented Ned. + +It was. As they stood in the entrance they +looked out to find a fierce storm raging. The +wind was sweeping down the rocky trail, the +rain was falling in veritable bucketfuls from the +overhanging cliff, and deafening thunder and +blinding lightning roared and flashed. + +"Surely you would not drive us out in this +storm," said Professor Bumper to his former +rival. + +"You can not stay in the cave! You must get +out!" was the answer, as a louder crash of thunder +than usual seemed to shake the very mountain. + + + +CHAPTER XXIII + +ENTOMBED ALIVE + + +For an instant Tom and his friends paused at +the entrance to the wonderful cavern, and looked +at the raging storm. It seemed madness to +venture out into it, yet they had been driven +from the cave by those who had every right of +discovery to say who, and who should not, partake +of its hospitality. + +"We can't go out into that blow!" cried Ned. +"It's enough to loosen the very mountains!" + +"Let's stay here and defy them!" murmured Tom. +"If the--if what we seek--is here we have +as good a right to it as they have." + +"We must go out," said Professor Bumper simply. +"I recognize the right of my rival to dispossess us." + +"He may have the right, but it isn't human," +said Mr. Damon. "Bless my overshoes! If +Beecher himself were here he wouldn't have the +heart to send us out in this storm." + +"I would not give him the satisfaction of +appealing to him," remarked Professor Bumper. +"Come, we will go out. We have our ponchos, +and we are not fair-weather explorers. If we +can't get to the lost city one way we will +another. Come my friends." + +And despite the downpour, the deafening +thunder and the lightning that seemed ready to sear +one's eyes, he walked out of the cave entrance, +followed by Tom and the others. + +"Come on!" cried Tom, in a voice he tried to +render confident, as they went out into the +terrible storm. "We'll beat 'em yet!" + +The rain fell harder than ever. Small torrents +were now rushing down the trail, and it was only +a question of a few minutes before the place +where they stood would be a raging river, so +quickly does the rain collect in the mountains and +speed toward the valleys. + +"We must take to the forest!" cried Tom. +"There'll be some shelter there, and I don't like +the way the geography of this place is behaving. +There may be a landslide at any moment." + +As he spoke he motioned upward through the +mist of the rain to the sloping side of the mountain +towering above them. Loose stones were +beginning to roll down, accompanied by patches +of earth loosened by the water. Some of the +patches carried with them bunches of grass and +small bushes. + +"Yes, it will be best to move into the jungle," +said the professor. "Goosal, you had better take +the lead." + +It was wonderful to see how well the aged Indian +bore up in spite of his years, and walked on +ahead. They had left their mules tethered some +distance back, in a sheltering clump of trees, and +they hoped the animals would be safe. + +The guide found a place where they could +leave the trail, though going down a dangerous +slope, and take to the forest. As carefully as +possible they descended this, the rain continuing to +fall, the wind to blow, the lightning to sizzle all +about them and the thunder to boom in their ears. + +They went on until they were beneath the +shelter of the thick jungle growth of trees, which +kept off some of the pelting drops. + +"This is better!" exclaimed Ned, shaking his +poncho and getting rid of some of the water that +had settled on it. + +"Bless my overcoat!" cried Mr. Damon. "We seem +to have gotten out of the frying pan into the fire!" + +"How?" asked Tom. "We are partly sheltered here, +though had we stayed in the cave in spite of----" + +A deafening crash interrupted him, and following +the flash one of the giant trees of the forest +was seen to blaze up and then topple over. + +"Struck by lightning!" yelled Ned. + +"Yes; and it may happen to us!" exclaimed +Mr. Damon. "We were safer from the lightning +in the open. Maybe----" + +Again came an interruption, but this time a +different one. The very ground beneath their feet +seemed to be shaking and trembling. + +"What is it?" gasped Ned, while Goosal fell on +his knees and began fervently to pray. + +"It's an earthquake!" yelled Tom Swift. + +As he spoke there came another sound--the +sound of a mass of earth in motion. It came +from the direction of the mountain trail they had +just left. They looked toward it and their horror- +stricken eyes saw the whole side of the +mountain sliding down. + +Slowly at first the earth slid down, but +constantly gathering force and speed. In the face +of this new disaster the rain seemed to have +ceased and the thunder and lightning to be less +severe. It was as though one force of nature +gave way to the other. + +"Look! Look!" gasped Ned. + +In silence, which was broken now only by a +low and ominous rumble, more menacing than +had been the awful fury of the elements, the +travelers looked. + +Suddenly there was a quicker movement of +seemingly one whole section of the mountain. +Great rocks and trees, carried down by the +appalling force of the landslide were slipping over +the trail, obliterating it as though it had never existed. + +"There goes the entrance to the cavern!" cried Ned, +and as the others looked to where he pointed +they saw the hole in the side of the mountain +--the mouth of the cave that led to the lost city +of Kurzon--completely covered by thousands of +tons of earth and stones. + +"That's the end of them!" exclaimed Tom, as +the rumble of the earthquake died away. + +"Of----" Ned stopped, his eyes staring. + +"Of Professor Beecher's party. They're +entombed alive!" + + + +CHAPTER XXIV + +THE REVOLVING STONE + +Stunned, not alone by the realization of the +awfulness of the fate of their rivals, but also by +the terrific storm and the effect of the earthquake +and the landslide, Tom and his friends remained +for a moment gazing toward the mouth of the +cavern, now completely out of sight, buried by +a mass of broken trees, tangled bushes, rocks and +earth. Somewhere, far beyond that mass, was +the Beecher party, held prisoners in the cave +that formed the entrance to the buried city. + +Tom was the first to come to a realization of +what was needed to be done. + +"We must help them!" he exclaimed, and it was +characteristic of him that he harbored no enmity. + +"How?" asked Ned. + +"We must get a force of Indians and dig them +out," was the prompt answer. + +At Tom's vigorous words Professor Bumper's +forces were energized into action, and he stated: +"Fortunately we have plenty of excavating +tools. We may be in time to save them. Come +on! the storm seems to have passed as suddenly +as it came up, and the earthquake, which, after +all did not cover a wide area, seems to be over. +We must start the work of rescue at once. We +must go back to camp and get all the help we +can muster." + +The storm, indeed, seemed to be over, but it +was no easy matter to get back over the soggy, +rain-soaked ground to the trail they had left to +take shelter in the forest. Fortunately the earthquake +had not involved that portion where they +had left their mules, but most of the frightened +animals had broken loose, and it was some little +time before they could all be caught. + +"It is no use to try to get back to camp to- +night," said Tom, when the last of the pack and +saddle animals had been corralled. "It is getting +late and there is no telling the condition of the +trail. We must stay here until morning." + +"But what about them?" and Mr. Damon +nodded in the direction of the entombed ones. + +"We can help them best by waiting until the +beginning of a new day," said the professor. "We +shall need a large force, and we could not bring +it up to-night. Besides, Tom is right, and if we +tried to go along the trail after dark, torn and +disturbed as it is bound to be by the rain, we +might get into difficulties ourselves. No, we +must camp here until morning and then go for +help." + +They all decided finally this was best. The +professor, too, pointed out that their rivals were +in a large and roomy cave, not likely to suffer +from lack of air nor food or water, since they +must have supplies with them. + +"The only danger is that the cave has been +crushed in," added Tom; "but in that event we +would be of no service to them anyhow." + +The night seemed very long, and it was a most +uncomfortable one, because of the shock and +exertions through which the party had passed. +Added to this was the physical discomfort caused +by the storm. + +But in time there was the light in the east that +meant morning was at hand, and with it came +action. A hasty breakfast, cups of steaming coffee +forming a most welcome part, put them all +in better condition, and once more they were on +their way, heading back to the main camp where +they had left their force of Indians. + +"My!" exclaimed Tom, as they made their +way slowly along, "it surely was some storm! +Look at those big trees uprooted over there. +They're almost as big as the giant redwoods of +California, and yet they were bowled over as if +they were tenpins." + +"I wonder if the wind did it or the earthquake," +ventured Mr. Damon. + +"No wind could do that," declared Ned. "It must +have been the landslide caused by the earthquake." + +"The wind could do it if the ground was made +soft by the rain; and that was probably what +did it," suggested Tom. + +"There is no harm in settling the point," +commented Professor Bumper. "It is not far off our +trail, and will take only a few minutes to go +over to the trees. I should like to get some +photographs to accompany an article that perhaps +I shall write on the effects of sudden and +severe tropical storms. We will go to look at +the overturned trees and then we'll hurry on to +camp to get the rescue party." + +The uprooted trees lay on one side of the +mountain trail, perhaps a mile from the mouth of +the cave which had been covered over, entombing +the Beecher party. Leaving the mules in +charge of one of the Indians, Professor Bumper +and his friends, accompanied by Goosal, approached +the fallen trees. As they neared them +they saw that in falling the trees had lifted with +their roots a large mass of earth and imbedded +rocks that had clung to the twisted and gnarled +fibers. This mass was as large as a house. + +"Look at the hole left when the roots pulled +out!" cried Ned. "Why, it's like the crater of +a small volcano!" he added. And, as they stood +on the edge of it looking curiously at the hole +made, the others agreed with Tom's chum. + +Professor Bumper was looking about, trying +to ascertain if there were any evidences of the +earthquake in the vicinity, when Tom, who had +cautiously gone a little way down into the excavation +caused by the fallen trees, uttered a cry of surprise. + +"Look!" he shouted. "Isn't that some sort of +tunnel or underground passage?" and he pointed +to a square opening, perhaps seven feet high and +nearly as broad, which extended, no one knew +where, downward and onward from the side of +the hole made by the uprooting of the trees. + +"It's an underground passage all right," said +Professor Bumper eagerly; "and not a natural +one, either. That was fashioned by the hand +of man, if I am any judge. It seems to go right +under the mountain, too. Friends, we must +explore this! It may be of the utmost importance! +Come, we have our electric torches, and we shall +need them, for it's very dark in there," and he +peered into the passage in front of which they +all stood now. It seemed to have been tunneled +through the earth, the sides being lined by either +slabs of stone, or walls made by a sort of concrete. + +"But what about the rescue work?" asked Mr. Damon. + +"I am not forgetting Professor Beecher and his +friends," answered the scientist. + +"Perhaps this may be a better means of rescuing +them than by digging them out, which will take +a week at least," observed Tom. + +"This a better way?" asked Ned, pointing to the tunnel. + +"That's it," confirmed the savant. "If you +will notice it extends back in the direction +of the cave from which we were driven. +Now if there is a buried city beneath all this +jungle, this mountain of earth and stones, the +accumulation of centuries, it is probably on the +bottom of some vast cavern. It is my opinion +that we were only in one end of that cavern, and +this may be the entrance to another end of it." + +"Then," asked Mr. Damon, "do you mean that +we can enter here, get into the cave that contains +the buried city, or part of it, and find there +Beecher and his friends?" + +"That's it. It is possible, and if we could it +would save an immense lot of work, and probably +be a surer way to save their lives than by +digging a tunnel through the landslide to find +the mouth of the cave where we first entered." + +"It's a chance worth taking," said Mr. Damon. +"Of course it is a chance. But then everything +connected with this expedition is; so one is no +worse than another. As you say, we may find +the entombed men more easily this way than any +other." + +"I wonder," said Tom slowly, "if, by any +chance, we shall find, through this passage, the +lost city we are looking for." + +"And the idol of gold," added Ned. + +"Goosal, do you know anything about this?" +asked Professor Bumper. "Did you ever hear +of another passage leading to the cave where you +saw the ancient city?" + +"No, Learned One, though I have heard stories +about there being many cities, or parts of a big +one, beneath the mountain, and when it was +above ground there were many entrances to it." + +"That settles it!" cried the professor in +English, having talked to Goosal in Spanish. +"We'll try this and see where it leads." + +They entered the stone-lined passage. In +spite of the fact that it had probably been buried +and concealed from light and air for centuries, +as evidenced by the growth of the giant trees +above it, the air was fresh. + +"And this is one reason," said Tom, in +commenting on this fact, "why I believe it leads to +some vast cavern which is connected in some +fashion with the outer air. Well, perhaps we +shall soon make a discovery." + +Eagerly and anxiously the little party pressed +forward by the light of the pocket electric lamps. +They were obsessed by two thoughts--what they +might find and the necessity for aiding in the +rescue of their rivals. + +On and on they went, the darkness illuminated +only by the torches they carried. But they +noticed that the air was still fresh, and that a +gentle wind blew toward them. The passage +was undoubtedly artificial, a tunnel made by the +hands of men now long crumbled into dust. It +had a slightly upward slope, and this, Professor +Bumper said, indicated that it was bored upward +and perhaps into the very heart of the mountain +somewhere in the interior of which was the +Beecher party. + +Just how far they went they did not know, but +it must have been more than two miles. Yet +they did not tire, for the way was smooth. + +Suddenly Tom, who, with Professor Bumper, +was in the lead, uttered a cry, as he held his +torch above his head and flashed it about in a +circle. + +"We're blocked!" he exclaimed. "We're up +against a stone wall!" + +It was but too true. Confronting them, and +extending from side to side across the passage +and from roof to floor, was a great rough stone. +Immense and solid it seemed when they pushed +on it in vain. + +"Nothing short of dynamite will move that," +said Ned in despair. "This is a blind lead. +We'll have to go back." + +"But there must be something on the other +side of that stone," cried Tom. "See, it is pierced +with holes, and through them comes a current of +air. If we could only move the stone!" + +"I believe it is an ancient door," remarked +Professor Bumper. + +Eagerly and frantically they tried to move it +by their combined weight. The stone did not +give the fraction of the breadth of a hair. + +"We'll have to go back and get some of your +big tunnel blasting powder, Tom," suggested Ned. + +As he spoke old Goosal glided forward. He +had remained behind them in the passage while +they were trying to move the rock. Now he +said something in Spanish. + +"What does he mean?" asked Ned. + +"He asks that he be allowed to try," translated +Professor Bumper. "Sometimes, he says, there +is a secret way of opening stone doors in these +underground caves. Let him try." + +Goosal seemed to be running his fingers lightly +over the outer edge of the door. He was muttering +to himself in his Indian tongue. + +Suddenly he uttered an exclamation, and, as +he did so, there was a noise from the door itself. +It was a grinding, scraping sound, a rumble as +though rocks were being rolled one against the +other. + +Then the astonished eyes of the adventurers +saw the great stone door revolve on its axis +and swing to one side, leaving a passage open +through which they could pass. Goosal had +discovered the hidden mechanism. + +What lay before them? + + + +CHAPTER XXV + +THE IDOL OF GOLD + + +"Forward! cried Tom Swift. + +"Where?" asked Mr Damon, hanging back for +an instant. "Bless my compass, Tom! do you +know where you're going?" + +"I haven't the least idea, but it must lead to +something, or the ancients who made this +revolving stone door wouldn't have taken such care +to block the passage." + +"Ask Goosal if he knows anything about it," +suggested Mr. Damon to the professor. + +"He says he never was here before," translated +the savant, "but years ago, when he went into +the hidden city by the cave we left yesterday, he +saw doors like this which opened this way." + +"Then we're on the right track!" cried Tom. +"If this is the same kind of door, it must lead +to the same place. Ho for Kurzon and the idol +of gold!" + +As they passed through the stone door, Tom +and Professor Bumper tried to get some idea of +the mechanism by which it worked. But they +found this impossible, it being hidden within the +stone itself or in the adjoining walls. But, in +order that it might not close of itself and entomb +them, the portal was blocked open with stones +found in the passage. + +"It's always well to have a line of retreat open," +said Tom. "There's no telling what may lie beyond us." + +For a time there seemed to be nothing more +than the same passage along which they had +come. Then the passage suddenly widened, like +the large end of a square funnel. Upward and +outward the stone walls swept, and they saw +dimly before them, in the light of their torches, +a vast cavern, seemingly formed by the falling +in of mountains, which, in toppling over, had met +overhead in a sort of rough arch, thus protecting, +in a great measure, that which lay beneath +them. + +Goosal, who had brought with him some of +the fiber bark torches, set a bundle of them +aflame. As they flared up, a wondrous sight +was revealed to Tom Swift and his friends. + +Stretching out before them, as though they +stood at the end of an elevated street and gazed +down on it, was a city--a large city, with streets, +houses, open squares, temples, statues, fountains, +dry for centuries--a buried and forgotten city-- +a city in ruins--a city of the dead, now dry as +dust, but still a city, or, rather, the strangely +preserved remains of one. + +"Look!" whispered Tom. A louder voice just then, +would have seemed a sacrilege. "Look!" + +"Is it what we are looking for?" asked Ned in a low voice. + +"I believe it is," replied the professor. "It is +the lost city of Kurzon, or one just like it. And +now if we can find the idol of gold our search will +be ended--at least the major part of it." + +"Where did you expect to find the idol?" asked Tom. + +"It should be in the main temple. Come, we +will walk in the ancient streets--streets where +no feet but ours have trod in many centuries. +Come!" + +In eager silence they pressed on through this +newly discovered wonderland. For it was a +wonderful city, or had been. Though much of +it was in ruins, probably caused by an earthquake +or an eruption from a volcano, the central +portion, covered as it was by the overtoppling +mountains that formed the arching roof, was well +preserved. + +There were rude but beautiful stone buildings. +There were archways; temples; public squares; +and images, not at all beautiful, for they seemed +to be of man-monsters--doubtless ancient gods. +There were smoothly paved streets; wondrously +carved fountains, some in ruins, all now as dry +as bone, but which must have been places of +beauty where youths and maidens gathered in +the ancient days. + +Of the ancient population there was not a +trace left. Tom and his friends penetrated some +of the houses, but not so much as a bone or a +heap of mouldering dust showed where the +remains of the people were. Either they had fled +at the approaching doom of the city and were +buried elsewhere, or some strange fire or other +force of nature had consumed and obliterated +them. + +"What a wealth of historic information I shall +find here!" murmured Professor Bumper, as he +caught sight of many inscriptions in strange +characters on the walls and buildings. +"I shall never get to the end of them." + +"But what about the idol of gold?" asked Mr. +Damon, "Do you think you'll find that?" + +"We must hurry on to the temple over there," +said the scientist, indicating a building further along. + +"And then we must see about rescuing your +rivals, Professor," put in Tom. + +"Yes, Tom. But fortunately we are on the +ground here before them," agreed the professor. + +Undoubtedly it was the chief temple, or place +of worship, of the long-dead race which the +explorers now entered. It was a building beautiful +in its barbaric style, and yet simple. There were +massive walls, and a great inner court, at the end +of which seemed to be some sort of altar. And +then, as they lighted fresh torches, and pressed +forward with them and their electric lights, they +saw that which caused a cry of satisfaction to +burst from all of them. + +"The idol of gold!" + +Yes, there it squatted, an ugly, misshapen, +figure, a cross between a toad and a gila monster, +half man, half beast, with big red eyes--rubies +probably--that gleamed in the repulsive golden +face. And the whole figure, weighing many +pounds, seemed to be of SOLID GOLD! + +Eagerly the others followed Professor Bumper +up the altar steps to the very throne of the golden +idol. The scientist touched it, tried to raise it +and make sure of its solidity and material. + +"This is it!" he cried. "It is the idol of gold! +I have found We have found it, for it +belongs to all of us!" + +"Hurray!" cried Tom Swift, and Ned and Mr. +Damon joined in the cry. + +There was no need for silence or caution now; +and yet, as they stood about the squat and ugly +figure, which, in spite of its hideousness, was +worth a fortune intrinsically and as an antique, +they heard from the direction of the stone passage +a noise. + +"What is it?" asked Tom Swift. + +There was a murmur of voices. + +"Indians!" cried Professor Bumper, recognizing +the language--a mixture of Spanish and Indian. + +The cave was illuminated by the glare of other +torches which seemed to rush forward. A moment +later it was seen that they were being carried +by a number of Indians. + +"Friends," murmured Goosal, using the +Spanish term, "Amigos." + +"They are our own Indians!" cried Tom Swift. +"I see Tolpec!" and he pointed to the native who +had deserted from Jacinto's force to help them. + +"How did they get here?" asked Professor Bumper. + +This was quickly told. In their camp, where, +under the leadership of Tolpec they had been +left to do the excavating, the natives had heard, +seen and felt the effects of the storm and the +earthquake, though it did little damage in their +vicinity. But they became alarmed for the safety +of the professor and his party and, at Tolpec's +suggestion, set off in search of them. + +The Indians had seen, passing along the trail, +the uprooted trees, and had noted the footsteps +of the explorers going down to the stone passage. +It was easy for them to determine that Tom +and his friends had gone in, since the marks of +their boots were plainly in evidence in the soft +soil. + +None of the Indians was as much wrought up +over the discovery of Kurzon and the idol as +were the white adventurers. The gold, of course, +meant something to the natives, but they were +indifferent to the wonders of the underground +city. Perhaps they had heard too many legends +concerning such things to be impressed. + +"That statue is yours--all yours," said old +Goosal when he had talked with his relatives and +friends among the natives. "They all say what +you find you keep, and we will help you keep it." + +"That's good," murmured Professor Bumper. +"There was some doubt in my mind as to our +right to this, but after all, the natives who live +in this land are the original owners, and if they +pass title to us it is clear. That settles the last +difficulty." + +"Except that of getting the idol out," said Mr. Damon. + +"Oh, we'll accomplish that!" cried Tom. + +"I can hardly believe my good luck," declared +Professor Bumper. "I shall write a whole book +on this idol alone and then----" + +Once more came an interruption. This time +it was from another direction, but it was of the +same character--an approaching band of torch- +bearers. They were Indians, too, but leading +them were a number of whites. + +And at their head was no less personage than +Professor Beecher himself. + +For a moment, as the three parties stood +together in the ancient temple, in the glare of +many torches, no one spoke. Then Professor +Bumper found his voice. + +"We are glad to see you," he said to his rival. +"That is glad to see you alive, for we saw the +landslide bury you. And we were coming to +dig you out. We thought this cave--the cave of +the buried city--would lead us to you easier than +by digging through the slide. We have just +discovered this idol," and he put his hand on the +grim golden image. + +"Oh, you have discovered it, have you?" asked +Professor Beecher, and his voice was bitter. + +"Yes, not ten minutes ago. The natives have +kindly acknowledged my right to it under the law +of priority. I am sorry but----" + +With a look of disgust and chagrined +disappointment on his face, Professor Beecher turned +to the other scientists and said: + +"Let us go. We are too late. He has what +I came after." + +"Well, it is the fortune of war--and discovery," +put in Mr. Hardy, one of the party who seemed +the least ill-natured. "Your luck might have +been ours, Professor Bumper. I congratulate +you." + +"Thank you! Are you sure your party is all +right--not in need of assistance? How did you +get out of the place you were buried?" + +"Thank you! We do not require any help. It +was good of you to think of us. But we got +out the way we came in. We did not enter the +tunnel as you did, but came in through another +entrance which was not closed by the landslide. +Then we made a turn through a gateway in a +tunnel connecting with ours--a gateway which +seems to have been opened by the earthquake-- +and we came here, just now. + +"Too late, I see, to claim the discovery of the +idol of gold," went on Mr. Hardy. "But I trust +you will be generous, and allow us to make +observations of the buildings and other relics." + +"As much as you please, and with the greatest +pleasure in the world," was the prompt answer +of Professor Bumper. "All I lay sole +claim to is the golden idol. You are at liberty +to take whatever else you find in Kurzon and to +make what observations you like." + +"That is generous of you, and quite in contrast +to--er--to the conduct of our leader. I trust +he may awaken to a sense of the injustice he +did you." + +But Professor Beecher was not there to hear +this. He had stalked away in anger. + +"Humph!" grunted Tom. Then he continued: +"That story about a government concession was all +a fake, Professor, else he'd have put up a fight now. +Contemptible sneak!" + + +In fact the story of Tom Swift's trip to the +underground land of wonders is ended, for with +the discovery of the idol of gold the main object +of the expedition was accomplished. But their +adventures were not over by any means, though +there is not room in this volume to record them. + +Suffice it to say that means were at once taken +to get the golden image out of the cave of the +ancient city. It was not accomplished without +hard work, for the gold was heavy, and Professor +Bumper would not, naturally, consent to +the shaving off of so much as an ear or part of +the flat nose, to say nothing of one of the half +dozen extra arms and legs with which the ugly +idol was furnished. + +Finally it was safely taken out of the cave, +and along the stone passage to the opening +formed by the overthrown trees, and thence on +to camp. + +And at the camp a surprise awaited Tom. + +Some long-delayed mail had been forwarded +from the nearest place of civilization and there +were letters for all, including several for our hero. +One in particular he picked out first and read +eagerly. + +"Well, is every little thing all right, Tom?" +asked Ned, as he saw a cheerful grin spread itself +over his chum's face. + +"I should say it is, and then some! Look +here, Ned. This is a letter from----" + +"I know. Mary Nestor. Go on." + +"How'd you guess?" + +"Oh, I'm a mind-reader." + +"Huh! Well, you know she was away when +I went to call to say good-bye, and I was a little +afraid Beecher had got an inside edge on me." + +"Had he?" + +"No, but he tried hard enough. He went to +see Mary in Fayetteville, just as you heard, be- +fore he came on to join his party, but he didn't +pay much of a visit to her." + +"No?" + +"No. Mary told him he'd better hurry along +to Central America, or wherever it was he +intended going, as she didn't care for him as much +as he flattered himself she did." + +"Good!" cried Ned. "Shake, old man. I'm glad!" + +They shook hands. + +"Well, what's the matter? Didn't you read +all of her letter?" asked Ned when he saw his +chum once more perusing the epistle. + +"No. There's a postscript here. + + +"`Sorry I couldn't see you before you left. It +was a mistake, but when you come back----' + + +"Oh, that part isn't any of your affair!" and, +blushing under his tan, Tom thrust the letter +into his pocket and strode away, while Ned +laughed happily. + +With the idol of gold safe in their possession, +Professor Bumper's party could devote their +time to making other explorations in the buried +city. This they did, as is testified to by a long +list of books and magazine articles since turned +out by the scientist, dealing strictly with archaeo- +logical subjects, touching on the ancient Mayan +race and its civilization, with particular reference +to their system of computing time. + +Professor Beecher, young and foolish, would +not consent to delve into the riches of the ancient +city, being too much chagrined over the loss of +the idol. It seems he had really promised to +give a part of it to Mary Nestor. But he never +got the chance. + +His colleagues, after their first disappointment +at being beaten, joined forces with Professor +Bumper in exploring the old city, and made many +valuable discoveries. + +In one point Professor Bumper had done his +rival an injustice. That was in thinking +Professor Beecher was responsible for the treachery +of Jacinto. That was due to the plotter's own +work. It was true that Professor Beecher had +tentatively engaged Jacinto, and had sent word +to him to keep other explorers away from the +vicinity of the ancient city if possible; but +Jacinto, who did not return Professor Bumper's +money, as he had promised, had acted treacherously +in order to enrich himself. Professor +Beecher had nothing to do with that, nor had he +with the taking of the map, as has been seen, the +loss of which, after all, was a blessing in disguise, +for Kurzon would never have been located +by following the directions given there, as it was +very inaccurate. + +In another point it was demonstrated that the +old documents were at fault. This was in reference +to the golden idol having been overthrown +and another set up in its place, an act which had +caused the destruction of Kurzon. + +It is true that the city was destroyed, or rather, +buried, but this catastrophe was probably +brought about by an earthquake. And another +great idol, one of clay, was found, perhaps a +rival of Quitzel, but it was this clay image which +was thrown down and broken, and not the golden +one. + +Perhaps an effort had been made, just before +the burying of the city, to change idols and the +system of worship, but Quitzel seemed to have +held his own. The old manuscripts were not +very reliable, it was found, except in general. + +"Well, I guess this will hold Beecher for a +while," said Tom, the night of the arrival of +Mary's letter, and after he had written one in +answer, which was dispatched by a runner to +the nearest place whence mail could be +forwarded. + +"Yes, luck seems to favor you," replied Ned. +"You've had a hand in the discovery of the idol +of gold, and----" + +"Yes. And I discovered something else I +wasn't quite sure of," interrupted Tom, as he +felt to make sure he had a certain letter safe in +his pocket. + +It was several weeks later that the explorations +of Kurzon came to an end--a temporary end, for +the rainy season set in, when the tropics are +unsuitable for white men. Tom, Professor Bumper, +Ned and Mr. Damon set sail for the United +States, the valuable idol of gold safe on board. + +And there, with their vessel plowing the blue +waters of the Caribbean Sea, we will take leave +of Tom Swift and his friends. + + + + + + +End of the Project Gutenberg EBook of Tom Swift in the Land of Wonders +by Victor Appleton + +************************************************************************ + +This file should be named 20tom11.txt or 20tom11.zip +Corrected EDITIONS of our eBooks get a new NUMBER, 20tom12.txt +VERSIONS based on separate sources get new LETTER, 20tom11a.txt + +Project Gutenberg eBooks are often created from several printed +editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the US +unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we usually do not +keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition. + +We are now trying to release all our eBooks one year in advance +of the official release dates, leaving time for better editing. +Please be encouraged to tell us about any error or corrections, +even years after the official publication date. + +Please note neither this listing nor its contents are final til +midnight of the last day of the month of any such announcement. +The official release date of all Project Gutenberg eBooks is at +Midnight, Central Time, of the last day of the stated month. A +preliminary version may often be posted for suggestion, comment +and editing by those who wish to do so. + +Most people start at our Web sites at: +http://gutenberg.net or +http://promo.net/pg + +These Web sites include award-winning information about Project +Gutenberg, including how to donate, how to help produce our new +eBooks, and how to subscribe to our email newsletter (free!). + + +Those of you who want to download any eBook before announcement +can get to them as follows, and just download by date. This is +also a good way to get them instantly upon announcement, as the +indexes our cataloguers produce obviously take a while after an +announcement goes out in the Project Gutenberg Newsletter. + +http://www.ibiblio.org/gutenberg/etext03 or +ftp://ftp.ibiblio.org/pub/docs/books/gutenberg/etext03 + +Or /etext02, 01, 00, 99, 98, 97, 96, 95, 94, 93, 92, 92, 91 or 90 + +Just search by the first five letters of the filename you want, +as it appears in our Newsletters. + + +Information about Project Gutenberg (one page) + +We produce about two million dollars for each hour we work. The +time it takes us, a rather conservative estimate, is fifty hours +to get any eBook selected, entered, proofread, edited, copyright +searched and analyzed, the copyright letters written, etc. Our +projected audience is one hundred million readers. If the value +per text is nominally estimated at one dollar then we produce $2 +million dollars per hour in 2002 as we release over 100 new text +files per month: 1240 more eBooks in 2001 for a total of 4000+ +We are already on our way to trying for 2000 more eBooks in 2002 +If they reach just 1-2% of the world's population then the total +will reach over half a trillion eBooks given away by year's end. + +The Goal of Project Gutenberg is to Give Away 1 Trillion eBooks! +This is ten thousand titles each to one hundred million readers, +which is only about 4% of the present number of computer users. + +Here is the briefest record of our progress (* means estimated): + +eBooks Year Month + + 1 1971 July + 10 1991 January + 100 1994 January + 1000 1997 August + 1500 1998 October + 2000 1999 December + 2500 2000 December + 3000 2001 November + 4000 2001 October/November + 6000 2002 December* + 9000 2003 November* +10000 2004 January* + + +The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation has been created +to secure a future for Project Gutenberg into the next millennium. + +We need your donations more than ever! + +As of February, 2002, contributions are being solicited from people +and organizations in: Alabama, Alaska, Arkansas, Connecticut, +Delaware, District of Columbia, Florida, Georgia, Hawaii, Illinois, +Indiana, Iowa, Kansas, Kentucky, Louisiana, Maine, Massachusetts, +Michigan, Mississippi, Missouri, Montana, Nebraska, Nevada, New +Hampshire, New Jersey, New Mexico, New York, North Carolina, Ohio, +Oklahoma, Oregon, Pennsylvania, Rhode Island, South Carolina, South +Dakota, Tennessee, Texas, Utah, Vermont, Virginia, Washington, West +Virginia, Wisconsin, and Wyoming. + +We have filed in all 50 states now, but these are the only ones +that have responded. + +As the requirements for other states are met, additions to this list +will be made and fund raising will begin in the additional states. +Please feel free to ask to check the status of your state. + +In answer to various questions we have received on this: + +We are constantly working on finishing the paperwork to legally +request donations in all 50 states. If your state is not listed and +you would like to know if we have added it since the list you have, +just ask. + +While we cannot solicit donations from people in states where we are +not yet registered, we know of no prohibition against accepting +donations from donors in these states who approach us with an offer to +donate. + +International donations are accepted, but we don't know ANYTHING about +how to make them tax-deductible, or even if they CAN be made +deductible, and don't have the staff to handle it even if there are +ways. + +Donations by check or money order may be sent to: + +Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation +PMB 113 +1739 University Ave. +Oxford, MS 38655-4109 + +Contact us if you want to arrange for a wire transfer or payment +method other than by check or money order. + +The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation has been approved by +the US Internal Revenue Service as a 501(c)(3) organization with EIN +[Employee Identification Number] 64-622154. Donations are +tax-deductible to the maximum extent permitted by law. As fund-raising +requirements for other states are met, additions to this list will be +made and fund-raising will begin in the additional states. + +We need your donations more than ever! + +You can get up to date donation information online at: + +http://www.gutenberg.net/donation.html + + +*** + +If you can't reach Project Gutenberg, +you can always email directly to: + +Michael S. Hart <hart@pobox.com> + +Prof. Hart will answer or forward your message. + +We would prefer to send you information by email. + + +**The Legal Small Print** + + +(Three Pages) + +***START**THE SMALL PRINT!**FOR PUBLIC DOMAIN EBOOKS**START*** +Why is this "Small Print!" statement here? You know: lawyers. +They tell us you might sue us if there is something wrong with +your copy of this eBook, even if you got it for free from +someone other than us, and even if what's wrong is not our +fault. So, among other things, this "Small Print!" statement +disclaims most of our liability to you. It also tells you how +you may distribute copies of this eBook if you want to. + +*BEFORE!* YOU USE OR READ THIS EBOOK +By using or reading any part of this PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm +eBook, you indicate that you understand, agree to and accept +this "Small Print!" statement. If you do not, you can receive +a refund of the money (if any) you paid for this eBook by +sending a request within 30 days of receiving it to the person +you got it from. If you received this eBook on a physical +medium (such as a disk), you must return it with your request. + +ABOUT PROJECT GUTENBERG-TM EBOOKS +This PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm eBook, like most PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm eBooks, +is a "public domain" work distributed by Professor Michael S. Hart +through the Project Gutenberg Association (the "Project"). +Among other things, this means that no one owns a United States copyright +on or for this work, so the Project (and you!) can copy and +distribute it in the United States without permission and +without paying copyright royalties. Special rules, set forth +below, apply if you wish to copy and distribute this eBook +under the "PROJECT GUTENBERG" trademark. + +Please do not use the "PROJECT GUTENBERG" trademark to market +any commercial products without permission. + +To create these eBooks, the Project expends considerable +efforts to identify, transcribe and proofread public domain +works. Despite these efforts, the Project's eBooks and any +medium they may be on may contain "Defects". Among other +things, Defects may take the form of incomplete, inaccurate or +corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other +intellectual property infringement, a defective or damaged +disk or other eBook medium, a computer virus, or computer +codes that damage or cannot be read by your equipment. + +LIMITED WARRANTY; DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES +But for the "Right of Replacement or Refund" described below, +[1] Michael Hart and the Foundation (and any other party you may +receive this eBook from as a PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm eBook) disclaims +all liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including +legal fees, and [2] YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE OR +UNDER STRICT LIABILITY, OR FOR BREACH OF WARRANTY OR CONTRACT, +INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE +OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES, EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE +POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. + +If you discover a Defect in this eBook within 90 days of +receiving it, you can receive a refund of the money (if any) +you paid for it by sending an explanatory note within that +time to the person you received it from. If you received it +on a physical medium, you must return it with your note, and +such person may choose to alternatively give you a replacement +copy. If you received it electronically, such person may +choose to alternatively give you a second opportunity to +receive it electronically. + +THIS EBOOK IS OTHERWISE PROVIDED TO YOU "AS-IS". NO OTHER +WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, ARE MADE TO YOU AS +TO THE EBOOK OR ANY MEDIUM IT MAY BE ON, INCLUDING BUT NOT +LIMITED TO WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A +PARTICULAR PURPOSE. + +Some states do not allow disclaimers of implied warranties or +the exclusion or limitation of consequential damages, so the +above disclaimers and exclusions may not apply to you, and you +may have other legal rights. + +INDEMNITY +You will indemnify and hold Michael Hart, the Foundation, +and its trustees and agents, and any volunteers associated +with the production and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm +texts harmless, from all liability, cost and expense, including +legal fees, that arise directly or indirectly from any of the +following that you do or cause: [1] distribution of this eBook, +[2] alteration, modification, or addition to the eBook, +or [3] any Defect. + +DISTRIBUTION UNDER "PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm" +You may distribute copies of this eBook electronically, or by +disk, book or any other medium if you either delete this +"Small Print!" and all other references to Project Gutenberg, +or: + +[1] Only give exact copies of it. Among other things, this + requires that you do not remove, alter or modify the + eBook or this "small print!" statement. You may however, + if you wish, distribute this eBook in machine readable + binary, compressed, mark-up, or proprietary form, + including any form resulting from conversion by word + processing or hypertext software, but only so long as + *EITHER*: + + [*] The eBook, when displayed, is clearly readable, and + does *not* contain characters other than those + intended by the author of the work, although tilde + (~), asterisk (*) and underline (_) characters may + be used to convey punctuation intended by the + author, and additional characters may be used to + indicate hypertext links; OR + + [*] The eBook may be readily converted by the reader at + no expense into plain ASCII, EBCDIC or equivalent + form by the program that displays the eBook (as is + the case, for instance, with most word processors); + OR + + [*] You provide, or agree to also provide on request at + no additional cost, fee or expense, a copy of the + eBook in its original plain ASCII form (or in EBCDIC + or other equivalent proprietary form). + +[2] Honor the eBook refund and replacement provisions of this + "Small Print!" statement. + +[3] Pay a trademark license fee to the Foundation of 20% of the + gross profits you derive calculated using the method you + already use to calculate your applicable taxes. If you + don't derive profits, no royalty is due. Royalties are + payable to "Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation" + the 60 days following each date you prepare (or were + legally required to prepare) your annual (or equivalent + periodic) tax return. Please contact us beforehand to + let us know your plans and to work out the details. + +WHAT IF YOU *WANT* TO SEND MONEY EVEN IF YOU DON'T HAVE TO? +Project Gutenberg is dedicated to increasing the number of +public domain and licensed works that can be freely distributed +in machine readable form. + +The Project gratefully accepts contributions of money, time, +public domain materials, or royalty free copyright licenses. +Money should be paid to the: +"Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation." + +If you are interested in contributing scanning equipment or +software or other items, please contact Michael Hart at: +hart@pobox.com + +[Portions of this eBook's header and trailer may be reprinted only +when distributed free of all fees. Copyright (C) 2001, 2002 by +Michael S. Hart. Project Gutenberg is a TradeMark and may not be +used in any sales of Project Gutenberg eBooks or other materials be +they hardware or software or any other related product without +express permission.] + +*END THE SMALL PRINT! FOR PUBLIC DOMAIN EBOOKS*Ver.02/11/02*END* diff --git a/old/20tom11.zip b/old/20tom11.zip Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..2dbfc19 --- /dev/null +++ b/old/20tom11.zip diff --git a/old/20tom11h.htm b/old/20tom11h.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..797443f --- /dev/null +++ b/old/20tom11h.htm @@ -0,0 +1,7676 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="iso-8859-1"?>
+<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD XHTML 1.0 Strict//EN"
+ "http://www.w3.org/TR/xhtml1/DTD/xhtml1-strict.dtd">
+
+<html xmlns="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml">
+ <head>
+<meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=iso-8859-1" />
+ <title>
+ The Project Gutenberg eBook of "Tom Swift in the Land of Wonders", by Victor Appleton.
+ </title>
+
+ <style type="text/css">
+/*<![CDATA[ XML blockout */
+
+body { margin-left: 10%; margin-right: 10%; max-width: 40em; }
+
+h1,h2,h3 { text-align: center; }
+h3 { font-weight: normal; }
+p { margin-top: 1em; margin-bottom: 1em; text-align: justify;
+ text-indent: 1em; }
+hr { width: 33%; margin-top: 5em; margin-bottom: 5em;
+ margin-left: auto; margin-right: auto; }
+hr.tiny { width: 10%; margin-top: 2em; margin-bottom: 2em;
+ margin-left: auto; margin-right: auto; }
+li { list-style-type: upper-roman; margin-bottom: 1em; }
+li.num { list-style-type: decimal; margin-bottom: .5em; }
+.center { text-align: center; }
+.title { font-size: 1.5em; text-align: center; }
+.small { font-size: 90%; }
+.right { text-align: right; }
+
+ /* XML end ]]>*/
+ </style>
+ </head>
+<body>
+
+<pre>
+The Project Gutenberg EBook of Tom Swift in the Land of Wonders
+by Victor Appleton
+(#20 in our series by Victor Appleton)
+
+Copyright laws are changing all over the world. Be sure to check the
+copyright laws for your country before downloading or redistributing
+this or any other Project Gutenberg eBook.
+
+This header should be the first thing seen when viewing this Project
+Gutenberg file. Please do not remove it. Do not change or edit the
+header without written permission.
+
+Please read the "legal small print," and other information about the
+eBook and Project Gutenberg at the bottom of this file. Included is
+important information about your specific rights and restrictions in
+how the file may be used. You can also find out about how to make a
+donation to Project Gutenberg, and how to get involved.
+
+
+**Welcome To The World of Free Plain Vanilla Electronic Texts**
+
+**eBooks Readable By Both Humans and By Computers, Since 1971**
+
+*****These eBooks Were Prepared By Thousands of Volunteers!*****
+
+
+Title: Tom Swift in the Land of Wonders
+
+Author: Victor Appleton
+
+Release Date: Apr, 1996 [EBook #499]
+[Yes, we are more than one year ahead of schedule]
+[This file was first posted on March 11, 2002]
+[Most recently updated: March 11, 2002]
+
+Edition: 11
+
+Language: English
+
+Character set encoding: ASCII
+
+************************************************************************
+
+
+
+
+Scanned by Charles Keller with
+OmniPage Professional OCR software
+donated by Caere Corporation, 1-800-535-7226.
+Contact Mike Lough Mikel@caere.com
+</pre>
+
+<div>
+
+<hr />
+
+<h1>TOM SWIFT IN THE LAND OF WONDERS</h1>
+
+<div class="center">OR</div>
+
+<h2>The Underground Search for the Idol of Gold</h2>
+<br />
+
+<div class="center">BY</div>
+<br /><br />
+
+<div class="title">VICTOR APPLETON</div>
+<br /><br /><br />
+
+<div class="center">AUTHOR OF<br />
+<span class="small">"TOM SWIFT AND HIS MOTORCYCLE,"</span><br />
+<span class="small">"TOM SWIFT AND HIS BIG TUNNEL,"</span> <br />
+<span class="small">"THE MOVING PICTURE BOYS SERIES,"</span><br />
+<span class="small">"THE MOTION PICTURE CHUMS SERIES," ETC.</span></div>
+
+<hr />
+
+
+<h2>THE TOM SWIFT SERIES</h2>
+<br /><br />
+<ol>
+<li class="num">TOM SWIFT AND HIS MOTOR CYCLE</li>
+<li class="num">TOM SWIFT AND HIS MOTOR BOAT</li>
+<li class="num">TOM SWIFT AND HIS AIRSHIP</li>
+<li class="num">TOM SWIFT AND HIS SUBMARINE BOAT</li>
+<li class="num">TOM SWIFT AND HIS ELECTRIC RUNABOUT</li>
+<li class="num">TOM SWIFT AND HIS WIRELESS MESSAGE</li>
+<li class="num">TOM SWIFT AMONG THE DIAMOND MAKERS</li>
+<li class="num">TOM SWIFT IN THE CAVES OF ICE</li>
+<li class="num">TOM SWIFT AND HIS SKY RACER</li>
+<li class="num">TOM SWIFT AND HIS ELECTRIC RIFLE</li>
+<li class="num">TOM SWIFT IN THE CITY OF GOLD</li>
+<li class="num">TOM SWIFT AND HIS AIR GLIDER</li>
+<li class="num">TOM SWIFT IN CAPTIVITY</li>
+<li class="num">TOM SWIFT AND HIS WIZARD CAMERA</li>
+<li class="num">TOM SWIFT AND HIS GREAT SEARCHLIGHT</li>
+<li class="num">TOM SWIFT AND HIS GIANT CANNON</li>
+<li class="num">TOM SWIFT AND HIS PHOTO TELEPHONE</li>
+<li class="num">TOM SWIFT AND HIS AERIAL WARSHIP</li>
+<li class="num">TOM SWIFT AND HIS BIG TUNNEL</li>
+<li class="num">TOM SWIFT IN THE LAND OF WONDERS</li>
+<li class="num">TOM SWIFT AND HIS WAR TANK</li>
+<li class="num">TOM SWIFT AND HIS AIR SCOUT</li>
+<li class="num">TOM SWIFT AND HIS UNDERSEA SEARCH</li>
+<li class="num">TOM SWIFT AMONG THE FIRE FIGHTERS</li>
+<li class="num">TOM SWIFT AND HIS ELECTRIC LOCOMOTIVE</li>
+<li class="num">TOM SWIFT AND HIS FLYING BOAT</li>
+<li class="num">TOM SWIFT AND HIS GREAT OIL GUSHER</li>
+<li class="num">TOM SWIFT AND HIS CHEST OF SECRETS</li>
+<li class="num">TOM SWIFT AND HIS AIRLINE EXPRESS</li>
+</ol>
+
+<hr />
+
+
+<h2>Tom Swift in the Land of Wonders</h2>
+<br /><br /><br />
+
+
+
+<h2>CONTENTS</h2>
+
+
+<ol>
+<li><a href="#chapteri">A WONDERFUL STORY</a></li>
+<li><a href="#chapterii">PROFESSOR BUMPER ARRIVES</a></li>
+<li><a href="#chapteriii">BLESSINGS AND ENTHUSIASM</a></li>
+<li><a href="#chapteriv">FENIMORE BEECHER</a></li>
+<li><a href="#chapterv">THE LITTLE GREEN GOD</a></li>
+<li><a href="#chaptervi">UNPLEASANT NEWS</a></li>
+<li><a href="#chaptervii">TOM HEARS SOMETHING</a></li>
+<li><a href="#chapterviii">OFF FOR HONDURAS</a></li>
+<li><a href="#chapterix">VAL JACINTO</a></li>
+<li><a href="#chapterx">IN THE WILDS</a></li>
+<li><a href="#chapterxi">THE VAMPIRES</a></li>
+<li><a href="#chapterxii">A FALSE FRIEND</a></li>
+<li><a href="#chapterxiii">FORWARD AGAIN</a></li>
+<li><a href="#chapterxiv">A NEW GUIDE</a></li>
+<li><a href="#chapterxv">IN THE COILS</a></li>
+<li><a href="#chapterxvi">A MEETING IN THE JUNGLE</a></li>
+<li><a href="#chapterxvii">THE LOST MAP</a></li>
+<li><a href="#chapterxviii">"EL TIGRE!"</a></li>
+<li><a href="#chapterxix">POISONED ARROWS</a></li>
+<li><a href="#chapterxx">AN OLD LEGEND</a></li>
+<li><a href="#chapterxxi">THE CAVERN</a></li>
+<li><a href="#chapterxxii">THE STORM</a></li>
+<li><a href="#chapterxxiii">ENTOMBED ALIVE</a></li>
+<li><a href="#chapterxxiv">THE REVOLVING STONE</a></li>
+<li><a href="#chapterxxv">THE IDOL OF GOLD</a></li>
+</ol>
+
+<hr />
+
+
+<h2>TOM SWIFT IN THE LAND OF WONDERS</h2>
+<br /><br />
+
+
+
+
+<h2><a name="chapteri" id="chapteri">CHAPTER I</a></h2>
+
+<h3>A WONDERFUL STORY</h3>
+
+
+<p>Tom Swift, who had been slowly looking
+through the pages of a magazine, in the contents
+of which he seemed to be deeply interested,
+turned the final folio, ruffled the sheets back
+again to look at a certain map and drawing, and
+then, slapping the book down on a table before
+him, with a noise not unlike that of a shot,
+exclaimed:</p>
+
+<p>"Well, that is certainly one wonderful story!"</p>
+
+<p>"What's it about, Tom?" asked his chum, Ned
+Newton. "Something about inside baseball, or a
+new submarine that can be converted into an
+airship on short notice?"</p>
+
+<p>"Neither one, you—you unscientific heathen,"
+answered Tom, with a laugh at Ned. "Though
+that isn't saying such a machine couldn't be invented."</p>
+
+<p>"I believe you—that is if you got on its trail,"
+returned Ned, and there was warm admiration in
+his voice.</p>
+
+<p>"As for inside baseball, or outside, for that
+matter, I hardly believe I'd be able to tell third
+base from the second base, it's so long since I
+went to a game," proceeded Tom. "I've been
+too busy on that new airship stabilizer dad gave
+me an idea for. I've been working too hard,
+that's a fact. I need a vacation, and maybe a
+good baseball game——"</p>
+
+<p>He stopped and looked at the magazine he had
+so hastily slapped down. Something he had read
+in it seemed to fascinate him.</p>
+
+<p>"I wonder if it can possibly be true," he went
+on. "It sounds like the wildest dream of a
+professional sleep-walker; and yet, when I stop to
+think, it isn't much worse than some of the
+things we've gone through with, Ned."</p>
+
+<p>"Say, for the love of rice-pudding! will you
+get down to brass tacks and strike a trial
+balance? What are you talking of, anyhow? Is it
+a joke?"</p>
+
+<p>"A joke?"</p>
+
+<p>"Yes. What you just read in that magazine
+which seems to cause you so much excitement."</p>
+
+<p>"Well, it may be a joke; and yet the professor
+seems very much in earnest about it," replied
+Tom. "It certainly is one wonderful story!"</p>
+
+<p>"So you said before. Come on—the `fillium'
+is busted. Splice it, or else put in a new reel and
+on with the show. I'd like to know what's doing.
+What professor are you talking of?"</p>
+
+<p>"Professor Swyington Bumper."</p>
+
+<p>"Swyington Bumper?" and Ned's voice
+showed that his memory was a bit hazy.</p>
+
+<p>"Yes. You ought to remember him. He was
+on the steamer when I went down to Peru to
+help the Titus Brothers dig the big tunnel. That
+plotter Waddington, or some of his tools,
+dropped a bomb where it might have done us
+some injury, but Professor Bumper, who was a
+fellow passenger, on his way to South America
+to look for the lost city of Pelone, calmly picked
+up the bomb, plucked out the fuse, and saved
+us from bad injuries, if not death. And he was
+as cool about it as an ice-cream cone. Surely
+you remember!"</p>
+
+<p>"Swyington Bumper! Oh, yes, now I remember
+him," said Ned Newton. "But what has
+he got to do with a wonderful story? Has he
+written more about the lost city of Pelone? If
+he has I don't see anything so very wonderful
+in that."</p>
+
+<p>"There isn't," agreed Tom. "But this isn't
+that," and Tom picked up the magazine and
+leafed it to find the article he had been reading.</p>
+
+<p>"Let's have a look at it," suggested Ned. "You
+act as though you might be vitally interested
+in it. Maybe you're thinking of joining forces
+with the professor again, as you did when you
+dug the big tunnel."</p>
+
+<p>"Oh, no. I haven't any such idea," Tom said.
+"I've got enough work laid out now to keep me
+in Shopton for the next year. I have no notion
+of going anywhere with Professor Bumper. Yet
+I can't help being impressed by this," and,
+having found the article in the magazine to which
+he referred, he handed it to his chum.</p>
+
+<p>"Why, it's by Bumper himself!" exclaimed Ned.</p>
+
+<p>"Yes. Though there's nothing remarkable in
+that, seeing that he is constantly contributing
+articles to various publications or writing books.
+It's the story itself that's so wonderful. To
+save you the trouble of wading through a lot
+of scientific detail, which I know you don't care
+about, I'll tell you that the story is about a queer
+idol of solid gold, weighing many pounds, and,
+in consequence, of great value."</p>
+
+<p>"Of solid gold you say?" asked Ned eagerly.</p>
+
+<p>"That's it. Got on your banking air already,"
+Tom laughed. "To sum it up for you—notice
+I use the word `sum,' which is very appropriate
+for a bank—the professor has got on the track
+of another lost or hidden city. This one, the
+name of which doesn't appear, is in the Copan
+valley of Honduras, and——"</p>
+
+<p>"Copan," interrupted Ned. "It sounds like
+the name of some new floor varnish."</p>
+
+<p>"Well, it isn't, though it might be," laughed
+Tom. "Copan is a city, in the Department of
+Copan, near the boundary between Honduras and
+Guatemala. A fact I learned from the article
+and not because I remembered my geography."</p>
+
+<p>"I was going to say," remarked Ned with a
+smile, "that you were coming it rather strong
+on the school-book stuff."</p>
+
+<p>"Oh, it's all plainly written down there," and
+Tom waved toward the magazine at which Ned
+was looking. "As you'll see, if you take the
+trouble to go through it, as I did, Copan is, or
+maybe was, for all I know, one of the most
+important centers of the Mayan civilization."</p>
+
+<p>"What's Mayan?" asked Ned. "You see I'm
+going to imbibe my information by the deductive
+rather than the excavative process," he added
+with a laugh.</p>
+
+<p>"I see," laughed Tom. "Well, Mayan refers
+to the Mayas, an aboriginal people of Yucatan.
+The Mayas had a peculiar civilization of their
+own, thousands of years ago, and their calendar
+system was so involved——"</p>
+
+<p>"Never mind about dates," again interrupted
+Ned. "Get down to brass tacks. I'm willing
+to take your word for it that there's a Copan
+valley in Honduras. But what has your friend
+Professor Bumper to do with it?"</p>
+
+<p>"This. He has come across some old
+manuscripts, or ancient document records, referring
+to this valley, and they state, according to this
+article he has written for the magazine, that
+somewhere in the valley is a wonderful city,
+traces of which have been found twenty to forty
+feet below the surface, on which great trees are
+growing, showing that the city was covered
+hundreds, if not thousands, of years ago."</p>
+
+<p>"But where does the idol of gold come in?"</p>
+
+<p>"I'm coming to that," said Tom. "Though,
+if Professor Bumper has his way, the idol will
+be coming out instead of coming in."</p>
+
+<p>"You mean he wants to get it and take it
+away from the Copan valley, Tom?"</p>
+
+<p>"That's it, Ned. It has great value not only
+from the amount of pure gold that is in it, but
+as an antique. I fancy the professor is more
+interested in that aspect of it. But he's written
+a wonderful story, telling how he happened to
+come across the ancient manuscripts in the tomb
+of some old Indian whose mummy he unearthed
+on a trip to Central America.</p>
+
+<p>"Then he tells of the trouble he had in
+discovering how to solve the key to the translation
+code; but when he did, he found a great story
+unfolded to him.</p>
+
+<p>"This story has to do with the hidden city,
+and tells of the ancient civilization of those who
+lived in the Copan valley thousands of years ago.
+The people held this idol of gold to be their
+greatest treasure, and they put to death many of
+other tribes who sought to steal it."</p>
+
+<p>"Whew!" whistled Ned. "That IS some yarn.
+But what is Professor Bumper going to do about it?"</p>
+
+<p>"I don't know. The article seems to be written
+with an idea of interesting scientists and
+research societies, so that they will raise money
+to conduct a searching expedition.</p>
+
+<p>"Perhaps by this time the party may be
+organized—this magazine is several months old.
+I have been so busy on my stabilizer patent that
+I haven't kept up with current literature. Take
+it home and read it! Ned. That is if you're
+through telling me about my affairs," for Ned,
+who had formerly worked in the Shopton bank,
+had recently been made general financial man-
+ager of the interests of Tom and his father. The
+two were inventors and proverbially poor business
+men, though they had amassed a fortune.</p>
+
+<p>"Your financial affairs are all right, Tom," said
+Ned. "I have just been going over the books,
+and I'll submit a detailed report later."</p>
+
+<p>The telephone bell rang and Tom picked up
+the instrument from the desk. As he answered in
+the usual way and then listened a moment, a
+strange look came over his face.</p>
+
+<p>"Well, this certainly is wonderful!" he exclaimed,
+in much the same manner as when he had finished
+reading the article about the idol. "It certainly
+is a strange coincidence," he added,
+speaking in an aside to Ned while he himself
+still listened to what was being told to him
+over the telephone wire.</p>
+
+<hr />
+
+<h2><a name="chapterii" id="chapterii">CHAPTER II</a></h2>
+
+<h3>PROFESSOR BUMPER ARRIVES</h3>
+
+
+<p>"What's the matter, Tom? What is it?"
+asked Ned Newton, attracted by the strange
+manner of his chum at the telephone. "Has
+anything happened?"</p>
+
+<p>But the young inventor was too busy listening
+to the unseen speaker to answer his chum,
+even if he heard what Ned remarked, which is
+doubtful.</p>
+
+<p>"Well, I might as well wait until he is
+through," mused Ned, as he started to leave the
+room. Then as Tom motioned to him to remain,
+he murmured: "He may have something
+to say to me later. But I wonder who is talking
+to him."</p>
+
+<p>There was no way of finding out, however,
+until Tom had a chance to talk to Ned, and at
+present the young scientist was eagerly listening
+to what came over the wire. Occasionally Ned
+could hear him say:</p>
+
+<p>"You don't tell me! That is surprising! Yes
+—yes! Of course if it's true it means a big
+thing, I can understand that. What's that? No,
+I couldn't make a promise like that. I'm sorry,
+but——"</p>
+
+<p>Then the person at the other end of the wire
+must have plunged into something very interesting
+and absorbing, for Tom did not again
+interrupt by interjected remarks.</p>
+
+<p>Tom. Swift, as has been said, was an inventor,
+as was his father. Mr. Swift was now rather old
+and feeble, taking only a nominal part in the
+activities of the firm made up of himself and his
+son. But his inventions were still used, many
+of them being vital to the business and trade of
+this country.</p>
+
+<p>Tom and his father lived in the village of
+Shopton, New York, and their factories covered
+many acres of ground. Those who wish to read
+of the earliest activities of Tom in the inventive
+line are referred to the initial volume, "Tom
+Swift and His Motor Cycle." From then on he
+and his father had many and exciting adventures.
+In a motor boat, an airship, and a submarine
+respectively the young inventor had gone through
+many perils. On some of the trips his chum,
+Ned Newton, accompanied him, and very often
+in the party was a Mr. Wakefield Damon, who
+had a curious habit of "blessing" everything
+that happened to strike his fancy.</p>
+
+<p>Besides Tom and his father, the Swift household
+was made up of Eradicate Sampson, a colored
+man-of-all-work, who, with his mule Boomerang,
+did what he could to keep the grounds
+around the house in order. There was also Mrs.
+Baggert, the housekeeper, Tom's mother being
+dead. Mr. Damon, living in a neighboring town,
+was a frequent visitor in the Swift home.</p>
+
+<p>Mary Nestor, a girl of Shopton, might also
+be mentioned. She and Tom were more than
+just good friends. Tom had an idea that some
+day——. But there, I promised not to tell that
+part, at least until the young people themselves
+were ready to have a certain fact announced.</p>
+
+<p>From one activity to another had Tom Swift
+gone, now constructing some important invention
+for himself, as among others, when he made
+the photo-telephone, or developed a great
+searchlight which he presented to the Government
+for use in detecting smugglers on the
+border.</p>
+
+<p>The book immediately preceding this is called
+"Tom Swift and His Bit, Tunnel," and deals
+with the efforts of the young inventor to help a
+firm of contractors penetrate a mountain in
+Peru. How this was done and how, incidentally,
+the lost city of Pelone was discovered, bringing
+joy to the heart of Professor Swyington
+Bumper, will be found fully set forth in the book.</p>
+
+<p>Tom had been back from the Peru trip for
+some months, when we again find him interested
+in some of the work of Professor Bumper,
+as set forth in the magazine mentioned.</p>
+
+<p>"Well, he certainly is having some conversation,"
+reflected Ned, as, after more than five
+minutes, Tom's ear was still at the receiver of
+the instrument, into the transmitter of which
+he had said only a few words.</p>
+
+<p>"All right," Tom finally answered, as he hung
+the receiver up, "I'll be here," and then he turned
+to Ned, whose curiosity had been growing with
+the telephone talk, and remarked:</p>
+
+<p>"That certainly was wonderful!"</p>
+
+<p>"What was?" asked Ned. "Do you think I'm
+a mind reader to be able to guess?"</p>
+
+<p>"No, indeed! I beg your pardon. I'll tell you
+at once. But I couldn't break away. It was
+too important. To whom do you think I was
+talking just then?"</p>
+
+<p>"I can imagine almost any one, seeing I know
+something of what you have done. It might be
+almost anybody from some person you met up
+in the caves of ice to a red pygmy from the
+wilds of Africa."</p>
+
+<p>"I'm afraid neither of them would be quite
+up to telephone talk yet," laughed Tom. "No,
+this was the gentleman who wrote that interesting
+article about the idol of gold," and he
+motioned to the magazine Ned held in his hand.</p>
+
+<p>"You don't mean Professor Bumper!"</p>
+
+<p>"That's just whom I do mean."</p>
+
+<p>"What did he want? Where did he call
+from?"</p>
+
+<p>"He wants me to help organize an expedition
+to go to Central America—to the Copan valley,
+to be exact—to look for this somewhat mythical
+idol of gold. Incidentally the professor will
+gather in any other antiques of more or less
+value, if he can find any, and he hopes, even if he
+doesn't find the idol, to get enough historical
+material for half a dozen books, to say nothing
+of magazine articles."</p>
+
+<p>"Where did he call from; did you say?"</p>
+
+<p>"I didn't say. But it was a long-distance call
+from New York. The Professor stopped off
+there on his way from Boston, where he has been
+lecturing before some society. And now he's
+coming here to see me," finished Tom.</p>
+
+<p>"What! Is he going to lecture here?" cried
+Ned. "If he is, and spouts a whole lot of that
+bone-dry stuff about the ancient Mayan civilization
+and their antiquities, with side lights on
+how the old-time Indians used to scalp their
+enemies, I'm going to the moving pictures! I'm
+willing to be your financial manager, Tom Swift,
+but please don't ask me to be a high-brow. I
+wasn't built for that."</p>
+
+<p>"Nor I, Ned. The professor isn't going to
+lecture. He's only going to talk, he says."</p>
+
+<p>"What about?"</p>
+
+<p>"He's going to try to induce me to join his
+expedition to the Copan valley."</p>
+
+<p>"Do you feel inclined to go?"</p>
+
+<p>"No, Ned, I do not. I've got too many other
+irons in the fire. I shall have to give the professor
+a polite but firm refusal."</p>
+
+<p>"Well, maybe you're right, Tom; and yet that
+idol of gold—GOLD—weighing how many pounds
+did you say?"</p>
+
+<p>"Oh, you're thinking of its money value, Ned,
+old man!"</p>
+
+<p>"Yes, I'd like to see what a big chunk of gold
+like that would bring. It must be quite a nugget.
+But I'm not likely to get a glimpse of it
+if you don't go with the professor."</p>
+
+<p>"I don't see how I can go, Ned. But come
+over and meet the delightful gentleman when
+he arrives. I expect him day after to-morrow."</p>
+
+<p>"I'll be here," promised Ned; and then he
+went downtown to attend to some matters con-
+nected with his new duties, which were much
+less irksome than those he had had when he
+had been in the bank.</p>
+
+<p>"Well, Tom, have you heard any more about
+your friend?" asked Ned, two days later, as he
+came to the Swift home with some papers needing
+the signature of the young inventor and his
+father.</p>
+
+<p>"You mean——?"</p>
+
+<p>"Professor Bumper."</p>
+
+<p>"No, I haven't heard from him since he
+telephoned. But I guess he'll be here all right.
+He's very punctual. Did you see anything of
+my giant Koku as you came in?"</p>
+
+<p>"Yes, he and Eradicate were having an
+argument about who should move a heavy casting
+from one of the shops. Rad wanted to do it
+all alone, but Koku said he was like a baby now."</p>
+
+<p>"Poor Rad is getting old," said Tom with a
+sigh. "But he has been very faithful. He and
+Koku never seem to get along well together."</p>
+
+<p>Koku was an immense man, a veritable giant,
+one of two whom Tom had brought back with
+him after an exciting trip to a strange land. The
+giant's strength was very useful to the young
+inventor.</p>
+
+<p>"Now Tom, about this business of leasing to
+the English Government the right to manufacture
+that new explosive of yours," began Ned,
+plunging into the business at hand. "I think
+if you stick out a little you can get a better
+royalty price."</p>
+
+<p>"But I don't want to gouge 'em, Ned. I'm
+satisfied with a fair profit. The trouble with
+you is you think too much of money. Now——"</p>
+
+<p>At that moment a voice was heard in the hall
+of the house saying:</p>
+
+<p>"Now, my dear lady, don't trouble yourself.
+I can find my way in to Tom Swift perfectly well
+by myself, and while I appreciate your courtesy
+I do not want to trouble you."</p>
+
+<p>"No, don't come, Mrs. Baggert," added another
+voice. "Bless my hat band, I think I know my
+way about the house by this time!"</p>
+
+<p>"Mr. Damon!" ejaculated Ned.</p>
+
+<p>"And Professor Bumper is with him," added
+Tom. "Come in!" he cried, opening the hall
+door, to confront a bald-headed man who stood
+peering at our hero with bright snapping eyes,
+like those of some big bird spying out the land
+from afar. "Come in, Professor Bumper; and
+you too, Mr. Damon!"</p>
+
+<hr />
+
+<h2><a name="chapteriii" id="chapteriii">CHAPTER III</a></h2>
+
+<h3>BLESSINGS AND ENTHUSIASM</h3>
+
+
+<p>Greetings and inquiries as to health having
+been passed, not without numerous blessings on
+the part of Mr. Damon, the little party gathered
+in the library of the home of Tom Swift sat
+down and looked at one another.</p>
+
+<p>On Professor Bumper's face there was, plainly
+to be seen, a look of expectation, and it seemed
+to be shared by Mr. Damon, who seemed eager
+to burst into enthusiastic talk. On the other
+hand Tom Swift appeared a bit indifferent.</p>
+
+<p>Ned himself admitted that he was frankly
+curious. The story of the big idol of gold had
+occupied his thoughts for many hours.</p>
+
+<p>"Well, I'm glad to see you both," said Tom
+again. "You got here all right, I see, Professor
+Bumper. But I didn't expect you to meet and
+bring Mr. Damon with you."</p>
+
+<p>"I met him on the train," explained the author
+of the book on the lost city of Pelone, as well
+as books on other antiquities. "I had no
+expectation of seeing him, and we were both
+surprised when we met on the express."</p>
+
+<p>"It stopped at Waterfield, Tom," explained
+Mr. Damon, "which it doesn't usually do, being
+an aristocratic sort of train, not given even to
+hesitating at our humble little town. There
+were some passengers to get off, which caused
+the flier to stop, I suppose. And, as I wanted
+to come over to see you, I got aboard."</p>
+
+<p>"Glad you did," voiced Tom.</p>
+
+<p>"Then I happened to see Professor Bumper a
+few seats ahead of me," went on Mr. Damon,
+"and, bless my scarfpin! he was coming to see
+you also."</p>
+
+<p>"Well, I'm doubly glad," answered Tom.</p>
+
+<p>"So here we are," went on Mr. Damon, "and
+you've simply got to come, Tom Swift. You
+must go with us!" and Mr. Damon, in his
+enthusiasm, banged his fist down on the table with
+such force that he knocked some books to the floor.</p>
+
+<p>Koku, the giant, who was in the hall, opened
+the door and in his imperfect English asked:</p>
+
+<p>"Master Tom knock for him bigs man?"</p>
+
+<p>"No," answered Tom with a smile, "I didn't knock
+or call you, Koku. Some books fell, that is all."</p>
+
+<p>"Massa Tom done called fo' me, dat's what he done!"
+broke in the petulant voice of Eradicate.</p>
+
+<p>"No, Rad, I don't need anything," Tom said.
+"Though you might make a pitcher of lemonade.
+It's rather warm."</p>
+
+<p>"Right away, Massa Tom! Right away!" cried
+the old colored man, eager to be of service.</p>
+
+<p>"Me help, too!" rumbled Koku, in his deep
+voice. "Me punch de lemons!" and away he
+hurried after Eradicate, fearful lest the old
+servant do all the honors.</p>
+
+<p>"Same old Rad and Koku," observed Mr.
+Damon with a smile. "But now, Tom, while
+they're making the lemonade, let's get down to
+business. You're going with us, of course!"</p>
+
+<p>"Where?" asked Tom, more from habit than
+because he did not know.</p>
+
+<p>"Where? Why to Honduras, of course! After
+the idol of gold! Why, bless my fountain pen,
+it's the most wonderful story I ever heard of!
+You've read Professor Bumper's article, of
+course. He told me you had. I read it on the
+train coming over. He also told me about it,
+and—— Well, I'm going with him, Tom Swift.</p>
+
+<p>"And think of all the adventures that may
+befall us! We'll get lost in buried cities, ride down
+raging torrents on a raft, fall over a cliff maybe
+and be rescued. Why, it makes me feel quite
+young again!" and Mr. Damon arose, to pace
+excitedly up and down the room.</p>
+
+<p>Up to this time Professor Bumper had said
+very little. He had sat still in his chair
+listening to Mr. Damon. But now that the latter had
+ceased, at least for a time, Tom and Ned looked
+toward the scientist.</p>
+
+<p>"I understand, Tom," he said, "that you read
+my article in the magazine, about the possibility
+of locating some of the lost and buried cities of
+Honduras?"</p>
+
+<p>"Yes, Ned and I each read it. It was quite
+wonderful."</p>
+
+<p>"And yet there are more wonders to tell," went
+on the professor. "I did not give all the details
+in that article. I will tell you some of them. I
+have brought copies of the documents with me,"
+and he opened a small valise and took out several
+bundles tied with pink tape.</p>
+
+<p>"As Mr. Damon said," he went on while
+arranging his papers, "he met me on the train, and
+he was so taken by the story of the idol of gold
+that he agreed to accompany me to Central America."</p>
+
+<p>"On one condition!" put in the eccentric man.</p>
+
+<p>"What's that? You didn't make any conditions
+while we were talking," said the scientist.</p>
+
+<p>"Yes, I said I'd go if Tom Swift did."</p>
+
+<p>"Oh, yes. You did say that. But I don't call
+that a condition, for of course Tom Swift will go.
+Now let me tell you something more than I could
+impart over the telephone.</p>
+
+<p>"Soon after I called you up, Tom—and it was
+quite a coincidence that it should have been at a
+time when you had just finished my magazine
+article. Soon after that, as I was saying, I
+arranged to come on to Shopton. And now I'm
+glad we're all here together.</p>
+
+<p>"But how comes it, Ned Newton, that you are
+not in the bank?"</p>
+
+<p>"I've left there," explained Ned.</p>
+
+<p>"He's now general financial man for the Swift
+Company," Tom explained. "My father and I
+found that we could not look after the inventing
+and experimental end, and money matters, too,
+and as Ned had had considerable experience this
+way we made him take over those worries," and
+Tom laughed genially.</p>
+
+<p>"No worries at all, as far as the Swift
+Company is concerned," returned Ned.</p>
+
+<p>"Well, I guess you earn your salary," laughed
+Tom. "But now, Professor Bumper, let's hear
+from you. Is there anything more about this
+idol of gold that you can tell us?"</p>
+
+<p>"Plenty, Tom, plenty. I could talk all day,
+and not get to the end of the story. But a lot
+of it would be scientific detail that might be too
+dry for you in spite of this excellent lemonade."</p>
+
+<p>Between them Koku and Eradicate had managed
+to make a pitcher of the beverage, though
+Mrs. Baggert, the housekeeper, told Tom afterward
+that the two had a quarrel in the kitchen
+as to who should squeeze the lemons, the giant
+insisting that he had the better right to "punch"
+them.</p>
+
+<p>"So, not to go into too many details," went on
+the professor, "I'll just give you a brief outline
+of this story of the idol of gold.</p>
+
+<p>"Honduras, as you of course know, is a
+republic of Central America, and it gets its name
+from something that happened on the fourth
+voyage of Columbus. He and his men had had
+days of weary sailing and had sought in vain
+for shallow water in which they might come to
+an anchorage. Finally they reached the point
+now known as Cape Gracias-a-Dios, and when
+they let the anchor go, and found that in a short
+time it came to rest on the floor of the ocean,
+some one of the sailors—perhaps Columbus himself—
+is said to have remarked:</p>
+
+<p>"`Thank the Lord, we have left the deep
+waters (honduras)' that being the Spanish word
+for unfathomable depths. So Honduras it was
+called, and has been to this day.</p>
+
+<p>"It is a queer land with many traces of an
+ancient civilization, a civilization which I
+believe dates back farther than some in the far
+East. On the sculptured stones in the Copan
+valley there are characters which seem to
+resemble very ancient writing, but this pictographic
+writing is largely untranslatable.</p>
+
+<p>"Honduras, I might add, is about the size of
+our state of Ohio. It is rather an elevated tableland,
+though there are stretches of tropical
+forest, but it is not so tropical a country as many
+suppose it to be. There is much gold scattered
+throughout Honduras, though of late it has not
+been found in large quantities.</p>
+
+<p>"In the old days, however, before the Spaniards
+came, it was plentiful, so much, so that the
+natives made idols of it. And it is one of the
+largest of these idols—by name Quitzel—that I
+am going to seek."</p>
+
+<p>"Do you know where it is?" asked Ned.</p>
+
+<p>"Well, it isn't locked up in a safe deposit box,
+of that I'm sure," laughed the professor. "No,
+I don't know exactly where it is, except that it
+is somewhere in an ancient and buried city
+known as Kurzon. If I knew exactly where
+it was there wouldn't be much fun in going after
+it. And if it was known to others it would have
+been taken away long ago.</p>
+
+<p>"No, we've got to hunt for the idol of gold
+in this land of wonders where I hope soon to be.
+Later on I'll show you the documents that put
+me on the track of this idol. Enough now to
+show you an old map I found, or, rather, a copy
+of it, and some of the papers that tell of the idol,"
+and he spread out his packet of papers on the
+table in front of him, his eyes shining with
+excitement and pleasure. Mr. Damon, too, leaned
+eagerly forward.</p>
+
+<p>"So, Tom Swift," went on the professor, "I
+come to you for help in this matter. I want
+you to aid me in organizing an expedition to go
+to Honduras after the idol of gold. Will you?"</p>
+
+<p>"I'll help you, of course," said Tom. "You
+may use any of my inventions you choose—my
+airships, my motor boats and submarines, even
+my giant cannon if you think you can take it
+with you. And as for the money part, Ned will
+arrange that for you. But as for going with you
+myself, it is out of the question. I can't. No
+Honduras for me!"</p>
+
+<hr />
+
+<h2><a name="chapteriv" id="chapteriv">CHAPTER IV</a></h2>
+
+<h3>FENIMORE BEECHER</h3>
+
+
+<p>Had Tom Swift's giant cannon been discharged
+somewhere in the vicinity of his home it could
+have caused but little more astonishment to
+Mr. Damon and Professor Bumper than did the
+simple announcement of the young inventor.
+The professor seemed to shrink back in his chair,
+collapsing like an automobile tire when the air
+is let out. As for Mr. Damon he jumped up and
+cried:</p>
+
+<p>"Bless my——!"</p>
+
+<p>But that is as far as he got—at least just then.
+He did not seem to know what to bless, but he
+looked as though he would have liked to include
+most of the universe.</p>
+
+<p>"Surely you don't mean it, Tom Swift,"
+gasped Professor Bumper at length. "Won't
+you come with us?"</p>
+
+<p>"No," said Tom, slowly. "Really I can't go.
+I'm working on an invention of a new aeroplane
+stabilizer, and if I go now it will be just at a
+time when I am within striking distance of success.
+And the stabilizer is very much needed."</p>
+
+<p>"If it's a question of making a profit on it,
+Tom," began Mr. Damon, "I can let you have
+some money until——"</p>
+
+<p>"Oh, no! It isn't the money!" cried Tom.
+"Don't think that for a moment. You see the
+European war has called for the use of a large
+number of aeroplanes, and as the pilots of them
+frequently have to fight, and so can not give their
+whole attention to the machines, some form of
+automatic stabilizer is needed to prevent them
+turning turtle, or going off at a wrong tangent.</p>
+
+<p>"So I have been working out a sort of
+modified gyroscope, and it seems to answer the
+purpose. I have already received advance orders
+for a number of my devices from abroad, and as
+they are destined to save lives I feel that I ought
+to keep on with my work.</p>
+
+<p>"I'd like to go, don't misunderstand me, but
+I can't go at this time. It is out of the question.
+If you wait a year, or maybe six months——"</p>
+
+<p>"No, it is impossible to wait, Tom," declared
+Professor Bumper.</p>
+
+<p>"Is it so important then to hurry?" asked Mr.
+Damon. "You did not mention that to me, Professor
+Bumper."</p>
+
+<p>"No, I did not have time. There are so many ends
+to my concerns. But, Tom Swift, you simply must go!"</p>
+
+<p>"I can't, my dear professor, much as I should like to."</p>
+
+<p>"But, Tom, think of it!" cried Mr. Damon,
+who was as much excited as was the little bald-headed
+scientist. "You never saw such an idol
+of gold as this. What's its name?" and he
+looked questioningly at the professor.</p>
+
+<p>"Quitzel the idol is called," supplied Professor
+Bumper. "And it is supposed to be in a
+buried city named Kurzon, somewhere in the
+Sierra de Merendon range of mountains, in the
+vicinity of the Copan valley. Copan is a city,
+or maybe we'll find it only a town when we get
+there, and it is not far from the borders of
+Guatemala.</p>
+
+<p>"Tom, if I could show you the translations I
+have made of the ancient documents, referring
+to this idol and the wonderful city over which
+it kept guard, I'm sure you'd come with us."</p>
+
+<p>"Please don't tempt me," Tom said with a
+laugh. "I'm only too anxious to go, and if it
+wasn't for the stabilizer I'd be with you in a
+minute. But—— Well, you'll have to get along
+without me. Maybe I can join you later."</p>
+
+<p>"What's this about the idol keeping guard
+over the ancient city?" asked Ned, for he was
+interested in strange stories.</p>
+
+<p>"It seems," explained the professor, "that in
+the early days there was a strange race of people,
+inhabiting Central America, with a somewhat
+high civilization, only traces of which remained
+when the Spaniards came.</p>
+
+<p>"But these traces, and such hieroglyphics, or,
+to be more exact pictographs, as I have been able
+to decipher from the old documents, tell of one
+country, or perhaps it was only a city, over which
+this great golden idol of Quitzel presided.</p>
+
+<p>"There is in some of these papers a description
+of the idol, which is not exactly a beauty,
+judged from modern standards. But the main
+fact is that it is made of solid gold, and may
+weigh anywhere from one to two tons."</p>
+
+<p>"Two tons of gold!" cried New Newton. "Why,
+if that's the case it would be worth——" and
+he fell to doing a sum in mental arithmetic.</p>
+
+<p>"I am not so concerned about the monetary
+value of the statue as I am about its antiquity,"
+went on Professor Bumper. "There are other
+statues in this buried city of Kurzon, and though
+they may not be so valuable they will give me
+a wealth of material for my research work."</p>
+
+<p>"How do you know there are other statues?"
+asked Mr. Damon.</p>
+
+<p>"Because my documents tell me so. It was
+because the people made other idols, in opposition,
+as it were, to Quitzel, that their city or
+country was destroyed. At least that is the
+legend. Quitzel, so the story goes, wanted to be
+the chief god, and when the image of a rival was
+set up in the temple near him, he toppled over
+in anger, and part of the temple went with him,
+the whole place being buried in ruins. All the
+inhabitants were killed, and trace of the ancient
+city was lost forever. No, I hope not forever,
+for I expect to find it."</p>
+
+<p>"If all the people were killed, and the city
+buried, how did the story of Quitzel become
+known?" asked Mr. Damon.</p>
+
+<p>"One only of the priests in the temple of
+Quitzel escaped and set down part of the tale," said
+the professor. "It is his narrative, or one based
+on it, that I have given you."</p>
+
+<p>"And now, what I want to do, is to go and
+make a search for this buried city. I have fairly
+good directions as to how it may be reached.
+We will have little difficulty in getting to
+Honduras, as there are fruit steamers frequently
+sailing. Of course going into the interior—to the
+Copan valley—is going to be harder. But an
+expedition from a large college was recently
+there and succeeded, after much labor, in excavating
+part of a buried city. Whether or not
+it was Kurzon I am unable to say.</p>
+
+<p>"But if there was one ancient city there must
+be more. So I want to make an attempt. And
+I counted on you, Tom. You have had considerable
+experience in strange quarters of the earth,
+and you're just the one to help me. I don't
+need money, for I have interested a certain
+millionaire, and my own college will put up part
+of the funds."</p>
+
+<p>"Oh, it isn't a question of money," said Tom.
+"It's time."</p>
+
+<p>"That's just what it is with me!" exclaimed
+Professor Bumper. "I haven't any time to lose.
+My rivals may, even now, be on their way to Honduras!"</p>
+
+<p>"Your rivals!" cried Tom. "You didn't say anything about them!"</p>
+
+<p>"No, I believe I didn't There were so many
+other things to talk about. But there is a rival
+archaeologist who would ask nothing better than
+to get ahead of me in this matter. He is younger
+than I am, and youth is a big asset nowadays."</p>
+
+<p>"Pooh! You're not old!" cried Mr. Damon.
+"You're no older than I am, and I'm still young.
+I'm a lot younger than some of these boys who
+are afraid to tackle a trip through a tropical
+wilderness," and he playfully nudged Tom in the ribs.</p>
+
+<p>"I'm not a bit afraid!" retorted the young inventor.</p>
+
+<p>"No, I know you're not," laughed Mr. Damon.
+"But I've got to say something, Tom, to stir you
+up. Ned, how about you? Would you go?"</p>
+
+<p>"I can't, unless Tom does. You see I'm his
+financial man now."</p>
+
+<p>"There you are, Tom Swift!" cried Mr. Damon.
+"You see you are holding back a number
+of persons just because you don't want to go."</p>
+
+<p>"I certainly wouldn't like to go without Tom,"
+said the professor slowly. "I really need his
+help. You know, Tom, we would never have
+found the city of Pelone if it had not been for
+you and your marvelous powder. The conditions
+in the Copan valley are likely to be still
+more difficult to overcome, and I feel that I risk
+failure without your young energy and your
+inventive mind to aid in the work and to suggest
+possible means of attaining our object. Come,
+Tom, reconsider, and decide to make the trip."</p>
+
+<p>"And my promise to go was dependent on
+Tom's agreement to accompany us," said Mr.
+Damon</p>
+
+<p>"Come on!" urged the professor, much as one boy
+might urge another to take part in a ball game.
+"Don't let my rival get ahead of me."</p>
+
+<p>"I wouldn't like to see that," Tom said slowly.
+"Who is he—any one I know?"</p>
+
+<p>"I don't believe so, Tom. He's connected
+with a large, new college that has plenty of
+money to spend on explorations and research
+work. Beecher is his name—Fenimore Beecher."</p>
+
+<p>"Beecher!" exclaimed Tom, and there was
+such a change in his manner that his friends
+could not help noticing it. He jumped to his
+feet, his eyes snapping, and he looked eagerly
+and anxiously at Professor Bumper.</p>
+
+<p>"Did you say his name was Fenimore Beecher?"
+Tom asked in a tense voice.</p>
+
+<p>"That's what it is—Professor Fenimore Beecher.
+He is really a learned young man, and
+thoroughly in earnest, though I do not like his
+manner. But he is trying to get ahead of me,
+which may account for my feeling."</p>
+
+<p>Tom Swift did not answer. Instead he hurried
+from the room with a murmured apology.</p>
+
+<p>"I'll be back in about five minutes," he said,
+as he went out.</p>
+
+<p>"Well, what's up now?" asked Mr. Damon of
+Ned, as the young inventor departed. "What
+set him off that way?"</p>
+
+<p>"The mention of Beecher's name, evidently.
+Though I never heard him mention such a person
+before."</p>
+
+<p>"Nor did I ever hear Professor Beecher speak
+of Tom," said the bald-headed scientist. "Well,
+we'll just have to wait until——"</p>
+
+<p>At that moment Tom came back into the room.</p>
+
+<p>"Gentlemen," he said, "I have reconsidered my
+refusal to go to the Copan valley after the idol
+of gold. I'm going with you!"</p>
+
+<p>"Good!" cried Professor Bumper.</p>
+
+<p>"Fine!" ejaculated Mr. Damon. "Bless my time-table!
+I thought you'd come around, Tom Swift."</p>
+
+<p>"But what about your stabilizer?" asked Ned.</p>
+
+<p>"I was just talking to my father about it,'
+the young inventor replied. "He will be able
+to put the finishing touches on it. So I'll leave
+it with him. As soon as I can get ready I'll go,
+since you say haste is necessary, Professor Bumper."</p>
+
+<p>"It is, if we are to get ahead of Beecher."</p>
+
+<p>"Then we'll get ahead of him!" cried Tom.
+"I'm with you now from the start to the finish.
+I'll show him what I can do!" he added, while
+Ned and the others wondered at the sudden
+change in their friend's manner.</p>
+
+<hr />
+
+
+<h2><a name="chapterv" id="chapterv">CHAPTER V</a></h2>
+
+<h3>THE LITTLE GREEN GOD</h3>
+
+
+<p>"Tom how soon can we go?" asked Professor
+Bumper, as he began arranging his papers, maps
+and documents ready to place them back in the
+valise.</p>
+
+<p>"Within a week, if you want to start that
+soon."</p>
+
+<p>"The sooner the better. A week will suit me.
+I don't know just what Beecher's plans are, but,
+he may try to get on the ground first. Though,
+without boasting, I may say that he has not had
+as much experience as I have had, thanks to
+you, Tom, when you helped me find the lost city
+of Pelone."</p>
+
+<p>"Well, I hope we'll be as successful this time,"
+murmured Tom. "I don't want to see Beecher
+beat you."</p>
+
+<p>"I didn't know you knew him, Tom," said the
+professor.</p>
+
+<p>"Oh, yes, I have met him. once," and there
+was something in Tom's manner, though he tried
+to speak indifferently, that made Ned believe
+there was more behind his chum's sudden change
+of determination than had yet appeared.</p>
+
+<p>"He never mentioned you," went on Professor
+Bumper; "yet the last time I saw him I said I
+was coming to see you, though I did not tell
+him why."</p>
+
+<p>"No, he wouldn't be likely to speak of me,"
+said Tom significantly.</p>
+
+<p>"Well, if that's all settled, I guess I'll go back
+home and pack up," said Mr. Damon, making a
+move to depart.</p>
+
+<p>"There's no special rush," Tom said. "We
+won't leave for a week. I can't get ready in
+much less time than that."</p>
+
+<p>"Bless my socks! I know that," ejaculated Mr.
+Damon. "But if I get my things packed I can
+go to a hotel to stay while my wife is away. She
+might take a notion to come home unexpectedly,
+and, though she is a dear, good soul, she doesn't
+altogether approve of my going off on these wild
+trips with you, Tom Swift. But if I get all
+packed, and clear out, she can't find me and she
+can't hold me back. She is visiting her mother
+now. I can send her a wire from Kurzon after
+I get there."</p>
+
+<p>"I don't believe the telegraph there is working,"
+laughed Professor Bumper. "But suit
+yourself. I must go back to New York to arrange
+for the goods we'll have to take with us.
+In a week, Tom, we'll start."</p>
+
+<p>"You must stay to dinner," Tom said. "You
+can't get a train now anyhow, and father wants
+to meet you again. He's pretty well, considering
+his age. And he's much better I verily
+believe since I said I'd turn over to him the task
+of finishing the stabilizer. He likes to work."</p>
+
+<p>"We'll stay and take the night train back,"
+agreed Mr. Damon. "It will be like old times,
+Tom," he went on, "traveling off together into
+the wilds. Central America is pretty wild, isn't
+it?" he asked, as if in fear of being disappointed!
+on that score.</p>
+
+<p>"Oh, it's wild enough to suit any one,"
+answered Professor Bumper.</p>
+
+<p>"Well, now to settle a few details," observed
+Tom. "Ned, what is the situation as regards the
+financial affairs of my father and myself? Nothing
+will come to grief if we go away, will there?"</p>
+
+<p>"I guess not, Tom. But are you going to take
+your father with you?"</p>
+
+<p>"No, of course not."</p>
+
+<p>"But you spoke of `we.' "</p>
+
+<p>"I meant you and I are going."</p>
+
+<p>"Me, Tom?"</p>
+
+<p>"Sure, you! I wouldn't think of leaving you
+behind. You want Ned along, don't you, Professor?"</p>
+
+<p>"Of course. It will be an ideal party—we
+four. We'll have to take natives when we get
+to Honduras, and make up a mule pack-train for
+the interior. I had some thoughts of asking
+you to take an airship along, but it might frighten
+the Indians, and I shall have to depend on
+them for guides, as well as for porters. So it
+will be an old-fashioned expedition, in a way."</p>
+
+<p>Mr. Swift came in at this point to meet his old
+friends.</p>
+
+<p>"The boy needs a little excitement," he said.
+"He's been puttering over that stabilizer invention
+too long. I can finish the model for him
+in a very short time."</p>
+
+<p>Professor Bumper told Mr. Swift something
+about the proposed trip, while Mr. Damon went
+out with Tom and Ned to one of the shops to
+look at a new model aeroplane the young inventor
+had designed.</p>
+
+<p>There was a merry party around the table at
+dinner, though now and then Ned noticed that
+Tom had an abstracted and preoccupied air.</p>
+
+<p>"Thinking about the idol of gold?" asked Ned
+in a whisper to his chum, when they were about
+to leave the table.</p>
+
+<p>"The idol of gold? Oh, yes! Of course! It
+will be great if we can bring that back with us."
+But the manner in which he said this made Ned
+feel sure that Tom had had other thoughts,
+and that he had used a little subterfuge in his
+answer.</p>
+
+<p>Ned was right, as he proved for himself a little
+later, when, Mr. Damon and the professor having
+gone home, the young financial secretary
+took his friend to a quiet corner and asked:</p>
+
+<p>"What's the matter, Tom?"</p>
+
+<p>"Matter? What do you mean?"</p>
+
+<p>"I mean what made you make up your mind
+so quickly to go on this expedition when you
+heard Beecher was going?"</p>
+
+<p>"Oh—er—well, you wouldn't want to see our
+old friend Professor Bumper left, would you,
+after he had worked out the secret of the idol
+of gold? You wouldn't want some young
+whipper-snapper to beat him in the race, would
+you, Ned?"</p>
+
+<p>"No, of course not."</p>
+
+<p>"Neither would I. That's why I changed my
+mind. This Beecher isn't going to get that idol
+if I can stop him!"</p>
+
+<p>"You seem rather bitter against him."</p>
+
+<p>"Bitter? Oh, not at all. I simply don't want
+to see my friends disappointed."</p>
+
+<p>"Then Beecher isn't a friend of yours?"</p>
+
+<p>"Oh, I've met him, that is all," and Tom tried
+to speak indifferently.</p>
+
+<p>"Humph!" mused Ned, "there's more here than I dreamed of.
+I'm going to get at the bottom of it."</p>
+
+<p>But though Ned tried to pump Tom, he was
+not successful. The young inventor admitted
+knowing the youthful scientist, but that was all,
+Tom reiterating his determination not to let Professor
+Bumper be beaten in the race for the idol
+of gold.</p>
+
+<p>"Let me see," mused Ned, as he went home
+that evening. "Tom did not change his mind
+until he heard Beecher's name mentioned. Now
+this shows that Beecher had something to do
+with it. The only reason Tom doesn't want
+Beecher to get this idol or find the buried city
+is because Professor Bumper is after it. And
+yet the professor is not an old or close friend
+of Tom's. They met only when Tom went to
+dig his big tunnel. There must be some other
+reason."</p>
+
+<p>Ned did some more thinking. Then he
+clapped his hands together, and a smile spread
+over his face.</p>
+
+<p>"I believe I have it!" he cried. "The little
+green god as compared to the idol of gold!
+That's it. I'm going to make a call on my way home."</p>
+
+<p>This he did, stopping at the home of Mary
+Nestor, a pretty girl, who, rumor had it, was
+tacitly engaged to Tom. Mary was not at home,
+but Mr. Nestor was, and for Ned's purpose this
+answered.</p>
+
+<p>"Well, well, glad to see you!" exclaimed
+Mary's father. "Isn't Tom with you?" he asked
+a moment later, seeing that Ned was alone.</p>
+
+<p>"No, Tom isn't with me this evening," Ned
+answered. "The fact is, he's getting ready to
+go off on another expedition, and I'm going with him."</p>
+
+<p>"You young men are always going somewhere,"
+remarked Mrs. Nestor. "Where is it to this time?"</p>
+
+<p>"Some place in Central America," Ned
+answered, not wishing to be too particular. He
+was wondering how he could find out what he
+wanted to know, when Mary's mother unexpectedly
+gave him just the information he was after.</p>
+
+<p>"Central America!" she exclaimed. "Why,
+Father," and she looked at her husband, "that's
+where Professor Beecher is going, isn't it?"</p>
+
+<p>"Yes, I believe he did mention something about that."</p>
+
+<p>"Professor Beecher, the man who is an authority
+on Aztec ruins?" asked Ned, taking a shot in
+the dark.</p>
+
+<p>"Yes," said Mr. Nestor. "And a mighty fine
+young man he is, too. I knew his father well.
+He was here on a visit not long ago, young
+Beecher was, and he talked most entertainingly
+about his discoveries. You remember how
+interested Mary was, Mother?"</p>
+
+<p>"Yes, she seemed to be," said Mrs. Nestor.
+"Tom Swift dropped in during the course of
+the evening," she added to Ned, "and Mary
+introduced him to Professor Beecher. But I can't
+say that Tom was much interested in the
+professor's talk."</p>
+
+<p>"No?" questioned Ned.</p>
+
+<p>"No, not at all. But Tom did not stay long.
+He left just as Mary and the professor were
+drawing a map so the professor could indicate
+where he had once made a big discovery."</p>
+
+<p>"I see," murmured Ned. "Well, I suppose
+Tom must have been thinking of something else
+at the time."</p>
+
+<p>"Very likely," agreed Mr. Nestor. "But Tom
+missed a very profitable talk. I was very much
+interested myself in what the professor told us,
+and so was Mary. She invited Mr. Beecher to
+come again. He takes after his father in being
+very thorough in what he does.</p>
+
+<p>"Sometimes I think," went on Mr. Nestor, "that
+Tom isn't quite steady enough. He's thinking
+of so many things, perhaps, that he can't get his
+mind down to the commonplace. I remember he
+once sent something here in a box labeled
+`dynamite.' Though there was no explosive in it,
+it gave us a great fright. But Tom is a boy, in
+spite of his years. Professor Beecher seems
+much older. We all like him very much."</p>
+
+<p>"That's nice," said Ned, as he took his
+departure. He had found out what he had come
+to learn.</p>
+
+<p>"I knew it!" Ned exclaimed as he walked
+home. "I knew something was in the wind.
+The little green god of jealousy has Tom in his
+clutches. That's why my inventive friend was
+so anxious to go on this expedition when he
+learned Beecher was to go. He wants to beat
+him. I guess the professor has plainly shown
+that he wouldn't like anything better than to
+cut Tom out with Mary. Whew! that's something
+to think about!"</p>
+
+<hr />
+
+<h2><a name="chaptervi" id="chaptervi">CHAPTER VI</a></h2>
+
+<h3>UNPLEASANT NEWS</h3>
+
+
+<p>Ned Newton decided to keep to himself what
+he had heard at the Nestor home. Not for the
+world would he let Tom Swift know of the
+situation.</p>
+
+<p>"That is, I won't let him know that I know,"
+said Ned to himself, "though he is probably as
+well aware of the situation as I am. But it sure
+is queer that this Professor Beecher should have
+taken such a fancy to Mary, and that her father
+should regard him so well. That is natural,
+I suppose. But I wonder how Mary herself
+feels about it. That is the part Tom would
+be most interested in.</p>
+
+<p>"No wonder Tom wants to get ahead of this
+young college chap, who probably thinks he's
+the whole show. If he can find the buried city,
+and get the idol of gold, it would be a big
+feather in his cap.</p>
+
+<p>"He'd have no end of honors heaped on him,
+and I suppose his hat wouldn't come within
+three sizes of fitting him. Then he'd stand in
+better than ever with Mr. Nestor. And, maybe,
+with Mary, too, though I think she is loyal
+to Tom. But one never can tell.</p>
+
+<p>"However, I'm glad I know about it. I'll
+do all I can to help Tom, without letting him
+know that I know. And if I can do anything
+to help in finding that idol of gold for Professor
+Bumper, and, incidentally, Tom, I'll do it," and
+he spoke aloud in his enthusiasm.</p>
+
+<p>Ned, who was walking along in the darkness,
+clapped his open hand down on Tom's magazine
+he was carrying home to read again, and
+the resultant noise was a sharp crack. As it
+sounded a figure jumped from behind a tree
+and called tensely:</p>
+
+<p>"Hold on there!"</p>
+
+<p>Ned stopped short, thinking he was to be
+the victim of a holdup, but his fears were
+allayed when he beheld one of the police force of
+Shopton confronting him.</p>
+
+<p>"I heard what you said about gettin' the gold,"
+went on the officer. "I was walkin' along and I
+heard you talkin'. Where's your pal?"</p>
+
+<p>"I haven't any, Mr. Newbold," answered Ned
+with a laugh, as he recognized the man.</p>
+
+<p>"Oh, pshaw! It's Ned Newton!" exclaimed
+the disappointed officer. "I thought you was
+talkin' to a confederate about gold, and figured
+maybe you was goin' to rob the bank."</p>
+
+<p>"No, nothing like that," answered Ned, still
+much amused. "I was talking to myself about
+a trip Tom Swift and I are going to take
+and——"</p>
+
+<p>"Oh, that's all right," responded the
+policeman. "I can understand it, if it had anything to
+do with Tom. He's a great boy."</p>
+
+<p>"Indeed he is," agreed Ned, making a mental
+resolve not to be so public with his thoughts
+in the future. He chatted for a moment with
+the officer, and then, bidding him good-night,
+walked on to his home, his mind in a whirl with
+conglomerate visions of buried cities, great grinning
+idols of gold, and rival professors seeking
+to be first at the goal.</p>
+
+<p>The next few days were busy ones for Tom,
+Ned and, in fact, the whole Swift household.
+Tom and his father had several consultations and
+conducted several experiments in regard to the
+new stabilizer, the completion of which was so
+earnestly desired. Mr. Swift was sure he could
+carry the invention to a successful conclusion.</p>
+
+<p>Ned was engaged in putting the financial
+affairs of the Swift Company in shape, so they
+would practically run themselves during his absence.
+Then, too, there was the packing of their
+baggage which must be seen to.</p>
+
+<p>Of course, the main details of the trip were
+left to Professor Bumper, who knew just what
+to do. He had told Tom and Ned that all they
+and Mr. Damon would have to do would be to
+meet him at the pier in New York, where they
+would find all arrangements made.</p>
+
+<p>One day, near the end of the week (the beginning
+of the next being set for the start) Eradicate
+came shuffling into the room where Tom was
+sorting out the possessions he desired to take
+with him, Ned assisting him in the task.</p>
+
+<p>"Well, Rad, what is it?" asked Tom, with
+businesslike energy.</p>
+
+<p>"I done heah, Massa Tom, dat yo' all's gwine
+off on a long trip once mo'. Am dat so?"</p>
+
+<p>"Yes, that's so, Rad."</p>
+
+<p>"Well, den, I'se come to ast yo' whut I'd bettah
+take wif me. Shall I took warm clothes or cool
+clothes?"</p>
+
+<p>"Well, if you were going, Rad," answered Tom
+with a smile, "you'd need cool clothes, for we're
+going to a sort of jungle-land. But I'm sorry to
+say you're not going this trip."</p>
+
+<p>"I——I ain't gwine? Does yo' mean dat yo'
+all ain't gwine to take me, Massa Tom?"</p>
+
+<p>"That's it, Rad. It isn't any trip for you."</p>
+
+<p>"In certain not!" broke in the voice of Koku,
+the giant, who entered with a big trunk Tom had
+sent him for. "Master want strong man like a
+bull. He take Koku!"</p>
+
+<p>"Look heah!" spluttered Eradicate, and his eyes
+flashed. "Yo'—yo' giant yo'—yo' may be strong
+laik a bull, but ya' ain't got as much sense as
+mah mule, Boomerang! Massa Tom don't want
+no sich pusson wif him. He's gwine to take me."</p>
+
+<p>"He take me!" cried Koku, and his voice was
+a roar while he beat on his mighty chest with his
+huge fists.</p>
+
+<p>Tom, seeing that the dispute was likely to be
+bothersome, winked at Ned and began to speak.</p>
+
+<p>"I don't believe you'd like it there, Rad—not
+where we're going. It's a bad country. Why
+the mosquitoes there bite holes in you—raise
+bumps on you as big as eggs."</p>
+
+<p>"Oh, good land!" ejaculated the old colored man.
+"Am dat so Massa Tom?"</p>
+
+<p>"It sure is. Then there's another kind of bug
+that burrows under your fingernails, and if you
+don't get 'em out, your fingers drop off."</p>
+
+<p>"Oh, good land, Massa Tom! Am dat a fact?"</p>
+
+<p>"It sure is. I don't want to see those things
+happen to you, Rad."</p>
+
+<p>Slowly the old colored man shook his head.</p>
+
+<p>"I don't mahse'f," he said. "I——I guess I
+won't go."</p>
+
+<p>Eradicate did not stop to ask how Tom and
+Ned proposed to combat these two species of
+insects.</p>
+
+<p>But there remained Koku to dispose of, and he
+stood smiling broadly as Eradicate shuffled of.</p>
+
+<p>"Me no 'fraid bugs," said the giant.</p>
+
+<p>"No," said Tom, with a look at Ned, for he did
+not want to take the big man on the trip for
+various reasons. "No, maybe not, Koku. Your
+skin is pretty tough. But I understand there are
+deep pools of water in the land where we are
+going, and in them lives a fish that has a hide
+like an alligator and a jaw like a shark. If you
+fall in it's all up with you."</p>
+
+<p>"Dat true, Master Tom?" and Koku's voice
+trembled.</p>
+
+<p>"Well, I've never seen such a fish, I'm sure,
+but the natives tell about it."</p>
+
+<p>Koku seemed to be considering the matter.
+Strange as it may seem, the giant, though afraid
+of nothing human and brave when it came to a
+hand-to-claw argument with a wild animal, had
+a very great fear of the water and the unseen
+life within it. Even a little fresh-water crab in
+a brook was enough to send him shrieking to
+shore. So when Tom told of this curious fish,
+which many natives of Central America firmly
+believe in, the giant took thought with himself.
+Finally, he gave a sigh and said:</p>
+
+<p>"Me stay home and keep bad mans out of
+master's shop."</p>
+
+<p>"Yes, I guess that's the best thing for you,"
+assented Tom with an air of relief. He and Ned
+had talked the matter over, and they had agreed
+that the presence of such a big man as Koku, in
+an expedition going on a more or less secret mission,
+would attract too much attention.</p>
+
+<p>"Well, I guess that clears matters up," said
+Tom, as he looked over a collection of rifles and
+small arms, to decide which to take. "We won't
+have them to worry about."</p>
+
+<p>"No, only Professor Beecher," remarked Ned,
+with a sharp look at his chum.</p>
+
+<p>"Oh, we'll dispose of him all right!" asserted
+Tom boldly. "He hasn't had any experience in
+business of this sort, and with that you and
+Professor Bumper and Mr. Damon know we
+ought to have little trouble in getting ahead of
+the young man."</p>
+
+<p>"Not to speak of your own aid," added Ned.</p>
+
+<p>"Oh, I'll do what I can, of course," said Tom,
+with an air of indifference. But Ned knew his
+chum would work ceaselessly to help get the idol
+of gold.</p>
+
+<p>Tom gave no sign that there was any complication
+in his affair with Mary Nestor, and of
+course Ned did not tell anything of what he knew
+about it.</p>
+
+<p>That night saw the preparations of Ned and
+Tom about completed. There were one or two
+matters yet to finish on Tom's part in relation
+to his business, but these offered no difficulties.</p>
+
+<p>The two chums were in the Swift home, talking
+over the prospective trip, when Mrs. Baggert,
+answering a ring at the front door, announced
+that Mr. Damon was outside.</p>
+
+<p>"Tell him to come in," ordered Tom.</p>
+
+<p>"Bless my baggage check!" exclaimed the
+excitable man, as he shook hands with Tom and
+Ned and noted the packing evidences all about.
+"You're ready to go to the land of wonders."</p>
+
+<p>"The land of wonders?" repeated Ned.</p>
+
+<p>"Yes, that's what Professor Bumper calls the
+part of Honduras we're going to. And it must
+be wonderful, Tom. Think of whole cities,
+some of them containing idols and temples of
+gold, buried thirty and forty feet under the
+surface! Wonderful is hardly the name for it!"</p>
+
+<p>"It'll be great!" cried Ned. "I suppose you're
+ready, Mr. Damon—you and the professor?"</p>
+
+<p>"Yes. But, Tom, I have a bit of unpleasant
+news for you."</p>
+
+<p>"Unpleasant news?"</p>
+
+<p>"Yes. You know Professor Bumper spoke of
+a rival—a man named Beecher who is a member
+of the faculty of a new and wealthy college."</p>
+
+<p>"I heard him speak of him—yes," and the way
+Tom said it no one would have suspected that
+he had any personal interest in the matter.</p>
+
+<p>"He isn't going to give his secret away,"
+thought Ned.</p>
+
+<p>"Well, this Professor Beecher, you know,"
+went on Mr. Damon, "also knows about the idol
+of gold, and is trying to get ahead of Professor
+Bumper in the search."</p>
+
+<p>"He did say something of it, but nothing was
+certain," remarked Tom.</p>
+
+<p>"But it is certain!" exclaimed Mr. Damon.
+"Bless my toothpick, it's altogether too certain!"</p>
+
+<p>"How is that?" asked Tom. "Is Beecher
+certainly going to Honduras?"</p>
+
+<p>"Yes, of course. But what is worse, he and
+his party will leave New York on the same
+steamer with us!"</p>
+
+<hr />
+
+<h2><a name="chaptervii" id="chaptervii">CHAPTER VII</a></h2>
+
+<h3>TOM HEARS SOMETHING</h3>
+
+
+<p>On hearing Mr. Damon's rather startling
+announcement, Tom and Ned looked at one another.
+There seemed to be something back of
+the simple statement—an ominous and portending
+"something."</p>
+
+<p>"On the same steamer with us, is he?" mused Tom.</p>
+
+<p>"How did you learn this?" asked Ned.</p>
+
+<p>"Just got a wire from Professor Bumper
+telling me. He asked me to telephone to you about
+it, as he was too busy to call up on the long
+distance from New York. But instead of 'phoning
+I decided to come over myself."</p>
+
+<p>"Glad you did," said Tom, heartily. "Did
+Professor Bumper want us to do anything
+special, now that it is certain his rival will be
+so close on his trail?"</p>
+
+<p>"Yes, he asked me to warn you to be careful
+what you did and said in reference to the expedition."</p>
+
+<p>"Then does he fear something?" asked Ned.</p>
+
+<p>"Yes, in a way. I think he is very much afraid
+this young Beecher will not only be first on the
+site of the underground city, but that he may
+be the first to discover the idol of gold. It would
+be a great thing for a young archaeologist like
+Beecher to accomplish a mission of this sort,
+and beat Professor Bumper in the race."</p>
+
+<p>"Do you think that's why Beecher decided to
+go on the same steamer we are to take?" asked Ned.</p>
+
+<p>"Yes, I do," said Mr. Damon. "Though from
+what Professor Bumper said I know he regards
+Professor Beecher as a perfectly honorable man,
+as well as a brilliant student. I do not believe
+Beecher or his party would stoop to anything
+dishonorable or underhand, though they would
+not hesitate, nor would we, to take advantage of
+every fair chance to win in the race."</p>
+
+<p>"No, I suppose that's right," observed Tom;
+but there was a queer gleam in his eye, and his
+chum wondered if Tom did not have in mind the
+prospective race between himself and Fenimore
+Beecher for the regard of Mary Nestor. "We'll
+do our best to win, and any one is at liberty to
+travel on the same steamer we are to take," added
+the young inventor, and his tone became more
+incisive.</p>
+
+<p>"It will be all the livelier with two expeditions
+after the same golden idol," remarked Ned.</p>
+
+<p>"Yes, I think we're in for some excitement,"
+observed Tom grimly. But even he did not
+realize all that lay before them ere they would
+reach Kurzon.</p>
+
+<p>Mr. Damon, having delivered his message, and
+remarking that his preparations for leaving were
+nearly completed, went back to Waterfield, from
+there to proceed to New York in a few days
+with Tom and Ned, to meet Professor Bumper.</p>
+
+<p>"Well, I guess we have everything in pretty
+good shape," remarked Tom to his chum a day
+or so after the visit of Mr. Damon. "Everything
+is packed, and as I have a few personal matters
+to attend to I think I'll take the afternoon off."</p>
+
+<p>"Go to it!" laughed Ned, guessing a thing of two.
+"I've got a raft of stuff myself to look after,
+but don't let that keep you."</p>
+
+<p>"If there is anything I can do," began Tom,
+"don't hesitate to——"</p>
+
+<p>"Nonsense!" exclaimed Ned. "I can do it all alone.
+It's some of the company's business, anyhow,
+and I'm paid for looking after that."</p>
+
+<p>"All right, then I'll cut along," Tom said, and
+he wore a relieved air.</p>
+
+<p>"He's going to see Mary," observed Ned with
+a grin, as he observed Tom hop into his trim
+little roadster, which under his orders, Koku had
+polished and cleaned until it looked as though
+it had just come from the factory.</p>
+
+<p>A little later the trim and speedy car drew up
+in front of the Nestor home, and Tom bounded
+up on the front porch, his heart not altogether
+as light as his feet.</p>
+
+<p>"No, I'm sorry, but Mary isn't in," said Mrs.
+Nestor, answering his inquiry after greeting him.</p>
+
+<p>"Not at home?"</p>
+
+<p>"No, she went on a little visit to her cousin's at
+Fayetteville. She said something about letting
+you know she was going."</p>
+
+<p>"She did drop me a card," answered Tom, and,
+somehow he did not feel at all cheerful. "But
+I thought it wasn't until next week she was
+going."</p>
+
+<p>"That was her plan, Tom. But she changed
+it. Her cousin wired, asking her to advance
+the date, and this Mary did. There was something
+about a former school chum who was also
+to be at Myra's house—Myra is Mary's cousin
+you know."</p>
+
+<p>"Yes, I know," assented the young inventor.
+"And so Mary is gone. How long is she going
+to stay?"</p>
+
+<p>"Oh, about two weeks. She wasn't quite
+certain. It depends on the kind of a time she has,
+I suppose."</p>
+
+<p>"Yes, I suppose so," agreed Tom. "Well, if
+you write before I do you might say I called,
+Mrs. Nestor."</p>
+
+<p>"I will, Tom. And I know Mary will be sorry
+she wasn't here to take a ride with you; it's
+such a nice day," and the lady smiled as she
+looked at the speedy roadster.</p>
+
+<p>"Maybe—maybe you'd like to come for a spin?"
+asked Tom, half desperately.</p>
+
+<p>"No, thank you. I'm too old to be jounced
+around in one of those small cars."</p>
+
+<p>"Nonsense! She rides as easily as a Pullman
+sleeper."</p>
+
+<p>"Well, I have to go to a Red Cross meeting,
+anyhow, so I can't come, Tom. Thank you,
+just the same."</p>
+
+<p>Tom did not drive back immediately to his
+home. He wanted to do a bit of thinking, and
+he believed he could do it best by himself. So
+it was late afternoon when he again greeted Ned,
+who, meanwhile, had been kept very busy.</p>
+
+<p>"Well?" called Tom's chum.</p>
+
+<p>"Um!" was the only answer, and Tom called
+Koku to put the car away in the garage.</p>
+
+<p>"Something wrong," mused Ned.</p>
+
+<p>The next three days were crowded with events
+and with work. Mr. Damon came over
+frequently to consult with Tom and Ned, and
+finally the last of their baggage had been packed,
+certain of Tom's inventions and implements sent
+on by express to New York to be taken to Honduras,
+and then our friends themselves followed
+to the metropolis.</p>
+
+<p>"Good-bye, Tom," said his father. "Good-bye,
+and good luck! If you don't get the idol
+of gold I'm sure you'll have experiences that
+will be valuable to you."</p>
+
+<p>"We're going to get the idol of gold!" said
+Tom determinedly.</p>
+
+<p>"Look out for the bad bugs," suggested Eradicate.</p>
+
+<p>"We will," promised Ned.</p>
+
+<p>Tom's last act was to send a message to Mary
+Nestor, and then he, with Ned and Mr. Damon,
+who blessed everything in sight from the gasoline
+in the automobile to the blue sky overhead,
+started for the station.</p>
+
+<p>New York was reached without incident. The
+trio put up at the hotel where Professor Bumper
+was to meet them.</p>
+
+<p>"He hasn't arrived yet," said Tom, after
+glancing over the names on the hotel register and
+not seeing Professor Bumper's among them.</p>
+
+<p>"Oh, he'll be here all right," asserted Mr.
+Damon. "Bless my galvanic battery! he sent me
+a telegram at one o'clock this morning saying
+he'd be sure to meet us in New York. No fear
+of him not starting for the land of wonders."</p>
+
+<p>"There are some other professors registered,
+though," observed Ned, as he glanced at the
+book, noting the names of several scientists of
+whom he and Tom had read.</p>
+
+<p>"Yes. I wonder what they're doing in New
+York," replied Tom. "They are from New
+England. Maybe there's a convention going on.
+Well, we'll have to wait, that's all, until
+Professor Bumper comes."</p>
+
+<p>And during that wait Tom heard something
+that surprised him and caused him no little
+worry. It was when Ned came back to his
+room, which adjoined Tom's, that the young
+treasurer gave his chum the news.</p>
+
+<p>"I say, Tom!" Ned exclaimed. "Who do you
+think those professors are, whose names we saw
+on the register?"</p>
+
+<p>"I haven't the least idea."</p>
+
+<p>"Why, they're of Beecher's party!"</p>
+
+<p>"You don't mean it!"</p>
+
+<p>"I surely do."</p>
+
+<p>"How do you know?"</p>
+
+<p>"I happened to overhear two of them talking
+down in the lobby a while ago. They didn't
+make any secret of it. They spoke freely of going
+with Beecher to some ancient city in Honduras,
+to look for an idol of gold."</p>
+
+<p>"They did? But where is Beecher?"</p>
+
+<p>"He hasn't joined them yet. Their plans
+have been changed. Instead of leaving on the
+same steamer we are to take in the morning
+they are to come on a later one. The professors
+here are waiting for Beecher to come."</p>
+
+<p>"Why isn't he here now?"</p>
+
+<p>"Well, I heard one of the other scientists say
+that he had gone to a place called Fayetteville,
+and will come on from there."</p>
+
+<p>"Fayetteville!" ejaculated Tom.</p>
+
+<p>"Yes. That isn't far from Shopton."</p>
+
+<p>"I know," assented Tom. "I wonder—I wonder
+why he is going there?"</p>
+
+<p>"I can tell you that, too."</p>
+
+<p>"You can? You're a regular detective."</p>
+
+<p>"No, I just happened to overhear it. Beecher
+is going to call on Mary Nestor in Fayetteville,
+so his friends here said he told them, and his call
+has to do with an important matter—to him!"
+and Ned gazed curiously at his chum.</p>
+
+<hr />
+
+<h2><a name="chapterviii" id="chapterviii">CHAPTER VIII</a></h2>
+
+<h3>OFF FOR HONDURAS</h3>
+
+
+<p>Just what Tom's thoughts were, Ned, of
+course, could not guess. But by the flush that
+showed under the tan of his chum's cheeks the
+young financial secretary felt pretty certain that
+Tom was a bit apprehensive of the outcome of
+Professor Beecher's call on Mary Nestor.</p>
+
+<p>"So he is going to see her about `something
+important,' Ned?"</p>
+
+<p>"That's what some members of his party called
+it."</p>
+
+<p>"And they're waiting here for him to join
+them?"</p>
+
+<p>"Yes. And it means waiting a week for
+another steamer. It must be something pretty
+important, don't you think, to cause Beecher to
+risk that delay in starting after the idol of gold?"</p>
+
+<p>"Important? Yes, I suppose so," assented
+Tom. "And yet even if he waits for the next
+steamer he will get to Honduras nearly as soon
+as we do."</p>
+
+<p>"How is that?"</p>
+
+<p>"The next boat is a faster one."</p>
+
+<p>"Then why don't we take that? I hate dawdling
+along on a slow freighter."</p>
+
+<p>"Well, for one thing it would hardly do to
+change now, when all our goods are on board.
+And besides, the captain of the Relstab, on which
+we are going to sail, is a friend of Professor
+Bumper's."</p>
+
+<p>"Well, I'm just as glad Beecher and his party
+aren't going with us," resumed Ned, after a
+pause. "It might make trouble."</p>
+
+<p>"Oh, I'm ready for any trouble HE might make!"
+quickly exclaimed Tom.</p>
+
+<p>He meant trouble that might be developed in
+going to Honduras, and starting the search
+for the lost city and the idol of gold. This kind
+of trouble Tom and his friends had experienced
+before, on other trips where rivals had sought
+to frustrate their ends.</p>
+
+<p>But, in his heart, though he said nothing to
+Ned about it, Tom was worried. Much as he
+disliked to admit it to himself, he feared the visit
+of Professor Beecher to Mary Nestor in Fayetteville
+had but one meaning.</p>
+
+<p>"I wonder if he's going to propose to her,"
+thought Tom. "He has the field all to himself
+now, and her father likes him. That's in his favor.
+I guess Mr. Nestor has never quite forgiven me
+for that mistake about the dynamite box, and
+that wasn't my fault. Then, too, the Beecher
+and Nestor families have been friends for years.
+Yes, he surely has the inside edge on me, and
+if he gets her to throw me over—— Well, I
+won't give up without a fight!" and Tom mentally
+girded himself for a battle of wits.</p>
+
+<p>"He's relying on the prestige he'll get out of
+this idol of gold if his party finds it," thought
+on the young inventor. "But I'll help find it
+first. I'm glad to have a little start of him, anyhow,
+even if it isn't more than two days. Though
+if our vessel is held back much by storms he may
+get on the ground first. However, that can't
+be helped. I'll do the best I can."</p>
+
+<p>These thoughts shot through Tom's mind
+even as Ned was asking his questions and making
+comments. Then the young inventor, shaking
+his shoulders as though to rid them of some
+weight, remarked:</p>
+
+<p>"Well, come on out and see the sights. It will
+be long before we look on Broadway again."</p>
+
+<p>When the chums returned from their sightseeing
+excursion, they found that Professor Bumper
+had arrived.</p>
+
+<p>"Where's Professor Bumper?" asked Ned, the next day.</p>
+
+<p>"In his room, going over books, papers and
+maps to make sure he has everything."</p>
+
+<p>"And Mr. Damon?"</p>
+
+<p>Tom did not have to answer that last question.
+Into the apartment came bursting the excited
+individual himself.</p>
+
+<p>"Bless my overshoes!" he cried, "I've been
+looking everywhere for you! Come on, there's
+no time to lose!"</p>
+
+<p>"What's the matter now?" asked Ned. "Is the
+hotel on fire?"</p>
+
+<p>"Has anything happened to Professor Bumper?"
+Tom demanded, a wild idea forming in his
+head that perhaps some one of the Beecher party
+had tried to kidnap the discoverer of the lost
+city of Pelone.</p>
+
+<p>"Oh, everything is all right," answered Mr.
+Damon. "But it's nearly time for the show to
+start, and we don't want to be late. I have
+tickets."</p>
+
+<p>"For what?" asked Tom and Ned together.</p>
+
+<p>"The movies," was the laughing reply. "Bless
+my loose ribs! but I wouldn't miss him for anything.
+He's in a new play called `Up in a Balloon
+Boys.' It's great!" and Mr. Damon named
+a certain comic moving picture star in whose
+horse-play Mr. Damon took a curious interest.
+Tom and Ned were glad enough to go, Tom
+that he might have a chance to do a certain
+amount of thinking, and Ned because he was
+still boy enough to like moving pictures.</p>
+
+<p>"I wonder, Tom," said Mr. Damon, as they
+came out of the theater two hours later, all three
+chuckling at the remembrance of what they had
+seen, "I wonder you never turned your inventive
+mind to the movies."</p>
+
+<p>"Maybe I will, some day," said Tom.</p>
+
+<p>He spoke rather uncertainly. The truth of
+the matter was that he was still thinking deeply
+of the visit of Professor Beecher to Mary Nestor,
+and wondering what it portended.</p>
+
+<p>But if Tom's sleep was troubled that night he
+said nothing of it to his friends. He was up
+early the next morning, for they were to leave
+that day, and there was still considerable to be
+done in seeing that their baggage and supplies
+were safely loaded, and in attending to the last
+details of some business matters.</p>
+
+<p>While at the hotel they had several glimpses
+of the members of the Beecher party who were
+awaiting the arrival of the young professor who
+was to lead them into the wilds of Honduras.
+But our friends did not seek the acquaintance
+of their rivals. The latter, likewise, remained
+by themselves, though they knew doubtless
+that there was likely to be a strenuous race for
+the possession of the idol of gold, then, it was
+presumed, buried deep in some forest-covered
+city.</p>
+
+<p>Professor Bumper had made his arrangements
+carefully. As he explained to his friends, they
+would take the steamer from New York to Puerto
+Cortes, one of the principal seaports of
+Honduras. This is a town of about three thousand
+inhabitants, with an excellent harbor and a
+big pier along which vessels can tie up and
+discharge their cargoes directly into waiting cars.</p>
+
+<p>The preparations were finally completed.
+The party went aboard the steamer, which was
+a large freight vessel, carrying a limited number
+of passengers, and late one afternoon swung
+down New York Bay.</p>
+
+<p>"Off for Honduras!" cried Ned gaily, as they
+passed the Statue of Liberty. "I wonder what
+will happen before we see that little lady again."</p>
+
+<p>"Who knows?" asked Tom, shrugging his
+shoulders, Spanish fashion. And there came before
+him the vision of a certain "little lady," about
+whom he had been thinking deeply of late.</p>
+
+<hr />
+
+<h2><a name="chapterix" id="chapterix">CHAPTER IX</a></h2>
+
+<h3>VAL JACINTO</h3>
+
+
+<p>"Rather tame, isn't it, Tom?"</p>
+
+<p>"Well, Ned, it isn't exactly like going up in
+an airship," and Tom Swift who was gazing
+over the rail down into the deep blue water of
+the Caribbean Sea, over which their vessel was
+then steaming, looked at his chum beside him.</p>
+
+<p>"No, and your submarine voyage had it all over
+this one for excitement," went on Ned. "When
+I think of that——"</p>
+
+<p>"Bless my sea legs!" interrupted Mr. Damon,
+overhearing the conversation. "Don't speak of
+THAT trip. My wife never forgave me for going
+on it. But I had a fine time," he added with a
+twinkle of his eyes.</p>
+
+<p>"Yes, that was quite a trip," observed Tom,
+as his mind went back to it. "But this one isn't
+over yet remember. And I shouldn't be surprised
+if we had a little excitement very soon."</p>
+
+<p>"What do you mean?" asked Ned.</p>
+
+<p>Up to this time the voyage from New York
+down into the tropical seas had been anything
+but exciting. There were not many passengers
+besides themselves, and the weather had been
+fine.</p>
+
+<p>At first, used as they were to the actions of
+unscrupulous rivals in trying to thwart their
+efforts, Tom and Ned had been on the alert for
+any signs of hidden enemies on board the steamer.
+But aside from a little curiosity when it became
+known that they were going to explore
+little-known portions of Honduras, the other
+passengers took hardly any interest in our travelers.</p>
+
+<p>It was thought best to keep secret the fact
+that they were going to search for a wonderful
+idol of gold. Not even the mule and ox-cart
+drivers, whom they would hire to take them into
+the wilds of the interior would be told of the real
+object of the search. It would be given out that
+they were looking for interesting ruins of ancient
+cities, with a view to getting such antiquities
+as might be there.</p>
+
+<p>"What do you mean?" asked Ned again, when
+Tom did not answer him immediately. "What's
+the excitement?"</p>
+
+<p>"I think we're in for a storm," was the reply.
+"The barometer is falling and I see the crew
+going about making everything snug. So we
+may have a little trouble toward this end of our
+trip."</p>
+
+<p>"Let it come!" exclaimed Mr. Damon. "We're
+not afraid of trouble, Tom. Swift, are we?"</p>
+
+<p>"No, to be sure we're not. And yet it looks
+as though the storm would be a bad one."</p>
+
+<p>"Then I am going to see if my books and
+papers are ready, so I can get them together in a
+hurry in case we have to take to the life-boats,"
+said Professor Bumper, coming on deck at that
+moment. "It won't do to lose them. If we
+didn't have the map we might not be able to find——"</p>
+
+<p>"Ahem!" exclaimed Tom, with unnecessary
+emphasis it seemed. "I'll help you go over your
+papers, Professor," he added, and with a wink
+and a motion of his hand, he enjoined silence on
+his friend. Ned looked around for a reason for
+this, and observed a man, evidently of Spanish
+extraction, passing them as he paced up and
+down the deck.</p>
+
+<p>"What's the matter?" asked the scientist in
+a whisper, as the man went on. "Do you know
+him? Is he a——?"</p>
+
+<p>"I don't know anything about him," said Tom;
+"but it is best not to speak of our trip before
+strangers."</p>
+
+<p>"You are right, Tom," said Professor Bumper.
+"I'll be more careful."</p>
+
+<p>A storm was brewing, that was certain. A
+dull, sickly yellow began to obscure the sky, and
+the water, from a beautiful blue, turned a slate
+color and ran along the sides of the vessel with a
+hissing sound as though the sullen waves would
+ask nothing better than to suck the craft down
+into their depths. The wind, which had been
+freshening, now sang in louder tones as it
+hummed through the rigging and the funnel stays
+and bowled over the receiving conductors of the
+wireless.</p>
+
+<p>Sharp commands from the ship's officers
+hastened the work of the crew in making things
+snug, and life lines were strung along deck for
+the safety of such of the passengers as might
+venture up when the blow began.</p>
+
+<p>The storm was not long in coming. The
+howling of the wind grew louder, flecks of foam
+began to separate themselves from the crests of
+the waves, and the vessel pitched, rolled and
+tossed more violently. At first Tom and his
+friends thought they were in for no more than
+an ordinary blow, but as the storm progressed,
+and the passengers became aware of the anxiety
+on the part of the officers and crew, the alarm
+spread among them.</p>
+
+<p>It really was a violent storm, approaching a
+hurricane in force, and at one time it seemed as
+though the craft, having been heeled far over
+under a staggering wave that swept her decks,
+would not come back to an even keel.</p>
+
+<p>There was a panic among some of the
+passengers, and a few excited men behaved in a
+way that caused prompt action on the part of
+the first officer, who drove them back to the
+main cabin under threat of a revolver. For the
+men were determined to get to the lifeboats, and
+a small craft would not have had a minute to live
+in such seas as were running.</p>
+
+<p>But the vessel proved herself sturdier than the
+timid ones had dared to hope, and she was soon
+running before the blast, going out of her course,
+it is true, but avoiding the danger among the
+many cays, or small islands, that dot the Caribbean
+Sea.</p>
+
+<p>There was nothing to do but to let the storm
+blow itself out, which it did in two days. Then
+came a period of delightful weather. The cargo
+had shifted somewhat, which gave the steamer
+a rather undignified list.</p>
+
+<p>This, as well as the loss of a deckhand
+overboard, was the effect of the hurricane, and
+though the end of the trip came amid sunshine
+and sweet-scented tropical breezes, many could
+not forget the dangers through which they had
+passed.</p>
+
+<p>In due time Tom and his party found
+themselves safely housed in the small hotel at Puerto
+Cortes, their belongings stored in a convenient
+warehouse and themselves, rather weary by reason
+of the stress of weather, ready for the start
+into the interior wilds of Honduras.</p>
+
+<p>"How are we going to make the trip?" asked
+Ned, as they sat at supper, the first night after
+their arrival, eating of several dishes, the red-pepper
+condiments of which caused frequent trips
+to the water pitcher.</p>
+
+<p>"We can go in two ways, and perhaps we shall
+find it to our advantage to use both means," said
+Professor Bumper. "To get to this city of Kurzon,"
+he proceeded in a low voice, so that none
+of the others in the dining-room would hear
+them, "we will have to go either by mule back
+or boat to a point near Copan. As near as I
+can tell by the ancient maps, Kurzon is in the
+Copan valley.</p>
+
+<p>"Now the Chamelecon river seems to run to
+within a short distance of there, but there is
+no telling how far up it may be navigable. If
+we can go by boat it will be much more comfortable.
+Travel by mules and ox-carts is slow and
+sure, but the roads are very bad, as I have heard
+from friends who have made explorations in
+Honduras.</p>
+
+<p>"And, as I said, we may have to use both land
+and water travel to get us where we want to go.
+We can proceed as far as possible up the river,
+and then take to the mules."</p>
+
+<p>"What about arranging for boats and animals?"
+asked Tom. "I should think——"</p>
+
+<p>He suddenly ceased talking and reached for
+the water, taking several large swallows.</p>
+
+<p>"Whew!" he exclaimed, when he could catch his breath.
+"That was a hot one."</p>
+
+<p>"What did you do?" asked Ned.</p>
+
+<p>"Bit into a nest of red pepper. Guess I'll have
+to tell that cook to scatter his hits. He's bunching
+'em too much in my direction," and Tom
+wiped the tears from his eyes.</p>
+
+<p>"To answer your question," said Professor
+Bumper, "I will say that I have made partial
+arrangements for men and animals, and boats
+if it is found feasible to use them. I've been in
+correspondence with one of the merchants here,
+and he promised to make arrangements for us."</p>
+
+<p>"When do we leave?" asked Mr. Damon.</p>
+
+<p>"As soon as possible. I am not going to risk
+anything by delay," and it was evident the professor
+referred to his young rival whose arrival
+might be expected almost any time.</p>
+
+<p>As the party was about to leave the table,
+they were approached by a tall, dignified Spaniard
+who bowed low, rather exaggeratedly low,
+Ned thought, and addressed them in fairly good
+English.</p>
+
+<p>"Your pardons, Senors," he began, "but if it
+will please you to avail yourself of the humble
+services of myself, I shall have great pleasure
+in guiding you into the interior. I have at my
+command both mules and boats."</p>
+
+<p>"How do you know we are going into the
+interior?" asked Tom, a bit sharply, for he did
+not like the assurance of the man.</p>
+
+<p>"Pardon, Senor. I saw that you are from the
+States. And those from the States do not come
+to Honduras except for two reasons. To travel
+and make explorations or to start trade, and
+professors do not usually engage in trade," and
+he bowed to Professor Bumper.</p>
+
+<p>"I saw your name on the register," he proceeded,
+"and it was not difficult to guess your mission,"
+and he flashed a smile on the party, his
+white teeth showing brilliantly beneath his
+small, black moustache.</p>
+
+<p>"I make it my business to outfit traveling
+parties, either for business, pleasure or scientific
+matters. I am, at your service, Val Jacinto,"
+and he introduced himself with another low bow.</p>
+
+<p>For a moment Tom and his friends hardly
+knew how to accept this offer. It might be,
+as the man had said, that he was a professional
+tour conductor, like those who have charge of
+Egyptian donkey-boys and guides. Or might he
+not be a spy?</p>
+
+<p>This occurred to Tom no less than to Professor
+Bumper. They looked at one another while
+Val Jacinto bowed again and murmured:</p>
+
+<p>"At your service!"</p>
+
+<p>"Can you provide means for taking us to the
+Copan valley?" asked the professor. "You are
+right in one respect. I am a scientist and I purpose
+doing some exploring near Copan. Can
+you get us there?"</p>
+
+<p>"Most expensively—I mean, most expeditionlessly,"
+said Val Jacinto eagerly. "Pardon my
+unhappy English. I forget at times. The
+charges will be most moderate. I can send you
+by boat as far as the river travel is good, and
+then have mules and ox-carts in waiting."</p>
+
+<p>"How far is it?" asked Tom.</p>
+
+<p>"A hundred miles as the vulture flies, Senor,
+but much farther by river and road. We shall
+be a week going."</p>
+
+<p>"A hundred miles in a week!" groaned Ned.
+"Say, Tom, if you had your aeroplane we'd be
+there in an hour."</p>
+
+<p>"Yes, but we haven't it. However, we're in
+no great rush."</p>
+
+<p>"But we must not lose time," said Professor
+Bumper. "I shall consider your offer," he added
+to Val Jacinto.</p>
+
+<p>"Very good, Senor. I am sure you will be
+pleased with the humble service I may offer you,
+and my charges will be small. Adios," and he
+bowed himself away.</p>
+
+<p>"What do you think of him?" asked Ned, as
+they went up to their rooms in the hotel, or
+rather one large room, containing several beds.</p>
+
+<p>"He's a pretty slick article," said Mr. Damon.
+"Bless my check-book! but he spotted us at
+once, in spite of our secrecy."</p>
+
+<p>"I guess these guide purveyors are trained
+for that sort of thing," observed the scientist.
+"I know my friends have often spoken of having
+had the same experience. However, I shall
+ask my friend, who is in business here, about
+this Val Jacinto, and if I find him all right we
+may engage him "</p>
+
+<p>Inquiries next morning brought the information,
+from the head of a rubber exporting firm
+with whom the professor was acquainted, that
+the Spaniard was regularly engaged in transporting
+parties into the interior, and was considered
+efficient, careful and as honest as possible,
+considering the men he engaged as workers.</p>
+
+<p>"So we have decided to engage you," Professor
+Bumper informed Val Jacinto the afternoon
+following the meeting.</p>
+
+<p>"I am more than pleased, Senor. I shall take
+you into the wilds of Honduras. At your
+service!" and he bowed low.</p>
+
+<p>"Humph! I don't just like the way our friend
+Val says that," observed Tom to Ned a little
+later. "I'd have been better pleased if he had
+said he'd guide us into the wilds and out again."</p>
+
+<p>If Tom could have seen the crafty smile on
+the face of the Spaniard as the man left the
+hotel, the young inventor might have felt even
+less confidence in the guide.</p>
+
+<hr />
+
+<h2><a name="chapterx" id="chapterx">CHAPTER X</a></h2>
+
+<h3>IN THE WILDS</h3>
+
+
+<p>"All aboard! Step lively now! This boat
+makes no stops this side of Boston!" cried Ned
+Newton gaily, as he got into one of the several
+tree canoes provided for the transportation of
+the party up the Chamelecon river, for the first
+stage of their journey into the wilds of
+Honduras. "All aboard! This reminds me of my
+old camping days, Tom."</p>
+
+<p>It brought those days back, in a measure, to
+Tom also. For there were a number of canoes
+filled with the goods of the party, while the
+members themselves occupied a larger one with their
+personal baggage. Strong, half-naked Indian
+paddlers were in charge of the canoes which
+were of sturdy construction and light draft, since
+the river, like most tropical streams, was of
+uncertain depths, choked here and there with sand
+bars or tropical growths.</p>
+
+<p>Finding that Val Jacinto was regularly engaged
+in the business of taking explorers and
+mine prospectors into the interior, Professor
+Bumper had engaged the man. He seemed to be
+efficient. At the promised time he had the
+canoes and paddlers on hand and the goods safely
+stowed away while one big craft was fitted up
+as comfortably as possible for the men of the
+party.</p>
+
+<p>As Ned remarked, it did look like a camping
+party, for in the canoes were tents, cooking
+utensils and, most important, mosquito canopies
+of heavy netting.</p>
+
+<p>The insect pests of Honduras, as in all tropical
+countries, are annoying and dangerous. Therefore
+it was imperative to sleep under mosquito
+netting.</p>
+
+<p>On the advice of Val Jacinto, who was to
+accompany them, the travelers were to go up the
+river about fifty miles. This was as far as it
+would be convenient to use the canoes, the guide
+told Tom and his friends, and from there on
+the trip to the Copan valley would be made on
+the backs of mules, which would carry most of
+the baggage and equipment. The heavier portions
+would be transported in ox-carts.</p>
+
+<p>As Professor Bumper expected to do considerable
+excavating in order to locate the buried
+city, or cities, as the case might be, he had to
+contract for a number of Indian diggers and
+laborers. These could be hired in Copan, it was
+said.</p>
+
+<p>The plan, therefore, was to travel by canoes
+during the less heated parts of the day, and tie
+up at night, making camp on shore in the net-protected
+tents. As for the Indians, they did
+not seem to mind the bites of the insects. They
+sometimes made a smudge fire, Val Jacinto had
+said, but that was all.</p>
+
+<p>"Well, we haven't seen anything of Beecher
+and his friends," remarked the young inventor
+as they were about to start.</p>
+
+<p>"No, he doesn't seem to have arrived," agreed
+Professor Bumper. "We'll get ahead of him,
+and so much the better.</p>
+
+<p>"Well, are we all ready to start?" he continued,
+as he looked over the little flotilla which carried
+his party and his goods.</p>
+
+<p>"The sooner the better!" cried Tom, and Ned
+fancied his chum was unusually eager.</p>
+
+<p>"I guess he wants to make good before Beecher
+gets the chance to show Mary Nestor what
+he can do," thought Ned. "Tom sure is after
+that idol of gold."</p>
+
+<p>"You may start, Senor Jacinto," said the
+professor, and the guide called something in Indian
+dialect to the rowers. Lines were cast off and
+the boats moved out into the stream under the
+influence of the sturdy paddlers.</p>
+
+<p>"Well, this isn't so bad," observed Ned, as he
+made himself comfortable in his canoe. "How
+about it, Tom?"</p>
+
+<p>"Oh, no. But this is only the beginning."</p>
+
+<p>A canopy had been arranged over their boat
+to keep off the scorching rays of the sun. The
+boat containing the exploring party and Val
+Jacinto took the lead, the baggage craft following.
+At the place where it flowed into the bay
+on which Puerto Cortes was built, the stream
+was wide and deep.</p>
+
+<p>The guide called something to the Indians,
+who increased their stroke.</p>
+
+<p>"I tell them to pull hard and that at the end
+of the day's journey they will have much rest
+and refreshment," he translated to Professor
+Bumper and the others.</p>
+
+<p>"Bless my ham sandwich, but they'll need
+plenty of some sort of refreshment," said Mr.
+Damon, with a sigh. "I never knew it to be
+so hot."</p>
+
+<p>"Don't complain yet," advised Tom, with a
+laugh. "The worst is yet to come."</p>
+
+<p>It really was not unpleasant traveling, aside
+from the heat. And they had expected that,
+coming as they had to a tropical land. But, as
+Tom said, what lay before them might be worse.</p>
+
+<p>In a little while they had left behind them all
+signs of civilization. The river narrowed and
+flowed sluggishly between the banks which were
+luxuriant with tropical growth. Now and then
+some lonely Indian hut could be seen, and
+occasionally a craft propelled by a man who was
+trying to gain a meager living from the rubber
+forest which hemmed in the stream on either
+side.</p>
+
+<p>As the canoe containing the men was paddled
+along, there floated down beside it what seemed
+to be a big, rough log.</p>
+
+<p>"I wonder if that is mahogany," remarked Mr.
+Damon, reaching over to touch it. "Mahogany
+is one of the most valuable woods of Honduras,
+and if this is a log of that nature——"</p>
+
+<p>"Bless my watch chain!" he suddenly cried. It's alive!"</p>
+
+<p>And the "log" was indeed so, for there was a
+sudden flash of white teeth, a long red opening
+showed, and then came a click as an immense
+alligator, having opened and closed his mouth,
+sank out of sight in a swirl of water.</p>
+
+<p>Mr. Damon drew back so suddenly that he
+tilted the canoe, and the black paddlers looked
+around wonderingly.</p>
+
+<p>"Alligator," explained Jacinto succinctly, in
+their tongue.</p>
+
+<p>"Ugh!" they grunted.</p>
+
+<p>"Bless my—bless my——" hesitated Mr.
+Damon, and for one of the very few times in
+his life his language failed him.</p>
+
+<p>"Are there many of them hereabouts?" asked
+Ned, looking back at the swirl left by the saurian.</p>
+
+<p>"Plenty," said the guide, with a shrug of his
+shoulders. He seemed to do as much talking that
+way, and with his hands, as he did in speech.
+"The river is full of them."</p>
+
+<p>"Dangerous?" queried Tom.</p>
+
+<p>"Don't go in swimming," was the significant
+advice. "Wait, I'll show you," and he called
+up the canoe just behind.</p>
+
+<p>In this canoe was a quantity of provisions.
+There was a chunk of meat among other things,
+a gristly piece, seeing which Mr. Damon had
+objected to its being brought along, but the guide
+had said it would do for fish bait. With a quick
+motion of his hand, as he sat in the awning-covered
+stern with Tom, Ned and the others,
+Jacinto sent the chunk of meat out into the muddy
+stream.</p>
+
+<p>Hardly a second later there was a rushing in
+the water as though a submarine were about
+to come up. An ugly snout was raised, two
+rows of keen teeth snapped shut as a scissors-like
+jaw opened, and the meat was gone.</p>
+
+<p>"See!" was the guide's remark, and something
+like a cold shiver of fear passed over the white
+members of the party. "This water is not made
+in which to swim. Be careful!"</p>
+
+<p>"We certainly shall," agreed Tom. "They're fierce."</p>
+
+<p>"And always hungry," observed Jacinto grimly.</p>
+
+<p>"And to think that I—that I nearly had my
+hand on it," murmured Mr. Damon. "Ugh!
+Bless my eyeglasses!"</p>
+
+<p>"The alligator nearly had your hand," said the
+guide. "They can turn in the water like a flash,
+wherefore it is not wise to pat one on the tail
+lest it present its mouth instead."</p>
+
+<p>They paddled on up the river, the dusky Indians
+now and then breaking out into a chant
+that seemed to give their muscles new energy.
+The song, if song it was, passed from one boat
+to the other, and as the chant boomed forth
+the craft shot ahead more swiftly.</p>
+
+<p>They made a landing about noon, and lunch
+was served. Tom and his friends were hungry
+in spite of the heat. Moreover, they were
+experienced travelers and had learned not to fret
+over inconveniences and discomforts. the Indians
+ate by themselves, two acting as servants
+to Jacinto and the professor's party.</p>
+
+<p>As is usual in traveling in the tropics, a halt
+was made during the heated middle of the day.
+Then, as the afternoon shadows were waning,
+the party again took to the canoes and paddled
+on up the river.</p>
+
+<p>"Do you know of a good place to stop during
+the night?" asked Professor Bumper of Jacinto.</p>
+
+<p>"Oh, yes; a most excellent place. It is where
+I always bring scientific parties I am guiding.
+You may rely on me."</p>
+
+<p>It was within an hour of dusk—none too much
+time to allow in which to pitch camp in the
+tropics, where night follows day suddenly—when
+a halt was called, as a turn of the river showed a
+little clearing on the edge of the forest-bound
+river.</p>
+
+<p>"We stay here for the night," said Jacinto.
+"It is a good place."</p>
+
+<p>"It looks picturesque enough," observed Mr.
+Damon. "But it is rather wild."</p>
+
+<p>"We are a good distance from a settlement,"
+agreed the guide. "But one can not explore—
+and find treasure in cities," and he shrugged
+his shoulders again.</p>
+
+<p>"Find treasure? What do you mean?" asked Tom quickly.
+"Do you think that we——?"</p>
+
+<p>"Pardon, Senor," replied Jacinto softly. "I meant
+no offense. I think that all you scientific
+parties will take treasure if you can find it."</p>
+
+<p>"We are looking for traces of the old Honduras
+civilization," put in Professor Bumper.</p>
+
+<p>"And doubtless you will find it," was the
+somewhat too courteous answer of the guide.
+"Make camp quickly!" he called to the Indians
+in their tongue. "You must soon get under the
+nets or you will be eaten alive!" he told Tom.
+"There are many mosquitoes here."</p>
+
+<p>The tents were set up, smudge fires built and
+supper quickly prepared. Dusk fell rapidly, and
+as Tom and Ned walked a little way down
+toward the river before turning in under the
+mosquito canopies, the young financial man said:</p>
+
+<p>"Sort of lonesome and gloomy, isn't it, Tom?"</p>
+
+<p>"Yes. But you didn't expect to find a moving
+picture show in the wilds of Honduras, did you?"</p>
+
+<p>"No, and yet— Look out! What's that?"
+suddenly cried Ned, as a great soft, black shadow
+seemed to sweep out of a clump of trees toward
+him. Involuntarily he clutched Tom's arm and
+pointed, his face showing fear in the fast-gathering
+darkness.</p>
+
+<hr />
+
+<h2><a name="chapterxi" id="chapterxi">CHAPTER XI</a></h2>
+
+<h3>THE VAMPIRES</h3>
+
+
+<p>Tom Swift looked deliberately around. It
+was characteristic of him that, though by nature
+he was prompt in action, he never acted so hurriedly
+as to obscure his judgment. So, though
+now Ned showed a trace of strange excitement,
+Tom was cool.</p>
+
+<p>"What is it?" asked the young inventor.
+"What's the matter? What did you think you saw,
+Ned; another alligator?"</p>
+
+<p>"Alligator? Nonsense! Up on shore? I saw
+a black shadow, and I didn't THINK I saw it,
+either. I really did."</p>
+
+<p>Tom laughed quietly.</p>
+
+<p>"A shadow!" he exclaimed. "Since when
+were you afraid of shadows, Ned?"</p>
+
+<p>"I'm not afraid of ordinary shadows," answered
+Ned, and in his voice there was an uncertain
+tone. "I'm not afraid of my shadow or
+yours, Tom, or anybody's that I can see. But
+this wasn't any human shadow. It was as if a
+great big blob of wet darkness had been waved
+over your head."</p>
+
+<p>"That's a queer explanation," Tom said in a
+low voice. "A great big blob of wet darkness!"</p>
+
+<p>"But that just describes it," went on Ned,
+looking up and around. "It was just as if you were in
+some dark room, and some one waved a wet
+velvet cloak over your head—spooky like! It
+didn't make a sound, but there was a smell as
+if a den of some wild beast was near here. I
+remember that odor from the time we went
+hunting with your electric rifle in the jungle, and
+got near the den in the rocks where the tigers
+lived."</p>
+
+<p>"Well, there is a wild beast smell all around
+here," admitted Tom, sniffing the air. "It's the
+alligators in the river I guess. You know they
+have an odor of musk."</p>
+
+<p>"Do you mean to say you didn't feel that
+shadow flying over us just now?" asked Ned.</p>
+
+<p>"Well, I felt something sail through the air,
+but I took it to be a big bird. I didn't pay much
+attention. To tell you the truth I was thinking
+about Beecher—wondering when he would get
+here," added Tom quickly as if to forestall any
+question as to whether or not his thoughts had
+to do with Beecher in connection with Tom's
+affair of the heart.</p>
+
+<p>"Well it wasn't a bird—at least not a regular
+bird," said Ned in a low voice, as once more he
+looked at the dark and gloomy jungle that
+stretched back from the river and behind the
+little clearing where the camp had been made.</p>
+
+<p>"Come on!" cried Tom, in what he tried to
+make a cheerful voice. "This is getting on your
+nerves, Ned, and I didn't know you had any.
+Let's go back and turn in. I'm dog-tired and
+the mosquitoes are beginning to find that we're
+here. Let's get under the nets. Then the black
+shadows won't get you."</p>
+
+<p>Not at all unwilling to leave so gloomy a scene,
+Ned, after a brief glance up and down the dark
+river, followed his chum. They found Professor
+Bumper and Mr. Damon in their tent, a separate
+one having been set up for the two men adjoining
+that of the youths.</p>
+
+<p>"Bless my fountain pen!" exclaimed Mr. Damon,
+as he caught sight of Tom and Ned in the
+flickering light of the smudge fire between the
+two canvas shelters. "We were just wondering
+what had become of you."</p>
+
+<p>"We were chasing shadows!" laughed Tom.
+"At least Ned was. But you look cozy enough in there."</p>
+
+<p>It did, indeed, look cheerful in contrast to the
+damp and dark jungle all about. Professor Bumper,
+being an experienced traveler, knew how to
+provide for such comforts as were possible. Folding
+cots had been opened for himself, Mr. Damon
+and the guide to sleep on, others, similar, being
+set up in the tent where Tom and Ned were to
+sleep. In the middle of the tent the professor
+had made a table of his own and Mr.
+Damon's suit cases, and on this placed a small
+dry battery electric light. He was making some
+notes, doubtless for a future book. Jacinto was
+going about the camp, seeing that the Indians
+were at their duties, though most of them had
+gone directly to sleep after supper.</p>
+
+<p>"Better get inside and under the nets," advised
+Professor Bumper to Tom and Ned. "The mosquitoes
+here are the worst I ever saw."</p>
+
+<p>"We're beginning to believe that," returned
+Ned, who was unusually quiet. "Come on,
+Tom. I can't stand it any longer. I'm itching
+in a dozen places now from their bites."</p>
+
+<p>As Tom and Ned had no wish for a light,
+which would be sure to attract insects, they
+entered their tent in the dark, and were soon
+stretched out in comparative comfort. Tom was
+just on the edge of a deep sleep when he heard
+Ned murmur:</p>
+
+<p>"I can't understand it!"</p>
+
+<p>"What's that?" asked the young inventor.</p>
+
+<p>"I say I can't understand it."</p>
+
+<p>"Understand what?"</p>
+
+<p>"That shadow. It was real and yet——"</p>
+
+<p>"Oh, go to sleep!" advised Tom, and, turning
+over, he was soon breathing heavily and regularly,
+indicating that he, at least, had taken his own advice.</p>
+
+<p>Ned, too, finally succumbed to the overpowering
+weariness of the first day of travel, and he,
+too, slept, though it was an uneasy slumber,
+disturbed by a feeling as though some one were
+holding a heavy black quilt over his head,
+preventing him from breathing.</p>
+
+<p>The feeling, sensation or dream—whatever it
+was—perhaps a nightmare—became at last so
+real to Ned that he struggled himself into
+wakefulness. With an effort he sat up, uttering an
+inarticulate cry. To his surprise he was
+answered. Some one asked:</p>
+
+<p>"What is the matter?"</p>
+
+<p>"Who—who are you?" asked Ned quickly,
+trying to peer through the darkness.</p>
+
+<p>"This is Jacinto—your guide," was the soft
+answer. "I was walking about camp and, hearing
+you murmuring, I came to your tent. Is
+anything wrong?"</p>
+
+<p>For a moment Ned did not answer. He
+listened and could tell by the continued heavy
+and regular breathing of his chum that Tom
+was still asleep.</p>
+
+<p>"Are you in our tent?" asked Ned, at length:</p>
+
+<p>"Yes," answered Jacinto. "I came in to see
+what was the matter with you. Are you ill?"</p>
+
+<p>"No, of course not," said Ned, a bit shortly.
+"I—I had a bad dream, that was all. All
+right now."</p>
+
+<p>"For that I am glad. Try to get all the sleep
+you can, for we must start early to avoid the
+heat of the day," and there was the sound of
+the guide leaving and arranging the folds of the
+mosquito net behind him to keep out the night-flying
+insects.</p>
+
+<p>Once more Ned composed himself to sleep, and
+this time successfully, for he did not have any
+more unpleasant dreams. The quiet of the
+jungle settled down over the camp, at least the
+comparative quiet of the jungle, for there were
+always noises of some sort going on, from the
+fall of some rotten tree limb to the scream or
+growl of a wild beast, while, now and again, from
+the river came the pig-like grunts of the alligators.</p>
+
+<p>It was about two o'clock in the morning, as
+they ascertained later, when the whole camp—
+white travelers and all—was suddenly awakened
+by a wild scream. It seemed to come from one
+of the natives, who called out a certain word
+ever and over again. To Tom and Ned it
+sounded like:</p>
+
+<p>"Oshtoo! Oshtoo! Oshtoo!"</p>
+
+<p>"What's the matter?" cried Professor Bumper.</p>
+
+<p>"The vampires!" came the answering voice of
+Jacinto. "One of the Indians has been attacked
+by a big vampire bat! Look out, every one!
+It may be a raid by the dangerous creatures!
+Be careful!"</p>
+
+<p>Notwithstanding this warning Ned stuck his
+head out of the tent. The same instant he was
+aware of a dark enfolding shadow passing over
+him, and, with a shudder of fear, he jumped back.</p>
+
+<hr />
+
+<h2><a name="chapterxii" id="chapterxii">CHAPTER XII</a></h2>
+
+<h3>A FALSE FRIEND</h3>
+
+
+<p>"What is it? What's the matter?" cried Tom
+springing from his cot and hastening to the side
+of his chum in the tent. "What has happened, Ned?"</p>
+
+<p>"I don't know, but Jacinto is yelling
+something about vampires!"</p>
+
+<p>"Vampires?"</p>
+
+<p>"Yes. Big bats. And he's warning us to be
+careful. I stuck my head out just now and I
+felt that same sort of shadow I felt this evening
+when we were down near the river."</p>
+
+<p>"Nonsense!"</p>
+
+<p>"I tell you I did!"</p>
+
+<p>At that instant Tom flashed a pocket electric
+lamp he had taken from beneath his pillow and
+in the gleam of it he and Ned saw fluttering
+about the tent some dark, shadow-like form, at
+the sight of which Tom's chum cried:</p>
+
+<p>"There it is! That's the shadow! Look out!"
+and he held up his hands instinctively to shield
+his face.</p>
+
+<p>"Shadow!" yelled Tom, unconsciously adding
+to the din that seemed to pervade every part of
+the camp. "That isn't a shadow. It's
+substance. It's a monster bat, and here goes
+for a strike at it!"</p>
+
+<p>He caught up his camera tripod which was near
+his cot, and made a swing with it at the creature
+that had flown into the tent through an opening
+it had made for itself.</p>
+
+<p>"Look out!" yelled Ned. "If it's a vampire it'll——"</p>
+
+<p>"It won't do anything to me!" shouted Tom,
+as he struck the creature, knocking it into the
+corner of the tent with a thud that told it must
+be completely stunned, if not killed. "But
+what's it all about, anyhow?" Tom asked.
+"What's the row?"</p>
+
+<p>From without the tent came the Indian cries of:</p>
+
+<p>"Oshtoo! Oshtoo!"</p>
+
+<p>Mingled with them were calls of Jacinto, partly
+in Spanish, partly in the Indian tongue and
+partly in English.</p>
+
+<p>"It is a raid by vampire bats!" was all Tom
+and Ned could distinguish. "We shall have
+to light fires to keep them away, if we can succeed.
+Every one grab up a club and strike hard!"</p>
+
+<p>"Come on!" cried Tom, getting on some clothes
+by the light of his gleaming electric light
+which he had set on his cot.</p>
+
+<p>"You're not going out there, are you?" asked Ned.</p>
+
+<p>"I certainly am! If there's a fight I want to
+be in it, bats or anything else. Here, you have
+a light like mine. Flash it on, and hang it
+somewhere on yourself. Then get a club and
+come on. The lights will blind the bats, and
+we can see to hit 'em!"</p>
+
+<p>Tom's plan seemed to be a good one. His
+lamp and Ned's had small hooks on them, so
+they could be carried in the upper coat pocket,
+showing a gleam of light and leaving the hands
+free for use.</p>
+
+<p>Out of the tents rushed the young men to find
+Professor Bumper and Mr. Damon before them.
+The two men had clubs and were striking about
+in the half darkness, for now the Indians had set
+several fires aglow. And in the gleams,
+constantly growing brighter as more fuel was piled
+on, the young inventor and his chum saw a
+weird sight.</p>
+
+<p>Circling and wheeling about in the camp clearing
+were many of the black shadowy forms that
+had caused Ned such alarm. Great bats they
+were, and a dangerous species, if Jacinto was
+to be believed.</p>
+
+<p>The uncanny creatures flew in and out among
+the trees and tents, now swooping low near the
+Indians or the travelers. At such times clubs
+would be used, often with the effect of killing or
+stunning the flying pests. For a time it seemed
+as if the bats would fairly overwhelm the camp,
+so many of them were there. But the increasing
+lights, and the attacks made by the Indians and
+the white travelers turned the tide of battle, and,
+with silent flappings of their soft, velvety wings,
+the bats flew back to the jungle whence they had emerged.</p>
+
+<p>"We are safe—for the present!" exclaimed
+Jacinto with a sigh of relief.</p>
+
+<p>"Do you think they will come back?" asked Tom.</p>
+
+<p>"They may—there is no telling."</p>
+
+<p>"Bless my speedometer!" cried Mr. Damon,
+"If those beasts or birds—whatever they are—
+come back I'll go and hide in the river and take
+my chances with the alligators!"</p>
+
+<p>"The alligators aren't much worse," asserted
+Jacinto with a visible shiver. "These vampire
+bats sometimes depopulate a whole village."</p>
+
+<p>"Bless my shoe laces!" cried Mr. Damon. "You
+don't mean to say that the creatures can eat up a
+whole village?"</p>
+
+<p>"Not quite. Though they might if they got
+the chance," was the answer of the Spanish
+guide. "These vampire bats fly from place to
+place in great swarms, and they are so large and
+blood-thirsty that a few of them can kill a horse
+or an ox in a short time by sucking its blood. So
+when the villagers find they are visited by a
+colony of these vampires they get out, taking
+their live stock with them, and stay in caves or in
+densely wooded places until the bats fly on.
+Then the villagers come back.</p>
+
+<p>"It was only a small colony that visited us to-night
+or we would have had more trouble. I do
+not think this lot will come back. We have
+killed too many of them," and he looked about
+on the ground where many of the uncanny creatures
+were still twitching in the death struggle.</p>
+
+<p>"Come back again!" cried Mr. Damon. "Bless
+my skin! I hope not! I've had enough of bats—
+and mosquitoes," he added, as he slapped at his
+face and neck.</p>
+
+<p>Indeed the party of whites were set upon by
+the night insects to such an extent that it was
+necessary to hurry back to the protection of the
+nets.</p>
+
+<p>Tom and Ned kicked outside the bat the former
+had killed in their tent, and then both went back
+to their cots. But it was some little time
+before they fell asleep. And they did not have
+much time to rest, for an early start must be
+made to avoid the terrible heat of the middle of
+the day.</p>
+
+<p>"Whew!" whistled Ned, as he and Tom arose
+in the gray dawn of the morning when Jacinto
+announced the breakfast which the Indian cook
+had prepared. "That was some night! If this
+is a sample of the wilds of Honduras, give me
+the tameness of Shopton."</p>
+
+<p>"Oh, we've gone through with worse than
+this," laughed Tom. "It's all in the day's work.
+We've only got started. I guess we're a bit
+soft, Ned, though we had hard enough work in
+that tunnel-digging."</p>
+
+<p>After breakfast, while the Indians were making
+ready the canoes, Professor Bumper, who,
+in a previous visit to Central America, had
+become interested in the subject, made a brief
+examination of some of the dead bats. They were
+exceptionally large, some almost as big as hawks.
+and were of the sub-family Desmodidae, the scientist
+said.</p>
+
+<p>"This is a true blood-sucking bat," went on
+the professor. "This," and he pointed to the
+nose-leaves, "is the sucking apparatus. The
+bat makes an opening in the skin with its sharp
+teeth and proceeds to extract the blood. I can
+well believe two or three of them, attacking a
+steer or mule at once, could soon weaken it so
+the animal would die."</p>
+
+<p>"And a man, too?" asked Ned.</p>
+
+<p>"Well a man has hands with which to use
+weapons, but a helpless quadruped has not.
+Though if a sufficient number of these bats
+attacked a man at the same time, he would have
+small chance to escape alive. Their bites, too,
+may be poisonous for all I know."</p>
+
+<p>The Indians seemed glad to leave the "place
+of the bats," as they called the camp site. Jacinto
+explained that the Indians believed a vampire
+could kill them while they slept, and they were
+very much afraid of the blood-sucking bats.
+There were many other species in the tropics,
+Professor Bumper explained, most of which
+lived on fruit or on insects they caught. The
+blood-sucking bats were comparatively few, and
+the migratory sort fewer still.</p>
+
+<p>"Well, we're on our way once more,"
+remarked Tom as again they were in the canoes
+being paddled up the river. "How much
+longer does your water trip take, Professor?"</p>
+
+<p>"I hardly know," and Professor Bumper looked
+to Jacinto to answer.</p>
+
+<p>"We go two more days in the canoes," the
+guide answered, "and then we shall find the
+mules waiting for us at a place called Hidjio.
+From then on we travel by land until—well until
+you get to the place where you are going.</p>
+
+<p>"I suppose you know where it is?" he added,
+nodding toward the professor. "I am leaving
+that part to you."</p>
+
+<p>"Oh, I have a map, showing where I want to
+begin some excavations," was the answer. "We
+must first go to Copan and see what arrangements
+we can make for laborers. After that—well, we
+shall trust to luck for what we shall find."</p>
+
+<p>"There are said to be many curious things,"
+went on Jacinto, speaking as though he had no
+interest. "You have mentioned buried cities.
+Have you thought what may be in them—great
+heathen temples, idols, perhaps?"</p>
+
+<p>For a moment none of the professor's
+companions spoke. It was as though Jacinto had
+tried to get some information. Finally the
+scientist said:</p>
+
+<p>"Oh, yes, we may find an idol. I understand
+the ancient people, who were here long before
+the Spaniards came, worshiped idols. But we
+shall take whatever antiquities we find."</p>
+
+<p>"Huh!" grunted Jacinto, and then he called
+to the paddlers to increase their strokes.</p>
+
+<p>The journey up the river was not very
+eventful. Many alligators were seen, and Tom and
+Ned shot several with the electric rifle. Toward
+the close of the third day's travel there was a
+cry from one of the rear boats, and an alarm of
+a man having fallen overboard was given.</p>
+
+<p>Tom turned in time to see the poor fellow's
+struggles, and at the same time there was a swirl
+in the water and a black object shot forward.</p>
+
+<p>"An alligator is after him!" yelled Ned.</p>
+
+<p>"I see," observed Tom calmly. "Hand me the rifle, Ned."</p>
+
+<p>Tom took quick aim and pulled the trigger.
+The explosive electric bullet went true to its
+mark, and the great animal turned over in a death
+struggle. But the river was filled with them, and
+no sooner had the one nearest the unfortunate
+Indian been disposed of than another made a
+dash for the man.</p>
+
+<p>There was a wild scream of agony and then
+a dark arm shot up above the red foam. The
+waters seethed and bubbled as the alligators
+fought under it for possession of the paddler.
+Tom fired bullet after bullet from his wonderful
+rifle into the spot, but though he killed some
+of the alligators this did not save the man's life.
+His body was not seen again, though search was
+made for it.</p>
+
+<p>The accident cast a little damper over the
+party, and there was a feeling of gloom among
+the Indians. Professor Bumper announced that
+he would see to it that the man's family did not
+want, and this seemed to give general satisfaction,
+especially to a brother who was with the
+party.</p>
+
+<p>Aside from being caught in a drenching storm
+and one or two minor accidents, nothing else
+of moment marked the remainder of the river
+journey, and at the end of the third day the
+canoes pulled to shore and a night camp was
+made.</p>
+
+<p>"But where are the mules we are to use in
+traveling to-morrow?" asked the professor of Jacinto.</p>
+
+<p>"In the next village. We shall march there
+in the morning. No use to go there at night
+when all is dark."</p>
+
+<p>"I suppose that is so."</p>
+
+<p>The Indians made camp as usual, the goods being
+brought from the canoes and piled up near
+the tents. Then night settled down.</p>
+
+<p>"Hello!" cried Tom, awakening the next morning
+to find the sun streaming into his tent. "We
+must have overslept, Ned. We were to start
+before old Sol got in his heavy work, but we
+haven't had breakfast yet."</p>
+
+<p>"I didn't hear any one call us," remarked Ned.</p>
+
+<p>"Nor I. Wonder if we're the only lazy birds."
+He looked from the tent in time to see Mr.
+Damon and the professor emerging. Then Tom
+noticed something queer. The canoes were not
+on the river bank. There was not an Indian
+in sight, and no evidence of Jacinto.</p>
+
+<p>"What's the matter?" asked the young
+inventor. "Have the others gone on ahead?"</p>
+
+<p>"I rather think they've gone back," was the
+professor's dry comment.</p>
+
+<p>"Gone back?"</p>
+
+<p>"Yes. The Indians seem to have deserted us
+at the ending of this stage of our journey."</p>
+
+<p>"Bless my time-table!" cried Mr. Damon.
+"You don't say so! What does it mean? What
+has becomes of our friend Jacinto?"</p>
+
+<p>"I'm afraid he was rather a false friend," was
+the professor's answer. "This is the note he left.
+He has gone and taken the canoes and all the
+Indians with him," and he held out a paper on
+which was some scribbled writing.</p>
+
+<hr />
+
+<h2><a name="chapterxiii" id="chapterxiii">CHAPTER XIII</a></h2>
+
+<h3>FORWARD AGAIN</h3>
+
+
+<p>"What does it all mean?" asked Tom, seeing
+that the note was written in Spanish, a tongue
+which he could speak slightly but read indifferently.</p>
+
+<p>"This is some of Beecher's work," was
+Professor Bumper's grim comment. "It seems that
+Jacinto was in his pay."</p>
+
+<p>"In his pay!" cried Mr. Damon. "Do you mean
+that Beecher deliberately hired Jacinto to betray us?"</p>
+
+<p>"Well, no. Not that exactly. Here, I'll translate
+this note for you," and the professor proceeded to read:</p>
+
+
+<blockquote><p>"Senors: I greatly regret the step I have to
+take, but I am a gentleman, and, having given
+my word, I must keep it. No harm shall come
+to you, I swear it on my honor!"</p></blockquote>
+
+
+<p>"Queer idea of honor he has!" commented Tom, grimly.</p>
+
+<p>Professor Bumper read on:</p>
+
+
+<blockquote><p>"Know then, that before I engaged myself to
+you I had been engaged by Professor Beecher
+through a friend to guide him into the Copan
+valley, where he wants to make some explorations,
+for what I know not, save maybe that it
+is for gold. I agreed, in case any rival expeditions
+came to lead them astray if I could.</p>
+
+<p>"So, knowing from what you said that you
+were going to this place, I engaged myself to you,
+planning to do what I have done. I greatly regret
+it, as I have come to like you, but I had
+given my promise to Professor Beecher's friend,
+that I would first lead him to the Copan valley,
+and would keep others away until he had had a
+chance to do his exploration.</p>
+
+<p>"So I have led you to this wilderness. It is
+far from the Copan, but you are near an Indian
+village, and you will be able to get help in a week
+or so. In the meanwhile you will not starve, as
+you have plenty of supplies. If you will travel
+northeast you will come again to Puerto Cortes
+in due season. As for the money I had from
+you, I deposit it to your credit, Professor Beecher
+having made me an allowance for steering rival
+parties on the wrong trail. So I lose nothing,
+and I save my honor.</p>
+
+<p>"I write this note as I am leaving in the night
+with the Indians. I put some harmless sedative
+in your tea that you might sleep soundly, and not
+awaken until we were well on our way. Do not
+try to follow us, as the river will carry us swiftly
+away. And, let me add, there is no personal
+animosity on the part of Professor Beecher
+against you. I should have done to any rival
+expedition the same as I have done with you.</p>
+
+<div class="right">JACINTO."</div></blockquote>
+
+
+<p>For a moment there was silence, and then Tom
+Swift burst out with:</p>
+
+<p>"Well, of all the mean, contemptible tricks
+of a human skunk this is the limit!"</p>
+
+<p>"Bless my hairbrush, but he is a scoundrel!"
+ejaculated Mr. Damon, with great warmth.</p>
+
+<p>"I'd like to start after him the biggest alligator
+in the river," was Ned's comment.</p>
+
+<p>Professor Bumper said nothing for several
+seconds. There was a strange look on his face,
+and then he laughed shortly, as though the humor
+of the situation appealed to him.</p>
+
+<p>"Professor Beecher has more gumption than I gave
+him credit for," he said. "It was a clever trick!"</p>
+
+<p>"Trick!" cried Tom.</p>
+
+<p>"Yes. I can't exactly agree that it was the
+right thing to do, but he, or some friend acting
+for him, seems to have taken precautions that
+we are not to suffer or lose money. Beecher
+goes on the theory that all is fair in love and
+war, I suppose, and he may call this a sort of
+scientific war."</p>
+
+<p>Ned wondered, as he looked at his chum, how
+much love there was in it. Clearly Beecher was
+determined to get that idol of gold.</p>
+
+<p>"Well, it can't be helped, and we must make
+the best of it," said Tom, after a pause.</p>
+
+<p>"True. But now, boys, let's have breakfast,
+and then we'll make what goods we can't take
+with us as snug as possible, until we can send
+the mule drivers after them," went on Professor
+Bumper.</p>
+
+<p>"Send the mule drivers after them?" questioned Ned.
+"What do you mean to do?"</p>
+
+<p>"Do? Why keep on, of course. You don't
+suppose I'm going to let a little thing like this
+stand between me and the discovery of Kurzon
+and the idol of gold, do you?"</p>
+
+<p>"But," began Mr. Damon, "I don't see how—"</p>
+
+<p>"Oh, we'll find a way," interrupted Tom. "It
+isn't the first time I've been pretty well stranded
+on an expedition of this kind, and sometimes
+from the same cause—the actions of a rival.
+Now we'll turn the tables on the other fellows
+and see how they like it. The professor's right
+—let's have breakfast. Jacinto seems to have
+told the truth. Nothing of ours is missing."</p>
+
+<p>Tom and Ned got the meal, and then a
+consultation was held as to what was best to be
+done.</p>
+
+<p>"We can't go on any further by water, that's
+sure," said Tom. "In the first place the river
+is too shallow, and secondly we have no canoes.
+So the only thing is to go on foot through the
+jungle."</p>
+
+<p>"But how can we, and carry all this stuff?"
+asked Ned.</p>
+
+<p>"We needn't carry it!" cried Professor Bumper.
+"We'll leave it here, where it will be safe enough,
+and tramp on to the nearest Indian village.
+There we'll hire bearers to take our stuff on until
+we can get mules. I'm not going to turn back!"</p>
+
+<p>"Good!" cried Mr. Damon. "Bless my
+rubber boots! but that's what I say—keep on!"</p>
+
+<p>"Oh, no! we'll never turn back," agreed Tom.</p>
+
+<p>"But how can we manage it?" asked Ned.</p>
+
+<p>"We've just got to! And when you have
+to do a thing, it's a whole lot easier to do than
+if you just feel as though you ought to. So,
+lively is the word!" cried Tom, in answer.</p>
+
+<p>"We'll pack up what we can carry and leave
+the rest," added the scientist.</p>
+
+<p>Being an experienced traveler Professor Bumper
+had arranged his baggage so that it could
+be carried by porters if necessary. Everything
+could be put into small packages, including the
+tents and food supply.</p>
+
+<p>"There are four of us," remarked Tom, "and if
+we can not pack enough along with us to enable
+us to get to the nearest village, we had better
+go back to civilization. I'm not afraid to try."</p>
+
+<p>"Nor I!" cried Mr. Damon.</p>
+
+<p>The baggage, stores and supplies that were
+to be left behind were made as snug as possible,
+and so piled up that wild beasts could do the
+least harm. Then a pack was made up for each
+one to carry.</p>
+
+<p>They would take weapons, of course, Tom
+Swift's electric rifle being the one he choose for
+himself. They expected to be able to shoot
+game on their way, and this would provide them
+food in addition to the concentrated supply they
+carried. Small tents, in sections, were carried,
+there being two, one for Tom and Ned and one
+for Mr. Damon and the professor.</p>
+
+<p>As far as could be learned from a casual
+inspection, Jacinto and his deserting Indians had
+taken back with them only a small quantity of
+food. They were traveling light and down
+stream, and could reach the town much more
+quickly than they had come away from it.</p>
+
+<p>"That Beecher certainly was slick," commented
+Professor Bumper when they were ready to
+start. "He must have known about what time
+I would arrive, and he had Jacinto waiting for
+us. I thought it was too good to be true, to get
+an experienced guide like him so easily. But it
+was all planned, and I was so engrossed in thinking
+of the ancient treasures I hope to find that
+I never thought of a possible trick. Well, let's
+start!" and he led the way into the jungle, carrying
+his heavy pack as lightly as did Tom.</p>
+
+<p>Professor Bumper had a general idea in which
+direction lay a number of native villages, and it
+was determined to head for them, blazing a path
+through the wilderness, so that the Indians could
+follow it back to the goods left behind.</p>
+
+<p>It was with rather heavy hearts that the party
+set off, but Tom's spirits could not long stay
+clouded, and the scientist was so good-natured
+about the affair and seemed so eager to do the
+utmost to render Beecher's trick void, that the
+others fell into a lighter mood, and went on
+more cheerfully, though the way was rough and
+the packs heavy.</p>
+
+<p>They stopped at noon under a bower they made
+of palms, and, spreading the nets over them, got a
+little rest after a lunch. Then, when the sun
+was less hot, they started off again.</p>
+
+<p>"Forward is the word!" cried Ned cheerfully. "Forward!"'</p>
+
+<p>They had not gone more than an hour on the
+second stage of their tramp when Tom, who
+was in the lead, following the direction laid out
+by the compass, suddenly stopped, and reached
+around for his electric rifle, which he was carrying
+at his back.</p>
+
+<p>"What is it?" asked Ned in a whisper.</p>
+
+<p>"I don't know, but it's some big animal there
+in the bushes," was Tom's low-voiced answer.
+"I'm ready for it."</p>
+
+<p>The rustling increased, and a form could be
+seen indistinctly. Tom aimed the deadly gun
+and stood ready to pull the trigger.</p>
+
+<p>Ned, tho had a side view into the underbrush,
+gave a sudden cry.</p>
+
+<p>"Don't shoot, Tom!" he yelled. "It's a man!"</p>
+
+<hr />
+
+<h2><a name="chapterxiv" id="chapterxiv">CHAPTER XIV</a></h2>
+
+<h3>A NEW GUIDE</h3>
+
+
+<p>In spite of Ned Newton's cry, Tom's finger
+pressed the switch-trigger of the electric rifle,
+for previous experience had taught him that it
+was sometimes the best thing to awe the natives
+in out-of-the-way corners of the earth. But the
+young inventor quickly elevated the muzzle, and
+the deadly missile went hissing through the air
+over the head of a native Indian who, at that
+moment, stepped from the bush.</p>
+
+<p>The man, startled and alarmed, shrank back
+and was about to run into the jungle whence he
+had emerged. Small wonder if he had, considering
+the reception he so unwittingly met with.
+But Tom. aware of the necessity for making
+inquiries of one who knew that part of the jungle,
+quickly called to him.</p>
+
+<p>"Hold on!" he shouted. "Wait a minute. I didn't
+mean that. I thought at first you were a
+tapir or a tiger. No harm intended. I say,
+Professor," Tom called back to the savant,
+"you'd better speak to him in his lingo, I can't
+manage it. He may be useful in guiding us to
+that Indian village Jacinto told us of."</p>
+
+<p>This Professor Bumper did, being able to make
+himself understood in the queer part-Spanish
+dialect used by the native Hondurians, though
+he could not, of course, speak it as fluently as
+had Jacinto.</p>
+
+<p>Professor Bumper had made only a few remarks
+to the man who had so unexpectedly appeared
+out of the jungle when the scientist gave an
+exclamation of surprise at some of the answers made.</p>
+
+<p>"Bless my moving picture!" cried Mr. Damon.</p>
+
+<p>"What's the matter now? Is anything wrong?
+Does he refuse to help us?"</p>
+
+<p>"No, it isn't that," was the answer. "In fact
+he came here to help us. Tom, this is the brother
+of the Indian who fell overboard and who was eaten
+by the alligators. He says you were very kind
+to try to save his brother with your rifle,
+and for that reason he has come back to help us."</p>
+
+<p>"Come back?" queried Tom.</p>
+
+<p>"Yes, he went off with the rest of the Indians
+when Jacinto deserted us, but he could not stand
+being a traitor, after you had tried to save his
+brother's life. These Indians are queer people.</p>
+
+<p>They don't show much emotion, but they have
+deep feelings. This one says he will devote
+himself to your service from now on. I believe
+we can count on him. He is deeply grateful to
+you, Tom."</p>
+
+<p>"I'm glad of that for all our sakes. But what
+does he say about Jacinto?"</p>
+
+<p>The professor asked some more questions,
+receiving answers, and then translated them.</p>
+
+<p>"This Indian, whose name is Tolpec, says
+Jacinto is a fraud," exclaimed Professor Bumper.
+"He made all the Indians leave us in the night,
+though many of them were willing to stay and
+fill the contract they had made. But Jacinto
+would not let them, making them desert. Tolpec
+went away with the others, but because of what
+Tom had done he planned to come back at the
+first chance and be our guide. Accordingly he
+jumped ashore from one of the canoes, and made
+his way to our camp. He got there, found it
+deserted and followed us, coming up just now."</p>
+
+<p>"Well I'm glad I didn't frighten him off with
+my gun," remarked Tom grimly. "So he agrees
+with us that Jacinto is a scoundrel, does he?
+I guess he might as well classify Professor
+Beecher in the same way."</p>
+
+<p>"I am not quite so sure of that," said Professor
+Bumper slowly. "I can not believe Beecher
+would play such a trick as this, though some
+over-zealous friend of his might."</p>
+
+<p>"Oh, of course Beecher did it!" cried Tom.
+"He heard we were coming here, figured out that
+we'd start ahead of him, and he wanted to sidetrack
+us. Well, he did it all right," and Tom's
+voice was bitter.</p>
+
+<p>"He has only side-tracked us for a while,"
+announced Professor Bumper in cheerful tones.</p>
+
+<p>"What do you mean?" asked Mr. Damon.</p>
+
+<p>"I mean that this Indian comes just in the nick
+of time. He is well acquainted with this part
+of the jungle, having lived here all his life,
+and he offers to guide us to a place where we can
+get mules to transport ourselves and our baggage
+to Copan."</p>
+
+<p>"Fine!" cried Ned. "When can we start?"</p>
+
+<p>Once more the professor and the native
+conversed in the strange tongue, and then Professor
+Bumper announced:</p>
+
+<p>"He says it will be better for us to go back
+where we left our things and camp there. He
+will stay with us to-night and in the morning go
+on to the nearest Indian town and come back
+with porters and helpers."</p>
+
+<p>"I think that is good advice to follow," put in
+Tom, "for we do need our goods; and if we
+reached the settlement ourselves, we would have
+to send back for our things, with the uncertainty
+of getting them all."</p>
+
+<p>So it was agreed that they would make a forced
+march back through the jungle to where they
+had been deserted by Jacinto. There they would
+make camp for the night, and until such time as
+Tolpec could return with a force of porters.</p>
+
+<p>It was not easy, that backward tramp through
+the jungle, especially as night had fallen. But
+the new Indian guide could see like a cat, and
+led the party along paths they never could have
+found by themselves. The use of their pocket
+electric lights was a great help, and possibly
+served to ward off the attacks of jungle beasts,
+for as they tramped along they could hear stealthy
+sounds in the underbush on either side of the
+path, as though tigers were stalking them. For
+there was in the woods an animal of the leopard
+family, called tiger or "tigre" by the natives,
+that was exceedingly fierce and dangerous. But
+watchfulness prevented any accident, and eventually
+the party reached the place where they had
+left their goods. Nothing had been disturbed,
+and finally a fire was made, the tents set up and
+a light meal, with hot tea served.</p>
+
+<p>"We'll get ahead of Beecher yet," said Tom.</p>
+
+<p>"You seem as anxious as Professor Bumper,"
+observed Mr. Damon,</p>
+
+<p>"I guess I am," admitted Tom. "I want to
+see that idol of gold in the possession of our
+party."</p>
+
+<p>The night passed without incident, and then,
+telling his new friends that he would return as
+soon as possible with help, Tolpec, taking a
+small supply of food with him, set out through
+the jungle again.</p>
+
+<p>As the green vines and creepers closed after
+him, and the explorers were left alone with their
+possessions piled around them, Ned remarked:</p>
+
+<p>"After all, I wonder if it was wise to let him go?"</p>
+
+<p>"Why not?" asked Tom.</p>
+
+<p>"Well, maybe he only wanted to get us back
+here, and then he'll desert, too. Maybe that's
+what he's done now, making us lose two or three
+days by inducing us to return, waiting for what
+will never happen—his return with other
+natives."</p>
+
+<p>A silence followed Ned's intimation.</p>
+
+<hr />
+
+<h2><a name="chapterxv" id="chapterxv">CHAPTER XV</a></h2>
+
+<h3>IN THE COILS</h3>
+
+
+<p>"Ned, do you really think Tolpec is going to
+desert us?" asked Tom.</p>
+
+<p>"Well, I don't know," was the slowly given reply.
+"It's a possibility, isn't it?"</p>
+
+<p>"Yes, it is," broke in Professor Bumper. "But
+what if it is? We might as well trust him, and
+if he proves true, as I believe he will, we'll be
+so much better off. If he proves a traitor we'll
+only have lost a few days, for if he doesn't come
+back we can go on again in the way we started."</p>
+
+<p>"But that's just it!" complained Tom. "We
+don't want to lose any time with that Beecher
+chap on our trail."</p>
+
+<p>"I am not so very much concerned about him,"
+remarked Professor Bumper, dryly.</p>
+
+<p>"Why not?" snapped out Mr. Damon.</p>
+
+<p>"Well, because I think he'll have just about
+as hard work locating the hidden city, and finding
+the idol of gold, as we'll have. In other words
+it will be an even thing, unless he gets too far
+ahead of us, or keeps us back, and I don't believe
+he can do that now.</p>
+
+<p>"So I thought it best to take a chance with this
+Indian. He would hardly have taken the trouble
+to come all the way back, and run the risks he
+did, just to delay us a few days. However, we'll
+soon know. Meanwhile, we'll take it easy and
+wait for the return of Tolpec and his friends."</p>
+
+<p>Though none of them liked to admit it, Ned's
+words had caused his three friends some anxiety,
+and though they busied themselves about the
+camp there was an air of waiting impatiently for
+something to occur. And waiting is about the
+hardest work there is.</p>
+
+<p>But there was nothing for it but to wait, and
+it might be at least a week, Professor Bumper
+said, before the Indian could return with a party
+of porters and mules to move their baggage.</p>
+
+<p>"Yes, Tolpec has not only to locate the
+settlement," Tom admitted, "but he must persuade the
+natives to come back with him. He may have
+trouble in that, especially if it is known that he
+has left Jacinto, who, I imagine, is a power among
+the tribes here."</p>
+
+<p>But there were only two things left to do—wait
+and hope. The travelers did both. Four days
+passed and there was no sign of Tolpec. Eagerly,
+and not a little anxiously, they watched the
+jungle path along which he had disappeared.</p>
+
+<p>"Oh, come on!" exclaimed Tom one morning,
+when the day seemed a bit cooler than its
+predecessor. "Let's go for a hunt, or something!
+I'm tired of sitting around camp."</p>
+
+<p>"Bless my watch hands! So am I!" cried Mr. Damon.
+"Let's all go for a trip. It will do us good."</p>
+
+<p>"And perhaps I can get some specimens of interest,"
+added Professor Bumper, who, in addition to being
+an archaeologist, was something of a naturalist.</p>
+
+<p>Accordingly, having made everything snug in
+camp, the party, Tom and Ned equipped with
+electric rifles, and the professor with a butterfly
+net and specimen boxes, set forth. Mr. Damon
+said he would carry a stout club as his weapon.</p>
+
+<p>The jungle, as usual, was teeming with life,
+but as Ned and Tom did not wish to kill wantonly
+they refrained from shooting until later in the
+day. For once it was dead, game did not keep
+well in that hot climate, and needed to be cooked
+almost immediately.</p>
+
+<p>"We'll try some shots on our back trip," said
+the young inventor.</p>
+
+<p>Professor Bumper found plenty of his own
+particular kind of "game" which he caught in the
+net, transferring the specimens to the boxes he
+carried. There were beautiful butterflies, moths
+and strange bugs in the securing of which the
+scientist evinced great delight, though when one
+beetle nipped him firmly and painfully on his
+thumb his involuntary cry of pain was as real
+as that of any other person.</p>
+
+<p>"But I didn't let him get away," he said in
+triumph when he had dropped the clawing insect
+into the cyanide bottle where death came painlessly.
+"It is well worth a sore thumb."</p>
+
+<p>They wandered on through the jungle, taking
+care not to get too far from their camp, for they
+did not want to lose their way, nor did they want
+to be absent too long in case Tolpec and his
+native friends should return.</p>
+
+<p>"Well, it's about time we shot something, I
+think," remarked Ned, when they had been out
+about two hours. "Let's try for some of these
+wild turkeys. They ought to go well roasted
+even if it isn't Thanksgiving."</p>
+
+<p>"I'm with you," agreed Tom. "Let's see who
+has the best luck. But tone down the charge
+in your rifle and use a smaller projectile, or you'll
+have nothing but a bunch of feathers to show
+for your shot. The guns are loaded for deer."</p>
+
+<p>The change was made, and once more the two
+young men started off, a little ahead of Professor
+Bumper and Mr. Damon. Tom and Ned had
+not gone far, however, before they heard a strange
+cry from Mr. Damon.</p>
+
+<p>"Tom! Ned!" shouted the eccentric man,
+"Here's a monster after me! Come quick!"</p>
+
+<p>"A tiger!" ejaculated Tom, as he began once
+more to change the charge in his rifle to a larger
+one, running back, meanwhile, in the direction
+of the sound of the voice.</p>
+
+<p>There were really no tigers in Honduras, the
+jaguar being called a tiger by the natives, while
+the cougar is called a lion. The presence of these
+animals, often dangerous to man, had been indicated
+around camp, and it was possible that one had been
+bold enough to attack Mr. Damon, not through hunger,
+but because of being cornered.</p>
+
+<p>"Come on, Ned!" cried Tom. "He's in some
+sort of trouble!"</p>
+
+<p>But when, a moment later, the young inventor
+burst through a fringe of bushes and saw Mr.
+Damon standing in a little clearing, with upraised
+club, Tom could not repress a laugh.</p>
+
+<p>"Kill it, Tom! Kill it!" begged the eccentric man.
+"Bless my insurance policy, but it's a terrible beast!"</p>
+
+<p>And so it was, at first glance. For it was a
+giant iguana, one of the most repulsive-looking
+of the lizards. Not unlike an alligator in shape,
+with spikes on its head and tail, with a warty,
+squatty ridge-encrusted body, a big pouch beneath
+its chin, and long-toed claws, it was enough
+to strike terror into the heart of almost any one.
+Even the smaller ones look dangerous, and this
+one, which was about five feet long, looked
+capable of attacking a man and injuring him. As
+a matter of fact the iguanas are harmless, their
+shape and coloring being designed to protect them.</p>
+
+<p>"Don't be afraid, Mr. Damon," called Tom, still
+laughing. "It won't hurt you!"</p>
+
+<p>"I'm not so positive of that. It won't let me pass."</p>
+
+<p>"Just take your club and poke it out of the way,"
+the young inventor advised. "It's only waiting
+to be shoved."</p>
+
+<p>"Then you do it, Tom. Bless my looking glass,
+but I don't want to go near it! If my wife could
+see me now she'd say it served me just right."</p>
+
+<p>Mr. Damon was not a coward, but the giant
+iguana was not pleasant to look at. Tom, with
+the butt of his rifle, gave it a gentle shove,
+whereupon the creature scurried off through the brush
+as though glad to make its escape unscathed.</p>
+
+<p>"I thought it was a new kind of alligator," said
+Mr. Damon with a sigh of relief.</p>
+
+<p>"Where is it?" asked Professor Bumper, coming
+up at this juncture. "A new species of alligator?
+Let me see it!"</p>
+
+<p>"It's too horrible," said Mr. Damon. "I never
+want to see one again. It was worse than a
+vampire bat!"</p>
+
+<p>Notwithstanding this, when he heard that it
+was one of the largest sized iguanas ever seen,
+the professor started through the jungle after it.</p>
+
+<p>"We can't take it with us if we get it," Tom
+called after his friend.</p>
+
+<p>"We might take the skin," answered the
+professor. "I have a standing order for such things
+from one of the museums I represent. I'd like
+to get it. Then they are often eaten. We can
+have a change of diet. you see."</p>
+
+<p>"We'd better follow him," said Tom to Ned.
+"We'll have to let the turkeys go for a while.
+He may get into trouble. Come on."</p>
+
+<p>Off they started through the jungle, trailing
+after the impetuous professor who was intent on
+capturing the iguana. The giant lizard's progress
+could be traced by the disturbance of the
+leaves and underbrush, and the professor was
+following as closely as possible.</p>
+
+<p>So fast did he go that Ned, Tom and Mr.
+Damon, following, lost sight of him several
+times, and Tom finally called:</p>
+
+<p>"Wait a minute. We'll all be lost if you keep
+this up."</p>
+
+<p>"I'll have him in another minute," answered
+the professor. "I can almost reach him now.
+Then—— Oh!"</p>
+
+<p>His voice ended in a scream that seemed to
+be one of terror. So sudden was the change that
+Tom and Ned, who were together, ahead of Mr.
+Damon, looked at one another in fear.</p>
+
+<p>"What has happened?" whispered Ned, pausing.</p>
+
+<p>"Don't stop to ask—come on!" shouted Tom.</p>
+
+<p>At that instant again came the voice of the savant.</p>
+
+<p>"Tom! Ned!" he gasped, rather than cried.</p>
+
+<p>"I'm caught in the coils! Quick—quick if you
+would save me!"</p>
+
+<p>"In the coils!" repeated Ned. "What does he mean?
+Can the giant iguana——"</p>
+
+<p>Tom Swift did not stop to answer. With his
+electric rifle in readiness, he leaped forward
+through the jungle.</p>
+
+<hr />
+
+<h2><a name="chapterxvi" id="chapterxvi">CHAPTER XVI</a></h2>
+
+<h3>A MEETING IN THE JUNGLE</h3>
+
+
+<p>Before Tom and Ned reached the place
+whence Professor Bumper had called, they heard
+strange noises, other than the imploring voice of
+their friend. It seemed as though some great
+body was threshing about in the jungle, lashing
+the trees, bushes and leaves about, and when
+the two young men, followed by Mr. Damon,
+reached the scene they saw that, in a measure,
+this really accounted for what they heard.</p>
+
+<p>Something like a great whip was beating about
+close to two trees that grew near together. And
+then, when the storm of twigs, leaves and dirt,
+caused by the leaping, threshing thing ceased for
+a moment, the onlookers saw something that
+filled them with terror.</p>
+
+<p>Between the two trees, and seemingly bound
+to them by a great coiled rope, spotted and banded,
+was the body of Professor Bumper. His arms
+were pinioned to his sides and there was horror
+and terror on his face, that looked imploringly
+at the youths from above the topmost coil of
+those encircling him.</p>
+
+<p>"What is it?" cried Mr. Damon, as he ran
+pantingly up. "What has caught him? Is it the
+giant iguana?"</p>
+
+<p>"It's a snake—a great boa!" gasped Tom. "It
+has him in its coils. But it is wound around
+the trees, too. That alone prevents it from
+crushing the professor to death.</p>
+
+<p>"Ned, be ready with your rifle. Put in the
+heaviest charge, and watch your chance to fire!"</p>
+
+<p>The great, ugly head of the boa reared itself
+up from the coils which it had, with the quickness
+of thought, thrown about the man between
+the two trees. This species of snake is not
+poisonous, and kills its prey by crushing it to
+death, making it into a pulpy mass, with scarcely
+a bone left unbroken, after which it swallows
+its meal. The crushing power of one of these
+boas, some of which reach a length of thirty
+feet, with a body as large around as that of a
+full-grown man, is enormous.</p>
+
+<p>"I'm going to fire!" suddenly cried Tom. He
+had seen his chance and he took it. There was
+the faint report—the crack of the electric rifle—and
+the folds of the serpent seemed to relax.</p>
+
+<p>"I see a good chance now," added Ned, who
+had taken the small charge from his weapon,
+replacing it with a heavier one.</p>
+
+<p>His rifle was also discharged in the direction
+of the snake, and Tom saw that the hit was a
+good one, right through the ugly head of the reptile.</p>
+
+<p>"One other will be enough to make him loosen
+his coils!" cried Tom, as he fired again, and such
+was the killing power of the electric bullets that
+the snake, though an immense one, and one that
+short of decapitation could have received many
+injuries without losing power, seemed to shrivel up.</p>
+
+<p>Its folds relaxed, and the coils of the great
+body fell in a heap at the roots of the two trees,
+between which the scientist had been standing.</p>
+
+<p>Professor Bumper seemed to fall backward as
+the grip of the serpent relaxed, but Tom, dropping
+his rifle, and calling to Ned to keep an eye
+on the snake, leaped forward and caught his friend.</p>
+
+<p>"Are you hurt?" asked Tom, carrying the limp
+form over to a grassy place. There was no
+answer, the savant's eyes were closed and he
+breathed but faintly.</p>
+
+<p>Ned Newton fired two more electric bullets
+into the still writhing body of the boa.</p>
+
+<p>"I guess he's all in," he called to Tom.</p>
+
+<p>"Bless my horseradish! And so our friend
+seems to be," commented Mr. Damon. "Have
+you anything with which to revive him, Tom?"</p>
+
+<p>"Yes. Some ammonia. See if you can find a
+little water."</p>
+
+<p>"I have some in my flask."</p>
+
+<p>Tom mixed a dose of the spirits which he
+carried with him, and this, forced between the pallid
+lips of the scientist, revived him.</p>
+
+<p>"What happened?" he asked faintly as he opened
+his eyes. "Oh, yes, I remember," he added
+slowly. "The boa——"</p>
+
+<p>"Don't try to talk," urged Tom. "You're all
+right. The snake is dead, or dying. Are you
+much hurt?"</p>
+
+<p>Professor Bumper appeared to be considering.
+He moved first one limb, then another. He
+seemed to have the power over all his muscles.</p>
+
+<p>"I see how it happened," he said, as he sat
+up, after taking a little more of the ammonia. "I
+was following the iguana, and when the big lizard
+came to a stop, in a little hollow place in the
+ground, at the foot of those two trees, I leaned
+over to slip a noose of rope about its neck. Then
+I felt myself caught, as if in the hands of a giant,
+and bound fast between the two trees."</p>
+
+<p>"It was the big boa that whipped itself around
+you, as you leaned over," explained Tom, as Ned
+came up to announce that the snake was no
+longer dangerous. "But when it coiled around
+you it also coiled around the two trees, you,
+fortunately slipping between them. Had it not
+been that their trunks took off some of the pressure
+of the coils you wouldn't have lasted a minute."</p>
+
+<p>"Well, I was pretty badly squeezed as it was,"
+remarked the professor. "I hardly had breath
+enough left to call to you. I tried to fight off the
+serpent, but it was of no use."</p>
+
+<p>"I should say not!" cried Mr. Damon. "Bless my
+circus ring! one might as well try to combat
+an elephant! But, my dear professor, are you all
+right now?"</p>
+
+<p>"I think so—yes. Though I shall be lame and
+stiff for a few days, I fear. I can hardly walk."</p>
+
+<p>Professor Bumper was indeed unable to go
+about much for a few days after his encounter
+with the great serpent. He stretched out in a
+hammock under trees in the camp clearing, and
+with his friends waited for the possible return
+of Tolpec and the porters.</p>
+
+<p>Ned and Tom made one or two short hunting
+trips, and on these occasions they kept a lookout
+in the direction the Indian had taken when he
+went away.</p>
+
+<p>"For he's sure to come back that way—if he
+comes at all," declared Ned; "which I am beginning
+to doubt."</p>
+
+<p>"Well, he may not come," agreed Tom, who
+was beginning to lose some of his first hope.
+"But he won't necessarily come from the same
+direction he took. He may have had to go in an
+entirely different way to get help. We'll hope
+for the best."</p>
+
+<p>A week passed. Professor Bumper was able
+to be about, and Tom and Ned noticed that
+there was an anxious look on his face. Was he,
+too, beginning to despair?</p>
+
+<p>"Well, this isn't hunting for golden idols very
+fast," said Mr. Damon, the morning of the eighth
+day after their desertion by the faithless Jacinto.
+"What do you say, Professor Bumper; ought
+we not to start off on our own account?"</p>
+
+<p>"We had better if Tolpec does not return
+today," was the answer.</p>
+
+<p>They had eaten breakfast, had put their camp
+in order, and were about to have a consultation
+on what was best to do, when Tom suddenly
+called to Ned, who was whistling:</p>
+
+<p>"Hark!"</p>
+
+<p>Through the jungle came a faint sound of singing
+—not a harmonious air, but the somewhat
+barbaric chant of the natives.</p>
+
+<p>"It is Tolpec coming back!" cried Mr. Damon.
+"Hurray! Now our troubles are over. Bless my
+meal ticket! Now we can start!"</p>
+
+<p>"It may be Jacinto," suggested Ned.</p>
+
+<p>"Nonsense! you old cold-water pitcher!"
+cried Tom. "It's Tolpec! I can see him! He's
+a good scout all right!"</p>
+
+<p>And then, walking at the head of a band of
+Indians who were weirdly chanting while behind
+them came a train of mules, was Tolpec, a cheerful
+grin covering his honest, if homely, dark face.</p>
+
+<p>"Me come back!" he exclaimed in gutteral
+English, using about half of his foreign vocabulary.</p>
+
+<p>"I see you did," answered Professor Bumper
+in the man's own tongue. "Glad to see you.
+Is everything all right?"</p>
+
+<p>"All right," was the answer. "These Indians
+will take you where you want to go, and will not
+leave you as Jacinto did."</p>
+
+<p>"We'll start in the morning!" exclaimed the
+savant his own cheerful self again, now that
+there was a prospect of going further into the
+interior. "Tell the men to get something to eat,
+Tolpec. There is plenty for all."</p>
+
+<p>"Good!" grunted the new guide and soon the
+hungry Indians, who had come far, were satisfying
+their hunger.</p>
+
+<p>As they ate Tolpec explained to Professor
+Bumper, who repeated it to the youths and Mr.
+Damon, that it had been necessary to go farther
+than he had intended to get the porters and
+mules. But the Indians were a friendly tribe,
+of which he was a member, and could be depended on.</p>
+
+<p>There was a feast and a sort of celebration in
+camp that night. Tom and Ned shot two deer,
+and these formed the main part of the feast and
+the Indians made merry about the fire until nearly
+midnight. They did not seem to mind in the
+least the swarms of mosquitoes and other bugs
+that flew about, attracted by the light. As for
+Tom Swift and his friends, their nets protected
+them.</p>
+
+<p>An early start was made the following morning.
+Such packages of goods and supplies as could
+not well be carried by the Indians in their head
+straps, were loaded on the backs of the pack-mules.
+Tolpec explained that on reaching the
+Indian village, where he had secured the porters,
+they could get some ox-carts which would be a
+convenience in traveling into the interior toward
+the Copan valley.</p>
+
+<p>The march onward for the next two days was
+tiresome; but the Indians Tolpec had secured
+were as faithful and efficient as he had described
+them, and good progress was made.</p>
+
+<p>There were a few accidents. One native fell
+into a swiftly running stream as they were fording
+it and lost a box containing some much-needed
+things. But as the man's life was saved Professor
+Bumper said it made up for the other loss.
+Another accident did not end so auspiciously.
+One of the bearers was bitten by a poisonous
+snake, and though prompt measures were taken,
+the poison spread so rapidly that the man died.</p>
+
+<p>In due season the Indian village was reached.
+where, after a day spent in holding funeral services
+over the dead bearer, preparations were
+made for proceeding farther.</p>
+
+<p>This time some of the bearers were left behind,
+and ox-carts were substituted for them, as it was
+possible to carry more goods this way,</p>
+
+<p>"And now we're really off for Copan!"
+exclaimed Professor Bumper one morning, when
+the cavalcade, led by Tolpec in the capacity of
+head guide, started off. "I hope we have no
+more delays."</p>
+
+<p>"I hope not, either," agreed Tom. "That
+Beecher may be there ahead of us."</p>
+
+<p>Weary marches fell to their portion. There
+were mountains to climb, streams to ford or swim,
+sending the carts over on rudely made rafts.
+There were storms to endure, and the eternal heat
+to fight.</p>
+
+<p>But finally the party emerged from the
+lowlands of the coast and went up in among the
+hills, where though the going was harder, the
+climate was better. It was not so hot and moist.</p>
+
+<p>Not wishing to attract attention in Copan
+itself, Professor Bumper and his party made a
+detour, and finally, after much consultation with
+Tom over the ancient maps, the scientist announced
+that he thought they were in the vicinity
+of the buried city.</p>
+
+<p>"We will begin test excavations in the
+morning," he said.</p>
+
+<p>The party was in camp, and preparations were
+made for spending the night in the forest, when
+from among the trees there floated to the ears
+of our friends a queer Indian chant.</p>
+
+<p>"Some one is coming," said Tom to Ned.</p>
+
+<p>Almost as he spoke there filed into the clearing
+where the camp had been set up, a cavalcade of white men,
+followed by Indians. And at the sight of one
+of the white men Tom Swift uttered a cry.</p>
+
+<p>"Professor Beecher!" gasped the young inventor.</p>
+
+<hr />
+
+<h2><a name="chapterxvii" id="chapterxvii">CHAPTER XVII</a></h2>
+
+<h3>THE LOST MAP</h3>
+
+
+<p>The on-marching company of white men, with
+their Indian attendants, came to a halt on the
+edge of the clearing as they caught sight of the
+tents already set up there. The barbaric chant
+of the native bearers ceased abruptly, and there
+was a look of surprise shown on the face of
+Professor Fenimore Beecher. For Professor Beecher
+it was, in the lead of the rival expedition.</p>
+
+<p>"Bless my shoe laces!" exclaimed Mr. Damon.</p>
+
+<p>"Is it really Beecher?" asked Ned, though he knew
+as well as Tom that it was the young archaeologist.</p>
+
+<p>"It certainly is!" declared Tom. "And he has
+nerve to follow us so closely!"</p>
+
+<p>"Maybe he thinks we have nerve to get here
+ahead of him," suggested Ned, smiling grimly.</p>
+
+<p>"Probably," agreed Tom, with a short laugh.
+"Well, it evidently surprises him to find us here
+at all, after the mean trick he played on us to
+get Jacinto to lead us into the jungle and desert
+us."</p>
+
+<p>"That's right," assented Ned. "Well, what's
+the next move?"</p>
+
+<p>There seemed to be some doubt about this
+on the part of both expeditions. At the sight
+of Professor Beecher, Professor Bumper, who had
+come out of his tent, hurriedly turned to Tom
+and asked him what he thought it best to do.</p>
+
+<p>"Do!" exclaimed the eccentric Mr. Damon,
+not giving Tom time to reply. "Why, stand
+your ground, of course! Bless my house and
+lot! but we're here first! For the matter of that,
+I suppose the jungle is free and we can no more
+object to his coming: here than he can to our
+coming. First come, first served, I suppose is the
+law of the forest."</p>
+
+<p>Meanwhile the surprise occasioned by the
+unexpected meeting of their rivals seemed to have
+spread something like consternation among the
+white members of the Beecher party. As for the
+natives they evidently did not care one way or
+the other.</p>
+
+<p>There was a hasty consultation among the
+professors accompanying Mr. Beecher, and then the
+latter himself advanced toward the tents of Tom
+and his friends and asked:</p>
+
+<p>"How long have you been here?"</p>
+
+<p>"I don't see that we are called upon to answer
+that question," replied Professor Bumper stiffly.</p>
+
+<p>"Perhaps not, and yet——"</p>
+
+<p>"There is no perhaps about it!" said Professor
+Bumper quickly. "I know what your object is,
+as I presume you do mine. And, after what
+I may term your disgraceful and unsportsmanlike
+conduct toward me and my friends, I prefer
+not to have anything further to do with you.
+We must meet as strangers hereafter."</p>
+
+<p>"Very well," and Professor Beecher's voice was
+as cold and uncompromising as was his rival's.
+"Let it be as your wish. But I must say I don't
+know what you mean by unsportsmanlike conduct."</p>
+
+<p>"An explanation would be wasted on you,"
+said Professor Bumper stiffly. "But in order that
+you may know I fully understand what you did
+I will say that your efforts to thwart us through
+your tool Jacinto came to nothing. We are here
+ahead of you."</p>
+
+<p>"Jacinto!" cried Professor Beecher in real or
+simulated surprise. "Why, he was not my 'tool,'
+as you term it."</p>
+
+<p>"Your denial is useless in the light of his
+confession," asserted Professor Bumper.</p>
+
+<p>"Confession?"</p>
+
+<p>"Now look here!" exclaimed the older
+professor, "I do not propose to lower myself by
+quarreling with you. I know certainly what
+you and your party tried to do to prevent us
+from getting here. But we got out of the trap
+you set for us, and we are on the ground first.
+I recognize your right to make explorations as
+well as ourselves, and I presume you have not
+fallen so low that you will not recognize the
+unwritten law in a case of this kind—the law
+which says the right of discovery belongs to the
+one who first makes it."</p>
+
+<p>"I shall certainly abide by such conduct as
+is usual under the circumstances," said
+Professor Beecher more stiffly than before.
+"At the same time I must deny having set a trap.
+And as for Jacinto——"</p>
+
+<p>"It will be useless to discuss it further!"
+broke in Professor Bumper.</p>
+
+<p>"Then no more need be said," retorted the
+younger man. "I shall give orders to my friends,
+as well as to the natives, to keep away from
+your camp, and I shall expect you to do the
+same regarding mine."</p>
+
+<p>"I should have suggested the same thing
+myself," came from Tom's friend, and the two rival
+scientists fairly glared at one another, the others
+of both parties looking on with interest.</p>
+
+<p>Professor Bumper turned and walked defiantly
+back to his tent. Professor Beecher did the same
+thing. Then, after a short consultation among
+the white members of the latter's organization,
+their tents were set up in another clearing,
+removed and separated by a screen of trees and
+bushes from those of Tom Swift's friends. The
+natives of the Beecher party also withdrew a little
+way from those of Professor Bumper's organization,
+and then preparations for spending the
+night in the jungle went on in the rival
+headquarters.</p>
+
+<p>"Well, he certainly had nerve, to deny, practically,
+that he had set Jacinto up to do what he did," commented Tom.</p>
+
+<p>"I should say so!" agreed Ned.</p>
+
+<p>"How do you imagine he got here nearly as
+soon as we did, when he did not start until
+later?" asked Mr. Damon.</p>
+
+<p>"He did not have the unfortunate experience
+of being deserted in the jungle," replied Tom.
+"He probably had Jacinto, or some of that
+unprincipled scoundrel's friends, show him a short
+route to Copan and he came on from there."</p>
+
+<p>"Well, I did hope we might have the ground
+to ourselves, at least for the preliminary explorations
+and excavations. But it is not to be. My
+rival is here," sighed Professor Bumper.</p>
+
+<p>"Don't let that discourage you!" exclaimed Tom.
+"We can fight all the better now the foe
+is in the open, and we know where he is."</p>
+
+<p>"Yes, Tom Swift, that is true," agreed the
+scientist. "I am not going to give up, but I
+shall have to change my plans a little. Perhaps
+you will come into the tent with me," and he
+nodded to Tom and Ned. "I want to talk over
+certain matters with you and Mr. Damon."</p>
+
+<p>"Pleased to," assented the young inventor, and
+his financial secretary nodded.</p>
+
+<p>A little later, supper having been eaten, the
+camp made shipshape and the natives settled
+down, Tom, Ned, Mr. Damon and Professor
+Bumper assembled in the tent of the scientist,
+where a dry battery lamp gave sufficient illumination
+to show a number of maps and papers scattered
+over an improvised table.</p>
+
+<p>"Now, gentlemen," said the professor, "I have
+called you here to go over my plans more in
+detail than I have hitherto done, now we are on
+the ground. You know in a general way what
+I hope to accomplish, but the time has come
+when I must be specific.</p>
+
+<p>"Aside from being on the spot, below which,
+or below the vicinity where, I believe, lies the
+lost city of Kurzon and, I hope, the idol of gold,
+a situation has arisen—an unexpected situation,
+I may say—which calls for different action from
+that I had counted on.</p>
+
+<p>"I refer to the presence of my rival, Professor
+Beecher. I will not dwell now on what he has
+done. It is better to consider what he may do."</p>
+
+<p>"That's right," agreed Ned. "He may get up in
+the night, dig up this city and skip with that
+golden image before we know it."</p>
+
+<p>"Hardly," grinned Tom.</p>
+
+<p>"No," said Professor Bumper. "Excavating
+buried cities in the jungle of Honduras is not
+as simple as that. There is much work to be
+done. But accidents may happen, and in case
+one should occur to me, and I be unable to prosecute
+the search, I want one of you to do it. For
+that reason I am going to show you the maps
+and ancient documents and point out to you
+where I believe the lost city lies. Now, if you
+will give me your attention, I'll proceed."</p>
+
+<p>The professor went over in detail the story
+of how he had found the old documents relating
+to the lost city of Kurzon, and of how, after
+much labor and research, he had located the
+city in the Copan valley. The great idol of
+gold was one of the chief possessions of Kurzon,
+and it was often referred to in the old
+papers; copies and translations of which the
+professor had with him.</p>
+
+<p>"But this is the most valuable of all," he said,
+as he opened an oiled-silk packet. "And before
+I show it to you, suppose you two young men
+take a look outside the tent."</p>
+
+<p>"What for?" asked Mr. Damon.</p>
+
+<p>"To make sure that no emissaries from the
+Beecher crowd are sneaking around to overhear
+what we say," was the somewhat bitter answer
+of the scientist. "I do not trust him, in spite
+of his attempted denial."</p>
+
+<p>Tom and Ned took a quick but thorough
+observation outside the tent. The blackness of the
+jungle night was in strange contrast to the light
+they had just left.</p>
+
+<p>"Doesn't seem to be any one around here,"
+remarked Ned, after waiting a minute or two.</p>
+
+<p>"No. All's quiet along the Potomac. Those
+Beecher natives are having some sort of a songfest, though."</p>
+
+<p>In the distance, and from the direction of their
+rivals' camp, came the weird chant.</p>
+
+<p>"Well, as long as they stay there we'll be all
+right," said Tom. "Come on in. I'm anxious to
+hear what the professor has to say."</p>
+
+<p>"Everything's quiet," reported Ned.</p>
+
+<p>"Then give me your attention," begged the
+scientist.</p>
+
+<p>Carefully, as though about to exhibit some,
+precious jewel, he loosened the oiled-silk wrappings
+and showed a large map, on thin but tough
+paper.</p>
+
+<p>"This is drawn from the old charts," the
+professor explained. "I worked on it many months,
+and it is the only copy in the world. If it were
+to be destroyed I should have to go all the way
+back to New York to make another copy. I have
+the original there in a safe deposit vault."</p>
+
+<p>"Wouldn't it have been wise to make two
+copies?" asked Tom.</p>
+
+<p>"It would have only increased the risk. With
+one copy, and that constantly in my possession,
+I can be sure of my ground. Otherwise not.
+That is why I am so careful of this. Now I will
+show you why I believe we are about over the
+ancient city of Kurzon."</p>
+
+<p>"Over it!" cried Mr. Damon. "Bless my
+gunpowder! What do you mean?" and he looked
+down at the earthen floor of the tent as though
+expecting it to open and swallow him.</p>
+
+<p>"I mean that the city, like many others of
+Central and South America, is buried below the
+refuse of centuries," went on the professor.
+"Very soon, if we are fortunate, we shall be
+looking on the civilization of hundreds of years
+ago—how long no one knows.</p>
+
+<p>"Considerable excavation has been done in
+Central America," went on Professor Bumper,
+"and certain ruins have been brought to light.
+Near us are those of Copan, while toward the
+frontier are those of Quirigua, which are even
+better preserved than the former. We may visit
+them if we have time. But I have reason to
+believe that in this section of Copan is a large
+city, the existence of which has not been made
+certain of by any one save myself—and, perhaps,
+Professor Beecher.</p>
+
+<p>"Certainly no part of it has seen the light of
+day for many centuries. It shall be our pleasure
+to uncover it, if possible, and secure the idol of
+gold."</p>
+
+<p>"How long ago do you think the city was
+buried?" asked Tom.</p>
+
+<p>"It would be hard to say. From the carvings
+and hieroglyphics I have studied it would seem
+that the Mayan civilization lasted about five
+hundred years, and that it began perhaps in the
+year A.D. five hundred."</p>
+
+<p>"That would mean," said Mr. Damon, "that
+the ancient cities were in ruins, buried, perhaps,
+long before Columbus discovered the new
+world."</p>
+
+<p>"Yes," assented the professor. "Probably
+Kurzon, which we now seek, was buried deep for
+nearly five hundred years before Columbus landed
+at San Salvadore. The specimens of writing and
+architecture heretofore disclosed indicate that.
+But, as a matter of fact, it is very hard to
+decipher the Mayan pictographs. So far, little but
+the ability to read their calendars and numerical
+system is possessed by us, though we are gradually
+making headway.</p>
+
+<p>"Now this is the map of the district, and by the
+markings you can see where I hope to find what
+I seek. We shall begin digging here," and he
+made a small mark with a pencil on the map.</p>
+
+<p>"Of course," the professor explained, "I may be
+wrong, and it will take some time to discover the
+error if we make one. When a city is buried thirty
+or forty feet deep beneath earth and great trees
+have grown over it, it is not easy to dig down to it."</p>
+
+<p>"How do you ever expect to find it?" asked Ned.</p>
+
+<p>"Well, we will sink shafts here and there. If
+we find carved stones, the remains of ancient
+pottery and weapons, parts of buildings or building
+stones, we shall know we are on the right
+track," was the answer. "And now that I have
+shown you the map, and explained how valuable
+it is, I will put it away again. We shall begin
+our excavations in the morning."</p>
+
+<p>"At what point?" asked Tom.</p>
+
+<p>"At a point I shall indicate after a further
+consultation of the map. I must see the configuration
+of the country by daylight to decide.
+And now let's get some rest. We have had a
+hard day."</p>
+
+<p>The two tents housing the four white members
+of the Bumper party were close together,
+and it was decided that the night would be divided
+into four watches, to guard against possible
+treachery on the part of the Beecher crowd.</p>
+
+<p>"It seems an unkind precaution to take against
+a fellow scientist," said Professor Bumper, "but
+I can not afford to take chances after what has
+occurred."</p>
+
+<p>The others agreed with him, and though standing
+guard was not pleasant it was done. However
+the night passed without incident, and then
+came morning and the excitement of getting
+breakfast, over which the Indians made merry.
+They did not like the cold and darkness, and
+always welcomed the sun, no matter how hot.</p>
+
+<p>"And now," cried Tom, when the meal was
+over, "let us begin the work that has brought us
+here."</p>
+
+<p>"Yes," agreed Professor Bumper, "I will
+consult the map, and start the diggers where I think
+the city lies, far below the surface. Now, gentlemen,
+if you will give me your attention——"</p>
+
+<p>He was seeking through his outer coat pockets,
+after an ineffectual search in the inner one. A
+strange look came over his face.</p>
+
+<p>"What's the matter?" asked Tom.</p>
+
+<p>"The map—the map!" gasped the professor.
+"The map I was showing you last night! The map
+that tells where we are to dig for the idol of gold!
+It's gone!"</p>
+
+<p>"The map gone?" gasped Mr. Damon.</p>
+
+<p>"I—I'm afraid so," faltered the professor.
+"I put it away carefully, but now——"</p>
+
+<p>He ceased speaking to make a further search
+in all his pockets.</p>
+
+<p>"Maybe you left it in another coat," suggested Ned.</p>
+
+<p>"Or maybe some of the Beecher crowd took it!" snapped Tom.</p>
+
+<hr />
+
+<h2><a name="chapterxviii" id="chapterxviii">CHAPTER XVIII</a></h2>
+
+<h3>"EL TIGRE!"</h3>
+
+
+<p>The four men gazed at one another.
+Consternation showed on the face of Professor
+Bumper, and was reflected, more or less, on the
+countenances of his companions.</p>
+
+<p>"Are you sure the map is gone?" asked Tom.
+"I know how easy it is to mislay anything in a
+camp of this sort. I couldn't at first find my
+safety razor this morning, and when I did locate
+it the hoe was in one of my shoes. I'm sure a
+rat or some jungle animal must have dragged
+it there. Now maybe they took your map,
+Professor. That oiled silk in which it was wrapped
+might have appealed to the taste of a rat or a
+snake."</p>
+
+<p>"It is no joking matter," said Professor
+Bumper. "But I know you appreciate the seriousness
+of it as much as I do, Tom. But I had the map
+in the pocket of this coat, and now it is gone!"</p>
+
+<p>"When did you put it there?" asked Ned.</p>
+
+<p>"This morning, just before I came to breakfast."</p>
+
+<p>"Oh, then you have had it since last night!"
+Tom ejaculated.</p>
+
+<p>"Yes, I slept with it under my clothes that I
+rolled up for a pillow, and when it was my turn
+to stand guard I took it with me. Then I put
+it back again and went to sleep. When I awoke
+and dressed I put the packet in my pocket and
+ate breakfast. Now when I look for it—why,
+it's gone!"</p>
+
+<p>"The map or the oiled-silk package?" asked
+Mr. Damon, who, once having been a businessman,
+was sometimes a stickler for small points.</p>
+
+<p>"Both," answered the professor. "I opened
+the silk to tie it more smoothly, so it would not
+be such a lump in my pocket, and I made sure
+the map was inside."</p>
+
+<p>"Then the whole thing has been taken—or you
+have lost it," suggested Ned.</p>
+
+<p>"I am not in the habit of losing valuable maps,"
+retorted the scientist. "And the pocket of my
+coat I had made deep, for the purpose of carrying
+the long map. It could not drop out."</p>
+
+<p>"Well, we mustn't overlook any possible
+chances," suggested Tom. "Come on now, we'll
+search every inch of the ground over which you
+traveled this morning, Professor."</p>
+
+<p>"It MUST be found," murmured the scientist.
+"Without it all our work will go for naught."</p>
+
+<p>They all went into the tent where the professor
+and Mr. Damon had slept when they were not
+on guard. The camp was a busy place, with the
+Indians finishing their morning meal, and getting
+ready for the work of the day. For word
+had been given out that there would be no more
+long periods of travel.</p>
+
+<p>In consequence, efforts were being directed by
+the head men of the bearers to making a more
+permanent camp in the wilderness. Shelters of
+palm-thatched huts were being built, a site for
+cooking fires made, and, at the direction of Mr.
+Damon, to whom this part was entrusted, some
+sanitary regulations were insisted on.</p>
+
+<p>Leaving this busy scene, the four, with solemn
+faces, proceeded to the tent where it was hoped
+the map would be found. But though they went
+through everything, and traced and retraced
+every place the professor could remember having
+traversed about the canvas shelter, no signs of
+the important document could be found.</p>
+
+<p>"I don't believe I dropped it out of my pocket,"
+said the scientist, for perhaps the twentieth time.</p>
+
+<p>"Then it was taken," declared Tom.</p>
+
+<p>"That's what I say!" chimed in Ned.
+"And by some of Beecher's party!"</p>
+
+<p>"Easy, my boy," cautioned Mr. Damon. "We
+don't want to make accusations we can't prove."</p>
+
+<p>"That is true," agreed Professor Bumper.
+"But, though I am sorry to say it of a fellow
+archaelogist, I can not help thinking Beecher
+had something to do with the taking of my map."</p>
+
+<p>"But how could any of them get it?" asked Mr. Damon.
+"You say you had the map this morning, and certainly
+none of them has been in our camp since dawn,
+though of course it is possible that some of them
+sneaked in during the night."</p>
+
+<p>"It does seem a mystery how it could have
+been taken in open daylight, while we were about
+camp together," said Tom. "But is the loss
+such a grave one, Professor Bumper?"</p>
+
+<p>"Very grave. In fact I may say it is impossible
+to proceed with the excavating without the map."</p>
+
+<p>"Then what are we to do?" asked Ned.</p>
+
+<p>"We must get it back!" declared Tom.</p>
+
+<p>"Yes," agreed the scientist, "we can not work
+without it. As soon as I make a little further
+search, to make sure it could not have dropped
+in some out-of-the-way place, I shall go over to
+Professor Beecher's camp and demand that he
+give me back my property."</p>
+
+<p>"Suppose he says he hasn't taken it?" asked Tom.</p>
+
+<p>"Well, I'm sure he either took it personally,
+or one of his party did. And yet I can't understand
+how they could have come here without our
+seeing them," and the professor shook his head
+in puzzled despair.</p>
+
+<p>A more detailed search did not reveal the missing
+map, and Mr. Damon and his friend the
+scientist were on the point of departing for the
+camp of their rivals, less than a mile away, when
+Tom had what really amounted to an inspiration.</p>
+
+<p>"Look here, Professor!" he cried. "Can you
+remember any of the details of your map—say,
+for instance, where we ought to begin excavating
+to get at the wonders of the underground city?"</p>
+
+<p>"Well, Tom, I did intend to compare my map
+with the configuration of the country about here.
+There is a certain mountain which serves as a
+landmark and a guide for a starting point. I
+think that is it over there," and the scientist
+pointed to a distant snow-capped peak.</p>
+
+<p>The party had left the low and marshy land
+of the true jungle, and were among the foothills,
+though all about them was dense forest and
+underbush, which, in reality, was as much a jungle
+as the lower plains, but was less wet.</p>
+
+<p>"The point where I believe we should start
+to dig," said the professor, "is near the spot
+where the top of the mountain casts a shadow
+when the sun is one hour high. At least that is
+the direction given in the old manuscripts. So,
+though we can do little without the map, we
+might make a start by digging there."</p>
+
+<p>"No, not there!" exclaimed Tom.</p>
+
+<p>"Why not?"</p>
+
+<p>"Because we don't want to let Beecher's crowd
+know that we are on the track of the idol of gold."</p>
+
+<p>"But they know anyhow, for they have the map,"
+commented Ned, puzzled by his chum's words.</p>
+
+<p>"Maybe not," said Tom slowly. "I think this
+is a time for a big bluff. It may work and it
+may not. Beecher's crowd either has the map or
+they have not. If they have it they will lose
+no time in trying to find the right place to start
+digging and then they'll begin excavating.</p>
+
+<p>"Very good! If they do that we have a right
+to dig near the same place. But if they have not
+the map, which is possible, and if we start to dig
+where the professor's memory tells him is the
+right spot, we'll only give them the tip, and they'll
+dig there also."</p>
+
+<p>"I'm sure they have the map," the professor said.
+"But I believe your plan is a good one, Tom."</p>
+
+<p>"Just what do you propose doing?" asked Ned.</p>
+
+<p>"Fooling 'em!" exclaimed Tom quickly. "We'll
+dig in some place remote from the spot where the
+mountain casts its shadow. They will think, if
+they haven't the map, that we are proceeding by
+it, and they'll dig, too. When they find nothing,
+as will also happen to us, they may go away.</p>
+
+<p>"If, on the other hand, they have the map, and
+see us digging at a spot not indicated on it, they
+will be puzzled, knowing we must have some idea
+of where the buried city lies. They will think
+the map is at fault, perhaps, and not make use of
+it. Then we can get it back."</p>
+
+<p>"Bless my hatband!" cried Mr. Damon.
+"I believe you're right, Tom.
+We'll dig in the wrong place to fool 'em."</p>
+
+<p>And this was done. Search for the precious
+map was given up for the time being, and the
+professor and his friends set the natives to work
+digging shafts in the ground, as though sinking
+them down to the level of the buried city.</p>
+
+<p>But though this false work was prosecuted with
+vigor for several days, there was a feeling of
+despair among the Bumper party over the loss of
+the map.</p>
+
+<p>"If we could only get it back!" exclaimed the
+professor, again and again.</p>
+
+<p>Meanwhile the Beecher party seemed inactive.
+True, some members of it did come over to look
+on from a respectful distance at what the diggers
+were doing. Some of the rival helpers, under
+the direction of the head of the expedition, also
+began sinking shafts. But they were not in the
+locality remembered by Professor Bumper as being
+correct.</p>
+
+<p>"I can't imagine what they're up to," he said.
+"If they have my map they would act differently,
+I should think."</p>
+
+<p>"Whatever they're up to," answered Tom, "the
+time has come when we can dig at the place
+where we can hope for results." And the following
+day shafts were started in the shadow of the
+mountain.</p>
+
+<p>Until some evidence should have been obtained
+by digging, as to the location beneath the surface
+of a buried city, there was nothing for the
+travelers to do but wait. Turns were taken in
+directing the efforts of the diggers, and an
+occasional inspection was made of the shafts.</p>
+
+<p>"What do you expect to find first?" asked Tom
+of Professor Bumper one day, when the latter was
+at the top of a shaft waiting for a bucket load
+of dirt to be hoisted up.</p>
+
+<p>"Potsherds and artifacts," was the answer.</p>
+
+<p>"What sort of bugs are they?" asked Ned with
+a laugh. He and Tom were about to go hunting
+with their electric rifles.</p>
+
+<p>"Artifacts are things made by the Indians—or
+whatever members of the race who built the
+ancient cities were called—such as household articles,
+vases, ornaments, tools and so on. Anything
+made by artificial means is called an artifact."</p>
+
+<p>"And potsherds are things with those Chinese
+laundry ticket scratches on them," added Tom.</p>
+
+<p>"Exactly," said the professor, laughing.
+"Though some of the strange-appearing inscriptions
+give much valuable information. As soon
+as we find some of them—say a broken bit of
+pottery with hieroglyphics on—I will know I am
+on the right track."</p>
+
+<p>And while the scientist and Mr. Damon kept
+watch at the top of the shaft, Tom and Ned went
+out into the jungle to hunt. They had killed some
+game, and were stalking a fine big deer, which
+would provide a feast for the natives, when suddenly
+the silence of the lonely forest was broken
+by a piercing scream, followed by an agonized
+cry of</p>
+
+<p>"El tigre! El tigre!"</p>
+
+<hr />
+
+<h2><a name="chapterxix" id="chapterxix">CHAPTER XIX</a></h2>
+
+<h3>POISONED ARROWS</h3>
+
+
+<p>"Did you hear that, Tom?" asked Ned, in a
+hoarse whisper.</p>
+
+<p>"Surely," was the cautious answer. "Keep
+still, and I'll try for a shot."</p>
+
+<p>"Better be quick," advised Ned in a tense voice.
+"The chap who did that yelling seems to be in
+trouble!"</p>
+
+<p>And as Ned's voice trailed off into a whisper,
+again came the cry, this time in frenzied pain.</p>
+
+<p>"El tigre! El tigre!" Then there was a jumble of words.</p>
+
+<p>"It's over this way!" and this time Ned shouted,
+seeing no need for low voices since the other was so loud.</p>
+
+<p>Tom looked to where Ned had parted the
+bushes alongside a jungle path. Through the
+opening the young inventor saw, in a little glade,
+that which caused him to take a firmer grip on his
+electric rifle, and also a firmer grip on his nerves.</p>
+
+<p>Directly in front of him and Ned, and not more
+than a hundred yards away, was a great tawny
+and spotted jaguar—the "tigre" or tiger of Central
+America. The beast, with lashing tail, stood
+over an Indian upon whom it seemed to have
+sprung from some lair, beating the unfortunate
+man to the ground. Nor had he fallen scatheless,
+for there was blood on the green leaves about
+him, and it was not the blood of the spotted
+beast.</p>
+
+<p>"Oh, Tom, can you—can you——" and Ned
+faltered.</p>
+
+<p>The young inventor understood the unspoken
+question.</p>
+
+<p>"I think I can make a shot of it without hitting
+the man," he answered, never turning his head.
+"It's a question, though, if the beast won't claw
+him in the death struggle. It won't last long,
+however, if the electric bullet goes to the right
+place, and I've got to take the chance."</p>
+
+<p>Cautiously Tom brought his weapon to bear.
+Quiet as Ned and he had been after the discovery,
+the jaguar seemed to feel that something was
+wrong. Intent on his prey, for a time he had
+stood over it, gloating. Now the brute glanced
+uneasily from side to side, its tail nervously
+twitching, and it seemed trying to gain, by a sniffing
+of the air, some information as to the direction
+in which danger lay, for Tom and Ned had
+stooped low, concealing themselves by a screen
+of leaves.</p>
+
+<p>The Indian, after his first frenzied outburst
+of fear, now lay quiet, as though fearing to move,
+moaning in pain.</p>
+
+<p>Suddenly the jaguar, attracted either by some
+slight movement on the part of Ned or Tom, or
+perhaps by having winded them, turned his head
+quickly and gazed with cruel eyes straight at the
+spot where the two young men stood behind the
+bushes.</p>
+
+<p>"He's seen us," whispered Ned.</p>
+
+<p>"Yes," assented Tom. "And it's a perfect shot.
+Hope I don't miss!"</p>
+
+<p>It was not like Tom Swift to miss, nor did he
+on this occasion. There was a slight report from
+the electric rifle—a report not unlike the crackle
+of the wireless—and the powerful projectile sped
+true to its mark.</p>
+
+<p>Straight through the throat and chest under
+the uplifted jaw of the jaguar it went—through
+heart and lungs. Then with a great coughing,
+sighing snarl the beast reared up, gave a convulsive
+leap forward toward its newly discovered
+enemies, and fell dead in a limp heap, just beyond
+the native over which it had been crouching before
+it delivered the death stroke, now never to fall.</p>
+
+<p>"You did it, Tom! You did it!" cried
+Ned, springing up from where he had been kneeling
+to give his chum a better chance to shoot.
+"You did it, and saved the man's life!" And Ned
+would have rushed out toward the still twitching body.</p>
+
+<p>"Just a minute!" interposed Tom. "Those
+beasts sometimes have as many lives as a cat.
+I'll give it one more for luck." Another electric
+projectile through the head of the jaguar produced
+no further effect than to move the body
+slightly, and this proved conclusively that there
+was no life left. It was safe to approach, which
+Tom and Ned did.</p>
+
+<p>Their first thought, after a glance at the
+jaguar, was for the Indian. It needed but a brief
+examination to show that he was not badly hurt.
+The jaguar had leaped on him from a low tree
+as he passed under it, as the boys learned afterward,
+and had crushed the man to earth by the
+weight of the spotted body more than by a stroke
+of the paw.</p>
+
+<p>The American jaguar is not so formidable a
+beast as the native name of tiger would cause
+one to suppose, though they are sufficiently dan-
+gerous, and this one had rather badly clawed the
+Indian. Fortunately the scratches were on the
+fleshy parts of the arms and shoulders, where,
+though painful, they were not necessarily serious.</p>
+
+<p>"But if you hadn't shot just when you did, Tom,
+it would have been all up with him," commented
+Ned.</p>
+
+<p>"Oh, well, I guess you'd have hit him if I
+hadn't," returned the young inventor. "But let's
+see what we can do for this chap."</p>
+
+<p>The man sat up wonderingly—hardly able to
+believe that he had been saved from the dreaded
+"tigre." His wounds were bleeding rather freely,
+and as Tom and Ned carried with them a first-aid
+kit they now brought it into use. The wounds
+were bound up, the man was given water to
+drink and then, as he was able to walk, Tom and
+Ned offered to help him wherever he wanted to
+go.</p>
+
+<p>"Blessed if I can tell whether he's one of our
+Indians or whether he belongs to the Beecher
+crowd," remarked Tom.</p>
+
+<p>"Senor Beecher," said the Indian, adding, in
+Spanish, that he lived in the vicinity and had
+only lately been engaged by the young professor
+who hoped to discover the idol of gold before
+Tom's scientific friend could do so.</p>
+
+<p>Tom and Ned knew a little Spanish, and with
+that, and simple but expressive signs on the part
+of the Indian, they learned his story. He had his
+palm-thatched hut not far from the Beecher camp,
+in a small Indian village, and he, with others,
+had been hired on the arrival of the Beecher party
+to help with the excavations. These, for some
+reason, were delayed.</p>
+
+<p>"Delayed because they daren't use the map they
+stole from us," commented Ned.</p>
+
+<p>"Maybe," agreed Tom.</p>
+
+<p>The Indian, whose name, it developed, was Tal,
+as nearly as Tom and Ned could master it, had
+left camp to go to visit his wife and child in the
+jungle hut, intending to return to the Beecher
+camp at night. But as he passed through the
+forest the jaguar had dropped on him, bearing him
+to earth.</p>
+
+<p>"But you saved my life, Senor," he said to
+Tom, dropping on one knee and trying to kiss
+Tom's hand, which our hero avoided. "And now
+my life is yours," added the Indian.</p>
+
+<p>"Well, you'd better get home with it and take
+care of it," said Tom. "I'll have Professor Bumper
+come over and dress your scratches in a better
+and more careful way. The bandages we put
+on are only temporary."</p>
+
+<p>"My wife she make a poultice of leaves—they
+cure me," said the Indian.</p>
+
+<p>"I guess that will be the best way," observed
+Ned. "These natives can doctor themselves for
+some things, better than we can."</p>
+
+<p>"Well, we'll take him home," suggested Tom.
+"He might keel over from loss of blood.
+Come on," he added to Tal, indicating his object.</p>
+
+<p>It was not far to the native's hut from the place
+where the jaguar had been killed, and there Tom
+and Ned underwent another demonstration of affection
+as soon as those of Tal's immediate family and the
+other natives understood what had happened.</p>
+
+<p>"I hate this business!" complained Tom, after
+having been knelt to by the Indian's wife and
+child, who called him the "preserver" and other
+endearing titles of the same kind. "Come on,
+let's hike back."</p>
+
+<p>But Indian hospitality, especially after a life
+has been saved, is not so simple as all that.</p>
+
+<p>"My life—my house—all that I own is yours,"
+said Tal in deep gratitude. "Take everything,"
+and he waved his hand to indicate all the possessions
+in his humble hut.</p>
+
+<p>"Thanks," answered Tom, "but I guess you
+need all you have. That's a fine specimen of
+blow gun though," he added, seeing one hanging
+on the wall. "I wouldn't mind having one like
+that. If you get well enough to make me one,
+Tal, and some arrows to go with it, I'd like it
+for a curiosity to hang in my room at home."</p>
+
+<p>"The Senor shall have a dozen," promised the
+Indian.</p>
+
+<p>"Look, Ned," went on Tom, pointing to the
+native weapon. "I never saw one just like this.
+They use small arrows or darts, tipped with wild
+cotton, instead of feathers."</p>
+
+<p>"These the arrows," explained Tal's wife,
+bringing a bundle from a corner of the one-room
+hut. As she held them out her husband gave a
+cry of fear.</p>
+
+<p>"Poisoned arrows! Poisoned arrows!" he exclaimed.
+"One scratch and the senors are dead men. Put them away!"</p>
+
+<p>In fear the Indian wife prepared to obey, but
+as she did so Tom Swift caught sight of the package
+and uttered a strange cry.</p>
+
+<p>"Thundering hoptoads, Ned!" he exclaimed.
+"The poisoned arrows are wrapped in the piece of oiled
+silk that was around the professor's missing map!"</p>
+
+<hr />
+
+<h2><a name="chapterxx" id="chapterxx">CHAPTER XX</a></h2>
+
+<h3>AN OLD LEGEND</h3>
+
+
+<p>Fascinated, Tom and Ned gazed at the package
+the Indian woman held out to them. Undoubtedly
+it was oiled silk on the outside, and through
+the almost transparent covering could be seen
+the small arrows, or darts, used in the blow gun.</p>
+
+<p>"Where did you get that?" asked Tom, pointing
+to the bundle and gazing sternly at Tal.</p>
+
+<p>"What is the matter, Senor?" asked the Indian in turn.
+"Is it that you are afraid of the poisoned arrows?
+Be assured they will not harm you unless
+you are scratched by them."</p>
+
+<p>Tom and Ned found it difficult to comprehend
+all the rapid Spanish spoken by their host, but
+they managed to understand some, and his
+eloquent gestures made up the rest.</p>
+
+<p>"We're not afraid," Tom said, noting that the
+oiled skin well covered the dangerous darts. "But
+where did you get that?"</p>
+
+<p>"I picked it up, after another Indian had thrown
+it away. He got it in your camp, Senor. I
+will not lie to you. I did not steal. Valdez
+went to your camp to steal—he is a bad Indian—and
+he brought back this wrapping. It contained
+something he thought was gold, but it was
+not, so he——"</p>
+
+<p>"Quick! Yes! Tell us!" demanded Tom
+eagerly. "What did he do with the professor's
+map that was in the oiled silk? Where is it?"</p>
+
+<p>"Oh, Senors!" exclaimed the Indian woman,
+thinking perhaps her husband was about to be
+dealt harshly with when she heard Tom's
+excited voice. "Tal do no harm!"</p>
+
+<p>"No, he did no harm," went on Tom, in a
+reassuring tone. "But he can do a whole lot of good
+if he tells us what became of the map that was in
+this oiled silk. Where is it?" he asked again.</p>
+
+<p>"Valdez burn it up," answered Tal.</p>
+
+<p>"What, burned the professor's map?" cried Ned.</p>
+
+<p>"If that was in this yellow cloth—yes,"
+answered the injured man. "Valdez he is bad. He
+say to me he is going to your camp to see what
+he can take. How he got this I know not, but
+he come back one morning with the yellow package.
+I see him, but he make me promise not
+to tell. But you save my life I tell you everything.</p>
+
+<p>"Valdez open the package; but it is not gold,
+though he think so because it is yellow, and the
+man with no hair on his head keep it in his pocket
+close, so close," and Tal hugged himself to indicate
+what he meant.</p>
+
+<p>"That's Professor Bumper," explained Ned.</p>
+
+<p>"How did Valdez get the map out of the
+professor's coat?" asked Tom.</p>
+
+<p>"Valdez he very much smart. When man
+with no hair on his head take coat off for a
+minute to eat breakfast Valdez take yellow thing
+out of pocket."</p>
+
+<p>"The Indian must have sneaked into camp
+when we were eating," said Tom. "Those from
+Beecher's party and our workers look all alike
+to us. We wouldn't know one from the other,
+and one of our rival's might slip in."</p>
+
+<p>"One evidently did, if this is really the piece of
+oiled silk that was around the professor's map,"
+said Ned.</p>
+
+<p>"It certainly is the same," declared the young
+inventor. "See, there is his name," and he
+stretched out his hand to point.</p>
+
+<p>"Don't touch!" cried Tal. "Poisoned arrows
+snake poison—very dead-like and quick."</p>
+
+<p>"Don't worry, I won't touch," said Tom grimly.
+"But go on. You say Valdez sneaked into our
+camp, took the oiled-silk package from the coat
+pocket of Professor Bumper and went back to
+his own camp with it, thinking it was gold."</p>
+
+<p>"Yes," answered Tal, though it is doubtful if
+he understood all that Tom said, as it was half
+Spanish and half English. But the Indian knew
+a little English, too. "Valdez, when he find no
+gold is very mad. Only papers in the yellow
+silk-papers with queer marks on. Valdez think
+it maybe a charm to work evil, so he burn them
+up—all up!"</p>
+
+<p>"Burned that rare map!" gasped Tom.</p>
+
+<p>"All in fire," went on Tal, indicating by his
+hands the play of flames. "Valdez throw away
+yellow silk, and I take for my arrows so rain not
+wash off poison. I give to you, if you like, with
+blow gun."</p>
+
+<p>"No, thank you," answered Tom, in disappointed
+tones. "The oiled silk is of no use without
+the map, and that's gone. Whew! but this is
+tough!" he said to his chum. "As long as it was
+only stolen there was a chance to get it back,
+but if it's burned, the jig is up."</p>
+
+<p>"It looks so," agreed Ned. "We'd better get
+back and tell the professor. It he can't get along
+without the map it's time he started a movement
+toward getting another. So it wasn't Beecher,
+after all, who got it."</p>
+
+<p>"Evidently not," assented Tom. "But I
+believe him capable of it."</p>
+
+<p>"You haven't much use for him," remarked Ned.</p>
+
+<p>"Huh!" was all the answer given by his chum.</p>
+
+<p>"I am sorry, Senors," went on Tal, "but I
+could not stop Valdez, and the burning of the
+papers——"</p>
+
+<p>"No, you could not help it," interrupted the
+young inventor. "But it just happens that it
+brings bad luck to us. You see, Tal, the papers
+in this yellow covering, told of an old buried
+city that the bald-headed
+professor—the-man-with-no-hair-on-his-head—is
+very anxious to
+discover. It is somewhere under the ground," and
+he waved to the jungle all about them, pointing
+earthwards.</p>
+
+<p>"Paper Valdez burn tell of lost city?" asked
+Tal, his face lighting up.</p>
+
+<p>"Yes. But now, of course, we can't tell where
+to dig for it."</p>
+
+<p>The Indian turned to his wife and talked rapidly
+with her in their own dialect. She, too, seemed
+greatly excited, making quick gestures. Finally
+she ran out of the hut.</p>
+
+<p>"Where is she going?" asked Tom suspiciously.</p>
+
+<p>"To get her grandfather. He very old Indian.
+He know story of buried cities under trees. Very
+old story—what you call legend, maybe. But
+Goosal know. He tell same as his grandfather
+told him. You wait. Goosal come, and you listen."</p>
+
+<p>"Good, Ned!" suddenly cried Tom. "Maybe,
+we'll get on the track of lost Kurzon after all,
+through some ancient Indian legend. Maybe we
+won't need the map!"</p>
+
+<p>"It hardly seems possible," said Ned slowly.
+"What can these Indians know of buried cities
+that were out of existence before Columbus came
+here? Why, they haven't any written history."</p>
+
+<p>"No, and that may be just the reason they are
+more likely to be right," returned Tom. "Legends
+handed down from one grandfather to another
+go back a good many hundred years. If
+they were written they might be destroyed as
+the professor's map was. Somehow or other,
+though I can't tell why, I begin to see daylight
+ahead of us."</p>
+
+<p>"I wish I did," remarked Ned.</p>
+
+<p>"Here comes Goosal I think," murmured Tom,
+and he pointed to an Indian, bent with the weight
+of years, who, led by Tal's wife, was slowly
+approaching the hut.</p>
+
+<hr />
+
+<h2><a name="chapterxxi" id="chapterxxi">CHAPTER XXI</a></h2>
+
+<h3>THE CAVERN</h3>
+
+
+<p>"Now Goosal can tell you," said Tal, evidently
+pleased that he had, in a measure, solved the
+problem caused by the burning of the professor's
+map. "Goosal very old Indian. He know old
+stories—legends—very old."</p>
+
+<p>"Well, if he can tell us how to find the buried
+city of Kurzon and the—the things in it," said
+Tom, "he's all right!"</p>
+
+<p>The aged Indian proceeded slowly toward the
+hut where the impatient youths awaited him.</p>
+
+<p>"I know what you seek in the buried city,"
+remarked Tal.</p>
+
+<p>"Do you?" cried Tom, wondering if some one
+had indiscreetly spoken of the idol of gold.</p>
+
+<p>"Yes you want pieces of rock, with strange
+writings on them, old weapons, broken pots.
+I know. I have helped white men before."</p>
+
+<p>"Yes, those are the things we want," agreed
+Tom, with a glance at his chum. "That is—some
+of them. But does your wife's grandfather talk
+our language?"</p>
+
+<p>"No, but I can tell you what he says."</p>
+
+<p>By this time the old man, led by "Mrs. Tal"—
+as the young men called the wife of the Indian
+they had helped—entered the hut. He seemed
+nervous and shy, and glanced from Tom and Ned
+to his grandson-in-law, as the latter talked rapidly
+in the Indian dialect. Then Goosal made answer,
+but what it was all about the boys could
+not tell.</p>
+
+<p>"Goosal say," translated Tal, "that he know a
+story of a very old city away down under ground."</p>
+
+<p>"Tell us about it!" urged Tom eagerly.</p>
+
+<p>But a difficulty very soon developed. Tal's
+intentions were good, but he was not equal to
+the task of translating. Nor was the understanding
+of Tom and Ned of Spanish quite up to the mark.</p>
+
+<p>"Say, this is too much for me!" exclaimed Tom.
+"We are losing the most valuable part of this by
+not understanding what Goosal says, and what
+Tal translates."</p>
+
+<p>"What can we do?" asked Ned.</p>
+
+<p>"Get the professor here as soon as possible.
+He can manage this dialect, and he'll get the
+information at first hand. If Goosal can tell
+where to begin excavating for the city he ought
+to tell the professor, not us."</p>
+
+<p>"That's right," agreed Ned. "We'll bring the
+professor here as soon as we can."</p>
+
+<p>Accordingly they stopped the somewhat difficult
+task of listening to the translated story and
+told Tal, as well as they could, that they would
+bring the "man-with-no-hair-on-his-head" to
+listen to the tale.</p>
+
+<p>This seemed to suit the Indians, all of whom
+in the small colony appeared to be very grateful
+to Tom and Ned for having saved the life of
+Tal.</p>
+
+<p>"That was a good shot you made when you
+bowled over the jaguar," said Ned, as the two
+young explorers started back to their camp.</p>
+
+<p>"Better than I realized, if it leads to the discovery
+of Kurzon and the idol of gold," remarked Tom.</p>
+
+<p>"And to think we should come across the oiled-
+silk holding the poisoned arrows!" went on Ned.
+"That's the strangest part of the whole affair.
+If it hadn't been that you shot the jaguar this
+never would have come about."</p>
+
+<p>That Professor Bumper was astonished, and
+Mr. Damon likewise, when they heard the story
+of Tom and Ned, is stating it mildly.</p>
+
+<p>"Come on!" exclaimed the scientist, as Tom
+finished, "we must see this Goosal at once.
+If my map is destroyed, and it seems to be,
+this old Indian may be our only hope.
+Where did he say the buried city was, Tom?"</p>
+
+<p>"Oh, somewhere in this vicinity, as nearly as
+I could make out. But you'd better talk with
+him yourself. We didn't say anything about the
+idol of gold."</p>
+
+<p>"That's right. It's just as well to let the
+natives think we are only after ordinary relics."</p>
+
+<p>"Bless my insurance policy!" gasped Mr. Damon.
+"It does not seem possible that we are on
+the right track."</p>
+
+<p>"Well, I think we are, from what little information
+Goosal gave us," remarked Tom. "This buried city
+of his must be a wonderful place."</p>
+
+<p>"It is, if it is what I take it to be," agreed the
+professor. "I told you I would bring you to a
+land of wonders, Tom Swift, and they have hardly
+begun yet. Come, I am anxious to talk to Goosal."</p>
+
+<p>In order that the Indians in the Bumper camp
+might not hear rumors of the new plan to locate
+the hidden city, and, at the same time, to keep
+rumors from spreading to the camp of the rivals,
+the scientist and his friends started a new shaft,
+and put a shift of men at work on it.</p>
+
+<p>"We'll pretend we are on the right track, and
+very busy," said Tom. "That will fool Beecher."</p>
+
+<p>"Are you glad to know he did not take your
+map Professor Bumper?" asked Mr. Damon.</p>
+
+<p>"Well, yes. It is hard to believe such things of
+a fellow scientist."</p>
+
+<p>"If he didn't take it he wanted to," said Tom.
+"And he has done, or will do, things as unsportsmanlike."</p>
+
+<p>"Oh, you are hardly fair, perhaps, Tom,"
+commented Ned.</p>
+
+<p>"Um!" was all the answer he received.</p>
+
+<p>With the Indians in camp busy on the excavation
+work, and having ascertained that similar
+work was going on in the Beecher outfit,
+Professor Bumper, with Mr. Damon and the young
+men, set off to visit the Indian village and listen
+to Goosal's story. They passed the place where
+Tom had slain the jaguar, but nothing was left
+but the bones; the ants, vultures and jungle animals
+having picked them clean in the night.</p>
+
+<p>On the arrival of Tom and his friends at the
+Indian's hut, Goosal told, in language which
+Professor Bumper could understand, the ancient
+legend of the buried city as he had had it from his
+grandfather.</p>
+
+<p>"But is that all you know about it, Goosal?"
+asked the savant.</p>
+
+<p>"No, Learned One. It is true most of what I
+have told you was told to me by my father and
+his father's father. But I—I myself—with these
+eyes, have looked upon the lost city."</p>
+
+<p>"You have!" cried the professor, this time in
+English. "Where? When? Take us to it!
+How do you get here?"</p>
+
+<p>"Through the cavern of the dead," was the
+answer when the questions were modified.</p>
+
+<p>"Bless my diamond ring!" exclaimed Mr.
+Damon, when Professor Bumper translated the reply.
+"What does he mean?"</p>
+
+<p>And then, after some talk, this information
+came out. Years before, when Goosal was a
+young man, he had been taken by his grandfather
+on a journey through the jungle. They
+stopped one day at the foot of a high mountain,
+and, clearing away the brush and stones at a
+certain place, an entrance to a great cavern was
+revealed. This, it appeared, was the Indian burial
+ground, and had been used for generations.</p>
+
+<p>Goosal, though in fear and trembling, was lead
+through it, and came to another cavern, vaster
+than the first. And there he saw strange and
+wonderful sights, for it was the remains of a buried
+city, that had once been the home of a great
+and powerful tribe unlike the Indians—the ancient
+Mayas it would seem.</p>
+
+<p>"Can you take us to this cavern?" asked the professor.</p>
+
+<p>"Yes," answered Goosal. "I will lead to it
+those who saved the life of Tal—them and their
+friends. I will take you to the lost city!"</p>
+
+<p>"Good!" cried Mr. Damon, when this had been
+translated. "Now let Beecher try to play any
+more tricks on us! Ho! for the cavern and the
+lost city of Kurzon."</p>
+
+<p>"And the idol of gold," said Tom Swift to
+himself. "I hope we can get it ahead of Beecher.
+Perhaps if I can help in that—Oh, well, here's hoping,
+that's all!" and a little smile curved his lips.</p>
+
+<p>Greatly excited by the strange news, but
+maintaining as calm an air outwardly as possible, so
+as not to excite the Indians, Tom and his friends
+returned to camp to prepare for their trip. Goosal
+had said the cavern lay distant more than a two-days'
+journey into the jungle.</p>
+
+<hr />
+
+<h2><a name="chapterxxii" id="chapterxxii">CHAPTER XXII</a></h2>
+
+<h3>THE STORM</h3>
+
+
+<p>"Now," remarked Tom, once they were back
+again in their camp, "we must go about this trip
+to the cavern in a way that will cause no suspicion
+over there as to what our object is," and he
+nodded in the direction of the quarters of his
+rival.</p>
+
+<p>"Do you mean to go off quietly?" asked Ned.</p>
+
+<p>"Yes. And to keep the work going on here,
+at these shafts," put in the scientist, "so that
+if any of their spies happen to come here they
+will think we still believe the buried city to be
+just below us. To that end we must keep the
+Indians digging, though I am convinced now that
+it is useless."</p>
+
+<p>Accordingly preparations were made for an
+expedition into the jungle under the leadership of
+Goosal. Tal had not sufficiently recovered from
+the jaguar wounds to go with the party, but the
+old man, in spite of his years, was hale and hearty
+and capable of withstanding hardships.</p>
+
+<p>One of the most intelligent of the Indians was
+put in charge of the digging gangs as foreman,
+and told to keep them at work, and not to let
+them stray. Tolpec, whose brother Tom had
+tried to save, proved a treasure. He agreed to
+remain behind and look after the interests of his
+friends, and see that none of their baggage or
+stores were taken.</p>
+
+<p>"Well, I guess we're as ready as we ever
+shall be," remarked Tom, as the cavalcade made
+ready to start. Mules carried the supplies that
+were to be taken into the jungle, and others of
+the sturdy animals were to be ridden by the
+travelers. The trail was not an easy one, Goosal
+warned them.</p>
+
+<p>Tom and his friends found it even worse than
+they had expected, for all their experience in
+jungle and mountain traveling. In places it was
+necessary to dismount and lead the mules along,
+sometimes pushing and dragging them. More
+than once the trail fairly hung on the edge of
+some almost bottomless gorge, and again it
+wound its way between great walls of rock,
+so poised that they appeared about to topple
+over and crush the travelers. But they kept on
+with dogged patience, through many hardships.</p>
+
+<p>To add to their troubles they seemed to have
+entered the abode of the fiercest mosquitoes
+encountered since coming to Honduras. At times
+it was necessary to ride along with hats covered
+with mosquito netting, and hands encased in
+gloves.</p>
+
+<p>They had taken plenty of condensed food with
+them, and they did not suffer in this respect.
+Game, too, was plentiful and the electric rifles of
+Tom and Ned added to the larder.</p>
+
+<p>One night, after a somewhat sound sleep
+induced by hard travel on the trail that day, Tom
+awoke to hear some one or something moving
+about among their goods, which included their
+provisions.</p>
+
+<p>"Who's there?" asked the young inventor
+sharply, as he reached for his electric rifle.</p>
+
+<p>There was no answer, but a rattling of the pans.</p>
+
+<p>"Speak, or I'll fire!" Tom warned, adding this
+in such Spanish as he could muster, for he thought
+it might be one of the Indians. No reply came,
+and then, seeing by the light of the stars a dark
+form moving in front of the tent occupied by
+himself and Ned, Tom fired.</p>
+
+<p>There was a combined grunt and squeal of
+pain, then a savage growl, and Ned yelled:</p>
+
+<p>"What's the matter, Tom?" for he had been
+awakened, and heard the crackle of the electrical
+discharge.</p>
+
+<p>"I don't know," Tom answered. "But I shot
+something—or somebody!"</p>
+
+<p>"Maybe some of Beecher's crowd," ventured
+his chum. But when they got their electric
+torches, and focused them on the inert, black
+object, it was found to be a bear which had come
+to nose about the camp for dainty morsels.</p>
+
+<p>Bruin was quite dead, and as he was in prime
+condition there was a feast of bear meat at the
+following dinner. The white travelers found it
+rather too strong for their palates, but the Indians
+reveled in it.</p>
+
+<p>It was shortly after noon the next day, when
+Goosal, after remarking that a storm seemed
+brewing, announced that they would be at the
+entrance to the cavern in another hour.</p>
+
+<p>"Good!" cried Professor Bumper. "At last
+we are near the buried city."</p>
+
+<p>"Don't be too sure," advised Mr. Damon,
+"We may be disappointed. Though I hope not
+for your sake, my dear Professor."</p>
+
+<p>Goosal now took the lead, and the old Indian,
+traveling on foot, for he said he could better look
+for the old landmark that way than on the back
+of a mule, walked slowly along a rough cliff.</p>
+
+<p>"Here. somewhere, is the entrance to the cavern,"
+said the aged man. "It was many years
+ago that I was here—many years. But it seems
+as though yesterday. It is little changed."</p>
+
+<p>Indeed little did change in that land of wonders.
+Only nature caused what alterations there were.
+The hand of man had long been absent.</p>
+
+<p>Slowly Goosal walked along the rocky trail,
+on one side a sheer rock, towering a hundred feet
+or more toward the sky. On the other side a
+deep gash leading to a great fertile valley below.</p>
+
+<p>Suddenly the old man paused, and looked about
+him as though uncertain. Then, more slowly
+still, he put out his hand and pulled at some
+bushes that grew on a ledge of the rock. They
+came away, having no depth of earth, and a small
+opening was disclosed.</p>
+
+<p>"It is here," said Goosal quietly. "The
+entrance to the cavern that leads to the burial
+place of the dead, and the city that is dead also.
+It is here."</p>
+
+<p>He stood aside while the others hurried
+forward. It took but a few minutes to prove that
+he was right—at least as to the existence of the
+cavern—for the four men were soon peering into
+the opening.</p>
+
+<p>"Come on!" cried Tom, impetuously.</p>
+
+<p>"Wait a moment," suggested the professor,
+"Sometimes the air in these places is foul. We
+must test it." But a torch one of the Indians
+threw in burned with a steady glow. That test
+was conclusive at least. They made ready to enter.</p>
+
+<p>Torches of a light bark, that glowed with a
+steady flame and little smoke, had been provided,
+as well as a good supply of electric dry-battery
+lamps, and the way into the cavern was thus well
+lighted. At first the Indians were afraid to
+enter, but a word or two from Goosal reassured
+them, and they followed Professor Bumper, Tom,
+and the others into the cavern.</p>
+
+<p>For several hundred feet there was nothing
+remarkable about the cave. It was like any
+other cavern of the mountains, though wonderful
+for the number of crystal formations on the root
+and walls—formations that sparkled like a million
+diamonds in the flickering lights.</p>
+
+<p>"Talk about a wonderland!" cried Tom.
+"This is fairyland!"</p>
+
+<p>A moment later, as Goosal walked on beside
+the professor and Tom, the aged Indian came to
+a pause, and, pointing ahead, murmured:</p>
+
+<p>"The city of the dead!"</p>
+
+<p>They saw the niches cut in the rock walls.
+niches that held the countless bones of those who
+had died many, many years before. It was a
+vast Indian grave.</p>
+
+<p>"Doubtless a wealth of material of historic
+interest here," said Professor Bumper, flashing
+his torch on the skeletons. "But it will keep.
+Where is the city you spoke of, Goosal?"</p>
+
+<p>"Farther on, Senor. Follow me."</p>
+
+<p>Past the stone graves they went, deeper and
+deeper into the great cave. Their footsteps
+echoed and re-echoed. Suddenly Tom, who with
+Ned had gone a little ahead, came to a sudden
+halt and said:</p>
+
+<p>"Well, this may be a burial place sure enough,
+but I think I see something alive all right—if
+it isn't a ghost."</p>
+
+<p>He pointed ahead. Surely those were lights
+flickering and moving about, and, yes, there were
+men carrying them. The Bumper party came to
+a surprised halt. The other lights advanced,
+and then, to the great astonishment of Professor
+Bumper and his friends, there confronted them
+in the cave several scientists of Professor Beecher's
+party and a score or more of Indians. Professor
+Hylop, who was known to Professor Bumper,
+stepped forward and asked sharply:</p>
+
+<p>"What are you doing here?"</p>
+
+<p>"I might ask you the same thing," was the
+retort.</p>
+
+<p>"You might, but you would not be answered,"
+came sharply. "We have a right here, having
+discovered this cavern, and we claim it under a
+concession of the Honduras Government. I shall
+have to ask you to withdraw."</p>
+
+<p>"Do you mean leave here?" asked Mr Damon.</p>
+
+<p>"That is it, exactly. We first discovered this
+cave. We have been conducting explorations in
+it for several days, and we wish no outsiders."</p>
+
+<p>"Are you speaking for Professor Beecher"' asked Tom.</p>
+
+<p>"I am. But he is here in the cave, and will
+speak for himself if you desire it. But I represent
+him, and I order you to leave. If you do
+not go peaceably we will use force. We have
+plenty of it," and he glanced back at the Indians
+grouped behind him—scowling savage Indians.</p>
+
+<p>"We have no wish to intrude," observed
+Professor Bumper, "and I fully recognize the right
+of prior discovery. But one member of our
+party (he did not say which one) was in this
+cave many years ago. He led us to it."</p>
+
+<p>"Ours is a government concession!" exclaimed
+Professor Hylop harshly. "We want no intruders!
+Go!" and he pointed toward the direction
+whence Tom's party had come.</p>
+
+<p>"Drive them out!" he ordered the Indians in
+Spanish, and with muttered threats the dark-skinned
+men advanced toward Tom and the
+others.</p>
+
+<p>"You need not use force," said Professor Bumper.</p>
+
+<p>He and Professor Hylop had quarreled bitterly
+years before on some scientific matter, and the
+matter was afterward found to be wrong. Perhaps
+this made him vindictive.</p>
+
+<p>Tom stepped forward and started to protest,
+but Professor Bumper interposed.</p>
+
+<p>"I guess there is no help for it but to go. It
+seems to be theirs by right of discovery and
+government concession," he said, in disappointed
+tone. "Come friends"; and dejectedly they
+retraced their steps.</p>
+
+<p>Followed by the threatening Indians, the
+Bumper party made its way back to the entrance.
+They had hoped for great things, but if the cavern
+gave access to the buried city—the ancient
+city of Kurzon on the chief altar of which stood
+the golden idol, Quitzel—it looked as though
+they were never to enter it.</p>
+
+<p>"We'll have to get our Indians and drive those
+fellows out!" declared Tom. "I'm not going to
+be beaten this way—and by Beecher!"</p>
+
+<p>"It is galling," declared Professor Bumper.
+"Still he has right on his side, and I must give
+in to priority, as I would expect him to. It is
+the unwritten law."</p>
+
+<p>"Then we've failed!" cried Tom bitterly.</p>
+
+<p>"Not yet," said Professor Bumper. "If I can
+not unearth that buried city I may find another
+in this wonderland. I shall not give up."</p>
+
+<p>"Hark! What's that noise?" asked Tom, as
+they approached the entrance to the cave.</p>
+
+<p>"Sounds like a great wind blowing," commented Ned.</p>
+
+<p>It was. As they stood in the entrance they
+looked out to find a fierce storm raging. The
+wind was sweeping down the rocky trail, the
+rain was falling in veritable bucketfuls from the
+overhanging cliff, and deafening thunder and
+blinding lightning roared and flashed.</p>
+
+<p>"Surely you would not drive us out in this
+storm," said Professor Bumper to his former
+rival.</p>
+
+<p>"You can not stay in the cave! You must get
+out!" was the answer, as a louder crash of thunder
+than usual seemed to shake the very mountain.</p>
+
+<hr />
+
+<h2><a name="chapterxxiii" id="chapterxxiii">CHAPTER XXIII</a></h2>
+
+<h3>ENTOMBED ALIVE</h3>
+
+
+<p>For an instant Tom and his friends paused at
+the entrance to the wonderful cavern, and looked
+at the raging storm. It seemed madness to
+venture out into it, yet they had been driven
+from the cave by those who had every right of
+discovery to say who, and who should not, partake
+of its hospitality.</p>
+
+<p>"We can't go out into that blow!" cried Ned.
+"It's enough to loosen the very mountains!"</p>
+
+<p>"Let's stay here and defy them!" murmured Tom.
+"If the—if what we seek—is here we have
+as good a right to it as they have."</p>
+
+<p>"We must go out," said Professor Bumper simply.
+"I recognize the right of my rival to dispossess us."</p>
+
+<p>"He may have the right, but it isn't human,"
+said Mr. Damon. "Bless my overshoes! If
+Beecher himself were here he wouldn't have the
+heart to send us out in this storm."</p>
+
+<p>"I would not give him the satisfaction of
+appealing to him," remarked Professor Bumper.
+"Come, we will go out. We have our ponchos,
+and we are not fair-weather explorers. If we
+can't get to the lost city one way we will
+another. Come my friends."</p>
+
+<p>And despite the downpour, the deafening
+thunder and the lightning that seemed ready to sear
+one's eyes, he walked out of the cave entrance,
+followed by Tom and the others.</p>
+
+<p>"Come on!" cried Tom, in a voice he tried to
+render confident, as they went out into the
+terrible storm. "We'll beat 'em yet!"</p>
+
+<p>The rain fell harder than ever. Small torrents
+were now rushing down the trail, and it was only
+a question of a few minutes before the place
+where they stood would be a raging river, so
+quickly does the rain collect in the mountains and
+speed toward the valleys.</p>
+
+<p>"We must take to the forest!" cried Tom.
+"There'll be some shelter there, and I don't like
+the way the geography of this place is behaving.
+There may be a landslide at any moment."</p>
+
+<p>As he spoke he motioned upward through the
+mist of the rain to the sloping side of the mountain
+towering above them. Loose stones were
+beginning to roll down, accompanied by patches
+of earth loosened by the water. Some of the
+patches carried with them bunches of grass and
+small bushes.</p>
+
+<p>"Yes, it will be best to move into the jungle,"
+said the professor. "Goosal, you had better take
+the lead."</p>
+
+<p>It was wonderful to see how well the aged Indian
+bore up in spite of his years, and walked on
+ahead. They had left their mules tethered some
+distance back, in a sheltering clump of trees, and
+they hoped the animals would be safe.</p>
+
+<p>The guide found a place where they could
+leave the trail, though going down a dangerous
+slope, and take to the forest. As carefully as
+possible they descended this, the rain continuing to
+fall, the wind to blow, the lightning to sizzle all
+about them and the thunder to boom in their ears.</p>
+
+<p>They went on until they were beneath the
+shelter of the thick jungle growth of trees, which
+kept off some of the pelting drops.</p>
+
+<p>"This is better!" exclaimed Ned, shaking his
+poncho and getting rid of some of the water that
+had settled on it.</p>
+
+<p>"Bless my overcoat!" cried Mr. Damon. "We seem
+to have gotten out of the frying pan into the fire!"</p>
+
+<p>"How?" asked Tom. "We are partly sheltered here,
+though had we stayed in the cave in spite of——"</p>
+
+<p>A deafening crash interrupted him, and following
+the flash one of the giant trees of the forest
+was seen to blaze up and then topple over.</p>
+
+<p>"Struck by lightning!" yelled Ned.</p>
+
+<p>"Yes; and it may happen to us!" exclaimed
+Mr. Damon. "We were safer from the lightning
+in the open. Maybe——"</p>
+
+<p>Again came an interruption, but this time a
+different one. The very ground beneath their feet
+seemed to be shaking and trembling.</p>
+
+<p>"What is it?" gasped Ned, while Goosal fell on
+his knees and began fervently to pray.</p>
+
+<p>"It's an earthquake!" yelled Tom Swift.</p>
+
+<p>As he spoke there came another sound—the
+sound of a mass of earth in motion. It came
+from the direction of the mountain trail they had
+just left. They looked toward it and their horror-stricken
+eyes saw the whole side of the
+mountain sliding down.</p>
+
+<p>Slowly at first the earth slid down, but
+constantly gathering force and speed. In the face
+of this new disaster the rain seemed to have
+ceased and the thunder and lightning to be less
+severe. It was as though one force of nature
+gave way to the other.</p>
+
+<p>"Look! Look!" gasped Ned.</p>
+
+<p>In silence, which was broken now only by a
+low and ominous rumble, more menacing than
+had been the awful fury of the elements, the
+travelers looked.</p>
+
+<p>Suddenly there was a quicker movement of
+seemingly one whole section of the mountain.
+Great rocks and trees, carried down by the
+appalling force of the landslide were slipping over
+the trail, obliterating it as though it had never existed.</p>
+
+<p>"There goes the entrance to the cavern!" cried Ned,
+and as the others looked to where he pointed
+they saw the hole in the side of the mountain
+—the mouth of the cave that led to the lost city
+of Kurzon—completely covered by thousands of
+tons of earth and stones.</p>
+
+<p>"That's the end of them!" exclaimed Tom, as
+the rumble of the earthquake died away.</p>
+
+<p>"Of——" Ned stopped, his eyes staring.</p>
+
+<p>"Of Professor Beecher's party. They're
+entombed alive!"</p>
+
+<hr />
+
+<h2><a name="chapterxxiv" id="chapterxxiv">CHAPTER XXIV</a></h2>
+
+<h3>THE REVOLVING STONE</h3>
+
+<p>Stunned, not alone by the realization of the
+awfulness of the fate of their rivals, but also by
+the terrific storm and the effect of the earthquake
+and the landslide, Tom and his friends remained
+for a moment gazing toward the mouth of the
+cavern, now completely out of sight, buried by
+a mass of broken trees, tangled bushes, rocks and
+earth. Somewhere, far beyond that mass, was
+the Beecher party, held prisoners in the cave
+that formed the entrance to the buried city.</p>
+
+<p>Tom was the first to come to a realization of
+what was needed to be done.</p>
+
+<p>"We must help them!" he exclaimed, and it was
+characteristic of him that he harbored no enmity.</p>
+
+<p>"How?" asked Ned.</p>
+
+<p>"We must get a force of Indians and dig them
+out," was the prompt answer.</p>
+
+<p>At Tom's vigorous words Professor Bumper's
+forces were energized into action, and he stated:
+"Fortunately we have plenty of excavating
+tools. We may be in time to save them. Come
+on! the storm seems to have passed as suddenly
+as it came up, and the earthquake, which, after
+all did not cover a wide area, seems to be over.
+We must start the work of rescue at once. We
+must go back to camp and get all the help we
+can muster."</p>
+
+<p>The storm, indeed, seemed to be over, but it
+was no easy matter to get back over the soggy,
+rain-soaked ground to the trail they had left to
+take shelter in the forest. Fortunately the earthquake
+had not involved that portion where they
+had left their mules, but most of the frightened
+animals had broken loose, and it was some little
+time before they could all be caught.</p>
+
+<p>"It is no use to try to get back to camp to-night,"
+said Tom, when the last of the pack and
+saddle animals had been corralled. "It is getting
+late and there is no telling the condition of the
+trail. We must stay here until morning."</p>
+
+<p>"But what about them?" and Mr. Damon
+nodded in the direction of the entombed ones.</p>
+
+<p>"We can help them best by waiting until the
+beginning of a new day," said the professor. "We
+shall need a large force, and we could not bring
+it up to-night. Besides, Tom is right, and if we
+tried to go along the trail after dark, torn and
+disturbed as it is bound to be by the rain, we
+might get into difficulties ourselves. No, we
+must camp here until morning and then go for
+help."</p>
+
+<p>They all decided finally this was best. The
+professor, too, pointed out that their rivals were
+in a large and roomy cave, not likely to suffer
+from lack of air nor food or water, since they
+must have supplies with them.</p>
+
+<p>"The only danger is that the cave has been
+crushed in," added Tom; "but in that event we
+would be of no service to them anyhow."</p>
+
+<p>The night seemed very long, and it was a most
+uncomfortable one, because of the shock and
+exertions through which the party had passed.
+Added to this was the physical discomfort caused
+by the storm.</p>
+
+<p>But in time there was the light in the east that
+meant morning was at hand, and with it came
+action. A hasty breakfast, cups of steaming coffee
+forming a most welcome part, put them all
+in better condition, and once more they were on
+their way, heading back to the main camp where
+they had left their force of Indians.</p>
+
+<p>"My!" exclaimed Tom, as they made their
+way slowly along, "it surely was some storm!
+Look at those big trees uprooted over there.
+They're almost as big as the giant redwoods of
+California, and yet they were bowled over as if
+they were tenpins."</p>
+
+<p>"I wonder if the wind did it or the earthquake,"
+ventured Mr. Damon.</p>
+
+<p>"No wind could do that," declared Ned. "It must
+have been the landslide caused by the earthquake."</p>
+
+<p>"The wind could do it if the ground was made
+soft by the rain; and that was probably what
+did it," suggested Tom.</p>
+
+<p>"There is no harm in settling the point,"
+commented Professor Bumper. "It is not far off our
+trail, and will take only a few minutes to go
+over to the trees. I should like to get some
+photographs to accompany an article that perhaps
+I shall write on the effects of sudden and
+severe tropical storms. We will go to look at
+the overturned trees and then we'll hurry on to
+camp to get the rescue party."</p>
+
+<p>The uprooted trees lay on one side of the
+mountain trail, perhaps a mile from the mouth of
+the cave which had been covered over, entombing
+the Beecher party. Leaving the mules in
+charge of one of the Indians, Professor Bumper
+and his friends, accompanied by Goosal, approached
+the fallen trees. As they neared them
+they saw that in falling the trees had lifted with
+their roots a large mass of earth and imbedded
+rocks that had clung to the twisted and gnarled
+fibers. This mass was as large as a house.</p>
+
+<p>"Look at the hole left when the roots pulled
+out!" cried Ned. "Why, it's like the crater of
+a small volcano!" he added. And, as they stood
+on the edge of it looking curiously at the hole
+made, the others agreed with Tom's chum.</p>
+
+<p>Professor Bumper was looking about, trying
+to ascertain if there were any evidences of the
+earthquake in the vicinity, when Tom, who had
+cautiously gone a little way down into the excavation
+caused by the fallen trees, uttered a cry of surprise.</p>
+
+<p>"Look!" he shouted. "Isn't that some sort of
+tunnel or underground passage?" and he pointed
+to a square opening, perhaps seven feet high and
+nearly as broad, which extended, no one knew
+where, downward and onward from the side of
+the hole made by the uprooting of the trees.</p>
+
+<p>"It's an underground passage all right," said
+Professor Bumper eagerly; "and not a natural
+one, either. That was fashioned by the hand
+of man, if I am any judge. It seems to go right
+under the mountain, too. Friends, we must
+explore this! It may be of the utmost importance!
+Come, we have our electric torches, and we shall
+need them, for it's very dark in there," and he
+peered into the passage in front of which they
+all stood now. It seemed to have been tunneled
+through the earth, the sides being lined by either
+slabs of stone, or walls made by a sort of concrete.</p>
+
+<p>"But what about the rescue work?" asked Mr. Damon.</p>
+
+<p>"I am not forgetting Professor Beecher and his
+friends," answered the scientist.</p>
+
+<p>"Perhaps this may be a better means of rescuing
+them than by digging them out, which will take
+a week at least," observed Tom.</p>
+
+<p>"This a better way?" asked Ned, pointing to the tunnel.</p>
+
+<p>"That's it," confirmed the savant. "If you
+will notice it extends back in the direction
+of the cave from which we were driven.
+Now if there is a buried city beneath all this
+jungle, this mountain of earth and stones, the
+accumulation of centuries, it is probably on the
+bottom of some vast cavern. It is my opinion
+that we were only in one end of that cavern, and
+this may be the entrance to another end of it."</p>
+
+<p>"Then," asked Mr. Damon, "do you mean that
+we can enter here, get into the cave that contains
+the buried city, or part of it, and find there
+Beecher and his friends?"</p>
+
+<p>"That's it. It is possible, and if we could it
+would save an immense lot of work, and probably
+be a surer way to save their lives than by
+digging a tunnel through the landslide to find
+the mouth of the cave where we first entered."</p>
+
+<p>"It's a chance worth taking," said Mr. Damon.
+"Of course it is a chance. But then everything
+connected with this expedition is; so one is no
+worse than another. As you say, we may find
+the entombed men more easily this way than any
+other."</p>
+
+<p>"I wonder," said Tom slowly, "if, by any
+chance, we shall find, through this passage, the
+lost city we are looking for."</p>
+
+<p>"And the idol of gold," added Ned.</p>
+
+<p>"Goosal, do you know anything about this?"
+asked Professor Bumper. "Did you ever hear
+of another passage leading to the cave where you
+saw the ancient city?"</p>
+
+<p>"No, Learned One, though I have heard stories
+about there being many cities, or parts of a big
+one, beneath the mountain, and when it was
+above ground there were many entrances to it."</p>
+
+<p>"That settles it!" cried the professor in
+English, having talked to Goosal in Spanish.
+"We'll try this and see where it leads."</p>
+
+<p>They entered the stone-lined passage. In
+spite of the fact that it had probably been buried
+and concealed from light and air for centuries,
+as evidenced by the growth of the giant trees
+above it, the air was fresh.</p>
+
+<p>"And this is one reason," said Tom, in
+commenting on this fact, "why I believe it leads to
+some vast cavern which is connected in some
+fashion with the outer air. Well, perhaps we
+shall soon make a discovery."</p>
+
+<p>Eagerly and anxiously the little party pressed
+forward by the light of the pocket electric lamps.
+They were obsessed by two thoughts—what they
+might find and the necessity for aiding in the
+rescue of their rivals.</p>
+
+<p>On and on they went, the darkness illuminated
+only by the torches they carried. But they
+noticed that the air was still fresh, and that a
+gentle wind blew toward them. The passage
+was undoubtedly artificial, a tunnel made by the
+hands of men now long crumbled into dust. It
+had a slightly upward slope, and this, Professor
+Bumper said, indicated that it was bored upward
+and perhaps into the very heart of the mountain
+somewhere in the interior of which was the
+Beecher party.</p>
+
+<p>Just how far they went they did not know, but
+it must have been more than two miles. Yet
+they did not tire, for the way was smooth.</p>
+
+<p>Suddenly Tom, who, with Professor Bumper,
+was in the lead, uttered a cry, as he held his
+torch above his head and flashed it about in a
+circle.</p>
+
+<p>"We're blocked!" he exclaimed. "We're up
+against a stone wall!"</p>
+
+<p>It was but too true. Confronting them, and
+extending from side to side across the passage
+and from roof to floor, was a great rough stone.
+Immense and solid it seemed when they pushed
+on it in vain.</p>
+
+<p>"Nothing short of dynamite will move that,"
+said Ned in despair. "This is a blind lead.
+We'll have to go back."</p>
+
+<p>"But there must be something on the other
+side of that stone," cried Tom. "See, it is pierced
+with holes, and through them comes a current of
+air. If we could only move the stone!"</p>
+
+<p>"I believe it is an ancient door," remarked
+Professor Bumper.</p>
+
+<p>Eagerly and frantically they tried to move it
+by their combined weight. The stone did not
+give the fraction of the breadth of a hair.</p>
+
+<p>"We'll have to go back and get some of your
+big tunnel blasting powder, Tom," suggested Ned.</p>
+
+<p>As he spoke old Goosal glided forward. He
+had remained behind them in the passage while
+they were trying to move the rock. Now he
+said something in Spanish.</p>
+
+<p>"What does he mean?" asked Ned.</p>
+
+<p>"He asks that he be allowed to try," translated
+Professor Bumper. "Sometimes, he says, there
+is a secret way of opening stone doors in these
+underground caves. Let him try."</p>
+
+<p>Goosal seemed to be running his fingers lightly
+over the outer edge of the door. He was muttering
+to himself in his Indian tongue.</p>
+
+<p>Suddenly he uttered an exclamation, and, as
+he did so, there was a noise from the door itself.
+It was a grinding, scraping sound, a rumble as
+though rocks were being rolled one against the
+other.</p>
+
+<p>Then the astonished eyes of the adventurers
+saw the great stone door revolve on its axis
+and swing to one side, leaving a passage open
+through which they could pass. Goosal had
+discovered the hidden mechanism.</p>
+
+<p>What lay before them?</p>
+
+<hr />
+
+<h2><a name="chapterxxv" id="chapterxxv">CHAPTER XXV</a></h2>
+
+<h3>THE IDOL OF GOLD</h3>
+
+
+<p>"Forward! cried Tom Swift.</p>
+
+<p>"Where?" asked Mr Damon, hanging back for
+an instant. "Bless my compass, Tom! do you
+know where you're going?"</p>
+
+<p>"I haven't the least idea, but it must lead to
+something, or the ancients who made this
+revolving stone door wouldn't have taken such care
+to block the passage."</p>
+
+<p>"Ask Goosal if he knows anything about it,"
+suggested Mr. Damon to the professor.</p>
+
+<p>"He says he never was here before," translated
+the savant, "but years ago, when he went into
+the hidden city by the cave we left yesterday, he
+saw doors like this which opened this way."</p>
+
+<p>"Then we're on the right track!" cried Tom.
+"If this is the same kind of door, it must lead
+to the same place. Ho for Kurzon and the idol
+of gold!"</p>
+
+<p>As they passed through the stone door, Tom
+and Professor Bumper tried to get some idea of
+the mechanism by which it worked. But they
+found this impossible, it being hidden within the
+stone itself or in the adjoining walls. But, in
+order that it might not close of itself and entomb
+them, the portal was blocked open with stones
+found in the passage.</p>
+
+<p>"It's always well to have a line of retreat open,"
+said Tom. "There's no telling what may lie beyond us."</p>
+
+<p>For a time there seemed to be nothing more
+than the same passage along which they had
+come. Then the passage suddenly widened, like
+the large end of a square funnel. Upward and
+outward the stone walls swept, and they saw
+dimly before them, in the light of their torches,
+a vast cavern, seemingly formed by the falling
+in of mountains, which, in toppling over, had met
+overhead in a sort of rough arch, thus protecting,
+in a great measure, that which lay beneath
+them.</p>
+
+<p>Goosal, who had brought with him some of
+the fiber bark torches, set a bundle of them
+aflame. As they flared up, a wondrous sight
+was revealed to Tom Swift and his friends.</p>
+
+<p>Stretching out before them, as though they
+stood at the end of an elevated street and gazed
+down on it, was a city—a large city, with streets,
+houses, open squares, temples, statues, fountains,
+dry for centuries—a buried and forgotten city—
+a city in ruins—a city of the dead, now dry as
+dust, but still a city, or, rather, the strangely
+preserved remains of one.</p>
+
+<p>"Look!" whispered Tom. A louder voice just then,
+would have seemed a sacrilege. "Look!"</p>
+
+<p>"Is it what we are looking for?" asked Ned in a low voice.</p>
+
+<p>"I believe it is," replied the professor. "It is
+the lost city of Kurzon, or one just like it. And
+now if we can find the idol of gold our search will
+be ended—at least the major part of it."</p>
+
+<p>"Where did you expect to find the idol?" asked Tom.</p>
+
+<p>"It should be in the main temple. Come, we
+will walk in the ancient streets—streets where
+no feet but ours have trod in many centuries.
+Come!"</p>
+
+<p>In eager silence they pressed on through this
+newly discovered wonderland. For it was a
+wonderful city, or had been. Though much of
+it was in ruins, probably caused by an earthquake
+or an eruption from a volcano, the central
+portion, covered as it was by the overtoppling
+mountains that formed the arching roof, was well
+preserved.</p>
+
+<p>There were rude but beautiful stone buildings.
+There were archways; temples; public squares;
+and images, not at all beautiful, for they seemed
+to be of man-monsters—doubtless ancient gods.
+There were smoothly paved streets; wondrously
+carved fountains, some in ruins, all now as dry
+as bone, but which must have been places of
+beauty where youths and maidens gathered in
+the ancient days.</p>
+
+<p>Of the ancient population there was not a
+trace left. Tom and his friends penetrated some
+of the houses, but not so much as a bone or a
+heap of mouldering dust showed where the
+remains of the people were. Either they had fled
+at the approaching doom of the city and were
+buried elsewhere, or some strange fire or other
+force of nature had consumed and obliterated
+them.</p>
+
+<p>"What a wealth of historic information I shall
+find here!" murmured Professor Bumper, as he
+caught sight of many inscriptions in strange
+characters on the walls and buildings.
+"I shall never get to the end of them."</p>
+
+<p>"But what about the idol of gold?" asked Mr.
+Damon, "Do you think you'll find that?"</p>
+
+<p>"We must hurry on to the temple over there,"
+said the scientist, indicating a building further along.</p>
+
+<p>"And then we must see about rescuing your
+rivals, Professor," put in Tom.</p>
+
+<p>"Yes, Tom. But fortunately we are on the
+ground here before them," agreed the professor.</p>
+
+<p>Undoubtedly it was the chief temple, or place
+of worship, of the long-dead race which the
+explorers now entered. It was a building beautiful
+in its barbaric style, and yet simple. There were
+massive walls, and a great inner court, at the end
+of which seemed to be some sort of altar. And
+then, as they lighted fresh torches, and pressed
+forward with them and their electric lights, they
+saw that which caused a cry of satisfaction to
+burst from all of them.</p>
+
+<p>"The idol of gold!"</p>
+
+<p>Yes, there it squatted, an ugly, misshapen,
+figure, a cross between a toad and a gila monster,
+half man, half beast, with big red eyes—rubies
+probably—that gleamed in the repulsive golden
+face. And the whole figure, weighing many
+pounds, seemed to be of SOLID GOLD!</p>
+
+<p>Eagerly the others followed Professor Bumper
+up the altar steps to the very throne of the golden
+idol. The scientist touched it, tried to raise it
+and make sure of its solidity and material.</p>
+
+<p>"This is it!" he cried. "It is the idol of gold!
+I have found We have found it, for it
+belongs to all of us!"</p>
+
+<p>"Hurray!" cried Tom Swift, and Ned and Mr.
+Damon joined in the cry.</p>
+
+<p>There was no need for silence or caution now;
+and yet, as they stood about the squat and ugly
+figure, which, in spite of its hideousness, was
+worth a fortune intrinsically and as an antique,
+they heard from the direction of the stone passage
+a noise.</p>
+
+<p>"What is it?" asked Tom Swift.</p>
+
+<p>There was a murmur of voices.</p>
+
+<p>"Indians!" cried Professor Bumper, recognizing
+the language—a mixture of Spanish and Indian.</p>
+
+<p>The cave was illuminated by the glare of other
+torches which seemed to rush forward. A moment
+later it was seen that they were being carried
+by a number of Indians.</p>
+
+<p>"Friends," murmured Goosal, using the
+Spanish term, "Amigos."</p>
+
+<p>"They are our own Indians!" cried Tom Swift.
+"I see Tolpec!" and he pointed to the native who
+had deserted from Jacinto's force to help them.</p>
+
+<p>"How did they get here?" asked Professor Bumper.</p>
+
+<p>This was quickly told. In their camp, where,
+under the leadership of Tolpec they had been
+left to do the excavating, the natives had heard,
+seen and felt the effects of the storm and the
+earthquake, though it did little damage in their
+vicinity. But they became alarmed for the safety
+of the professor and his party and, at Tolpec's
+suggestion, set off in search of them.</p>
+
+<p>The Indians had seen, passing along the trail,
+the uprooted trees, and had noted the footsteps
+of the explorers going down to the stone passage.
+It was easy for them to determine that Tom
+and his friends had gone in, since the marks of
+their boots were plainly in evidence in the soft
+soil.</p>
+
+<p>None of the Indians was as much wrought up
+over the discovery of Kurzon and the idol as
+were the white adventurers. The gold, of course,
+meant something to the natives, but they were
+indifferent to the wonders of the underground
+city. Perhaps they had heard too many legends
+concerning such things to be impressed.</p>
+
+<p>"That statue is yours—all yours," said old
+Goosal when he had talked with his relatives and
+friends among the natives. "They all say what
+you find you keep, and we will help you keep it."</p>
+
+<p>"That's good," murmured Professor Bumper.
+"There was some doubt in my mind as to our
+right to this, but after all, the natives who live
+in this land are the original owners, and if they
+pass title to us it is clear. That settles the last
+difficulty."</p>
+
+<p>"Except that of getting the idol out," said Mr. Damon.</p>
+
+<p>"Oh, we'll accomplish that!" cried Tom.</p>
+
+<p>"I can hardly believe my good luck," declared
+Professor Bumper. "I shall write a whole book
+on this idol alone and then——"</p>
+
+<p>Once more came an interruption. This time
+it was from another direction, but it was of the
+same character—an approaching band of torch-bearers.
+They were Indians, too, but leading
+them were a number of whites.</p>
+
+<p>And at their head was no less personage than
+Professor Beecher himself.</p>
+
+<p>For a moment, as the three parties stood
+together in the ancient temple, in the glare of
+many torches, no one spoke. Then Professor
+Bumper found his voice.</p>
+
+<p>"We are glad to see you," he said to his rival.
+"That is glad to see you alive, for we saw the
+landslide bury you. And we were coming to
+dig you out. We thought this cave—the cave of
+the buried city—would lead us to you easier than
+by digging through the slide. We have just
+discovered this idol," and he put his hand on the
+grim golden image.</p>
+
+<p>"Oh, you have discovered it, have you?" asked
+Professor Beecher, and his voice was bitter.</p>
+
+<p>"Yes, not ten minutes ago. The natives have
+kindly acknowledged my right to it under the law
+of priority. I am sorry but——"</p>
+
+<p>With a look of disgust and chagrined
+disappointment on his face, Professor Beecher turned
+to the other scientists and said:</p>
+
+<p>"Let us go. We are too late. He has what
+I came after."</p>
+
+<p>"Well, it is the fortune of war—and discovery,"
+put in Mr. Hardy, one of the party who seemed
+the least ill-natured. "Your luck might have
+been ours, Professor Bumper. I congratulate
+you."</p>
+
+<p>"Thank you! Are you sure your party is all
+right—not in need of assistance? How did you
+get out of the place you were buried?"</p>
+
+<p>"Thank you! We do not require any help. It
+was good of you to think of us. But we got
+out the way we came in. We did not enter the
+tunnel as you did, but came in through another
+entrance which was not closed by the landslide.
+Then we made a turn through a gateway in a
+tunnel connecting with ours—a gateway which
+seems to have been opened by the earthquake—
+and we came here, just now.</p>
+
+<p>"Too late, I see, to claim the discovery of the
+idol of gold," went on Mr. Hardy. "But I trust
+you will be generous, and allow us to make
+observations of the buildings and other relics."</p>
+
+<p>"As much as you please, and with the greatest
+pleasure in the world," was the prompt answer
+of Professor Bumper. "All I lay sole
+claim to is the golden idol. You are at liberty
+to take whatever else you find in Kurzon and to
+make what observations you like."</p>
+
+<p>"That is generous of you, and quite in contrast
+to—er—to the conduct of our leader. I trust
+he may awaken to a sense of the injustice he
+did you."</p>
+
+<p>But Professor Beecher was not there to hear
+this. He had stalked away in anger.</p>
+
+<p>"Humph!" grunted Tom. Then he continued:
+"That story about a government concession was all
+a fake, Professor, else he'd have put up a fight now.
+Contemptible sneak!"</p>
+
+<hr class="tiny" />
+
+<p>In fact the story of Tom Swift's trip to the
+underground land of wonders is ended, for with
+the discovery of the idol of gold the main object
+of the expedition was accomplished. But their
+adventures were not over by any means, though
+there is not room in this volume to record them.</p>
+
+<p>Suffice it to say that means were at once taken
+to get the golden image out of the cave of the
+ancient city. It was not accomplished without
+hard work, for the gold was heavy, and Professor
+Bumper would not, naturally, consent to
+the shaving off of so much as an ear or part of
+the flat nose, to say nothing of one of the half
+dozen extra arms and legs with which the ugly
+idol was furnished.</p>
+
+<p>Finally it was safely taken out of the cave,
+and along the stone passage to the opening
+formed by the overthrown trees, and thence on
+to camp.</p>
+
+<p>And at the camp a surprise awaited Tom.</p>
+
+<p>Some long-delayed mail had been forwarded
+from the nearest place of civilization and there
+were letters for all, including several for our hero.
+One in particular he picked out first and read
+eagerly.</p>
+
+<p>"Well, is every little thing all right, Tom?"
+asked Ned, as he saw a cheerful grin spread itself
+over his chum's face.</p>
+
+<p>"I should say it is, and then some! Look
+here, Ned. This is a letter from——"</p>
+
+<p>"I know. Mary Nestor. Go on."</p>
+
+<p>"How'd you guess?"</p>
+
+<p>"Oh, I'm a mind-reader."</p>
+
+<p>"Huh! Well, you know she was away when
+I went to call to say good-bye, and I was a little
+afraid Beecher had got an inside edge on me."</p>
+
+<p>"Had he?"</p>
+
+<p>"No, but he tried hard enough. He went to
+see Mary in Fayetteville, just as you heard, before
+he came on to join his party, but he didn't
+pay much of a visit to her."</p>
+
+<p>"No?"</p>
+
+<p>"No. Mary told him he'd better hurry along
+to Central America, or wherever it was he
+intended going, as she didn't care for him as much
+as he flattered himself she did."</p>
+
+<p>"Good!" cried Ned. "Shake, old man. I'm glad!"</p>
+
+<p>They shook hands.</p>
+
+<p>"Well, what's the matter? Didn't you read
+all of her letter?" asked Ned when he saw his
+chum once more perusing the epistle.</p>
+
+<p>"No. There's a postscript here.</p>
+
+
+<blockquote><p>"`Sorry I couldn't see you before you left. It
+was a mistake, but when you come back—'</p></blockquote>
+
+
+<p>"Oh, that part isn't any of your affair!" and,
+blushing under his tan, Tom thrust the letter
+into his pocket and strode away, while Ned
+laughed happily.</p>
+
+<p>With the idol of gold safe in their possession,
+Professor Bumper's party could devote their
+time to making other explorations in the buried
+city. This they did, as is testified to by a long
+list of books and magazine articles since turned
+out by the scientist, dealing strictly with archaeological
+subjects, touching on the ancient Mayan
+race and its civilization, with particular reference
+to their system of computing time.</p>
+
+<p>Professor Beecher, young and foolish, would
+not consent to delve into the riches of the ancient
+city, being too much chagrined over the loss of
+the idol. It seems he had really promised to
+give a part of it to Mary Nestor. But he never
+got the chance.</p>
+
+<p>His colleagues, after their first disappointment
+at being beaten, joined forces with Professor
+Bumper in exploring the old city, and made many
+valuable discoveries.</p>
+
+<p>In one point Professor Bumper had done his
+rival an injustice. That was in thinking
+Professor Beecher was responsible for the treachery
+of Jacinto. That was due to the plotter's own
+work. It was true that Professor Beecher had
+tentatively engaged Jacinto, and had sent word
+to him to keep other explorers away from the
+vicinity of the ancient city if possible; but
+Jacinto, who did not return Professor Bumper's
+money, as he had promised, had acted treacherously
+in order to enrich himself. Professor
+Beecher had nothing to do with that, nor had he
+with the taking of the map, as has been seen, the
+loss of which, after all, was a blessing in disguise,
+for Kurzon would never have been located
+by following the directions given there, as it was
+very inaccurate.</p>
+
+<p>In another point it was demonstrated that the
+old documents were at fault. This was in reference
+to the golden idol having been overthrown
+and another set up in its place, an act which had
+caused the destruction of Kurzon.</p>
+
+<p>It is true that the city was destroyed, or rather,
+buried, but this catastrophe was probably
+brought about by an earthquake. And another
+great idol, one of clay, was found, perhaps a
+rival of Quitzel, but it was this clay image which
+was thrown down and broken, and not the golden
+one.</p>
+
+<p>Perhaps an effort had been made, just before
+the burying of the city, to change idols and the
+system of worship, but Quitzel seemed to have
+held his own. The old manuscripts were not
+very reliable, it was found, except in general.</p>
+
+<p>"Well, I guess this will hold Beecher for a
+while," said Tom, the night of the arrival of
+Mary's letter, and after he had written one in
+answer, which was dispatched by a runner to
+the nearest place whence mail could be
+forwarded.</p>
+
+<p>"Yes, luck seems to favor you," replied Ned.
+"You've had a hand in the discovery of the idol
+of gold, and——"</p>
+
+<p>"Yes. And I discovered something else I
+wasn't quite sure of," interrupted Tom, as he
+felt to make sure he had a certain letter safe in
+his pocket.</p>
+
+<p>It was several weeks later that the explorations
+of Kurzon came to an end—a temporary end, for
+the rainy season set in, when the tropics are
+unsuitable for white men. Tom, Professor Bumper,
+Ned and Mr. Damon set sail for the United
+States, the valuable idol of gold safe on board.</p>
+
+<p>And there, with their vessel plowing the blue
+waters of the Caribbean Sea, we will take leave
+of Tom Swift and his friends.</p>
+
+<hr />
+</div>
+
+
+
+<pre>
+End of the Project Gutenberg EBook of Tom Swift in the Land of Wonders
+by Victor Appleton
+
+************************************************************************
+
+This file should be named 20tom11.txt or 20tom11.zip
+Corrected EDITIONS of our eBooks get a new NUMBER, 20tom12.txt
+VERSIONS based on separate sources get new LETTER, 20tom11a.txt
+
+Project Gutenberg eBooks are often created from several printed
+editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the US
+unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we usually do not
+keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition.
+
+We are now trying to release all our eBooks one year in advance
+of the official release dates, leaving time for better editing.
+Please be encouraged to tell us about any error or corrections,
+even years after the official publication date.
+
+Please note neither this listing nor its contents are final til
+midnight of the last day of the month of any such announcement.
+The official release date of all Project Gutenberg eBooks is at
+Midnight, Central Time, of the last day of the stated month. A
+preliminary version may often be posted for suggestion, comment
+and editing by those who wish to do so.
+
+Most people start at our Web sites at:
+http://gutenberg.net or
+http://promo.net/pg
+
+These Web sites include award-winning information about Project
+Gutenberg, including how to donate, how to help produce our new
+eBooks, and how to subscribe to our email newsletter (free!).
+
+
+Those of you who want to download any eBook before announcement
+can get to them as follows, and just download by date. This is
+also a good way to get them instantly upon announcement, as the
+indexes our cataloguers produce obviously take a while after an
+announcement goes out in the Project Gutenberg Newsletter.
+
+http://www.ibiblio.org/gutenberg/etext03 or
+ftp://ftp.ibiblio.org/pub/docs/books/gutenberg/etext03
+
+Or /etext02, 01, 00, 99, 98, 97, 96, 95, 94, 93, 92, 92, 91 or 90
+
+Just search by the first five letters of the filename you want,
+as it appears in our Newsletters.
+
+
+Information about Project Gutenberg (one page)
+
+We produce about two million dollars for each hour we work. The
+time it takes us, a rather conservative estimate, is fifty hours
+to get any eBook selected, entered, proofread, edited, copyright
+searched and analyzed, the copyright letters written, etc. Our
+projected audience is one hundred million readers. If the value
+per text is nominally estimated at one dollar then we produce $2
+million dollars per hour in 2002 as we release over 100 new text
+files per month: 1240 more eBooks in 2001 for a total of 4000+
+We are already on our way to trying for 2000 more eBooks in 2002
+If they reach just 1-2% of the world's population then the total
+will reach over half a trillion eBooks given away by year's end.
+
+The Goal of Project Gutenberg is to Give Away 1 Trillion eBooks!
+This is ten thousand titles each to one hundred million readers,
+which is only about 4% of the present number of computer users.
+
+Here is the briefest record of our progress (* means estimated):
+
+eBooks Year Month
+
+ 1 1971 July
+ 10 1991 January
+ 100 1994 January
+ 1000 1997 August
+ 1500 1998 October
+ 2000 1999 December
+ 2500 2000 December
+ 3000 2001 November
+ 4000 2001 October/November
+ 6000 2002 December*
+ 9000 2003 November*
+10000 2004 January*
+
+
+The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation has been created
+to secure a future for Project Gutenberg into the next millennium.
+
+We need your donations more than ever!
+
+As of February, 2002, contributions are being solicited from people
+and organizations in: Alabama, Alaska, Arkansas, Connecticut,
+Delaware, District of Columbia, Florida, Georgia, Hawaii, Illinois,
+Indiana, Iowa, Kansas, Kentucky, Louisiana, Maine, Massachusetts,
+Michigan, Mississippi, Missouri, Montana, Nebraska, Nevada, New
+Hampshire, New Jersey, New Mexico, New York, North Carolina, Ohio,
+Oklahoma, Oregon, Pennsylvania, Rhode Island, South Carolina, South
+Dakota, Tennessee, Texas, Utah, Vermont, Virginia, Washington, West
+Virginia, Wisconsin, and Wyoming.
+
+We have filed in all 50 states now, but these are the only ones
+that have responded.
+
+As the requirements for other states are met, additions to this list
+will be made and fund raising will begin in the additional states.
+Please feel free to ask to check the status of your state.
+
+In answer to various questions we have received on this:
+
+We are constantly working on finishing the paperwork to legally
+request donations in all 50 states. If your state is not listed and
+you would like to know if we have added it since the list you have,
+just ask.
+
+While we cannot solicit donations from people in states where we are
+not yet registered, we know of no prohibition against accepting
+donations from donors in these states who approach us with an offer to
+donate.
+
+International donations are accepted, but we don't know ANYTHING about
+how to make them tax-deductible, or even if they CAN be made
+deductible, and don't have the staff to handle it even if there are
+ways.
+
+Donations by check or money order may be sent to:
+
+Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation
+PMB 113
+1739 University Ave.
+Oxford, MS 38655-4109
+
+Contact us if you want to arrange for a wire transfer or payment
+method other than by check or money order.
+
+The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation has been approved by
+the US Internal Revenue Service as a 501(c)(3) organization with EIN
+[Employee Identification Number] 64-622154. Donations are
+tax-deductible to the maximum extent permitted by law. As fund-raising
+requirements for other states are met, additions to this list will be
+made and fund-raising will begin in the additional states.
+
+We need your donations more than ever!
+
+You can get up to date donation information online at:
+
+http://www.gutenberg.net/donation.html
+
+
+***
+
+If you can't reach Project Gutenberg,
+you can always email directly to:
+
+Michael S. Hart hart@pobox.com
+
+Prof. Hart will answer or forward your message.
+
+We would prefer to send you information by email.
+
+
+**The Legal Small Print**
+
+
+(Three Pages)
+
+***START**THE SMALL PRINT!**FOR PUBLIC DOMAIN EBOOKS**START***
+Why is this "Small Print!" statement here? You know: lawyers.
+They tell us you might sue us if there is something wrong with
+your copy of this eBook, even if you got it for free from
+someone other than us, and even if what's wrong is not our
+fault. So, among other things, this "Small Print!" statement
+disclaims most of our liability to you. It also tells you how
+you may distribute copies of this eBook if you want to.
+
+*BEFORE!* YOU USE OR READ THIS EBOOK
+By using or reading any part of this PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm
+eBook, you indicate that you understand, agree to and accept
+this "Small Print!" statement. If you do not, you can receive
+a refund of the money (if any) you paid for this eBook by
+sending a request within 30 days of receiving it to the person
+you got it from. If you received this eBook on a physical
+medium (such as a disk), you must return it with your request.
+
+ABOUT PROJECT GUTENBERG-TM EBOOKS
+This PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm eBook, like most PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm eBooks,
+is a "public domain" work distributed by Professor Michael S. Hart
+through the Project Gutenberg Association (the "Project").
+Among other things, this means that no one owns a United States copyright
+on or for this work, so the Project (and you!) can copy and
+distribute it in the United States without permission and
+without paying copyright royalties. Special rules, set forth
+below, apply if you wish to copy and distribute this eBook
+under the "PROJECT GUTENBERG" trademark.
+
+Please do not use the "PROJECT GUTENBERG" trademark to market
+any commercial products without permission.
+
+To create these eBooks, the Project expends considerable
+efforts to identify, transcribe and proofread public domain
+works. Despite these efforts, the Project's eBooks and any
+medium they may be on may contain "Defects". Among other
+things, Defects may take the form of incomplete, inaccurate or
+corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other
+intellectual property infringement, a defective or damaged
+disk or other eBook medium, a computer virus, or computer
+codes that damage or cannot be read by your equipment.
+
+LIMITED WARRANTY; DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES
+But for the "Right of Replacement or Refund" described below,
+[1] Michael Hart and the Foundation (and any other party you may
+receive this eBook from as a PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm eBook) disclaims
+all liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including
+legal fees, and [2] YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE OR
+UNDER STRICT LIABILITY, OR FOR BREACH OF WARRANTY OR CONTRACT,
+INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE
+OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES, EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE
+POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
+
+If you discover a Defect in this eBook within 90 days of
+receiving it, you can receive a refund of the money (if any)
+you paid for it by sending an explanatory note within that
+time to the person you received it from. If you received it
+on a physical medium, you must return it with your note, and
+such person may choose to alternatively give you a replacement
+copy. If you received it electronically, such person may
+choose to alternatively give you a second opportunity to
+receive it electronically.
+
+THIS EBOOK IS OTHERWISE PROVIDED TO YOU "AS-IS". NO OTHER
+WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, ARE MADE TO YOU AS
+TO THE EBOOK OR ANY MEDIUM IT MAY BE ON, INCLUDING BUT NOT
+LIMITED TO WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A
+PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
+
+Some states do not allow disclaimers of implied warranties or
+the exclusion or limitation of consequential damages, so the
+above disclaimers and exclusions may not apply to you, and you
+may have other legal rights.
+
+INDEMNITY
+You will indemnify and hold Michael Hart, the Foundation,
+and its trustees and agents, and any volunteers associated
+with the production and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm
+texts harmless, from all liability, cost and expense, including
+legal fees, that arise directly or indirectly from any of the
+following that you do or cause: [1] distribution of this eBook,
+[2] alteration, modification, or addition to the eBook,
+or [3] any Defect.
+
+DISTRIBUTION UNDER "PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm"
+You may distribute copies of this eBook electronically, or by
+disk, book or any other medium if you either delete this
+"Small Print!" and all other references to Project Gutenberg,
+or:
+
+[1] Only give exact copies of it. Among other things, this
+ requires that you do not remove, alter or modify the
+ eBook or this "small print!" statement. You may however,
+ if you wish, distribute this eBook in machine readable
+ binary, compressed, mark-up, or proprietary form,
+ including any form resulting from conversion by word
+ processing or hypertext software, but only so long as
+ *EITHER*:
+
+ [*] The eBook, when displayed, is clearly readable, and
+ does *not* contain characters other than those
+ intended by the author of the work, although tilde
+ (~), asterisk (*) and underline (_) characters may
+ be used to convey punctuation intended by the
+ author, and additional characters may be used to
+ indicate hypertext links; OR
+
+ [*] The eBook may be readily converted by the reader at
+ no expense into plain ASCII, EBCDIC or equivalent
+ form by the program that displays the eBook (as is
+ the case, for instance, with most word processors);
+ OR
+
+ [*] You provide, or agree to also provide on request at
+ no additional cost, fee or expense, a copy of the
+ eBook in its original plain ASCII form (or in EBCDIC
+ or other equivalent proprietary form).
+
+[2] Honor the eBook refund and replacement provisions of this
+ "Small Print!" statement.
+
+[3] Pay a trademark license fee to the Foundation of 20% of the
+ gross profits you derive calculated using the method you
+ already use to calculate your applicable taxes. If you
+ don't derive profits, no royalty is due. Royalties are
+ payable to "Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation"
+ the 60 days following each date you prepare (or were
+ legally required to prepare) your annual (or equivalent
+ periodic) tax return. Please contact us beforehand to
+ let us know your plans and to work out the details.
+
+WHAT IF YOU *WANT* TO SEND MONEY EVEN IF YOU DON'T HAVE TO?
+Project Gutenberg is dedicated to increasing the number of
+public domain and licensed works that can be freely distributed
+in machine readable form.
+
+The Project gratefully accepts contributions of money, time,
+public domain materials, or royalty free copyright licenses.
+Money should be paid to the:
+"Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation."
+
+If you are interested in contributing scanning equipment or
+software or other items, please contact Michael Hart at:
+hart@pobox.com
+
+[Portions of this eBook's header and trailer may be reprinted only
+when distributed free of all fees. Copyright (C) 2001, 2002 by
+Michael S. Hart. Project Gutenberg is a TradeMark and may not be
+used in any sales of Project Gutenberg eBooks or other materials be
+they hardware or software or any other related product without
+express permission.]
+
+*END THE SMALL PRINT! FOR PUBLIC DOMAIN EBOOKS*Ver.02/11/02*END*
+</pre>
+
+</body>
+</html>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/old/20tom11h.zip b/old/20tom11h.zip Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..54a97dd --- /dev/null +++ b/old/20tom11h.zip |